JP2020062427A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance fun of a game.SOLUTION: Movable mode variation means varies a movable mode of a movable member movable when a performance elapsed period of a specific performance executed while signal determination means determines a predetermined signal is within a specific elapsed period. Meanwhile, prohibition means prohibits movement by movable means based on determination of the predetermined signal by signal determination means when the specific elapsed period is exceeded. As a result, when the performance elapsed period of the specific performance is within the specific elapsed period, the movable mode of the movable member is varied based on operation of operation means. Meanwhile, the movement of the movable member based on the operation of the operation means is prohibited when the specific elapsed period is exceeded, thus allowing execution of a performance in which an effective movable member is moved only within the specific elapsed period. Thus, a sharp performance can be provided. Hence, fun of a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a player operates an operation unit (effect button or the like) to move an ornament from a standby position to a predetermined operation position ( Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-097827, A

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the production means capable of executing the production, the specific production execution means for causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined period, and the player operates it. An operating means capable of operating, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means, a signal determining means for determining a signal output by the signal outputting means, and a predetermined A plurality of movable members that are movable in a movable range, and based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means when the specific effect is being executed, A movable means for moving at least one of the movable members, and an effect production period of the specific effect executed when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means within a specific passage period. Movable mode changing means for moving the movable mode of the movable member when the movable member moves, and the movable means for moving the movable member based on the signal determination means determining the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded. And a prohibition means for prohibiting.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable mode changing means is the above-mentioned when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means within the specific elapsed period. The plurality of movable members are moved to respective predetermined positions by the movable means.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is based on the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, in which the movable means does not discriminate a predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means even after a predetermined period of time within a specific elapsed period. Then, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, in which a determination means for performing determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition and a determination result determined by the determination means And a privilege giving unit for giving a beneficial privilege to the player based on the fact that the specified effect is given, the notification effect based on the determination result by the determination unit is executed.

  A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, wherein the specific effect is that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the production means capable of executing the production, the specific production execution means for causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined period, and the player can operate the production machine. Operation means, signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and movable within a predetermined movable range And a plurality of movable members capable of performing the specific effect, based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means when the specific effect is being performed, at least one of the plurality of movable members is selected. A movable means for moving the movable member, and a movable means for moving when the effect passage period of the specific effect executed when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means is within a specific elapsed period. Movable mode changing means for changing the movable mode of the movable member, and prohibiting means for prohibiting the movable means from moving based on the signal judging means judging the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded. And ,. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the movable mode varying means determines the predetermined signal by the signal determining means within the specific elapsed period. In this case, the plurality of movable members are moved to the respective predetermined positions by the movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the movable means has a predetermined signal by the signal determination means even after a predetermined period within a specific elapsed period has elapsed. Based on the fact that is not determined, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the determination means that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the benefit granting means that grants the advantageous benefit to the player based on the determination result determined by the determination means. The specific effect is that the notification effect is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 4, in the specific effect, the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed. It is a thing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rocking motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the swing motion unit. (A) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swing motion unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG.26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a reversing operation unit. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, FIG. 32B is a partial sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit along the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc, and FIG. 32D is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit along the line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of a second slide operation unit. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A)-(c) is a partial front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a first variable winning device. (A) is a sectional view of a first variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of 1st variable winning a prize device. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol in the first control example, and (b) is a main controller in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM of FIG. 4C, and FIG. 6C is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the long press production lottery table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the notification mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the ending processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the long press production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the display control. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the second control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the second control example. It is a block diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a capture effect lottery table. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode of the capture effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flow chart which showed SW production processing performed by MPU in a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flow chart which showed SW production display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows time saving medium fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode of the temporary stop production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a flow chart which shows display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. It is a partially enlarged view of a game board 13 in a fifth control example. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of V winning a prize device in the example of the 5th control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 5th example of control. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device in a fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a fifth control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in a 5th control example, (b) is the big hit determination in the 1st random number counter C1 and a 1st special symbol in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a value typically, (c) showed the correspondence with the big hit determination value in the 1st random number counter C1 and the 2nd special symbol in a 5th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in the 5th control example, and the hit in a normal design. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a first hit type counter C2 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with the jackpot classification in (c), and the correspondence between the jackpot classification in the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the 2nd special symbol in a 5th control example is shown typically. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a small hit type counter C5 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship with a hit classification typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship between the small hit classification counter C5 and the small hit classification in a 2nd special symbol. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of disengagement (normal) in a 5th control example, (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type in the time saving in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of ROM in the audio lamp controller in a 5th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM in the audio lamp controller in a 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram which showed the game flow in the example of a 5th control typically. (A) is a time chart showing from the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening to the occurrence of a big hit based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch in the fifth control example, and (b) is the fifth control It is the time chart which showed from the winning of the game ball to the 2nd winning a prize mouth in the example to the occurrence of the big hit due to the special design. (A) is a display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 unchanged state among special figure 2 game states, (b) Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 changing state in the special figure 2 game state. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the small hitting game state of the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is the 5 is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example 5, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a jackpot due to the passage of a game ball to the V winning switch has occurred in the special figure 2 game state. Is. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the state at the time of jackpot start in the special figure 2 game state, Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that, in the special figure 2 game state, a time saving game is given after a big hit, c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic showing that, in the special figure 2 game state, it is in a state of transitioning to the special figure 1 game state after a big hit. It is a figure. 125A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a jackpot D is generated on the display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125B, and FIG. 125B is the timing of FIG. 125B. It is a display screen displayed, and is a schematic diagram showing a state departure with a jackpot C in the hold. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit start setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control in the example of the 5th control. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows a round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process according to the present invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows the 3V production | generation command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows 2V production command processing. It is a flow chart which shows V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control in the example of the 5th control. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the modification in the example of 5th control. It is a perspective expansion view of the detour member in the sixth control example. It is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning a prize device in the sixth control example. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the flow path opening device in the 6th control example. (A) to (c) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing the execution system of the continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of a display mode of a continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of a display mode of a continuous chance effect. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control unit in a seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control unit in a seventh control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the correspondence of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of a big hit in the 7th control example, and (b) is a deviation (normal) in the 7th control example. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type in FIG. 5, and FIG. 7C is a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the seventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous chance frequency table at the time of a hit in the 7th control example, (b) shows the content of the continuous chance frequency table at the time of a miss in the 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the number-of-latency lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 7th control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the posterior sign setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the seventh control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the example of an 8th control. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of ROM in the main controller in an 8th control example, (b) is a model which shows the content of the 1st hit classification table in an 8th control example typically It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control apparatus in the example of 8th control. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability variation switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) are the gaming state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability variation switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows external output processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 8th control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 9th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability variation switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 9th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A in the 10th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which showed the accessory B in the 10th control example typically. (C) is a schematic diagram which showed the accessory C in the 10th control example typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the arrangement of the accessory in the 10th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory operation | movement in the 10th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the standby position of the accessory A in a 10th control example. (B) is a figure showing operation of a normal drive pattern of accessory A in the 10th control example. (C) is a figure showing operation of the shortening drive pattern of accessory A in the 10th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated hit production in a 10th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous hit production selection table in the 10th control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the operation scenario table in the 10th control example typically. Is. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory A scenario table in a 10th control example, (b) shows the content of the accessory B scenario table in a 10th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram which was, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory C scenario table in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the button timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an accessory B operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a flow chart in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process performed by MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing operation of delay processing in the 11th example of control. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button continuous hit production in the 11th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the delay timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A action setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 11th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the repetitive operation | movement in the 12th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated hit production in a 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 12th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the accessory B operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp controller in the twelfth control example, and (b) is in the voice lamp controller in the twelfth control example. 5 is a flowchart showing an accessory C operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU of FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed operation | movement of the accessory in the 13th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button continuous hit production in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 13th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the weak motion of the accessory in the 14th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the strong motion of the accessory in the 14th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button continuous hit production in a 14th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the drive motor in detail in the 14th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 2nd operation scenario table in the 14th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the accessory A 2nd scenario table in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interval timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation | movement setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed operation | movement of the universal solenoid in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the operation content of the universal solenoid in the 15th example of control. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 15th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the universal electric power operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the universal electric switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric power timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 15th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the modification of the 15th control example. (B) is a timing chart showing an output signal in a modified example of the fifteenth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the operation | movement of the universal electric power (electric accessory) 640a in the modification of the 15th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of operation | movement of a driven accessory.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape with an upper surface protruding and protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, a display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is shown, and others are shown). Other (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start The mouth (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged from the front side to the rear surface side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole formed and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and the game area is launched). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display device is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are those that display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also determines the type of big hit. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. .

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is not in progress and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display, and a second symbol is variably displayed with the passage of a ball of a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) configured by the LED is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device has a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. A variable display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric winning object 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

  Ordinary symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board at the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. Normally, when the ball passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second symbol hit lottery is performed. After the winning lottery, variably displayed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol for variable display.

  The number of passages through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 of the sphere is reserved up to 4 times in total, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. It is also lit up (not shown). Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate). It is more advantageous for the player to aim at the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning port 640 as well as passing the electric gear 67 through to open the electric accessory.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the way the ball is hit can be changed for the player, and the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to be displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more plural pieces (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. It is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the game area that have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as the movable member 310) is disposed above the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive devices 340, 464, 560 and drive motors 441, 771, 772, 773, 774.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 42. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is mounted on the rear case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 6) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the operation unit 200, an oscillating operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reversing operation unit 500, a decoration operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are housed in the inner space of the rear case 210. Composed as a unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is in contact with the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 212. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 in a manner surrounded by (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the second slide operation unit 700, a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 in a front view.

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing motion unit 300, the first slide motion unit 400, the reversal motion unit 500, and the decoration unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide motion unit 700. It is disposed and housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, the predetermined operation unit It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary portion of the above, and to shield the other portion from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. Note that, in FIG. 8, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 are arranged at the projecting position, and in FIG. 9, the tilting member 460 and the hanging member 430 (FIG. 22) of the first slide motion unit 400. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are disposed in the projecting position, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing motion unit 300 swings to an arm member 320 whose base end side is swingably supported and a swing end side which is the opposite side of the arm member 320 from the base end side. A standing member 330 that is pivotally supported is provided, and the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the standing member 330 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 swings between a suspension member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slidably moved downward and a bending arm 433 (see FIG. 22) of the suspension member 430. A tilting member 460 movably supported is provided, and the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 9, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the end of the sliding direction (left side), and the tilting member 460 is at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of slide members 720 and 740 that are slidably movable, and the slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It operates between the position and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the outside of the opening 211 a of the rear case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged above and below the opening 211 a of the rear case 210. It is evacuated to the outside and invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 10, each slide member 720, 740 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view when the slide members 720 and 740 are projected.

  As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and the reflecting member 520 is formed so as to be able to reverse (turn over) the surface visually recognized by the player. It The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member protruding to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third pattern display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400 and 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated to the left of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  Each of these operating units 300 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently of each other, and as described above, they are arranged in a superposed (stacked) state. In the case where the layers are arranged in different layers, the operation members can be operated at the same time even if the operation members project inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only each of the operation units 300 to 700 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The operation units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the operation units 300 to 600 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In addition, in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the projecting position, and the respective slide members 720, 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the projecting position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display A gap for the second slide operation unit 700 is formed between the device 81 and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged in the projecting position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible in a front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap in an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front to the left and right).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the projecting position, so that the player The slide members 720 and 740 can fill the gaps that are viewed from the diagonal direction. As a result, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the standing member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 is arranged at the projecting position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide motion unit 700 are arranged at the projecting position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the swing motion unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing motion unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is formed between and. Therefore, when only the standing member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 is arranged at the projecting position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible in a front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right directions).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the standing member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide motion unit 700 are both arranged at the projecting position, so that the player The slide members 720 and 740 can fill the gaps that are viewed obliquely. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded from being visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  The swing motion unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are front perspective views of the swing motion unit 300. Note that in FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 is swung about the swing shaft 312, and the posture of the standing member 330 relative to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the swing (extension. Stand up toward the exit position). Next, the overall configuration of the swing motion unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing motion unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swing motion unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 pivotally supported on the base end side of the base member 310, and an arm member 320 thereof. The standing member 330 that is internally supported by the swing end, which is the end opposite to the base end of the base member 310, and the drive device that is disposed on the back surface of the lower right part of the base member 310 in a front view (see FIG. 14). 340, a transmission device 350 that is meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and is connected to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 that applies an urging force to the arm member 320, and a lower right front view of the base member 310. And a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the main body.

  The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction and the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swing motion unit 300, and is fixed to the fitting hole 311 that is bored in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311. A column-shaped swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 protruding in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311, a drive gear insertion hole 314 formed adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole. A guide hole 315, which is a pair of elongated holes extending concentrically with 311 and is formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 in a front view (see FIG. 14), and is bent to the opposite side of the guide hole 315. A standing hole 316 that is a long hole that is extended is provided, and a hook portion 317 that protrudes in a hook shape on the front side on the right side of the fitting hole 311 in a front view.

  The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swing motion unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210, and includes a main body 321 formed in the shape of a long plate and its main body 321. A cylindrical tubular portion 322 which is penetrated and which is arranged on the proximal end side of the main body portion 321; and a sliding ring portion 323 which is opened on the swinging end side of the main body portion 321 in the same direction as the tubular portion 322, A plate-shaped front contact portion 324 that is arranged in a raised manner on the front side of the main body portion 321, a long-hole release hole 325 that extends along a straight line radially drawn from the tubular portion 322, and a main body. A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the rear surface side of the portion 321 and protruding toward the base member 310, and the cylindrical portion 322 protruding toward the front surface in the front view (see FIG. 14) left side. And a projecting portion 327.

  The tubular portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted and supported by the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung with the tubular portion 322 pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

  The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that internally supports the upright member 330. It has a large diameter and suppresses the wobbling of the standing member 330.

  The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, in the state where a gap is formed between the front abutting section 324 and the main body section 321, and the arm member 320 is disposed in the retracted position, the portion of the rising member 330 on the projecting end side is the front abutting section 324 and the main body section. It is housed in the gap between the two and 321 (see FIG. 16).

  The release hole 325 is a long hole that is connected to the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and acts to regulate the swing of the arm member 320 depending on the positional relationship between the transmission device 350, the tubular portion 322, and the release hole 325. The holes will be described later in detail.

  Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted into the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 may slide in the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 swings. Thus, the rattling of the arm member 320 is suppressed and the swing of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Since the ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling off the guide hole 315 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be made.

  The protruding portion 327 is a portion to which the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and a portion to which the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

  The standing member 330 is a member arranged on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the ascending direction, and includes a plate-shaped main body 331 and its main body. A protruding ring portion 332 protruding in a large-diameter ring shape from the back surface side of 331, a variable sliding portion 333 protruding toward the rear surface at the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protruding ring portion 332. And a retaining portion 334 that is formed into a disc shape and is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

  The main body portion 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

  The overhang ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, in the standing member 330, the outer side surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 abuts the inner side surface of the sliding ring portion 323 in a wide range (large area), and is pivotally supported. Therefore, even when the large standing member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, wobbling of the standing member 330 due to the swing of the arm member 320 can be suppressed.

  The changing sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the upright hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the upright member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung, but the details will be described later. Since the ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, the changing sliding portion 333 is prevented from falling off the upright hole 316 and the swinging movement of the arm member 320 is prevented. Can be stabilized.

  The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer shape that is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the standing member 330, and the rear surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Abut on the side. Therefore, the upright member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

  The drive device 340 is a motor that is disposed on the back side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320, and includes a drive gear 341 that is rotationally driven, and the drive gear 341 is a drive gear insertion hole of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the drive device 340 is first transmitted, and is pivotally supported on the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 at the base end side and meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340. It Further, the swing end, which is the end opposite to the base end, is provided with a restriction slide portion 351 that is provided so as to project toward the front side.

  The regulation sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the regulation sliding portion 351 slides into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swinging operation of the arm member 320. Further, especially when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmission device 350.

  The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring that serves as a power source when the arm member 320 swings, particularly when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position, and is attached to the hook portion 317 of the base member 310. A base end side arm portion 361 supported (pressed downward) and a moving end side arm portion 362 supported (pressed downward) by the protruding portion 327 of the arm member 320 are provided.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, the swing operation of the swing operation unit 300 will be described. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the swing motion unit 300 showing the swing motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series, 16 (b), 17 (b) and 18 (b) are rear views of the swing motion unit 300 showing the swing motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series. Note that the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position in FIG. 16 and the state in which the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at the point where the curvature of the standing hole 316 changes in FIG. In FIG. 18, a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the standing member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (horizontal direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the portion of the standing member 330 on the projecting end side is housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutting portion 324.

  That is, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player by utilizing the space required to shield the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used.

  Further, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at the lower end of the standing hole 316. Accordingly, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as stoppers when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the projecting position, the standing member 330 is changed in posture such that the major axis direction D1 is oriented in the vertical direction (standing posture).

  The dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 (wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) along the thickness direction is made larger near the upper end than near the lower end of the guide hole 315. It Then, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end thereof. In the present embodiment, the formed gap is formed so as to gradually change.

  The gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end thereof. Therefore, the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed, and the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured.

  In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is smaller than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a slightly shorter size (the length of the sliding portion 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed to be substantially equal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 arranged near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

  In the present embodiment, the standing member 330 is arranged above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 leans forward due to the weight of the standing member 330 (falls toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum of the forward lean. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be brought into contact with and supported by the surface of the base member 310, and the resistance force of the arm member 320 against tilting forward can be improved.

  Here, the standing hole 316 includes a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circle portion 316b formed near the upper end.

  The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) which is the swing shaft of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the posture changing portion 316a, the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the magnitude of the swing angle of the arm member 320 becomes maximum. This is because the posture changing unit 316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the sliding ring unit 323.

  Accordingly, the posture change of the standing member 330 can be completed within a short period of time from the start, and the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the player visually recognizes the standing member 330. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of visually confirming the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as one body at the extended position while suppressing the vertical shielding space of the standing member 330 at the retracted position.

  Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance of the upright member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the standing member 330 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the tubular portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work performed by the rotational force centering on the tubular portion 322 on the changing sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, the resistance given to the arm member 320 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured.

  The concentric circle portion 316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in a direction along a circle around the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle portion 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. As a result, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one body, and an effect of performing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as one body can be easily realized.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the upper end of the guide hole 315 and the changing sliding portion of the standing member 330 is arranged. 333 is arranged at the upper end of the standing hole 316. Thereby, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as stoppers. In particular, since the arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 360, as will be described later, the necessity of a stopper at the end is greater than when driving by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portions 326 are formed in a pair, the force generated when the sliding portions 326 function as a stopper can be dispersed. Thereby, the durability of the sliding portion 326 can be improved.

  The changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 can function as a stopper, but since the upright member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem occurs. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are formed integrally with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position, the projecting end side (upper side in FIG. 18) of the upright member 330 projects above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Formed. Therefore, even if the swinging angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, it is possible to ensure the action of projecting the standing member 330 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and swinging the arm member 320. The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

  In addition, since the moving distance of the rising member 330 on the projecting end side can be kept large while keeping the swing angle of the arm member 320 small, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the standing member 330 can be improved. it can. This effect becomes remarkable in the vicinity of the retracted position where the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is severe (see FIG. 16), and therefore the effect of increasing the speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 is remarkable. Can be

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a state immediately before the standing member 330 is housed between the arm member 320 and the front abutting portion 324 will be described. 19A is a front view of the rocking motion unit 300, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the rocking motion unit 300, and FIG. 19C is a bottom view of the rocking motion unit 300. It is a figure. 19A to 19C show a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position. Specifically, the arm member is extended to the extended position. It is illustrated that the protruding end side of the standing member 330 starts to be housed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutting part 324 when swung from the retracted position to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, the front contact portion 324 is disposed on the front side of the standing member 330 (upper side in FIG. 19C). As a result, even when the standing member 330 swings around the sliding ring portion 323 as a fulcrum when the arm member 320 swings (swings in the vertical direction in FIG. 19C), the standing member 330 contacts the front abutting portion 324. The wobbling of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  Here, the position A where the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in a front view is higher than the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Is formed. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the projecting position to the retracted position, the wobbling of the standing member 330 becomes large (the stage arranged inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Thus, the loci of movement of the standing member 330 and the front abutting portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the standing member 330 can be brought into contact with the front abutting portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress wobbling of the standing member 330. it can.

  20A to 20D are diagrams for explaining a process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swinging motion unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position in a time series. It is a partial front enlarged view of the swing motion unit 300 on the end side. 20 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20 (c) shows the state shown in FIG. 20 (b). A state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the projecting position is shown, and the cover member 370 is not shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

  First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (posture change from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. From the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. 20D, the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) is rotated to rotate the transmission device 350 that is meshed with the drive gear 341, and the transmission is performed. The regulation sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 to move the arm member 320 through the states of FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (b), and thereby the retracted position (FIG. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

  In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the drive device 340 can be suppressed. For example, with an electric motor, the motor capacity can be suppressed.

  Further, the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 are extended vertically downward in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 18B). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 at the start of swinging from the extended position.

  Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (posture change from FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D) will be described. The biasing force of the torsion spring 360 acts on the arm member 320. In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the base end side arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed from above by the hook portion 317 of the base member 310, and the moving end side end portion. The projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320 presses 362 in the lower right direction.

  As a result, the torsion spring 360 has the distance between the base end side arm 361 and the moving end side arm 362 shortened around the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the elasticity in the direction of lifting the arm member 320 (upper left direction). Power is in the most accumulated state. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotation axis of the arm member 320 and the restriction sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is changed. The direction Y is orthogonal to the direction connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310, which pivotally supports the transmission device 350, and the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

  In this case, the regulation sliding portion 351 can be located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. With this, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held in the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the restricting sliding portion 351 is located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 even when the arm member 320 is arranged in the projecting position. Accordingly, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held in the extended position, and thus the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  An operation mode of the drive device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the regulation sliding portion 351 from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated clockwise in a front view by a predetermined amount (ON state). Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the restriction sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20 (b)).

  Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the distance between the proximal end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 shortened with the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum. The elastic force in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is in the most accumulated state.

  When the regulation sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 from this state, the elastic force of the torsion spring 360 causes the arm member 320 to swing. Thereby, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

  For example, in a mode in which the driving force is gradually increased like a drive motor, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the time of starting, a large acceleration at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

  When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is brought into a free-rotatable state. The arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20C).

  When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the projecting position (see FIG. 20C), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is again rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in the front view (ON state), and the regulation sliding portion 351 is moved to the arm. It is located at the dead center in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not constantly generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is in the vicinity of the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven (ON state) only in the case where the drive device 340 is placed in the position (1), and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the extended position. As a result, as compared with the case where the driving force of the constant drive device 340 is applied to the arm member 320, the period during which the drive device 340 is driven can be shortened, and the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 are connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

  As a result, at the time of starting the rotation of rotating the arm member 320 from the state where the arm member 320 is placed in the retracted position or the extended position, the rotation direction of the regulation sliding portion 351 and the extending direction of the release hole 325 match, so that the movement starts. At this time, the resistance of the restriction sliding portion 351 received from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. 21A and 21B are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. It should be noted that FIG. 21A shows a state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 21B, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the projecting position. The illustrated state is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid from the retracted position in the diagonally downward direction (from the upper right to the lower left in the front view), and the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed in the process of the sliding movement. Change (tilt toward the overhang position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

  22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape in a front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and a cover member thereof. A hanging member 430 that is sandwiched between 420 and the base member 410 and is slid along the front side surface of the base member 410, and a driving member that slidably moves the hanging member 430 that is substantially T-shaped in a front view. A driving device 440 that generates a force, and a long plate-shaped auxiliary member 450 in which one end is pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and the other end is connected to the base member 410, Mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is axially supported on the projecting end side that is the end opposite to the base end side of the hanging member 430, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. Composed of Te.

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in a plate shape having an L shape in a front view and forms a skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400, and includes a plate-shaped main body laterally long portion 411 and a right end portion of the main body laterally long portion 411. A vertically elongated plate-shaped main body portion 412 extending vertically downward from the main body, and a guide rib portion that is provided on the front side of the horizontally long body portion 411 so as to be slightly inclined with respect to the left-right direction and project in a linear rib shape. 413, an insertion hole 414 formed substantially in the center of the horizontally long portion of the main body and through which the drive shaft of the drive device 441 is inserted, and a lower portion of the vertically long portion 412 of the main body from the lower right in a front view toward the upper left. Mainly provided are a guide hole 415 extending in a long hole shape and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the drive device 440 are pivotally supported.

  The main body laterally long portion 411 is provided with outer frames 411a that are provided on upper and left and right edges so as to project in a wall shape toward the front side. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length of the slide body 431 of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the sliding plane of the hanging member 430). Formed long.

  The sliding plane of the hanging member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

  The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right of the base member 410 toward the upper left.

  The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forms a gap between the cover member 420 and the base member 410, and is formed into a plate shape having substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 in a front view. Mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410.

  Since the main body 421 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410, even if the suspension member 430 sways in the front-rear direction when the suspension member 430 is slid, the suspension member 430 does not move in the front-rear direction. Regardless of this, it is possible to evenly secure the contact area between the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420.

  The hanging member 430 is a member that is arranged in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410. A horizontally elongated plate-shaped slide main body 431, a recessed groove 432 recessed in a groove on the back side of the slide main body 431, and abutted against a guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410; A plate-shaped bending arm 433 that hangs from a substantially central portion of the main body 431 and is bent toward the protruding position in the middle, and a portion of the slide main body 431 where the bending arm 433 starts to hang down Mainly includes a swing shaft 434 projecting from the front toward the front side, and a cylindrical hanging cylinder 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (overhanging end) of the bending arm portion 433.

  The slide body 431 is formed slightly thinner than the gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the hanging member 430 is slidable between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the fastening direction of the cover member 420 to the base member 410).

  The recessed groove 432 is a groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspension member 430 slides obliquely downward as the recessed groove 432 slides on the guide rib portion 413. Be moved.

  The bent arm portion 433 is extended along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position, and the base member 410 is arranged in a state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged in the retracted position. In a portion formed below the main body laterally long portion 411, a thickened portion 433a formed by increasing the thickness on the front side is provided. The bending arm 433 on the slide body 431 side of the thickened portion 433a is formed thinner than the slide body 431 and the thickened portion 433a. As a result, the bending arm 433 is formed such that deformation in the thickness direction locally occurs at the bending arm 433 on the slide body 431 side of the thickened portion 433a. Further, the thickness direction of the bent arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction (sliding direction) in which the rack gear is engraved.

  The swing shaft 434 is a shaft formed by penetrating the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and projecting to the front side of the cover member 420, and inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

  The hanging cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. This allows the auxiliary member 450 to be housed between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A and FIG. 25A). Become.

  The driving device 440 is a device that is formed in such a manner that each member sandwiches the base member 410 from the front and rear, and that generates a driving force necessary for moving the hanging member 430. The driving device 440 is inserted into the insertion hole 414 of the base member 410 from the back side. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft penetrating therethrough, a drive gear 442 axially supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and arranged in front of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442. A pair of transmission gears 443 that are pivotally supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416 are mainly provided.

  One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper surface of the slide body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 meshed with the transmission gear 443 is slid.

  The auxiliary member 450 is a member disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, one end of which is pivotally supported by the hanging member 430 and the other end of which is slid into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body 451 which is operably connected and is formed in the shape of a long plate, a swing hole 452 which is bored at one end, and a slide shaft 453 which is provided at the other end so as to project rearward. Mainly includes a suspension shaft 454 that projects from the intermediate position of the main body portion 451 toward the back side.

  The auxiliary member 450 is axially supported by the hanging member 430, and the other end of the auxiliary member 450 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that the auxiliary member 450 cannot move in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 25). Is formed. Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed such that the auxiliary member 450 approaches (swings) the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 as the hanging member 430 slides to the retracted position. Accordingly, even if the hanging member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the wobbling of the hanging member 430 can be suppressed by the hanging member 430 contacting the auxiliary member 450.

  The swing hole 452 is externally fitted and supported by the swing shaft 434 of the hanging member 430. As a result, the auxiliary member 450 is swingably formed around the swing shaft 434. That is, the auxiliary member 450 is swung (tilted) about the swing shaft 434 as the suspension member 430 is slid.

  The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end (the end on the lower right side in front view) of the auxiliary member 450 is slid along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. It should be noted that when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the projecting position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is disposed at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is arranged at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415 when it is arranged.

  The tilting member 460 is a member axially supported by the hanging cylinder 435 of the hanging member 430 and having an independent drive source (driving device 464). The tilting member 460 is axially supported by the hanging member 430 and has a long plate shape. Formed on the base member 461, a first cover member 462 that is fastened to the lower portion of the base member 461 from the front side, and forms a gap between the base member 461, the first cover member 462, and the base member 462. A transmission device 463 arranged in a gap formed between the transmission device 463, a driving device 464 that generates a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463, and a length of the base member 461 that is connected to the transmission device 463. A movable base member 465 that is slidable in the direction, and a second cover that is disposed on the front side of the movable base member 465 and is fastened and fixed to the movable base member 465. And wood 466, a mainly includes.

  The base member 461 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and has a suspension shaft 461 a that is provided in a cylindrical shape on the back side and that is internally supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430. A connecting shaft 461b juxtaposed with the hanging shaft 461a, a storage part 461c adjacent to the connecting shaft 461b and having a box-like shape with an opening facing the back side, and a front side above the storage part 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d protruding toward the side and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e arranged along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

  The storage portion 461c forms a space for storing the drive device 464, and has a hole at the bottom for allowing the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 to pass therethrough.

  The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a pivotally supported by a drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and pivotally supported by a pair of rotation shafts 461d, and a pair of transmission gears thereof. Of the 463b, a crank pin 463c that is provided to project at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b that is disposed on the moving base member 465 side is mainly provided.

  The crank pin 463c is rotated about the rotation shaft 461d as the drive gear 463a is rotated and the transmission gear 463b is rotated.

  The movement base member 465 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and a plurality of (three places in this embodiment) projecting from the back side and the posture maintaining pins 465a inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e. And a pair of slender holes 465b extending in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction and formed in a hole, and a pair of bulkheads 465c protruding from the front side.

  Since the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b is coupled to the slide hole 465b, as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed, the movement base member 465 is moved along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e. The slide is moved.

  The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a that are fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in the state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 also slides as the moving base member 465 slides.

  The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. The connecting member 470 is provided in the upper end portion and is swingable on the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450. The suspension hole 471 is supported, and a cylindrical portion 472 formed in a lower end portion in a tubular shape and externally pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460 so as to be swingable.

  Next, the driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position. The state in which the first cover member 466 is slid and slid upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  With respect to the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400, the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) drives the second cover member 466 to slide, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in a front view (see FIG. 24). Can be produced.

  Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, vibration or wobbling tends to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. The present embodiment has a plurality of configurations for suppressing the vibration and wobbling, which will be described below.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A) will be described in detail. 25A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged at the upper end position (retracted position) of the moving path along which the hanging member 430 slides is illustrated, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position, so that the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. (See 2)).

  At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is stored in a position that is on the front side of the hanging member 430 and on the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are stacked and arranged in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 25A), the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. It can be arranged compactly as compared with the total area of the individual members in. Therefore, the space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and a large display area P can be secured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and a base is provided on the rear surface on the projecting end side (tip side). A vertically elongated main body portion 412 of the member 410 is disposed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress wobbling in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 at the retracted position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 434 formed in the vicinity of the hanging arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, and the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bending arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases in the bending arm portion 433 as the hanging member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. The thick portion 433a is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

  Therefore, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position as compared with the case where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the protrusion amount (projection length) from the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bending arm 433 is increased. Is shortened. As a result, even when the hanging member 430 wobbles by driving the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the hanging member 430 is formed to be short. Therefore, the wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction at the retracted position (wobble of the tip of the bent arm 433) can be suppressed.

  Here, the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 will be described. Since the hanging member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 with the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back surface side, the hanging member 430 is slid along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends straight in a diagonally downward direction (from the upper right of FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left of FIG. 25 (a)).

  The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is generated by transmitting the driving force of the driving device 440. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the drive force of the drive motor 441 from the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise in a front view, the rotation of the pair of transmission gears 443 causes the rack gear meshed with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (the left side of FIG. 25A) to move. The hanging member 430 having the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. 26A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged at the lower end position (extended position) of the movement path along which the hanging member 430 slides is illustrated, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Abbreviated to.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the lower end (lower left end in FIG. 26 (a)) of the slide body 431 in the moving direction is the outer frame of the base member 410 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. It is brought into contact with 411a. Further, as described above, since the suspension member 430 moves downward as it goes to the projecting position, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is released, the position of the suspension member 430 remains unchanged. The bulge position can be reliably maintained.

  For example, when the hanging member 430 slides in the horizontal direction, even if the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position, gravity does not act in the sliding direction. It is necessary to add another force to maintain the position.

  On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is cancelled, the component force of gravity acts in the sliding movement direction. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the extended position. Therefore, the power consumption of the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the suspension member 430 is retracted in the portion where the bending arm portion 433 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. The size becomes smaller than that in the case of being arranged at the position (see FIG. 25B). Therefore, it is difficult to suppress the wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 by the base member 410 and the cover member 420.

  On the other hand, the base side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended in the extending direction of the auxiliary member 450 (lower left direction in FIG. 26B) in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position. Accordingly, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the overlapping area of the auxiliary member 450 and the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 is formed to be large.

  As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be separated from the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420, and the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430. Is formed so as to be able to abut. Since the thin portion (the portion closer to the slide body 431 side than the thickened portion 433a) of the bent arm portion 433 is formed to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position. The wobble of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (wobble in the thickness direction is dominant). As a result, wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the sliding direction can be suppressed.

  In addition, a thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (a portion closer to the slide body 431 side than the thickened portion 433a) is sandwiched between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and slidably moved in the lateral direction (slide). (Direction perpendicular to the direction). This makes it possible to absorb the wobble caused by the driving of the tilting member 460 by the bending of the bending arm 433, and prevent the slide body 431 from wobbling in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 26). it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide main body 431 from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and to suppress abrasion of the slide main body 431 in the thickness direction.

  For example, it is conceivable that an arm portion having the same thickness as the slide body portion 431 is extended toward the lateral direction of the slide body portion 431, and the tip side of the arm portion is formed thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the flexure, the wobbling of the arm portion is transmitted to the slide body portion 431 due to the wobbling of the tip of the arm portion having the same thickness as the slide body portion 431. This may cause the slide body 431 to wobble.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thickness of the bending arm 433 extending from the slide body 431 is reduced from the root, the wobble generated at the tip of the bending arm 433 is used for bending the thin portion, and The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be made remarkable.

  FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, since the bending arm portion 433 includes the thickened portion 433a that is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450 side, when the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430, its wobbling It is possible to make the bent arm portion 433 easily contact the auxiliary member 450 even when the amplitude of is small.

  It returns to FIG. 26 and demonstrates. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the hanging member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, the movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 plays a role of a stopper for stopping the bending arm 433 of the hanging member 430 from moving toward the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress wobbling in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is lower than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is located slightly above. Here, when the posture of the tilting member 460 does not change with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid down and slid toward the projecting position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be arranged at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the descending tilt.

  Therefore, an extra space on the outer right side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is required, and this may cause a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460.

  However, in the present embodiment, the tilting member 460 is changed in posture such that the hanging member 430 is lifted up by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450 as the hanging member 430 moves toward the extended position, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is hung down. Lifted relative to member 430. As a result, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25A) and the case where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. )), The lower end position of the tilting member 460 is located at substantially the same height (vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

  Therefore, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, it is not necessary to dispose the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the descending slope, and the right of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81. The outer space can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

  Here, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the drive device 464 is disposed. Therefore, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward by lifting and tilting the lower end side of the tilting member 460. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which serves as the fulcrum of the wobbling of the hanging member 430, to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of 430.

  Further, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the driving device 464 (see FIG. 22), the force R in the rotational direction about the hanging cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. Due to this force R, the auxiliary member 450 is pulled by the connecting member 470. At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in a direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, so that wobbling of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, a resistance force to wobble that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so wobble of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the hanging member 430, all the vibrations and wobbles generated in the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the hanging member 430. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrations and wobbles of the tilting member 460 are transmitted. The suspension member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be separately transmitted. This eliminates the need to set the rigidity of the hanging member 430 or the connecting member 470 to an excessively high level, and improves the degree of freedom in designing the hanging member 430 or the connecting member 470.

  Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be capable of forming a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33 (b)) by rotating the reflecting member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

  29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a reflecting member 520 that is axially supported by shaft supporting grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510, and a reflection member thereof. A first lid member 530 provided with a shaft support hole 531 into which the rotary shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted; and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the drive portion side of the reflection member 520. A transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engraved, a drive device 560 for generating a driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and a transmission of the drive device 560. A cover member 570 arranged on the back side of the gear group 562 and fastened and fixed to the base member 510 is mainly provided.

  The base member 510 has a bottom face portion 511 having a rectangular opening in the center and formed in a planar frame shape, and extends vertically from the right end of the bottom face portion 511 toward the front side and the back side of the bottom face portion 511. Mainly includes a first wall portion 512 and a second wall portion 513 that extends vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511. The opening of the bottom surface portion 511 is an opening for disposing a substrate (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is emitted from the light source toward the reflecting member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). It

  The bottom surface portion 511 extends vertically in the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in a rear view (see FIG. 30), and includes an elongated slide hole 511 a that guides the transmission member 550.

  The slide holes 511a are formed by arranging a plurality (four in this embodiment) in the vertical direction of the bottom surface portion 511 (vertical direction in FIG. 30) in a manner that the extending directions are aligned with each other, and are formed at the upper and lower ends thereof. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending from the lower end in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a and has a narrower width than the slide hole 511a and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. A rib portion slide hole 511b is formed.

  Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotary shaft 511c, which is provided in a plurality below the opening toward the rear surface side and on which the transmission gear group 562 of the drive device 560 is pivotally supported.

  The first wall portion 512 is a groove cut in a U shape from the front surface side to the back surface side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member are formed. The shaft support grooves 512a are arranged at equal intervals and are formed at intervals shorter than the width dimension (longitudinal dimension as viewed in the rotation axis direction) of the reflection member 520.

  The second wall portion 513 includes a plurality of shaft support grooves 513a which are arranged to face the shaft support groove 512a and are formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a, and adjacent shaft support grooves 513a among the plurality of shaft support grooves 513a. An extending portion 513b that is formed between the grooves 513a and that extends from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (front side in FIG. 29) is provided.

  The extending portion 513b is formed in a step shape in which the width dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 29) decreases toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the positioning protruding portion 543 of the second lid member 540 is formed. Is fitted to.

  The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source, and is a long plate-shaped main body 521 formed of an opaque resin material, and a straight line from the left and right ends of the main body 521. A pair of rotating shafts 522 and a rotating gear 523 that is fastened and fixed by matching the axes of the rotating shafts 522 of the pair of rotating shafts 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is arranged. Prepare

  The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) that is chamfered on the end face in the width direction.

  The rotating shaft 522 is formed at the center position of the main body 521 in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29). In addition, the rotation shaft 522 of the pair of rotation shafts 522, on the side where the transmission member 550 is disposed, extends longer, so that the second wall portion is provided between the rotation gear 523 and the main body portion 521. 513 is formed to be disposable.

  The rotary gear 523 is provided with expansion teeth 523a formed by connecting teeth that are adjacent to each other and having a diameter from the center of rotation longer than other teeth. The expansion teeth 523a can prevent the reflective member 520 from over-rotating.

  The first lid member 530 is a long plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 29), and has a plurality of shafts through which the rotary shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is inserted. The support hole 531 and a portion vertically extending toward the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (the front surface of FIG. 29) of the first lid member 530, which is the front surface side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531. An extended lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end surface circumscribing the edge of the.

  Here, for example, when fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness equal to or larger than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, when the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, as in the present embodiment, the first wall The thickness of the portion 512 becomes an obstacle, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one body.

  On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the wall on the right side of the reflection member 520 does not depend on the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not interfere, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one body, and the effect. The effect can be improved.

  Regarding the method of assembling the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530, at least two assembling methods can be performed. For example, firstly, there is a method of fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the base member 510 with the rotary shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 fitted in the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflection member 520 can be inserted into the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

  Secondly, while the first cover member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotary shaft 522 on the side opposite to the drive unit side of the reflection member 520 is attached to the shaft support hole 531 of the first cover member 530. There is a method of inserting the rotary shaft 522 on the drive unit side into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall 512 after inserting the drive shaft side 522 in the oblique direction (direction from the front side to the diagonal right rear side).

  With reference to FIG. 31, a fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31A. Note that FIG. 31A illustrates the side surface on the side where the first lid member 530 is fastened.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the depth of the shaft supporting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520. Therefore, for example, even when the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first cover member 530, the reflection member 520 has the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended cover portion 532 of the first cover member 530. It is positioned between and and is pivotally supported.

  Further, in this embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is axially supported between the shaft supporting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530 as described above, and the first lid It is also axially supported by the axial support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31B).

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for pivotally supporting the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

  That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to secure a sufficient area of the shaft supporting groove 512a that supports the reflecting member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. Accordingly, the space occupied by the first lid member 530 and the first wall portion 512 in the axial direction of the reflecting member 520 can be effectively used, and a sufficient area for axially supporting the reflecting member 520 can be secured.

  It returns to FIG. 30 and demonstrates. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the driving portion side of the reflecting member 520 on the base member 510, and is a long plate-shaped base member 541 arranged on the most front side and the base member 541. From the rear side to the rear side, and the extension shaft support portion 542 extending vertically (FIG. 30 up and down direction) and the extension shaft support portion 542 and the base member 541. Positioning protrusions 543.

  The engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32C is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc in FIG. 32B, and FIG. 32D is a part of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. 32B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, the plurality of positioning protruding portions 543 of the second lid member 540 are fitted between the adjacent extending portions 513b of the base member 510, respectively. This allows the second lid member 540 to be accurately aligned with the base member 510 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 32B).

  Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in the shape of a long plate, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 bends in the thickness direction to cause the reflecting member 520 to move in the axial direction. Is applied, and the rotation of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 contacts from the thickness direction of the extended portion 513 b of the base member 510 (left and right direction in FIG. 32 (c)). Contacted. Accordingly, the rigidity of the second wall portion 513 in the thickness direction can be improved.

  The end in the extending direction of the extended shaft supporting portion 542 of the second lid member 540 and the end of the base member 510 where the shaft supporting groove 513a is formed are brought into contact with each other to close the open end of the shaft supporting groove 513a ( FIG. 32 (d)). Accordingly, the rotation shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is axially supported by the hole formed by the shaft supporting groove 513a and the extended shaft supporting portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32B).

  It returns to FIG. 29 and demonstrates. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflection member 520, and is formed in an elongated plate shape and is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. 551, a long plate-shaped extending wall portion 552 extending from the end surface (left end surface in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 551 to the front side, and the front surface side end surface of the extending wall portion 552 intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is engraved and meshed with the rotating gear 523 of the reflection member 520, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) are arranged on the front side of the main body 551, and the base member 510 slides. Slide shafts 554 connected to the holes 511a, and rib parts slide holes 511b of the base member 510 that extend downward from the slide shafts 554 at the upper and lower ends of the slide shafts 554 (see FIG. 30). It includes a rib portion 555 which is protruded in a small width dimension slightly larger than the width dimension, a second rack gear 556 which is meshed with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 while being engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551, a.

  In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously arranged are arranged with an interval slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. This space can prevent over-rotation of the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, but details will be described later.

  The driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force, and is meshed with a driving gear 561 that is axially supported by a driving shaft, a gear that meshes with the driving gear 561 and the second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550. And a transmission gear group 562, each of which is in mesh with a plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

  When the drive gear 561 of the drive device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated and the drive force of the drive device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. The first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520, so that the transmission member 550 is slid so that the reflection member 520 is rotated about the rotation shaft 522.

  33 (a), 33 (b) and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 in which the rotating operation of the reflecting member 520 is illustrated in time series, and FIGS. (E) and FIG. 33 (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 showing the rotational movement of the reflecting member 520 in time series, and FIG. 34 shows the reflecting member 520 in the posture of FIG. 33 (d). 11 is a partial side view of a transmission member 550. FIG.

  Note that the second lid member 540 is not shown in FIG. 33, and the state (closed state) in which the main body portions 521 of the reflection members 520 are in contact with each other is shown in FIGS. 33A and 33D. 33 (b) and 33 (e), a state in which the reflecting member 520 is rotated by a predetermined amount (open state) from the state of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is shown, and FIG. 33 (f), the surface of the reflecting member 520 opposite to the surface facing the front side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is directed to the front side and the main body of the reflecting member 520 is shown. A state in which the 521s are in contact with each other (closed state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 33D, in the closed state, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is meshed with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 and its rotation is restricted.

  The rotation operation of the reflection member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (to the left in FIG. 33 (d)) by the drive device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is moved. The main body portion 521 of the reflection member 520 is rotated in accordance with the rotation of (see FIG. 33E). Further, the first rack gear 553 is slid to the left, whereby the reflecting members 520 are rotated until their mutual thickness-direction surfaces come into contact with each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33 (f)).

  Here, at the end position of the sliding movement of the transmission member 550, the reflection member 520 is brought into contact with the end portion to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not accurately meshed with each other, the posture of the reflection member 520 in the state where the transmission member 550 is arranged at the end position of the sliding movement. Can be stabilized.

  In the closed state of the reflection member 520, the end of the main body 521 is abutted in the thickness direction. At this time, since the area between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the above-mentioned light source may be blocked by the reflecting member 520. it can.

  Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, slidingly moving a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, when the shutter member is slidingly moved from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes long.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflecting member 520 suppresses the leakage of light in the closed state, while allowing the light emitted to the player by rotating the reflecting member 520 from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members 520 may have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the case where the reflecting member 520 is rotated can shorten the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the reflecting member 520 rotates, the area occupied by the reflecting member 520 in a front view (see FIG. 32A) is reduced, so that the light source formed on the back side of the reflecting member. You can see the light. Therefore, the space for disposing the reflection operation unit 500 can be reduced.

  The chamfered portions 521a of the reflecting member 520 are in contact with each other in the closed state (see FIG. 34). As a result, the distance between the reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members 520 can be made more flat.

  For example, when a pattern that is integrally recognized by the surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction is formed on the surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction, the boundaries between the adjacent reflecting members 520 are made inconspicuous and the patterns are made inconspicuous. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more beautifully.

  The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer ends of the expansion teeth 523a is formed longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if the rotating gear 523 is attempted to be rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (d) from the state of FIG. 33 (a), the expansion teeth 523a are stopped by the main body portion 551 and cannot be rotated. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent excessive rotation of the reflection member 520, and it is possible to prevent damage to the reflection member 520 due to excessive pressure on the contact surface of the reflection member 520.

  Further, as described above, the first rack gear 553 is arranged at a slightly shorter interval than the interval when the tooth group in which the four teeth are continuously provided omits one tooth. 33F, when the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 33F, the teeth of the rotation gear 523 are formed between the tooth groups of the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550. Get stuck. In this case, the rotary gear 523 cannot be rotated any further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged at the chamfered portion 521a which is the contact surface due to the excessive rotation of the reflection member 520.

  Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 35A shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 35B, the pair of first slide members 720. Also, a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 is arranged at the projecting position (the front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) is illustrated.

  In the second slide operation unit 700, the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the display area. It is formed so that P can be divided into a lattice shape. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

  36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. 36 and 38, the base member 710 and a member disposed on the front side of the base member 710 are illustrated in a disassembled state, and in FIGS. 37 and 39, the base member 710 and the back surface of the base member 710 are illustrated. The state where the member arranged on the side is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 is a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening in the center which forms the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. 710, a first slide shaft S1 fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710, and having its longitudinal direction coincide with the horizontal direction, and slides along the first slide shaft S1. Mainly, a pair of first slide members 720 to be moved and a front side cover member 730 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and is formed in a pair of upper and lower sides. Prepare

  Also, the second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 with a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft S2 for aligning the longitudinal direction with the vertical direction and the second slide shaft thereof. A pair of second slide members 740 slidably moved along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears meshed with the second slide members 740 are arranged, and a pair of second slide members 740. And rear side cover members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the rear side of the transmission device 750 and are formed on the left and right sides and the upper side, and are disposed on the rear side cover members 760 and the first slide member 720 and The driving device 770 mainly generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 36, since the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one side thereof (the left side in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  The first slide member 720 is provided with a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape having an L shape in a front view, a carriage portion 722 that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 721, and extends downward from a lower end of the carriage portion 722. And a decoration portion 723.

  The main body portion 721 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the left-right direction, and has a rack portion 721a having a rack gear engraved on the upper surface, and a rack portion 721a that is continuously provided below the rack portion 721a. And a plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b arranged to the left of the front view.

  The dolly portion 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the dolly receiving portion 721b with its left end aligned with the left end of the dolly receiving portion 721b. The dolly portion 722 is provided inside the dolly body portion 722a, and a dolly body portion 722a formed in a U-shaped cross section by wall portions projecting from the upper and lower ends of the plate-like bottom surface to the front side. And a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed having a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface are arranged in a left and right pair.

  In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to slightly project outward from the longitudinal side surfaces (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a.

  The first slide shaft S1 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends and is made of a metal material such as stainless steel.

  An arrangement mode of the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S1 is inserted between the rotating body groups 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in that state. As a result, the carriage portion 722a is arranged between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft S1. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft S1.

  Next, the carriage receiving portion 721b of the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the first slide member 720 is slidably supported by the first slide shaft S1.

  In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with the transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the driving device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

  When the first slide member 720 slides, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft S1. Therefore, the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft S1 can be reduced and friction can be reduced. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged on the left and right and are in contact with the first slide shaft S1, it is possible to suppress wobble of the first slide member 720 at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft S1 can be stabilized.

  The front cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is disposed on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. Accordingly, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (left front direction in FIG. 36) around the first slide shaft S1 as an axis, wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the transmission cylinders 711 and 712, which are arranged so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction and are axially rotatable, and to the rear surface of the base member 710 in the left side in rear view. And a fixed gear portion 713 in which gears are engraved on a wall surface that extends inward (to the right in FIG. 38) and is meshed with the fixed gear portion 713 and the rack gear 754 (see FIG. 39), a rolling gear 714 axially supported by a shaft supporting portion 754a (see FIG. 37), and a guide wall portion 715 protruding from the rear surface of the base member 710 and extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the rear as viewed from the right. And, mainly.

  The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 include drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed and which transmit the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

  The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a formed on a wall surface facing inward (leftward in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, only one of them (upper part in FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other description will be omitted.

  The second slide member 740 is provided with a main body portion 741 formed in an elongated plate shape, a dolly portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and a left end of the dolly portion 742 in a front view. And a decorative portion 743.

  The main body 741 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

  The dolly portion 742 is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the main body portion 741 with its upper end aligned with the upper end of the main body portion 741. The dolly portion 742 has a dolly main body portion 742a formed in a U-shaped cross section by the wall portions projecting from the left and right ends of the plate-like bottom surface to the front side, and the dolly main body portion 742a is inwardly perpendicular to the bottom surface. A pair of left and right rotating bodies that are formed with different rotating shafts, and a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies 742b.

  In the rotating body group 742b, a pair of left and right rotating bodies are vertically arranged in parallel, and the length of the left and right spaces is slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft S2.

  The decorative portion 743 includes a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a pivotally supported by a shaft projecting toward the rear surface at the left end in front view.

  The second slide shaft S2 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S2a that are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

  An arrangement mode of the second slide member 740 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S2 is inserted between the rotating body groups 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the carriage portion 742. Accordingly, the second slide member 740 is slidably supported by the second slide shaft S2. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft S2.

  Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. Thereby, the main body 741 is arranged between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft S2.

  Here, the rack gear engraved from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 is meshed with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

  When the second slide member 740 slides, the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft S2, so that the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft S2 can be reduced and friction can be reduced. Further, since the pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged in a pair in the upper and lower sides and are brought into contact with the second slide shaft S2, the wobbling of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft S2 can be stabilized.

  Here, the main body portion 741 having a rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (driving portion side) and the carriage portion 742 that sandwiches the second slide shaft S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the end. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 about the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state of the rack gear and the rolling gear 714. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the second slide member 740 receives due to the shift of the meshing state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device for transmitting the driving force of the drive device 770 to the second slide member 740, and is provided on the long plate-shaped main body 751 and on the back side of the main body 751. It has a drive gear 752 which is disposed and to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 which meshes with the drive gear 752, and teeth which mesh with the transmission gear. A rack gear 754 that is a long plate-shaped member that extends in the direction and that slides up and down along the long slide hole 751a of the main body 751 is mainly provided.

  In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one of the upper and lower parts (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

  The main body portion 751 includes a slide long hole 751a formed in a long hole shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

  The rack gear 754 is provided with a columnar shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) which is provided so as to vertically project from the front surface and penetrates the elongated slide hole 751a of the main body portion 751. The shaft support portion 754a is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

  Here, the transmission mode of the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated through the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide long hole 751a.

  The shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, so that the rack gear 754 is slid up and down, so that the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down. .

  At this time, the rolling gear 714 meshes with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710, and also meshes with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 that is arranged to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741 form a double rack and pinion mechanism, and the second slide member 740 is moved at a double speed with respect to the rack gear 754.

  The rear cover member 760 includes a rear drive cover member 761 disposed on the drive side of the second slide member 740, a rear upper cover member 762 disposed on the upper side, a rear drive cover member 761 and left and right sides. And a back-side retaining cover member 763 arranged to face each other in the direction.

  The rear drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the transmission device 750, and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740 of the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the rear face.

  The rear upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the base member 710, and driving motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 of the driving motors of the driving device 770 are fastened and fixed to the rear surface.

  The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface of the decorative portion 743 on the extended end side, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating around the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum and slipping out.

  The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740. The drive motors 771, 772, 773, 774 include drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, 774a, respectively.

  An example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of a change in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in time series.

  It should be noted that in FIG. 40 (a), the state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged at the retracted position is shown in FIG. 40 (b), and the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 are 40C shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other at the projecting position, and a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved from the position in FIG. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front cover members 730 is omitted.

  Here, the transmission of the driving force to the drive gears 711a and 712a during the sliding movement of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated (the drive gear 711a is clockwise in a front view and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise in a front view) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A, the pair of first slide members 720 is rotated. Are slid toward the projecting position and brought into contact with each other at the projecting position (see FIG. 40 (b)).

  Of the pair of first slide members 720, the drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates the drive force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side in the front view is in the state of FIG. It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before reaching. In the present embodiment, since the contact between the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722, it is not necessary to consider the bending of the decoration portion 723 in the sliding direction. Therefore, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

  Since the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged such that the rotating body group 722b projects slightly outward from the longitudinal side surfaces (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a, the pair of first slide members 720 come into contact with each other. In doing so, the rotating bodies protruding outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b are first brought into contact with each other, and then the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are pressed against each other. Be done. That is, while the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies that extend outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in the state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, and thus the impact when the pair of first slide members 720 is in contact can be mitigated.

  The pair of first slide members 720, after being brought into contact with each other, drive motor 771 that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side in the front view of the pair of first slide members 720. A pair of first slides (by pushing the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side in front view is pushed by the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side in front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without moving the drive motors 771, 772 in a coordinated manner. Thereby, the power consumption of the entire drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

  In addition, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load is higher than when only one of the first slide members 720 is driven. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, it is not necessary to consider the gravity load as in the case where the first slide member 720 is moved in the vertical direction, and the increase amount of the motor load is the drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs evenly in each.

  Therefore, the motor life of the drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35) can be easily adjusted, and the replacement timing of the drive motors 771, 772 can be easily adjusted. As a result, the frequency of maintenance of the drive motors 771, 772 can be reduced.

  An example of the movement mode of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of changes in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in time series.

  41A, the state where the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted position is shown in FIG. 41B, and the main body portions 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the projecting position. 41C, a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 has been moved by a predetermined amount from the position in FIG. 41B to the upper side in the front view is shown in FIG. 41C.

  Here, the transmission of the driving force to the drive gear 752 (see FIG. 39) during the sliding movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a), the drive gears 752 are rotated by the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 is clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive motor 774 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Then, the pair of second slide members 740 are respectively slid toward the extended position and abutted at the extended position (see FIG. 41 (b)).

  Of the pair of second slide members 740, the drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates the drive force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 disposed above in the front view reaches the state of FIG. 41 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before.

  The pair of second slide members 740, after being brought into contact with each other, drive motor 774 (which generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 of the pair of second slide members 740 disposed below in front view). The pair of second slide members 740 (by pressing the second slide member 740 disposed on the upper side in the front view to the second slide member 740 disposed on the lower side in the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). It is slid upward (see FIG. 41 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid without the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35) operating in a coordinated manner. As a result, the power consumption of the drive motors 773, 774 as a whole can be suppressed.

  Here, when the descending member changes its moving direction upwards, the load on the drive motor increases due to the influence of gravity, which may shorten the motor life. Further, since the deceleration time for changing the direction takes a long time, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in the presentation may be reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes its moving direction from the downward movement to the upper direction, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 rises. You can use the momentum of movement. As a result, the motor load generated when the second slide member 740 changes direction due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. In addition, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in presentation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. Note that the illustration of the back retaining cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back cover member 760 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end opposite to the end supported by the second slide shaft S2 comes into contact with the receiving gear 715a of the base member 710 via the flexure suppressing gear 743a. Contacted.

  Here, at the time of starting the second slide member 740, the meshing relationship between the flexure suppressing gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the flexure suppressing gear 743a rotates smoothly. The resistance generated between the portion 715a and the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required at the time of starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other by the carriage portions 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decorative portion 743, and the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the decorative portion 743 is disposed. Is inclined with respect to the guide wall portion 715. As a result, the load applied to the receiving gear portion 715 from the deflection suppressing gear 743a increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is tilted downward (downward in FIG. 42) about the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper deflection suppressing gear 743a of the pair of deflection suppressing gears 743a is received by the receiving gear. It is pressed against the part 715.

  As a result, a force in a direction to return the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the contact between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 is constituted by the meshing of the gears, the contact surface can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, and thus the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 is suppressed. The effect of doing can be improved.

<Regarding the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 49, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, and the first variable A base member 65c for fastening the winning device 65 to the game board 13 by screws, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and opening / closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 65e. A switching member 65h that projects into the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game sphere, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. Back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and the flow path solenoid 65k covered from the back side by screws on the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 50C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 50 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 51 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the opened state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable award winning device 65 toward the second prize winning opening 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 while the player is right-hit, and immediately after the jackpot game, the game method is left-handed. The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  50 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 51A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged obliquely leftward and to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is provided with the special discharge port 65e2 and that is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow-down route of the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. You can The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. . The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. In addition, when the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds at the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent an excessive disadvantage from occurring.

  With reference to FIG. 51 (b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described. FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inoperative and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge port 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge port 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning ball is won in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is won in the 13th round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (for one ball winning in this embodiment). 15 prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 will be described. On the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed, and the game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A guide path for guiding to the general winning opening 65b1 is formed. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 65b1, ten game balls are paid out to the player as the prize balls on the upper plate. Here, when the game ball is played by the right hit, which is a game method in which the game ball is shot so as to pass the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, it does not roll on the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all the game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning a prize device 65 are configured to pass through this opening and win the general winning port 65b1. On the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are provided.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the angle of the game nails K2, K3 is adjusted as a means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval is narrowed. It is configured so that it can be widened. Here, the game store tries to increase the profit by increasing the number of game balls to be shot in order to enter 10 balls in one round by reducing the number of game balls winning the specific winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit. It is possible to However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the game nail K2 is tilted to the left and adjusted to make it difficult to win the specific winning opening 65a, the distance between the adjusting nails K1 and K2 becomes wide, and the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. It is easier to enter the ball. Further, if the game nail K1 is narrowed in order to narrow the gap between the game nails K1 and K2, the flow path on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the flow path through the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easy to play a ball. Therefore, even when the jackpot game is not being played, the percentage of winning in the general winning opening 65b1 becomes high, and the damage to the amusement store side becomes large. Therefore, the percentage of winning in the specific winning opening 65a should be lowered. It is possible to prevent the nails from being adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the taste of the game is significantly lowered by the adjustment at the game shop side.

  Also, by tilting the game nail K1 to the right, the gap between the game nails K2 and K3 is narrowed to adjust the winning rate to the specific winning port 65a to be low, and the game ball is moved to the second winning port 640 side. Become easy to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning port 640 becomes high, and the ratio of winning to the second winning port 640 during the time saving game or the probability variation gaming state becomes high, and the damage to the amusement store side increases. It is possible to prevent the winning rate of the specific winning port 65a from being set low. In addition, a plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning port 640, and a game ball flowing down to the left on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The game nails left between the first variable winning a prize device 65 and the second winning a prize opening 640 are arranged such that all the game balls are guided to the second winning a prize opening 640 even if they are adjusted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, the swing motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed with each other has been described. However, the swing motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment includes the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. It is possible to form a state in which the drive gear 2341 is in mesh (engagement state) and a state in which the mesh between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (non-engagement state). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 showing the swing motions of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in time series in the second embodiment. It is a figure.

  The main body 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated in phantom lines. In FIG. 43 (a), the state in which the arm member 320 is in the projecting position is shown in FIG. 43 (b). 43 (c) shows a state in which 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position. The state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c), and the state in which the arm member 320 is extended to the front of the extended position in FIG. In (), a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position by pulling the transmission device 2350 by the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed to be meshable with each other.

  The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341a that is axially viewed by the drive shaft and is formed in a fan shape in a front view, and a push pin 2341b that is provided so as to project to the front side near the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341a.

  The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 that is provided at an end portion of the regulation sliding portion 351 on the opposite side to the front side so as to project toward the front side.

  The base member 2310 includes a swing shaft 2318 that is provided so as to project to the front side at the lower right of the shaft support position of the drive gear 2341 in front view.

  The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in the shape of a long rod, and has one end that is pivotally supported at one end by a swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310 and one end of the first body 2381. A second main body portion 2382 which is pivotally supported at the other end on the opposite side and is formed in a long rod shape, and a long hole shape is formed along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382. And a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be capable of swinging on the front side of the drive gear 2341 and is capable of contacting the push pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

  A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. The arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position by swinging the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 to the state of FIG. 43 (c) by the rotation of the drive gear 2341. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled through the pull slide hole 2383 by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350, and is tilted toward the transmission device side.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 43 (c), the meshing of the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 43 (c)), the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, so that the transmission device 2350 is formed. The arm member 320 is maintained at the retracted position even if the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the drive gear 2341 is released.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) and the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (to the right in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pull slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  When the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated, the dead point formed by the restriction sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 causes the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) And is swung toward the extended position (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is arranged on the right side of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 again pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350. As a result, the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and the arm member 320 can be maintained in the extended position (see FIG. 44 (c)).

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 can be released. It can reduce the resistance applied to. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the urging force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of rocking the arm member 320 at high speed from the start can be made remarkable.

  Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are engaged only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance generated between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320. When is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, it does not affect the swing of the arm member 320.

  Therefore, by setting a large elastic force of the torsion spring 360, a large force is required when swinging the arm member 320 from the extended position to the retracted position. It is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) and 46 (b) is a second embodiment in which the operation of swinging the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the extended position is illustrated in time series. It is a front view of the swing motion unit 2300 in the form. Note that FIG. 45 (a) illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 45 (b) illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. 46 (a) shows a state where the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 45 (b), and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position. To be done.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the upright member 330 is gently raised is described, but in the swing motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the upright member 330 is rapidly raised.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the standing hole 2316 of the base member 2310 has a posture changing portion 2316 a formed above the bending point and a concentric circle portion 2316 b formed near the lower end.

  The posture changing portion 2316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the tubular portion 322 which is the swing shaft of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45 (b) and 46). (See (a)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

  The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is oriented in a direction along a circle around the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle portion 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

  In this embodiment, since the concentric circle portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the standing hole 2316, the arm member 320 is erected from the retracted position to the position shown in FIG. 45 (b). The relative posture of the member 330 is maintained.

  Since the posture changing portion 2316a is formed above the bending point of the standing hole 2316 (that is, near the upper portion of the concentric circular portion 2316b), the posture changing portion 2316a is illustrated in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung to the disposition, the upright member 320 is suddenly upright.

  Thereby, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made rapid. Therefore, the speed of operation of the swing motion unit 2300 that the player feels can be further improved.

  The first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is made of a resin material has been described, but in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is made of an elastic rubber material. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  47A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. Note that, in FIG. 47, a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466m arranged at the upper end portion.

  The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

  The connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

  The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed so as to be expandable and contractable by swinging the tilting member 2460.

  Here, since the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position, the tilting member 2460 is unstable. Therefore, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 performs the expansion / contraction operation in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the hanging shaft 461a. Be moved.

  In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force in the direction opposite to the swinging direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time required for the tilting member 2460 to swing back is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is accelerated. Therefore, the speed of the rocking motion of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and the effect of rocking (vibrating) the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

  The second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and brought into contact with the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and the one first slide member 2720 is controlled to run in reverse according to the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment, which illustrates in time series an example of an operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. Note that in FIG. 48, the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 is arranged in the retracted position is illustrated, and FIG. In FIG. 48, the right side first slide member 2720 of the pair of first slide members 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount, and in FIG. 48C, the left side first slide member is moved from the state of FIG. 48B. The state in which the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is long in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 48) and extends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). A hole-shaped detection hole 2721c is provided.

  The base member 2710 is a transmissive optical sensor disposed on the front side, and the detection device is disposed at a position where the transmitted light can penetrate the detection hole 2721c when the first slide member 2720 is slid. 2716. Note that the detection device 2716 is disposed substantially in the center of the base member 2710 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 48A).

  As shown in FIG. 48B, when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid from the state of FIG. 48A and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position where it penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right side is moved. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the left first slide member 2720 is slid and reaches the position where the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right slide member 2720 is moved to the left slide member. It is controlled so as to feed backward (slide to the right) at a speed capable of abutting with 2720 at a constant speed.

  That is, while the first slide member 2720 on the left side slides, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is blocked by the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When reaching the penetrating position, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected, and the position information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device by detecting the length at which the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected. It

  Based on the position information and the speed information of the left first slide member 2720, the reverse feed acceleration necessary for the right first slide member 2720 to abut the left first slide member 2720 at a constant speed is obtained. It is calculated and controlled so that the first slide member 2720 on the right side is moved by the acceleration.

  Thereby, the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 2720 can be softened, and the durability of the first slide members 2720 can be improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid in the upright holes 316 and 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotatable roller may be provided in the changing sliding portion 333, and the roller may roll in the standing holes 316 and 2316. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the resistance generated when the posture of the upright member 330 changes.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is gradually reduced from the lower end of the guide hole 315 to the upper end thereof. Although the case of being formed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the gap formed between the body member 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be abruptly changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of changes in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (abruptly or loosely).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is gradually reduced from the lower end of the guide hole 315 to the upper end thereof. Although the case of being formed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330 and the base member 310 may be gradually reduced from the lower end of the upright hole 316 toward the upper end thereof. Good. In this case, the resistance applied to the upright member 330 when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position toward the extended position is suppressed, and the wobbling of the upright member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position. can do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the size of the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end toward the upper end. In this case, the reduction degree of the diameter orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 can be formed so as to be different from the center of the sliding portion 326.

  That is, the right side surface of the guide hole 315 (right side in FIG. 18A) is a portion formed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. When the arm member 320 is moved, the arm member 320 is abutted positively when the arm member 320 slightly moves in the surface direction (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft. By greatly reducing the reduction degree of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position, the swinging of the arm member 320 in the projecting direction can be made smooth.

  On the other hand, the left side surface of the guide hole 315 (left side in FIG. 18A) is a portion that is brought into contact when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 tilts forward. Therefore, by reducing the degree of reduction of the groove until it reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 and forming the groove abruptly near the upper end, the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position is obtained. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to prevent the sliding portion 326 from contacting the left side surface of the guide hole 315 when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 tilts forward. The resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced and the driving device 340 can be downsized.

  The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 depending on the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 as compared with the vicinity of the upper end, from the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. Thereby, the swing of the arm member 320 can be made smooth.

  Further, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the lower end, the arm member 320 is positioned at the projecting position, and the arm extends from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. A downward force acts on the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. As a result, the driving force required at the time of starting the arm member 320 swinging from the extended position to the retracted position can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflecting members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are simultaneously rotated has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation timing may be shifted or the rotation speed may be shifted for each reflecting member 520. Thereby, the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflection member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be rendered brightly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating member 523 of the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 to rotate the reflecting member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotating belts further rotate while the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, slippage occurs between the rotating belts and the rollers, and further rotation of the reflecting members 520 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the expansion gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed with the expansion teeth 523a and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed with a space is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth spacing may be formed on the rotary gear 523.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reflecting member 520 may be made of a transparent resin material. In this case, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light source regardless of whether the reflection member 520 is in the closed state or the open state, so that the player can visually confirm the effect of the light emitted from the light source for a long time. You can

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one slide member 720 of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 is pushed by the other slide member 720 and slides is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed to be always driven by an independent drive motor.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the pair of second slide members 740 directly contact the main body portions 741 with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, elastic members such as rubber and coil springs may be provided on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, the impact can be softened as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are directly contacted with each other, so that the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in the front view in the state where the slide members 720 and 740 are projected has been described. It is not limited. For example, the visually recognized shape is not limited to the “heart” and may be, for example, a “star”, a “fish”, a “car”, or the like. Further, different shapes may be formed so as to be visible when the slide members 720 and 740 have different degrees of protrusion. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one second slide member 740 of the pair of second slide members 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact portion of the second slide member 740, it is possible to move the magnet in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides the one second slide member 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, it is possible to switch the motor to be driven according to the situation such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted, of the both ends in the longitudinal direction of the decorative portion 723. . In this case, the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 abut can be softened, so that the load on the drive motors 771, 772 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 contact can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, when the pair of first slide members 720 are slid and moved, the pair of slide members 720 are The effect of visually recognizing them as one unit can be made remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 that are separated from each other are visually recognized in a coordinated manner, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the carriage 722 is formed to have the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large in the one first slide member 720 and small in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the small diameter rotating body group 722b can be sandwiched between the large diameter rotating body group 722b and the first slide shaft S1. This makes it possible to improve the effect of braking the rotating body group 722b by bringing the rotating body groups 722b into contact with each other.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed at one place in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection holes 2721c are formed at a plurality of locations (for example, one end portion, the central portion, and the other end portion of the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720), so that the first slide member 2720 stops. Multiple positions can be formed. At this time, the positions of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of points by the detection period of the detection device 2716 by changing the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the shape of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be formed in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of detection holes 2721c are continuously formed along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is moved during the movement of the first slide member 2720. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined by the time interval at which the transmitted light is blocked. In addition, by changing the number of circular detection holes 2721c to be formed for each position (for example, both ends and the central portion) in the longitudinal direction of the first slide member 2720, the transmission of the detection device 2716 during the movement of the first slide member 2720 is performed. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected by the number of times the light is blocked.

  In the second embodiment, a case where the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c after one slide member 2720 is stopped at the extended position is described. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by running at least one of the first slide members 2720 in the reverse direction. It is possible to suppress the impact at the time of contact.

  In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which one detection device 2716 detects the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pair of detection devices 2716 may be arranged corresponding to the pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of the one second slide member 740.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is arranged on the base member 2710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be provided on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<Regarding First Control Processing Example>
Next, a first control processing example in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 96.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), as a trigger, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. The third symbol is commonly displayed as a variable display with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed in preference to the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time. Has been done.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed and displayed at the same time, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. It may be possible. With such a configuration, more lottery games can be executed at the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of the numbers "0" to "9".

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the end. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

  Further, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol column → the right symbol column → the middle symbol column. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the lower part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, is the reserved ball. One identification symbol (holding symbol) of "black circle" is displayed for one and the player is informed. The player can determine the current number of holding balls by the number of holding symbols.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, a character symbol, a character, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. To be done. When the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 or the digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

  When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol displaying device 81 (first symbol displaying device 37), the number of times of winning is respectively. Up to four times are reserved, the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning opening 64, which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, The values of the per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop-type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal starting openings (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is When it matches with the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the random number table per 1, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Also, this first random number table is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period that is a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability that the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of a low probability (special symbol) Of high random numbers) and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9". It is determined whether there is any, and if any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired is "9", and if "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, the first special symbol, at the time of low probability of the second special symbol, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "9" is as described above. It is stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the value "0-9" is the first random number for high probability. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/30".

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" is "big hit A". When the random number value is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are two types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type that a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol can be more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the game play for a longer time.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 72) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 55 (a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202b, for example, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", and "disconnection super reach" are defined as displacement patterns for disengagement. As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and various types of “super reach” are defined. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table, the variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation is provided corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 53 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Also, the second per random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability (normal symbol). For a period of time saving state), and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c described above. In this second random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened for "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but the opening time The number of times and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing (see FIG. 72), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 71). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability variation valid flag 203p, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time saving medium counter 203t, and another memory area 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas The values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2, which are acquired based on the winning of the first winning opening 64, are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored, respectively, and other Since the configuration is the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Normally symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve first area to reserve fourth area) ) And have. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either of the left and right normal starting ports 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the holding area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of 4. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

  The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command (S211 of FIG. 64, FIG. 66). (See S405). The special symbol 1 holding sphere number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is changed, by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the fluctuation held by the main control device 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in that it is different in that the number of held spheres held is entered into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is changed, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number command is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 holding sphere numbers (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

  When the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 Value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 69). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c ( 69, S703: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state (probability variation game state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low-probability gaming state (including a time saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1213 of FIG. 75). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power cutoff occurs, the state immediately before the power cutoff is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51 (a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. The configuration may be configured such that 203h is officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before power-off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1241 in FIG. 77). In addition, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1271 in FIG. 78). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j indicates the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 (that is, the number of gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65) in one round in the jackpot game. It is a counter for counting. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (in FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are given to the first variable winning device 65. After it is discriminated whether the two match (S1267 in FIG. 78), the initial value "0" is reset. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds in the jackpot A based on the start of 13 rounds, and the passage solenoid 65k is turned on in the jackpot B for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 13 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the winning process (S1112 of FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243: Yes in FIG. 77), the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting the notification effect (in the present embodiment, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls winning in the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the processing of S1224 of the notification processing (FIG. 76, S1111) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described process for outputting the voice.

  With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, as will be described in detail later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification prompting the player to watch, is displayed. In the 13th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. In order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, a notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51 (a)) The production is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is finished, the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display. Therefore, during the interval period, the player is informed to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed content, and divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by notifying the third symbol display device 81 to be shown, the switching member 65h is configured to divert the player's attention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the 13th round, the first The variable winning a prize device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured so as to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so as to look at it. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during twelve rounds and giving a notification prompting the reader to read the code with a mobile phone. In this embodiment, the distracting effect is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls in the first variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game balls winning the first variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 81 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203o, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly notify that the game ball is clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the fraud of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51A) is based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, and the probability variation switch 65e3. It is less than the time required to pass through. That is, the period during which the probability variation valid flag 203p is on indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation validity flag 203p is set to ON. It is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the player can illegally enter the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, or play the piano wire or the like from below the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing a sphere up and letting it pass, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by radio waves.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time shift game state of 100 times is entered.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. There is.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns not shown. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the hit / miss determination, and the acquired selection counter value. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  In the long press effect lottery table 222b, when the SW variation pattern in which the display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is displayed is selected as one of the variation patterns described later, the frame button 22 is selected. 5 is a selection table for selecting a notification mode for notifying the operation timing of FIG. FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In this long-press production lottery table 222b, a notification mode type of an operation method related to a long-press operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a certain period or longer is set as a long-press navigation type. As the long press navigation type, three types of long press navigation A, long press navigation B, and long press navigation C are set.

  Here, each long-press navigation type will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the long press navigation B. FIG. When the SW variation pattern is selected and the long press effect B is selected, the character "Long press to get big hit GET !!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (a), and the player long presses. By executing, a notification mode in which it is expected that a jackpot will be given is notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters "Let's predict the long press start timing within the period meter!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the color is below it from the left side to the right side with time. An indicator that changes in the direction is displayed. By this notification, the player starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until the correct long-press start period is predicted and all the colors of the indicators are changed. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61B, the timing of releasing the long press (timing of releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the character “Release at count 0!” Is displayed, and below that, an indicator whose color is sequentially changed from the left side to the right side is displayed. At the upper right corner of the indicator, the characters "3, 2, 1, 0, release !!" are displayed, and the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes to just below the character "0". You are navigating to unlock. Note that, here, the countdown may be displayed in characters, and the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the characters “Release !!” are displayed.

  As described above, in the notification mode of the long-press Navi B, the player can predict the timing of the long-press start and clearly inform the player of the release of the long-press, thereby configuring the navigation with medium difficulty. is doing.

  When the timing of the long press start coincides with the start timing set in advance in the SW variation pattern, the player is informed that the jackpot is the jackpot if the result of the hit determination is a jackpot. This allows the player to know that it is a big hit early.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long-press Navi A, the player expects that the third pattern display device 81 displays the character "GET big hit at long-press timing !!" and the big hit is given at the timing of long-press. The notification mode to be displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), an indicator is displayed, and after a long press for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator changes, a long period preset by the player is set. The characters "apply a long press period !!" are displayed to encourage you to apply a long press period.

  As described above, in the long press navigation A, the notification mode in which the player has to predict both the start timing of the long press and the release timing of the long press is configured in the navigation notification mode of the highest difficulty level. ing.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation C is selected. When the long press Navi C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the characters "GET big hit in the designated long press period !!" are displayed, and the long press is performed at the designated timing and period. A notification prompting the player to execute is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), an indicator is displayed, the characters "start" and "end" are displayed below the indicator, and the color of the indicator is changed to the start by pressing and holding. It is informed that the long press will be released at the timing of “start” and “end”.

  In this way, the long press Navi C is the navigation content with the lowest difficulty level among the long press Navi types, and as will be described later, it is the notification mode that is selected only when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long press effect lottery table 222b, a value (a range of 0 to 198) of an effect counter 223f, which will be described later, is set for each long press navigation type for each hit determination result. There is. When the hit / no hit determination result is a hit, it is set so that the long-press navigation type having a lower difficulty level can be selected more easily than when it is a miss. This makes it possible to change the sense of expectation for a jackpot depending on the displayed long-press navigation type. Further, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot is awarded or not depending on the operation method of the player, and to provide the player with a fresh game.

  If the long-press operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time, the long-press effect may be terminated midway and switched to a predetermined main symbol variation effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the game even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW effective time storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved balls and the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

  The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), Which is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b holds the holding ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c stores the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b based on the holding sphere number command output from the main controller 110. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The long press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 3 seconds or more and has been pressed for a long time. The length of time that the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by a long press counter 223h described later, and if the count value is equal to or greater than the count value indicating 3 seconds, the long press flag 223g is set to ON. .

  The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or more, it is determined to be a long press, and it is determined that an operation different from the normal pressing of the frame button 22 is executed (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured. It is possible to determine whether or not the long press is being executed by the long press counter 223h.

  The SW effective time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the above-described SW variation pattern, it is determined that the frame button 22 set in the variation pattern is OFF. The period (time) set to OFF when the button 22 is valid (S1807: No in FIG. 83) is set in the SW valid time storage area 23i as the SW valid time. When the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i, the SW valid time is decremented by 1 and updated based on the elapse of the SW valid time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Direction) and notice production are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240, 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

  The power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. It is displayed on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to display the images alternately on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball into the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this ordinary symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so the chances of drawing the ordinary symbol will increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be released as a jackpot for the ordinary symbols, the balls easily enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbols are easily drawn. Therefore, the longer the shortened time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit for the special symbol, which can be given to the player, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters, so that the electric prize is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  Also, in the ending production, by notifying that any one of the lottery results of the special symbols being held will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player is a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbols being held. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot of the special symbol is surely made. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 57) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 58). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data is defined (meaning address “0002H” in FIG. 15).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 84) executed (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 86B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 94B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 86 (b)). In step S2303), the pointer update processing (see step S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 59), and at the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to start the transfer is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 59, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 86 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 of FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 86B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 63 to 78. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When they reach 299, 99 and 239 respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, special symbol variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is accompanied by the passage of the sphere. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) is set to a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it is a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S215 ends, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the setting of the start of jackpot A (such as 16 rounds). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of this lottery is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , Respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, the jackpot of the special symbol Whether or not the lottery result is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number to be hit are the same. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, a random number value determined to be off in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and a big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big hits.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour / hour counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), so the first obtained in the process of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 53 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol Is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big hit showing the big hit A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55A) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display state at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Then, this process is completed.

  Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the starting winning process is performed. When there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the reserved sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning combination in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a probable change (S502), and the gaming state. Is a certain change (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the game state is not a certain change (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning port 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being displayed on the second symbol display device. The middle and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second symbol per random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and a low value. Based on the probability per second random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S610 or S611, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol, as in the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the ordinary symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is opened and closed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 72) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 69, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 63) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning award process (see FIG. 66) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the change time elapses from the start of the change, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. End the display, in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 70 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1202, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

  In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (S1106). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1106: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). After that, the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is finished, the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is a ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Then, this process is completed.

  Details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1213). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON. Then, this process is completed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. Therefore, whether the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit game or not. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification processing is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made based on whether it is detected that ten balls have been won in the twelfth round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1222, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1222: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in S1223, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the end of 12 rounds, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is given. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, it is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the jackpot game is over, with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), the notification command is set (S1226). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "Look at the liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (S1112 of FIG. 77), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1231). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1231: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1233). Then, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

  In the process of S1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1236). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). Then, the process of S1238 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress since the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1234, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

  In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i to update (S1241). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242). Then, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1244). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). Then, this process is completed. Here, if the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, even if the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1247). It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1248). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1248: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to OFF (S1249). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1248, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

  As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being improperly passed by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality process (S1113), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). Then, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

  In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1265). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1267).

  If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). Then, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65, and to prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if it is the big hit B.

  In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1271), and then this process is ended.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 79, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1402). As described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), the power-off process in S1514 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1514 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1402: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1514 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1516, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 of FIG. 80). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore, the process of S1404 to S1406 is performed and then S1408 is executed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset (started without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1409, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1409 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404 when the processing of S1408 is reached through the processing of S1406 through S1406. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1501 this time has been executed (S1501), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, the process of determining whether 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1502 to S1510, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1512 and the command determination process of S1511 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring / effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1508), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the command determination processing (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). The command determination process (S1511) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 80) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. . In addition, in this processing, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1603). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). When the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special map 1 reserved ball number command or the special map 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is reserved in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In addition, in the processing of S1608, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c which have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere command for notifying the display control device 114. After the processing of S1608 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), or the special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is smashed, every time the start winning is detected or every time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of the detection of the starting winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1608 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether the notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). When it is determined that the notification command is received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this embodiment, "Look at the liquid crystal") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. Yes (S1610).

  Next, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. Then (S1619), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then in the processing of S1603 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 81), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the process of S1709, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the long press effect is started (S1801). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has not started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has started (S1801: Yes), the effect counter is acquired (S1802), and long press is performed from the long press effect lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55 (b)). A navigation pattern is selected (S1803). Next, the display command indicating the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the process of S1805, it is determined whether the SW valid time of the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S1805). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW valid time is greater than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted (S1806) and it is determined whether the frame button is on (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW effective time is to subtract the elapsed time (in the present embodiment, the counter value is subtracted by 1).

  When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether the long press flag 223g is on (S1808). S1809). When it is determined that the long press flag 223g is ON (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring / effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810).

  When it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: No), this processing is ended as it is, and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and the display command indicating that the long press is being performed is set (S1812). Return to main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1807 that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more ( S1813). When it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press off is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, if the long press counter 223h is not determined to be 3 seconds or more (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (the counter value is set to 0 in this embodiment) (S1815), then the long press flag 223g is set to OFF (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Process Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 84, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 84). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S2102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. It is also possible to execute the processing of S2103 to S2105 after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2102 and S2102.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 84. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 94 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 94A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) that are the power-on images are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. Since the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issues a variation effect start instruction from the voice lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. You can Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interruption permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not ON, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305). The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, non-out-of-reach reach, complete disconnection, chance The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (eye) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the S2304 step is executed. Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 87, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2504 is used to measure the time of the fluctuating effect specified in the fluctuating display data table, and when the fluctuating effect in the fluctuating display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside, complete disconnection, chance line) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. However, before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2408), If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2409) and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the back image change command processing (S2409) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). . Then, among the rear surface image discrimination flags provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A to C), the rear surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is turned on, and other rear surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2702), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2702. . If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S2702 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two rear image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2410), and there is an error command. If (S2410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the error command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. The error command process is a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2802), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2802, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S2802 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command indicating long press among unprocessed commands (S2412), and If there is a command indicating pressing (S2412: Yes), long pressing effect processing is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401. Here, the command indicating the long press is the display command indicating the long press navigation pattern set in the process of S1804, the display command indicating the long press in progress set in the process of S1812, and the process of S1814. Corresponds to the display command that indicates that the long press is off.

  Details of the long press effect process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a long press effect process. This long press effect process executes a process corresponding to a command indicating a long press received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the long press effect process (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether or not the command is a long press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the effect is the long press navigation effect (S2901: Yes), the display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  On the other hand, if the long press navigation effect is not determined (S2901: No), it is determined whether the long press command (see S1812 of FIG. 83) is received (S2903). In the process of S2903, if it is determined that the command is a long press command (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of the long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the long press command is not determined (S2903: No), the display data corresponding to the long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), And the processes of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, The command determination process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 88 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and other For the command of, the process of discarding is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3001), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 91. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 91, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalization display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalization display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalization display. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

  In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that defines that (not shown) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3402 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 of FIG. 86 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer updating process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and then receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3506 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the processing proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3507: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3513: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is that of the back face A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image is changed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in step A, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 86B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 103. In the second control example, the contents of the SW variation pattern are changed with respect to the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of long-pressing the frame button 22 is described to be executed in the SW variation pattern, but in the second control example, an effect of catching a fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22. The difference is that is executed. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long-press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and the capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the moving directions of the fish and net displayed in the SW variation pattern in the second control example are set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed in the SW variation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW variation pattern in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the fish and the net are displayed, respectively, and further, the characters "Press the button according to the fish !!" are displayed. A display mode is displayed in which the player can obtain the fish by pressing the frame button 22 at the position where the fish enters the net. Further, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed, and the color can be changed at high speed (for example, speed of 1 square per 0.5 s) by one square at a time (for example, from blue to red. Variable) and displayed. There are 6 scales, and the letters "GET" are displayed on the 3rd and 6th scales from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state in which the color of the scale is variable, the display timing is such that the fish is just inside the net.

  On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled so as to move and be displayed in the moving direction set by the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but the display is controlled so that the fish is located in the net at the timing when the position of the indicator “GET” of the indicator is changed.

  This makes it easier for the player to understand not only the positional relationship between the fish and the net, but also the timing at which the indicator changes, making it easier to understand when to press the frame button 22 and participate in the production of the SW variation pattern. It can be played easily. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing when the fish is displayed at the position of the net with the indicator. In addition, although the indicator is always displayed in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the indicator may be displayed when the expectation of the jackpot is high and not displayed when it is low. With such a configuration, by displaying the indicator, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased, and further the jackpot effect can be performed while the player can catch the fish.

  FIG. 97C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the value of the effect counter 223f is set by allocating the value to the capture effects A to C when the hit determination result is a hit, and to the capture effects D to F when the result is a win. Has been done. The capture effects A to C are configured so that the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing when the fish is inside the net, and are set as effects that allow the fish to be captured. On the other hand, the capture effects D to F are shorter than the period (period) when the fish enters the net, which is shorter than the period required to detect that the frame button 22 is pressed by pressing the frame button 22. Since it is set, it is set to be impossible to capture.

  In the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, if the result of the determination is wrong, even if the frame button 22 is accidentally pressed at the timing when the net and the fish match, the display is shifted. That is, the effect that the fish could be caught is not displayed. However, not limited to this, at a timing when the fish and the net match, the frame button 22 is instantaneously excluded (for example, a matching display period of 0.2 s) from the valid period, and the control is performed. It is possible to reduce the load of performing the shift display.

  In the capture effect A and the capture effect D, a display mode is set in which the fish and the net are moved laterally at random positions at high speed and displayed. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net are moved and displayed at random positions. The capture effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net are diagonally moved to random positions and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the hit determination result is a hit, it is set to be more easily selected than when the capture effect A and the capture effect B are out of alignment. Therefore, the player can predict the hit / miss determination result based on the moving direction of the fish and the net (that is, the type of capture effect). Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the effect of the SW variation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is selected by lot based on the selection of the SW variation pattern, but the SW variation pattern to be selected may be set in advance. . Further, in this control example, the moving direction of the fish and the net is configured to be set according to the type of capture effect, but the moving direction is not set in advance, and the display position is updated every time the display position of the fish and the net is updated. May be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the display positions of the fish and the net that are currently displayed, the moving direction and the moving distance may be determined by lottery and displayed. With this configuration, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and the player can be provided with a fresh effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example (see FIG. 54B) in that the long press flag 223g and the long press counter 223h are deleted. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process in Second Control Example>
In the control process in the second control example, the contents of the control process in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are changed from those in the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 99. The second control example is different from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 99, S1520). To do. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the capture effect, which is the SW variation pattern, is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is the SW variation pattern (variation pattern of capture effect). When it is determined that it is the variation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of the capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f that has acquired the content of the capture effect from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the result of the hit determination corresponding to the selected SW variation pattern ( S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). By outputting this display command to the display control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The SW valid time set in the SW variation pattern is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i (S1825). Then, the process of S1826 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the processing of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (S1826). When it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S1826: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S1828). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating SW pressing is set (S1829). The SW valid time is reset to 0 which is an initial value. As a result, the SW effective time is reset together with the operation of the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the multiple effects from being changed and the player from being confused. On the other hand, in the process of S1826, when it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (S1826: No) or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is off in the process of S1828 (S1828: No), this process To finish.

  In the control example, the frame button 22 is pressed once in the capture effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be set a plurality of times.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Control Example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. In the second control example, command determination processing (FIG. 87, S2302) is command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and display setting processing (FIG. 91, S2303) is display setting processing in the first control example. 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 100, the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example, the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example, and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are deleted. Are different in that each is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2410, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2410: No), it is determined whether the command indicating that it is related to the SW effect is received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to the display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), the display command indicating the SW pressing indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like.

  When it is determined in the process of S2414 that the command related to the SW effect has been received (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). The SW effect process (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect process (S2415). In the SW effect process, a process of executing setting of corresponding display data or the like is performed based on the command of the SW effect (capture effect) received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the command indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed. .

  In the SW effect processing (FIG. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command is one of the capture effects A to F which is the SW effect (S2911). If it is a command indicating any of capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2911, when it is determined that the command does not indicate any of capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913). If it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the stop of the displayed content of the capture effect is set (S2914). Then, this process is completed.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, the positions of the net and the fish in the capture effect are fixed at the displayed positions for a certain period of time (in this control example, the initially set SW effective time elapses). It will continue to be displayed until (the same period as the period up to) has elapsed. After that, when the fish can be stopped at a position inside the net, a display mode indicating that the fish has been caught (for example, the character "Get !!") is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish is stopped at a position other than the position inside the net, a display mode indicating that the fish could not be captured (for example, the character “Failure to capture !!”) is displayed.

  Next, the display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this display setting process 2 (S2330). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. The difference is that. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the processing of S3005 is executed, the SW effect display setting processing is executed (S3030). The SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether the capture effect is being displayed means that the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW valid time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. It indicates whether it is a period.

  If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), it is determined whether the indicator is variably displaying the color of the scale corresponding to “Get” (S3032). When the scale of Get is variably displayed on the indicator (S3032: Yes), the display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data are matched is set (S3033). Then, this process is completed. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set in accordance with the display coordinates of the fish data. With such a configuration, the display positions of the fish and the net can be matched with each other at the timing when the scale of the Get indicator is changed. In the present control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period in which the indicator is displayed in Get is set to be longer than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button is timed. It is set so that a fish can be caught by pressing 22. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period in which the indicator is displayed on Get is set to be shorter than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 can be pressed at any timing. It is constructed so that it cannot be captured.

  In the present embodiment, the captureable state and the non-captureable state are set by changing the time when the indicator is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the capture effects D to F, the frame button 22 is captured at the capture timing. When is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that the fish cannot be captured.

  Further, in the present control example, the success of the capture is configured to notify the jackpot of the result of the success / failure determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the success of the capture gives the player a point to be used in the game as a game privilege. Alternatively, a URL for downloading a standby image used by a mobile phone, a three-dimensional code may be displayed, or a special background image may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect in which the capture is successful even when the result of the hit determination is out. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

  In the processing of S3032, when the indicator is variably displayed at a position other than the position corresponding to Get (S3032: No), it is determined whether it is the timing at which the indicator variably displays the next graduation. (S3034). When it is determined that the indicator is the timing at which the next scale is variably displayed (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data for displaying the fish and the coordinate data for displaying the net are selected. The moving direction is set in the moving direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is acquired, and the number of moving coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match each other (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same processing as S3035 is executed again (S3037). Thereby, when the indicator is not on the scale of Get, it is possible to suppress the problem that the display positions of the fish and the net match and the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the processing of S3034, if the timing of the indicator scale is not variable (S3034: No), or if it is determined that the position data does not match in the processing of S3036 (S3036: No), this processing ends. .

  In this way, although the movement direction set in the capture effect is set, the display positions of the fish and the net are randomly set by lottery, so that the display of the fish and the net can be irregular. . On the other hand, the variable indicator is preset in the display data table corresponding to the SW variation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be regularly changed and displayed.

  In this control example, the display positions of the fish and the net are configured to be determined by lottery each time the display positions are updated, but the present invention is not limited to this and is configured to be preset in the display data table like the indicator. You may.

  Further, in the present control example, the moving direction of the fish is defined by the type of the selected capture effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the positions of the fish and the net may be randomly set by lottery. Good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In the first control example, regardless of the game state (probability variation game state, time saving game state, etc.), the timing at which the special symbol starts changing when the holding ball is not stored is configured to be constant. However, the second control example is different in that the processing is executed so that the timing of the start of fluctuation varies depending on the game state. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
The electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 is changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, a weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53C) in the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The weight counter 203u, when the number of holding balls is 0 when the time is shortening (in the case of the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state), for counting the delay time for delaying the variation start timing of the second special symbol. It is a counter.

  This weight counter 203u, when it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 0 when the time is shortening, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314 of FIG. 106). reference). Further, when the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, it is decremented by 1 and updated every time the short-time / medium-time variation process (S231 in FIG. 106) is executed.

  In this way, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 during the time saving, and if the variation of the special symbol is not executed, then the game ball enters the second winning opening 640. Even if it does, the fluctuation start is delayed for 1 second. Here, the second winning hole 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric winning object 640a is in an open state, a game ball can be easily won in the second winning opening 640. In this case, it is easy to win two or more game balls in a single open state. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter at once with the number of holding balls is 0, once the first game ball enters, the variation start of the second special symbol is set immediately. , The number of holding balls of the second special symbol is determined to be 0, and it becomes easy to select a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time. As a result, the efficiency of the game is reduced and the player is made uncomfortable despite the reduced working hours.

  However, in the characteristic configuration of the present control example, the timing of the start of fluctuation is delayed by 1 second by the weight counter 203u, so if the electric accessory 640a is opened during that time, a plurality of game balls are consecutive. Then, when entering the ball, it is possible to suppress the problem that the first special variation is started because the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined to be zero.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the number of the holding balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the state of variably stopping during the time saving, it is configured to set the delay time of 1 second, but is not limited thereto. It may be configured to set a delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds which is a variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the start of variation of the second special symbol until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is more opened, and it is possible to delay until the timing at which the game ball wins the second winning opening 640. . In addition, the delay time may be set in accordance with the timing when the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set. In this case, even if the delay time is short, it is possible to effectively discriminate that the number of holding balls is zero and select a relatively long variation pattern. Further, it is not limited to the time slot and the second winning opening 640.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 55A, in the variation pattern selection table 202b, a relatively long variation pattern is set to be easily selected when the number of holding balls is 0 to 2. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time for delaying until the number of holding balls becomes three or more.

  Further, in the present control example, in the time-saving game state, the variation start of the second special symbol is configured to be delayed, but the invention is not limited to this, it may be a probability variation game state, and the timing to be delayed is determined by lottery. Alternatively, the number may be delayed when the number of reserved balls is equal to or less than a certain number (for example, one). Further, not limited to the second special symbol, it may be configured to delay with the first special symbol. Further, at the end timing of the jackpot game, by delaying the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol, it is configured to suppress the problem that it is determined that there is no reserve ball number of the second special symbol and fluctuation starts Good.

  In the present control example, it is configured to delay the timing of the fluctuation start, but not limited to this, the fixed time of the special symbol during the fluctuation (the period from when the fluctuation time elapses until the fluctuation is determined, That is, the period from when the symbol is fixedly stopped until it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S202 of FIG. 64) is set to be variable, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored, The period may be set to be long.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is made to delay when the time is shortened, but at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the period until setting of fluctuation start every time (holding ball is discriminated to set fluctuation start It may be configured to set a longer period). Further, regardless of the game state, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the timing for setting the variation start of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Regarding Control Process in Third Control Example>
Next, the control process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111). The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third control example. In the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111) in the third control example, the processes of S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is shortening (S231). During the time saving, it is determined whether the probability variation game state or the time saving game state. When it is determined that the time is shortening (S231: Yes), the time-shortening fluctuation process is executed (S232).

  Details of the time saving medium variation processing (S232) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving medium fluctuation processing (S232). In the time saving process (FIG. 106, S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311). If the weight counter 203u is greater than 0, it means that the delay time has already been set for the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is subtracted by -1 and set (S312). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S311, when it is determined that the weight counter 203u is 0 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e which is the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 0. It is determined whether or not (S313). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S313, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this processing ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After the processing of the time saving medium fluctuation processing (FIG. 106, S232) is executed, the processing of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S233). If the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the process of S203 is executed.

  In this way, until the weight counter 203u is executed, the variation start of the special symbol is not set, so that the variation of the second special symbol is suppressed from being suspended from 0 to 2 during the time saving and is suppressed from being executed. it can. In the present control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is set to 1 second, but not limited to this, it is a time longer than the fluctuation time (3 seconds in the present control example) of the normal symbol during the time saving 5 It may be configured to set the seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably control so that the variation start of the second special symbol is set after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 or more. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game efficiency is deteriorated during the time saving because it is determined that the number of reserved balls is small (0 to 2) and a relatively long variation pattern is selected.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. In the fourth control example, with respect to the first control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times during the fluctuation period of one special symbol (stops by oscillating) to change the special symbol a plurality of times. As such, it is different in that a pseudo-effect is set. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect is a variation of one special symbol, by temporarily stopping the third symbol one or more times and displaying the variation again, as if the variation of one is multiple variations. It is a production to show to the player.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is started, the fluctuation is changed at a low speed (dynamic display) that enables the identification of the symbol from the start of the fluctuation, and then the variation of the type of the symbol is difficult to identify. The speed becomes a high-speed fluctuation (dynamic display), and a temporary stop display is displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (b). FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode in the case where the temporary stop display is performed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the third symbol is slightly shaken up and down and changed, and the character is displayed on the front side thereof. The static symbols are displayed overlapping each third symbol. This static symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is visible. In addition, the stationary symbol is displayed at the timing of the variable display immediately before being temporarily stopped from the state in which the third symbol is changing at high speed before being temporarily stopped. Specifically, when being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is displayed semi-transparently, and the background image is transparent and visible. Then, immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically, 0.5 seconds before, the semitransparent display is canceled and the display is made in an opaque state. At that display timing, a still symbol is added and displayed. In addition, this static symbol is not displayed in a swaying manner like the third symbol and is displayed statically, so that the player is not temporarily stopped, but whether the third symbol is definitely stopped or not. You can feel like

  Therefore, the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect can be made to be felt by the player as if it was a fixed stop, and it can be displayed as if the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

  In this control example, the static symbol is the same symbol for each third symbol, but it may be a different symbol or shape. Further, the brightness of the third symbol displayed on the back surface may be displayed lower than the brightness of the static symbol. By displaying in this way, the still symbol can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be made to feel as if the player has definitely stopped.

  In this control example, the static symbols are only displayed as characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the identification number of the third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 for 7 symbols) is attached. You may comprise so that it may be displayed. With this configuration, the stationary symbol can be made to appear as if it were the third symbol, and the player can be made to appear more like the fixed stop.

<Regarding Control Process in Fourth Control Example>
Next, a control process in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the first control example. Differences in points. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. The difference is that. With respect to other configurations, the same processing as that of the first control example is executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 109, the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040) which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), a process of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol is executed when the pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo continuous effect, the timing of temporarily stopping the design is set in advance in a variation pattern, and is automatically set by defining the display data table.

  In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect variation display is being performed. When it is determined that the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). When it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of temporary stop of symbols (S3043: Yes), still image data is set to the symbol position for temporary stop (S3043). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, the still image data is set to overlap the symbol information in the display data table. In this way, by executing the still image data to be displayed in an overlapping manner at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type of the still image data can be changed by the player's operation of the frame button 22, or other lottery, It can be variably set according to a notice display or the like, and can be a wide variety of still images.

  In this control example, in the pseudo continuous effect, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number of times set in advance in the variation pattern, and then the third symbol is always in the reach display mode, and the display mode of the super reach is displayed. To be done. In the third symbol that is temporarily stopped, the still symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the player can identify the number of times the temporary stop is performed. At the first time, yellow is displayed, at the third time is set to red, and at the fourth time, gold is set and displayed. In practice, if the still image is displayed without swinging fluctuation, it becomes easier for the player to recognize as the number of times of actual fluctuation display instead of temporary stop. Therefore, the player expects that the variation display of the special symbols will be displayed as a super reach in the variation display of the special symbols when the static symbol indicating the number of consecutive times is displayed in the variation of the plurality of special symbols. You can In this control example, the larger the number of temporary stops, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is (it is easy to select when the result of the hit determination is a jackpot), and the temporary stop is executed four times. It is composed of only the pseudo continuous effect in which the result of winning / judging is a big hit. Therefore, when the red still symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect that the still image will be displayed even in the next variation, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, the static image is set to non-display at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily set the change of the third symbol.

  The still image is not limited to the character of the present control example, and may be a character or may be displayed in a size that hides the fluctuation fluctuation of the back third pattern. Actually, since it is a temporary stop, the still image may be transmitted so that the third symbol on the back side can be visually recognized so that the third symbol on the back side is slightly changed. .

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. In each control example described above, it is determined whether or not the probability variation game state is given by the operation of the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 in which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game. Was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V winning device 900 in which the gaming ball can enter during the small hitting game. It is different in that it is configured as follows. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower central part in place of the second winning port 640, and the V winning device 900 is replaced in the right instead of the first variable winning device 65 in the control examples described above. It is different in that it is provided in the lower part, the second winning port 640 is provided in the upper part of the V winning device 900, and the electric accessory 640a is provided on the right side of the second winning port 640. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the first variable winning device 65 has the same structure as the second winning port in each control example described above. Further, the V winning device 900 is different in that a retaining member 900n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-described control examples, and the other structures are the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, differences between the game boards 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right part of the game board 13.

  In the lower right of the game board 13 in this control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters by natural fall. The second winning opening 640 is provided at a position (lower left position) where it cannot be played. Further, nails are provided from the left portion to the upper right portion of the second winning opening 640, and these nails have a predetermined interval to the above-described normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (an interval at which a game ball cannot pass). It is provided in. Further, the electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (or the right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning opening 640.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a operates in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by performing a retracting operation (closing operation) backward, the game ball does not be guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

  That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured so that the game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a is opened. Further, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened, if the opening time (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the game ball is being guided, so 2 The player will not enter the winning hole 640.

  In the present embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 to the second winning opening 640, the game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. Although it is configured not to enter the ball 640, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same configuration may be adopted by covering with a case body. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as changing the distance between the nails so that the game ball can pass through. Further, the case body, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the second winning opening 640 may be integrated into a case body, or only a part of them may be integrated into a case body.

  In addition, a shielding member that interlocks with the electric accessory 640a is provided to close the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (retracted state), and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (extended state). The second winning opening may be opened. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 even when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

  Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is configured to be changed based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a, whether or not to enter the second winning port 640. Not limited to this, a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through the passage port, a game ball that has just been shot, etc.) enters the second winning port 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It may be configured such that whether or not to enter is changed.

  The V winning device 900 is provided below the second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like described above. This V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 900a, a predetermined game ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out to the player. Be done. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 900a passes a V winning switch 900e3, which will be described later, a jackpot game is awarded.

  At the upper part of the V winning opening 900a, an opening / closing door 900f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side is provided as in the above-described first control example, and the opening / closing door 900f1 should be opened. Then, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed, so that the game ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. Details of the V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. The opening / closing door 900f1 is opened / closed by a V inlet solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown.

  The upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 and the game ball rolling surface on the upper portion of the V winning device 900 are provided with a structure for suppressing the momentum of the rolling game balls (not shown). Specifically, use a material with a high coefficient of friction (eg, rubber, uneven material) to reduce the rolling speed, or use a structure in which rolling gaming balls collide to reduce the rolling speed. There is a structure that extends the rolling distance by guiding balls in the depth direction of the board. This is a structure for collecting a large number of game balls into the V winning device when the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened.

  On the left side of the V winning device 900, in the lower center of the game board, a first winning port 64 is provided, and below the first winning port 64, a first variable winning device 65 is provided. The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in the big hit game (for example, 16 times in the case of a big hit C), and a predetermined amount is obtained by entering a game ball into the first variable winning device 65a. Gaming balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. In this control example, a device having the same structure as the second winning opening 640 described above in the first control example is treated as the first variable winning a prize device 65, and therefore, the same portions have the reference numerals changed from 640 to 65. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 are distributed to a normal discharge channel 900e1 and a special discharge channel 900e2 described later. To do. In the V winning device 900 in the present control example, the retention member 900n is provided on the special discharge flow path 65e2 of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example, and the V switch 900e3 instead of the probability variation switch 65e3. Is provided and is otherwise the same. In the present control example, a device having the same structure as the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example is treated as the V winning device 900, and therefore, for the same part, the reference numeral is changed from 65 to 900. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, the game ball that has passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2. In this control example, the retention member 900n is provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2. By this staying member 900n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination area 900h3, which is a destination area where the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 by the switching member 900h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 and is normally discharged. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

  The staying member 900n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The staying member 900n operates in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a staying solenoid 209a (not shown). This retention member 900n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination area 900h3 by moving forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (opening), the game balls staying in the sorting destination area 900h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  Here, in the V winning device 900, the game ball can enter by opening the opening / closing door 900f1 during the small hitting game. Further, the staying member 900n becomes a closing operation during a small hit game (when it is possible to enter the V winning device 900), and after the small hit game is over (no new entering the V winning device 900 is possible). The opening operation is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time (after being enabled) (after 3 seconds in this control example). That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 even if the switching member 900h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 from becoming excessive.

  The game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 will pass through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probability variation game is configured based on the passage of the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the present control example, the jackpot game is configured to be imparted based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 ( (See S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138, and S4904 in FIG. 142, which will be described later)).

  In the present control example, the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 are configured to be limited to one ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls can be retained in the sorting destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the staying member may be operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game, so that the number of restricted game balls may be changed as appropriate.

  With reference to FIG. 113 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 900e2 will be described. FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 900k is inactive and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 900e2.

  In this control example, the retention member 900n provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 is configured to operate even when the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 900k is operated, so that it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

  When the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, there is no influence of the staying member 900n newly provided in this control example, and the operation is the same as the above-described first control example, so a detailed description will be given. Is omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in terms of electrical configuration is one of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113. Part and a part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added), and a stay solenoid 209a is added as the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. However, the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

  The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a stay solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the stay solenoid 209a is used to operate the stay member 900n in the V winning device 900. The solenoid (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k) described in each control example described above is handled as a part of the other solenoid 209z.

  As other changes, ROM 202 and RAM 203 in main controller 110, a part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in audio lamp controller 113, and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in display controller 114 are changed (added). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, each counter in this control example will be described in detail. This control example is different in that a small hit type counter C5 is added in addition to the counters in the first control example described above.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this control example), and after reaching the maximum value (99), returns to 0. This small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the special winning of the RAM 203 is performed. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Then, the small hit type is selected based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

  The other counters are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

  The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116 (a)). This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

  In addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the RAM 203 in this control example includes a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit medium flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit medium flag 203w2, a V passing big hit type value 203x1, and a V flag. It has at least 203x2, a normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y. Note that, in this control example, the probability variation flag 203e is not necessary and is therefore omitted.

  The big hit start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a big hit start timing. This big hit start flag 203v1 is set to ON when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referred to in the big hit control process 2 to determine whether it is the big hit start timing. (See S4701 in FIG. 140), and when it is determined that it is the big hit start timing in the big hit control process 2, it is set to OFF (see S4702 in FIG. 140). As a result, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in the drawings, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined in each of the control examples described above.

  The big hit medium flag 203v2 is a flag used for determining whether or not a big hit is being made, that is, whether a big hit game is being executed. This big hit medium flag 203v2, like the big hit start flag 203h described above, is set to ON when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (see S4704 in FIG. 140), in the jackpot control process 2, when it is determined that it is a jackpot end timing, It is set to OFF (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

  The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, in the small hit control process, it is referred to for determining whether it is the small hit start timing (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the small hit start timing. Is set to off (see S4802 in FIG. 141).

  The small hitting flag 203w2 is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hitting is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process similarly to the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, the small hit control process is referred to for determining whether or not the small hit is in progress (S4807 in FIG. 141), and is turned off when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. It is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

  The V passing jackpot type value 203x1 is used to set a jackpot type to be given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. This V-big hit big hit type value 203x1 is set according to the small hit type in the small hit start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V passing big hit type value 203x1 is acquired in the V passing process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138). This V passing big hit type value 203x1 is cleared in the small hit ending process executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

  The V flag 203x2 is a flag for storing that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 at the end of the small hit. is there. This V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the big hit type value 203x1 at the time of V passing in the V passing process (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138), and referred to in the small hit ending process (S4902, S4904 in FIG. 142). After being referenced, it is set to off (S4906 in FIG. 142).

  The normal symbol time saving first flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the variation of the normal symbol in the time saving game is the first time. This normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is set to ON when the jackpot type is C at the timing of jackpot end in the jackpot control process 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the regular symbol variation process. (See S642 in FIG. 136). Although the details will be described later, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is turned on with reference to the normal symbol variation process (S641: Yes in FIG. 136), the electric accessory 640a is for a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that a large number of game balls can be inserted into the second winning opening 640 (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is off (S641: No in FIG. 136), a little game is played to the second winning opening in which the electric accessory is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). The ball is set so that it can enter the ball (S644 in FIG. 136).

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 117. 117 (a) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117 (d) are schematic views of the contents of the second random number table 202c. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the first winning random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the first winning opening 64 is a big hit. Special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is for determining whether or not it is a big hit. And a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 ( It is a table in which a judgment value) is set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "0", and if "0", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3," it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 399”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), a random number value (judgment value) that is determined as a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "0", and if "0", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 398", and if it is "1 to 398", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, if it is determined to be "399", it is determined to be out of position.

  As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, the random number value that is a big hit for the first special symbol is 1, and the total number of random number values is 400. Among them, the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot for the first special symbol is "1/400". Further, since the total number of random numbers for small hits is 3, the probability of small hits for the first special symbol is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, during the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the random number value which is a big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 400, and it is a big hit. Since the total number of random number values is 11, the probability of being a jackpot of the second special symbol is "1/400". Also, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398, the probability of being a small hit for the second special symbol is "398/400".

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the per-second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, the normal symbol hits and It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

  As in the above control examples, if it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 112 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in the present control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by performing a retracting operation (closing operation) backward, the game ball does not be guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

  As will be described in detail later, the electric accessory 640a in this control example is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds during the time saving, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds during the time saving. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a win when the time is not shortening, the game ball cannot be won into the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the second winning hole even though he / she is not in the time saving period (the jackpot with the time saving is not displayed).

  Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a game ball drop area a (a in FIG. 112) that receives the game ball that naturally drops on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not naturally drop. And, it has a game ball guiding region b for guiding the game ball rolling from the game ball falling region a to the second winning opening 640.

  In other words, the length of the game ball guiding area b (the distance the game ball rolls) is at least the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the electric accessory 640a is not in the time saving state. By designing to be shorter than the distance that the game ball rolls during the longer and shorter time opening time (0.5 seconds), the game ball that falls on the electric accessory 640a can be reliably placed in the first opening operation during the time saving. It is possible to prevent the game ball dropped on the electric winning combination 640a from winning in the second winning hole in the opening operation when the player is guided to the second winning hole 640 and not in the time saving period.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118. 118A to 118C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first winning type selection table 202b selects a special jackpot jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the first winning opening 64, and a jackpot type of the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), during the big hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit C (16R hour short win big hit) is selected, In the case of "50 to 99", the big hit D (16R hour short no big hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), during the big hit based on the second winning opening 640, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"), the big hit C (16R hour reduction) Big hit) is selected.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 119. 119 (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hit type selection table 202e is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting the type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 1," the small hit C (V passage possible) is selected, In the case of "2-99", the small hit E (V cannot pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the value of the first hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49" at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit C (V pass is possible). In the case of “50 to 99”, the small hit D (V passable) is selected.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with small hits C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operating, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit E, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operating. The game ball cannot enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits that are given big hits when the game balls pass through the V winning switch 900e3, and the small hits E are small hits that are not given big hits.

  Further, in the present control example, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, and the jackpot to be given after the small hit C is the large jackpot C (16R hour short-lived big hit). The jackpot to be given after D is a jackpot D (16R hour short no jackpot).

  In addition, in the present control example, the type of the big hit to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit, but as a specification other than that, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the gaming ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 so that the jackpot previously won the jackpot is executed. You may By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass the V prize switch 900e3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)), At least the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 is defined. In the present control example, the probability variation state is not provided, and thus the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Further, the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the time saving variation pattern table 202d4, variation patterns during time saving are defined as shown in FIG. 120 (d). Specifically, during the time saving, if the deviation is a deviation, the fluctuation pattern is a deviation (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and if it is a small hit, it is a long or small hit (10 seconds). In the case of a big hit, it is stipulated to be a big hit (20 seconds). In addition, the variation pattern in the case of the deviation during the shortening of time may be set to the long deviation (10 seconds), and may have the same length as the small hit.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 124 (b)). . Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900. The V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when the V entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the detection opening 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). The V entrance passage counter 203j is referred to when setting the display effect command in the V passing process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the V passing process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

  The round number cumulative counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. The round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and the continuation determination counter 223m is set when the jackpot end command is received. If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is the third symbol display. It will be displayed on the device 81.

  The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used to determine whether or not the big hit or the small hit continues, and is used to determine whether to initialize the above-described round number accumulation counter 223k. The continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when a small hit start command of small hit C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is subtracted by 1 when a small hit start command of small hit D is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). The continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when a jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144), and when the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, when the jackpot D is continuous twice, the jackpot and the jackpot are small. It is determined that the winning continuation has ended, and the round number cumulative counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, the flow of the big hit in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In this control example, the game state is divided into a special figure 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 1) game state (left-handed game) and a special figure 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 2) game state (right-handed game) To be Special Figure 1 game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is shot aiming at the first winning opening 64. A lottery for the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 64, and if the jackpot type of the result of the lottery is jackpot C, the winning in the second winning opening 640 is achieved after the jackpot ends. An easy time saving game state (described as time saving in FIG. 122) is given. When shifting to the time saving game state, a right hitting game is performed in which a right-handed hit is performed in which a game ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second winning opening 640 arranged on the right side of the game board 13. On the other hand, if the big hit type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is big hit D, the special time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, so that the special figure 1 game state is performed again. In addition, in the present control example, there is also a route in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit type is a small hit C, a big hit (V prize). In this case, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a time saving game state.

  Next, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 640, is set to have a higher jackpot probability that is in a more advantageous state for the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. ing. In this control example, there is a hold storage function for holding and storing the right to receive the lottery based on the second special symbol, while the second special symbol is changing (specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. During the period from the stop display to the confirmation display), if the game ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second special symbol that is currently changing the right to perform the lottery based on the win It can be held until the finalized display (holding upper limit = 1).

  Next, of the special figure 2 game state, the flow of the big hit in the time saving medium game is explained. In this state, the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 119, the lottery contents of the second special symbol are mostly distributed to the small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a big hit (V prize) via a small hit in order to increase the big hit probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the time saving game state is given again after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the small hit type is a small hit D, the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and therefore the game shifts to the non-time saving period in which the time saving game in the special figure 2 game state is not given.

  Next, of the special figure 2 game state, the flow of the big hit in the non-time saving medium game will be described. In this state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol held and stored by the holding storage function of the second special symbol is executed. As a result of the lottery, when the small hit type is small hit C, the time saving game is given after the end of the big hit, and thus the time saving game state is entered. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no pending storage, so that the game state shifts to the special figure 1 game state. It should be noted that since this state is in a non-time saving state, new reserved storage cannot be acquired.

  In the control example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the symbol hit of the jackpot type C of the jackpot C may be selected.

  That is, the lottery based on the second special symbol, which is a lottery advantageous to the player, is designed to be performed at least twice using the holding function described above. Unless the small hit D is selected twice in succession, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 game state.

  FIG. 123 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning in the second winning opening 640 to occurrence of a big hit game in this control example, and (a) shows that the lottery result based on winning in the second winning opening 640 is small. In the case of winning, the jackpot (V prize) by passing through the special discharge route 900e2, (b) is for explaining the case where the lottery result based on the winning of the second winning opening is the jackpot (per symbol). is there. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 640, the main controller 110 performs the variation control of the second special symbol. At that time, in the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing is executed. The time of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid, the flow passage solenoid 900k, and the retention solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on ( 113 (a) state). In this state, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900, so that a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 900, and one of them enters the stay member 900n. It becomes a staying state (900h in FIG. 113), and the other game balls normally flow down the discharge flow path 900e1. The time for the small hit effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

  Next, the flow of the small hit control by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the total time for the small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit control is started, the V inlet solenoid among the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed. By closing the opening / closing door 900f1, a new game ball will not be won in the V winning device 900. Then, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the stay solenoid 209a is turned off, the stay member 900n is opened (retracted state), and the game ball stayed by the stay member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. I will do it. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the gaming balls existing in the V winning device 900 when the set time t1 has passed to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1. Only the game balls retained by the retention member 900n in the device 900 flow down the special discharge flow path 900e2. Then, the set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to allow the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

  In this way, by driving the stay solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference, even if the game ball is stayed by the stay member 900n within the movable range of the guide piece 900h2, the guide piece 900h2 and the stay member 900n are retained. Since it can be surely caused to flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 without interfering with the retained game balls, the device can be made compact.

  Finally, based on the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 passing the V winning switch 900e3, the main controller 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and opens the specific winning opening. To be done.

  Next, the points different from FIG. 123 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In FIG. 123 (b), the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning in the second winning opening 640 is a big hit (per symbol), so that the V winning device 900 is not operated. That is, after the variation control of the first special symbol by the main controller 110 is completed, the jackpot control is started. Meanwhile, in the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing is executed.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (a) and the effect time performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (b) will be described. In FIG. 123 (a), the total of the variation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit production time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b) the variation time of the second special symbol. Is set in 20 seconds. This is the timing when the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V winning or the symbol described above, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a ) Is to match the opening timing, and by configuring in this way, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect performed by the display control device is enjoyed to the end. You can

  Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 (a) is an effect image at the start of the time saving game in this control example. The variable display area showing the variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol is on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery hold number of the second special symbol is on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved display area shown, a comment area for guiding the comment display and the right-handed game on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81, and a production area where the story is developed along with the progress of the game in the central portion. Has been. In FIG. 124 (a), since there is no game ball entering the second winning opening 640, the variable display area shows that the game is not changing, but the hold display area shows that there is no hold. The display is shown, and the current mode name and right-handed notification display are displayed in the comment area.

  FIG. 124 (b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. The difference from FIG. 124 (b) is that a display indicating that the second special symbol is changing is displayed in the variable display area, and a branch road is displayed in the effect area. During the second special symbol change, the effect area is an effect in which the character goes deep into the cave, and the game ball is won in the second winning opening 640, that is, when the hold area is displayed as reserved. , Take one of the forks. In this way, by allowing the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640, the game ball during the change of the second special symbol. The firing stop is prevented, and the second special symbol can be reliably held. In this control example, the control for selecting and advancing one of the forked roads based on the display of withholding is shown, but the forked car may be advanced each time a game ball is won in the second winning opening, or the player may proceed. May select a path to proceed by operating a predetermined operation means, and control to proceed to the selected path due to the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 640 that occurs after the selection is completed. . Further, the color tone and design of the forked road may be changed based on the lottery result of the changing second special symbol and the held lottery result of the second special symbol. By doing this, the player can participate in the development of the story that progresses in the production area, and since it is possible to taste the production that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game during the change of the second special symbol. It is possible to further prevent the ball from being stopped.

  Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after the fluctuation stop when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. A door is displayed in the effect area, a confirmation display indicating a small hit is displayed in the variable display area, a display indicating that there is a hold is displayed in the hold display area, and a right-handed notification display is displayed in the comment area. When the main effect image is displayed, since the V winning device 900 is open at the lower right side of the game board surface, a comment is displayed to hit the V winning device 900 by hitting right, and the V winning device is displayed. Based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900, an effect in which the character destroys the door is executed in the effect area. Further, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the held lottery result of the second special symbol.

  In addition, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the changing display area is displayed as changing. Therefore, by making the display area small, or by providing other than the third symbol display device 81, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit. You can

  Moreover, if the variation pattern when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is out is 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in the present control example), the effect image in which the door does not come out may be displayed at this timing.

  Next, FIG. 125 (b) is an effect image when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V prize device 900, and in the effect area, FIG. 125 (a). A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area. The types of characters that appear in the door will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. When a monster appears, the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 126 is entered. FIG. 126 (a) is an effect image during a big hit. Since the main attraction of the effect image during the big hit is the battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, a jackpot round number display and a jackpot display during jackpot (not shown) are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) is an effect image when a monster is defeated in a battle effect during a big hit. When the monster is defeated in the battle production, it is in a state where there is at least one more big hit (a lottery result of the second special symbol being held is a big hit or a state where a time-saving game is given after the big hit). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) shows an effect image when a monster is defeated in a battle effect during a big hit. When the monster is defeated in the battle production, it is in a state of shifting to the normal game state (the state in which the second special symbol is not reserved and the time saving game is not given after the jackpot). Note that a so-called revival effect may be provided in which after the effect image to be lost in the battle is displayed, the character is revived to subdue the monster. In addition, if the player does not win V during the small hit, the door will not open (not shown).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a character appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125A will be described. 127 (a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is "0").

  Figure 127 (b) is the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that has been held are both short-lived small hits (the small hit type counter value C5 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2 is "0 49 ”) is displayed. In other words, it is a premiere effect in which a jackpot is awarded at least three more times.

  The effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above, but any jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 123, starts the jackpot state. The same timing is set, and since the timing of displaying the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same timing as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 127, the second special symbol lottery is given to the player. The result can be difficult to grasp.

  Also, by performing the display of FIG. 124 (b) and FIG. 125 (a), it is possible to suppress the stop of the game ball firing by the player, to surely obtain the hold of the second special symbol, and to win the V winning device. Can be reliably performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller in fifth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 152. In the fifth control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the point of performing the V entrance passage process and the V passage process in the timer interrupt process, the special symbol variation process in the timer interrupt process, the start winning process, the normal symbol The difference is that a part of the variable processing is changed and the big hit control processing 2 and the small hit control processing are executed in the main processing. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 128, the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the fifth control example. In this timer interrupt process, in each process of S101 to S103, S107, S108 to S109, each process of S101 to S103, S107, S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example. Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process of S104 executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 129), the start winning process of S105 (see FIG. 134), the ordinary symbol variation process of S106 (see FIG. 136) ), A V-entry passing process of S140 (see FIG. 137) and a V-passing process of S141 (see FIG. 138) described below are performed, which is different from the first control example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 129, differences from the first control example of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the processes of S240 to S244 are different from the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special symbol variation start process 2 of S240 is performed instead of the special symbol variation start process of the first control example (S213, see FIG. 64). Details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132.

  The processing of S241 to S242 is performed instead of the processing of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit after the change time has passed (S214: Yes) (S216: Yes), a specific winning opening opening scenario is set based on the big hit type. (S217), the big hit start is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 0, and this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S241, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON, so in the big hit control processing 2 (FIG. 140) described later, whether it is a big hit start timing, whether it is a big hit game or not. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  Further, by setting the time saving medium counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time saving game is finished when the jackpot game is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S243).

  In the process of S243, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is the small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the small hit, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed as in the above-described first control example, and the present process is ended.

  In this control example, as described above, since it is configured to be a small hit in the lottery of each special symbol, when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit by the processing of S243 to 244, the small hit game is started. Is configured to. Details of the processing of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 that is executed in place of the special symbol variation start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (S4001). When the time is not shortening (S4001: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is during the time saving (S4001: Yes), the time saving change start processing (S4003) is executed, and the present processing ends.

  Next, the normal variation start processing (S4002) and the time saving variation start processing (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240) described above will be described.

  First, the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a normal variation start process (S4002) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

  In the normal fluctuation start process, first, the data of the execution area in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). Then, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired type of special symbol, the lottery result is acquired (S4102). Specifically, if it is a lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) is referred to to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit. If the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) is referred to, and the big hit or the small hit is determined. .

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S4103). When the lottery result is a big hit (S4103: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4104). After that, a normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4105), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). After that, the normal small hitting variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4108), and this processing is ended.

  When the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of the normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, the variation pattern at the time of the normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S4110), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the time saving variation start processing (S4003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time saving variation start processing (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This time saving variation start processing (S4003) is different from the above-described normal variation start processing (S4002) in that the display mode for time saving and the variation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , Its detailed description is omitted. The time saving variation pattern determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 120 (d)) as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the small hit start setting process, which is the process added in the fifth control example described above, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a small hitting start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

  In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, a scenario for opening the V inlet solenoid is set (S4301). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C or D (S4302). When it is not the small hit type C or D (S4302: No), the processes of S4303 to S4306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When it is the small hit type C or D (S4302: Yes), the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). When the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the big hit type D is set as the big hit type value at the time of V passage, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  On the other hand, when the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set to the big hit type value during V passage, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When the processing of S4302, S4305 or S4306 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hitting start flag 203w1 and the small hitting medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

  In this start winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to 405 are executed similarly to the first control example described above. When the process of S405 is completed, various counter values are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area (S406). In S406, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  Next, the processes of S407 to S408 are executed. When the process of S408 is finished, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in the present control example, the upper limit of the number of holdings in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1, and thus the configuration is made as described above.

  In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processing of S410 to S411 is executed as in the first control example. When the processing of S411 ends, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area (S412). In S412, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in the present control example is also acquired and stored in the same manner as the processing of S406 described above.

  When the processing of S407, S409, or S412 is completed, prefetch processing 2 (S440) is executed, and this processing is completed.

  Next, the prefetching process 2 (S440) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 shows pre-reading processing 2 (S440) executed in the starting winning processing (see FIG. 134) instead of the pre-reading processing in S413 executed in the starting winning processing (see FIG. 66) of the first control example. It is a flowchart shown.

  In the prefetch process 2, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize (S4401). When there is no new winning (S4401: No), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S4401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402).

  In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4405.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4404), the process proceeds to S4405.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). This normal symbol variation process (S106) eliminates the change in the lottery probability in the lottery of the normal symbol in the first control example described above, so that the process of S640 is executed instead of the processes of S608 to S611. The difference is that the processes of S641 to S644 are executed instead of the process of S616, and the change of the fluctuation time depending on whether or not the time is shortening is eliminated (the processes of S619 and S621 are deleted). Since the other points are the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes of S601 to S607 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S607 is finished, the lottery result is acquired based on the second winning random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high-probability state and the low-probability state in the lottery for ordinary symbols, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is always constant.

  When the process of S640 is completed, the processes of S612 to S615 are executed as in the first control example. In the process of S614, it is determined that it is in the time saving (S614: Yes), in the process of S615, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

  In the process of S641, if it is determined that the normal symbol time-shortening first time flag 203y is on (S641: Yes), in the time-saving game provided, it is the case that the first time normal symbol variation process is executed, In order to win a large number of game balls to the two winning holes 640, the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "5 seconds x 1 time" (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), and during that time, the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, when the first time normal symbol variation process in the time saving game is executed, many game balls enter the second winning opening 640 and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (lottery of the second special symbol) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

  When the process of S642 is finished, the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is set to OFF (S643), and the process proceeds to S620.

  On the other hand, in the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the first normal symbol variation process is executed, and based on the second winning opening 640. Since the number of reserved balls in the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. Is set (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds), and during that time, only some of the game balls that pass through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 have the second winning opening. Will be guided to 640. Therefore, at the time of execution of the normal symbol variation process after the first time in the time saving game, many game balls do not enter the second winning opening 640, but can enter the V winning device 900 arranged below. Therefore, during the time saving game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters only the second winning opening 640 and the game ball does not enter the V winning device 900.

  In addition, the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644 is that the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning opening 640. Not the time, it is the time when a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 can enter the ball. As a result, during the first execution of the normal symbol variation process, even if the game ball is not shot, during the subsequent execution of the normal symbol variation process, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol The number of reserved balls of the lottery can be accumulated up to the upper limit (1 in this control example). On the other hand, the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617 is that the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 can enter the second winning opening 640. It's an impossible time. As a result, when the time saving game is not given, it is possible to realize the game property that the game ball is not inserted into the second winning opening 640.

  When the processing of S617, 643 or S644 is finished, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is finished. As a result, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 3 seconds regardless of whether or not the time is shortening.

  Incidentally, the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to this, and a time saving function may be provided in conjunction with the time saving function of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation time may be set to 2 seconds during the time saving. Further, in the present control example, the condition for ending the operation of the electric accessory 640a is only the lapse of time. The operation of 640a may be terminated. By doing so, when the reserved storage reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately closes, and the first normal symbol time saving operation ends. Then, the second or later normal symbol time saving operation will be started. Therefore, at the start of the small hitting game in which the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being left in the open state for a long time, and the small hitting game can be smoothly performed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the V entrance passage processing (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage processing (S140) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 128).

  In the V entrance passage processing (S140), it is first determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S4501: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process is ended. If the small hit is not in progress (S4502: No), it is the case where the game ball has entered the V winning device 900 even though it is not the small hit game. Therefore, an error command is set (S4503), and this processing is executed. finish.

  The V-entry passing command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hitting game based on the entry into the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

  Next, the V passage processing (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S141). The V passage process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  In the V passage processing, first, a jackpot type value at the time of V passage is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the big hit C (S4602). When it corresponds to the big hit C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the jackpot C does not apply (S4602: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot D applies (S4606). In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the big hit D is applicable (S4606: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit D is set to ON (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604. When the process of S4603 or S4607 ends, the V passage command is set (S4604), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S4605), and this process ends. In the process of S4605, the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 0, whereby the time saving game ends.

  In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the jackpot D does not apply (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and this process ends. In this control example, the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 is a small hit C or a small hit D, and a big hit C or a big hit D is set in the V passing big hit type value. Only if you are. Therefore, if the V passing jackpot type value is not the jackpot C or jackpot D, if the V passing process (S141) executed based on the gaming ball passing through the V winning switch 900e3 is executed, it is illegal. It is considered that this is the case where the game ball is won in the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting the error command in the process of S4608, the output of the error is executed, and the illegal act can be found.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of main processing in the fifth control example. In this main process, the big hit control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the big hit control process (S1004) in the first control example, and the small hit control process (S1041) is executed after the big hit control process 2 (S1040) is executed. It is different in that it is done.

  The other processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example. Detailed description is omitted.

  The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control processing 2 (S1040) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 139), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first variable. It is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4701, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S4701: Yes), the big hit start flag 203v1 is set to OFF (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this process is ended. .

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp is activated. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp controller 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the effect of starting the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S4701: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit is in progress (S4704). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 203v2 is on. In the process of S4704, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S4704: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, if the special symbol is a big hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S4707). . After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls are present in the first variable winning device 65 (for example, the total). When 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S4708, if the condition for closing the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the jackpot end (S4710). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of award balls are paid out than in the normal state is finished, it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot.

  In the process of S4710, if it is the timing of ending the big hit (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit medium flag is set to OFF (S4712).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot C (S4713). In the process of S4713, when it is determined that it was a big hit C (16R time shortened big hit) (S4713: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is set to ON. Then (S4715), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, when it is determined that the big hit D (16R hour short no big hit) (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and the present process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a jackpot end command for display corresponding to the selected display mode of jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the jackpot end effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the processing of S4710, if it is not the timing of ending the big hit (S4710: No), this processing is ended.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1041) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This small hit control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, the execution of various effects according to the small hit, V This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4801, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hitting start command, it sends the display small hitting start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, an effect for starting the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4803 is completed, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S4804), the operation of the staying member is started (S4805), and the present process is terminated.

  The opening scenario referred to in the process of S4804 is set in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 133) described above, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid is set. The 900k opening scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened in all the small hit games, and it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the V winning device 900. On the other hand, only in the small hit C or D in which the flow path solenoid 900k is turned on, the game ball entering the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which the big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which the big hit is not given.

  In addition, the operation of the staying member is started (the staying solenoid 209a is turned on) in the processing of S4805, whereby it becomes possible for one game ball to stay in the sorting destination area 900h3.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, if it is not the timing when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S4806). During the small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, while the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit game of the special symbol) is being made, It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the small hitting game of special symbols. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hitting flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S4804, if the small hit of the special symbol is not in progress (S4804: No), this process is finished as it is.

  In the process of S4806, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S4806: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V entrance closing condition is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after opening the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900, or when the V winning device 900 has a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls in total). When the prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning opening 900a.

  In the process of S4807, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V entrance solenoid is set to OFF in order to close the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 ( (S4808), the stay solenoid 209a is set to OFF in order to end the operation of the stay member (S4809), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for ending the small hit (S4810). Specifically, after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V entrance closing condition is satisfied, it is determined that it is the timing for ending the small hit. As a result, after the operation of the retention member 900n is completed, the small hit end process (the flow path solenoid is turned off) can be executed, so that the game balls retained in the distribution destination area 900h3 are transferred to the V winning switch 900e3. It is possible to reliably enter the ball.

  In the process of S4810, if it is the timing of the small hit end (S4810: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S4811), the small hit end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S4813), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4810, if it is not the timing for ending the small hit (S4810: No), the present process is directly terminated.

  Here, the details of the small hit ending process (S4812) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hit ending process (S4812). The small hitting end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing for ending the small hit.

  In the small hit ending process (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to OFF (S4901), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. Processing for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the winning switch 900e3.

  Specifically, the opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is not turned on (S4902: No), it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 900e3 to the small hitting game ball, so a big hit is awarded. In order to end without performing, the small hit end command is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4909.

  The small hit end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a jackpot end command for display corresponding to the selected display mode of jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the jackpot end effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4906 or S4907 is finished, the value of the V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared (S4908), and the process is finished.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a process based on the reception of a hit-related command is executed in the command determination process 2 (S1530). The other parts are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 143, the command determination processing 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process of performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110, as in the first control example described above.

  In the command determination processing 2 (S1530), the processing of S1601 to S1610 is executed as in the first control example. After that, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and in S1619. Move to processing. On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command is received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1619.

  In the process of S1619, similarly to the first control example, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1619), and then the present process ends.

  Here, the hit related processing (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S1643). The hit related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that the hit related command is received.

  In the hit-related processing, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S5002), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIG. 125 (b), FIG. 127) suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S5003). In the processing of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5005), and this processing is ended.

  In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S5003: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command is received (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S5006: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 or not. (S5008).

  In the processing of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), it means that the jackpot D is executed twice in succession, which is the timing when the jackpot continuation ends. The round accumulation counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S5006, when it is determined that the big hit ending command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether the small hit starting command has been received (S5010).

  In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S5006: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S5011), and then the small hit to be started. It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the processing of S5012, when it is determined that the small hit game to be started is the small hit C (S5012: Yes), the big hit game based on the big hit C is then given, so the number of continuous executions of the big hit D is set. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5012, if it is determined that the small hit C is not (S5012: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit D is (S5014). In the process of S5014, if it is determined that the small hit D (S5014: Yes), since the big hit game based on the big hit D is given, a continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D 223m is decremented by 1 (S5015), and this processing ends. In the process of S5014, when it is determined that the small hit D is not made (S5014: No), this process is finished as it is.

  In the processing of S5010, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S5016).

  In the process of S5016, if it is determined that the small hitting end command is received (S5016: Yes), the display small hitting end command is set in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S5017). , This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5016, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

  In the processing of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the V passage process described later to determine the number of game balls entered into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game.

  After the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set in order to execute an effect (for example, refer to FIG. 125 (a)) based on a ball entering the V winning device 900 during a small hit game (S5020). ), And this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5018, when it is determined that the V-entry passing command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether the V-passing command has been received (S5021).

  In the processing of S5021, when it is determined that the V passage command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V passage processing is executed in order to execute the processing based on the ball entering the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. Then (S5022), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5021, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S5021: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the V passage process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S5022). The V pass process (S5022) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related process (see FIG. 144) that the V pass command is received.

  In the V passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game being executed is the small hit C (S5101). In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit is C (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is a hold (S5102).

  In the processing of S5102, when it is determined that there is no winning (S5102: No), there is no big hit or small hit based on the holding ball, but when the big hit C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3. is there. Here, the big hit C is a big hit with a time saving, and the probability of becoming a small hit C or D in the time saving game (that is, becoming a big hit C or D thereafter) is "397/399". Therefore, in order to execute the 2V effect, which is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is given in succession two times in a row, a display 2V effect command is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display 2V effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 2V command, it displays an effect on the third symbol display device 81, which suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be consecutively awarded.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is a win on the hold (S5102: Yes), a jackpot C is awarded based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3, and a jackpot or a jackpot based on the hold ball is awarded. That is the case. That is, the probability that the big hit game is executed in two consecutive times is high, and the big hit game is executed based on the small hit in the hold, so that the probability that the big hit game is awarded in three consecutive cases is high.

  Here, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103).

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: Yes), an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be awarded three times in a row (for example, FIG. 127 (b ) Reference), the display 3V effect command is set (S5104), and the process proceeds to S5106. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball is not inserted into the V winning device 900 because the game ball has not been sufficiently shot during the small hit game. This is the case when the sphere is not enough. In this case, in the present control example, in order not to display the effect that suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be awarded three consecutive times, the process of S5105 is executed, and the process proceeds to S5106. As a result, even when there are few prize balls based on the balls entering the V winning apparatus 900, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to enter the game balls into the V winning apparatus 900.

  The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, it displays an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) on the third symbol display device 81, which suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be awarded in a row. To do.

  In the process of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit game that was being executed was not the small hit C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hold (S5107). If it is determined in the process of S5107 that there is a winning (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that there is a small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), a big hit game based on V passage is executed, and a small hit C is given based on the hold ball (that is, 2). There is a high possibility that a continuous jackpot game will be given). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect (for example, refer to FIG. 127 (b)) that suggests that the jackpot game is awarded three times in a row, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109), The processing moves to S5106.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5108, when it is determined that the hold is not the small hit C (S5108: No), the big hit game based on the V passage is executed, and the small hit D is given based on the hold ball (ie, 1 jackpot game is given). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute the effect that suggests that the jackpot game is given in succession, the display 2V effect command is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that there is no hit (S5107: No), it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the jackpot game based on the V passage, so the jackpot based on the V passage. In order to execute the effect that suggests that the display V effect command is set (S5111), the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the V command for display, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect indicating that the big hit game is given based on the fact that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 in the small hit game. indicate.

  When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111 is completed, the V entrance passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the hit related command process is executed when the hit related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination processing (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2302). The command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and performing a process according to the determined command.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed similarly to the first control example described above. Next, in the processing of S2412, when it is determined that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command (S2440).

  When it is determined in the process of S2440 that there is a hit related command (S2440: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S2441) and the process returns to S2401. On the other hand, in the processing of S2440, when it is determined that there is no hit related command (S2440: No), other command processing is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the hit related command processing (S2441) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. The hit related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a hit related command.

  In the hit related command processing (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). When it is determined that there is a display hitting start command in the processing of S5201 (S5201: Yes), the jackpot start command processing is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the hit related command process (FIG. 147) that there is a display jackpot start command, and the effect that suggests the start of the jackpot is the third. This is processing for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command process (S5202), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5305), This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203. When the processing of S5201 or S5202 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). In the process of S5203, if it is determined that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

  Here, details of the round number command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5204). This round number command processing (S5204) is processing executed when it is determined in the hit related command processing (FIG. 147) that the display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. It is a process for displaying the effect at the time of playing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the round number command processing (S5204), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205. When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

  When it is determined in the process of S5205 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command process (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received in the command determination process (FIG. 147), and the effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game is displayed as the third symbol. This is a process for displaying on the device 81.

  In the jackpot end command process (S5206), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5207.

  When the processing of S5205 or S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S5207: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

  Here, the details of the small hit start command process (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command processing (S5208). This small hit start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and an effect that suggests the start of a small hit game is produced. It is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S5208), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). After that, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5605). , This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is no display small hitting start command (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

  When the process of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5209). In the process of S5209, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

  Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing (S5210). This small hitting end command processing (S5210) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 147) that a small hitting end command has been received, and an effect that suggests the end of the small hitting game. Is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the display small hitting end command has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5211.

  When the process of S5209 or S5210 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211). In the processing of S5211, if it is determined that there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211: Yes), the V entrance passage command processing is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command processing (S5212). This V entrance passage command processing (S5212) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (FIG. 147) that a V entrance passage command has been received, and to the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game. It is a process for displaying the effect based on the entry of the game ball on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5805), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5211, when it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5213.

  After finishing the processing of S5211 or S5212, it is determined whether or not there is a display 3V effect command (S5213). In the process of S5213, if it is determined that there is a display 3V effect command (S5213: Yes), the 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5215.

  Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing the 3V effect command processing (S5214). This 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the display 3V effect command is received, and 3V (big hit) at the end of the small hit game. Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests that is 3 times).

  Specifically, as described above, the display 3V effect command is a jackpot when the game ball passes the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game, and the jackpot C is given. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the 3V effect command processing (S5214), first, the 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5213, when it is determined that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5215.

  When the processing of S5213 or S5214 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display 2V effect command (S5215). In the process of S5215, if it is determined that there is a display 2V effect command (S5215: Yes), the 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to S5217.

  Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing the 2V effect command processing (S5216). This 2V effect command processing is processing that is executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 147) that a display 2V effect command has been received. At the end of the small hit game, 2V (big hit twice This is processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that it will be continued.

  Specifically, as described above, the 2V display command for display is a big hit and a big hit D as the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the 2V effect command processing (S5216), first, the 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6005), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5215, when it is determined that there is no display 2V effect command (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5217.

  When S5215 or S5216 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). In the process of S5217, when it is determined that there is the display V effect command (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5217, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed as a hit related command, and thus the present processing ends.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S5218) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing (S5218). This V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined that the display V effect command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and V prize is won at the end of the small hit game. It is a process for displaying an effect suggesting that (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S5218), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is easy to receive the lottery (time saving game state), Based on the result of the lottery of 2 special symbols, the V winning device 900 is opened, and a jackpot is provided by passing through a specific area (special discharge flow path 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing the V winning switch 900e4). Is equipped with.

  The pachinko machine 10 having such playability includes a plurality of technical configurations for preventing the game balls from entering or passing through various devices in an order other than the proper game order.

  First, in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13), the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 does not open, and the game board 13 Provided only on the right side of. Second, based on the fact that the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 in the normal game state, the game ball easily enters the second winning opening (the electric accessory 640a is opened). Also, the time (0.2 seconds) during which the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time during which the electric accessory 640a in the normal game state is in the open state. Thirdly, the game ball falling area a that receives the game ball that has flowed down (naturally falls) to the electric accessory 640a and the game ball that was rolling from the game ball falling area a are accepted and guided to the second winning opening 640. It is necessary to provide a game ball guiding area b that is possible and does not buffer balls that have fallen naturally from the game board 13, and the game ball rolls in the game ball guiding area b to win the second winning opening 640. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is made shorter than the time. Fourth, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, if the so-called small hit, which is not a big hit but the V winning device 900 opens, a special discharge flow provided with a V winning switch 900e4. In order to prevent the game balls from flowing down to the path 900e2, two switching members 900h and 900n are provided. It is a structure such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it becomes possible to prevent game balls from entering or passing through various devices in a sequence other than the proper game order.

  Also, in the fifth control example, from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second winning opening 640 (electrical accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65. Although the specific winning opening 65a is arranged, the arrangement of various devices provided on the game board 13 may be appropriately changed. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during the right hitting jackpot game, the normal symbol starting opening (through) It is preferable that the first variable winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the game ball downflow route with respect to all or part of the gate) 67, the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the game balls that have been shot enter the first variable winning device 65 on the upstream side of the downflow route of the game balls, so that various devices provided downstream thereof It is possible to prevent the ball from entering, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering or passing through various devices other than in the proper game order. In order to prevent it more surely, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball downflow path is opened, so that the entrance or passage openings of various devices provided on the downstream side are opened. It is good to block it. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through various devices in a sequence other than the proper game order, it is based on the current game state and detection signals from various switches that detect the game balls provided in the various devices. It is good to give a notification. Regarding the content of the notification at that time, when a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly involved in the jackpot game in the normal game state, an abnormality is notified, and in the normal game state, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is passed. By changing the status notification and the urgency of notification when detected, it becomes possible for the game hall clerk to quickly detect a situation that may be disadvantageous to the game hall. In addition, as the abnormality notification, a notification is made with a sound larger than the game volume and a signal is output to the outside, and as the status notification, a notification for instructing a normal hit on the liquid crystal of the third symbol display device is given. Conceivable.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second winning opening 640 (electrical accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 (specific Although it is arranged with the winning port 65a), in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game, the V winning device 900 is located above the second winning port 640 (electrical accessory 640a). May be provided. With this configuration, even if the electric accessory 640a is variably operated and opened during the small hitting game, it does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900. Further, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 during the small hitting game, so that the electric accessory 640a is variably operated during the small hitting game. It is possible to suppress that, there is no effect on the game ball into the V winning device 900.

  Further, in the present control example, a structure for delaying the flow of the game balls on the game ball rolling surface on the upper part of the V winning device 900 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 is used to enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. In addition to the above, for example, a rotating body having 10 pockets for storing one game ball inside the V winning device, one of which is provided on the game board 13. The V pocket provided with an opening that communicates with the special discharge path 900e2, and the game ball entered in the 10th ball at the start of the small hit game is stored in the V pocket, or the game ball is placed in the V winning device. A space for storing may be provided, and the game balls may pass through the V winning switch 900e3 only when a predetermined number (10) of game balls stay in the space. In addition, a control and a configuration may be used in which the game balls rolling on the electric accessory 640a are collectively put into the V winning device 900 by utilizing the forward / backward movement of the electric accessory 640a.

  In addition, you may make it possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game by setting a limit on the number of times of saving the normal symbol. Specifically, the regular symbol fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) during a shorter time than the fluctuation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol that the lottery result is a small hit, and the electric accessory 640a operating time (for example, 2 seconds) It is sufficient to set the range in which the total time (for example, 5 seconds) is reduced to the number of time reductions (in the case of the above example, the number of time reductions is four). With this configuration, since the time saving game of the normal symbol is completed at the start of the small hit game, it is possible to shorten the time during which the electric accessory 640a is variably operated during the small hit game. In addition, when the small hit game is started, the variation time of the normal symbol is extended, the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a is prohibited, and the control for changing to the short-term opening (0.2 seconds) may be performed. However, when the reserved storage of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit, the variation time of the normal symbol is extended or the variable action of the electric accessory 640a is prohibited, and the control is changed to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). You may go. In addition, the time saving of the normal symbol here means, in addition to the control to end the time saving game internally and return to the normal game, among the time saving game of the normal symbol, the variation time is shortened only for the first predetermined number of times, After the predetermined number of times, the variable time is set to be long, or the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set to be long only at the first predetermined number of times, and the variable operation time is set to be short after the predetermined number of times, that is, up to a predetermined number of times of control. , Is a concept including all the control of a state in which a game ball easily enters the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a holding storage function (special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c) for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol. Since this pending storage is an important configuration for maintaining the game playability of this control example, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a plurality of technical configurations for accumulating the pending storage.

  First, the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time saving game state is developed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640. Secondly, the variation time of the second special symbol 10 seconds (FIG. 120 (d)), in which the lottery result during the time saving game is a small hit, is longer than the variation time 3 seconds (S620) of the normal symbol. It is a structure such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it becomes possible to store the pending storage. Incidentally, with respect to the above-mentioned second configuration, in the present control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is made constant regardless of whether or not during the time saving game, but the variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving game is other than during the time saving game ( It may be set to be shorter than (during normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the variation time of the second special symbol, which results in a small hit in the lottery result during the time saving game, to be longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. That is, in general, the pachinko machine releases the time saving function during the big hit game, and the normal symbol fluctuates in a variable time based on the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the jackpot game is over, the electric accessory 640a does not operate unless the variation time of the normal symbol at the maximum during the normal game elapses, and the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening. I can't. In the meantime, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is fixed, and if the big hit occurs via the small hit, the problem that the reserved memory of the second special symbol, which is the feature of this control example, cannot be stored. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the variation time of the second special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are set to the above-mentioned time.

  In addition, in the contents described above, the variation time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the variation time of the ordinary symbol, but the variation time of the second special symbol and the small hit game (V The total of the time until the game ball is detected by the winning switch 900e4) may be set longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. This is because during the small hitting game is a time saving game state. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hitting game for a predetermined period by using a configuration such as retaining the balls flowing down to the special discharge route 900e2 in the V winning apparatus as in this control example. By the way, in the unlikely event that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time saving game, there is a possibility that the fluctuation of the first special symbol may start, so the right on the third symbol display device 81. It is advisable to perform highlighting such that a hit is performed, or to provide voice guidance using the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big hits and misses, but all of them may be assigned to small hits. By doing so, the reserved memory portion of the special symbol is surely a big hit via the V winning device, so that the speed of the game can be increased and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) that is opened when playing the jackpot game and the V winning device 900 are provided separately, but both functions are V winning. It may be included in the device 900. In that case, during the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is caused to flow down to the normal discharge passage as shown in FIG. 113 (a) using the switching member 900h. By doing so, the number of devices can be reduced, and it is possible to reduce the cost and save the space. Further, the normal discharge flow path 900e1 and the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900 may be used to determine whether or not to save the time saving game after the jackpot game is over. In this case, when the game ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, the time saving is given. In addition, the switching control of the switching member 900h in this case may be predetermined based on the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, or by regularly moving the switching member 900h at regular intervals, the discharge flow. The route may be switched. Further, it may be configured to combine with the technical configurations of the above-mentioned first to fourth control examples to determine whether or not to give a probability variation.

  Further, the number of discharge passages in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, and may be three or more according to the number of functions. Furthermore, the switching member that switches each discharge flow path is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be any configuration that can switch the flow paths.

  In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds of the jackpot may be changed as appropriate and You may set the big hit with few (for example, two rounds) time saving. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming property (a so-called time saving fall function) in which the time saving is completed without acquiring a large number of balls. Further, in this control example, when the game ball is thrown into the V winning device 900 which is in the open state during the time saving game, it is always a big hit, but it is distributed to the small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). May be provided.

  By using each of the above-described configurations, it is possible to add a pattern in which the number of payouts is small and the time saving is completed or a pattern which does not result in a jackpot, to the result of entering the V winning device 900 during the game in a time saving game, and thus a jackpot game is won. The player can be very happy when he or she does.

  In addition, in this control example, it is decided to decide based on the small hit type (the big hit type in the note) about whether or not to give a time saving game after the big hit ends. However, for example, in the case of a big hit during the time saving game, Depending on the current gaming state (whether it is during time saving or not), the time saving is not always awarded after the jackpot, and if the jackpot is awarded during the non-time saving game, the hour saving is always awarded after the jackpot. Alternatively, control may be performed to determine whether or not a time saving is given after the jackpot is over. Even in such control, based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol, it is set whether or not to save the time saving game after the big hit.

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be stored in the lottery for the second special symbol may be appropriately set, and various games can be performed by changing the number of items stored in the lottery for storing the second special symbol and the small hit lottery probability of the second special symbol. It becomes possible to have sex.

<Modification of Fifth Control Example>
A modified example of the fifth control example will be described below with reference to FIG. 153. In this modification, the number of memorized lottery for the second special symbol is increased (for example, four), and the probability per special 2 based on the lottery for the second special symbol is reduced (for example, 1/6). The pattern C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value of 117 (C) is decreased and the deviance is increased). By doing this, there is no guarantee that special 2 hits will occur twice, but you can get lots of lots of second special symbols with a higher jackpot expectation than the first special symbol, so depending on the lottery result It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring a holiday cottage and improve the interest of the game. In addition, by pre-reading the result of the lottery stored and stored, it is possible to provide a blissful production for the player, such as a four-seater finalized production.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In the sixth control example, the detour member 660 is arranged on the upper part of the first variable winning a prize device 65, and when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area (right hitting), the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. In some cases, it is different in that the game ball is configured to roll on the open / close door 65f1 up to about 12 balls. Furthermore, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed from the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the game board 13 (a part where the detour member 660 is arranged). The detour member 660 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 by a screw in a state in which a flow path through which a game ball can flow is projected to the front side of the game board 13. . The detour member 660 is composed of flow path wall portions 660a facing each other in the front-rear direction of the game board 13.

  The flow path wall portion 660a includes a front surface side flow path wall portion 660a1 and a rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2, and the front surface side flow path wall portion 660a1 and the rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2 are bottom surfaces. Partly connected and integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portion 660a1 is arranged with three wall portions projecting to the rear side spaced apart by at least two game balls (in this control example, 2.5 game balls). ing. Further, the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three wall portions protruding toward the front surface side, and the intervals between the respective wall portions are the same as those of the front side wall portion.

  The front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 are arranged such that the protruding wall portion of the front side wall portion 660a1 is inserted in the center between the protruding wall portions of the rear side wall portion 660a2, and further, the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is arranged at a position where a game ball can pass through. The detour member 660 has a bottom surface which is slightly inclined downward from the right to the left, and when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the closed state, the bottom surface is closed and the game ball bypasses the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It rolls while meandering in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the road member 660. Further, a connecting portion 660k connecting the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 at the bottom side connects each wall portion from the entrance portion of the bypass member 660 and each protruding wall of the front side wall portion 660a1 to the rear side wall portion 660a2. Is formed. The connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to form a step even when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, so that the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is reduced.

  The rolling speed of the game ball is reduced by the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball is meanderingly rolled from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball is on the opening / closing door 65f1. The number of rolling can be increased. In the detour member 660 in the present control example, the distance between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is equal to 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls enter in the front-rear direction in the first detour flow passage portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by the wall portion projecting from the front side wall portion 660a1 and the wall portion projecting from the rear surface side wall portion 660a2. It is composed of a flow path. By forming five similar flow paths respectively, a maximum of 12 game balls can be rolled in the detour member 660.

  As a result, when the jackpot game is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the game ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65, and more You can enter the game ball in a short time. Further, as will be described later, in the first variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example, the special discharge passage 65e2 is rotated by rotating the rotating piece 650a every time the game ball passes through the normal discharge passage 65e1. The closing piece 650i for closing is gradually moved in the direction of opening the special discharge flow path 65e2 (leftward in FIG. 155). Then, when the 9 game balls pass through the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the opening piece 650i is moved to a position at which the game ball can pass to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state in which the game ball is rolling on the detour member 660 by nine balls or more, the game ball can be made to flow down to the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it becomes possible to pass the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3, and the probability variation game state can be given to the player. As a result, the player detours a large number of game balls before the jackpot starts so that the detour member 660 has more rolling balls when the jackpot game starts. The game may be played as if it were fired at 660. Therefore, even in a jackpot game in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to a short time, it is possible to allow the player to play a game by consuming a large amount of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit on the game shop side. Further, even in a short-time jackpot game, the interest can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the first variable winning device 65 will be described. In this control example, a flow path opening device 650 is provided in place of the switching member 65h and the flow path solenoid 65k that moves the switching member 65h with respect to the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example. Is different.

  Here, the details of the flow path opening device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic view of the flow path opening device 650. The flow path opening member 650 includes an open piece 650i for opening and closing the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the open piece 650i, a rotary drum 650b for rotating and winding the spring wire 650h, and a rotary drum 650b thereof. And a movable solenoid 650c for moving a regulating piece 650d for regulating the rotation of the rotating drum 650b in the front-back direction.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the open piece 650i has a door shape so as to close the upstream side opening of the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable left and right. Further, one end of the spring wire 650h is attached to one end of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is made of an ultrafine wire made of stainless steel, and has a coiled spring in the middle portion. The coil spring 650h is attached so that the open piece 650i always urges the special discharge flow path 65e2 in the closing direction. The other end of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotating drum 650b, and the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up (the right rotation direction in FIG. 156), so that the spring wire 650h is released. The open piece 650i wound around the rotary drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

  The rotating piece 650a is always arranged so as to project into the normal discharge passage 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the rotating drum 650b and has a one-way clutch structure in which the rotating drum 650b rotates only in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. When the game ball comes into contact with the rotating piece 650a and rotates the rotating piece 650a downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) by the spring wire 650h. After being rotated in the direction, the urging force applied to the rotating piece 650a is configured to rotate and return to the position (the position shown in FIG. 155) before the contact with the game ball. When the rotating piece 650a is reversed and returned, the rotating drum 650b is not rotated and only the rotating piece 650a is rotated. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to e4 protruding to the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotating drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 650b at 90 ° intervals. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to come into contact with the restricting piece 650d. When the restricting piece 650d comes into contact with any of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the rotating drum 650b is in a direction opposite to the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. It is restricted to rotate to. On the other hand, when the rotary drum 650b rotates in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up, the restricting piece 650d changes in the rotating direction by contacting the stopper members 650e1 to e4, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 move to the left side of the restricting member 650d. (See FIG. 156), the rotation of the wire in the direction opposite to the winding direction of the wire is restricted with the stopper members e1 to e4 located on the left side.

  As a result, the game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a, and when the rotating drum 650b is rotated by 90 degrees by the rotating piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are restricted members. The rotary drum 650h is held at the rotated position by being restricted by the rotary position by 650d. The same operation is repeated by the next game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In the present control example, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, and the restricting member 650d is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction separating from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). Accordingly, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the restriction member 650d is released, the rotating drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the urging force of the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is set to the closed position. It is slid and movable.

  Therefore, in the first variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a positive change depending on the number of game balls entered in the first variable award winning device 65. Therefore, even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether the probability variation game is given. In addition, it is possible to change the probability ratio of the probability variation game depending on the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the turning piece 650a is arranged in the normal discharge flow path 65e4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the turning piece 650a is arranged at the position of the specific winning port 65a1 of the first variable winning a prize device 65 so that the game ball entered is immediately. The open piece 650i may be movable. With such a configuration, at the timing when the 10th game ball enters, the opening piece 650i is in an open state, and it can be configured to easily flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to surely give a certain variation by entering 10 more balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the open piece 650i is configured to be in the open state by winning nine prizes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another number. Further, not limited to the configuration of this control example, the sprocket is rotated by the game ball winning in the first variable winning device 65, and the winning opening provided in the sprocket can be won in the 10th game ball. It may be configured so as to face any position.

<Regarding the seventh control example>
The seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 170. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a continuous chance effect, which will be described later, is executed, which is not included in the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  First, the continuous chance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, unlike the first control example, the variation order of the special symbols is changed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the reserved balls are stored. Is configured to. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a maximum of eight holding balls including the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and for each of the holding balls, of the variation pattern selected. The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, in the pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 166, S450), it is possible to determine even the type of the selected variation pattern (any one of short deviation, long deviation, reach, super reach, and special reach). Has been done.

  In the example in which the holding balls shown in FIG. 157 (a) are stored, six holding balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth holding ball is stored. In this case, the continuous chance effect is set by the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. Although the details will be described later, if the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a holding ball is generated is a super reach or a special reach, whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect by lottery. Is determined. When it is determined to execute the effect of the continuous chance, the number of times of executing the effect of the continuous chance is determined within the range of the reserved balls already stored. The number of times is determined by the number of times including the reserved ball (in this example, the sixth reserved ball) determined to execute the continuous chance. For example, if there are six reserve balls as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of reserve balls is determined by lottery up to six times.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to 159 (a), an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance effect will be described. 158 (a), the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command for the sixth hold ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous symbol effect is displayed from the variable display of the special symbol for the first hold ball. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the variable display of the 1st special symbol when execution of is set.

  In the production in which the execution of the continuous Chang production is set, when the special symbol starts changing, the production in which the symbol trembles is executed while the special symbol is still stopped at the previous variable display. After that, as the background image, the characters "continuous chances !!" are displayed at the same time as the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbols ha indicated by five “black circles” displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicate the number of holding balls currently stored. Here, the hold symbol ha1 is the hold of the second hold ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), the hold symbol ha2 is the third hold ball, the hold symbol ha3 is the fourth hold ball, and the hold symbol ha4 is hold. The fifth ball, the reserved symbol ha5, corresponds to the sixth reserved ball.

  158 (b), the variation time in the variation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 158 (a) (variation corresponding to the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a)) elapses, and the special symbol stops. The display mode at the time of displaying is shown. This continuous chance effect is a combination of a specific main symbol called a chance eye in the previous continuous opportunity effect when the continuous chance effect is set for the change to the next reserved ball (in this control example, “341 )) Is displayed. It should be noted that the chance eye is set with a symbol different from the symbol showing the big hit (displayed in a uniform pattern) and notifies that it is out. By displaying the chance opportunity, the player can recognize not only that the lottery result is out of order but also that the continuous chance effect is continuously executed for the next change. Then, the characters "continuous chance production !!" displayed on the background image are continuously displayed even when the change of the special symbol is stopped, and are displayed over the start of the change of the next special symbol.

  159 (a) is an example of the variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the retention symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) and (b)), which is the variation of the second reservation, shown in FIG. 157 (a). It is the figure shown. In FIG. 159 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is the reserved ball (the second reserved ball in FIG. 157 (a)) for which the variation pattern of super reach is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a). A display mode in the case where the reach state is reached after a lapse of a fixed time from the start of fluctuation is shown. Here, since the result of the determination of whether or not this variation is incorrect is out, as in the combination of the special symbols shown in FIG. 159 (b), it is stopped and displayed in an out of combination.

  Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent production in the continuous chance production will be described. As described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, based on the winning information for the first to fifth reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls to be the super reach or the special reach are stored. If the reserved balls that are to reach the super reach or the special reach are stored as in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second reserved ball is the super reach), the continuous chance production ends once with the reserved balls. One or more continuous holding balls among the holding balls (the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (a)) after performing the setting of the effect as shown in FIG. Is set with respect to the holding ball for which the latent effect is executed.

  Here, the latent effect is, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), when the special symbol starts to change, it is an effect that is displayed so as to quiver with the symbol in the stopped state of the previous special symbol stopped. . Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance production, after the stop symbol is quivered and displayed, a display indicating that it is a continuous chance production is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation, but in this latent production, the stop symbol is displayed quiveringly. Even if the fluctuation is started after that, the background display indicating the continuous chance performance is not displayed. By configuring the latent effect in this manner, the player can expect that the continuous chance effect will be started by the shaking display of the stop symbol. Note that the same production as the latent production is configured so that it may be selected and executed even when the normal special symbol is changed, even if execution of the continuous chance production is not decided. Therefore, even if the latent production is displayed, the player is aware that the continuous chance production is not necessarily executed by the special symbol production corresponding to the subsequent holding, and the continuous production is performed by the latent production. The game can be played in the expectation of execution.

  In FIG. 157 (a), among the third to fifth holding balls, the fifth holding ball is obtained by the process of S1726 of the prize information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Execution of the latent effect is determined up to (the 3rd to 5th reserved balls) (it is determined). Thereby, in the variation of the special symbol for the third to the fifth reserved balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, the player may have missed the final fluctuation in the continuous chance performance with the second holding ball, but the continuous chance performance may be restarted, or in fact, the continuous chance performance is hidden. You can have the expectation that it will continue just by continuing. Then, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), in the variation of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball, the continuous chance effect is executed again.

  In this control example, no matter how many times the latent production is continuously executed, there is no guarantee that the continuous chance production will be executed thereafter, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent production is repeated three times or more. In this case, the continuous chance presentation may be executed after that. With such a configuration, when the latent production is executed, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive times, and the interest can be further improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 157 (b), the number of holding balls to be established is determined after the holding balls that have triggered the decision to execute the continuous chance effect, and the number of holding balls is set to the maximum. The case of setting the execution of the latent effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), six hold balls are established, and the winning information command output when the sixth hold is established creates a continuous chance from the third hold ball. The case where execution is decided is shown. FIG. 157 (c) shows a case where the holding balls are more digested than the state of FIG. 157 (b) and the third holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) is shifted to the first holding ball. This is the state shown. In this state, at the timing at which the first holding ball (the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts to change, the holding ball determined to execute the continuous chance effect (FIG. 157 (c) In (), the number of executions of the latent production is determined with the maximum number of holding balls established after the fourth holding ball). Here, the latent production is executed for the continuous number of times in which the above-mentioned latent production is determined with respect to the variation of the reserve ball that has changed after the variation of the fourth reserve ball ends.

  As a result, the player performs the latent production even after the final variation (variation of the special symbol for the fourth reserve ball in the control example) in the continuous chance production is completed, and thus the continuous chance production is continued. You can expect that you are doing it. Furthermore, since the latent performance is executed within the range of the reserved balls established at the start of the first consecutive chance production, the super reach or the special reach of a jackpot to the established reserved balls is achieved. It is possible to expect that the continuous chance production or the latent production is being executed since the change is stored.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, a super-reach or a special reach is applied to a holding ball established at the start change of the continuous chance performance (a holding ball stored after the holding ball of the final fluctuation of the continuous chance performance). If there is a change, it is set to execute the latent effect of the pending ball before the fluctuation, and by executing the continuous chance effect again with the fluctuation of the super reach or the special reach, the latent performance can be performed more for the player. It is possible to increase the expectation of continuous chance performance when displayed. Further, in this case, it is of course possible to start the continuous chance effect with the reserved ball stored before the reserved ball which is the special reach or the super reach.

  Regarding the continuous chance effect, in the present control example, the notification mode is displayed in the background. However, the present invention is not limited to this, a specific character may be displayed, and the background color is different from the normal time. The color may be changed to a different color, or the BGM type and a special sound effect may be output. Further, the chance eyes displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of this control example, other combinations may be used, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, for example, a pattern of "continuation" which is not a normal pattern. It may be configured such that it can be variably displayed on the symbol such as a character and the like, and a mode of special detachment different from the symbol showing the detachment at the normal time (big hit Display) and the like)).

  Next, an electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. Only the differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference is that it has been changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in the present control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c), and first with reference to FIG. 160, the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 113 will be described. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous chance count table 222d and an incubation count table 222e are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The consecutive chance count table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 162. This continuous chance count table 222d is out of alignment with the winning continuous chance count table 202d (see FIG. 162 (a)) that is referred to when the winning / decision result indicated by the received prize information command is a win. It is composed of a continuous chance frequency table 222d for deviation (see FIG. 162 (b)) which is referred to in a certain case. The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining whether or not the continuous chance effect is to be executed and, when executing, to determine the number of times.

  FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning success chance number table 222 d. In the winning continuous chance number table 222d, the number of consecutive decision opportunities counters 223n (0 to 198) to be described later is performed for each execution number with the current number of retained balls as the maximum value and the current number of retained balls as the maximum value. ) Are set respectively. When the number of reserved balls is one, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of “0 to 160” is set as the determination value of the determination content that does not execute the continuous chance effect. The determination value of "161 to 198" is set as the determination value for one continuous chance presentation. Here, based on the acquired value of the number-of-times determination counter 223n, the determination value set in the matching determination value is selected by collating with the determination value of the consecutive chance number table 222d. Here, if the non-execution is selected, the continuous chance effect is not executed. In addition, when the number of times of continuous chance performance for one time is determined, the continuous chance performance is set for the execution of the first holding ball. The number of executions set in the consecutive chance number table 222d is the holding ball (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the sixth holding ball) that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect. It shows the number of reserved balls that are stored consecutively before that. For example, when the continuous chance effect lottery is performed on the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a) and four execution times are selected by the continuous chance frequency table 222d, three times The continuous chance effect is started from the eye holding ball, and the continuous chance effect is continuously executed up to the sixth holding ball.

  Similarly, the reference value is set from the consecutive chance number table 222d depending on the number of reserved balls when the prize information command is received. In this control example, the larger the number of holding balls when the winning command is received, the easier it is to set the continuous chance effect. Further, as is clear from comparison with the out-of-consecutive chances table 222d shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the hit / miss determination result is a success, continuous chance production is performed for all the reserved balls. Is set to have a high probability of being executed. As a result, the execution of the continuous chance effect is easily set for the winning information command indicating the super reach or the special reach for which the hit / miss determination result is a win. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set to be determined more easily as the number of holding balls is larger, the continuous chance effect is more likely to be executed with respect to a larger number of continuous holding balls, and the player can also cope with deviations from the deviation. Can play games with high expectations for jackpots.

  It should be noted that, as shown in the consecutive chance count table 222d for detachment, even if the number of reserved balls is 6 or more, if the result of the hit / miss determination is out, a maximum of 6 consecutive chance performances are produced. The judgment value is set. As a result, when the sixth consecutive chance presentation is started, the player can early recognize that the winning / disapproval determination result is a big hit by continuing the second consecutive chance presentation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times of continuous chance performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the latency number lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent count lottery table 222e. When the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the continuous chance number table 222d described above, the latent number lottery table 222e is a lottery opportunity for the continuous chance effect of the reserved balls corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects. It becomes the super-reach or special reach by judging whether or not the reserved ball which becomes the super-reach or the special reach is stored in the other reserved balls other than the reserved ball which has become (the reserved ball which becomes the super-reach or the special reach). It is a lottery table for deciding the number of times that the latent production is executed with the holding balls up to the holding balls that have become the lottery triggers for the continuous chance effect when the holding balls are stored.

  Explaining with the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), since the sixth hold ball is established, a continuous chance effect of 6 times of execution is determined, and the first to sixth hold balls produce continuous chances. It is determined that the effect will be executed. Therefore, if it is determined whether the first to fifth holding balls have a holding ball that is a super reach or a special reach, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second holding ball is a super reach or a special reach. Since it is a holding ball, it is possible to execute the latent production up to three times from the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball. Here, with reference to the incubation number lottery table 222e, the table contents to be selected are set for each of the hit determination results for the sixth holding ball, and the number of incubations described below is set for each maximum incubation number. The determination value corresponding to the decision counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), if the result of determination of whether or not the sixth reserved ball is a win is a win, the decision value with the maximum number of times of incubation of 3 is referred to in the hit table contents. Here, if the value of the acquired latency determination counter 223o is "0 to 50", the latency is 1 time, if it is "51 to 149", the latency is 2 times, and if it is "150 to 198", the latency is 3 The number of times is set. Here, when the number of times of incubation is determined twice, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect of the third and fourth holding balls is non-executed, and the aforementioned latent effect is executed. To be done. The continuous chance production is started again with the fifth holding ball, and is continuously executed up to the sixth holding ball. It should be noted that the number of latent effects after the continuous chance effects shown in FIG. 157 (c) is similarly determined by the latent frequency lottery table 222e. It should be noted that the holding balls (corresponding to the fourth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) and the subsequent holding balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (c), five balls that triggered the determination of the continuous chance effect) If there is no reserved ball that corresponds to the super-reach or the special reach in the (from the 7th to 7th reserved balls), the table content corresponding to the deviation of the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) is referred to.

  Note that, in the latent number lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, when the hit / miss determination result is out of position, the latent production is limited to a maximum of three times regardless of the number of reserve balls that can be hidden. There is. As a result, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that when the latent effect is executed with the next reserve ball, a big hit will occur in the subsequent continuous chance effects. Therefore, the player can be interested in the number of times of the latent production, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a number-of-times determination counter 223n, a latency number determination counter 223o, and a continuous chance storage area 223p are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of continuous chance effects. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 adds one by one for each predetermined period and updates it. Note that the effect counter 223f and the latency number determination counter 223o, which will be described later, are set so that their update cycles are different from each other, and are configured not to be synchronized. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The latency number determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times the latency effect is executed in the continuous chance attraction from the latency number lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). The latency number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and updated, and at a predetermined cycle by the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. One is added and updated. The latent frequency determination counter 223o is programmed so that the update is started from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the contents of the effect to be executed for each of the holding balls when executing the continuous chance effect. The continuous chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance effect is determined, data indicating the determined effect content is stored in the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is exhausted. The reserved ball that starts to change is shifted to the execution area. As a result, continuous chance production can be surely executed.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up when the power is cut off, and is restored to the power cut state when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even if the power is cut off, the continuous chance effect can be continuously executed.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and a deviation (see At least the (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various normal reach types (30 seconds), super reach types (60 seconds), and special reach types (90 seconds) are set as jackpot variation patterns. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), “51 to 179” is for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds). ), The variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, jackpot the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table for deviation 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 161 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  In the present control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and is configured to acquire the timing variation type counter CS1 in which the game ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to determine even the variation type selected at the time of winning before the variation starts. Further, not only the configuration of this control example, but also the configuration in which the variation type selected depends on the number of holding balls at the start of variation as shown in the first control example, the variation type assigned to super reach, etc. By allocating the value of the counter CS1 to a fixed value even when the number of reserved balls is variable, the variation type can be determined at the time of winning.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller 110 in Seventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example is that in the first control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is the special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104). The start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is different from the starting winning process (FIG. 165, S105). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 164, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example is the same as the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example, and the processes of S203 to S204 and S208 to S209 are S250 to S252. The difference is that the processing has been changed to. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the process of S250, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the reserved sphere having the reserved order of 1 is stored (S251). Although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is won, the special symbols are configured to start changing in a winning order in which both are combined. There is. In addition, the maximum number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, which is the same as the first control example. When the reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and in that case, information indicating the winning order is stored. As the winning order, the order of adding 1 to the total number of winning numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, the winning order is also decremented by 1 and updated based on the fact that one reserved ball is consumed (starts fluctuation).

  In the process of S251, it is determined whether the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the holding area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order to be changed next. It When it is determined that the order in which the fluctuation starts next by the process of S251 is the second special symbol (S251: Yes), the process of S205 is executed. Note that the processing of S205 to S207 is the same as that of the first control example, and therefore its description is omitted.

  In the processing of S251, if it is determined that the order of next variation start is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the order of next variation start is the first special symbol (S252). Next, when it is determined that the winning order in which fluctuation starts is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processes of S210 to S212 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the reserved ball is not stored (S252: No), this process is ended. The other processes are omitted from the first control example.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 165, S105) in the seventh control example is different from the starting winning process (FIG. 66, S105) in the first control example in that the process of S406 is S420 and the process of S412 is S430. The prefetch process (S413) is different from the prefetch process 2 (S450). The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the sum of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added. The difference is that the information is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b as the winning order information. With this configuration, in the present control example, by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 at the time of winning, the variation type (short deviation, long variation) selected by the prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later. It is configured such that the voice lamp control device 113 can be notified as a winning information command by discriminating whether it is out, normal reach, super reach, or special reach).

  When it is determined No in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the prefetch process 2 is executed (S450). After performing the prefetching process 2 (S450), this process ends.

  The prefetch process 2 (S450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of this prefetching process 2 (S450). The pre-reading process 2 (S450 in FIG. 166) in the seventh control example is different from the pre-reading process (S 413 in FIG. 67) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is executed, the processing of S510 is executed. In the process of S510, the variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result (winning / absence determination) based on the winning information (each counter value) obtained in S503 or S504, and the obtained stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. The variation type to be selected is determined from the selection table 202d (S510). After that, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result and the variation type determined in S510 is set.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation type by using the winning information command. Therefore, in the present control example, it is possible to execute the continuous chance effect, which is a special effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations, when the holding lamp for which a specific fluctuation pattern is executed is stored by the voice lamp control device 113. . It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 preliminarily discriminates and determines the variation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning information command indicating information of each acquired counter value is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 is used. It is possible to set each data that can be discriminated and to discriminate the variation type and the like.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
A control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. In the seventh control example, in comparison with the first control example, the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) is the command determination process 3 (FIGS. 167, S1540), and the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S1512) is the variable display. The difference is that the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) is changed. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that the processes of S1650 to S1651 are added. . The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command is not received (S1609: No), the process of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1650). When the prize information command is received (S1650: Yes), prize information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

  Here, the winning information processing (S1651) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning information processing (S1651). In this winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). If it is determined that the continuous chance presentation is set (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether the continuous chance presentation is being set or not. , This process ends. As described above, since the new continuous chance effect is not set while the continuous chance effect is set, it is possible to suppress a defect such as the effect being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect. .

  In the processing of S1721, when it is determined that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). . When the received prize information command is not the prize information command indicating the super reach or the special reach (S1722: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S1722, when it is determined that the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number-of-times determination counter 223n and the number-of-latents determination counter 223o are set. It is acquired (S1724).

  Based on the acquired number-of-times determination counter 223n, the received winning information command, and the current number of holding balls (the number of holding balls corresponding to the received winning information command), the consecutive chance number table 222d (FIGS. 162 (a) and (b)). The information (the number of executions or non-execution) regarding the execution of the continuous chance effect is acquired (determined) from the reference. It is determined whether the information acquired in S1724 is the number of times the continuous chance effect has been executed, that is, whether the continuous chance effect has been executed (S1725). If execution of the continuous chance effect has not been determined (S1725: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that the execution of the continuous chance effect has been decided (S1725: Yes), the holding ball corresponding to the determined number of times of the continuous chance effect becomes the super reach or the special reach. It is determined from the prize information storage area 223a whether or not the reserve balls (except the reserve balls that have received the prize information command (the reserve balls that are the final fluctuation of the continuous chance effect) are stored) (S1726). Although illustration is omitted, when the prize information command is received, as in the first control example, data corresponding to the information indicated by the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball. To be done. In addition, as the reserved balls are exhausted, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding reserved balls, and when the fluctuation starts, the data of the winning information corresponding to the next reserved ball is overwritten.

  In the processing of S1726, when it is determined that the reserved ball for the super reach or the special reach is not stored, the processing of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball that is a super reach or a special reach (S1726: Yes), the winning / judgment determination result indicated by the winning information command received from the latent count lottery table 222e, the processing of S1726. In the process of S1723, the number of possible hiding is the number of holding balls up to the holding ball that is stored immediately before the holding ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the holding ball that is determined to be super reach or special reach. The latent count is determined from the acquired value of the latent count determination counter 223o (S1727). Then, based on the content of the determined continuous chance effect, the effect to be executed for each Ryukyu ball is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each reserved ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, a storage area is set corresponding to each of the eight reserved balls, and for each of the reserved balls, the start of the continuous chance effect, the end of the continuous chance effect, the latent effect, and the continuous effect are performed. Data that can identify the re-entry of the chance production is stored (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to the area corresponding to the corresponding holding ball every time the holding ball is exhausted. When the continuous chance presentation is completed, all the stored data will be cleared. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous chance presentation is set depending on whether or not the data is stored in the continuous opportunity storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, the rear latency setting process (S1750) is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. Differences in points. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S1709 is executed, the rear latency setting processing is executed (S1750). The post-latent setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the subsequent latency setting process (S1750).

  In the post-latent setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined whether or not it is the maximum start variation of the continuous chance effect based on the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1751). Here, it is determined whether or not the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the fluctuation starting reserved ball is data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

  In the processing of S1751, when it is determined that the start variation of the continuous chance effect is not generated (S1751: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start variation of the continuous chance presentation (S1751: Yes), the information of the current reserved ball is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). With respect to the acquired information on the reserved balls, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls to be the super reach or the special reach are stored with respect to the reserved balls stored after the final variation of the continuous chance effect (S1753). When it is determined that the reserved ball for the super reach or the special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the reserved ball stored next to the reserved ball corresponding to the final fluctuation of the continuous chance performance is super-stored. The number of reserves up to the reserve ball, which is stored immediately before the reserve ball that is the reach or the special reach, is determined as the maximum value (possible number of times of incubation) (S1754). The value of the latent count determination counter 223o is acquired, and based on the value, the judgment result of whether or not the holding ball to be the super reach or the special reach is hit, and the possible latent count determined in S1754, the latent count is determined from the latent count lottery table 222e. Is determined (S1755). Based on the number of latencies determined in S1755, continuous chance effects are determined. Here, from the reserved ball stored after the number of times of incubation for the number of times of incubation to the reserved ball which becomes the super reach or the special reach is set as the reserved ball for executing the continuous chance effect. After the processing of S1756, the processing of S1758 is executed.

  In the processing of S1753, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball which becomes the super reach or the special reach (S1753: No), the value of the latency number determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final variation of the continuous chance performance. The number of times of incubation is determined from the number of times of incubation lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) based on the number of possible hiding, which is the number of retained balls (S1757). Then, the process of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1757, the number of latencies is determined based on the data indicating that the hit / miss judgment result is out of order.

  In the process of S1758, the continuous chance storage area 223p is set based on the information of the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the processes of S1755-S1756, S1757 (S1758). Then, this process is completed.

  In this way, even at the start of the continuous chance production, the latent production and the new continuous opportunity production are set for the pending balls that have been established from the time the determination is made until the start. You can entertain the production. Further, the continuous chance effect is an effect that is performed on the variable display of a plurality of continuous reserved balls by pre-reading the determination result of the established reserved balls. As a result, when the continuous chance production is started, the player holds a reserved ball that is a super reach or a special reach among the reserved balls that are established at that time, and the lottery result is unsuccessful. I have an expectation. Here, in the present control example, the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the hold balls that are established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, so that the player can expect more hold balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to continue to hold expectations for the latent effect for the reserved ball after the completion of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, in the present control example, the latent effect is an effect in which the design is shaken, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to display a sound effect, a character, or the like at the start of fluctuation. Moreover, you may change and display the pattern etc. of a special design to the pattern different from usual.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

  Specifically, in this control example, the external output terminal plate 261 has a jackpot continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the jackpot continuous operation device, and one jackpot for indicating the state and type of jackpot. Is provided.

  Then, when the jackpot based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot) is executed, one jackpot of the external output terminal board 261 is off at the time when the jackpot game is started, When the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to be turned on. On the other hand, when the big hit based on the big hit G (16R probability variation lottery / short time with big hit) is executed, one big hit terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the big hit game is started. Further, when the big hit based on the big hit H (16R probability variation lottery / no time saving big hit) is executed, the big jack 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Further, regardless of these jackpot types, when the jackpot game is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is controlled to be turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the jackpot by comparing the signal of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the signal of the jackpot 1 terminal with each other is turned on. The type can be determined. Accordingly, the jackpot type can be discriminated in the hall computer 262 without providing the terminals of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. You can

  Although this control example has a configuration in which the above-described configuration is added to the first control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. In the following description, the points different from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 171, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that it is clearly shown that the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 is provided with the external output terminal board 261. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In this control example, an external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with at least a accessory continuous operation terminal, a jackpot 1 terminal, and a jackpot 2 terminal.

  The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal that indicates whether or not the continuous accessory operation device is operated and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, that is, whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, that is, a period when the jackpot game is executed, and when it is off, the period other than that (the jackpot game). Is not executed). This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot game has started in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see S7002 in FIG. 177), and in the process. When it is determined that the jackpot game is finished, it is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal that indicates whether or not a jackpot game is in progress. When it is on, it shows that it is a jackpot game, and when it is off, it shows that it is not a jackpot game. However, unlike the accessory continuous operation terminal described above, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / shorter time jackpot), and the gaming ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. Is set to on when passing.

  Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 of FIG. 177), and in the process, it is a jackpot game. If it is determined (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is a jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), it is further determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON. In the case (S7005 of FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 of FIG. 177). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001: No in FIG. 177), it is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal that indicates whether the state of the gaming machine is advantageous for the player, that is, the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, or the time saving gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. If there is, it indicates that it is in the advantageous state for the player, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal described above, it is not set at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot), but is set to on when the gaming ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. It is what is done.

  Specifically, the jackpot 2 terminals are determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 2 terminals are set to ON (S7004 of FIG. 177). Further, in the process, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), further, When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005 of FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to on (see S7004 of FIG. 177). When it is determined that the probability variation state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, has ended (S7008: No in FIG. 177), it is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  The external output terminal board 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal, etc.), and outputs signals output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 or the input / output port 215 of the payout controller 111. Ready to receive. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262 and are already known, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a first hit type selection table 202f for selecting a big hit type for the above-described first control example. Is different in that it is newly provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In the present control example, different from the above-described first control example, a big hit F, a big hit G, and a big hit H are provided as types of big hits. For these jackpot types, a first hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) set so that a big hit F and a big hit G big hit H can be selected, respectively, and a first hit type counter value C2. Selected based on and.

  The details of the first hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first hit type selection table 202f and the first hit type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value “0 to 33” of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the judgment value of the big hit F, “34 to 66” is set as the judgment value of the big hit G, and the judgment value of the big hit H is set. "67 to 99" is set. In the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery result is acquired (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first hit type selection table 202f is also used. The jackpot type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. The jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

  In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot), the passage solenoid 65k operates in the jackpot game, and the gaming ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can be passed to the probability variation switch 65e3. ing. Based on the fact that the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game is given after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery / short time with jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a enters the probability change switch 65e3. It's a big hit with no chance. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the time saving game will be awarded. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery no time saving, no jackpot), like the jackpot G described above, the gaming ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a does not enter the probability variation switch 65e3. Is. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the time saving game is not given, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

  Further, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot when the fluctuation is stopped in the special symbol variation process of the main control device 110 (S216: Yes in FIG. 176), and the jackpot type. A scenario for opening the specific winning opening 65a is set (see S217 in FIG. 176) or stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176) and referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. It will be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example described above in that a jackpot type storage area 203α is provided. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type relating to the jackpot game being executed, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H) is stored. This jackpot type storage area 203α is set when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 176) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 ( See S260 in FIG. 176).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot F and the jackpot is not the jackpot G, which is referred to in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7003: No in FIG. 177), the probability variation setting flag 203h. Is on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the V winning terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to be on (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, in the process, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 176: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (FIG. 177). See S7004). Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot G, as in the case where the jackpot type is the jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177). However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, since the gaming ball does not pass the probability variation winning switch 65e3 and the probability variation setting flag 203h is never turned on (S7005: No in FIG. 177), one jackpot and one jackpot The two terminals are never set to ON.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot game by comparing the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, if both the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that it is a jackpot G, while the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is jackpot F or jackpot H, and jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on V winning (passing of game ball to probability variation switch 65e3) during jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a big hit F, while on the other hand, if there is no V prize (passing of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3) during the big hit game and the big hit 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a big hit H. it can. In addition, you may comprise so that a jackpot type of a jackpot game may be determined by comparing the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing a gaming state of the gaming machine, a gaming ball passing state of the probability variation switch 65e3, and a signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the passing state of the probability variation switch 65e3 when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. 6 is a timing chart showing outputs of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal board 261.

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are in the off state. Then, when the big hit game based on the big hit G gaming state of the gaming machine is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the big jack 1 terminal and the big jack 2 terminal are set to ON in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. . After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to a time saving state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF in an external output process described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). Then, when the time saving game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, referring to FIG. 174 (b), when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, and the probability variation switch 65e3. It is the timing chart which showed the passing state of the game ball, and the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal board 261. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the output of one jackpot and two jackpots is turned on at the time when the jackpot game is started, as compared with the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed. The difference is that the signals of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (when the V is won).

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are in the off state. Then, when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot F, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON in the external output process described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON based on the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, as in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game is ended and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability change is given after the jackpot game is finished. When the game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminals are set to OFF (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

  In addition, when the big hit game based on the big hit H is executed, when the state of the game machine becomes the big hit game state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, while the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the outputs of one jackpot and two jackpots remain off. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, a case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described. FIG. 175 is a gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, the passing state of the gaming ball of the probability variation switch 65e3, and the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. It is a timing chart showing the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the terminal plate 261.

  175 (a) is a timing chart in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F. It is a timing chart when a game is continuously executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175 (a), a case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminals, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to off. After that, the lottery result is a jackpot of the jackpot G, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to ON (FIG. 177). See S7002 and S7004). After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, the time saving game is given, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game is finished. Later, a time saving game is given and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes a time saving game state, so the jackpot 2 terminals are not set to OFF, and a signal of ON is continuously output.

  And, during the execution of the time saving game, the jackpot of the jackpot G is again made, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal are set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminals are also continued. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, when the jackpot game to be executed again ends, a time saving game is given, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot 2 terminal is It is not set to OFF, and the ON signal is output continuously. Then, when the time saving game is not a big hit during the execution of the time saving game, when the time saving game is finished, the output of the big hit 2 terminals is set to OFF while shifting to the normal game state (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), a case where the jackpot game based on each jackpot type is successively executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, jackpot F will be described. In the normal gaming state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to off. After that, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot of the jackpot H, and the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, the outputs of the one jackpot and two jackpots are not set to ON but remain OFF (S7005: No in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  After that, the lottery result becomes a jackpot G, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal is output. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, a time saving game is given, and outputs to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is a time saving gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminals is not set to OFF, but the output remains ON. After that, during the time saving game, when the big hit F becomes a big hit and the big hit game based on the big hit F is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the big hit 2 terminals continue. Will be turned on.

  Then, when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game is over, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (S7007 in FIG. 177), while the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game is over, so the jackpot 2 terminals are set. The output of is not turned off but remains on. After that, when the probability variation game ends, the game shifts to the normal game and the output to the jackpot 2 terminals is set to off.

  As described above, in this control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. This makes it possible to determine the type of jackpot game by comparing the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. Specifically, if both the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that it is a jackpot G, while the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is jackpot F or jackpot H, and jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on V winning (passing of game ball to probability variation switch 65e3) during jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a big hit F, while on the other hand, if there is no V prize (passing of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3) during the big hit game and the big hit 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a big hit H. it can.

  Moreover, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot, by the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, with the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the jackpot occurrence ends, so the jackpot occurrence can be detected, but it is determined whether the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to the jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game.

  If the jackpot 2 terminals in the present control example become a jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the period when the output is on continues). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpots generated when the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is on (the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) are a series of continuous jackpots.

<Regarding the control processing of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, the control processing of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a part of the special symbol variation process and the external output process is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 176, details of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). In the eighth control example, compared to the first control example described above, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit when the variation time has passed (S216: Yes), the big hit type related to the lottery result is a big hit type storage area 203α. However, since the other parts are the same, detailed description of those parts will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process, first, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S201 to S216 are executed. Next, when it is determined that the present lottery result is a big hit (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the big hit type (S217), and a big hit start is set (S218). . Then, the value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

  When the process of S260 ends, this process ends. In addition, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed similarly to the first control example, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the details of the external output processing (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output processing (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and the commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 are executed. This is processing for transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is jackpot (S7001). In the processing of S7001, when it is determined that the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (S7002). , S7003. The hall computer 262 detects the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002. Thereby, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on ( The processing moves to S7004) and S7010. By the processing of S7004, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal is turned on, and the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects that the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002 and the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it is possible to determine that the big hit game by the big hit G has been executed, and perform the processing according to it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big hit type storage area 203α is the value indicating the big hit F or the big hit H and not the big hit G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. If it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes), it means that a game ball has entered the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is determined that the probability variation game is given after the end of the jackpot game. . In this case, the process shifts to S7004, the outputs to the one jackpot and the two jackpots are turned on (S7004), and the process shifts to S7010.

  Here, since the big hit F is a big hit with probability variation lottery, the passage solenoid 65k operates during the execution of the big hit game, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without probability variation lottery, the passage solenoid 65k does not operate during the jackpot game, and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the hall computer 262, when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed after the character continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, the jackpot based on the jackpot F. It can be determined that the game has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and if the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H in which the gaming ball does not pass to the probability variation switch 65e3 is executed. It can be determined that it has been.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7005, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the process proceeds to S7010.

  In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are performed. The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

  After the processing of S7007 is finished, it is then determined whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the probability variation game state is in effect, and when the time saving medium counter is greater than 0, it is determined that it is in the time saving game state. In the processing of S7008, when it is determined that the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008: Yes), the process shifts to S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminals. On the other hand, in the process of S7008, when it is determined that the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is not (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to S7010.

  By the processing of S7007, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal can be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. Then, if the probability variation game or the time saving game is given at the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the probability variation game state or the time saving game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is not turned off, The jackpot 2 terminal output is turned on continuously. On the other hand, if the probability variation game or the time saving game is not given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off.

  In the processing of S7010, other external output processing is executed (S7010), and this processing ends. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as the reserved ball number command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. . As a result, the information from the main controller 110 can be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 and the payout controller 111.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, according to the jackpot type of the lottery result, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type, if the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different. It is configured to let. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Also, in the case of the big hit G, when the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and the big hit 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and thereafter, the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off.

  Thereby, the hall computer 262 detecting the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is provided in three types by detecting the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine which jackpot game is being executed based on which jackpot type among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

  Moreover, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot, by the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, with the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the jackpot occurrence ends, so the jackpot occurrence can be detected, but it is determined whether the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to the jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game.

  If the jackpot 2 terminals in the present control example become a jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the period when the output is on continues). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpots generated when the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is on (the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) are a series of continuous jackpots.

  In the present control example, the jackpot type is determined by the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type can be determined by the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal. Good. Further, either one of the jackpot or two jackpots may not be provided, or a terminal for performing an output related to the jackpot may be separately provided on the external output terminal plate 261.

  Further, the present control example is not limited to the above-described one, and other terminals of the external output terminal board 261 for outputting information related to the big hit game may be provided. For example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on passage of the probability variation switch 65e3 may be provided on the external output terminal board 261. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as passing a game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3 even while the jackpot game of the jackpot H without the probability variation lottery is being executed. Specifically, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on based on the passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 The terminal output does not turn on. Therefore, the hall computer 262 detects that the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that a gaming ball has been entered into the probability change switch 65e3 due to an act of fraud. Can be notified.

  In addition, in the above-described eighth control example, the accessory continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, the jack is not provided, and one jack jack is turned on. The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type depending on the difference in time.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is the jackpot game time (for example, 120 seconds). In addition, when the big hit F big hit game is executed, the big hit 1 terminal output is not turned on at the start of the big hit game, but the big hit 1 terminal output is turned on when the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65e3, and the big hit game is played. At the end, turns off the output of the jackpot 1 terminal. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time of the jackpot game, and is the time from the period when the passage solenoid 65k is operating to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). . Further, when the jackpot game of jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, but is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of one jack is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  With such a configuration, the hall computer 262 can determine that the jackpot game by the jackpot G is being executed when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 120 seconds. it can. If the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot F is being executed. Further, when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot H is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed in the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. It is to be noted that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is determined for each jackpot type, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on for the on-time defined by a predetermined trigger (for example, when the jackpot is started). Good.

  Further, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to ON based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a may be provided. Thereby, the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but if the gaming ball is not launched into the specific winning opening 65a due to the gaming ball not being launched, etc., the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Since the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, the jackpot F cannot be detected. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the probability variation switch 65e3 is detected despite the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has not passed (in the case of a big hit H).

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. In contrast to the above-mentioned eighth control example, the ninth control example is provided with an external output terminal board 261 that outputs a signal in response to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a, and continuous winning of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. It is different in that it is configured so that it can be detected.

  Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. To be done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output is kept on when there is a winning during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs and the continuous winning is performed.

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, whether or not the generated winning is continuously won by acquiring the signals of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal. Can be determined. Further, the hall computer 262 does not need to calculate the result of the signal from the winning terminal to determine whether or not the continuous winning has occurred, and the processing that needs to be executed when the continuous winning has occurred. Is executed based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  It should be noted that although this control example has a configuration in which the above-described configuration is added to the eighth control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. For example, the outputs of the winning terminals and the continuous winning terminals may be controlled according to the ball entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, the points different from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as those of the eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the ninth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the present control example is different from the RAM 203 in the eighth control example described above in that a winning period counter 203β and a continuous winning period counter 203γ are provided. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting a period (a winning output period) in which a signal is output to a winning terminal. The winning period counter 203β is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 when it is determined that a game ball has entered the specific winning port 65a (prize) (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and when the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more every time the external output process is executed (see FIG. 180, S8008: Yes), one is subtracted (see S8009 in FIG. 180). When the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004 in FIG. 180: Yes), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

  Thereby, based on the winning of the specific winning opening 65a, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds).

  The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting the period during which a signal is output to the continuous winning terminal. This continuous winning period counter 203γ is, when it is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 that a game ball has entered the specific winning port 65a (prize) (FIG. 180). S8001: Yes) and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) are set (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and when the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more every time the external output process is executed. (S8010 of FIG. 180: Yes), one is subtracted (see S8011 of FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF. If the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set again to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

  Thereby, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (two seconds in this control example), the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 while the game ball is in the special winning device 65a. The output to can be kept on. If the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ has passed, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing a gaming state of the gaming machine and a signal output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261, when the jackpot game is executed. .

  With reference to FIG. 179 (a), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 179 (a) is a gaming state of the gaming machine and a gaming object continuous operation terminal, a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game. 6 is a timing chart showing signals output from the device.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, the accessory continuous operation terminal is off, and the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are off.

  Next, the lottery result based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, the big hit game is started, and when the accessory continuous operation device operates, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operation device operates, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the output from the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is output for a predetermined time (in this control example). It is controlled to be turned on for 100 milliseconds and 2 seconds (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed, and is turned off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the jackpot game ends, the character continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the character continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or the probability variation game or the time saving game) is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case will be described in which a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game, and there is a new ball in the continuous winning output period based on the game. FIG. 179 (b) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine in the case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and there is a new ball in the continuous winning output period based on the ball, and the external state. It is the timing chart which showed the signal output from the accessory continuous operation terminal of the output terminal board 261, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, the lottery result based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 is a big hit, and when the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

  When the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the game ball entering, and the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) It is controlled to be turned on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). After that, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has passed (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed. (S8006 of FIG. 180: Yes).

  When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a game ball has newly entered the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). Are set (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Further, the output of the winning continuation terminal is reset (updated) so as to be turned on for the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to OFF after the lapse of the winning output period based on the new winning to the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 of FIG. 180), and then after the renewed continuous winning period, the operation continues. The output of the winning terminal is set to OFF (S8007 in FIG. 180). In addition, in the updated (reset) continuous winning period, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal continues to play. The output will be set to turn on.

  When the jackpot game is over, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or the probability variation game or the time saving game) is performed.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously entering (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. . Thereby, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the prize has been continuously won. Therefore, the hall computer 262 does not calculate based on the previous winning information in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, but only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, the processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of main controller in ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a control process of the main controller in the present control example will be described. The ninth control example is different from the above-described eighth control example in that a part of the external output process is changed. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  The details of the external output processing (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001) in this control example. This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and the commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 are executed. This is processing for transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a will pass through the detection switch 65c1, depending on whether or not the switch of the detection switch 65c1 has been turned on in the switch reading process of the main controller 110. Determine.

  In the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to ON (S8002), The winning period counter 203β is set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds), the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), if the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S8008.

  In the processing of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). In the processing of S8006, if it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a, Since the game ball has not newly entered the specific winning opening 65a in the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (S8007), and S8008 is set. Move to processing.

  In the process of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process directly proceeds to S8008.

  Here, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is a state other than the jackpot gaming state, even if the specific winning opening 65a has not been entered and the winning period counter 203β is already 0, the process of S8005 Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 has already been turned off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be continuously turned off. Since the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a only during the big hit game, the processes of S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the big hit game.

  This eliminates the need to execute the processing of S8001 to S8007 in the gaming state other than during the big hit game, and the processing load can be reduced. Also, when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, it is possible that a misconduct or anomaly occurs, so a separate error terminal is provided on the external output terminal 261 and the error terminal is used. The output of the terminal may be turned on to detect fraudulent activity or abnormal occurrence. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the error terminal for detecting fraudulent activity or abnormal occurrence, and a notification sound for notifying the error is output, or a display indicating the occurrence of the error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

  When the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is greater than 0 (S8008). When it is determined in the process of S8008 that the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the winning output period (100 milliseconds), the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8008, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8010: Yes), it is not necessary to measure the winning output period, not the winning output period, so the process of S8009 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8010. In the process of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is greater than 0 (S8010). When it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 in the process of S8010 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the process of S8010, if it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8010: No), it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, and it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, so the process of S8011 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the processing of S8012, other external output processing is executed (S8012). Other external output processing, for example, similar to the external output processing in the above-described eighth control example, an external output terminal indicating a period during which the accessory continuous operating device operates, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed. A process of turning on the accessory continuous operation terminal of the plate 261 at a predetermined timing is executed. When the process of S8012 is finished, this process is finished and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the ninth control example, it is determined by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261 that the game ball continuously enters (wins) the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. To be done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output is kept on when there is a winning during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning and the continuous winning is performed.

  Thereby, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning, based on the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, the hall computer 262 does not calculate based on the previous winning information in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, but only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, the processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

  The control example is not limited to the one described above, and the continuous winning terminal output may be continued only when the specific jackpot type is selected. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal to determine the type of jackpot that has been a jackpot. You can enable it.

  In addition, the period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (the winning output period) may be different for each jackpot type, based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning port 65a. For example, when the jackpot type is jackpot F, the winning output period is 50 milliseconds, when the jackpot is G, the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, and when the jackpot is H, the winning output period is 150 milliseconds. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and measures the period during which the output of the winning terminal is on (the winning output period), thereby the jackpot of the jackpot game being executed. The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of determining the jackpot type, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of determining the jackpot type without separately providing a terminal on the external output terminal board 261, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

  Further, in the present ninth control example, during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the gaming ball is entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the interval of entering the ball. When a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is continuously turned on, and the hall computer 262 cannot accurately detect the winning number. Is. Further, when the winning output period is shortened, it is necessary to shorten the detection interval of the winning terminals by the hall computer 262 correspondingly. This is because if the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal is turned off and the number of winnings cannot be accurately detected.

  Therefore, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a at a very short interval (10 milliseconds, etc.), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the prize terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at the very short interval. However, there is a problem that the processing load of the hall computer 262 becomes high.

  Therefore, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, a period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (the winning output stop period ) Is provided, and after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the game ball newly entering the specific winning opening 65a. You may

  As a result, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is longer than the interval at which the game balls enter (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since the output based on the game ball played can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect the winning (not to miss). Further, in the hall computer 262, it is not necessary to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at intervals shorter than the intervals at which the game balls enter (for example, 5 milliseconds), and the processing load of the hall computer 262 is reduced. Can be reduced.

  Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the game ball enters the specific winning port 65a in the jackpot game. The big hit game is configured so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and a state (round) in which a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). There is. This round ends when a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the specific winning opening 65a, and then an interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, The next round is about to begin. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set to be longer than the interval at which the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is based on all the winning balls (for example, 10 balls) in the interval between rounds. The winning terminal of the plate 261 can be output.

  Specifically, when 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a (10 balls). It is necessary to set the winning terminals of the external output terminal board 261 to ON for a total of 10 times and the winning output period (100 milliseconds) based on the number of minutes. Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a in the winning output period, after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, after the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds), It is configured to start the next winning output period. In this case, the time required to output the signals based on all the winning balls to the winning terminals of the external output terminal board 261 is the number of times the winning terminal output is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) And a product of the number of winning output periods (9 times) required after the output of the winning terminal and the winning output period (50 milliseconds) are added, 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the inter-round interval (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is completed based on all the winning balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval period. Is possible.

  Therefore, even if the prize output period in which the prize terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is longer than the interval at which the game balls enter (for example, 100 milliseconds), a new ball is won in the prize output period. Since all the output based on the played game balls can be executed during the subsequent inter-round interval, the hall computer 262 can detect the winning (not to miss). In the interval between rounds, even if you cannot execute all the outputs based on the game balls newly entered during the winning output period, the specific winning will be performed after the jackpot game is executed until the next jackpot game is executed. Since there is a period in which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (interval of the big hit game), the game ball may be configured to be executed in the interval of the big hit game. The specific example described above is merely an example, and the winning output period, the winning output suspension period, the interval between rounds, and the like may be appropriately changed.

  Further, in the ninth control example, for example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) is provided on the external output terminal board 261 based on passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. You may do it. As a result, by comparing the output timings of the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a and the V winning terminal, an illegal V winning (the game ball entering the probability variation switch 65e3 is won). It is possible for the hall computer 262 to determine whether or not a ball has been hit.

  Specifically, even if the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, the passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 is detected, and V is detected. When the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that a V prize has been illegally entered (the game ball has entered the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, when the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off but the V winning terminal is on, it can be detected as illegal or abnormal.

  Furthermore, a certain passing time (for example, 1 second) is required for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the period (continuous winning output period) during which the continuous winning terminal is on to be the time (1 second) required for passing, the V winning terminal during the period when the continuous winning terminal is off (other than the continuous winning output period). When it is turned on, the hall computer 262 can detect an illegal V winning.

  Specifically, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is sorted to either the normal discharge passage 65e1 or the special discharge passage 65e2 after the passage of a predetermined passage time (1 second), It does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage of a predetermined passage time (1 second). Therefore, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is turned on and then the continuous winning terminal which is turned off after the passage of a predetermined time (1 second) is turned off, the probability change switch The game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on while the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined that the V winning is illegal.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 196. In the tenth control example, the player operates the frame button 22 to cause a first slide member (hereinafter, referred to as accessory A) 720, a second slide member (hereinafter, referred to as accessory B) 740, The difference is that a tilt member (hereinafter, referred to as a character C) 460 drives a character operation effect.

  This accessory operation effect is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and by the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22, a plurality of the above-described accessory objects (accessories A720 to C460). ) Is the driving effect.

  In this way, in the effect of driving the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the accessory can be driven based on the operation of the player, so that the player is motivated. It was possible to play games.

  In addition, during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), a player operates the frame button 22 by executing a character product operation effect in which the character can be driven multiple times based on the operation of the frame button 22. Since the accessory operation effect is executed a plurality of times based on the number of times the operation is performed, the player can be more enthusiastic to play the game.

  However, there is a problem that during the character product operation effect, the character object cannot be driven even when the frame button 22 is operated, and the effect effect of the character object operation effect is deteriorated. It was Here, in the case where the driving period of the accessory executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 is shortened in advance, the period during which the accessory is driven can be shortened. Although it is possible to easily drive the accessory based on this, there is a problem that the range in which the accessory is driven is reduced based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the effect of the performance is reduced.

  The accessory operation effect executed in the tenth control example solves the above-described problem. Specifically, if a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while driving a character) is satisfied while the character operation effect is being executed, the character drive pattern to be executed next time. As the drive period, a drive period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the normal drive period (for example, 1 second) is set.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, if a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while driving a character) is satisfied during character operation, the character operation to be driven next time. Since a short operation period is set as, for example, when the player continuously operates (presses) the frame button 22, a short drive period is set as the drive period of the accessory, and the player sets the frame button 22 to 1 When operated (pressed) only once, a long drive period can be set as the drive period of the accessory. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times that the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory operation effect that is executed for a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect effect of one accessory operation. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 181-183, the drive content of the accessory in this control example will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 181, an outline of the operation of each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) used for the accessory drive effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory A 720 used for the accessory drive effect in this control example. As illustrated in FIG. 181 (a), in the accessory driving effect of this control example, the accessory motor A720 is moved in the left-right direction by driving the operation motors (hereinafter, referred to as accessory motor A) 771 and 772. It is driven (see FIG. 40). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in Fig. 40 (a) to the extended position shown in Fig. 40 (b) (operation period 0.5 seconds), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position ( The operation having a total operation period of 1 second is executed.

  FIG. 181 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory B 740 used for the accessory drive effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the accessory drive effect of this control example, the accessory B is moved in the vertical direction by driving the operation motors (hereinafter, referred to as accessory B motors) 773, 774. It is driven (see FIG. 41). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 41 (b) (operation period of 1 second), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position (operation period). (1 second) and the total operation period is 2 seconds.

  FIG. 181 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory C460 used for the accessory drive effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (c), in the accessory driving effect of this control example, the accessory B 740 is rotationally driven by driving the operation motor (hereinafter referred to as accessory C motor) 441 ( 25 and 26). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 25 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 26 (a) (operation period of 1.5 seconds), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position ( The operation having a total operation period of 3 seconds is performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 182, the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram showing that each character (characters A720 to C460) is located at the retracted position (standby position), and FIG. 182 (b) shows each character ( It is a schematic diagram which shows that the accessory A720-the accessory C460 are located in the projecting position (operating position).

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the accessory drive effect in this control example is to operate each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) provided around the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22. It is an effect that is driven based on. Specifically, the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once to drive all the winning objects located at the retracted position (standby position) (in the case of FIG. 182 (a), the winning combination). All of the objects A720 to C460 are driven). In this way, since a plurality of winning effects can be driven based on one operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to enhance the effect effect of the winning effect driving effect based on the operation of the player.

  In this accessory driving effect, the operating time of each accessory (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460) is set to be different as described above. The accessory A720 has an operation period of 1 second, and the accessory B740 has an operation period. The operation period of the accessory C460 is set to 2 seconds, and the operation period of the accessory C460 is set to 3 seconds. In this way, by changing the operation period of each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460), all the accessory (feature A720 to role C460) are all located at the retracted position (standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state (the state where the accessory drive effect is started), all of the accessories (accessories A720 to C460) start driving. Then, after one second, the accessory A720 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (operation is completed), and one second later, the accessory B740 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (operation is completed), and finally The object C460 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (operation is completed).

  Therefore, it is possible to change the timing at which the accessory is located at the retracted position (standby position) during the accessory driving effect, and the winning combination is driven by the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect. It is possible to make the objects different and enhance the effect of the accessory driving effect.

  In addition, although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 187, in the present control example, the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated in the accessory drive effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 10 seconds. The object drive effect (long continuous hit effect) and the accessory driving effect for 5 seconds (short continuous hit effect) can be set. Thereby, the player can motivate the frame button 22 to drive the accessory multiple times within a limited period.

  Then, the respective role objects (feature objects A720 to C460) driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 are driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 182 (b). To do. In this way, by driving the accessory so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device, the player can be surely ascertained that the accessory is driving.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the operation of the accessory A 720 in the accessory drive effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the accessory A 720 driven in the accessory drive effect in this control example, and FIG. 183 (b) is a normal drive pattern in the accessory drive effect in this control example. FIG. 183 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the drive range of the accessory A720 to be driven, and FIG. 183 (c) schematically shows the drive range of the accessory A720 driven in the shortened drive pattern in the accessory drive effect in this control example. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the accessory A 720 is a pair of slide members 720 provided on the left and right of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. The display area P of the third symbol display device 81 is located between the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the pair of slide members 720 (see FIG. 2).

  The slide member 720 is configured to be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22, and when the drive is started, the pair of slide members 720 (the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720) are respectively moved. It moves in the central direction of the second slide operation unit 700 (direction covering the display area P of the third symbol display device 81).

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are in the vicinity of the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the display area of the third symbol display device 81). It is driven to a position where it approaches (contacts) in the vicinity of the center of P). In this normal drive pattern, the movement period from the standby position (position in FIG. 183 (a)) to the maximum drive position (position in FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.5 seconds, and the drive of the normal drive pattern is performed. The period is set to 1 second (1 second for reciprocating the moving period of 0.5 seconds).

  In this way, since the accessory A720 driven in the normal drive pattern is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 which the player is gazing at, the player drives the accessory A720. It is easy to notice and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, while the accessory drive effect is being executed, various images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (images of effect display executed in each of the control examples described above) indicate that the accessory A A720 is being driven. It is displayed in the position to avoid. Thereby, it becomes possible to simultaneously execute the effect of driving the accessory and the effect of displaying on the third symbol display device 81, and further improve the effect of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), when the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are driven in a half range of the drive range of the normal drive pattern. In this shortening drive pattern, the moving time from the standby position (position in FIG. 183 (a)) to the shortening drive position (position in FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.25 seconds, and the driving of the normal drive pattern is performed. The period is set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds for reciprocating the moving period of 0.25 seconds).

  In this way, the driving period of the accessory A720 when the shortened drive pattern is set is about half the driving period of the accessory A720 when the normal drive pattern is set. Therefore, the drive period executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be shortened, and the frame button multiple times is operated during the accessory driving effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds or 10 seconds). In this case, it is possible to easily drive the accessory A720 based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  More specifically, when the accessory A 720 is executed in the normal drive pattern, next, the accessory A 720 becomes drivable based on the operation of the frame button 22 when the drive in the normal drive pattern ends. While the timing (that is, one second later) comes, when the accessory A720 is executed in the shortened drive pattern, the accessory A720 can be driven next based on the operation of the frame button 22. Is the timing at which the driving by the shortened driving pattern ends (that is, after 0.5 seconds).

  That is, when the accessory A720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as invalid for the accessory A720 for one second after the driving is started, and the accessory A720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern. In this case, the operation of the frame button 22 is invalidated for the accessory A 720 for 0.5 seconds after the driving is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, description will be made regarding the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (effect product A720 to accessory product C460) in the “button repeated hit effect” that is the accessory drive effect in this control example. do. FIG. 184 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 184, when the “button hitting effect” is started, the “effective period” during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effective is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, by the player operating the frame button 22 (“button pressing” ON) during the “valid period”, each accessory (feature A720-role) in a stopped state (a state in which the player is positioned at the standby position). The operation of the object C460) is started (point a in FIG. 184).

  In the present control example, the drive period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the drive period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the drive period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds, and the drive is performed in each predetermined period. . Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again (“button pressed” is ON) at the timing when the accessory A 720 is being driven, an invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period (see FIG. 186). Is set to ON (point b in FIG. 184).

  After that, when the driving period (1 second) of the accessory A 720 elapses and the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the accessory A 720 is in the stopped state (position at the standby position), the accessory A 720 is driven. The shortening drive pattern is executed as the pattern, and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (point c in FIG. 184). At this point c, since the accessory B 740 is in the stopped state and the accessory C 460 is in the operating state, the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the point c, and the accessory B 740 is activated. Are driven in a predetermined drive pattern.

  In the present control example, as described above, by operating the frame button 22 while the accessory A 720 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the accessory A 720 is set in the state in which the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. Is newly driven, the shortening drive pattern is set. Accordingly, a driving mode of the accessory that is different from the normal one can be provided to the player who has enthusiastically operated the frame button 22 while the accessory A 720 is driving, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this control example, when the accessory A 720 is newly driven in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the shortening drive pattern is set, so that the accessory drive effect is produced. When the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short period of time during a certain “button hitting effect”, it is possible to increase the number of times of driving the accessory A 720.

  Next, returning to FIG. 184, the flow when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times within a short period of time will be described. At the timing shown in the point d in FIG. 184, each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) is in the operating state based on the operation of the frame button 22 similarly to the point a. Then, the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 at a timing (that is, within 1 second from the point d) when the accessory A 720 that has started driving at the point d is operating (FIG. 184). Point e). After that, the accessory A 720 that has started driving at the point d is in a stopped state, and the timing at which the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are operating (that is, the period from 1 second after the point d until 2 seconds elapses). ), When the frame button 22 is operated, the accessory A 720 starts operating in the shortening drive pattern (0.5 seconds) (point f in FIG. 184).

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again within 0.5 seconds after the operation of the accessory A 720 that started driving at the point f ends, the accessory A 720 starts operating in the normal drive pattern (1 second). (Point g in FIG. 184).

  This point g is a timing at which the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460, which have started driving at the point d, have not finished their operations and one second has not elapsed from the point f. In the case of the configuration in which the shortened drive pattern (0.5 seconds) is not set as the drive pattern of A720, all the accessory (accessories A720 to C460) are in the operating state at the point g, and the frame button 22 is operated. It is not possible to drive an accessory based on.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, it is possible to drive the accessory A720 at the point f in a shortened variation pattern (0.5 seconds), so that the accessory A720 can be stopped at the point g. As described above, in the present control example, the shortened driving pattern can be set as the driving pattern of the accessory, and therefore, the shortened driving pattern can be set a plurality of times (for example, point d to point g in FIG. 184). When the frame button operation is performed (four times), it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Regarding electrical configuration in 10th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an electrical configuration in the tenth control example will be described. The tenth control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of signal output control to each drive motor (771, 772, 773, 774, 441) is different. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 185, an input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A drive motor group is connected to the input / output port 225. The drive motor group includes a motor for accessory A (motor for first slide member) 771, 772, a motor for accessory B (motor for second slide member) 773, 774, and a motor for accessory C (tilt member). Motor 441) and other motors.

  Each of the above-mentioned motors is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step for setting operation contents for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number and the command that can specify the motion (rotation) direction are output. The motor operation command output from the voice lamp control device 113 is set with reference to the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The ROM 222 in the tenth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous hit effect selection table 222aa and an operation scenario table 222ab are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (a). FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated hit effect selection table 222aa. The continuous hit effect selection table 222aa is a table for determining the execution / non-execution of the continuous hit effect and selecting the type of the continuous hit effect, and the variation pattern output from the main control device 110 is the normal reach. The above is referred to (that is, the variation time is 30 seconds or more).

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa is a table for selecting the type of continuous hit effect on the basis of the hit / miss determination result of the special figure change this time and the value of the effect counter 223f, and the continuous hit effect start time is set. In 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds), the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab that sets the period during which the frame button 22 is valid is set to 10000 milliseconds, and the continuous hitting effect start time is 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds). In), either "short continuous stroke effect" in which the continuous stroke effective timer 223ab that sets the period during which the frame button 22 is effective is set to 5000 milliseconds or "-" in which the continuous stroke effect is not executed is selected.

  The continuous hit effect selection table 222aa is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 of FIG. 190) described later (S1762). Specifically, when the hit determination result of this time is "win" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 9," "long hit effect" is selected as the hit effect type and the effect counter 223f indicates. When the value is "10 to 19", "short continuous stroke effect" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type. .

  On the other hand, when the hit determination result this time is “out” and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is “0 to 4”, “long hit effect” is selected as the hit effect type and the value of the effect counter 223f is “ In the case of "5 to 19", "short continuous stroke effect" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type.

  As described above, in the consecutive hit effect selection table 222aa in the present control example, the proportion (about 10%) of the consecutive hit effects is the same when the hit determination result is “win” and “out”. However, in the case of the hit determination result of "hit", the proportion of selecting "long hit effect" as the hit effect type is set higher than when the hit determination result is "out". (“Win” = 50%, “off” = 25%). As a result, when the "long continuous stroke effect" is executed as the continuous stroke effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning of the player.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the time when the continuous hit effect is executed (the continuous hit effect start time). Since the "long continuous hit effect" and the "short continuous hit effect" are the same (10000 milliseconds), whether the continuous hit effect executed this time is "long continuous hit effect" or "short continuous hit effect" depending on the timing when the continuous hit effect is started. It suppresses the player's grasping that. As a result, when the continuous hit effect is started, the player can be expected to continue the effect for a long time, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab. The action scenario table 222ab is a table in which the action scenarios of the respective winning effects in the continuous hit effect are stored, and the accessory action timers 223ac set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect. The operation command corresponding to the values of ˜223ae is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (b), in the operation scenario table 222ab, the accessory A720 scenario table 222ab1 in which the operation scenario of the accessory A720 is set, the accessory B scenario table 222ab2, and the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. Are defined, and when driving each character (character A720 to character C460), the corresponding scenario table is referred to.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c), the contents of each scenario table corresponding to the accessory A720 to the accessory C460 defined in the operation scenario table 222ab will be described.

  First, the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (a). FIG. 188 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory A 720 that is executed during continuous hitting performance is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. And an operation scenario (shortened operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “shortened”.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the accessory A scenario table 222 ab 1, the accessory button indicating the elapsed time after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect and it is determined that the accessory A 720 can be driven. Corresponding to the value of the A operation timer 223ac, the set value (operation speed) set for the accessory A motor (driver A motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario. (Pps), the number of operation steps, and the operation direction).

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In this operation pointer "01H", "100 pps" is specified as the operation speed, "50" as the number of steps, and "forward direction" as the operation direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "50" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory A operation of which the operation type is “normal” is executed, the accessory A motors 771 and 772 are in the “forward direction” for 0.5 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a). The right slide member 720b is driven in a direction in which the right slide member 720b and the right slide member 720b are close to each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and then for 0.5 second in the "negative direction" (returning direction of reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member The operation (that is, the accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 1 second) is performed in such a direction as to move away from 720b (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  When the action type is “shortening”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set in correspondence with the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In this operation pointer "01H", "100 pps" is specified as the operation speed, "25" is specified as the number of steps, and "forward direction" is specified as the operation direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “250” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "25" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory A operation of which the operation type is “shortening” is executed, the accessory A motors 771, 772 are “forward” for 0.25 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a). The right slide member 720b is driven in a direction in which they are close to each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and then “negative direction” (returning direction of reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member) for 0.25 seconds. The operation (that is, the accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 0.5 seconds) is performed in a direction in which the 720b and the 720b are separated from each other (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  As described above, the operation content of the accessory A720 during the continuous striking effect is the operation scenario with a long operation period (1 second) (normal drive pattern) and the operation scenario with a short operation period (0.5 second) (shortened drive pattern). ) Are defined, and one of the drive patterns is selected and executed according to the situation (the setting situation of the shortening flag 223ag) when the drive of the accessory A 720 is started.

  Although the details will be described later, the shortening flag 223ag is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the accessory A 720 is operating. The operation of the accessory A 720 is started with the shortened flag 223ag turned on (the operation of the accessory A when the shortened flag 223ag is set to be ended, and the operation of the next accessory A 720 is started. In this case, the operation type “shortening” is set. Therefore, when the player positively operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, a shortened drive pattern with a short operation period is set, and therefore, the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect. The number of times the A720 is operated can be increased.

  Further, since the normal drive pattern is set for the player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, it is possible to enhance the effect effect in one accessory action. In this way, by changing the operation pattern (operation period) of the character object based on the operation (pressing) state of the frame button 22 during the continuous striking effect, depending on the operation (pressing) state of the player with respect to the frame button 22. It is possible to execute the accessory driving effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Next, the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2. The accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory B 740 that is executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. Only set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2, like the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 described above, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) during the continuous hit effect, and the accessory B 740 can be driven. In accordance with the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad indicating the elapsed time from the determination, the accessory B motor (for accessory B motor) is set for each value of the operation pointer indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. The setting values (operating speed (pps), the number of operating steps, and the operating direction) to be set for the driver are defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “2000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "forward direction" as the motion direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory B operation of which the operation type is “normal” is executed, the accessory B motors 773 and 774 are “forward” for one second (the forward and backward movement directions, that is, the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740a). The member 740b is driven in a direction in which they are close to each other, and then is driven in the “negative direction” for one second (reverse direction of reciprocating motion, that is, the direction in which the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b are separated from each other (ie , The entire operation period is 2 seconds).

  Next, the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (c). FIG. 188 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. The accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory C460 to be executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is "normal". Only set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (c), in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect, like the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 and the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 described above. For the character C, for each value of the motion pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the motion scenario, corresponding to the value of the character C operation timer 223ae indicating the elapsed time after it is determined that the character C460 can be driven. The setting values (operating speed (pps), the number of operating steps, and the operating direction) set for the motor (driver for the accessory C motor) are specified.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “3000” of the accessory C action timer 223ae. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "150" as the number of steps, and "forward direction" as the motion direction. After that, the value “02H” of the motion pointer is set corresponding to the value “1500” of the accessory C motion timer 223ae. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "150" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value “03H” of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value “0” of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory C operation of which the operation type is “normal” is executed, the accessory C motor 441 is in the “forward direction” for 1.5 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the tilting member 460 is tilted). Drive for 1.5 seconds in the "negative direction" (reverse direction of reciprocating motion, that is, drive in a direction in which the tilt of the tilting member 460 is restored (i.e., a motion of an accessory for which the entire operation period is 3 seconds). Is executed.

  As described above, in this control example, the action type “shortening” is set only in the accessory A scenario table 223ab1. This is to shorten the operation of the accessory (character A720) having the shortest operation period among the plurality of characters (character A720 to character C460) that are driven during the continuous striking effect, and thus the normal character. This is because the number of operations of the accessory is increased during the continuous hit production while suppressing a reduction in the effect of the production motion.

  It should be noted that the action type “shortening” is not set in each scenario table (role B scenario table 222ab2, role C scenario table 222ab3) corresponding to the aforementioned accessory B 740 and accessory C 460, but the action type “shortening”. May be set.

  Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. FIG. 186 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The RAM 223 in the tenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the consecutive hit effect type storage area 223aa, the consecutive hit effective timer 223ab, the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the accessory B operation timer 223ad, and the operator The difference is that an object C operation timer 223ae, an overcoming flag 223af, and a shortening flag 223ag are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa is an area for storing the type of continuous hit effect selected by referring to the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa. In the continuous stroke effect type storage area 223aa, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 190), when it is determined that the normal reach or more (variation time is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761: Yes), continuous strokes are performed. The continuous hit effect type (S1762 in FIG. 190) selected by referring to the effect selection table 222aa is set (S1763 in FIG. 190). Then, when the special figure change ends (the continuous hit effect ends), the set information (the continuous hit effect type) is cleared.

  The continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is a timer for measuring a period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined in the continuous hitting effect. This interlocking valid timer 223ab is determined when the continuous stroke effect start time is determined in the continuous stroke button processing (S1857 in FIG. 192) executed in the frame button input monitoring / setting processing 3 (see FIG. 191), that is, When it is determined that the continuous stroke effect start time (10000 milliseconds has elapsed from the start of variation) set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the continuous stroke effect being executed this time is reached (s1902: yes in FIG. 192), The value of the continuous hit valid timer 23ab set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the consecutive hit effect being executed this time is set (S1903 in FIG. 192). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether it is the period during which the continuous hit button effect can be executed (S1906 in FIG. 192), and every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) is executed (every 1 ms). , Until the value becomes 0 (S2211 in FIG. 193), 1 is subtracted (S2212 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory A operation timer 223ac is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory A 720 in the continuous striking effect, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 corresponding to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Based on this, the operation of the accessory A 720 is controlled.

  This accessory A operation timer 223ac is cleared to 0 (S1904 of FIG. 192: Yes) when the continuous hit effect start time is reached in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192), and the continuous hit is effective. When the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory A action setting process (FIG. 194). ), A value corresponding to the state is set (S3704, S3705 in FIG. 194).

  Specifically, when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3704 in FIG. 194), and when it is driven in the shortened drive pattern, The value of the object A operation timer 223ac is set to "500" (S3705 of FIG. 194).

  The value set in the accessory A operation timer 223ac is calculated every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), The value is decremented by 1 until the value becomes “0” (S2213: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2214 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory B operation timer 223ad is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory B 740 in the continuous stroke effect, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 corresponding to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. Based on this, the operation of the accessory B 740 is controlled.

  This accessory B operation timer 223ad is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the continuous hit production start time is reached in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) (S1904 in FIG. 192), and the continuous hit is effective. The value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory B action setting process (FIG. 195). In (a), "2000" is set to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad (S3802 in FIG. 195 (a)).

  The value set in the accessory B operation timer 223ad is executed every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), The value is decremented by 1 until the value becomes “0” (S2215: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2216 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory C operation timer 223ae is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory C 460 in the continuous striking effect, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 corresponding to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. Based on this, the operation of the accessory C460 is controlled.

  The accessory C operation timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904 of FIG. 192: Yes) when the continuous hit effect start time is reached in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192), and the continuous hit is effective. If the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory C action setting process (FIG. 195). In (b)), "3000" is set to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae (S3902 in FIG. 195 (b)).

  The value set in the accessory C operation timer 223ae is executed every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ) Until the value becomes “0” (S2217: Yes in FIG. 193), 1 is subtracted (S2218 in FIG. 193).

  In this way, since each of the accessory (actuator A720 to accessory C460) driven based on the operation on the frame button 22 during the continuous stroke effect is provided with an operation scenario and an operation timer, each accessory Can be driven independently. Further, in the present control example, since the values of the operation timers set for the respective role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are made different, the operation of driving each role object (roles A 720 to role product C 460). The period is different. As a result, it is possible to drive only the accessory that is not driven when the frame button 22 is operated (the accessory whose operation timer value is “0”). Therefore, the movement of the entire character product when the frame button 22 is operated can be varied according to the operation status of each character product (character product A720 to character product C460), and the staging effect can be enhanced. it can.

  In addition, for each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460), for an accessory A720 having a shorter operation period than the other accessory (features B740 and C460), an operation scenario (having a shorter operation period). Since the shortening drive pattern can be set, all the role objects (features A720 to C460) are driven at the same time during the continuous hit effect (of all the role matters (features A720 to C460). It is possible to shorten the period in which the value of the operation timer is not “0”, and it is possible to easily execute the driving effect of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  The invalid flag 223af is a flag for determining that the frame button 22 has been operated while the accessory A 720 is operating (the value of the accessory A operation timer is not “0”). Is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation. In a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, when the driving of the accessory A 720 is started, an operation scenario (shortening drive pattern) having an operation period shorter than usual is set.

  This invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S1905 of FIG. 192) when the continuous stroke effect start time has been reached (S1902 of FIG. 192: Yes) in the continuous stroke button process (see FIG. 192), and the continuous stroke effective timer 223ab is set. In the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) executed when the value is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192). If the accessory A operation timer 223ac value is not "0" (S3701: No in FIG. 194), it is set to ON (S3702 in FIG. 194).

  In the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194), when the accessory A operation timer 223ac value is “0” (S3701: Yes in FIG. 194) and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (FIG. 194). S3703: Yes), the operation scenario, which is the shortened drive pattern, is set (S3705 in FIG. 194) and then set to OFF (S3706 in FIG. 194).

  In the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is in operation, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the timing at which the next repeated hit effect is started or the next effect A 720 is displayed. Although the configuration is such that it is not set to OFF until the operation is executed, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. Good.

  As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times executes the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an accessory effect according to the operation status of the frame button 22. In this case, the period in which the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF may be set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory (the accessory C460) that has the longest operation period among the accessories that can be driven in the continuous striking effect. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are not driven in the continuous stroke effect, only the role action A 720 has the shortening drive pattern. It can be prevented from being set.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated once while the accessory A 720 is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, but another condition is set as the invalid flag 223af to be ON. A condition may be set, for example, a condition may be set to turn on when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the accessory A 720 is operating, or a continuous striking effect period. When the remaining period (remaining period of the continuous hit valid timer) becomes a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds), the condition may be set to ON.

  In addition, in the present control example, the invalidation flag 223af is set to OFF when the operation scenario that is the shortening drive pattern is set, but a configuration other than that may be used, for example, once the invalidation flag 223af is turned ON. If set, the invalid flag 223af may not be set to off until the continuous hit effect is completed.

  The shortening flag 223ag is a flag for determining the action type of the accessory A 720, and is set to ON when the action type “shortening” is selected. This shortening flag 223ag is set when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON in the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) executed in the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) (FIG. 194). S3703: Yes) is set to ON (S3703 in FIG. 194).

  Then, in the character action processing (FIG. 196), the character is referred to when selecting the motion type of the character A scenario table (S2512 in FIG. 196), and when the motion type is selected and the motion scenario is set (S2514), It is set to OFF (S2515 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding Control Process in 10th Control Example>
Next, the control processing in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 196. In the control processing in the tenth control example, the contents of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first control example. Other processes are the same as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the tenth control example, the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 of FIG. 190) in contrast to the main process of the first control example (see FIG. 80). Point, the point that the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191), and the accessory operation process (S1561 in FIG. 196). It is different from the newly added point.

  First, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the content of the main process in the tenth control example. When the main process is executed, the processes of S1501 to S1506 are executed similarly to the main process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 80), and when the process of S1506 is finished, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) is executed instead of S1507 of 83. A detailed description of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191) will be given later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1560 ends, the processes of S1508 to S1510 are executed similarly to the main process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 80), and after the process of S1510 ends, the accessory action process (S1512). To execute. The detailed description of the accessory motion processing (S1561) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the processing of S1561 is finished, the command determination processing (S1511) is then executed in the same manner as the main processing of the first control example (see FIG. 80) described above, and then the variable display setting processing (S1512) is replaced. The variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed. A detailed description of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the processes of S1513 to S1517 are executed similarly to the main process of the first control example (see FIG. 80) described above, and the present process is terminated.

  Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512). This variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is different from the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) in the above-described first control example in that a process for performing continuous hit effect is added. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed, the processes of S1701 to S1703 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) of the first control example described above. Then, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is equal to or more than the normal reach (whether the fluctuation time of the extracted fluctuation pattern is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761).

  In the processing of S1761, when it is determined that the normal reach or more is reached, then, the continuous hit effect type is selected based on the value of the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa and the effect counter 223f (S1762), and the selected continuous hit effect is selected. The type is set in the continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1763).

  When the process of S1763 is completed, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703 and the continuous shot effect type set in the continuous shot effect type storage area 223aa in S1763 (S1704). On the other hand, in the processing of S1761, if it is determined that the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S1703 is not equal to or more than the normal reach (S1761: No), the processing of S1762 and S1763 is skipped and based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703. The display variation pattern command is set (S1704).

  When the process of S1704 ends, the processes of S1706 to S1709 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process of the first control example (S1512 of FIG. 82), and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) in this control example will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) is different from the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83) in that the continuous hit button process (S1857) is added.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1560) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1816 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1507 of FIG. 83) of the first control example described above. The continuous hit button processing is executed (S1851). Then, when the processing of S1851 is finished, this processing is finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the continuous hit button processing (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing (S1851). In the continuous hit button processing (S1851), in order to determine the operation content of each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) executed based on the operation (press) on the frame button 22 performed during the continuous effect. The process of is executed.

  When the continuous hit button process (S1851) is executed, first, it is determined whether the continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa has a continuous hit effect type (“long continuous hit effect” or “short continuous hit effect”) set therein (S1901). In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the continuous hit effect type is not set, that is, when the continuous hit button effect is not executed in this change (S1901: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous hit effect type is set (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the continuous hit effect start time (S1902). In the process of S1902, it is determined whether 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) have elapsed since the continuous hit effect was started (see FIG. 187 (a)).

  In the process of S1902, when it is determined that the continuous hit production start time is reached (S1902: Yes), a value corresponding to the current continuous hit effect type is set to the continuous hit effect timer 223ab as an initial process when starting the continuous hit effect (“ "10000" in the case of "long hit production" and "5000" in the case of "short hit production" are set (S1903), and each accessory action timer (effect A action timer 223ac, role B action timer 223ad, The accessory C operation timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904), and the invalidation flag 223af is set to off (S1905). Then, it transfers to S1906.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1902, when it is determined that it is not the continuous striking effect start time (S1902: No), the initial processes S1903 to S1905 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is larger than "0" (S1906). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is not larger than “0” (“0”), that is, in the variation in which the continuous hitting effect is executed, the continuous hitting effect is not started. If there is (S1906: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1906, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is larger than “0” (S1906: Yes), the button timer subtraction process is then executed (S1907). Here, the button timer subtraction process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button timer subtraction process (S1907). This button timer subtraction processing (S1907) is for subtracting various timers (duration effective timer 223ab, character A operation timer 223ac, character B operation timer 223ad, character C operation timer 223ae) set during the continuous stroke effect. Processing.

  When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is larger than "0" (S2211), and when it is determined that it is larger than "0" (S2211: Yes). , The value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is decremented by 1 (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (it is “0”), the process of S2212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2213.

  Next, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "0" (S2213), and when it is determined that the value is larger than "0" (S2213: Yes), the accessory A operation is performed. The value of the timer 223ac is decremented by 1 (S2214), and the process proceeds to S2215. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2213: No), the process of S2214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2215.

  In the process of S2215, it is determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "0" (S2215), and when it is determined that the value is larger than "0" (S2215: Yes), the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined. The value is decremented by 1 (S2216), and the process proceeds to S2217. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2215: No), the process of S2216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2217.

  In the process of S2217, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than "0" (S2217), and when it is determined that the value is larger than "0" (S2217: Yes), the accessory C operation timer 223ae is detected. The value is decremented by 1 (S2218), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2217: No), the process of S2218 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 192, the description will be continued. After the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is finished, it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) (S1908), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1908: Yes), each character object As the processing for driving, the accessory A operation setting processing (S1909), the accessory B operation setting processing (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting processing (S1911) are executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1908, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1908: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process (S1909). In this accessory A action setting process (S1909), a process for starting the action of the accessory A720 during the continuous hit effect and a process for setting the action type ("normal" or "shortened") of the accessory A720 are performed. To be executed.

  When the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3701). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3701: Yes), the invalid flag 223af is set next. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (S3703), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3703: No), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000. Is set, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating. (S3701: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3702), and this processing ends.

  In addition, in the processing of S3703, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3703: Yes), next, "500" is set to the value of the accessory action A timer 223af (S3705). The invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3706), the shortening flag 223ag is set to on (S3707), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process (S1910). In the accessory B action setting process (S1910), a process for starting the action of the accessory B740 during the continuous striking effect is executed.

  When the accessory B operation setting process (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3801). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3801: Yes), the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set. The value is set to "2000", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3801, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3801: No), the process ends as it is.

  FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process (S1911). In the accessory C action setting process (S1911), a process for starting the action of the accessory C460 during the continuous striking effect is executed.

  When the accessory C operation setting process (S1911) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3901). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is not operating (S3901: Yes), the accessory C operation timer 223ae is set. The value is set to "3000", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3901, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is operating. (S3901: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the accessory operation process (S1561) executed in the main process (see FIG. 189) of the present control example will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory action processing (S1561). In this accessory action process (S1561), the accessory A action setting process (S1909), the accessory B action setting process (S1910), and the accessory C action setting executed in the above-described continuous hit button process (S1851 of FIG. 192). Based on the various timers and flags set in the process (S1911), a process for setting an operation command for each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is executed. The operation command set in this processing is output to a drive motor (motor driver) for driving each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460).

  When the accessory operation process (S1561) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "0" (S2511). The value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not larger than "0" (when it is determined to be "0" (S2511: No), the processing (S2512 to S2514) related to the accessory A720 is skipped and shortened. The flag 223ag is set to off (S2515), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  In the processing of S2511, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (S2511: Yes), then it is determined whether the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512). If it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512: Yes), the action content corresponding to the action type “shortening” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is read (S2513), The process moves to S2516.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2512: No), it corresponds to the operation type “normal” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The content of the operation to be performed is read (S2514), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  In the process of S2516, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "0" (S2516). The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not larger than “0” (when it is determined that the value is “0” (S2516: No), S2517 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2518. When it is determined that the value of the item B operation timer 223ad is larger than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read (S2517), and the process proceeds to S2518.

  In the process of S2518, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than "0" (S2518). The value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not larger than "0" (when it is determined that the value is "0" (S2518: No), S2519 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2520. When it is determined that the value of the item C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is read (S2519), and the process proceeds to S2520.

  Then, an operation command is set based on each operation content read in the above-described processing of S2513, S2514, S2547, and S2519 (S2520), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, all of the drivable characters (characters A720 to C460) are driven based on one operation (press) on the frame button 22. Is configured to. Therefore, it is possible to drive a plurality of winning effects by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 once, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect of the winning effect driving effect executed based on the operation of the player.

  In addition, since the operation period is made different for each accessory (feature A720 to role C460), each accessory in a drivable state (feature A720 to role is depending on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. Object C460) can be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the drive mode of the accessory when the frame button 22 is operated, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of the accessory drive effect executed based on the operation of the player.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory (feature A720) is in operation, when the accessory is driven next time, the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period of the accessory is short is set, so that the frame is For the player who is willing to operate the button 22 a plurality of times, the number of times of driving the accessory based on the operation on the frame button 22 can be increased. Further, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times, the accessory does not drive in the shortened drive pattern, and the accessory drives in a long operation period. Can be increased.

  That is, in the accessory drive production in this control example, the player's frame button operation is performed by changing the accessory drive pattern in accordance with the situation in which the player operates the frame button 22 (one-time operation, continuous hit operation). There is an effect that it is possible to execute the accessory driving effect according to.

  In the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A 720, the invalid flag 223af which is a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern is set to be turned on. However, another condition may be set as a condition for setting the invalidation flag 223af on (that is, a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern as a drive pattern different from the normal drive pattern). For example, the accessory A720 The condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while is being operated, or the remaining period of the continuous striking effect period (remaining period of the continuous striking effective timer) is The condition may be satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds or less) is reached, or the condition may be satisfied based on a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid.

  Furthermore, it is not a cumulative value of the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one character action, but a plurality of character actions (for example, it is operated during a period in which one character drive effect is executed. The number of times the frame button 22 is operated may be configured to be accumulated over the character action).

  In addition, in the tenth control example described above, the invalid flag 223af, which is a condition for executing the shortening drive pattern when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A 720, starts the next continuous hit effect. Although it is configured not to be turned off until the timing of turning on or the next action of the accessory A 720 is executed, a condition for setting the invalidation flag 223af to off may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. Good.

  As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times executes the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an accessory effect according to the operation status of the frame button 22. In this case, the period in which the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF may be set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory (the accessory C460) that has the longest operation period among the accessories that can be driven in the continuous striking effect. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are not driven in the continuous stroke effect, only the role action A 720 has the shortening drive pattern. It can be prevented from being set.

  In addition, in the present control example, the shortening drive pattern can be set only for the accessory A 720, but the shortening drive pattern is set for the other accessories (the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460). You may enable it.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to change the operation pattern (driving pattern) of the accessory in a series of accessory driving effects (to change from the normal driving pattern to the shortening driving pattern), the frame during the effects driving effect is changed. Although the variable condition is satisfied based on the operation of the button 22 (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON), other than that, for example, a period before a series of accessory driving effects are executed. A configuration may be used in which the action pattern of the accessory is changed in advance based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.).

  With this configuration, it is possible to set a shortened drive pattern in the first accessory motion in the series of accessory drive effects, and to correspond to the operation on the frame button 22 in the series of accessory effect effects. It is possible to easily increase the number of times the accessory action is executed.

  In the present control example described above, a single shortening operation pattern (shortening drive pattern) having a shorter operation period is used for the normal operation pattern, but a plurality of shortening operation patterns having different operation periods are provided. , One of the plurality of shortening operation patterns is set based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.), the remaining period of the effect, and the gaming state (result of judgment of the special symbol) You may comprise.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 205. The eleventh control example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that control for changing the driving timing of the accessory in the accessory drive effect is added.

  Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect, each accessory (accessories A 720 to 720) located at the retracted position (standby position). Although the object C460) is configured to be driven simultaneously, in the eleventh control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the timing at which the character B740 is driven with respect to the accessory A720 is set. It is set to be delayed by 0.1 second, and the timing at which the accessory C 460 is driven with respect to the accessory A 720 is delayed by 0.2 seconds (0.1 second for the accessory B 740).

  In this way, by changing the timing of driving each character (character A720 to character C460) with respect to the operation of the frame button 22, all the character (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously operated. It becomes possible to shorten the period of driving, and it is possible to easily drive any of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the role effect drive effect. , It is possible to enhance the effect effect during the accessory driving effect.

  If the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delayed state is released. The driving of the target accessory (feature C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective role objects (the role objects A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect during the role product drive effect.

  As described above, when the control for varying the drive timing of the accessory in the accessory drive effect is used, the process of delaying the drive timing for the accessory having a long operation period set among the plurality of accessories (Delay processing) should be executed. With such a configuration, since the driving of the accessory having a short operation period is executed during the delay period, it is possible to efficiently reduce the period in which the respective accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are simultaneously driven. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the delay operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which each character (characters A720 to B740) driven in the character driving effect in this control example is located at the retracted position (standby position). 197 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect and the accessory A 720 starts driving, and FIG. ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the accessory B 740 for which the delay process has been executed in the accessory drive effect has started operation.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 located at the retracted position (standby position) are arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as in the above-described tenth control example. To be done. Note that, for convenience of description, the accessory C460 is not shown in FIG. 197, but in reality, the accessory C460 is provided at the same location as the above-described tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)).

  In this control example, when the accessory drive effect is started and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the accessory A 720 first starts operating as shown in FIG. 197 (b). Specifically, the operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 1 second) (see FIG. 188 (a)) is executed. Then, 0.1 second later, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), the accessory B 740 starts operating. Specifically, the operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 2 seconds) (see FIG. 188 (b)) is executed.

  As described above, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) in a state in which the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are drivable (a state in which the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in the retracted position (standby position)) (see FIG. 197 (a)). When the accessory A 720 starts to operate (see FIG. 197 (b)), the accessory B 740 starts the operation with a delay (FIG. 197 (c)), so that the frame button 22 is operated once. It is possible to drive a plurality of accessories at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that the accessory can be driven at various timings with respect to the operation of the frame button 22 and the effect effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the period from the state shown in FIG. 197 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 197 (c), that is, the period from the action of the accessory A 720 to the action of the accessory B 740 (delay period). If the frame button 22 is operated during), the accessory B 740 starts operating without waiting for the delay period. As a result, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and to enhance the effect effect during the role effect drive effect. it can.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period as described above, the accessory B 740 starts the operation without waiting for the delay period. Even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the action of the accessory B 740 may not be started until the delay period elapses. In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, but since the accessory B740 starts driving after the delay period elapses, the player is delayed. It can be assumed that driving of the accessory B 740 has been executed (started) based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a flow of operation of the frame button 22 and operation of each accessory (effect A 720 to accessory C 460) in the “button repeated hit effect” that is an effect drive effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. In this control example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) while the specific accessory (the accessory B740 or the accessory C460) is operating, and then the specific accessory (the accessory B740). Alternatively, when the accessory C460) is driven, the operation start timing is delayed.

  Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while either the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is in operation, an invalid flag 223 af described later is set to ON. When the operation of the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is started with the invalid flag 223af set to ON, a delay process of delaying the operation start timing is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 198, the player operates the frame button 22 (“button pressed” ON) during the effective period of the “button repeated production”, and thereby the player is in the stopped state (state in which the player is in the standby position). The action of each character (character A720 to character C460) is started (point a in FIG. 198).

  In this control example, as in the tenth control example described above, the driving period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds. It is driven for a fixed period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (“button pressed” is ON) at the timing when the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 is operated during the invalid period is turned on. (Point b in FIG. 198).

  After that, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at a timing when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in a stopped state (a state where the accessory A 720 is located at the standby position), the accessory A 720 performs a normal operation, and the accessory A 720 is executed. In B740, delay processing (delay period 0.1 seconds) is executed (point c in FIG. 198). At this point c, since the accessory C460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  More specifically, in this control process, after the operation setting process for the accessory B 740 (effect B operation setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)) is completed, the operation setting process for the accessory C 460 (effect C operation setting process). (S1911 of FIG. 204) is executed, the invalid flag 223af is once set to OFF in the accessory B operation setting process when the frame button 22 is operated at the point c in FIG. 198. After that, since the invalid flag 223af is set to ON again in the accessory C operation setting process, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  Then, after the lapse of the delay period (0.1 seconds), the operation of the accessory B 740 (operation period of 2 seconds) is executed (point d in FIG. 198). After that, when the frame button 22 is operated (point e in FIG. 198) while the operation of the accessory C460 is completed, the accessory A720 performs the normal operation, and the accessory C460 performs the delay process (delay period 0). .2 seconds) is executed (point e in FIG. 198). Note that at this point e, since the delay process is executed for the accessory C460, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF. Then, after the lapse of the delay period (after 0.2 seconds), the operation of the accessory C460 (operation period of 3 seconds) is executed (point f in FIG. 198).

  Then, at the timing of point g in FIG. 198, that is, in the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF, and when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in a stopped state (a state in which they are located at the standby position), the combination When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the object C460 is in the operating state (in operation), the operations of the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 are executed, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON.

  Then, at the timing of the point h in FIG. 198, that is, in the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and all of the accessory A 720, the accessory B 740, and the accessory C 460 are in the stopped state (positioned at the standby position. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of (state of being), the operations of the accessory A 720 and the accessory C 460 are executed, and the delay process is executed for the accessory B 740.

  As described above, this is because in the present control example, after the operation setting process for the accessory B 740 (effect B operation setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)) is completed, the operation setting process for the accessory C 460 (effect C operation). Since the setting process (S1911 in FIG. 204) is configured to be executed, when the frame button 22 is operated at the point h in FIG. 198, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF in the accessory B operation setting process. This is because the operation content of the accessory C 460 is set in the accessory C operation setting process after the operation.

  In this way, the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON and the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 while any one of the plurality of character products (the character products B740 and character product C460) is operating. When any one of the plurality of character products (character B740 and character C460) performs the operation in the state in which the delay flag is set and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF, the character B740, character By executing in the order of C460, when the operations of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are executed with the invalid flag 223af set to ON, only the accessory B 740 is subjected to the delay process. Become.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the delay processing from being simultaneously performed on a plurality of character objects (character objects B740 and character objects C460).

  Next, a flow of operation of each winning combination when the frame button 22 is operated during the delay process will be described with reference to points h and i in FIG. If the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process (0.1 seconds) is being executed for the accessory B 740 (0.08 seconds after the delay process is executed) at the point h in FIG. 198 ( At point i) in FIG. 198, the delaying process being executed is terminated, and the accessory B 740 executes an operation based on the frame button operation at point i in FIG. 198.

  In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed, the delay process is stopped and the character product is driven, so that the character product based on the frame button operation in the “button repeated production” is performed. The number of operations can be increased.

  In this control example, the invalidation flag 223af is set to the initial state (set to OFF) at the timing when the “button repeated effect” is started, but other configurations may be used, for example, , May be set to OFF at the timing when the “effective period” of the “button repeated production” ends, or may be set to OFF at the timing when the “button continuous production” ends.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. The RAM 222 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 222 in the tenth control example in that a character product B delay timer 222ba and a character product C delay timer 222bb are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory B delay timer 223ba is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay process is executed on the accessory B 740, and the value (for example, "100") set in this timer is 1 It is subtracted every millisecond and the delay process ends when the value of the timer becomes "0". This character B delay timer 223ba is set to 0 in the character B motion timer 223ad in character B operation setting processing 2 (refer to FIG. 203) executed in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (refer to FIG. 200). (S3811 of FIG. 203: Yes), when the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813: Yes of FIG. 203), the value of “100” is set, and the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200) is performed. Every time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2352 in FIG. 201).

  Then, in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 203), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not "0", the timer value becomes "0". Is set.

  The accessory C delay timer 223bb is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay process is executed on the accessory C460, and the value (for example, "200") set to this timer is 1 It is subtracted every millisecond and the delay process ends when the value of the timer becomes "0". It This character C delay timer 223bb is a character C operation timer 223ae whose value is "0" in the character C operation setting processing 2 (refer to FIG. 204) executed in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (refer to FIG. 200). (S3911: Yes in FIG. 203), if the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes in FIG. 203), a value of "200" is set, and the continuous hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200) is performed. Each time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2354 in FIG. 201).

  Then, in the character C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the character C delay timer 223bb is not "0", the value of the timer becomes "0". Is set.

  As described above, the accessory B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb described above are the delay periods set when the delay process is executed (0.1 seconds for the accessory B740, C460 is a timer for counting 0.2 seconds).

  Further, in each of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed (while the delay period is being counted), each delay timer (character The B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb) are set to "0". Accordingly, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the delay period, the accessory can be driven based on the operation on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to easily drive the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory drive effect (during continuous hit effect), and it is possible to enhance the effect effect during the accessory drive effect. .

<Regarding Control Process in 11th Control Example>
Next, the control processing in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205. In the control processing in the eleventh control example, the content of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the eleventh control example, the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button process 2 (see FIG. 200), and the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) is an accessory. The difference is that the operation process 2 (see FIG. 205) is changed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 200, the continuous hit button processing 2 (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing 2 (S1851). In the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851), the operation of each accessory (effect A720 to effect C460) executed based on the operation (press) on the frame button 22 in the continuous effect (“button repeated effect”). A process for determining the content is executed.

  The respective processes of the continuous stroke button process 2 (S1851) in the eleventh control example are different from each other in that a delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is added to the continuous stroke button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example. To do.

  When the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process of the first control example (see FIG. 192), and then the delay timer subtraction process is executed. (S1921), then the processes of S1908 to S1911 are performed, and this process ends.

  Next, the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay timer subtraction process (S1921). When the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than "0" (S2351). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2351: Yes), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S2352), The processing moves to S2353.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2353.

  In the process of S2353, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is larger than "0" (S2353). When it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2353: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is subtracted by 1 (S2354), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is “0” (S2353: No), the process of S2354 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909). The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory A operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 202).

  When the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3711). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3711: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3712), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3711, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3711: Yes), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3713). ), And this processing ends.

  That is, in the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) described above, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is referred to, it is determined whether or not the current operation state of the accessory A 720 is in operation, and the operation is in progress. In this case, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during operation is set to ON, and if not in operation (in the stopped state (standby state)), the operation of the accessory A 720 is executed. Therefore, a process of setting the value “1000” (corresponding to 1 second) to the accessory A operation timer 223ac is executed.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory B action setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203).

  In the accessory B operation setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3811). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0” (is equal to or larger than “1”) (S3811: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3812), and this processing ends. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3813: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0”. (S3814). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not “0” (is equal to or larger than “1”) (S3814: No), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is set to “0” ( S3815) and S3816 is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S3814, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S3814: Yes), the process of S3815 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3816.

  In the process of S3816, the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3816), and the present process is terminated.

  In addition, in the processing of S3813, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (is ON) (S3813: Yes), “100” is set to the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba ( (S3817), the invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3818), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910 in FIG. 203), the accessory B 740 can be operated or delayed based on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and the delay When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the processing (the value of the character B delay timer 223ba is “1” or more), the delay processing is ended and the processing of operating the character B 740 is executed.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 2 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1911).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory C operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 204).

  In the accessory C operation setting process 2 (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3911). When it is determined that the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not "0" ("1" or more) (S3911: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3912), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is on (S3913). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3913: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “0” (S3914). ).

  In the processing of S3914, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3914: No), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “0”. The setting is made (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3916. On the other hand, in the process of S3914, when the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is "0" (S3914: Yes), the process of S3915 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3916.

  In the process of S3916, "3000" is set to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae (S3916), and the present process is terminated.

  In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to "200" (S3917), and the invalid flag 223af is set. Is set to off (S3918), and this processing ends.

  Next, the accessory motion processing 2 (S1561) will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory action processing 2 (S1561).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory action process 2 (see FIG. 205).

  In this accessory operation process 2 (S1561), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S2531). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2531: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “normal” in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is set. Read-out (S2532) and the process proceeds to S2533. On the other hand, in the process of S2531, when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is determined to be “0” (S2531: NO), the process of S2532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2533.

  In the process of S2533, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than “0” (S2533). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S2533: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than "0". It is determined (S2534). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2534: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read ( S2535) and S2536.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined to be "0" in the processing of S2533 (S2533: No), or the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is determined to be "0" in the processing of S2534. If it is (S2534: No), the process of S2535 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2536.

  In the process of S2536, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0”. In the process of S2536, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2536: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “next”. It is determined whether it is larger than "0" (S2537).

  In the processing of S2537, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2537: Yes), the operation corresponding to the operation type of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. The content is read (S2538), and the process proceeds to S2539.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is determined to be "0" in the process of S2536 (S2536: No), or the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is determined to be "0" in the process of S2537. In the case of (S2537: No), the process of S2538 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2539.

  In the processing of S2539, an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S2539), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, since the timings at which the respective roles (features A 720 to C 460) are driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 are made different, all the roles (features) It becomes possible to shorten the period in which the A720 to the accessory C460) are being driven at the same time, and any of the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory drive effect. Can be easily driven, and the effect effect during the character object drive effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delay is performed. The state is canceled, and the driving of the target accessory (accessory C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective role objects (the role objects A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect during the role product drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the delay processing is executed for the accessory B 740 (operating period 2 seconds) and the accessory C 460 (operating period 3 seconds) having a longer operating period than the accessory A 720 (operating period 1 second). Is configured as follows. In other words, when a plurality of accessories are driven at the same time, the delay processing is executed for the accessories having a long operation period. As a result, the operation of the accessory having a short operation period is executed while the delay process is being executed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to further shorten the period in which a plurality of the accessory operates at the same time. .

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory that is being delayed is started without waiting for the delay period. However, even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory B may not be started until the delay period elapses.

  In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, but since the accessory starts to operate after the delay period elapses, the delay period is notified to the player. It can be assumed that the action of the accessory is executed (started) based on the operation (pressing) of the inner frame button 22.

  Further, in the present control example, while delay processing can be executed for a plurality of character objects (characteristics B740 and character object C460), the delay processing can be performed simultaneously for a plurality of character objects by one frame button operation. Since it is configured not to be executed, it is possible to suppress the delay processing from being simultaneously executed on a plurality of character objects (character object B740 and character object C460). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the delay process is simultaneously executed for a plurality of accessory products and the period in which the plurality of accessory products operate simultaneously is not shortened.

  Further, in the present control example, since the delay period set in the delay process is different for each accessory, it is possible to further prevent the situation in which the period in which a plurality of accessory operates simultaneously is not shortened. it can.

  In this control example, the period delayed in the delay process is a short period (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds), but the length of the delay period is not limited to this. A delay period that is longer than the operation period in which the accessory operates may be set. By doing so, it is possible to further suppress simultaneous movement of a plurality of accessories.

  Further, in the present control example, only one type of delay period is defined for each character in the delay process, but a plurality of types of delay periods may be set for each character. In this case, it is advisable to discriminate the accessory to be simultaneously executed and select the delay period based on the discrimination result. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to further shorten the period in which a plurality of accessory works simultaneously.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to execute the delay process in the series of accessory driving effects, the delay condition is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effects (invalid flag 223af is set to ON). However, other than that, for example, based on the operation status (the number of operations, the operation interval, etc.) of the frame button 22 in a period before the series of accessory drive effects are executed, You may use the structure which delays a physical movement beforehand.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set a delay pattern in the first accessory motion in a series of character drive effects, and in a series of character drive effects, a role corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22. It is possible to easily increase the number of times a physical action is executed.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210. The twelfth control example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that a control for changing an operation command to an active accessory in the accessory drive effect is added.

  Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect, a predetermined drive pattern (normal drive pattern or shortened drive pattern) is set and set. The configuration is such that each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) is operated based on the driven pattern.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operating status of each active accessory (accessories A720 to C460) is determined, and the active role is determined. When the object (the accessory A 720 or the accessory B 740) satisfies the predetermined condition (when it is determined that the character is driving in the forward direction), the accessory is moved from the current position to the standby position ( It is configured to set an operation command (hereinafter, referred to as repetitive operation) to be operated (toward the negative direction).

  In this way, by changing the operation command on the way to the active character (character A720 or character B740) and executing the repetitive motion, the operation period of one character motion is shortened. It is possible to make it easier to operate any one of the role objects (features A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the effect-driven effect, and the effect during the effect-driven effect. The effect can be enhanced.

  Also, since it is configured to execute the repetitive motion only when it is determined that the motion state is driving in the forward direction, it is possible to reliably shorten the motion period of the accessory that has changed the motion command midway. You can

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, a repetitive operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 206 (a) schematically shows the operation (drive) range (maximum drive range) and the possible range of repetitive motion (repeatable range) of the accessory A720 that is operated in the accessory drive effect in this control example. FIG. 206 (b) is a schematic diagram, and schematically shows a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect, and the accessory A 720 is moving in the forward direction (forward operation). FIG. 206C is a schematic diagram, and in FIG. 206C, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) while the accessory A 720 is operating in the positive direction, and the accessory A 720 operates in the negative direction (returning operation). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A720 by which.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the accessory A720 located at the retracted position (standby position) is arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as in the tenth control example described above. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are not shown in FIG. 206 (a), but actually, the accessory B 740 and the accessory B 740 are located at the same locations as in the tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)) described above. Object C460 is provided.

  The accessory A720 of this control example is set to be driven by the same operation command as the operation command defined in the operation type "normal" of the above-described tenth control example (the operation period is 1 second (forward operation 0. 5 seconds, a backward movement of 0.5 seconds)), and as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A 720 are up to approximately the center of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to overhang (maximum drive range).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the accessory slide A 720 located at the retracted position (standby position) has the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A 720 driven by the accessory A motors 771, 772, respectively. The movement is started toward the substantially central direction of the third symbol display device 81 (driving in the forward direction). FIG. 206B shows a state in which the accessory A 720 has started driving in the positive direction and 0.25 seconds have elapsed. In the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), when it is executed based on a normal operation command, the remaining forward operation is executed for 0.25 seconds, and then the backward operation is executed for 0.5 seconds.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated (forward operation is 0.25 At the timing of second execution), the returning operation (operation period 0.25 seconds) will be executed (repetitive operation will be executed).

  As a result, the operation of the accessory A720, which normally has an operation period of 1 second (forward operation 0.5 seconds, returning operation 0.5 seconds), is performed for 0.5 seconds (forward operation 0.25 seconds). , Return movement 0.25 seconds) (repetition movement) can be varied, and any one of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the role effect drive effect. Can be easily operated, and the effect effect during the accessory effect effect can be enhanced.

  Note that FIG. 206 shows an example of repetitive operation when the forward operation is executed and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) after 0.25 seconds have passed, but in this control example, the accessory is the forward operation. When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the (forward movement) period, the repetitive movement is executed. Therefore, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the forward movement is executed for 0.1 seconds, the returning movement is executed for 0.1 seconds, and the operation period of the accessory A720 is set to 0. It can be changed to 2 seconds.

  In addition, although the repetitive operation of the present control example is described using the accessory A 720 in FIG. 206, the repetitive operation of the accessory B 740 is also configured to be executable, and the operation period of the accessory B 740 (2 seconds If the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the forward movement (1 second) is executed (for example, the timing at which the forward movement is executed for 0.5 seconds), the backward movement of 0.5 seconds is performed thereafter. Is executed. As a result, normally, the accessory motion during the operation period (2 seconds) can be changed to the operation period (1 second).

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, by operating the frame button 22 during the operation of the character object that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the character object in operation (Operation period) can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory works based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is being driven, so that the operating period of the accessory being driven is shortened. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be located at the retracted position (standby position), and thus the number of times the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retracted position to the extended position), and it is determined that the accessory is in the forward direction. In this case, since the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position), the operation period of the accessory can be reliably shortened.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is operating, the operation (repetitive operation) for shortening the operation period is executed. The configuration may be used. For example, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) to temporarily stop the movement of the accessory being operated (stop the count of each accessory operation timer), and then the frame button 22. It may be configured to restart the operation of the accessory (restart counting of the accessory operation timer) when is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation mode of the accessory that is operating based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to increase the number of times of the accessory operation based on the operation of the frame button 22. Instead of temporarily stopping the movement of the accessory during operation, an operation of returning a predetermined amount (for example, 10 ms) in the return direction (negative direction) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, a flow of operation of the frame button 22 and operation of each accessory (effect character A720 to character effect C460) in the “button repeated hit effect” which is the character effect drive effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 207 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory drive effect in this control example. The detailed description of the same contents as those in FIG. 185 of the tenth control example described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the "button repeated effect", each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) starts operating as in the tenth control example described above. (See point a and point b in FIG. 207). Next, the flow of the repetitive operation in this control example will be described with reference to points c to g in FIG. 207.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the point c in FIG. 207, the action of the accessory B 740 located in the stopped state (standby state) is executed (the operation period is 2 seconds). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.8 seconds after the point c, the action of the accessory A 720 is started (point d in FIG. 207). This point d is 0.8 seconds after the accessory B 740 starts moving, and is a period in which the accessory B 740 is moving in the positive direction. Therefore, the repetitive operation is executed and 0 in the negative direction. A motion command that moves for 8 seconds is set.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.25 seconds after the point d, a repetitive operation is executed for the accessory A 720, and an operation command for moving in the negative direction for 0.25 seconds is set. Note that at point d, the accessory B 740 is operating in the negative direction, so the operation content does not change based on the operation (operation) of the frame button 22.

  Then, the accessory A 720 on which the repetitive motion is executed 0.25 seconds after the point e completes the operation (point f in FIG. 207), and the accessory B 740 on which the repetitive motion is executed 0.8 seconds after the point d. Completes the operation (point g in FIG. 207).

  Furthermore, after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at a timing (point h in FIG. 207) at which both the character A720 and the character B740 can execute an operation, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.6 seconds later. ), The character product A 720 is in a state (moving in the negative direction) after half the operation period (1 second), and thus the repetitive motion is not executed, and the character product B 740 is in the operation period. Since half of (2 seconds) has not elapsed (moving in the positive direction), repetitive operation (repetitive operation with total operation period of 1.2 seconds) is executed (point i). ). Then, the repeating operation of the accessory B 740 is completed 0.6 seconds after the point i.

<Regarding control processing in twelfth control example>
Next, the control processing in the 12th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. The control process in the twelfth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the continuous hit button process 3 (see FIG. 208) is executed instead of the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192). Is the same as the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 208, the continuous hit button processing 3 (S1851) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit button processing 3 (S1851). When the continuous hit button process 3 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192), and then the accessory A action setting process 3 is executed. Execute (see S1909 in FIG. 209), execute the accessory B operation setting process 3 (see S1910 in FIG. 210), execute accessory C operation setting process 3 (see S1911 in FIG. 211), and end this process. To do.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909). When the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3721). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3721: Yes), Next, "1000" is set to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac (S3723), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3721, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (greater than “1”), that is, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating. If it is (pressed) (S3721: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "500" (S3724), and the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "500" or less. If it is determined (S3724: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “500” (S3724: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the accessory A operation timer 223ac from “1000” is set to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The value is set (S3726), and this processing ends.

  That is, according to the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909), when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac has not reached half (“500”) of the set value (“1000”), that is, the accessory A When it is determined that A is operating in the normal direction (the direction away from the standby position), the current value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is changed from the set value (“1000”) of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. By setting the subtracted value (that is, the value that performs the operation in the negative direction corresponding to the operation amount that has already been moved in the positive direction) in the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the iterative operation using the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. Can be executed.

  In addition, as in the present control example, when performing the control for changing the operation period by changing the value of the timer (counter) for advancing the operation scenario table without changing the operation scenario table for operating the accessory May be provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the actual operating position of the accessory.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210A is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910). When the character B operation setting process 3 (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the character B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3821). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3821: Yes), The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3823), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3821, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3821: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "1000" (S3824), and when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is less than "1000" ( S3824: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than “1000” (S3824: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the accessory B operation timer 223ad from “2000” is set by the accessory B operation timer 223ad. The value is set (S3826), and this processing ends.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 3 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process 3 (S1911). In the twelfth control example, the character C action setting process (see FIG. 195) of the tenth control example is changed to the character C action setting process 3 (see FIG. 210), and the value of the character C action timer 223ae. Is set to "500" (S3922), and other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, by operating the frame button 22 during the operation of the character object that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the character object in operation (Operation period) can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory works based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is being driven, so that the operating period of the accessory being driven is shortened. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be located at the retracted position (standby position), and thus the number of times the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retracted position to the extended position), and it is determined that the accessory is in the forward direction. In this case, since the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position), the operation period of the accessory can be reliably shortened.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is operating, the operation (repetitive operation) for shortening the operation period is executed. The configuration may be used. For example, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) to temporarily stop the movement of the accessory being operated (stop the count of each accessory operation timer), and then the frame button 22. It may be configured to restart the operation of the accessory (restart counting of the accessory operation timer) when is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation mode of the accessory that is operating based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to increase the number of times of the accessory operation based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Example 13 of control>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216. In the thirteenth control example, with respect to the above-described tenth control example, all the role objects (features A720 to C460) that operate based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the role effect drive effect are all specified at a specific timing. The difference is that a control for positioning at the retracted position (standby position) is added.

  In the configuration of the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the character product drive effect, the frame button is controlled to operate the operable character object (the character object located at the retracted position (standby position)). The operation of 22 is executed during a period (effective period) for effectively determining the operation. Here, for example, in a case where an attempt is made to set an effect for simultaneously operating each of the character objects (characteristics A720 to character object C460) as a character object effect for notifying the expectation degree of the jackpot at the end of the character object driving effect described above. Is a period until the operation of each character (character A720 to character C460) operated at different timings and different operation periods is surely ended (in the case of the tenth control example, operation of character C460). It was necessary to set the period of 3 seconds) as a period (invalid period) during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not effectively determined.

  In this way, if the same invalid period is set for each character (character A720 to character C460), there is a risk that the player may mistakenly recognize that the character drive effect has ended. However, there is a problem that the effect effect of the entire accessory driving effect is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, it is possible to set an invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be invalid for each character (character A720 to character C460) having different operation periods. The invalid period to be set is configured to correspond to the operation period of each character (character A720 to character C460).

  In this way, by setting the invalid period corresponding to the operation period for each of the accessory (features A 720 to C 460), that is, each driven based on one operation of the frame button 22. By setting different invalid periods for the role objects (feature A720 to role item C460), the invalid period set during the feature drive drive effect (the invalid period set for all the role products) is shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect effect of the entire accessory driving effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, an operation mode of each character (character A720 to character C460) in the character drive effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 211 (a) is a period in which each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 set at the beginning of the effect drive effect (hereinafter referred to as a free movement period). It is a schematic diagram which shows the point c of FIG. 212 mentioned later as an example of operation | movement of each character (character A720-character C460) in FIG. 211, and FIG. Schematic diagram schematically showing a collective operation in which each character (characteristics A720 to C460) operates at the same time with the characteristic objects A720 to C460 intentionally positioned at the retracted position (standby position). Is.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), during the free movement period, each character (character A 720 to character C 460) is operated at different timings, so at a point c in FIG. The slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are moving in the negative direction (a state in which about 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of operation), and the accessory B 740 (the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b) is in the negative direction. It is in a state where the accessory C460 has not started to move (the state in which approximately 1.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation).

  In this way, during the free movement period, each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460) starts operating at a different timing depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and further each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460). Since C460) performs the operation in different operation periods, it is rare that each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) ends the operation at the same timing.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute various accessory action motions corresponding to the frame button operation of the player during the free motion period, and prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. ing.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows a simultaneous operation set at the end of the accessory drive effect. In this simultaneous operation, all the accessories execute the operations at the same timing, and by simultaneously operating a plurality of accessories (role A720 to role C460) provided on the pachinko machine 10, It is a production that gives an impact.

  In the accessory driving effect having such a free operation period and a period in which the simultaneous operation is executed, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, a display effect that suggests whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is won. During the period that is being executed, the third symbol is in a reach state (for example, among the three third symbols, two third symbols are stopped at the same symbol, and the remaining one third symbol is changing. (State), a free movement period is set as a character driving effect, and in the third symbol display device 81, simultaneous movement is performed near the timing at which one third symbol that is changing in the reach state stops. It may be configured to be set.

  As a result, it is possible to execute various accessory motions during the free motion period as a fuel for the reach state, and to perform simultaneous motions at the timing indicating the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is reached, thus improving the enjoyment of the game. The effect is that you can.

  As described above, according to the present control example, the free movement period is executed in the early stage of the character product drive production, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the last stage of the character product drive production. Further, when the free movement period shifts to the simultaneous movement period, since the invalid period of the period corresponding to the movement period of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set, operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Based on the above, it is possible to shorten the period in which all of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) cannot operate.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation period of each accessory (feature A720 to role product C460) is constant, but control for shortening the operation period of the accessory is also used as in the tenth control example described above. Alternatively, the control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory as in the eleventh control example described above may be used, or the control for varying the operation content of the operating accessory as in the twelfth control example may be used. You may use. Further, the controls used in the above-described control examples may be combined. As a result, it is possible to diversify the free drive operation executed in the early stage of the accessory drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the simultaneous operation executed in the final part of the accessory drive effect production is configured to be executed based on the frame button operation of the player. The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period of 1 second has elapsed.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation timings of the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) are the same as a simultaneous operation, but, for example, the operation range of each role matter (features A720 to C460) is the maximum. It may be set so that the timings (timing at which the accessory is most distant from the standby position) are the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the flow of operations of the frame buttons 22 and the operations of each accessory (effects A720 to C460) in the “button repeated hit effect” which is the effects drive effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 212 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory drive effect in this control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those in the timing chart of the tenth control example (see FIG. 185) described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the “button repeated hit effect” in this control example is a free operation period in which each accessory (effects A720 to C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the beginning of the effective period. It is set, and a collective operation period in which all the accessory (accompaniment A 720 to accessory C 460) are operated at the end of the effective period is set.

  Then, at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) at which the free movement period ends, each accessory to move the freely operated accessory (feature A720 to role C460) to the retracted position (stop state). An invalid time is set for each of (character A720 to character C460). Specifically, for the accessory C460 having an operation period of 3 seconds, the same invalid period of 3 seconds as the operation period is set (the period from point d to point h in FIG. 212), and the operation period is 2 seconds. For the accessory B 740 of No. 2, the invalid period of 2 seconds which is the same as the operation period is set (the period from the point f to the point h of FIG. 212), and for the accessory A 720 having the operation period of 1 second, the operation is performed. An invalid period of 1 second, which is the same as the period, is set.

  In this way, at the point h, different invalid periods are set for each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460) in order to position each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460) at the retracted position (standby position). By setting, the length of the ineffective period in which all of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are not driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the operation period of the longest role character C 460 (3 seconds. ), The action period (1 second) of the accessory A 720 having the shortest action period can be set.

  Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing (point e in FIG. 212) when the invalid period is set for the accessory C460, the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 can be driven, and the “button It is possible to enhance the directing effect of "continuous hitting effect".

  Then, by operating the frame button 22 during the simultaneous operation period (point h to point j in FIG. 212) in which each of the accessory (accessories A720 to C460) is located at the retracted position (standby position), Characters (character A 720 to character C 460) can be operated simultaneously (point j in FIG. 212).

  In addition, in this control example, only the control of positioning each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) to the retracted position (standby position) at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period starts. However, for example, each character (character A720 to character C460) is driven so that the end timing of each character (character A720 to character C460) driven at the end of the free movement period is close (becomes the same). May be configured to control the operation period and the operation start timing of the frame button 22, and the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period or the period until the invalid time is set. It is also possible to make a determination and, based on the result of the determination, determine the operation content of each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460).

  For example, the collective stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing (the point in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period is started, and the frame button is set. 22 is compared with the driving period of the accessory driving executed when 22 is operated, and the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period is started or the invalid period is set, and the normal operation contents ( When the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a position apart from the above-mentioned collective stop timing, the drive start time of the accessory is shifted or the drive content of the accessory is changed (extended or shortened). As a result, it is possible to select the operation content of each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) in the direction that coincides with the collective stop timing.

<Regarding the control process in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the control processing in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. In the control processing in the thirteenth control example, the contents of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The thirteenth control example is different in that the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  First, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button processing 4 (S1851) in the thirteenth control example. The same parts as those in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the continuous hit button process 4 (S1851 of FIG. 213) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed similarly to the continuous hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192) described above, and in the process of S1908, the frame button is pressed. When it is determined that 22 is ON (S1908: Yes), character product A operation setting process 4 (S1909), character product B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and character product C operation setting process 4 (S1911) are executed. Then, this process ends. Note that FIGS. 214 to 216 are respectively referred to for detailed description of the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909), the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911). See below.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909). When the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). Yes (S3731). When it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is not equal to or smaller than “1000” (greater than “1000”), that is, when it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3731: No), then the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is set. It is determined whether or not the value of is less than or equal to "2000", that is, during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3732). If the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer is equal to or smaller than “2000” (S3732: Yes), this processing is terminated and the processing is returned to the continuous-stroke button processing 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3732, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not “2000” or less (S3732: No), the process proceeds to S3733. Also, in the process of S3731, even when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3731: Yes), the process proceeds to S3733.

  In the process of S3733, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3733). If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating (S3733: No), this processing is ended as it is. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3733: Yes), the accessory A The value of the operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3734), and thereafter, this processing is terminated and returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910). The same parts as those in the accessory B operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) in the tenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). Yes (S3831). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "1000", that is, if it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3831: No), then the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than "3000". It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3832). If the value of the continuous hitting effective timer is equal to or less than "3000" (S3832: Yes), this process is ended as it is and the process returns to the continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3832, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “3000” (S3832: No), the process proceeds to S3833. Also, in the processing of S3831, even when it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3831: Yes), the processing proceeds to S3833.

  In the process of S3833, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3833). When the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating (S3833: No), this process is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3833: Yes), the accessory B is The value of the operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3834), and then this processing is ended and the operation returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  Next, referring to FIG. 216, the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911). The same parts as those in the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) in the tenth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less, that is, whether or not the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212) is reached. Yes (S3931). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "1000", that is, if it is determined that the simultaneous operation period is not set (S3931: No), then the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than "4000". It is determined whether or not, that is, during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3932). If the value of the continuous hitting effective timer is equal to or less than "4000" (S3932: Yes), this processing is ended as it is, and returns to the continuous hitting button processing 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3932, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “4000” (S3932: No), the process proceeds to S3933. In addition, in the processing of S3931, even when it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000” (S3931: Yes), the process proceeds to S3933.

  In the process of S3933, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3933). If the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is operating (S3933: No), this process is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is not operating (S3933: Yes), the accessory C The value of the operation timer 223ae is set to "3000" (S3934), and thereafter, this processing is terminated and returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  As described above, according to the thirteenth control example, the invalid period corresponding to the operation period is set for each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460), that is, once. By setting different invalid periods for the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) that are operated based on the operation of the frame button 22, the invalid period (all roles It is possible to shorten the invalid period set for an object and to enhance the effect effect of the entire accessory driving effect.

  Further, according to this control example, the free movement period is executed in the early stage of the character product drive production, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the last stage of the character product drive production. Further, when the free movement period shifts to the simultaneous movement period, since the invalid period of the period corresponding to the movement period of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set, operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Based on the above, it is possible to shorten the period in which all of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) cannot be driven.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation period of each accessory (feature A720 to role product C460) is constant, but control for shortening the operation period of the accessory is also used as in the tenth control example described above. Alternatively, the control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory as in the eleventh control example described above may be used, or the control for varying the operation content of the operating accessory as in the twelfth control example may be used. You may use. Further, the controls used in the above-described control examples may be combined. As a result, it is possible to diversify the free drive operation executed in the early stage of the accessory drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the simultaneous operation executed in the final part of the accessory drive effect production is configured to be executed based on the frame button operation of the player. The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period of 1 second has elapsed.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation timings of the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) are the same as a simultaneous operation, but, for example, the operation range of each role matter (features A720 to C460) is the maximum. It may be set so that the timings (timing at which the accessory is most distant from the standby position) are the same.

  In addition, in this control example, only the control of positioning each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) to the retracted position (standby position) at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period starts. However, for example, each character (character A720 to character C460) is driven so that the end timing of each character (character A720 to character C460) driven at the end of the free movement period is close (becomes the same). It may be configured to control the operation period and the operation start timing of, and determines the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period and the period until the invalid time is set. However, based on the determination result, the operation content of each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460) may be determined.

  For example, the collective stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing (the point in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period is started, and the frame button is set. 22 is compared with the driving period of the accessory driving executed when 22 is operated, and the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period is started or the invalid period is set, and the normal operation contents ( When the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a position apart from the above-mentioned collective stop timing, the drive start time of the accessory is shifted or the drive content of the accessory is changed (extended or shortened). As a result, it is possible to select the operation content of each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) in the direction that coincides with the collective stop timing.

<Fourteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 225. In the fourteenth control example, in contrast to the tenth control example described above, the motor driver MD1 (see FIG. 219) forming the accessory A motors 771, 772 outputs to the stepping motor M1 (see FIG. 219). The difference is that a plurality of output signals are provided, and that control for changing the operation content of the accessory A 720 is added based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 in the accessory drive effect.

  In the tenth control example described above, an operation command for each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the effect drive effect, and the effect corresponding to the operation command is set. By performing the operation, the effect effect of the accessory driving effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is enhanced.

  However, since the rotation speed of the stepping motor (for example, M1) that is driven based on the set operation command is always constant (see, for example, FIG. 188), the operation speed of the accessory becomes constant, so that further effects are produced. The improvement of the effect was demanded.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth control example, the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1 is a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps) and the stepping motor M1 is high speed (200 pps). A weak output signal that rotates at a lower speed (100 pps) can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when the accessory A720 is operated. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the movement amount in the same period can be doubled as compared with the case of a weak output signal. In other words, the period required to move the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect form of the accessory in the accessory drive effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). There is. Specifically, if the frame button operation (press) interval is within a predetermined period (3 seconds or less), a weak output signal is output and the frame button operation (press) interval is within the predetermined period. When it is longer than 3 seconds (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times at short intervals (intervals of 3 seconds or less), the character effect based on the weak output signal is executed multiple times and long intervals ( When the operation is performed at intervals longer than 3 seconds), the character effect based on the strong output signal is executed. Therefore, the character effect based on the operation content (operation interval) to the frame button 22 executed by the player. Can be changed, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  Further, in this control example, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1. In this way, by varying the type of output signal that drives the accessory without changing the period during which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the accessory operation performed during the fixed period. In the case of within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), in the case of the accessory action based on the weak output signal, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is longer than the predetermined period (longer than 3 seconds), Since the character action based on the strong output signal is configured to be executed, for example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during the character drive effect, the character action having a large motion range. And the player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times during the accessory drive effect, the accessory operation with a small operation range is executed multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the accessory operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player, and the player can eagerly participate in the game.

  In this control example, the configuration of setting the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, accessory driving. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the performance. In this case, for example, the strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory drive effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory motion can be increased (the operation speed can be increased and the operation range can be increased), so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. be able to.

  Further, in the present control example, the types of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak), but more types may be output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the accessory A operation in the accessory drive effect of this control example will be described. 217 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the drive range of the accessory A720 when a weak output signal is output from the motor driver MD1, and FIG. 217 (b) is a strong output from the motor driver MD1. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the drive range of the accessory A720 when a signal is output.

  When the weak output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (a), the operating range of the accessory A720 (the operating range in the operating period of 1 second) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (see FIG. 183 (b)). The operating range of the accessory A720 when the strong output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (b) (the operating range in the operating period of 1 second) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (see FIG. 183). (See (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each character (character A 720 to character C 460) in the “button repeated striking” which is the character driving drive effect in the fourteenth control example. Will be explained. FIG. 218 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example.

  As shown in FIG. 218, when the "button repeated effect" is started, the "effective period" during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effective is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, by the player operating the frame button 22 (“button pressing” ON) during the “valid period”, in the stopped state (the state of being located at the standby position) as in the tenth control example described above. The operation is started with respect to each certain accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) (point a in FIG. 218). In addition, during the period from the start of the “button repeated effect” until the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the value of the timer (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 is “0”. ”, A strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point a in FIG. 218).

  Next, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (point b in FIG. 218), the interval with the timing (point a in FIG. 218) when the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time is determined (T1 = (3.6 seconds), the determination result exceeds the predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), so a strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point b in FIG. 218).

  Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the "effective period" of the "button repeated effect" (point c in FIG. 218), the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time (point b in FIG. 218). ) Is determined (T2 = 2.2 seconds), and since the determination result does not exceed the predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a weak output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (FIG. 218 point c).

  Hereinafter, when the frame button 22 is similarly operated (pressed) and the accessory A 720 is operated, it is output to the accessory A 720 based on the interval with the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time. The type of output signal is determined.

  Next, with reference to points d to f in FIG. 218, the flow of control when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating will be described. First, when the frame button 22 is operated at the point d in FIG. 218, the interval (T4 = 3.2 seconds) from the previous frame button operation timing exceeds the predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). Therefore, a strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720.

  Then, when a new frame button operation is executed while the accessory A 720 is operating based on the frame button operation (depression) at the point d (point e in FIG. 218), it is based on the frame button operation. The operation of the accessory A 720 is not executed, and further, the value of the timer (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 is continuously measured without being reset.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the operation of the accessory A720 based on the frame button operation (pressed) at the point d in FIG. 218 is completed (point f in FIG. 218), the point in FIG. A strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 based on the interval (T5 = 4.8 seconds) from d. That is, in the present control example, the type of the output signal output to the accessory A 720 (strong output signal or weak output signal) is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but the operation of the frame button 22 The interval is configured not to include the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 during operation of the accessory A).

  With this configuration, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the frame button operation interval corresponding to the interval at which the accessory A 720 actually operates. can do. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

  In this control example, the operation interval of the frame button 22 is determined without including the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 while the accessory A is operating). Although other configurations may be used, for example, the operation intervals of the frame buttons 22 may be determined for the operations on all the frame buttons 22.

  Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 (strong output signal or weak output signal) is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but under other conditions. The type of output signal may be set. For example, the interval at which the accessory A actually operates (the interval at which the operation command is output to the accessory A 720) may be determined, and the type of the output signal may be set based on the determination result. Even with this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the present control example.

  Furthermore, the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the “effective period” of the “button repeated production”. Alternatively, the type of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 (strong output signal or weak output signal) may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 may be set based on the operation interval with another accessory (the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460).

<Regarding electrical configuration in 14th control example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 221. The fourteenth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed and that the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 225. The difference is that the contents of the drive motor group have been described in detail. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the drive motor group connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive motor group. Note that, in FIG. 219, some of the components of the voice lamp control device 113 that are the same as those in the above-described tenth control example are omitted.

  The accessory A motors 771 and 772 provided in the drive motor group in this control example include a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1. Specifically, the accessory A motor 771 includes a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1, and the accessory A motor 772 includes a motor driver MD2 (not shown) and a stepping motor M2 (not shown). It consists of and.

  In this control example, the accessory A motor 771 and the accessory A motor 772 are different only in the rotation directions of the motors, and are configured to be driven in response to the same operation command. Only the description of 771 will be given, and the detailed description of the accessory A motor 772 will be omitted. The configurations of the accessory B motors 773 and 774, the accessory C motor 441, and other motors are also the same as those of the accessory A motor 771 described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the motor driver MD1 provided in the accessory A motor 771 will be described. The motor driver MD1 controls at least the rotation direction (normal rotation / reverse rotation), rotation speed (acceleration / deceleration), and rotation amount (number of steps) of the stepping motor M1 based on the operation command output from the voice lamp control device 113. When the operation command corresponding to the contents of the operation scenario table 222ab defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the stepping motor M1 drives the operation scenario. Electric power is output to the stepping motor M1 so as to be executed.

  In this control example, one motor driver MD1 is provided for a single stepping motor M1, but the operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors (stepping motors) with a single motor driver. May be adopted. In this case, the operation command such as the number of rotation steps may be output by including the information for specifying the type of the drive motor (stepping motor).

  The stepping motor M1 is a known stepping motor and its detailed description is omitted. However, the rotation control (rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation amount) of the motor is controlled by the number of pulses at a certain angle (basic step angle) and its frequency. It is a motor to be controlled, and is configured such that the rotational speed of the motor increases as the frequency of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 increases. The accessory A720 is operated based on the driving mode of the stepping motor M1.

  As described above, in the present control example, the accessory driver operation for operating the accessory A720 at high speed (high speed accessory operation) and the accessory operation for operating the accessory A720 at low speed (low speed accessory operation) are performed by the motor driver. Since it is configured to be controllable according to the type of output signal output from MD1, for example, compared to a configuration in which the operating speed of the accessory is changed by switching between a high-speed rotation drive motor and a low-speed rotation drive motor. It is possible to reduce the number of components used for the accessory operation, and to save space in the device. In addition, it is possible to simplify the operation control content related to the accessory operation.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG. 220 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The ROM 222 in the 14th control example is different from the ROM 222 in the 10th control example described above in that a second operation scenario table 222ab is provided instead of the operation scenario table 222ab. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the second operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second operation scenario table 222ab. The second operation scenario table 222ab is provided with a character A second scenario table 222ab4 in place of the character A scenario table 222ab1 with respect to the above-described operation scenario table 222ab of the tenth control example (see FIG. 187 (b)). The other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 will be described with reference to FIG. 221 (b). FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. This accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 is a table in which an operation scenario for accessory A 720 that is executed during the "button repeated effect" in this control example is set, and the operation speed of accessory A 720 is slow (100 pps. ) An operation scenario and an operation scenario in which the operation speed of the accessory A 720 is fast (200 pps) are set.

  Specifically, the action scenario (weak action scenario) executed when the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is "1" (the operation type is "weak") and the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is " 2 ”(the operation type is“ strong ”), the operation scenario (weak operation scenario) is set.

  Here, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 operated during the "button repeated hit effect", and the operation interval of the frame button 22 is equal to or more than a predetermined period (3 "2" is set as the selection value in the case of (seconds or more), and "1" is set as the selection value in the case of less than the predetermined period (less than 3 seconds). The detailed value of the accessory A selection value 223cb will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 (b).

  The contents defined in the action type “weak” in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 are the contents defined in the action type “normal” in the accessory A operation scenario table 222ab1 of the tenth control example described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the content defined in the operation type “strong” defines information that makes the operation speed (rotation speed) of the stepping motor M1 faster than the content defined in the operation type “weak”.

  Specifically, the value "01H" of the action pointer is set in correspondence with the value "1000" of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In this operation pointer "01H", "200 pps" is specified as the operation speed, "100" is specified as the number of steps, and "forward direction" is specified as the operation direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "200 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4, an operation scenario in which the accessory A 720 is operated for one second is defined regardless of the operation type (“weak” or “strong”), and the operation type is “weak”. The information is defined so that the action range of the action A of the feature A 720 whose action type is “strong” is doubled (the number of steps is twice).

  Returning to FIG. 220, the description will be continued. FIG. 220B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the tenth control example in that an accessory A interval timer 223ca and an accessory A selection value 223cb are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory A interval timer 223ca is such that the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated in the accessory drive effect (“button repeated effect”) (the interval at which the accessory A 720 operates) is within a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). It is a timer that is referred to when determining whether there is a timer, and is a timer that is decremented every 1 millisecond after a value indicating a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example) is set. This accessory A interval timer 223ca has a predetermined value ("3000") after the value of the accessory A operation timer is set to "1000" in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) (S3745). Is set (S3746), and is subtracted until the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca becomes “0” in the interval timer subtraction process (S1931 of FIG. 223) of the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 of FIG. 222) (FIG. 223). (S2362), referred to when selecting a character A selection value 223cb described later in character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 of FIG. 224).

  The accessory A selection value 223cb is referred to when selecting one operation scenario from the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 of the second operation scenario table 222ab. The character A selection value 223cb is set to "2" when the character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) determines that the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is "0". When it is determined that the value of the object A interval timer 223ca is not "0" ("1" or more), "1" is set. Then, in the accessory operation process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225), the information set when the operation of the accessory A720 ends is referred to when the operation scenario of the accessory A720 is read (S2551 in FIG. 225). It is cleared (S2554 in FIG. 225).

  As described above, in this control example, the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the role is determined based on the value of the set accessory A selection value. A strong motion scenario or a weak motion scenario is set as the motion scenario of the object A720. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation content of the accessory A720 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 (the operation interval of the accessory A720).

<Regarding Control Process in 14th Control Example>
Next, the control processing in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. In the control processing in the fourteenth control example, the content of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fourteenth control example, the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button process 5 (see FIG. 222), and the accessory operation process (see FIG. 196) is the accessory character. The difference is that the operation process 2 (see FIG. 225) is changed.

  First, the continuous hit button processing 5 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button processing 5 (S1851). When the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192), and when the process of S1907 ends, next, Interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is executed. This interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is a process of subtracting the value set in the accessory A interval timer 223ca described above, and a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 223.

  When the process of S1931 is finished, then, the processes of S1908 to S1911 are executed similarly to the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example described above, and the present process is finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 223, the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) executed in the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 of FIG. 222) will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the contents of the interval timer subtraction process (S1931). This interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is provided in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113, and the processing interval is set to 1 millisecond. That is, every time this process is executed, a process of subtracting “1” corresponding to 1 millisecond from the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is executed.

  When the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S2361). In the processing of S2361, when it is determined that the value is larger than “0” (more than “1”) (S2361: Yes), the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is decremented by 1 (S2362), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2361: No), the process of S2362 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909). In this accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909), when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operation content of the accessory A 720 is set and the operation (press) interval of the frame button 22 (feature A720) is set. The process of setting a predetermined value (“3000”) in the accessory A interval timer 223ca, which is referred to when determining whether the operation interval of is within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), is executed.

  When the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0", and it is determined that it is not "0" ("1" or more). If so (S3741: No), the accessory A720 is in motion, and this process is terminated without performing new motion setting.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3741: Yes), the accessory A 720 has finished its operation and is in the retracted position (operation Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is "0" (S3742). In the process of S3742, when it is determined that the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is “0” (S3742: Yes), the predetermined period (3 seconds) has passed since the previous frame button operation (character A operation). Since it has passed, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set to "2" (S3744), and the process proceeds to S3745.

  In the process of S3742, if it is determined that the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S3742: No), the previous frame button operation (character A operation) Since the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed since (since the interval is short), the accessory A selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S3743), and the process proceeds to S3745.

  Then, in the process of S3745, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3745), and then the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is set to "3000" (S3746). The process ends.

  In the accessory character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 of FIG. 224), when setting the operation content of the accessory object A720, is the interval between the previous frame button operation (character object A operation) within a predetermined value? It is determined whether or not to refer to the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the operation content (strong operation, weak operation) of the accessory A 720 this time is set based on the determination result. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an accessory (an accessory A720) operation corresponding to the frame button operation of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a variety of accessory operations.

  Next, the accessory motion processing 3 (S1561 of FIG. 225) will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory action processing 3 (S1561). When the accessory operation process 3 (S1561) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S2511), and from "0". If it is determined that it is also large (“1” or more) (S2511: Yes), then it is determined whether the accessory selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S2551).

  In the processing of S2551, when it is determined that the accessory selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S2551: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type "weak" of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. Is read (S2552), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2551, if it is determined that the turf selection value 223cb is not set to “1” (set to “2”) (S2551: No), the accessory A second scenario table The operation content corresponding to the operation type “strong” of 222ab4 is read (S2553), and the process proceeds to S2516. Further, in the processing of S2511, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S2511: No), then the accessory selection value 223cb is cleared (reset) (S2554). , S2516 is entered.

  When the process proceeds to S2516, the processes from S2516 to S2520 are executed similarly to the accessory operation process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example described above, and the present process ends.

  As described above, according to the fourteenth control example, as the output signals output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1, the strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps) and the stepping motor M1 are output. A weak output signal that rotates at a low speed (100 pps) rather than a high speed (200 pps) can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when the accessory A720 is operated. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the movement amount in the same period can be doubled as compared with the case of a weak output signal. In other words, the period required to move the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect form of the accessory in the accessory drive effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). There is. Specifically, if the frame button operation (press) interval is within a predetermined period (3 seconds or less), a weak output signal is output and the frame button operation (press) interval is within the predetermined period. When it is longer than 3 seconds (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times at short intervals (intervals of 3 seconds or less), the character effect based on the weak output signal is executed multiple times and long intervals ( When the operation is performed at intervals longer than 3 seconds), the character effect based on the strong output signal is executed. Therefore, the character effect based on the operation content (operation interval) to the frame button 22 executed by the player. Can be changed, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  Further, in this control example, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1. In this way, by varying the type of output signal that drives the accessory without changing the period during which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the accessory operation performed during the fixed period. In the case of within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), in the case of the accessory action based on the weak output signal, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is longer than the predetermined period (longer than 3 seconds), Since the character action based on the strong output signal is configured to be executed, for example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during the character drive effect, the character action having a large motion range. And the player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times during the accessory drive effect, the accessory operation with a small operation range is executed multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the accessory operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player, and the player can eagerly participate in the game.

  In this control example, the configuration of setting the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, accessory driving. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the performance. In this case, for example, the strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory drive effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory motion can be increased (the operation speed can be increased and the operation range can be increased), so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. be able to.

  Further, in the present control example, the types of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak), but more types may be output.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to simplify the operation control of the accessory, a configuration in which a constant accessory operation period is always set regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 is used. It may be configured such that the role product operation period is changed according to the type of the output signal output by the driver MD1, and for example, when a strong output signal (200 pps) is output, the role product operation period is set to 0. If the weak output signal (100 pps) is output for 5 seconds, the accessory operation period may be set for 1 second. Thereby, regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1, the operating range of the character is made constant, and the operating period of the character is variable (the character operating period of the strong output signal is the character operating period of the weak output signal). It can be shortened to half) and the effect can be enhanced.

  When the configuration described above is used in this control example, the motor driver MD1 outputs a strong output signal when the operation interval of the frame button 22 is short, and the motor driver MD1 outputs a weak output signal when the operation interval is long. It is better to configure it.

  In the above, in the tenth to fourteenth control examples, various control processes for the accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) operated based on the player operating the frame button 22 have been described. The configuration of each control example may be partially or wholly combined. For example, in a configuration capable of executing the shortened operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay process of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable process of the thirteenth control example, the frame Contents to be executed based on the operation contents of the player on the button 22 (operation timing, number of operations, operation interval, etc.) and game state (whether the judgment result of the special symbol or the normal symbol is correct or not, the probability change state, the time saving state, etc.) It is good to make it different. As a result, more diverse effects can be executed.

  Further, the shortening operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed varying process of the thirteenth control example are executed in a configuration that can be executed. The player may be allowed to select the content to be displayed.

  Further, in each of the control examples described above, a configuration is used in which the player operates each accessory (accommodation A720 to C460) provided on the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22. It suffices that the effect mode is variable based on the operation of the player, and for example, the sound mode output from the audio output device 226 by the player operating a predetermined operation means (frame button 22 or the like). May be used, a light emission effect that changes the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227, or a display effect that changes the display mode displayed on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 may be used. You may make it the structure which combined each aspect.

  Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the configuration of the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, when the player contacts or approaches. It may be a sensor device that detects and reacts, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, or a lever device that can be operated by the player in the front, rear, left, and right directions. Further, the number of means for the player to operate is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided. In this case, the player can enthusiastically participate in the effect by changing the effect mode when a plurality of operating means are operated.

  In addition, as a configuration having the same effects as those of the above-described tenth to fourteenth control examples, the operation status (whether or not in operation, remaining operation period) of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is determined. Providing a possible accessory action status determination means and a storage means for storing the determination result, the operation of a predetermined accessory (any of the accessories (features A720 to C460)) is executed. In doing so, a configuration may be used in which the operation pattern of the accessory is set based on the driving status of the other accessory.

  This control will be described by taking as an example the control for each of the role objects (features A720 to C460) used in the tenth control example described above, and in the case of operating the role matter A720, other role matters (features B740 and It is preferable to determine whether or not the accessory C460) is in motion, and to set the operation of the accessory A720 to the shortened operation pattern when determining that the other accessory is in motion. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which each of the accessory products (the accessory products A720 to C460) is operating.

  In addition, when the other accessory is operating, the remaining operating period of the operating accessory is determined, and the operating character of the accessory is shorter than the operating period of the shortened operation pattern of the accessory that is executed this time. The shortened operation pattern may be set only when the remaining operation period is long.

  Further, it is preferable to set priorities for a plurality of roles and to determine a role that can change the operation pattern based on the priority when the plurality of roles can be driven simultaneously. In this case, for example, the priority order may be set for a plurality of character objects in association with the effect pattern executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display effect and the accessory operation executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, as a method for setting the priority order for a plurality of character objects, another method may be used, for example, the priority order may be set depending on the length of the operating period of the character object, or a plurality of character objects may be set. The priority order may be set based on the arrangement of objects (front and rear positions), or the priority order may be set based on the driving speeds set for a plurality of character objects.

  Furthermore, when the control for each character (character A720 to character C460) used in the eleventh control example is described as an example, at least two or more character (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously operated. In addition, it is preferable to set to delay the operation of the accessory (the accessory C460 if the accessory A720 and the accessory C460 are simultaneously operated) having a long operation period. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which a plurality of simultaneously operated accessories are operating together. In addition, the same control as the content described as an example of the control for each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) in the above-described tenth control example may be executed, or the respective controls may be combined.

  Further, when the control for each character (character A720 to character C460) used in the twelfth control example is described as an example, at least two or more character (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously operated. In addition, when the repetitive motion is executed, it may be set so that the repetitive motion is executed only for the accessory having a short operation period until returning to the standby position. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary repetitive operations from being executed. Moreover, you may perform the same control as the content which demonstrated the control with respect to each role thing (feature thing A720-role matter C460) of the 10th control example and the 11th control example which were mentioned above, and each control may be performed. You may combine.

  In addition, in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example described above, a configuration is used in which a plurality of character objects operate simultaneously based on the operation of the frame button 22, but each character object (character object A720 to character object C460) is used. The operating conditions may be set differently. For example, the accessory A 720 may be operated each time the frame button 22 is operated (the operating condition is one button operation), and the accessory B 740 may be the frame. The button 22 may be set to be operated when it is operated twice (the operation condition is two button operations), and the accessory C460 may be set to be operated when the frame button 22 is operated five times. By setting in this way, various accessory motions can be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22.

  Furthermore, the following configuration may be used as a configuration that achieves the same effects as those of the 10th to 14th control examples described above.

<Modified example that determines the priority order of the characters that are shortened / delayed according to the type of repeated hit production>
The main movable accessory may be determined according to the type of continuous hit effect, and the operation of the main movable accessory may be configured not to be shortened or delayed. That is, the operation other than the main movable accessory may be shortened or delayed. As a result, the action of the main character of the effect is not shortened / delayed in the repeated hit effect being executed (or executed), so that the action of the character is shortened without impairing the effect of the effect. Can be delayed.

  Specifically, as the types of continuous hit effects, "continuous hit effect A" in which the accessory A is defined as the main movable accessory, "continuous hit effect B" in which the accessory B is specified as the main movable accessory, and accessory C Is provided as a main movable accessory. Then, when the hit / no hit determination result is a big hit, the continuous hit effect A is configured to be easily selected, and when the hit / no hit determination result is missed, the continuous hit effect C is easily selected. As a result, the continuous movable effect in which the main movable accessory is the accessory A is displayed, so that it can be suggested that the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In each continuous hit effect, the accessory items A to C are moved in a predetermined order every time the frame button 22 is pressed five times during the button press effective period. For example, in the continuous hit effect A, when the frame button 22 is pressed five times, first, the movable of the accessory A, which is the main movable accessory, is started. Then, when the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the accessory B is started to move. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed 5 times more, the accessory C is started to move. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is pressed 15 times in a short period, all of the accessory items A to C are in a movable state.

  As described above, in each consecutive hit production in the present modification, the consecutive hit operation needs to be executed in the consecutive hit production in order to determine which one of the accessories A to C is the main movable accessory, so the consecutive hit operation is performed. Can be motivated to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<Fifteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 236. In the fifteenth control example, in comparison with the above-described first control example, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, and a solenoid 209 controlled by the main control device 110 (a general-purpose solenoid 209d, a release solenoid 65f2, a flow solenoid). The difference is that the control content of the path solenoid 65k) is changed and the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation control of the solenoid that drives the various electric accessory, the solenoid is moved and held based on a constant output. In such solenoid operation control, the state of the solenoid is maintained by using the electric power required to activate (suck) the solenoid, and thus the electric power is used more than necessary, resulting in a large power consumption. However, there is a possibility that excessive heat may be generated.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, it is possible to supply the electric power corresponding to the state (suction state, holding state) to the solenoid for driving the various electric auditors' products. This makes it possible to suppress the electric power used when holding the solenoid. Further, by suppressing the electric power used excessively, it is possible to suppress the solenoid from excessively generating heat.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The same components as those of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226, in this control example, a first winning hole 64 is provided in the lower area of the game board 13 (below the third symbol display device 81), and a second winning hole 640 and a second winning hole are provided on the lower right side thereof. An electric accessory 640a associated with the mouth 640 is provided. The electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined pattern when the result of the winning lottery (general drawing lottery) of the second symbol executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is a hit. The electric accessory 640a is driven by a general-purpose solenoid 209d.

  Further, in the same place as in the above-described first embodiment, that is, in the game balls shot to the game board 13, on the downstream side of the region (so-called, right-handed region) where the game balls passing over the center frame 86 pass, A variable winning device 65 is provided. The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 49 to FIG. 51) of the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is omitted. Is driven by the open solenoid 65f2, and the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is driven by the flow path solenoid 65k.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, and the flow path solenoid 65k as solenoids for the main controller 110 to perform drive control. A control signal corresponding to the game state is output to the solenoid.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 231. The fifteenth control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the input / output port 205 and the solenoid 209 of the main control device 110 are connected to the solenoid drive circuit. They are different in that they are connected via 1200. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 227, in this control example, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110.

  The solenoid drive circuit 1200 uses various solenoids 209 (general-purpose solenoids) based on the types of output signals for solenoid control output from the main controller 110 (output signals for strongly operating and weakly operating each solenoid). 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) is a circuit for performing an operation. A detailed description of this solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be given later with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 228 and 229, for turning on / off various solenoids 209 (general-use solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow passage solenoid 65k) based on an instruction from MPU 201 of main controller 110. The electrical configuration will be described.

  FIG. 228 shows an input / output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the input / output port 205, and a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the solenoid drive circuit 1200. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various solenoids 209 (general-use solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k).

  As shown in FIG. 228, various solenoids 209 (general-purpose solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 via the solenoid drive circuit 1200. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 227), and by switching the output signal of the MPU 201, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 can be driven and the various solenoids 209 can be switched on and off.

  Specifically, the input / output port 205 is connected to a solenoid driving IC 1201 provided in the solenoid driving circuit 1200. Here, the solenoid driving IC 1201 is an IC capable of outputting the signal input to the input port from the output port at the rising edge of the clock and then holding the output of the output port until the clear signal is input. is there.

  The solenoid driving IC 1201 has input terminals (ports) D1 to D6, output terminals (ports) Q1 to Q6, a clock input terminal CK, a clear signal input terminal CLR, a power supply input terminal Vcc, and a ground terminal GND.

  By applying a voltage of 2 to 6 V between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the solenoid driving IC 1201 becomes operable. In the present control example, the power source 5V is connected to the power source input terminal Vcc, and the ground terminal GND is connected (grounded) to apply a voltage of 5V between the power source input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. Is configured. A capacitor C1 having a capacitance of 10 μF is provided on the circuit between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. The capacitor C1 can remove noise from the external power source for the solenoid driving IC 1201 and suppress (prevent) the destruction and malfunction of the solenoid driving IC 1201. Of course, the capacitance of the capacitor C1 may be appropriately changed.

  Inputting to the input ports D1 to D6 by controlling the input signals to the clock input terminal CK and the clear signal input terminal CLR while 5V is applied between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. Signals can be output from the output ports Q1 to Q6. Specifically, a rectangular wave (clock signal) having a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, and an ON signal (5V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR. In this case, at the rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are output to the output ports Q1 to Q6. Since the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, the input signals to the input ports D1 to D6 are referred to once every 0.1 ms, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated. Will be done. In this control example, the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is set to 10 kHz, but the frequency is not limited to this and may be 5 kHz or 20 kHz. Further, instead of inputting the periodic clock to the clock input terminal CK, the signal may be input to the clock input terminal CK only at the timing of updating the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6.

  On the other hand, even if the clock signal having the frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, if the OFF signal (0 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the signal input to the input ports D1 to D6 Regardless of, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are OFF (0V). Therefore, by inputting the OFF signal (0 V) to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the solenoid driving IC 1201 can be brought into a non-operating state and the operation of the various solenoids 209 can be stopped.

  The positive terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected in the middle of the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and the negative terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected to GND (grounded). The capacitor C2 can reduce noise mixed in the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and can suppress (prevent) the solenoid driving IC 1201 from operating erroneously.

  The input ports D1 to D6 are ports to which signals are input from the input / output port 205, and either an OFF signal (0V) or an ON signal (5V) is input. The signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are transmitted from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 as serial data to the input / output port 225 via the bus line 224, and serial / parallel conversion is performed at the input / output port 225 for transmission. A signal is input to each of the input ports D1 to D6 based on the serial data.

  As described above, when the solenoid driving IC 1201 is in the operating state, the output port Q1 is output based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 at the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK. The output signals of Q6 are updated.

  The input port D1 corresponds to the output port Q1, the input port D2 corresponds to the output port Q2, the input port D3 corresponds to the output port Q3, the input port D4 corresponds to the output port Q4, and the input port D5 corresponds to the output port. Q5 corresponds, and the input port D6 corresponds to the output port Q6. If the signal input to the input port is the OFF signal (0V), the signal output from the corresponding output port is the OFF signal (0V), and the signal input to the input port is the ON signal (5V). If so, the signal output from the corresponding output port is an ON signal (5V).

  As described above, the output of the output ports Q1 to Q6 is changed based on the input signal input to the input ports D1 to D6. At the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 and input to the clock input terminal CK. The updated output signal is held at the falling timing of the clock signal. That is, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are held until the rising timing of the clock signal input to the next clock input terminal CK.

  Here, the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202 connected to the output ports Q1 and Q2 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d driven by the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202 will be described.

  The output ports Q1 and Q2 are respectively connected to the gate terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2 of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202. Here, the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2 are configured by n-channel FETs (Field Effect Transistors), and by applying a predetermined voltage (5 V) to the gate terminal, the drain terminal is changed to the source terminal. The current flows into the state (conduction state). On the other hand, when no voltage is applied to the gate terminal, no current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal (non-conducting state).

  One terminal of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is connected to the drain terminals of the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2, and a 5V power source is connected to the other terminal of the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Further, GND is connected (grounded) to the source terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2. Therefore, when the FET 1-1 or the FET 1-2 becomes conductive, a current flows from the 5V power source connected via the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the GND, and a current flows through the general-purpose solenoid 209d. It will be. As a result, the ordinary electric solenoid 209d is changed to the ON state, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is moved.

  The FET 1-1 becomes conductive because the ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the output of the output port Q1 is output at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when it is turned on. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, it is possible to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the ON state by using the FET 1-1.

  Further, the FET 1-2 becomes conductive because the ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the output port Q2 is turned on at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when the output is turned on. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET 1-2.

  Here, the drain terminal of the FET1-1 is directly connected to the general-purpose solenoid 209d, whereas the drain terminal of the FET1-2 is connected to the general-purpose solenoid 209d via the resistor R1. That is, the resistor R1 is connected in series between the drain terminal of the FET 1-2 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d. The resistance value of the resistor R1 is 10 ohms, which is the same as the resistance value of the general-purpose solenoid. Therefore, when a current flows through the general-purpose solenoid 209d due to the FET 1-1 being changed to the conductive state, a voltage of 5 V is applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d. On the other hand, when the electric current flows through the general-purpose solenoid 209d because the FET 1-2 is changed to the conductive state, the same voltage (2.5V) is applied to the resistor R1 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d. become.

  This makes it possible to provide a difference in driving force between when the FET 1-1 is used to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d and when the FET 1-2 is used to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 229, in the present control example, the case in which the normal electric accessory 640a that needs to increase the driving force of the normal power solenoid 209d is changed to the open state and the normal power accessory 640a is changed to the normal power accessory 640a. It is configured to change the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d depending on whether the variable ordinary electric accessory 640a is held in the open state without causing a problem even when the driving solenoid 209d has a weak driving force. As a result, the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, so that the electric power required to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  A freewheeling diode D1 is provided in parallel with the general-purpose solenoid 209d. The cathode terminal of the free wheeling diode D1 is connected to the terminal side connected to the power source side of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, and the anode terminal is connected to the ground side of the general-purpose solenoid 209d (either FET1-1 or FET1-2 is connected). Connected side). Therefore, current does not flow from the power supply side of the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the ground side, but current flows from the ground side to the power supply side. As a result, the current generated by the counter electromotive force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the FET1-1 or FET1-2 is turned off is consumed by the general-purpose solenoid 209d through the return diode D1. It is possible to suppress (prevent) the destruction of the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2 by the back electromotive force of 209d.

  It should be noted that a switching element such as a FET may be adopted instead of the free wheeling diode D1, and the switching element may be turned on when a counter electromotive force is generated in the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Further, the counter electromotive force of the solenoid 209d may be stored in a capacitor or the like. Power consumption can be reduced by using the stored energy of the capacitor for the next operation of the solenoid 209d or for driving other solenoids or motors. If a capacitor having a low voltage with respect to the counter electromotive force of the solenoid 209d is used, the energy of the solenoid 209d is immediately stored in the solenoid 209d, so that the energy of the solenoid 209d can be immediately reduced and the response performance of the solenoid 209d ( The operation speed of the off operation) can be increased.

  Thus, the input signal is input from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the input ports D1 and D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and the general electric solenoid drive circuit 1202 is driven, so that the general electric solenoid 209d is input port. It is driven by two kinds of driving force according to. As a result, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a that needs to increase the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is changed to the open state, and when the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is weaker than that, there is no problem. When the normal electric accessory 640a is held in the open state, the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be changed, and the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed to the necessary minimum. Electric power required to drive the solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 is a circuit driven by output ports Q3 and Q4 that are updated based on signals input to the input ports D3 and D4 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. By driving the open solenoid drive circuit 1203, the open solenoid 65f2 is driven. The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the open solenoid 65f2 with two types of drive forces. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1204 is a circuit driven by output ports Q5 and Q6 that are updated based on signals input to the input ports D5 and D6 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. By driving the flow path solenoid drive circuit 1204, the flow path solenoid 65k is driven. The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the flow path solenoid 65k with two types of driving force. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 229, the relationship between input / output signals in the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the operation of the universal solenoid 209d with respect to the output signal of the solenoid driving IC will be described.

  In the present control example, when the universal solenoid 209d is varied, a normal period is set by a suction period during which the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state and a holding period during which the electric accessory 640a is held in the open state. A difference is provided in the driving force for driving the solenoid 209d. Specifically, less energy is required when the electric accessory 640a is kept open than when the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, by driving the electric accessory 640a with a large driving force (strong operation) during the suction period and driving the electric auditors object 640a with a small driving force (weak operation) during the subsequent holding period, power consumption is reduced. It is decreasing.

  First, immediately after the power is turned on, if the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 is OFF (0V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, the input port D1, The output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are not updated based on the input signal to D2, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are both OFF (0V). Thus, by setting the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR to OFF (0V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK due to the influence of noise or the like, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are output. Is not turned on (5V), it is possible to prevent (suppress) malfunction of the general-purpose solenoid 209d.

  After that, by turning ON (5V) the input signal of the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals of the input ports D1 and D2. Becomes

  In this case, when the signal of the clock input terminal CK rises from OFF (0V) to ON (5V), the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals of the input ports D1 and D2. When driving the universal solenoid 209d, that is, when opening the electric accessory 640a, first, the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5V). When the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5V), the output signal of the output port Q1 is updated to ON (5V) at the rising timing of the clock signal to the clock input terminal CK.

  When the output signal of the output port Q1 is turned on (5V), the FET 1-1 (see FIG. 228) is driven, and the normal electric solenoid 209d is driven by strong operation (2.5W) by applying 5V. . Since the input signal of the input port D1 is kept ON (5V) for 80 ms, the universal solenoid 209d is driven by strong operation (2.5 W) for 80 ms. This 80 ms period is called a suction period, and the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state during this suction period.

  During the suction period, the input signal to the input port D2 remains OFF (0V), so the output signal of the output port Q2 also remains OFF (0V), and the FET 1-2 (see FIG. 228) is not driven.

  When the suction period of 80 ms is completed, the normal solenoid 209d shifts to a holding period of holding 320 ms in the open state. When shifting to the holding period, first, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off (0V). Then, after the predetermined period (after 2 ms in this control example), the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on (5 V). When the input signal of the input port D2 is turned ON (5V), the FET 1-2 is driven and the universal solenoid 209d is driven. As described above with reference to FIG. 228, when driving the universal solenoid 209d using the FET 1-2, the voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d is low because the resistor R1 is provided on the circuit. (2.5V), the current flowing through the universal solenoid 209d decreases (0.25A). Therefore, the driving force of the general electric solenoid 209d decreases (0.625 W), and the electric power consumed by the general electric solenoid 209d decreases. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced by minimizing the driving force of the universal solenoid 209d during the holding period.

  In the predetermined period (2 ms) from when the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off to when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on, since the period is sufficiently short, the normal power solenoid 209d changes from the open state. It cannot be changed to the closed state. Further, the frequency of the input signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, and the input signal to the input port can be referenced at 0.1 ms intervals and reflected in the output of the output port. The output of the output port Q2 can be turned on after a predetermined period (2 ms) has elapsed after the input signal to the D1 was turned off (that is, after the output of the output port Q1 was turned off).

  In this control example, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off and then the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the input signal to the input port D1 may be turned off and the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on at the same time, or the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on and then to the input port D1. The input signal may be turned off. When the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on and then the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off, when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on, the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 are simultaneously turned on. It will be driven. In this case, the voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d is lower than the voltage (5V) when only FET1-1 is driving, and the voltage (2.5V) when only FET1-2 is driving. Will be higher than. Therefore, when the FET 1-1 is driven and a high voltage is applied to the universal solenoid 209d and the FET 1-2 is driven and a low voltage is applied to the universal solenoid 209d, the FET1 is The voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d can be smoothly reduced by allowing both -1 and the FET 1-2 to be simultaneously driven. As a method of varying the voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d, a method of causing the FET to perform a switching operation and varying the applied voltage by varying the period of the switching operation, so-called PWM control is also adopted. Naturally good.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration is such that a periodic clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CK and the output signal of the output port is updated at the rising period of the clock signal, but the present invention is not limited to this. . The output signal of the output port may be updated by inputting a pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK when the input signal to the input port is changed. In this case, change the input signal to the input port and then monitor the input signal to the input port to check if it is the specified input signal and then input the pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK. By doing so, the output signal of the output port becomes unintended, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) various solenoids from malfunctioning.

  When 320 ms of the holding period has passed, the input signal to the input port D2 is changed to OFF (0V), and the driving of the FET 1-2 is stopped, so that the universal solenoid 209d is changed from the open state to the closed state. , The opening operation of the electric accessory for a total of 0.4 seconds is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of operation of the universal electric vehicle (electric accessory) in this control example will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart showing the operation flow of the gaming state (time saving state and normal state) and the normal electric power (electric accessory) 640a.

  In the present control example, as the opening operation of the Hoden (electric accessory) 640a, a short opening for opening the Hoden (electric accessory) 640a for 0.08 seconds and a long opening for opening for 0.4 seconds in one operation. And are provided, and the long open is set when the game state is a time saving state, and the short open is set when the game state is a normal state.

  Then, in the long opening during the time saving, the signal output to the universal electric solenoid 209d is set based on the operation interval of the universal electric (electric accessory) 640a. If the operation interval of the object 640a is a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) or more, a strong output signal for strongly operating the universal electric solenoid 209d is output during the open period (400 milliseconds) (point a in FIG. 230). If the operation interval of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) (refer to the point a and the point b in FIG. 230), the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is used. During the period (80 msec) during which the power is released (suction period), a strong output signal is output (see point c and point d in FIG. 230), and then a weak output signal is output to open the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Hold state It is output during the lifting period (320 ms) (see point d and the point e of FIG. 230).

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the electric power that holds the open state when the ordinary electric power (electric accessory) 640a frequently operates. In this control example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (the gaming state in which the long opening is executed, that is, whether or not the time is shortened) and the operation interval are set as the opened state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Is set and the type of the signal output to the normal power solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result, but other configurations may be used, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal. When it is determined that the game state in which the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed is determined, the type of the signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a per unit time. The type of the output signal may be switched based on the open period.

  Further, a thermistor capable of detecting the temperature of the general electric solenoid 209d may be provided, and when the temperature of the general electric solenoid 209d exceeds a predetermined temperature (for example, 60 degrees), the type of the output signal may be switched.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example. The RAM 203 in the fifteenth control example includes a weak output standby timer 203da, a standby completion flag 203db, a weak output timer 203dc, a strong output timer 203dd, and a normal power interval timer 203de, as compared with the RAM 203 in the first control example. The difference is that they are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The weak output standby timer 203da is a timer for counting a period until a weak output signal is output to the universal electric solenoid 209d when the universal electric (electric accessory) 640a performs an opening operation. The value set in the timer (for example, “40”) is subtracted every 2 milliseconds, and when the timer value becomes “0”, a weak output signal is output to the universal solenoid 209d. Has been done. This weak output standby timer 203da is determined to be in the time saving period in the normal power operation setting process (see S654 of FIG. 235) (S711: Yes), and then the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is not "0". If it is determined (S712: No), the value of “40” is set, and every time the normal electric timer subtraction process (see S264 of FIG. 237) is executed, the value of the timer becomes “0”. 1 is subtracted (S852 in FIG. 237).

  Then, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” in the normal electric power timer subtraction processing (S264 of FIG. 237) (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON. .

  The standby completion flag 203db indicates a state in which a weak output signal is output to the general electric solenoid 209d when the general electric (electric accessory) 640a performs an opening operation, and the value of the weak output standby timer 203da. Is set to "0" when it becomes "0". The standby completion flag 203db is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” in the normal electric power timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) (S853: Yes) ( S854), which is referred to when determining whether to output a weak output signal in the normal electrical switching process (S263 in FIG. 236) (S813), and the value of the weak output timer 203dc is determined to be "0". In this case (S816: Yes), it is set to OFF (S820).

  The weak output timer 203dc is a timer that counts the period during which the weak output signal is output to the universal solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, "160") is set for the timing at which the weak output signal is output, and a predetermined interval ( 1 is subtracted every 2 milliseconds. The weak output signal is output until the value of the weak output timer 203dc becomes “0”.

  The weak output timer 203dc is set to a value of "160" when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON in the normal power switching process (S263 of FIG. 236) (S813: Yes). (S814), every time the normal electric power timer subtraction process (see S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S856 in FIG. 237).

  The strong output timer 203dd is a timer that counts a period during which a strong output signal is output to the universal solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, "40") is set at a timing at which the strong output signal is output and a predetermined interval ( 1 is subtracted every 2 milliseconds. The strong output signal is output until the value of the strong output timer 203dd becomes "0".

  The strong output timer 203dd is set to a value of "200" when the value of the universal power interval timer 203de is determined to be "0" in the universal power operation setting process (S654 of FIG. 235) (S712: Yes). If it is determined that the value of the universal communication interval timer 203de is not "0" (is "1" or more) (S712: No), the value of "40" is set (S714). .

  Then, every time the normal electric power timer subtraction processing (S264 of FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S858 of FIG. 237), and the normal electric power switching processing is performed. In (S263 of FIG. 236), when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is "0" (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812). ).

  The ordinary electricity interval timer 203de is a timer for counting the interval at which the opening operation of the ordinary electricity (electrical accessory) 640a is executed, and the ordinary electricity solenoid for the opening operation of the ordinary electricity (electrical accessory) 640a. It is referred to when setting the type of the output signal to 209d (strong output signal or weak output signal) and the output period.

  The ordinary electricity interval timer 203de is set to a value of "200" (S819) after the ordinary symbol is set in the standby state (S818) in the ordinary electricity opening / closing processing (S263 of FIG. 236), and the ordinary electricity timer subtraction processing is performed. Every time (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S860 in FIG. 237).

  Then, in the normal power operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235), it is referred to when determining the type and output period of the output signal to be output to the normal power solenoid 209d (S712).

<Regarding control processing in fifteenth control example>
Next, the control process in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236. In the control processing in the fifteenth control example, the contents of the main control device are changed from those in the first control example. Other processes are the same as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fifteenth control example is different from the first control example in that in the timer interrupt process, a normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 63) is replaced with a normal symbol control process (see S155 in FIG. 232). To do. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the timer interrupt process executed by the main controller 110MPU201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process in the fifteenth control example. The same parts as those in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 232) is executed, the processes of S101 to S105 are executed similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the first control example described above, and then the normal symbol control process ( S155) is executed. This normal symbol control process (S155) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 233.

  Then, when the normal symbol control process (S155) ends, the processes of S107 to S109 are executed similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the above-described first control example, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol control process (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol control process (S155). In this normal symbol control process (S155), the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) to execute the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is opened when the result is a hit. The electric power open / close process (S263) for opening / closing the electric accessory (Uden) 640a, and various timers (weak output standby timer 203da, weak output timer 203dc, strong output) set when executing the electric power open / close process. The normal electric timer subtraction process (S264) of subtracting the timer 203dd) is executed.

  When the normal symbol control process (S155) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently hit (S261). When it is determined in the process of S261 that it is not in the middle of a hit (during fluctuation or standby) (S261: No), next, normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S262) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S261 that the hit is successful (S261: Yes), then the normal power switching process (S263) is executed, then the normal power timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, and The process ends.

  Here, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S262), compared to the normal symbol variation process of the first control example (see S106 in FIG. 68), the point that the variation time of the normal symbol is changed, and the electric accessory (general electric power). ) A difference is that a normal power operation setting process (S625) for setting the operation content of 640a is provided. In addition, about the same part as the normal symbol variation process (refer to S106 of FIG. 68) of the above-mentioned first control example, the same reference numeral is given and its description is omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  When the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262 of FIG. 234) is executed, the processes of S602 to S611 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process of the first control example (see S106 of FIG. 68). In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is shortening (S608: Yes), after performing the process of S610, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 seconds (S652), and the process of S612 is performed. The process shifts, the processes of S612, S613, and S618 are executed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 of FIG. 68) of the above-described first control example, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S608, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S608: No), after performing the processing of S611, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds (S653), and S612. Move to processing.

  Further, in the process of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S602: Yes), S622 to S624 as in the normal symbol changing process (see S106 of FIG. 68) of the first control example described above. Processing is executed, and then the normal power operation setting processing (S654) is executed, and then this processing ends.

  Next, the normal power operation setting process (S654) will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal power operation setting process (S654). In the normal power operation setting process (S654), a process of setting an output solenoid signal to be output to the normal power solenoid 209d is executed based on the game state (whether or not to save time) and the normal power operation interval.

  When the normal power operation setting process (S654) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current time is in a short time (S711). If it is determined that the current time is in a short time (S711: Yes), then It is determined whether the value of the electrical interval timer 203de is "0" (S712), and when it is determined that the value of the universal electrical interval timer 203de is not "0" (greater than or equal to "1") (S712: No), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is set to "40" (S713), and the process proceeds to S714. On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S711: No), the process directly proceeds to S714.

  In the processing of S714, the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to "40" (S714), and then the strong output solenoid signal is output (set to ON) (S715), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is determined that the value of the universal communication interval timer 203de is "0" (S712: Yes), the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to "200" (S716), and S715. Process shifts to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the universal switching operation (S263) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal power switching process (S263). When the power switch operation (S263) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is "0" (S811), and it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is "0". If so (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812), and the process proceeds to S813. On the other hand, in the process of S811, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not “0” (“1” or more) (S811: No), the process of S812 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S813. .

  In the process of S813, it is determined whether or not the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S813: No), it is left as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S813, when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813: Yes), the value of the weak output timer 203dc is set to "160" (S814), The weak output solenoid is output (set to ON) (S815).

  After the processing of S815 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0" (S816), and when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0" (S816). : Yes), then stop the output of the weak output solenoid signal (set it to OFF) (S817), set the normal symbol to the standby state (S818), and set the value of the ordinary electricity interval timer 203de to "200". This is set (S819), the standby completion flag 203db is set to OFF (S820), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S816, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not "0" (S816: No), the processes of S814 to S816 are skipped and this process is ended.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary electric power timer subtraction process (S264) executed in the normal symbol control process (S155 of FIG. 233). In this normal electric timer subtraction process (S264), the subtraction process of various timers set when the normal symbol control process is executed is executed.

  When the normal electric power timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than "0" (S851). In the processing of S851, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than “0” (more than “1”) (S851: Yes), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is subtracted by 1 (S852). ) Next, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted weak output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853). In the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S854), and the process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not “0” (“1” or more) (S853: No), the process of S854 is skipped and the process of S855 is performed. Transition. Further, in the processing of S851, even when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not larger than “0” (“0”), the processing directly proceeds to S855.

  In the process of S855, it is determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than "0" (S855). In the process of S855, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S855: Yes), the value of the weak output timer 203dc is decremented by 1 ( The process proceeds to S856) and S857. On the other hand, in the process of S855, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process of S857 is performed. Move to.

  In the process of S857, it is determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than "0" (S857). In the process of S857, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than “0” (more than “1”) (S857: Yes), the value of the strong output timer 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S858). ), And proceeds to the processing of S859. On the other hand, in the process of S857, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S857: No), the process of S858 is skipped and the process of S859 is performed. Move to processing.

  In the process of S859, it is determined whether the value of the universal telephone interval timer 203de is larger than "0" (S859). In the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the universal call interval timer 203de is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S859: Yes), the value of the universal call interval timer 203de is decremented by 1. (S860), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the universal telephone interval timer 203de is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S859: No), the process of S860 is skipped and The process ends.

  As described above, according to the fifteenth control example, the electric power according to the state (suction state, holding state) can be supplied to the solenoid for driving the various electric auditors' products. This makes it possible to suppress the electric power used when holding the solenoid. Further, by suppressing the electric power used excessively, it is possible to suppress the solenoid from excessively generating heat.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured to output a control signal corresponding to the game state to each solenoid, for example, the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is frequently opened. The type of output signal to the solenoid can be changed between a gaming state (for example, a time saving state) and a gaming state (normal state) in which the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is not frequently opened.

  In the present control example, when the electric power (electric accessory) 640a frequently operates, the electric power for holding the open state can be suppressed. In this control example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (the gaming state in which the long opening is executed, that is, whether or not the time is shortened) and the operation interval are set as the opened state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Is set and the type of the signal output to the normal power solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result, but other configurations may be used, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal. When it is determined that the game state in which the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed is determined, the type of the signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a per unit time. The type of the output signal may be switched based on the open period.

  With this configuration, when various solenoids (universal solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) may generate excessive heat, output is performed in advance before excessive heat is generated. The type of signal can be switched.

  In this control example, a push type solenoid is used in which the movable iron core protrudes when power is supplied and an exciting current flows, but other configurations are also possible, for example, power is supplied and an exciting current flows. Therefore, a pull-type solenoid in which the movable iron core is buried may be used.

  In the fifteenth control example described above, a circuit capable of outputting a strong output signal for strongly operating the solenoid and a weak output signal for weakly operating the solenoid is used as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 (see FIG. 228), but other than that. The configuration may be used, and for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 238 (a) may be used.

  Next, another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second solenoid drive circuit which is another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 of the fifteenth control example described above. The description of the same elements as those of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), in the second solenoid drive circuit, in order to vary the electric power of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the supply voltage when energized is made different, and the switch (SW) 1 and When the switch (SW) 2 is on (closed), the general-purpose solenoid 209d operates (strongly operates) at a voltage of 30 V, the switch (SW) 1 turns on (closed), and the switch (SW) 2 Is off (open), the general-purpose solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 1) at a voltage of 20 V, the switch (SW) 1 is off (open), and the switch (SW) 2 is on (closed). 2), the general-purpose solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 2) at a voltage of 10V.

  The switches (SW1, SW2) provided in the second solenoid drive circuit described above are configured to be switched on and off based on a signal output from the main control device 110, and the contents thereof will be described above. Since it is the same as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238 (b), an operation mode of the universal solenoid 209d when the above-described second solenoid drive circuit is used will be described. FIG. 238 (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the second solenoid drive circuit and the universal solenoid 209d.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both on, the universal solenoid 209d performs a strong operation, and the switch (SW) 1 is on and the switch (SW) is on. When 2 is off, the universal solenoid 209d executes weak operation 1 (L1), and when the switch (SW) 1 is off and the switch (SW) 2 is on, the universal solenoid 209d is weak operation 2 (L2). When the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both off, the universal solenoid 209d does not operate.

  By configuring the solenoid drive circuit as in this modification, for example, when opening the electric power (electric accessory) 640a, both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are turned on, and the electric power solenoid is opened. It is possible to selectively use the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2 when executing the 209d in the strong motion and maintaining the open state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a.

  As a method of selectively using the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2, in a state where the ball easily enters the second winning port 640 (for example, in a time saving state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning port 640 causes a normal charge. Since a force against the holding force of the solenoid 209d may be generated, the weak motion 1 is set, while the weak motion is performed when the ball is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, the non-time saving state). It may be configured to set 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress power consumption and also to suppress generation of excessive heat in the universal solenoid 209d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the operation of the universal solenoid 209d using the second solenoid drive circuit which is a modification of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described. FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing a flow of operation of the universal solenoid 209d when the second solenoid drive circuit is used. The detailed description of the same components as those in the flow of the operation of the universal solenoid 209d in the fifteenth control example (see FIG. 230) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in the opening operation (long opening) of the ordinary electric solenoid 209d during the game state in which the game state is short-time (time-shortening operation), in order to open the ordinary electric (electric accessory) 640a, a strong output signal (switch ( SW) 1) and weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) are both turned on (80 ms) (see points c and d in FIG. 239) and the open state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is maintained. A case where only the strong output signal (switch (SW) 1) is turned on and a case where only the weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is turned on (see point d and point e in FIG. 239). Are configured to be executed alternately. As a result, it is possible to prevent bias in the circuit that conducts to operate the universal solenoid 209d.

  As a method of selectively using the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2, in a state where the ball easily enters the second winning port 640 (for example, in a time saving state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning port 640 Since there is a possibility that a force against the holding force of the universal solenoid 209d may be generated, weak motion 1 is set, while on the other hand, in a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning port 640 (for example, a non-time saving state), It may be configured to set the weak motion 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress power consumption and also to suppress generation of excessive heat in the universal solenoid 209d.

  As described above, in this control example, the same standard is used for the plurality of solenoids, but the specifications of the solenoids may be appropriately determined according to the operating environment of each solenoid.

  Further, in this control example, the configuration is described using the solenoid drive circuit of the universal solenoid 209d, but the drive circuits of the other solenoids (open solenoid 65f2, flow passage solenoid 65k) also have the same configuration. Is.

<Regarding a modified example of a character-driven production>
Each of the character objects (character object A720 to character object C460) used for the character object drive effect executed in the above-described tenth to fourteenth control examples, is operated by the operating means (frame button 22 or the like). Based on the above, the driving means (solenoid or the like) is driven to execute the accessory operation. On the other hand, the present modified example is different in that the driven auctions 725 and 726 that are movable in accordance with the operations of the above-described acupunctures (acupuncture products A720 to C460) are provided. Other configurations are the same as the configurations used for the accessory driving effect executed in the tenth to fourteenth control examples described above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As in this modification, by providing the driven accessories 725 and 726, the movement of each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) executed by the driving means (motor or the like) is followed. Since it becomes possible to move the accessory (following accessory 725, 726), it is possible to execute an accessory operation with a high effect of effect, and each accessory (effect A 720 to accessory C 460) Since it becomes possible to operate the accessory (following accessory 725, 726) at a timing different from the operation timing, it is possible to operate the operating means (frame button 22) a plurality of times with respect to the player. Based on the operation of the (frame button 22), it can be assumed that the accessory (driven accessory 725, 726) has operated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, a configuration and a flow of operations of the driven accessories 725 and 726 used in this modification will be described. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the driven accessory 725, 726, and FIGS. 240 (b) and 240 (c) show the movement of the driven accessory 725, 726 following the motion of the accessory A 720. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), the driven accessory 725, 726 is provided with the driven accessory 725 of the left slide member 720a of the accessory A 720 and the driven slide 725b of the right slide member 720b. . Here, the configuration of the driven accessory 725 will be described.

  The driven accessory 725 is axially fixed to the left slide member 720a by a shaft support 725a provided at the upper end of the driven accessory 725, and when the left slide member 720a stops operating (see FIG. 240 (b)), It is configured to be rotatable about a shaft support portion 725a by a force.

  Further, when the driven accessory 725 provided on the left slide member 720a and the driven accessory 726 provided on the right slide member 720b both rotate, the leading end portion 725b of each driven accessory contacts. In addition, a magnet is provided at the tip portion 725b of the driven member 725 as a holding means for holding the state in which the driven members (driven member 725, driven member 726) are in contact with each other. There is. It should be noted that the holding means is not limited to a magnet as long as it can hold the state in which each driven accessory (driven accessory 725, driven accessory 726) is in contact. For example, the tip portion 725b may be made of an adhesive material or a material having a high friction coefficient.

  Further, the left slide member 720a is provided with a restriction member 725c for restricting the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725. This restricting member 725c is variable between a projecting position that restricts the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725 and a buried position (allowable position) that allows the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725 by a driving unit (a solenoid or the like) not shown. It is composed of a possible pin, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a special symbol is won as a big hit), the driven accessory 725 is configured to be variably moved to an allowable position where it can be rotated. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) and 240 (c), a flow of operation of the driven accessory 725, 726 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), when the operation of the accessory A is stopped (or suddenly decelerated), the driven accessories 725 and 726 rotate about the shaft support portions 725a and 726a by the inertial force. Then, the respective tip portions 725b and 726b are brought into contact with each other, thereby forming a substantially V-shaped shape (characteristics composite form) at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is covered. It should be noted that the combination form of the accessory is held by the holding means (magnet or the like) provided at each of the tip portions 725b and 726b. Further, although the regulating member 725c is configured to be moved to the allowable position when the action of the accessory A is executed, the action of the accessory A is performed while the accessory A is performing the forward movement. The turning operation is restricted by the propulsive force generated by the driving force, and the accessory A is rotated when it stops (or suddenly decelerates).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), by performing the operation in the direction in which the accessory A is separated (by executing the returning operation), the respective tip portions 725b, 726b of the driven accessories 725, 726 are separated. The driven accessories 725 and 726 return to the standby position (the position shown in FIG. 240 (a)) by their own weight. In addition, since the restricting member 725c is configured to be variable to the restricting position at the timing when the driven assisting objects 725 and 726 return to the standby position, due to the reaction of the operation of returning the driven assisting objects 725 and 726 to the standby position, Again, jumping out of the accessory A 720 is suppressed.

  The configuration of the present modified example described above may be combined with the configuration of each of the control examples described above. For example, in combination with the repetitive operation in the twelfth control example described above, the player may operate the operation means (frame button 22). The restricting members 725c and 726c may be moved to the allowable position when the accessory A 720 starts the repetitive operation. Thereby, the driven accessory does not rotate in the normal accessory operation, and the driven accessory can be rotated only when the repetitive operation is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a new accessory motion based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player, and the player willingly operate the operation means (frame button 22). There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, in combination with the configuration of the 14th control example described above, the driven accessory 725, 726 is operated only when the accessory operation (strong operation) in which the operation speed of the driving means (motor or the like) is increased is stopped (or sudden deceleration). You may comprise so that it may rotate.

  Further, in the present modification, the rotation of the driven members 725 and 726 is restricted by changing the restricting member 725b, but as another configuration, for example, the driven members 725 and 726 are located at the standby position. As a member for holding the work, a holding member (magnet) or the like may be provided on each of the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b. In this case, holding means (such as a magnet) provided at each of the distal end portions 725b and 726b of the driven accessories 725 and 726 can hold the driven accessories 725 and 726 at the standby position. Therefore, the holding means provided at the tip of the driven accessory 725, 726 can be used both for holding the standby position and for holding the completed accessory form, thereby reducing the number of parts. Is possible.

  Further, it is preferable to provide the driven accessories 725 and 726 on the back side of the accessory A 720 (a portion where the player cannot easily see the characters). As a result, the driven accessory 725, 726 at the standby position can be covered with the accessory A 720, so that even if the driven accessory 725, 726 swings near the standby position, it is suppressed from being noticed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. It is sufficient to provide a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the driven accessory objects 725 and 726 located at the standby position, and a configuration other than the accessory object A720 may be used.

  Further, when the configuration in which the regulating member is variably controlled is used as in the present control example, both the driven actors 725 and 726 can be made rotatable, or either one can be made rotatable. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced. For example, when the special symbol is a big hit, both of the driven components 725 and 726 can be rotated (both the regulating members 725c and 726c are changed to the permissible position), and the completed component form is formed. When the special symbol is not won for the jackpot (when the fact that the winning is won is not notified), only one of the followers can be rotated and the player is encouraged to perform the effect. You can

  As described above, in the present modified example described above, the driven actors 725 and 726 are provided, but the other auditors (actor B740, actor C460) may be driven actors. Further, in this control example, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are operated at the same timing, but they may be operated at different timings. In this way, by making the operation of the accessory that is driven by the driving means (motor or the like) complicated, the operation of the driven accessory can be made more complicated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this modification, a configuration using inertial force and gravity is described as a driven accessory that performs an operation that does not use drive means, but other configurations may be used, for example, restoration of an elastic member. The force may be used to construct a driven accessory.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and the stop is displayed. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Example of technical idea of moving member that moves only by biasing force>
A biasing device that generates an elastic biasing force in one direction, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device from a retracted position located outside the display region of the liquid crystal display device by the biasing force generated by the biasing device. A movable member formed to be movable to a predetermined position located on the front side of the vehicle, a position regulating device formed to regulate the movement of the movable member at the retracted position, and a release for releasing the regulation by the position regulating device. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a device.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a drive motor that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. There is a game machine provided (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when moving the moving member by driving the motor, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to increase the speed, but it is not possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the movement member formed to be movable from the retracted position to the predetermined position by the urging force in one direction is restricted in movement (stopped) by the position restricting device in the retracted position. ). Then, when the restriction by the position restricting device is released by the releasing device, the moving member is moved to the retracted position and starts to move due to the accumulated biasing force.

  Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed to a target value from the time of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at high speed.

  Examples of the urging device include a device that uses the repulsive force of a magnet, a device that uses spring elasticity, and the like, and a release device that provides a driving force that mechanically moves the position restricting device. An example is a device that releases electromagnetic attraction of the position control device.

  In the gaming machine A1, at least a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving the moving member from the predetermined position to the retracted position is provided, and the releasing device is configured by the driving device. A gaming machine A2.

  Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is necessary in order to repeatedly perform the effect. Therefore, a space for arranging a device that generates a driving force is required. However, since the space for arranging the moving member and the driving device is limited inside the gaming machine, there is a possibility that the installation space for the moving member cannot be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the releasing device is constituted by the driving device, so that the driving device releases the regulation of the moving member and the retracted position from the predetermined position of the moving member. Can also be used to return to. Therefore, as compared with the case where a separate drive device is prepared, the installation space for the release device and the drive device can be suppressed.

  Further, after the moving member moves from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect by the moving member can be repeated.

  A motor, an air cylinder, etc. are illustrated as a drive device.

  In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the base end side, and the position restricting device is protruded from the first rotating body which is rotated about the first axis and the first rotating body. And a pin member eccentrically positioned on the first shaft, the pin member being connected to the moving member at the proximal end side of the moving member, and the moving member being disposed at the retracted position. In this case, the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are tied together. The direction is formed so as to be orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member.

  Therefore, when the moving member is moved to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held at the retracted position. it can. Thereby, for example, the structure of detecting that the moving member is arranged at the retracted position and operating the position regulating device to regulate the moving member becomes unnecessary.

  In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotary shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position without a driving force such as a drive motor. A large amount of regulation power can be secured. Therefore, a large urging force accumulated in the urging device can be secured, and the effect of starting the moving member at high speed can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion that guides the pin member, and a straight line that connects the pin member and the first shaft of the position regulating device at at least one of the retracted position and the predetermined position. And a direction in which the guide portion extends are aligned with each other, and the position regulating device is engaged with the drive device and the drive force generated by the drive device is transmitted. A gaming machine A4, wherein the pin member is formed so as to be movable along the guide portion by being rotated.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when the moving member starts rotating from the state where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion are provided. Since the directions coincide with each other, the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion when the rotation of the first rotating body starts can be suppressed.

  Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position restricting device with respect to the moving member, it is necessary to shift the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotation shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member (to rotate the position restricting device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engaged state in which the position regulation device and the drive device engage with each other and a non-engaged state in which the position regulation device and the drive device are disengaged from each other are formed. The gaming machine A5 is capable of being disengaged and is formed at least when the moving member is started from the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, when the moving member is started from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the drive device form a disengaged state, so that the resistance exerted on the position regulating device is increased. Can be suppressed, and as a result, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be reduced. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engagement state between the drive device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive device is selected to counteract the urging force of the urging device, the moving member can be started at a high speed and the urging device can be designed more freely. That is, it is possible to select a biasing device having a larger biasing force.

  As a mode in which the position regulating device and the drive device form the disengaged state, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position regulating device, and a gear meshed with the gear is partially formed. The second rotating body formed on the drive device is arranged in the drive device, and the driving force of the drive device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and A second rotating body, in which a magnetic body is formed on a side surface of the one rotating body and a magnetic body attracted to the magnetic body is partially formed, is arranged in the drive device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided. An example is a case where the drive device is transmitted by adsorption with the.

  More specifically, when the first rotation state and the second rotation body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotation body and the second rotation body is partially formed. As a result, the position regulation device and the drive device form an engaged state in the region where the gear meshes, and the position regulation device and the drive device drive in the region where the gear meshing is released (region where the gear is not formed). The device forms a disengaged condition.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, an effect member that is pivotally supported by the moving member and that is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at least at a predetermined position is provided. The member is formed so as to extend from the base end side to the swing end side that is an end portion on the side opposite to the base end side, and the extending direction is the longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal. The effect member is pivotably supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in a first direction longer than a length in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. In the retracted position, the posture is such that the first direction is along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is in the tangential direction of the rotation locus of the moving member. And one of the first direction Gaming machine A6 but characterized by taking the posture that projects on the opposite side of the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the effect member is arranged in the retracted position, the effect member moves its first direction to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is supposed to be in line. Therefore, in the retracted position, even when it is difficult to sufficiently form a space outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be easy to set up.

  Further, when the effect member is arranged at the predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to the tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction becomes the effect end. Since it is sandwiched and juts out to the side opposite to the retracted position, it is possible to effectively use the display area of the liquid crystal display device to produce an effect.

  In addition, as a case where it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member on the outside of the liquid crystal display device, for example, a case where the retracted position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device is illustrated. To be done.

  The gaming machine A6 includes a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 comprising a first projecting portion, wherein the change in the posture of the effect member is caused by the first projecting portion being guided by the first guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the change in the attitude of the effect member is caused by the projecting portion of the effect member being guided by the first guide portion. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  That is, for example, in the case where the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted as the moving member is moved upward, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of moving the moving member upward. Whether the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the ascending movement end can be arbitrarily selected depending on the design of the first guide portion.

  Examples of the first guide portion include an elongated hole that is formed so as to penetrate therethrough and that has a longitudinal direction, a groove that is formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. As a mode, there are a mode in which the first protruding part slides on the first guide part, a mode in which the rotating body is arranged in the first protruding part, and the rotating body rolls in the first guide part. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circle portion extending along the circle, the concentric circle portion being formed on the predetermined position side and the posture changing portion being formed on the retracted position side. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member do not change their attitude with respect to the moving member. The period of being moved as a unit can be extended.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is largely changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along the circle around the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided through the concentric circle portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and the effect The effect member is moved in a state in which the relative positional relationship between the member and the moving member and the pivotal support position is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the concentric circle portion is formed on the predetermined position side, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect member and the moving member as one body for a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circle portion extending along the circle, wherein the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period in which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member do not change in attitude with respect to the moving member. The period of being moved as a unit can be extended.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is largely changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along the circle around the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member is The effect member is moved in a state in which the relative positional relationship between the effect member and the movable member and the axially supported positions is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the side of the predetermined position, the posture of the effect member can be quickly changed while the effect member is visually recognized by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the moving member is provided with a second guide portion which is formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extends along a rotation locus of the moving member, The member includes at least one second protruding portion guided by the second guide portion, the second protruding portion is formed integrally with the moving member, and the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. In the case of the above, the second protrusion is brought into contact with one end of the second guide, and the gaming machine A10.

  Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, it is not possible to stop the motor to reduce the momentum of the moving member as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. Mechanisms need to be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the second protruding portion contacts the end portion of the second guide portion. By being in contact, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

  Further, since the second projecting portion is guided by the second guide portion that extends along the rotation trajectory of the moving member, the second guiding portion and the second projecting portion optimize the rotation of the moving member, and at the same time, It is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member in the swing axis direction.

  Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the effect member can be brought into contact with each other so as to serve as a stopper, but since the effect member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion is provided. There is a problem in terms of strength. On the other hand, since the second projecting portion is integrally provided so as to project from the moving member, the problem of strength is small and the reliability as a stopper can be improved.

  By forming a plurality of sets of the second protrusion and the second guide, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches the predetermined position. This can improve the durability of the second protrusion. Examples of the second guide portion include an elongated hole formed in a penetrating manner and having a lengthwise direction, a groove formed as a recess having a lengthwise direction, and the like. As a mode, there are a mode in which the second protruding part is slid on the second guide part, a mode in which a rotating body is arranged on the second protruding part, and the rotating body is rolled by the second guide part. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the one end portion rather than the other end portion which is an end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion. A gaming machine A11, characterized in that the width is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that one end has a groove width smaller than that of the other end. That is, since a large gap is formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to reduce the gap formed between the second protrusion and the second guide when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, and it is possible to suppress wobbling of the second protrusion.

  Here, as a mode in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end portion of the second guide portion to the other end portion, or the second guide portion is reduced. An example is a case where the groove width is sharply reduced in a part of (the degree of reduction of the groove width is at least two types).

  In addition, when the second guide portion is formed by a through hole and the second protruding portion is inserted into the second guide portion and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protruding portion, the second guide portion is not drilled. Even if the thickness in the installation direction is formed so that one end is smaller than the other end, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, further, when the moving member is arranged at the projecting position, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling particularly in the direction in which the second guide portion is bored.

  In the gaming machine A11, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by ascending movement, and the second guide portion has a small diameter side surface from the one end portion to the other end portion. The gap with the second projecting portion is reduced to the vicinity of the portion, and the gap with the second projecting portion is increased at the other end portion as compared with the gap, and the side surface on the large diameter side is , A gap between the one end portion and the second projecting portion is reduced, and the gap between the one end portion and the second projecting portion extends from near the one end portion to near the other end portion as compared with the gap. Gaming machine A12 characterized by having a large gap.

  According to the gaming machine A12, since the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by the upward movement, when the movable member is swung from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the movable member swings. When slightly moving in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the axis, the second protruding portion is likely to come into contact with the smaller diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the small-diameter side of the second guide portion has a small gap with the second projecting portion in the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. This makes it possible to smoothly swing the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position.

  Further, when swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second protruding portion is likely to come into contact with the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, on the large-diameter side of the second guide portion, the gap with the second projecting portion is reduced only when the moving member is swung to a predetermined position. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a main body portion extending from the base end side to the swing end side and a main body portion with a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. At least one of the one end in the first direction or the other end opposite to the one end in the first direction is provided with the main body part and the decoration part. A gaming machine A13, which is stored between the decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effect member changes its posture, at least one of both ends of the effect member in the first direction has a main body portion and a decorative portion. It is stored with a slight gap between and. Therefore, when the effect member changes its posture, and for some reason, the effect member can move largely in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body, the main body and the decorative portion serve as guides that prevent the movement. The large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be restricted.

  According to this, when the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a stacked relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

  In the gaming machine A13, a movement locus of any part of the effect member and a movement locus of any part of the decorative member are inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and the movement of the effect member is the same. A gaming machine A14, which is characterized by overlapping in the direction of the moving axis.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably housed between the main body portion and the decoration portion inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, as compared with the case where the effect member is housed between the main body portion and the decorative portion for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case of preventing the front-back shift with the fixing plate, A guide function for restricting the movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be exerted from an earlier stage.

  Accordingly, when a plurality of moving units are stacked and arranged, not only interference between moving members of the moving unit outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device but also movement of the moving unit inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device may occur. It is possible to prevent interference between the moving members.

<Example of technical idea for suppressing wobbling of moving member>
A moving member that is slidably movable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first drive device that generates a driving force that drives the moving member, an effect member disposed on the moving member, and an effect member thereof. A second drive device for generating a driving force for driving the game machine, and the retreat position is a position separated from the predetermined position in the lateral direction of the game machine by a predetermined distance and from the predetermined position. It is a position separated by a predetermined distance to the upper side in the vertical direction of the game machine, at least the predetermined position is the movement end of the moving member, and at least the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effect member is A gaming machine B1 which is driven.

  Here, a moving member that is formed so as to be slidable and a performance member that is arranged on the moving member and that is driven independently of the moving member are provided, and the moving member is slid in the horizontal direction. There is a game machine (for example, see JP 2012-085811 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the moving member receives the force due to the reaction of the driving of the effect member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction. Therefore, in order to keep the moving member at the predetermined position, the effect member There is a problem in that it is necessary to continue to apply to the moving member a force that resists the force due to the reaction of the driving of the.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position, which is the movement end of the moving member, is formed diagonally downward of the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second drive device at the predetermined position and the moving member receives the force due to the reaction, the force due to the weight of the moving member acts toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is moved to the predetermined position. Therefore, the moving member can be maintained at the predetermined position even if the driving force applied from the first driving device to the moving member is unnecessary.

  Note that the vertical direction of the gaming machine means a direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the lateral direction of the gaming machine means a direction intersecting with the vertical direction of the gaming machine substantially vertically. To do.

  As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and a pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples thereof include a method and a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of the moving member and winding the belt.

  The gaming machine B1 is provided with an auxiliary member that is arranged at a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, and the moving member is at least in the predetermined position. A direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides when the moving member is arranged at least at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B2, which is brought into contact with the auxiliary member when the gaming machine B2 swings.

  Here, since the projecting portion of the moving member is formed to project inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, it prevents interference with other accessory. Therefore, it is required to suppress shaking in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is at the predetermined position. In the arranged state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member come into contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the overhanging portion and prevent collision of the other accessory with the overhanging portion.

  In the gaming machine B2, the overhanging portion is weaker in rigidity on the root side than on the tip side, and the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the rigidity on the base side is weakened as compared with the tip side of the overhanging portion, so that wobble generated at the tip of the overhanging portion The degree of transmission to the root side can be weakened.

  Here, examples of the method of weakening the rigidity include a case where the overhanging portion is made of a resin material having partially different rigidity by two-color molding, and a case where the thickness of the overhanging portion is partially changed. .

  When the overhanging portion is formed thin in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding plane of the moving member, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling in the sliding movement direction due to the bending deformation of the overhanging portion.

  Further, when the base side of the overhanging portion is formed thinner than the tip end side, the wobbling on the tip end side of the overhanging portion is converted into a flexural deformation with the root side of the overhanging portion as a fulcrum. As a result, it is possible to suppress horizontal movement of the moving member in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides on the base side of the overhang portion.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end, is the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A game machine B4, wherein the auxiliary member is axially supported outside and the auxiliary member is arranged outside a display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  Thereby, another moving member is arranged on the same layer as the layer on which the moving member is arranged, and when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the other moving member overhangs inward of the liquid crystal display device. It becomes possible to perform a variety of productions in a limited space.

  As a mode in which the auxiliary member is axially supported by the base member, a mode in which the auxiliary member is axially supported by the rotating shaft or a mode in which the projecting portion is provided through the slot and the projecting portion is guided through the slot Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion extends along the direction from the shaft supporting portion of the one end of the auxiliary member to the other end of the auxiliary member in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5, which is provided with an extended contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member includes an abutting portion, and the abutting portion serves as an auxiliary member when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the shaft support portion of one end portion to the other end portion. Therefore, in the state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the contact portion can secure the area where the moving member and the auxiliary member come into contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine B5, the projecting portion has a hand portion that is bent and extended from the extended tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip portion of the hand portion, and the moving member is moved. A gaming machine B6, wherein the overlapping position of the projecting portion and the auxiliary member moves toward the tip end side of the hand portion as the member slides to the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the effect member is arranged at the tip of the projecting portion, and the projecting portion and the auxiliary member are formed as the moving member slides to the retracted position. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, the protrusion amount (extension distance) of the overhang portion extending to the effect member with the auxiliary member as a reference can be shortened. Thus, even if the tip end side of the overhanging portion wobbles due to the driving of the effect member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobbling is small. Accordingly, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the effect of suppressing the wobbling in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, one end of which is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of which is opposite to that of the moving member. A case where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retreat position and is formed with a direction connecting the other end which is the end of the moving member as a longitudinal direction. However, the gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the longitudinal direction of the effect member is tilted in the horizontal direction.

  Since the moving member is moved diagonally downward toward the predetermined position, even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, in order to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member is In the case of being arranged in the retracted position, it is necessary to dispose the lower end of the effect member at a position that is elevated from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the distance that the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. It was Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the space below the effect member is dead space and wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, compared to the case where the effect member is arranged below the moving member and the moving member is arranged in the retracted position. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effect member is formed to be smaller. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effect member is Take a horizontal position.

  Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position even if the effect member is arranged at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. The distance thus set can be absorbed by the change in the posture of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the effect member from being wasted as a dead space when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, and the effect member can be formed as a large member that is longer in the longitudinal direction.

  In the gaming machine B7, a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member is provided, and the auxiliary member moves as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that when the member is arranged at the predetermined position, the member takes a posture tilted in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member is more horizontal when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position than when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. Since the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, the effect member is horizontally tilted as the auxiliary member is horizontally tilted. Can be made.

  Further, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via the auxiliary member axially supported by the moving member, the effect member is supported by a plurality of members, so that the force generated by driving the effect member can be reduced. The effect of suppressing the wobbling of the effect member and the moving member can be remarkably dispersed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member, so that the weight of the effect member effectively acts on the connecting member. Can be made. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, a force in the direction of further tilting the auxiliary member is effectively applied to the auxiliary member, and thus wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the moving member and the effect member that are connected to the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the longitudinal direction of the game machine of the position at which the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity position of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the longitudinal direction of the game machine at the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member. The height can be evenly distributed in the horizontal direction with the axis support positions of the moving member and the effect member as boundaries.

  Therefore, the wobbling of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, and as a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member Wobble can be generated. As a result, by driving the effect member, it is possible to perform an effect of wobbling the moving member and the effect member.

<Example of technical idea to suppress assembly man-hours>
A base member having a pair of wall portions formed so as to project in the same direction, a lid member that abuts the protruding end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions. At least one of the pair of wall portions, the plurality of reflecting members rotatably supported, and a light source for irradiating light toward at least one reflecting member of the plurality of reflecting members. A plurality of shaft supporting grooves are formed on the end face of the projecting end, and the reflecting member is supported by the main body and by protruding from the main body and being fitted into the shaft supporting groove. And at least one rotating shaft part that is fitted into the shaft supporting groove, the rotating shaft part is fitted from the open ends of the plurality of shaft supporting grooves, and the open end of the shaft supporting groove is attached to the lid member. A gaming machine C1 which is pivotally supported by being blocked.

  Here, there is a gaming machine having a movable body whose both ends are pivotally supported and whose posture can be changed in order to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED light source (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of LED light sources are arranged, a plurality of movable bodies are also required, and the work of inserting the movable body into the hole to pivotally support the movable body, and thereafter Therefore, it is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body so as not to be pulled out from the hole, by the number of the movable bodies, which causes a problem that the number of assembling steps is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft supporting grooves are formed in the wall portion of the base member, the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member is fitted into the shaft supporting groove, and the open end of the shaft supporting groove is the lid member. The plurality of reflecting members can be rotatably supported by being blocked by the. By rotating these reflecting members, the direction of the light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting member can be changed.

  Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the work of inserting the reflection member into the hole for axial support and the work of subsequently attaching parts (screws, stoppers, etc.) for fixing the reflection member so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole. It is possible to prevent the number of assembling steps from being increased in proportion to the number.

  In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only in one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is bored in the other side opposite to the one side, and the shaft portion of the reflecting member is obliquely inserted into the hole. After that, when the reflecting member is tilted, the shaft portion formed on the other side of the one side is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is projected on the other side of the one side, and An example is a case in which the shaft is formed on the other side of the one side of the pin after the reflection member is fitted onto the pin and then the reflection member is tilted.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2, wherein the lid member is fastened to a side surface of the wall portion.

  Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member is formed thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end face of the wall portion, the diameter of the head portion of the fastening screw is smaller than that of the wall portion. It becomes the lower limit, and the degree of freedom in design decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion, and therefore the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is not limited, and the wall portion is formed thinly. can do.

  In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and when the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflection member are combined and rendered. The effect of can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that pivotally support the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, since the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted into the shaft supporting hole formed in the lid member, the area supporting the rotary shaft portion can be reduced to the wall portion. Can be sufficiently ensured by the area corresponding to the thickness that axially supports the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the formation length of the shaft supporting hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, at least one wall portion of the pair of wall portions includes an extension portion extended from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member is the extension member. A fitting portion that is fitted to the installation portion, and in a state in which the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is at least adjacent to the axial support groove in the extending portion, A gaming machine C4, which is abutted from the axial direction of the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extended portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the direction in which the shaft support groove is adjacent. It is possible to easily align the wall portion with the lid member in the direction in which the shaft support groove is adjacent.

  Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, and the wall The rigidity of the portion can be reinforced by the lid member.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the shaft center of each of the pair of wall portions and the pair of adjacent reflecting members is closed by the main body portion of the pair of reflecting members. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axial centers of the pair of adjacent reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. Since it can be closed by the main body part, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the plurality of reflecting members.

  Further, in the closed state, the surfaces of the pair of reflecting members in the rotation direction are brought into contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main bodies of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed, and the gap between the reflecting members can be reduced. It is possible to suppress light leakage.

  Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, slidingly moving a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire emitted light. However, when the shutter member is slidingly moved from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes long.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member allows the light emitted to the player to pass through by rotating the reflecting member from the closed state while suppressing the leakage of light in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, as compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the case where the reflecting member is rotated can shorten the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light.

  Further, since the end portions of the reflecting surface portions of the adjacent reflecting members are formed so as to be able to come into contact with each other, the posture deviation of the reflecting member can be corrected by another reflecting member. Therefore, even if there is a reflecting member having a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflecting members, the posture of the rotating reflecting member is corrected by being brought into contact with another reflecting member. Therefore, the quality of the performance of the reflecting member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member has chamfered abutting portions of the surfaces facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the abutting portions of the surfaces of the reflecting member that face each other are chamfered, so that the reflecting member can be tilted further toward the adjacent reflecting member. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members in the closed state can be made more flat. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining the side surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members in the rotation direction, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the pattern at the boundary of the reflecting members.

  Examples of the chamfering method include a method of cutting on a curved surface (with R) and a method of cutting on a flat surface.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a driving device that generates a driving force that rotationally operates the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member that is slid by the driving device, the transmission member is the rotation. The plurality of reflecting members are formed so as to be slidable in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and the plurality of reflecting members respectively include a transmitted portion abutted on the transmitting member on at least one of the pair of rotating shaft portions. A gaming machine C7, characterized in that the transmitted member and the reflecting member are rotatably formed by slidingly moving the transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the drive device is formed to be slid in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion. The transmitted parts formed on the rotary shafts of the plurality of reflecting members are brought into contact with the transmitting member. Here, by slidingly moving the transmitting member, the transmitted portion is rotated and the reflecting member is rotated in conjunction therewith, so that a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated by sliding movement of one transmitting member. .

  The transmission member may be a belt or a rack gear. When the transmission member is a belt, a cylindrical portion is illustrated as the transmitted portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotary gear-shaped portion is illustrated as the transmitted portion.

  In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion in which teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can be meshed with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes the rack gear portion, and the tooth formed to be meshable with the rack gear portion of the transmission member is formed in the transmitted portion. As a result, when the transmission member is slid, the transmitted parts of the plurality of reflecting members that are meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, and therefore slippage between the transmitting member and the reflecting member is prevented. You can Therefore, the plurality of reflecting members can be rotated synchronously.

  In the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is formed with a width larger than the interval between adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9, characterized in that expansion teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is more than the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. Since the expansion teeth having a large width are formed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased when the expansion teeth are meshed with each other.

  Thereby, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even when the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member has an abnormality, it is possible to prevent over-rotation of the reflection member rotated by the transmission member.

<An example of a technical idea of moving a counterpart member by its own driving device>
An inner side surface that is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, is configured to be capable of reciprocating sliding movement between the outside and the inside of the display region of the liquid crystal display device, and is formed in the moving direction inside the display region. A pair of moving members formed in a positional relationship capable of abutting each other, and a drive device for driving the pair of moving members, and a movable range of one moving member of the pair of moving members. Is interfering with the movable range of the other moving member, which is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and is brought into contact with the other moving member by moving the one moving member, and further A gaming machine D1 characterized in that by moving one moving member in the same direction, the other moving member is pushed forward to be movable.

  Here, a game machine that makes the liquid crystal display device invisible by moving a pair of accessories from the outside of the display region of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display region of the liquid crystal display device and contacting each other. Is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2005-040413). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the operation of the pair of winning objects is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member comes into contact with the other moving member, and the other moving member is formed by moving the other moving member. It is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only the drive device that drives the moving member.

  For example, if the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay due to deceleration time occurs when reversing the driving direction, which causes monotonousness of the moving member. Therefore, when the driving direction of the driving device of one moving member is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with one moving member, and the other moving member is further moved in the same direction. Accordingly, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving the one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of the one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement, which is difficult to form only by the driving device that drives the other moving member.

  Further, since the pair of moving members can be moved without synchronizing the driving device that drives the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control load of the driving device can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction, the gaming machine D2.

  Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, the one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one of the moving members changes direction is increased by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when changing the direction of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in the substantially vertical direction, so that one movement that abuts in the process of moving downward from the retracted position. When changing the direction of one member, the other moving member that moves upward from the retracted position is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction, so that the direction of one moving member is changed. The period required for can be shortened. Note that the substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction and means a direction that allows some horizontal component.

  In the gaming machine D1, a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction, the gaming machine D3.

  When one moving member is brought into contact with the other moving member in the process of moving and the other moving member is moved by further moving one moving member in the same direction, the drive device of one moving member is Since the moving member is moved together, the load on the drive device increases.

  Here, when the pair of moving members are arranged vertically, the load on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged below is less than the load on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged above. It becomes large in comparison and causes a difference in the life of the driving device. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device becomes shorter than that of the other drive device, and it becomes more difficult to schedule maintenance as compared with the case where a pair of drive devices are replaced at the same time.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be slidable in the substantially horizontal direction. be able to.

  That is, when the moving member is formed to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member does not receive a force due to gravity in the moving direction, and therefore the load on the drive device does not depend on the moving direction. Therefore, the replacement time can be adjusted for each drive device.

  The sliding direction of the moving member does not have to coincide with the horizontal direction, and a tilt from the horizontal direction that allows the moving member to be stationary due to the frictional force with the driving device is allowed.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D3 is provided with a base member on which the moving member is arranged, and a shaft rod for slidably guiding the moving member is fixed to the base member. Gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft rod fixed to the base member. Further, the shaft rod has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

  Thus, the shaft rod can be used both as a member for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable and as a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the bogie portion is arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the shaft rod and has a pair of wheel portions formed at least at both ends thereof so as to be rollable with respect to the shaft rod. A gaming machine D5, which is fixed to at least one end of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the carriage portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the carriage portion has the wheel portion that can roll on the shaft rod, so that the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the pair of wheel portions are arranged so as to sandwich the shaft rod and they are arranged at least at both ends of the truck portion, the postures of the shaft rod and the truck portion can be kept constant.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively arranged in the pair of moving members come into contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively arranged on the pair of moving members come into contact with each other. With this, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be increased when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, so that the impact when the pair of moving members comes into contact can be mitigated.

  The pair of abutting wheel portions may have different diameters. In this case, by sandwiching the small-diameter wheel portion between the large-diameter wheel portion and the shaft rod, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmitting portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted and is formed to be long in a direction perpendicular to the axial center direction of the shaft rod. A game machine D7, characterized in that the transmission part and the dolly part are provided at the end of the.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, a transmission portion to which the driving force of the drive device is transmitted is formed at one end of the carriage portion. Since the trolley portion is guided by the shaft rod and slidably moved, the engagement relationship between the transmission portion and the drive device can be optimized.

  That is, since the moving member is formed in a long length, it is likely to be bent, and the bending occurs with one end portion, on which the carriage portion guided by the shaft rod is provided, as a fulcrum. When the transmission part is formed at the other end which is the opposite end of the one end where the trolley part is provided, the position of the transmission part tends to change due to the bending of the moving member, and it also moves. The engagement between the transmission portion of the member and the drive device is likely to shift. If the engagement relationship between the transmission part of the moving member and the drive device is deviated, the resistance generated between the transmission part and the drive device when the moving member slides becomes large, which is a problem.

  On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end portion where the carriage portion is provided, the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are both formed at the one end portion, and the moving member is Even if it bends, it does not change the position of the transmitting portion of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the drive device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the drive device when the moving member slides can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form of the transmission part, for example, a rack gear part formed at one end when the rotary gear is formed from the drive device side is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutting of the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission unit side, the gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the deviation due to the bending of the moving member in the calculation of the abutting position of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutment of the pair of moving members occurs at an end portion on the opposite side to the transmitting portion side, the gaming machine D9.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end portion on the opposite side to the transmitting portion, so that the transmitting portion when the pair of moving members contact each other. The impact on the side can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive device caused by the pair of moving members contacting each other.

  In the gaming machines D7 to D9, the moving member is extended parallel to the sliding direction, and the shaft bar is provided at the other end of the moving member opposite to the one end. A guide wall portion that is in contact with the guide wall portion in a direction perpendicular to the axial center direction, and the moving member is rotatably supported by the other end portion and is in contact with the guide wall portion. A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, wherein the pair of rotating bodies are juxtaposed in the sliding direction of the moving member and are rotated as the moving member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion is extended in parallel with the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported by the other end portion of the moving member. The pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide wall portion.

  Here, when the moving member suddenly stops, for example, when the moving member largely bends and vibrates with one end as a fulcrum, among the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member, the moving member The rotating body on the side opposite to the bending direction of is pressed against the guide wall portion. Therefore, since resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of flexural vibration of the moving member, it is possible to easily suppress the flexural vibration of the moving member as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed as a free end. .

  Further, since the rotating body and the guide wall portion are brought into smooth contact with each other at the time of starting the moving member, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall portion and the moving member at the time of starting the moving member.

  As an example of the contact between the guide wall portion and the rotating body, a rack gear is formed on the guide wall portion and a gear meshed with the rack gear of the guide wall portion is engraved on the side surface of the rotating body. To be done.

  In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes gear-shaped tooth portions engraved on a side surface thereof, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portions. .

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshing with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11 is provided with a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined by the detection result of the detection device. D12.

  Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by the electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to the instability of the voltage of the electric motor. This may cause the pair of moving members to collide at an unexpected speed.

  On the other hand, according to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D11, a detection device that can detect the position and speed of the pair of moving members is provided, and the detection result of the detection device is used. Since the moving speeds of the pair of moving members are determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding with each other at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

  For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted according to the detection result of the detection device capable of detecting the position and the speed of the one moving member while the pair of moving members are close to each other, and the pair of moving members are almost A constant speed state can be formed. As a result, the impact at the time of a collision between the pair of moving members can be softened.

<Characteristic E group> (Distracts attention from V-accuracy attacker during V-accuracy operation)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery means for performing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result In the gaming machine having a variable winning means capable of changing from a closed state where it is difficult to enter a game ball to an open state where the game ball is easy to enter, the variable winning means is a predetermined condition. Based on the establishment of, the opening and closing means for opening and closing a specific area in which the game ball entered the variable winning means can enter, and a ball detection means for detecting that the game ball enters the specific area, And a predetermined state when at least the opening / closing means and the privilege state giving means for giving a bonus state that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means are operated. Directing to produce Gaming machine E1, characterized in that those having a means.

  The gaming machine E1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. On the basis of the display of the identification information indicating the predetermined lottery result on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from the closed state in which it is difficult to enter to the open state in which it is easy to enter. In the variable winning means, the opening / closing means opens and closes a specific area in which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area is detected by the ball detecting unit, the privilege state giving unit gives a privilege state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when at least the opening / closing means is operated, the effect execution means performs a predetermined effect. Thereby, the operation of the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous by a predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the effect performing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode, and the gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, a specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect executing means, so that there is an effect that the player can be distracted from the opening / closing means.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect execution means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as the effect, the gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the effect mode is informed by the effect executing means that an effect indicating that the hand is placed on the front side of the variable winning means is effected. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to distinguish the motion.

  The gaming machine E4 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, wherein the effect execution means is at least executed over a period from a predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated to an operating period.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the performance executing means is executed over the period from the predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated, so This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the operation of the opening / closing means.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means enters an opening into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which the opening is in the closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter and the open state. The opening and closing means has a restricting member that is changed to a possible state, and the opening and closing means has a short opening time shorter than a time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, and the opening to the opening. A gaming machine E5, which executes one of a long open time longer than a time required for a game ball to flow down to a specific area based on a predetermined condition.

  The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the variable winning means is provided with an opening through which the game ball can enter and a restricting member that changes the opening between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball can enter. And either a short open time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or a long open time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area. The opening / closing means is executed based on one of the predetermined conditions. This makes it possible to control with a simple configuration whether or not to enter the game ball into the opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine E5, special game executing means for executing a special game for changing the variable winning means to the open state, based on being selected by the lottery means as the specific lottery result, and the lottery means. When the lottery is determined to be a specific lottery result, the game has a type determining means for determining the type of the special game, and the opening / closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined.

  The gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5. That is, when the special game execution means executes the special game of changing the variable winning means to the open state based on the lottery means that the result is a specific lottery, the type determination means determines the special game The type is determined. Then, in the opening / closing means, either one of the short open time and the long open time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. Thereby, the privilege to be given to the player can be easily changed depending on the type of privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Feature F group> (V attack route is formed by one attacker)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery means for performing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means is a specific lottery result When is displayed, the variable winning means that can change the game ball from the closed state where it is difficult to enter to the open state where it is easy to enter, and the probability that the lottery means will draw the predetermined lottery result In a gaming machine having a probability setting means for setting either one of the normal probability and a special probability which is higher than the normal probability, the variable winning means is a game ball that enters when the game ball is in the open state. A possible opening, a first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass and a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area and the second specific Either in the area or above Distribution means for distributing the game balls entering the mouth, and the probability setting means sets the special probability on the condition that the game balls have passed the first specific area. A gaming machine F1 characterized by.

  The gaming machine F1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When the identification information indicating that the result is a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter. Then, the probability setting means sets either one of the normal probability at the normal time and the special probability, which is a higher probability than the normal probability, as the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery result by the lottery means. In the variable winning means, the game balls are distributed by the allocating means to one of the first specific area through which the game balls that enter the opening and enter the opening can pass, and the second specific area different from the first specific area. Are distributed. The probability setting means sets the special probability on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a special probability is set by the variable winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  On the gaming machine F1, a special game for facilitating the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result. A special game executing means for executing, and a type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means when the specific lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, and Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means, one of a first state where it is easy to distribute the game balls to the first specific area and a second state where it is easy to distribute the game balls to the second specific area. A gaming machine F2, comprising: a distribution setting means set within the period of the one special game.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, the special game execution means executes the special game for facilitating the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It When the lottery means draws a specific lottery result, the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means is determined by the type determining means. In addition, one of a first state where it is easy to distribute the game balls to the first specific area and a second state where it is easy to allocate the game balls to the second specific area are based on the type of special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of one special game. Thus, the distribution means can be controlled according to the type of special game determined by the type determination means, so that the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be controlled more simply.

  In the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time shorter than a time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening as the second state from the open state, A game machine F3, characterized in that a second time, which is a time required for a game ball to reach from the opening to the first specific area, is set from the open state as the first state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, in the distribution setting means, the first time shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific region from the opening is in the second state. Is set from the open state as, and the second time, which is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is set from the open state as the first state. This makes it possible to easily control whether or not the special probability is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the sorting means is The gaming machine F4, which is operated for a certain period of time to a state in which the game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, it is changed to the open state a plurality of times. Then, the distribution means is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which the game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among a plurality of open states. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to allocate the game balls to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the fact that the game balls pass through the first specific region or the second specific region. A gaming machine F5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of gaming balls are given to the player based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since it is paid out by the payout means, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the game.

<Feature G group> (long press effect)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a performance executing means for performing an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery means, an operating means operable by a player, and an operation thereof. Based on the operation of the means, a signal output means for outputting an operation signal, a determination means for determining whether the operation signal output by the signal output means is received, and the operation signal by the determination means. Based on the release timing when it is determined that the operation signal is not received after it is determined to have been received, there is a production effect varying means for varying the production performed by the production performing means. Gaming machine G1.

  The gaming machine G1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the executed lottery means. Further, based on the operation of the player by the operation means, the operation signal output by the signal output means is determined to have received the operation signal by the determination means, and then determined not to have received the operation signal. The effect executed by the effect executing means is changed by the effect changing means based on the release timing. Thereby, the effect can be variously changed by the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the effect varying means determines whether the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and when it is within the allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. A gaming machine G2, which is capable of changing to an effect that is advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, when the effect changing means determines that the release timing is within the predetermined allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. Since the effect can be changed to be advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the allowable period when it is determined by the determining means that the operation signal is received. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notification means when the determination means determines that the operation signal is received. There is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means notifies in a special notification mode that the allowable period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Characteristic gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, in the notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the lottery result in the notification mode and play the game.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect varying unit receives the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determining unit receives the operation signal. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the effect is changed when the game is lost.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, in the effect varying means, the operation signal is continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determining means receives the operation signal. When it is determined that the operation signal is not received after that, the effect is changed, so that the operation of the operation means can be more enjoyed.

<Characteristic H group> (SW production)
Based on the display means for displaying the effect of the game, the operating means operable by the player, the operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated, and the determination result by the operation determining means, the effect Advantageous to the player based on the effect changing means for changing the effect, the effect setting means for setting the effect contents changed by the effect changing means at the timing of operating the operation means, and the operation of the operation means. Period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the effect contents are set and a second period in which the effect contents that are more disadvantageous to the player than the first period are set, the first period and the first period. At least the first notification mode for discriminating two periods and the second notification mode for discriminating the first period and the second period are different from the first notification mode. Term Gaming machine H1, characterized in that the informing means for informing, and has a.

  The gaming machine H1 has the following effects. That is, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is changed by the effect varying means based on the result of the operation of the player determined by the operation determining means. Next, the effect setting means sets the effect contents that are changed by the effect changing means, based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect contents that are advantageous to the player are set, and the second period in which the effect contents that are more disadvantageous to the player than the first period are set. And are set by at least the period setting means. A first notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner, and a second notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. And are notified by the notification means at least during the same period. As a result, the player can easily play the game by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within a valid period in which the operation of the operating means is valid, and the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of first periods within the valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, so that the operation is performed in the first period. The effect is that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first notification mode displays the variable period of the period according to a predetermined rule by changing the symbol, and notifies the set current period. H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is variably displayed according to a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  The gaming machine H4 according to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, characterized in that the second notification mode is to notify by changing a symbol about a transition of a period based on a randomly set rule.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the pattern of the transition of the period is notified based on the randomly set rule, so that the game is notified. There is an effect that a wide variety of performances can be provided to the person.

<Feature group I> (Overflow control)
Based on the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entrance into which the game ball can enter and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means A lottery means for performing a lottery upon establishment of a lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to, a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquiring means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the entrance. The first easy to enter the game ball State and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state, and the ball changing means is set in the first state so as to be more easily changed than in the normal state at the normal time. In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the dynamic display mode determination means is based on the number of the information stored in the storage means. The dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed, and when the special state is set, at least the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a predetermined number. In the case, the game machine I1 has a delay means for delaying the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period.

  The gaming machine I1 has the following effects. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means is executed by the privilege game executing means. Next, until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage unit stores a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition unit. Further, the first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state are changed by the ball changing means. Then, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the special state that is more easily changed to the first state than the normal state in the normal state is set by the state setting means. Further, in the dynamic display mode determining means, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed, and the special state is changed. When set, if at least the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the delay means delays the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period. As a result, the delay is delayed by the delay unit, so that the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where much information is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines a dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display period from the set number when the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it is easier to determine than when a large amount is stored.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, in the dynamic display mode determination means, when the number of information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number, more than the set number is stored. Since it is easier to determine a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display period than in the case of the above, there is an effect that the period during which dynamic display is not performed can be set shorter.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than a period in which the ball entering variable means is varied from the second state to the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than the period in which the ball entrance varying means is changed from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where much information is stored.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the entry variable means is varied to the first state, a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls in which the information is stored in the storage means can enter A gaming machine I4 characterized in that it is maintained in the first state below.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the entry variable means allows the player to store information in the storage means at a predetermined number or less when the information is stored in the storage means. Since the ball is maintained in the first state within a period in which the ball can enter, there is an effect that a game can be played more efficiently.

<Feature J group> (Hidden fluctuation fluctuation)
A lottery means for executing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display means for the display means. A dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for performing, the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and is dynamically determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The display mode includes, as a dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. In when said identification symbols is temporarily stopped, the gaming machine is characterized in that with a stationary symbol display means for displaying overlapping the stationary pattern to the front side of the identification symbols J1.

  The gaming machine J1 has the following effects. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Then, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols. Further, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, as a dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, there is a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. It is included, and when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode, the static symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the identification symbol by the static symbol display means. As a result, the temporarily stopped identification symbol can be made to appear as if it has been fixedly stopped by the stationary symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine J1, a game machine J2 characterized in that, when temporarily stopped, the identification pattern is dynamically displayed by slightly changing the display position.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed, so that it is temporarily stopped. Has the effect that it can be easily informed.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the identification symbol being temporarily stopped, and is hidden before the dynamic identification of the identification symbol is started again. A gaming machine J3 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the static symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the identification pattern.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are displayed in a stopped order in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, since the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the player can provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determination means determines one of the dynamic display modes based on a lottery result by the lottery means, and the pseudo continuous display mode is A gaming machine J5, wherein the lottery result is set to be easily determined when the result of the lottery is the specific lottery result.

  The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In the pseudo continuous display mode, the lottery result is set to be easily determined when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, so that the pseudo continuous display mode allows the player to expect a specific lottery result. effective.

<Characteristics K group> (If the attack rate is the same for the Poden chucker and attacker and the attackers are narrowed down, the Poden prize will be higher)
A ball entrance through which a game can enter, and a ball entrance changing means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the game ball into the entrance, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a lottery means therefor. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination that the result is a specific lottery result, an opening through which the game ball can enter And an opening changing means for changing the opening thereof into an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and the privilege game executing means sets the changing means to the open state. The period is variable, and the opening and the entrance are When the opening is in the closed state and the ball entrance is in the first state, the game balls entering the opening are arranged at positions where it easily enters the ball entrance. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery means performs the lottery based on the information of the obtaining means obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the result is a specific lottery result, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state are changed by the ball changing means. The opening is changed by the opening changing means for changing the open state in which the game ball can enter and the difficult closed state. In the privilege game executing means, the changing means is changed to the open state for a predetermined period. Furthermore, the opening and the ball entrance, when the opening is in the closed state and the ball entrance is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening becomes easy to enter the ball entrance. It is arranged in each position. Thereby, the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the opening varying means is composed of a wall member capable of opening and closing the opening, and in the closed state, the game ball is received on the upper surface of the wall member and is played toward the ball entrance side. A gaming machine K2, which is configured to guide a sphere.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the opening varying means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, receives the game ball on the upper surface of the wall member and enters the ball. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, it is possible to configure the game ball so that the game ball can easily enter, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, a guiding means for guiding the gaming ball from the wall member to the ball entrance is provided.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be more efficiently entered into the entrance.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a launching means for launching the game ball into a game area,
And a launching force adjusting unit capable of adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching unit based on the operation of the player, and the game ball launched from the launching unit in the game area. At least a first area capable of flowing down and a second area different from the first area are formed, and the opening is a position where a game ball flowing down from the second area can enter. The game ball, which has flown down any one of the first region and the second region, is arranged at a position in which the game ball can enter in common. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the state of entering the ball can be changed by the firing force adjusting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K4, a special entrance for allowing a game ball that has flowed down the second area to enter, and a special benefit that gives the player an advantage when the game ball enters the special entrance A first setting state in which the means and the game ball flowing down through the second area are easily guided to the opening and difficult to be guided to the special entrance, and the game ball is difficult to be guided to the opening to the special entrance. A gaming machine K5, comprising: a setting means capable of being set to either the second setting state which is easily guided.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4, there is an effect that the state of the game can be changed and a fresh game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, the setting means can be set from outside the gaming machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, the setting can be changed by the setting means, and the taste of the game can be adjusted.

  In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the game ball flowing down the second area is easily guided to the opening, and is difficult to be guided to the entrance side, and the game ball is difficult to be guided to the opening. , A gaming machine K7 having an adjusting means capable of being adjusted to a second adjustment state in which the ball is easily guided to the entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the gambling property of the game can be adjusted by adjusting the adjusting means.

<Feature L group> (V attacker loops twice)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means capable of changing from a first state where the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state where it is easy to enter, and the first ball entering Based on the first determination means for making a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the means, and the determination result of the first determination means being the first determination result, the second entry means is the second The special state setting means for setting a special state that can be easily changed to the state, the second determination means for making a determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result of the second determining means are In the case of the second determination result, the third ball entering means that allows the ball to enter, the specific area through which the game ball that entered the third ball entering means can pass, and the game ball passes through the specific area. Based on what has been done, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and the special state setting means Whether or not the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the right storage means capable of storing at least two rights for which the second determination means makes a determination and the determination result of the second determination means. A gaming machine L1 having a determining means for determining whether or not.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 grid are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player.

  Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, some games are given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880), and the interest of the game is improved.

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel in that it hits twice once if it suddenly changes, and the other gaming features are the same as those of conventional gaming machines, and further interest in gaming is required. It was

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the predetermined first judgment result is selected by the first judgment means, thereby providing a special state in which the judgment by the second judgment means is easy, and the second judgment means is further provided. After the predetermined second judgment result is selected by the player, the judgment is performed by the second judgment means while having an interesting game property that the big hit is given only when the game ball is passed through the specific area. By storing the right to perform, even if the special state is once changed to the normal state, the stored second determination unit can execute the determination. Therefore, when the gaming state is far from the jackpot (shifted from the special state to the normal state), at least another chance of jackpot is given, so that the player can enjoy expecting the jackpot until the end, This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second ball entering means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entering means, and at least part of a period during which the game ball can enter the third ball entering means. The gaming machine L2, which is variable to the first state.

  In the gaming machine L1 described above, in the special state, in order to surely make the determination by the second determining means, the second ball entering means is controlled to the second state where it is easy to enter the ball. The problem that the second ball entering means in the state obstructs the ball entering the third ball entering means has emerged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the second ball entering means is brought into the closed state (retracted state) during the period in which the third ball entering means can enter the ball. Thus, there is an effect that the ball can be smoothly entered without obstructing the entrance into the third ball entering means.

  In the gaming machine L2, a display capable of dynamically displaying third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entering means to the second state, and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means. Means and a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is set to the special state. Based on this, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is set so as to be easily determined until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine L2 described above can smoothly enter the game balls into the third ball entering means, but in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, in addition to that, the second special during the special state. At the same time, it was necessary to achieve a structure for securing a reserved memory of symbols.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine L3 has a control for setting the dynamic display period for changing the second ball entering means to the second state in the special state shorter than the normal state.

  By this control, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, a predetermined condition (for example, opening of the third ball entering means, elapse of a predetermined time, entering a predetermined number of balls into the second ball entering means, reaching the upper limit of reserved memory, etc.) It is possible to prioritize the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means until the above is established, and to give priority to the entry of the game ball into the third ball entering means after the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played smoothly.

  In the gaming machine L2, a display capable of dynamically displaying third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entering means to the second state, and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means. Means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means has elapsed, and Variable control means for changing the second ball entering means to the second state when the identification information indicating the determination result of changing to the second state is displayed. A gaming machine L4, which is configured to change the second ball entering means to the second state for a longer period than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the setting of the special state.

  In addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control for changing the second ball entering means to the second state for a long period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The same effect as the machine L3 can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the third ball entering means can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3 or L4, it becomes possible to surely satisfy the predetermined condition before the third ball entering means can enter the ball. It is possible to smoothly enter the means.

  In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means for displaying the second identification information. Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, wherein the second dynamic display period determining means is at least a first time after the special state is set. Regarding the dynamic display of, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set.

  With the gaming machine L5 described above, a smooth game can be performed with respect to the ball entering the third ball entering means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, it is possible to store at least two rights for executing the determination by the second determining means in the game in the special state, but the determination of each determining means in the special state is possible. Depending on the timing, there arises a new problem that it is not possible to store at least two rights for executing the determination by the second determining means. That is, if the jackpot based on the determination result of the second determining means is provided before the second entering means is brought into the second state as the determination result of the third determining means in the special state, the special game is There is a problem that the 2 ball entering means ends before the second state and the right to newly perform the determination by the second determining means cannot be stored.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the first dynamic display (first time) after the special game (time saving game) is started. Because the period of 2 special symbols variable display) is set to be longer than the dynamic display (normal symbol variable display) time, the dynamic display ends by the end of the first second dynamic display, The 2 ball entering means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the new problems described above and secure the characteristic game playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

  The gaming machine L7 in the gaming machines L1 to L6, wherein the third ball entering means allows the game ball to pass through the specific area when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is awakened by the third ball entering means ending immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, the third ball entering means allows the game ball to pass through the specific area when the predetermined number or more of the game balls have entered in the state where the ball can be entered. A gaming machine L8 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is awakened by the third ball entering means ending immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball entering means restricts the restricting means by restricting the passing of the game ball into the specific area and the predetermined number of game balls entering. A gaming machine L9, comprising: a varying unit that varies the game ball to a released state in which the gaming ball can pass to a specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L7 or L8, the gaming ball that has entered the third ball entering means does not pass through the specific area until the number of the game balls reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to prevent the situation where the game is over and the player is awakened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the specific area, Based on the variable control means for varying the variable member and the determination result of the first determination means being the specific determination result, it becomes possible to enter the third ball entering means, and the first determining means allows When it is determined to be the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member to change to the restricted state for a period in which the variable member can enter the third ball entering means, When the second determination means determines the second determination result, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period in which the game ball can enter a specific area. Is Gaming machine L10 characterized and.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the third ball entering means even when the specific determination result is obtained by the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the player enters the third ball entering means with any of the judgment results of the first judging means and the second judging means, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether or not the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the second determination result. Characteristic gaming machine L11.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, it is determined whether or not to set the special state. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the previous game by knowing that there is a possibility of being in a special state because the third ball entering means can enter the ball. The interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines either the second determination result or the determination result in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all the determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state itself in which the determination by the second determining means is performed is advantageous to the player, and thus is entertaining. A game machine can be provided.

  The gaming machine L13 according to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, wherein the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect exhibited by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the privilege game is executed even with the first determination result, so that a gaming machine rich in interest can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game executing means allows the game ball to enter the fourth ball entering means different from the third ball entering means as the privilege game. Characteristic gaming machine L14.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the game is directed toward the four ball entrance means. Since a game of shooting a ball is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a lot of interest.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball entry means has a ball entry portion into which the game ball can enter, and a guide position that can guide the game ball into the ball entry portion. A game machine L15, comprising: a guide member that can be changed to a non-guide position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering portion.

  In order to make the best use of the playability of the gaming machine according to the present technical concept, there is a problem in that the second ball entry means must be configured to be difficult to enter in the first state and easy to enter in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect exhibited by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L14, a guide member is provided in the second ball entering means, and the guide member can be changed between a guide position and a non-guide position. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to enter the ball in the first state and easy to enter the ball in the second state, and there is an effect that it is possible to make good use of the playability of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine L15, the guiding member has a first area capable of receiving a falling game ball and a second area capable of rolling a game ball rolling from the first area to the ball-in portion. A gaming machine L16 having, and a gaming ball that is rolled into the second area is configured to be able to enter the entering portion.

  According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is configured by the first region and the second region, and the guiding member can enter from the second region to the ball entering portion. Even if the game ball falling from the game board in the non-guided position is provided with a ball entrance portion at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, the guide member is not allowed to enter the ball entry part in the guide position. There is an effect that it can be facilitated and the playability of the gaming machine can be utilized.

  In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guide member is in the second state for a period longer than the rolling period required for the game ball received in the first region to enter the ball entering portion. And the special state is not set, the gaming machine L17 is changed to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period.

  According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L16, the period during which the guide member is changed from the non-guide position to the guide position is set by the game ball on the guide member when the special state is set. Since it is possible to set the period during which it is easy to enter the ball and the period during which the game ball on the guide member is difficult to enter the ball in the special member if it is not set, There is an effect that it is possible to utilize the game play.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second identification by the second dynamic display means. Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which information is dynamically displayed, and a privilege from when the determination result of the second determining means becomes the second determination result until the privilege game is executed A privilege pre-game execution means for executing a pre-game, and the second dynamic display period determination means determines the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. And the length of the pre-privilege game period are determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. To do. A gaming machine L18 characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, when the determination result of the second determining means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not provided immediately, but thereafter the jackpot game is provided only after passing through the specific area. . In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determining means, there is a problem that the player wants to expect as much as possible before the jackpot game is provided. Surfaced. That is, if all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination means will be displayed before the bonus pre-game based on the second determination result is executed. There is a problem that the player recognizes it and the interest in the game play during the execution of the pre-privilege game becomes poor.

  According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, and the privilege before The total length of the game period, that is, the period from the start of the dynamic display based on the second determination result until the jackpot game is provided, and the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. The length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result of the second determination means (other than the second determination result). By making them equal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the timing when the pre-privilege game ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The predetermined determination result includes the second privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game advantageous to the player on the basis that the determination result of the first determination means is the first determination result. A gaming machine L19, wherein the determination result of the second determining means is a determination result of executing the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L18, the jackpot display based on the determination made by the second determining means can be performed at the same timing, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display to the end. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  It is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the game by making the jackpot based on the second determination result and the jackpot based on the predetermined determination result different from each other.

  In the gaming machine L19, an effect display means for executing an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, and a display body for displaying an effect executed by the effect execution means, The effect execution means displays a second judgment result effect corresponding to the second judgment result and a pre-privilege game effect corresponding to the privilege pre-game on the display body, and the second privilege game is executed. The game machine L20, wherein at least a part of the second determination result effect is used when the effect corresponding to the determined result is displayed on the display body.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, a display display (for example, a liquid crystal device) is used to perform an effect display based on identification information indicating the results of various determinations so that the player can grasp. Then, the player is delighted while grasping the contents of the effect display displayed on the display body. Even in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a demand for effect display suitable for playability.

  According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L19, part of the effect display based on the determination result that the privilege game is executed is based on the determination result that the second privilege game is executed. By using the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game will be executed by only a part of the effect content displayed on the display body, and the effect content displayed to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make all of the players interested and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L20, the second determination result effect is fixedly displayed with the corresponding second determination result dynamic display effect while the second identification information is dynamically displayed. When the effect corresponding to the determination result of the second privilege game is executed by the effect executing means, a part of the second judgment result dynamic display confirmation effect is included. At least the above-mentioned second determination result dynamic display effect is used, and the gaming machine L21.

  According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L20, when the effect corresponding to the determination result of the second privilege game is executed, the second determination result dynamic display effect is partially provided. By using it, a common effect is performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is started, and the player can use only the start portion of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether or not the bonus game will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all of the effect contents displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. is there. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

  In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege game effect is a pre-special privilege game effect corresponding while the pre-special game is being performed, and a special prize game finalizing effect corresponding to a game ball passing through the specific area. When performing the effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed by the effect execution means, at least the privilege pre-play game effect is used as a part of the effect. Gaming machine L22.

  According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L21, when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result of the second bonus game, the pre-special bonus game effect is used as a part of the effect. As a result, a common effect is performed in the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can obtain which privilege game only in the final stage portion of the effect content displayed on the display body. There is an effect that it is not possible to grasp whether or not it will be executed, it is possible to make the player interested in all of the effect contents displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

  In the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect execution means notifies the first notification effect that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and the determination result by the second determination means is the above-mentioned. A second notification effect for notifying that the determination result of the second privilege game is to be executed is executed, and the first notification effect or the second notification effect is performed after the effect execution means executes the effect. A gaming machine L23, characterized in that the timings of executing and are the same.

  According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timings at which the effects for notifying the determination result of the second determination means are displayed are the same, so the player grasps the determination result at different timings. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent it from happening and to improve the interest of the game.

  By providing two or all of the configurations from the gaming machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be achieved.

<Characteristics M group> (exercises latent performance during Let's Mambo)
Based on the satisfaction of the first condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information, an information storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination is performed based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. And a pre-judgment means for judging the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied, Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, a specific effect determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means, and Special With respect to the information that is determined by the effect determining means to execute the specific effect, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and information that is determined by the determination unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied With respect to the information stored later and stored before the information that has triggered the execution of the specific effect, a specific effect control unit that restricts the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine M1 characterized by being present.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 grid are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, some games are given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880), and the interest of the game is improved. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only causes the player to be interested in the big hit, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is deteriorated with respect to the variable display which is out of the way. There was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment of the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute a specific effect by dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means. The determining unit determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied for the information determined by the specific effect determining unit to execute the specific effect. The information stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied and stored before the information that triggers the execution of the specific effect is specified. Execution of production is regulated by the specific production regulation means.

  As a result, among the information for which the specific effect is determined, the execution of the specific effect is restricted for the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the specific effect continues. It is possible to re-execute a specific effect after making it seem that the effect to be executed has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Means for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the information is the information for which a specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Characteristic gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the information determines a specific dynamic display mode, the determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, by displaying the specific dynamic display mode, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that the specific effect has ended.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determination unit determines execution of the specific effect based on the determination by the pre-determination unit that the information determines the specific dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M2, the execution of the specific rendering is determined to be the specific rendering based on the fact that it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the specific dynamic display mode is determined. Since it is decided by the deciding means, the player is made to recognize early that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by any one of the continuous suspension changes when the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. The effect is that you can do it.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is started for the information already stored. A gaming machine M4 having a start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, in the case where it is determined by the specific effect determination means that a specific effect is to be executed, the information already stored Since the information for starting the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed can be randomized to provide the player with various effects. There is an effect.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulation unit is stored after the information determined by the determining unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and execution of the specific effect is determined. Of the information stored before the information that triggered the trigger, the information stored consecutively a predetermined number of times from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, the gaming machine M5, which regulates the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determining means to satisfy the predetermined condition. , Among the information stored prior to the information that triggered the execution of a specific effect, the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition continues for a predetermined number of times. Since the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means with respect to the information stored as a result, the specific effect is restricted the number of times consecutively, and the player can be expected to execute the specific effect again. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine M5, the specific effect restricting means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery, the gaming machine M6.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M5, the predetermined number of times is determined by the specific restriction means by lottery, so that the number of times the specific performance is restricted can be made random, and the interest of the player is improved. The effect is that you can do it.

  Any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6 is characterized by having suggestive effect executing means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect with respect to the dynamic display of the information for which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Gaming machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a predetermined suggestive suggestion suggests a dynamic indication for the information for which a particular production is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Since it is executed by the execution means, there is an effect that the player can have an expectation that the specific effect is continuing due to the suggestive effect.

<Characteristic N group> (The number of latencies after the Let's Mambo is determined by the number of holdings at the start of the Let's Mombo)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information, an information storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination is performed based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed,
Before the second condition is satisfied, the information is stored in the information storage unit based on the preliminary determination unit that determines the information stored in the information storage unit and the determination result determined by the preliminary determination unit. When the dynamic display of the identification information is performed with respect to the information that is being performed, an effect determining unit that determines execution of a continuous effect that executes a specific effect, and the effect determining unit executes the continuous effect Suggestion to the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the determined information A gaming machine N1 having: a suggested effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 grid are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, some games are given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880), and the interest of the game is improved. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only causes the player to be interested in the big hit, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is deteriorated with respect to the variable display which is out of the way. There was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The privilege granting unit grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the display unit displays the identification information indicating the specific determination result. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, for the information already stored in the information storage means, execution of a continuous performance for executing a specific performance each time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed Is determined by the effect determination means. The movement of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information is triggered at a predetermined timing until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to be performed by the effect determining means. The suggestive effect determination means determines whether or not to perform the suggestive effect on the dynamic display. As a result, since the suggestive effect is executed even after the continuous effect is completed, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, the continuous production can be made to appear as if the number of continuous productions is larger than the actual number of continuous productions, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means. The production determination means, the production determination means, the pre-determination means, when the specific dynamic display mode is determined to be the information determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the continuous A gaming machine N2, characterized in that it is decided to execute an effect.

  The gaming machine N2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. If the pre-determination means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the continuous production is executed by the production determination means. Since the dynamic display mode is performed, it is possible to quickly recognize that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by the start of the continuous effect.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestive effect is an effect that is executed even during a predetermined period before the effect starts in the continuous effect.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestive effect is executed during a predetermined period before the effect of the continuous effect is started. Therefore, the suggestive effect is executed to start the continuous effect. There is an effect that the player can expect.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestive effect is determined to be executed when the suggestive effect is executed, the game machine is provided with a number-of-times determining unit that determines a continuous number by lottery. N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestive effect determining means determines that the suggestive effect is executed, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number of times determining means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times the suggestive effect is performed can be randomized, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic P group> (a single production mode is started by a button operation, and the production mode is changed by an invalid operation)
Production means capable of executing the production, production execution means capable of causing the production means to execute a specific production in a predetermined first production pattern, operation means operable by a player, A signal output unit that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation unit, a signal determination unit that determines the signal output by the signal output unit, and the predetermined signal that is determined by the signal determination unit And a possible state determining means for determining whether or not it is possible for the effect producing means to start execution of the specific effect by the effect performing means. Based on the fact that it is determined that, the effect control means for starting the execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means, and in the possible state by the possible state determination means. The first effect of the specific effect based on the specific condition determining unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the information based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, and that the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the specific condition determining unit. A gaming machine P1 characterized by having a production varying means for varying a pattern to a different second production pattern.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like), the accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the character effect drive effect), a new accessory effect effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect effect of the accessory driving effect that is not executed and is executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced. Further, there is a problem that the operation of the ornamental body (for example, operation time) cannot be adjusted to the preference of the player, and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the effect production means can execute the specific effect in the predetermined first effect pattern on the effect means capable of executing the effect, and can be operated by the player. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output by the predetermined signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal has been discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the variable state determining means determines whether or not it is in a state in which it is possible for the effecting means to start the execution of the specific effect. Based on the fact that the variable state determining means determines that the variable state is possible, the effect control means starts the execution of the specific effect by the effect executing means. On the other hand, based on the fact that the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the information based on the determination that the possible state determining means is not the possible state, the effect varying means determines the first effect pattern of the specific effect. It is changed to a different second effect pattern.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the effect pattern of the specific effect from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern based on the determination that the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means cannot be executed. Therefore, since the effect pattern of the specific effect to be executed next can be changed based on the operation of the operation means that was not able to execute the specific effect, the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be changed. There is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine P1, the second effect pattern is set in an effect period shorter than the first effect pattern, the gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second effect pattern is set in an effect period shorter than that of the first effect pattern, the effect period of the specific effect can be shortened by executing the second effect pattern. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in a single period, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. is there. Further, even when the operating means is continuously operated for a short period of time, the chances of starting execution of the specific effect increase, and the player can operate the operating means to start the specific effect. It is possible to give more, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect pattern includes at least two or more effect parts of the effect parts. A gaming machine P3 characterized by causing a performance to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect pattern causes at least two or more effect parts of the effect parts to effect effects, Various effects can be executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect production means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means applies the effect to any effect part of the effect parts. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being capable of executing a specific effect.

  The gaming machine P4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, the production means has a plurality of production parts capable of executing the production, and the production execution means executes the specific production on any production part among the plurality of production parts.

  As a result, various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P4, the possible state determination means determines the possible state when there is at least one of the effect parts capable of starting the effect with the effect pattern by the effect execution means. A gaming machine P5 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when there is at least one effect part capable of starting the effect with the effect pattern by the effect execution means, the possible state determination means determines that the possible state.

  Thereby, when at least one of the effect units is in the enabled state, the specific effect can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in a single period, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the specific condition is that the number of times that the possible state determination means determines that the state is not the available state is set to at least one of the established conditions. Gaming machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times that the possible state determination means determines that the specific state is not established is set as at least one of the established conditions.

  With this, the specific condition is satisfied based on the number of times that the possible state is determined by the possible state determining unit, that is, the number of times that the specific effect is not executed by the effect executing unit despite operating the operation unit. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means, and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P6, the specific condition is set to at least one of the satisfaction conditions by the number of times that the possible state determining means determines that the state is not the possible state within a predetermined period. A gaming machine P7 characterized by being a thing.

  The gaming machine P7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P6. That is, the number of times that the possible state determining means determines that the possible state is not the possible state within the predetermined period is set as at least one of the satisfying conditions for the specific condition.

  As a result, the specific performance is executed by the performance executing means despite the operation means is operated within the predetermined number of times determined by the possible state determining means as not being in the possible state, that is, within the predetermined period. It is possible to satisfy the specific condition based on the number of times that it was not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means, and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, an effect pattern selection for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of different second effect patterns based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means. A gaming machine P8 having means.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effect is achieved. That is, one effect pattern is selected from the plurality of different second effect patterns by the effect pattern selecting means based on the specific condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, when the effect pattern of the specific effect is variable, a plurality of effect patterns can be executed, and thus various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P8, the effect pattern selection means is for selecting a second effect pattern corresponding to information based on the determination that the state is not the possible state.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P8, the second effect pattern corresponding to the information based on the determination that the game machine P8 is not in the enabled state is selected. There is an effect that it can be executed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, and that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P8 or P9, the plurality of different second effect patterns are set so that at least the effect periods are set differently.

  According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P8 or P9, a plurality of different second effect patterns are set with at least different effect periods, so that a specific effect is executed depending on the effect pattern to be executed. You can have different durations. This makes it possible to change the number of times the specific effect can be executed in a single period, and thus the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P10, the rendering means has at least a movable member that is movable, and the rendering execution means assigns the movable member to each of the first rendering pattern and the second rendering pattern. A gaming machine P11, which is movable in a corresponding movable pattern.

  The gaming machine P11 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P10. That is, the production means has at least a movable movable member, and the production execution means moves the movable member in a movable pattern corresponding to each of the first production pattern and the second production pattern.

  Accordingly, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be executed on the movable member that is movable based on the operation on the operation means, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect execution means applies the specific effect to each of the effect parts. A gaming machine P12, which is capable of being executed, and in which the plurality of effect sections are set with different effect periods as the specific effect.

  The gaming machine P12 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, the production means has a plurality of production parts capable of executing the production, and the production execution means executes the specific production for each of the plurality of production parts. Then, different effect periods are set for the plurality of effect parts, respectively.

  As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect for a plurality of effect parts having different effect periods based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P12, the gaming machine P12 has elapsed period determination means for determining the elapsed operation period set for each of the plurality of effect parts, and the possible state determination means determines the elapsed time period of the plurality of effect parts. A gaming machine P13, characterized in that the means for determining that the effect section after the operation period has passed is the enabled state.

  According to the gaming machine P13, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P12. That is, the elapsed period determination means determines whether or not the effect period set in each of the plurality of effect parts has elapsed, and the effect part determined to have passed the operation period is determined to be in the enabled state by the enable state determination means. With this, among the plurality of effect units in which different effect periods are set, the operation of the effect unit whose operation period has elapsed can be started at the timing when the operation unit is operated, and even if the operation unit is operated, the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which the effect is not executed on the machine side.

<Characteristic Q group> (Variable execution timing by invalid button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, at least one of the plural producing means capable of executing the effect, in the predetermined first producing pattern. And a performance executing means capable of causing the two or more performance means to perform a specific performance, the performance executing means preliminarily performing the specific performance by the two or more performance means. During a predetermined waiting period, at least one of the two rendering means is put on standby for execution of the rendering, and during the waiting period, the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that on the basis of the reception of the signals is intended to initiate the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation unit in standby.

  In a game machine such as a game machine or a pachinko machine, a player operates a plurality of decorative bodies from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by operating an operation unit (production button or the like), thereby executing an accessory driving effect. There are some (for example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the character effect drive effect), a new accessory effect effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect effect of the accessory driving effect that is not executed and is executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced. Further, it is conceivable that, when one of the plurality of ornaments is operated while the operation unit is operated, the other ornament is operated. Even in this case, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) when all the decorations are operated because the operation of the operation means is performed plural times in a short period of time, etc. There is a problem in that a new accessory driving effect cannot be executed and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, a predetermined signal is output from the signal output means on the basis of the operation means operable by the player being operated. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the specific effect is given to at least two or more of the plural effect means capable of executing the effect in the predetermined first effect pattern. It is executed by the performance executing means.

  When the specific effect is executed by two or more effect means, the execution of the effect is waited for at least one effect means of the two or more effect means in a predetermined waiting period. Based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means during the waiting period, execution of the effect is started by the effect executing means for at least one effect means on standby.

  Thereby, even when the execution of the specific effect is started for a plurality of effect means by the operation of the operation means, at least one effect means waits for the execution of the specific effect, and the operation means operates during the standby period. Since the standby is ended and the specific effect is executed by the operation, even if the player operates the operation means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period in which the execution of the specific effect is not started, and the operation is performed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the standby period is longer than the shortest period in which the signal output unit can output the predetermined signal for each operation when the operation unit is operated continuously. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being set in.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, during the waiting period, when the operating means is operated continuously, the signal output means can output a predetermined signal for each operation. Since the period is set to be longer than the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the invalid period from occurring even when the operating means is continuously operated.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an interval determination means for determining an interval at which the signal determination means determines the predetermined signal, a storage means capable of storing the information determined by the interval determination means, and a storage means for storing the information. A gaming machine Q3, comprising: period setting means for variably setting the waiting period based on the obtained information.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the interval for determining the predetermined signal by the signal determining means is determined by the interval determining means. The information determined by the interval determining means is stored in the storage means. The standby period is variably set by the period setting unit based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  As a result, the interval at which the player operates the operating means varies depending on the player, but the operated interval is determined by the interval determining means and the information is stored, so that the player's habit of operating the operating means is , Frequency, etc. can be stored. Furthermore, since the standby period is variably set by the setting unit based on the information stored in the storage unit, the standby period can be varied according to the situation in which the player operates the operating unit to suit the player. It can be in the state of a gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. Incidentally. Even if the information is not stored in the storage means, the setting means variably sets the standby period directly on the basis of the information determined by the interval determination means so that the standby period suitable for each operation is set. Even if it is configured, there is an effect that it can be set so as to perform more optimal performance.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the valid period setting means for setting the valid period for making the discrimination valid and the valid period setting means for validating the valid period. A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the predetermined signal has an invalidity judging means for judging the information judged by the signal judging means before the period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the valid period for which the discrimination is valid is set by the valid period setting means. Before the valid period is set by the valid period setting means, the information determined by the signal determining means for the predetermined signal is determined by the invalidity determining means.

  As a result, when the operating means is operated, the invalidity determining means makes the determination even when the operating means is operated before the validity period for determining that the operation is valid is set. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to determine that there is a habit of starting the operation of the operation means from the front.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine Q5 has a regulating means for regulating the standby by the effect executing means based on the information determined by the invalidation determining means being specific information.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q4, the waiting by the effect executing means is regulated by the regulating means based on the information determined by the invalidation determining means being specific information. If the information determined by the means is specific information (for example, the invalidity is not determined in a period before a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the start of the effective period), the regulation unit regulates the standby, so that the operation is performed. It decides in advance that there is a high possibility that the player will not operate the means continuously, and the specific effect is started by operating the operation means at the same timing without setting the effect means that waits for the specific effect. Thus, there is an effect that a more united effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the effect means has at least a plurality of movable members that can move within a predetermined range, and the effect execution means has at least two or more movable members of the plurality of movable members. A gaming machine Q6, which can be moved based on the first effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of movable members capable of moving at least within a predetermined range are provided as effecting means. At least two or more movable members of the plurality of movable members are moved by the effect executing means based on the first effect pattern.

  Thereby, it is possible to move a plurality of movable members by one operation, and there is an effect that a powerful effect can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic R group> (rewind control of a series of presentation modes by button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means And a production means capable of executing the production, and based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means, causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined first production pattern. In a gaming machine having a possible effect executing means, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the first signal is determined based on the predetermined signal being determined by the signal determining means. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it has an effect changing means for causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect in a second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operating means (effect button or the like), an accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the character effect drive effect), a new accessory effect effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect effect of the accessory driving effect that is not executed and is executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. On the basis of the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the effect executing means executes the specific effect by the effecting means capable of executing the effect in the predetermined first effect pattern.

  Then, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means, at least the first effect pattern is reversed in the opposite direction from the predetermined effect position of the first effect pattern based on the fact that the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal. It is changed by the effect changing unit so that the specific effect is executed by the effect executing unit in the second effect pattern that partially executes.

  As a result, when the specific effect is executed by the operation of the operation means in the first effect pattern, the specific effect is changed to the second effect pattern and is executed even if the operation means is further operated. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which there is no reaction to the operation of, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the second effect pattern is configured with an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the second effect pattern is constituted by an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the opposite direction, so the effect of the first effect pattern It can be executed by setting the data in the opposite direction, and there is an effect that different effects can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect varying means changes the first effect pattern in the opposite direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern that is being executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. A gaming machine R3, at least a part of which is executed as the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, in the opposite direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern which is executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means by the effect varying means. Since at least a part of the first effect pattern is executed as the second effect pattern, it is possible to smoothly connect to the second effect pattern at the timing when the operation means is operated, and to suppress a feeling of strangeness given to the player. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect varying unit, when the specific signal is determined by the signal determining unit when the specific effect is being executed in the second effect pattern, A gaming machine R4, characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the first effect pattern from an effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to an effect position executed in the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect varying means, when the predetermined effect is determined by the signal determining means when the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern. Is to execute the specific effect with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position executed with the second effect pattern, so that the first effect is performed according to the operation of the player. The second effect pattern corresponding to the rewinding of the effect pattern ends, and the first effect pattern in the forward direction is completed, and the execution direction of the first effect pattern can be switched by the operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the second effect pattern is set in a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in a reverse direction in an effect period of a predetermined specific period, and the effect variable The means specifies the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position where the second effect pattern ends, based on that the second effect pattern is executed for the specific period. A gaming machine R5, which is for performing an effect.

  The gaming machine R5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4. That is, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in the opposite direction in the effect period of the predetermined specific period, and the effect varying means sets the second effect pattern to the specific period. Since the specific effect is executed with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position at which the second effect pattern is finished based on the execution, the first effect pattern is more effective. There is an effect that it is possible to smoothly switch to the second effect pattern and provide an effect in which a feeling of strangeness is suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the effect execution means has an execution period determination means for determining an elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed, and the effect varying means is a determination result of the execution period determination means. A gaming machine R6, characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the elapsed period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means is determined by the execution period determining means. Since the effect varying means executes the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determining means, it is possible to automatically switch from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern. There is an effect that a player can be provided with a fresh production.

  In the gaming machine R6, the effect means is a movable means capable of moving in a predetermined range, and the effect execution means, as the specific effect, a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position. The movable means is caused to execute a reciprocating effect with respect to the effect position, and the effect varying means causes the specific effect to be directed from the first effect position to the second effect position by the execution period determining means. The gaming machine R7, which is configured to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern when it is determined that the effect is being executed.

  The gaming machine R7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R6. That is, the effect executing means causes the movable means to execute the effect of reciprocating between the predetermined first effect position and the second effect position different from the first effect position as the specific effect. The effect varying unit determines that the specific effect is the second effect pattern when the execution period determining unit determines that the specific effect is a period in which the effect is being performed from the first effect position to the second effect position. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determination means determines that the elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed has not passed a predetermined period, a variable regulation for restricting the execution of the effect varying means. A gaming machine R8 having means.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determination means determines that the elapsed period during which the specific effect is executed does not exceed the predetermined period, the effect is changed. Since the execution of the means is restricted by the variable restricting means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the effect pattern is frequently switched and the interest of the effect is impaired.

  In any one of the gaming machines R5 to R8, the effect execution means executes the specific effect for a plurality of effect means, and the effect varying means determines the execution period of the effect means. A gaming machine R9, characterized in that at least one of the effect means is caused to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on a determination result by the means.

  The gaming machine R9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines R5 to R8. That is, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means with respect to the plurality of effecting means. The effect varying means causes at least one effect means to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result by the execution period determining means of the plurality of effect means.

  Thereby, a plurality of effect means can be changed to the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determination means and can be executed, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R9, the effect executing means executes the specific effect to a plurality of the effecting means, and the effect changing means includes the second effect out of the plurality of effecting means. A gaming machine R10, characterized in that the specific effect is executed by the second effect pattern for the effect means having a short effect period executed as a pattern.

  The gaming machine R10 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines R1 to R9. That is, the effect executing means executes the specific effect to the plurality of effecting means, and the effect changing means to the effecting means having a short effect period executed as the second effect pattern among the plurality of effecting means. Since the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern, there is an effect that an invalid state when the operation means is operated can be suppressed.

<Characteristic S group> (Match a plurality of movable positions with movable non-execution timing according to the effect)
The production means capable of executing the production, the specific production execution means for causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined period, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means operated. A signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the above, a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, a plurality of movable members movable in a predetermined movable range, Movable means for moving at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means when the specific effect is being executed; The movable mode of the movable member that is moved when the effect elapsed period of the specific effect that is being executed when the predetermined signal is determined by the determination unit is within the specific elapsed period is variable. And a prohibition unit for prohibiting the movable unit from moving based on the signal determination unit discriminating the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded. A gaming machine S1 characterized by.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operating means (effect button or the like), an accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, if the decorative body is operated based on the operation of the operation means regardless of the elapsed production period, there is a problem in that the game becomes unclear and the player's interest cannot be improved. In addition, if all the plurality of ornaments are in the operating state, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button, etc.), the operation of the new ornament cannot be executed. There is a problem that the effect of the effect of operating the decorative body executed based on the operation of the means (effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in a predetermined period in the effect means capable of executing the effect. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means.

  When the specific effect is being executed, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit. When the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the movable mode changing means changes the movable mode of the movable member which is moved when the effect elapsed period of the specific effect executed is within the specific elapsed time. On the other hand, the prohibition means prohibits the movement of the movable means based on the fact that the signal determination means determines the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded.

  As a result, when the production elapsed period of the specific effect is within the specific elapsed period, the movable mode of the movable member is changed based on the operation of the operating device, while when the specific elapsed period is exceeded, the operation of the operating device is performed. Since the movable member is prohibited from moving, it is possible to effectively perform the effect of moving the movable member only within a specific elapsed period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sharp effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, the movable mode changing means sets the plurality of movable members to respective predetermined positions when the predetermined signal is judged by the signal judging means within the specific elapsed period. A gaming machine S2, which is movable by a movable means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1, the movable mode varying means predetermines a plurality of movable members when a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means within a specific elapsed period. Since it is to be moved to the respective predetermined positions by the movable means, it is possible to cause the movable member to perform a certain operation by operating the operation means within the specific performance period within the specific performance period. This has the effect of giving a novel impression to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means has at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminating means even after a predetermined period of time within the specific elapsed period. A game machine S3, characterized in that the game machine S3 is movable to a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means is based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminating means even after a predetermined period of time within the specific elapsed period. Since at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position, even a player with a low frequency of operating the operating means can effectively enjoy the specific effect. The effect is that you can do it.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, a determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result determined by the determination means. A gaming machine S4, comprising: a privilege granting means for granting, and the specific effect is a notification effect based on a determination result by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effect is produced. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the determination result determined by the determination unit being a specific determination result, a privilege advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting unit. The notification effect based on the determination result by the determination means is executed in the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to be interested in the notification effect executed in the specific effect and to increase the player's interest in the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S4, the notification effect is executed because the notification effect is executed within the predetermined period after the specified elapsed period has elapsed. There is an effect that it is possible to notify the player of the approaching execution of the notification effect by executing the effect by the movable member at the timing.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the movable means that has been moved is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means based on the prohibition being executed by the prohibiting means. A gaming machine S6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine S6, the movable means is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means based on the prohibition means performing the prohibition in addition to the effect of the gaming machines S1 to S6. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be informed easily that the effect using the movable member is completed.

<Characteristic T group> (Strokes can be changed by changing the output for driving by repeatedly hitting the button to high or low)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means And a movable member that is movable in a predetermined movable range, and a movable unit that moves the movable member based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating unit. In the above, based on the movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for varying the movable amount for moving the movable member in a unit period by the movable means, and the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means, A gaming machine T1 comprising: a selection means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like), the accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, since the operation mode of the ornament is monotonous, there is a problem that the effect effect by the accessory driving effect is deteriorated. Further, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the accessory driving effect), a new accessory driving effect is not executed. However, there is a problem in that the effect effect of the accessory drive effect executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the movable member is movable by the movable means, the movable member being movable in a predetermined movable range.

  The movable signal output means outputs a movable signal for varying the amount of movement of the movable means for moving the movable member in a unit period. The type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output unit is selected by the selection unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit.

  With this, the type of the movable signal is selected and the movable amount of the movable member is changed based on the operation of the operation unit, so that the movable mode of the movable member can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine T1 has an interval determination means for determining an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means, and the selection means has a predetermined interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination means. A gaming machine T2, characterized in that when the distance is equal to or smaller than the interval, a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than when the distance is equal to or larger than a predetermined interval is selected.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the interval at which the predetermined signal is judged by the signal judging means is judged by the interval judging means. When the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination means is less than or equal to the predetermined interval, the selection means selects a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than when the interval is greater than or equal to the predetermined interval.

  Thus, when the frequency of operation of the operating means is high, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the movable member is damaged by reducing the movable amount of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the selection means, even if the interval determined by the predetermined signal by the interval determination means is a predetermined interval or less, the movable signal having a large movable amount. A gaming machine T3 characterized in that it is for selecting.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the movable amount is large even if the interval determined by the interval determination means is a predetermined signal or less. Since a large movable signal is selected by the selection means, even if the operation frequency is high, a movable signal having a larger movable amount is selected when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the movable member becomes monotonous. Has the effect of suppressing

  In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. .

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. There is an effect that the movement control of can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine T4, the movable signal is such that the movable amount is increased by a signal having a high frequency, and the movable amount is reduced by a signal having a low frequency.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T4, the moving amount increases due to the high frequency signal, and the moving amount decreases due to the low frequency signal, so that the moving amount can be easily controlled. .

  Any one of the gaming machines T3 to T4 has a plurality of the movable members, the movable means capable of moving each of the plurality of movable members, and the movable signal output means, the signal determination means. When the predetermined signal is determined by, the gaming machine T6, which determines the movable member to be moved based on a preset movable condition and outputs the movable signal.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3 or T4, each of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable means, and when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, it is set in advance. Since the movable signal is output by the movable signal output means by determining the movable member to be moved based on the determined movable condition, there is an effect that the movable member can be easily controlled.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is composed of at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined electric power value.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is constituted by at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal constituted by a predetermined electric power value, so that the movable member can be controlled. The effect is that it can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine T7, the selection means has a first power value and a first power value as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. A second power value lower than a value is selected, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal determination means, the first power value and the second power value are A gaming machine T8 characterized by being selected alternately.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T7, the selecting means has the first power as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Value and a second power value lower than the first power value are selected, and the first power value and the second power value are satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal determining means. Since and are selected alternately, the movable amount of the movable member can be varied even when the operating means is operated continuously, and the movable member can be moved in various ways.

<Characteristic U group> (The solenoid drive power is changed at the start of drive and after drive to prevent heat generation)
At least a driving member that is drivable to a first position and a second position that is different from the first position, and at least the second position from the first position by supplying power to the driving member that is equal to or higher than a first power value. Driving means for driving to the position and driving the supplied power value from the second position to the first position when the supplied power value becomes equal to or lower than the second power value; and power supply for supplying power to the driving means. Means for driving the drive member from the first position to the second position, the power value supplied to the drive means by the power supply means is set to drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value. In a state in which the drive member is controlled between the first position and the second position, the electric power value supplied by the electric power supply means is less than or equal to the second electric power value and less than the drive start electric power. Supply power to control power value Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, by driving a solenoid, a movable body (an accessory or the like) is operated from a standby position to a predetermined operation position and held at the predetermined operation position (for example, , JP-A-2008-301906).

  In such a conventional game machine, the solenoid is driven with the same electric power when the movable body is operated from the standby position to the predetermined operation position and when it is held at the predetermined operation position. In this case, although the energy (electric power) required to hold the movable body at the predetermined operation position is smaller than that required to move the movable body from the standby position to the predetermined operation position, the movable body is operated from the standby position to the predetermined operation position. The movable body is held with the same energy (electric power) as when it is moved to the position. As a result, when the holding time of the movable body becomes long, energy (electric power) is unnecessarily supplied to the solenoid, which causes problems such as an increase in power consumption and heat generation / damage of the solenoid.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the driving member is driven from the first position to the second position by supplying the driving device with the power of the first power value or more, and the power supplied to the driving device. The drive member is driven from the second position to the first position when the value is less than or equal to the second power value. When the driving of the driving member is started from the first position to the second position by the power supply control means, the power value supplied from the power supply means to the driving means is controlled to the driving start power equal to or higher than the first power value. In the state where the drive member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied from the power supply means is controlled to a power value that is equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the drive start power.

  As a result, when the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position, the drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value at which the drive member is driven from the first position to the second position is used. Is supplied to. On the other hand, in the state where the drive member is driven between the first position and the second position, a power value that is not less than the second power value and is less than the drive start power at which the drive member is not driven to the first position is transmitted to the drive means. Supplied. Therefore, the driving member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the driving member can be held at the second position with less electric power than the electric power required for driving the driving member, thereby reducing power consumption. effective.

  The gaming machine U1 is provided with a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and an adding means that can give a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. By driving the drive member to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and by driving the drive member to the second position, The game machine U2 is characterized in that it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than when the drive member is driven to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined game value is given by the giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. The ball entering means makes it difficult to enter the ball by driving the driving member to the first position, and facilitates entering the ball by driving the driving member to the second position. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether the drive member is driven to the first position or the second position, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the power supply means has first power supply means for supplying the drive start power to the drive means, and less than the drive start power of the second power value or more to the drive means. A second power supply means for supplying a power value, wherein the power supply control means supplies the first power supply when starting driving the driving member from the first position to the second position. Means to supply electric power to the driving means, and when the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the second electric power supplying means supplies electric power to the driving means. A gaming machine U3 characterized by being controlled so as to supply.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are produced. That is, the power supply means includes a first power supply means for supplying drive start power to the drive means and a second power supply for supplying the drive means with a power value equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the drive start power. And means. When starting driving the drive member from the first position to the second position, power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the drive unit by the supply power control unit, and the drive member is provided between the first position and the second position. Is driven, the power supply control means supplies power from the second power supply means to the drive means. Accordingly, the power supply control means may control the power supply to the drive means so as to select the power supply from either the first power supply means or the second power supply means depending on the case. The effect is that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3, the supply power control means supplies power from the first power supply means to the drive means when the holding period for holding the drive member at the second position is shorter than a predetermined period. After that, the power supplied to the drive means is controlled to a power value equal to or lower than the second power value without controlling the second power supply means to supply power to the drive means. A gaming machine U4 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U3, when the holding period for holding the driving member at the second position is shorter than the predetermined period, the supply power control means causes the driving means to drive the first power supply means. After the electric power is supplied to the driving means, the electric power supplied to the driving means becomes the electric power value equal to or lower than the second electric power value without being supplied from the second electric power supplying means to the driving means. With this, the control of supplying the electric power from the second electric power supply unit to the drive unit can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the supply power control means controls the first power supply means to supply power to the drive means, and then supplies power from the second power supply means to the drive means. In this case, before the second power supply means supplies power to the drive means, the first power supply means does not supply power to the drive power means. Characteristic game machine U5.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3 or U4, after the power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means, the first power supply means to the drive power means. After the electric power is no longer supplied, the electric power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the simultaneous supply of power to the driving means from the first power supply means and the second power supply means, and to prevent (suppress) the drive means from being destroyed. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the supply power control means outputs a command signal for supplying power from the first power supply means to the drive means, and the first instruction means. A first supply control means for controlling the supply of electric power from the first electric power supply means to the drive means, and a second electric power supply means for supplying electric power to the drive means. Second instruction control means for outputting an instruction signal; second supply control means for controlling the supply of electric power from the second power supply means to the driving means based on the instruction signal from the second instruction means; A game characterized by comprising timing instruction means for instructing control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means based on instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means. U6.

  According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U3 to U5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the supply power control means controls the supply of electric power from the first power supply means to the drive means based on the instruction signal from the first instruction means, and the instruction from the second instruction means. Second supply control means for controlling the supply of electric power from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the signal, and the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is timing. Instructed by the instruction means. Thus, even if the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are not synchronized (shifted), the first supply control means and the second supply control means are instructed by the timing instruction means. The control timing can be synchronized, and the electric power can be supplied to the drive means at an appropriate timing.

  In the gaming machine U6, the timing instructing means is for instructing a control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means at every predetermined cycle.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U6, the timing instruction means instructs the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means every predetermined period. Thus, the control timing can be instructed to the first supply control means and the second supply control means at every predetermined cycle, so that the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be executed without delaying more than the predetermined cycle. The effect is that you can do it.

  In the gaming machine U6 or U7, a clear signal output means for outputting a clear signal for instructing to forcibly turn off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means, and the clear signal output means A gaming machine U8, comprising: a clearing means for forcibly turning off the instruction signals of the first instructing means and the second instructing means based on receiving the clear signal.

  According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the playing of the gaming machine U6 or U7, the following effects are played. That is, the clear signal is outputted from the clear signal output means, and the clear signal is received by the clear means, whereby the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are forcibly turned off. Thereby, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means can be turned off collectively, and the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be stopped together. is there.

  The gaming machine U9 is provided with a noise removing means capable of removing noise of a signal output from the clear signal means to the clearing means.

  According to the gaming machine U9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U8, the noise of the signal output from the clear signal means to the clearing means can be removed by the noise removing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the clearing means from malfunctioning due to noise and thereby erroneously stopping the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means.

  In any of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the first supply control means transfers the first power supply means to the drive means when the voltage of the instruction signal from the first instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage. When the voltage of the instruction signal from the second instructing means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the second supply control means is in a conductive state in which the second electric power is supplied from the second power supplying means. A game machine U10, which is in a conductive state in which electric power is supplied to the drive means.

  According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the following effect is produced. That is, when the first supply control means receives the first instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the first supply control means is rendered conductive, and the power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means. To be done. Further, when the second supply control means receives the second instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the second supply control means is rendered conductive, and the power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. To be done. With this, the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be controlled by the voltage, so that there is an effect that the electric power required for the control for supplying the electric power to the driving means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U10, the supply power control means operates by being supplied with power in a predetermined range, and control power supply means for supplying power to the supply power control means and its supply. A noise removal means capable of removing noise of power supplied from the means to the supply power control means, and a gaming machine U11.

  According to the game machine U11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U10, the following effect is achieved. That is, noise of the power supplied from the control power supply means is removed by the noise removal means with respect to the supply power control means that operates by being supplied with power in a predetermined range. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the destruction of the power supply control means by supplying the power supply control means with power in a predetermined range or more. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the supply power control unit from malfunctioning due to the supply of power in the predetermined range to the supply power control unit due to noise.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U11, the drive means generates a magnetic force when power is supplied, and a coil capable of driving the drive member, and one end of the coil to the power supply means. And a degauss line connected in parallel to the coil to the power line, the degauss line extending from the other end side of the coil to the one end side. A gaming machine U12, characterized by comprising rectifying means for rectifying an electric current in a heading direction.

  According to the gaming machine U12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the games U1 to U11, the following effect is produced. By supplying electric power to the coil of the driving means, a magnetic force is generated and the driving member is driven. As a power supply line for the driving means, one end of the coil is connected to the power supply means and the other end is grounded, and a degaussing line is connected to the power supply line in parallel with the coil. The current flowing through the degaussing line is rectified by the rectifying means in the direction from the other end side to the one end side of the coil. As a result, when power is supplied from the power supply means, power is supplied to the coil without current flowing through the degaussing line, and magnetic force is generated in the coil. On the other hand, when the power supply to the coil is cut off, the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil can be consumed as electric power through the degaussing line, and the supplied power control means is damaged by the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil. The effect is that it can be prevented (suppressed).

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U12, the power supply means includes a second power supply means for supplying a power value equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the drive start power, and the second power supply means. Third power supply means for supplying a power value that becomes the drive start power in total with the supplied power value, wherein the power supply control means moves the drive member from the first position to the first position. When starting driving to the second position, control is performed so that electric power is supplied to the driving unit from both the second power supply unit and the third supply unit, and the first position and the second position are controlled. A gaming machine U13, characterized in that, while the drive member is being driven, the second power supply means is controlled to supply power to the drive means.

  According to the game machine U13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U12, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second power supply means of the power supply means supplies a power value that is equal to or higher than the second power value and is lower than the drive start power to the drive means, and the third power supply means and the second power supply means of the power supply means are connected. A power value that is the drive start power in total is supplied to the drive means. When the driving of the drive member from the first position to the second position is started by the supply power control means, power is supplied to the drive means from both the second power supply means and the third power supply means, and the first position The electric power is supplied from the second electric power supplying means to the driving means in a state where the driving member is driven between the second position and the second position. Thereby, the drive member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the drive member can be held at the second position with less electric power than the electric power required for the driving, and the power consumption can be reduced. There is an effect.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the embodiments or the control examples described above, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the above-described embodiments or control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of the embodiments or the control examples described above, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
22 Frame buttons (operation means)
113 voice lamp control device (specific effect execution means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a player operates an operation unit (effect button or the like) to move an ornament from a standby position to a predetermined operation position ( Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-097827, A

  However, there was a demand for further interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the exemplified problems like the above, and an object that you increase interest for games.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a viable demonstration execution means an effect, and Yu technique's operation available-operating means, the effect when the operating means is operated The effect can be set to be executed in the first pattern as long as it can be executed in a predetermined mode, and the effect is executed in the predetermined mode when the operation means is operated. If it is impossible, a production control means that can be set to execute the production in a second pattern different from the first pattern until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the production execution means. Is capable of executing a plurality of the effects, and is configured to be able to execute a specific effect for an arbitrary effect among the plurality of effects based on the operation of the operation means .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine, comprising: a viable demonstration execution means an effect, execution and Yu technique's operation available-operating means, the effect when the operating means is operated in a predetermined manner If it is possible to perform, it is possible to set to execute the effect in the first pattern, and it is impossible to execute the effect in the predetermined mode when the operation means is operated. If it is a state, it has a production control means that can be set to execute the production in a second pattern different from the first pattern until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the production execution means is a plurality of the above. The effect can be executed, and the specific effect can be executed for an arbitrary effect of a plurality of effects based on the operation of the operation means . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect, there is an effect that it upward toward the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rocking motion unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rocking motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit. (A) is a front view of the swing motion unit, (b) is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and (c) is a bottom view of the swing motion unit. (A) to (d) are partial front enlarged views of the swing motion unit on the base end side of the arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st slide operation unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG.26 (a). It is a front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a reversing operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a reversing operation unit. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit, FIG. 32B is a partial sectional view of the reversing operation unit taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit along the line XXXIIc-XXXIIc, and FIG. 32D is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit along the line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit, and (d) to (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit. It is a partial side view of a reflection member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. (A)-(c) is a front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is a partial rear view of a second slide operation unit. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a drive gear, a transmission device, and an L-shaped lever. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st slide operation unit, (b) is a rear view of a 1st slide operation unit. (A)-(c) is a partial front view of a 2nd slide operation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a first variable winning device. (A) is a sectional view of a first variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of 1st variable winning a prize device. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol in the first control example, and (b) is a main controller in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM of FIG. 4C, and FIG. 6C is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the first control example. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the long press production lottery table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. (A)-(b) is an example of the notification mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A)-(b) is an example of the long press effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the ending processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the long press production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the display control. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp controller in the second control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp controller in the second control example. It is a block diagram shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a capture effect lottery table. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode of the capture effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flow chart which showed SW production processing performed by MPU in a display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flow chart which showed SW production display setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows time saving medium fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode of the temporary stop production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a flow chart which shows display setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol temporary stop setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. It is a partially enlarged view of a game board 13 in a fifth control example. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of V winning a prize device in the example of the 5th control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in a 5th example of control. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in a 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device in a fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a fifth control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in a 5th control example, (b) is the big hit determination in the 1st random number counter C1 and a 1st special symbol in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with a value typically, (c) showed the correspondence with the big hit determination value in the 1st random number counter C1 and the 2nd special symbol in a 5th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in the 5th control example, and the hit in a normal design. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a first hit type counter C2 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with the jackpot classification in (c), and the correspondence between the jackpot classification in the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the 2nd special symbol in a 5th control example is shown typically. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a small hit type counter C5 and the first special symbol in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship with a hit classification typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship between the small hit classification counter C5 and the small hit classification in a 2nd special symbol. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of disengagement (normal) in a 5th control example, (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type in the time saving in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of ROM in the audio lamp controller in a 5th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM in the audio lamp controller in a 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram which showed the game flow in the example of a 5th control typically. (A) is a time chart showing from the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening to the occurrence of a big hit based on the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch in the fifth control example, and (b) is the fifth control It is the time chart which showed from the winning of the game ball to the 2nd winning a prize mouth in the example to the occurrence of the big hit due to the special design. (A) is a display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 5th control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 unchanged state among special figure 2 game states, (b) Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing a special figure 2 changing state in the special figure 2 game state. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the small hitting game state of the special figure 2 game state, and (b) is the 5 is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example 5, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a jackpot due to the passage of a game ball to the V winning switch has occurred in the special figure 2 game state. Is. (A) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing the state at the time of jackpot start in the special figure 2 game state, Is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic diagram showing that, in the special figure 2 game state, a time saving game is given after a big hit, c) is a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and is a schematic showing that, in the special figure 2 game state, it is in a state of transitioning to the special figure 1 game state after a big hit. It is a figure. 125A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a jackpot D is generated on the display screen displayed at the timing of FIG. 125B, and FIG. 125B is the timing of FIG. 125B. It is a display screen displayed, and is a schematic diagram showing a state departure with a jackpot C in the hold. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit start setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control in the example of the 5th control. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows a round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process according to the present invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows the 3V production | generation command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows 2V production command processing. It is a flow chart which shows V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control in the example of the 5th control. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the modification in the example of 5th control. It is a perspective expansion view of the detour member in the sixth control example. It is a rear view of a part of the first variable winning a prize device in the sixth control example. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the flow path opening device in the 6th control example. (A) to (c) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing the execution system of the continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of a display mode of a continuous chance effect. (A) and (b) in the seventh control example are schematic diagrams schematically showing an example of a display mode of a continuous chance effect. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control unit in a seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in a main control unit in a seventh control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the correspondence of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of a big hit in the 7th control example, and (b) is a deviation (normal) in the 7th control example. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type in FIG. 5, and FIG. 7C is a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the seventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous chance frequency table at the time of a hit in the 7th control example, (b) shows the content of the continuous chance frequency table at the time of a miss in the 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the number-of-latency lottery table in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 7th control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the posterior sign setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the seventh control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the example of an 8th control. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of ROM in the main controller in an 8th control example, (b) is a model which shows the content of the 1st hit classification table in an 8th control example typically It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control apparatus in the example of 8th control. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability variation switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. (A) and (b) are the gaming state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability variation switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is continuously executed. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows external output processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 8th control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 9th control example. (A) and (b) show the relationship between the game state, the passing state of the game ball to the probability variation switch, and the output of each terminal of the external output terminal board when the jackpot game in the eighth control example is executed. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 9th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A in the 10th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which showed the accessory B in the 10th control example typically. (C) is a schematic diagram which showed the accessory C in the 10th control example typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the arrangement of the accessory in the 10th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory operation | movement in the 10th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the standby position of the accessory A in a 10th control example. (B) is a figure showing operation of a normal drive pattern of accessory A in the 10th control example. (C) is a figure showing operation of the shortening drive pattern of accessory A in the 10th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 10th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated hit production in a 10th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous hit production selection table in the 10th control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the operation scenario table in the 10th control example typically. Is. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory A scenario table in a 10th control example, (b) shows the content of the accessory B scenario table in a 10th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram which was, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the accessory C scenario table in a 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the button timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing an accessory B operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a flow chart in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process performed by MPU. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure showing operation of delay processing in the 11th example of control. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button continuous hit production in the 11th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the delay timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A action setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 11th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the repetitive operation | movement in the 12th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button repeated hit production in a 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 12th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the accessory B operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp controller in the twelfth control example, and (b) is in the voice lamp controller in the twelfth control example. 5 is a flowchart showing an accessory C operation setting process 3 executed by the MPU of FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed operation | movement of the accessory in the 13th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button continuous hit production in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory B operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 13th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory C operation setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 13th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the weak motion of the accessory in the 14th control example. (B) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the strong motion of the accessory in the 14th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the accessory operation | movement in the button continuous hit production in a 14th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the drive motor in detail in the 14th control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example, (b) shows the structure of RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 2nd operation scenario table in the 14th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the accessory A 2nd scenario table in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit button process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interval timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory A operation | movement setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory operation | movement process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 15th control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed operation | movement of the universal solenoid in the 15th control example. It is a timing chart which showed the operation content of the universal solenoid in the 15th example of control. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 15th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the usual symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the universal electric power operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the universal electric switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric power timer subtraction process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 15th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the solenoid drive circuit in the modification of the 15th control example. (B) is a timing chart showing an output signal in a modified example of the fifteenth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the operation | movement of the universal electric power (electric accessory) 640a in the modification of the 15th control example. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of operation | movement of a driven accessory.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 42, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) in front of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape with an upper surface protruding and protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, a display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is shown, and others are shown). Other (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start The mouth (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged from the front side to the rear surface side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole formed and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and the game area is launched). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part.

  The first symbol display device 37A, 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display device is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are those that display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while on the other hand, when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of positive change, time saving, or normal by the lighting state, or indicates whether it is changing or not by the lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with a lighting state, and the number of holding balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also determines the type of big hit. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. .

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after the 15 round jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state where the probability of jackpot is not in progress and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability change. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is improved).

  During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a long time compared to the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the shortening of the working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

  It should be noted that, during the probability change or the shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display, and a second symbol is variably displayed with the passage of a ball of a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) configured by the LED is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the first The decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device has a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. A variable display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened).

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric winning object 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or the shortening, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

  Ordinary symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board at the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. Normally, when the ball passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second symbol hit lottery is performed. After the winning lottery, variably displayed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol for variable display.

  The number of passages through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 of the sphere is reserved up to 4 times in total, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. It is also lit up (not shown). Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. Alternatively, a part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 640 are the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol which is carried out upon the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened during the probability change and the shortening of time is longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot will be selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize at the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probability change or shortening of time, by passing the ball through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate). It is more advantageous for the player to aim at the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning port 640 as well as passing the electric gear 67 through to open the electric accessory.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the way the ball is hit can be changed for the player, and the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a jackpot stop symbol and While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to be displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening / closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And). The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more plural pieces (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. It is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the game area that have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

  On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as the movable member 310) is disposed above the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive devices 340, 464, 560 and drive motors 441, 771, 772, 773, 774.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 42. First, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the second slide operation unit 700 is mounted on the rear case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 6) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

  In the operation unit 200, an oscillating operation unit 300, a first slide operation unit 400, a reversing operation unit 500, a decoration operation unit 600, and a second slide operation unit 700 are housed in the inner space of the rear case 210. Composed as a unit.

  Specifically, the second slide operation unit 700 is formed with an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is in contact with the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 while being in contact with the outer wall portion 212. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 in a manner surrounded by (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5) of the second slide operation unit 700, a rectangular opening is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 in a front view.

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the swing motion unit 300, the first slide motion unit 400, the reversal motion unit 500, and the decoration unit 600 are stacked on the front side of the second slide motion unit 700. It is disposed and housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second slide operation unit 700) and another operation unit (for example, the first slide operation unit 400) are stacked on the front side in a stacked state. Since it is provided, the predetermined operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit in the front view.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, the predetermined operation unit It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the necessary portion of the above, and to shield the other portion from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, an outline of operation modes of the swing operation unit 300, the first slide operation unit 400, and the second slide operation unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. Note that, in FIG. 8, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 are arranged at the projecting position, and in FIG. 9, the tilting member 460 and the hanging member 430 (FIG. 22) of the first slide motion unit 400. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit are disposed in the projecting position, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing motion unit 300 swings to an arm member 320 whose base end side is swingably supported and a swing end side which is the opposite side of the arm member 320 from the base end side. A standing member 330 that is pivotally supported is provided, and the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 320 is lifted, and the standing member 330 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first slide operation unit 400 swings between a suspension member 430 (see FIG. 22) that is slidably moved downward and a bending arm 433 (see FIG. 22) of the suspension member 430. A tilting member 460 movably supported is provided, and the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are operated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the suspension member 430 and the tilting member 460 are retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 9, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the end of the sliding direction (left side), and the tilting member 460 is at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81). , See FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, the second slide operation unit 700 includes a pair of slide members 720 and 740 that are slidably movable, and the slide members 720 and 740 are retracted as shown in FIG. It operates between the position and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of first slide members 720 are retracted to the outside of the opening 211 a of the rear case 210, and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged above and below the opening 211 a of the rear case 210. It is evacuated to the outside and invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 10, each slide member 720, 740 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2).

  The second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in a front view when the slide members 720 and 740 are projected.

  As will be described later, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped reflecting member 520 (see FIG. 28), and the reflecting member 520 is formed so as to be able to reverse (turn over) the surface visually recognized by the player. It The reversing operation unit 500 does not have a member protruding to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third pattern display device 81) as provided in the other operation units 300, 400 and 700. Therefore, the reversing operation unit 500 is always operated to the left of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  Each of these operating units 300 to 700 is formed so as to be able to operate independently of each other, and as described above, they are arranged in a superposed (stacked) state. In the case where the layers are arranged in different layers, the operation members can be operated at the same time even if the operation members project inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, not only each of the operation units 300 to 700 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The operation units 300 to 600 are arranged in the same layer, and the operation units 300 to 600 and the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged in different layers (see FIG. 7).

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In addition, in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged at the projecting position, and the respective slide members 720, 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are arranged at the projecting position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the first slide operation unit 400 and the third symbol display A gap for the second slide operation unit 700 is formed between the device 81 and the device 81. Therefore, when only the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 is arranged in the projecting position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible in a front view. However, it is difficult to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap in an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front to the left and right).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11, the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide operation unit 700 are both arranged at the projecting position, so that the player The slide members 720 and 740 can fill the gaps that are viewed from the diagonal direction. As a result, a part of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the standing member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 is arranged at the projecting position, and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide motion unit 700 are arranged at the projecting position.

  Here, since the second slide operation unit 700 is arranged between the swing motion unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the swing motion unit 300 and the third symbol display device 81. A gap corresponding to the second slide operation unit 700 is formed between and. Therefore, when only the standing member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 is arranged at the projecting position, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded so as not to be visible in a front view. Although it is possible, it is difficult to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 by looking through the gap from an oblique direction (for example, a direction inclined from the front view to the left and right directions).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the standing member 330 of the swing motion unit 300 and the slide members 720 and 740 of the second slide motion unit 700 are both arranged at the projecting position, so that the player The slide members 720 and 740 can fill the gaps that are viewed obliquely. As a result, a part of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be reliably shielded from being visually recognized, and the effect of the operation unit 200 can be improved.

  The swing motion unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are front perspective views of the swing motion unit 300. Note that in FIG. 13A, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 13B, the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 are arranged at the extended position.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the arm member 320 of the swing motion unit 300 is swung about the swing shaft 312, and the posture of the standing member 330 relative to the arm member 320 is changed before and after the swing (extension. Stand up toward the exit position). Next, the overall configuration of the swing motion unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the swing motion unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the swing motion unit 300 includes a base member 310 formed in a plate shape, an arm member 320 pivotally supported on the base end side of the base member 310, and an arm member 320 thereof. The standing member 330 that is internally supported by the swing end, which is the end opposite to the base end of the base member 310, and the drive device that is disposed on the back surface of the lower right part of the base member 310 in a front view (see FIG. 14). 340, a transmission device 350 that is meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 and is connected to the arm member 320, a torsion spring 360 that applies an urging force to the arm member 320, and a lower right front view of the base member 310. And a cover member 370 attached to the front surface of the main body.

  The base member 310 is a member that matches the thickness direction and the front-rear direction and serves as a skeleton of the swing motion unit 300, and is fixed to the fitting hole 311 that is bored in the thickness direction and the fitting hole 311. A column-shaped swing shaft 312, a transmission shaft 313 protruding in the thickness direction below the fitting hole 311, a drive gear insertion hole 314 formed adjacent to the transmission shaft 313, and a fitting hole. A guide hole 315, which is a pair of elongated holes extending concentrically with 311 and is formed on the left side of the guide hole 315 in a front view (see FIG. 14), and is bent to the opposite side of the guide hole 315. A standing hole 316 that is a long hole that is extended is provided, and a hook portion 317 that protrudes in a hook shape on the front side on the right side of the fitting hole 311 in a front view.

  The arm member 320 is a member for projecting the swing motion unit 330 inward of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210, and includes a main body 321 formed in the shape of a long plate and its main body 321. A cylindrical tubular portion 322 which is penetrated and which is arranged on the proximal end side of the main body portion 321; and a sliding ring portion 323 which is opened on the swinging end side of the main body portion 321 in the same direction as the tubular portion 322, A plate-shaped front contact portion 324 that is arranged in a raised manner on the front side of the main body portion 321, a long-hole release hole 325 that extends along a straight line radially drawn from the tubular portion 322, and a main body. A pair of sliding portions 326 formed on the rear surface side of the portion 321 and protruding toward the base member 310, and the cylindrical portion 322 protruding toward the front surface in the front view (see FIG. 14) left side. And a projecting portion 327.

  The tubular portion 322 is a portion that is externally fitted and supported by the swing shaft 312 of the base member 310. That is, the arm member 310 is swung with the tubular portion 322 pivotally supported by the swing shaft 312 as a fulcrum.

  The sliding ring portion 323 is a portion that internally supports the upright member 330. It has a large diameter and suppresses the wobbling of the standing member 330.

  The front contact portion 324 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 321 near the base end side, and is not fastened near the swing end side. Therefore, in the state where a gap is formed between the front abutting section 324 and the main body section 321, and the arm member 320 is disposed in the retracted position, the portion of the rising member 330 on the projecting end side is the front abutting section 324 and the main body section. It is housed in the gap between the two and 321 (see FIG. 16).

  The release hole 325 is a long hole that is connected to the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350, and acts to regulate the swing of the arm member 320 depending on the positional relationship between the transmission device 350, the tubular portion 322, and the release hole 325. The holes will be described later in detail.

  Since the pair of sliding portions 326 are respectively inserted into the pair of guide holes 315 of the base member, the pair of sliding portions 326 may slide in the pair of guide holes 315 while the arm member 320 swings. Thus, the rattling of the arm member 320 is suppressed and the swing of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Since the ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the sliding portion 326, the sliding portion 326 is prevented from falling off the guide hole 315 and the swinging operation of the arm member 320 is stabilized. Can be made.

  The protruding portion 327 is a portion to which the moving end side arm portion 362 of the torsion spring 360 is locked, and a portion to which the biasing force of the torsion spring 360 is transmitted.

  The standing member 330 is a member arranged on the front side of the opening 211a (see FIG. 5) of the rear case 210 by swinging the arm member 320 in the ascending direction, and includes a plate-shaped main body 331 and its main body. A protruding ring portion 332 protruding in a large-diameter ring shape from the back surface side of 331, a variable sliding portion 333 protruding toward the rear surface at the base end side, and a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protruding ring portion 332. And a retaining portion 334 that is formed into a disc shape and is fastened and fixed to the changing sliding portion 333.

  The main body portion 331 is formed in an elliptical plate shape having a major axis direction D1 (see FIG. 16) and a minor axis direction D2 (see FIG. 16).

  The overhang ring portion 332 is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Therefore, in the standing member 330, the outer side surface of the overhanging ring portion 332 abuts the inner side surface of the sliding ring portion 323 in a wide range (large area), and is pivotally supported. Therefore, even when the large standing member 330 is pivotally supported at one place, wobbling of the standing member 330 due to the swing of the arm member 320 can be suppressed.

  The changing sliding portion 333 is a portion that is inserted into the upright hole 316 of the base member 310 and has a role of changing the posture of the upright member 330 as the arm member 320 is swung, but the details will be described later. Since the ring-shaped collar member is rotatably fastened and fixed to the tip of the changing sliding portion 333, the changing sliding portion 333 is prevented from falling off the upright hole 316 and the swinging movement of the arm member 320 is prevented. Can be stabilized.

  The retaining portion 334 is formed with an outer shape that is slightly larger than the inner diameter of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320, is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 331 of the standing member 330, and the rear surface of the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Abut on the side. Therefore, the upright member 330 can be formed so as not to be pulled out from the arm member 320 by the retaining portion 334.

  The drive device 340 is a motor that is disposed on the back side of the base member 310 and drives the arm member 320, and includes a drive gear 341 that is rotationally driven, and the drive gear 341 is a drive gear insertion hole of the base member 310. It is disposed on the front side of the base member 310 through the hole 314 (see FIG. 20).

  The transmission device 350 is a member to which the driving force of the drive device 340 is first transmitted, and is pivotally supported on the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310 at the base end side and meshed with the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340. It Further, the swing end, which is the end opposite to the base end, is provided with a restriction slide portion 351 that is provided so as to project toward the front side.

  The regulation sliding portion 351 is inserted into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320, and the regulation sliding portion 351 slides into the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 during the swinging operation of the arm member 320. Further, especially when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340 transmitted through the transmission device 350.

  The torsion spring 360 is an elastic spring that serves as a power source when the arm member 320 swings, particularly when the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position, and is attached to the hook portion 317 of the base member 310. A base end side arm portion 361 supported (pressed downward) and a moving end side arm portion 362 supported (pressed downward) by the protruding portion 327 of the arm member 320 are provided.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, the swing operation of the swing operation unit 300 will be described. 16 (a), 17 (a) and 18 (a) are front views of the swing motion unit 300 showing the swing motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series, 16 (b), 17 (b) and 18 (b) are rear views of the swing motion unit 300 showing the swing motion of the arm member 320 and the posture change of the standing member 330 in time series. Note that the state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position in FIG. 16 and the state in which the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at the point where the curvature of the standing hole 316 changes in FIG. In FIG. 18, a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the standing member 330 takes a posture in which the major axis direction D1 (horizontal direction in FIG. 16) is tilted horizontally. At this time, the portion of the standing member 330 on the projecting end side is housed between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutting portion 324.

  That is, in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the standing member 330 can be shielded from the player by utilizing the space required to shield the arm member 320 from the player. Therefore, the limited space outside the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used.

  Further, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 315, and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 is arranged at the lower end of the standing hole 316. Accordingly, the pair of sliding portions 326 and the changing sliding portion 333 can function as stoppers when the arm member 320 is swung downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the arm member 320 is swung toward the projecting position, the standing member 330 is changed in posture such that the major axis direction D1 is oriented in the vertical direction (standing posture).

  The dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 of the base member 310 (wall surface formed in the thickness direction of the base member 310) along the thickness direction is made larger near the upper end than near the lower end of the guide hole 315. It Then, in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. That is, the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end thereof. In the present embodiment, the formed gap is formed so as to gradually change.

  The gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is larger near the lower end of the guide hole 315 than near the upper end thereof. Therefore, the resistance that the arm member 320 receives from the guide hole 315 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed, and the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured.

  In the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is smaller than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. It is formed with a slightly shorter size (the length of the sliding portion 326 and the plate thickness of the base member 310 are formed to be substantially equal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the arm member 320 arranged near the upper end of the guide hole 315 from wobbling in the thickness direction of the base member 310.

  In the present embodiment, the standing member 330 is arranged above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320 in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the arm member 320 leans forward due to the weight of the standing member 330 (falls toward the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18A), the sliding portion 326 serves as a fulcrum of the forward lean. Here, the dimension (plate thickness) of the wall surface of the guide hole 315 in the thickness direction of the base member 310 is formed to be slightly shorter than the length of the sliding portion 326 sandwiched between the main body portion 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be brought into contact with and supported by the surface of the base member 310, and the resistance force of the arm member 320 against tilting forward can be improved.

  Here, the standing hole 316 includes a posture changing portion 316a formed near the lower end and a concentric circle portion 316b formed near the upper end.

  The posture changing portion 316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the cylindrical portion 322 (see FIG. 14) which is the swing shaft of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the posture changing portion 316a, the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the magnitude of the swing angle of the arm member 320 becomes maximum. This is because the posture changing unit 316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement trajectory of the sliding ring unit 323.

  Accordingly, the posture change of the standing member 330 can be completed within a short period of time from the start, and the posture change between the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be reduced when the player visually recognizes the standing member 330. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of visually confirming the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as one body at the extended position while suppressing the vertical shielding space of the standing member 330 at the retracted position.

  Further, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the resistance of the upright member 330 is suppressed. That is, when the standing member 330 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction in which the changing sliding portion 333 is rotated about the tubular portion 322 is orthogonal to the posture changing portion 316a. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position, the work performed by the rotational force centering on the tubular portion 322 on the changing sliding portion 333 becomes zero (force × distance = 0). Therefore, the resistance given to the arm member 320 at the time of starting from the retracted position can be suppressed. Thereby, the high speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured.

  The concentric circle portion 316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed in a direction along a circle around the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle portion 316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained. As a result, the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 can be visually recognized as one body, and an effect of performing the standing member 330 and the arm member 320 as one body can be easily realized.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position, the pair of sliding portions 326 of the arm member 320 are arranged at the upper end of the guide hole 315 and the changing sliding portion of the standing member 330 is arranged. 333 is arranged at the upper end of the standing hole 316. Thereby, when the arm member 320 is swung upward, the pair of sliding portions 326 can function as stoppers. In particular, since the arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 360, as will be described later, the necessity of a stopper at the end is greater than when driving by a motor or the like. Further, since the sliding portions 326 are formed in a pair, the force generated when the sliding portions 326 function as a stopper can be dispersed. Thereby, the durability of the sliding portion 326 can be improved.

  The changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 can function as a stopper, but since the upright member 330 is a member pivotally supported by the arm member 320, a strength problem occurs. On the other hand, since the pair of sliding portions 326 are formed integrally with the arm member 320, they have sufficient strength. More suitable for use as a stopper.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position, the projecting end side (upper side in FIG. 18) of the upright member 330 projects above the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320. Formed. Therefore, even if the swinging angle of the arm member 320 is reduced, it is possible to ensure the action of projecting the standing member 330 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and swinging the arm member 320. The degree of freedom in designing the moving angle can be improved.

  In addition, since the moving distance of the rising member 330 on the projecting end side can be kept large while keeping the swing angle of the arm member 320 small, the effect of increasing the moving speed of the standing member 330 can be improved. it can. This effect becomes remarkable in the vicinity of the retracted position where the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing of the arm member 320 is severe (see FIG. 16), and therefore the effect of increasing the speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 is remarkable. Can be

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a state immediately before the standing member 330 is housed between the arm member 320 and the front abutting portion 324 will be described. 19A is a front view of the rocking motion unit 300, FIG. 19B is a rear view of the rocking motion unit 300, and FIG. 19C is a bottom view of the rocking motion unit 300. It is a figure. 19A to 19C show a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at an intermediate position between the extended position and the retracted position. Specifically, the arm member is extended to the extended position. It is illustrated that the protruding end side of the standing member 330 starts to be housed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the front abutting part 324 when swung from the retracted position to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 19C, the front contact portion 324 is disposed on the front side of the standing member 330 (upper side in FIG. 19C). As a result, even when the standing member 330 swings around the sliding ring portion 323 as a fulcrum when the arm member 320 swings (swings in the vertical direction in FIG. 19C), the standing member 330 contacts the front abutting portion 324. The wobbling of the standing member 330 can be suppressed.

  Here, the position A where the standing member 330 and the front contact portion 324 of the arm member 320 start to overlap in a front view is higher than the lower edge B of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. Is formed. Therefore, when the arm member 320 is swung from the projecting position to the retracted position, the wobbling of the standing member 330 becomes large (the stage arranged inside the display area P of the third symbol display device 81). Thus, the loci of movement of the standing member 330 and the front abutting portion 324 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the standing member 330 can be brought into contact with the front abutting portion 324 of the arm member 320 to suppress wobbling of the standing member 330. it can.

  20A to 20D are diagrams for explaining a process of swinging the arm member 320 of the swinging motion unit 300 from the retracted position to the extended position in a time series. It is a partial front enlarged view of the swing motion unit 300 on the end side. 20 (b) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 20 (c) shows the state shown in FIG. 20 (b). A state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount toward the projecting position is shown, and the cover member 370 is not shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d).

  First, the case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position (posture change from FIG. 20D to FIG. 20A) will be described. From the extended position of the arm member 320 shown in FIG. 20D, the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 (see FIG. 14) is rotated to rotate the transmission device 350 that is meshed with the drive gear 341, and the transmission is performed. The regulation sliding portion 351 of the device 350 pushes the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 to move the arm member 320 through the states of FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (b), and thereby the retracted position (FIG. 20 (a)). That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, the arm member 320 is swung by the driving force of the driving device 340.

  In this case, since the arm member 320 is swung downward (see FIGS. 16 to 18), the required capacity of the drive device 340 can be suppressed. For example, with an electric motor, the motor capacity can be suppressed.

  Further, the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 are extended vertically downward in a state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 18B). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the resistance given to the arm member 320 and the standing member 330 from the guide hole 315 and the standing hole 316 at the start of swinging from the extended position.

  Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position (posture change from FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D) will be described. The biasing force of the torsion spring 360 acts on the arm member 320. In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the base end side arm portion 361 of the torsion spring 360 is pressed from above by the hook portion 317 of the base member 310, and the moving end side end portion. The projecting portion 327 of the arm member 320 presses 362 in the lower right direction.

  As a result, the torsion spring 360 has the distance between the base end side arm 361 and the moving end side arm 362 shortened around the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum, and the elasticity in the direction of lifting the arm member 320 (upper left direction). Power is in the most accumulated state. The swing of the arm member 320 due to the elastic force is restricted by the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. Hereinafter, the mechanical positional relationship between the release hole 325 and the transmission device 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the direction X connecting the cylindrical portion 322 as the rotation axis of the arm member 320 and the restriction sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350 is changed. The direction Y is orthogonal to the direction connecting the transmission shaft 313 of the base member 310, which pivotally supports the transmission device 350, and the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 350.

  In this case, the regulation sliding portion 351 can be located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. With this, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held in the retracted position, so that the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the restricting sliding portion 351 is located at the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 even when the arm member 320 is arranged in the projecting position. Accordingly, even if the driving force from the driving device 340 is unnecessary, the arm member 320 can be mechanically held in the extended position, and thus the energy consumption of the driving device 340 can be suppressed.

  An operation mode of the drive device 340 when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described. First, from the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 20A), the drive device 340 is used to release the regulation sliding portion 351 from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350. The drive gear 341 is rotated clockwise in a front view by a predetermined amount (ON state). Then, the transmission device 350 meshed with the drive gear 341 is also rotated, and the restriction sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 (see FIG. 20 (b)).

  Here, in the state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the retracted position, the torsion spring 360 has the distance between the proximal end side arm portion 361 and the moving end side arm portion 362 shortened with the tubular portion 322 as a fulcrum. The elastic force in the direction of lifting the member 320 (upper left direction) is in the most accumulated state.

  When the regulation sliding portion 351 is released from the dead point in the relationship between the arm member 320 and the transmission device 350 from this state, the elastic force of the torsion spring 360 causes the arm member 320 to swing. Thereby, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

  For example, in a mode in which the driving force is gradually increased like a drive motor, it is difficult to apply a large driving force to the arm member 320 from the beginning, and the speed at the time of starting the arm member 320 tends to be slow. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since a large elastic force can be applied from the time of starting, a large acceleration at the time of starting the arm member 320 can be secured. Therefore, the arm member 320 can be swung at high speed from the start.

  When the drive gear 341 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state), and the drive gear 341 is brought into a free-rotatable state. The arm member 320 is swung in the upward direction by the elastic force accumulated in the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20C).

  When the arm member 320 reaches the vicinity of the projecting position (see FIG. 20C), the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 is again rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in the front view (ON state), and the regulation sliding portion 351 is moved to the arm. It is located at the dead center in the relationship between the member 320 and the transmission device 350.

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the driving force of the driving device 340 is not constantly generated in the arm member 320, but the arm member 320 is in the vicinity of the retracted position and the extended position. The drive device 340 is driven (ON state) only in the case where the drive device 340 is placed in the position (1), and the drive device 340 is stopped (OFF state) between the retracted position and the extended position. As a result, as compared with the case where the driving force of the constant drive device 340 is applied to the arm member 320, the period during which the drive device 340 is driven can be shortened, and the life of the drive device 340 can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D, when the arm member 320 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position, the regulation sliding portion 351 and the transmission shaft 313 that pivotally supports the transmission device 350 are connected. The direction orthogonal to the straight line and the extending direction of the release hole 325 are arranged so as to coincide with each other.

  As a result, at the time of starting the rotation of rotating the arm member 320 from the state where the arm member 320 is placed in the retracted position or the extended position, the rotation direction of the regulation sliding portion 351 and the extending direction of the release hole 325 match, so that the movement starts. At this time, the resistance of the restriction sliding portion 351 received from the release hole 325 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the driving force required at the start of the operation that requires the greatest force.

  Next, the first slide operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. 21A and 21B are front perspective views of the first slide operation unit 400. It should be noted that FIG. 21A shows a state in which the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 21B, the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 are arranged at the projecting position. The illustrated state is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the suspension member 430 of the first slide operation unit 400 is slid from the retracted position in the diagonally downward direction (from the upper right to the lower left in the front view), and the posture of the tilting member 460 is changed in the process of the sliding movement. Change (tilt toward the overhang position). Next, the overall configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 will be described.

  22 is an exploded front perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first slide operation unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the first slide operation unit 400 includes a base member 410 formed in an L shape in a front view, a cover member 420 attached to the base member 410 from the front side, and a cover member thereof. A hanging member 430 that is sandwiched between 420 and the base member 410 and is slid along the front side surface of the base member 410, and a driving member that slidably moves the hanging member 430 that is substantially T-shaped in a front view. A driving device 440 that generates a force, and a long plate-shaped auxiliary member 450 in which one end is pivotally supported on the base end side of the suspension member 430 and the other end is connected to the base member 410, Mainly includes a tilting member 460 that is axially supported on the projecting end side that is the end opposite to the base end side of the hanging member 430, and a connecting member 470 that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460. Composed of Te.

  The base member 410 is a member that is formed in a plate shape having an L shape in a front view and forms a skeleton of the first slide operation unit 400, and includes a plate-shaped main body laterally long portion 411 and a right end portion of the main body laterally long portion 411. A vertically elongated plate-shaped main body portion 412 extending vertically downward from the main body, and a guide rib portion that is provided on the front side of the horizontally long body portion 411 so as to be slightly inclined with respect to the left-right direction and project in a linear rib shape. 413, an insertion hole 414 formed substantially in the center of the horizontally long portion of the main body and through which the drive shaft of the drive device 441 is inserted, and a lower portion of the vertically long portion 412 of the main body from the lower right in a front view toward the upper left. Mainly provided are a guide hole 415 extending in a long hole shape and a pair of rotating shafts 416 on which various gears of the drive device 440 are pivotally supported.

  The main body laterally long portion 411 is provided with outer frames 411a that are provided on upper and left and right edges so as to project in a wall shape toward the front side. The outer frame 411a is a portion where the cover member 420 abuts on the front side, and is slightly longer than the length of the slide body 431 of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the sliding plane of the hanging member 430). Formed long.

  The sliding plane of the hanging member 430 means a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member 410.

  The guide hole 415 extends from the lower right of the base member 410 toward the upper left.

  The cover member 420 is a member that is attached from the front side of the base member 410 and forms a gap between the cover member 420 and the base member 410, and is formed into a plate shape having substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 in a front view. Mainly includes a portion 421 and a communication hole 422 formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410.

  Since the main body 421 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410, even if the suspension member 430 sways in the front-rear direction when the suspension member 430 is slid, the suspension member 430 does not move in the front-rear direction. Regardless of this, it is possible to evenly secure the contact area between the main body laterally long portion 411 of the base member 410 and the main body portion 421 of the cover member 420.

  The hanging member 430 is a member that is arranged in a gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and is slid along the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410. A horizontally elongated plate-shaped slide main body 431, a recessed groove 432 recessed in a groove on the back side of the slide main body 431, and abutted against a guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410; A plate-shaped bending arm 433 that hangs from a substantially central portion of the main body 431 and is bent toward the protruding position in the middle, and a portion of the slide main body 431 where the bending arm 433 starts to hang down Mainly includes a swing shaft 434 projecting from the front toward the front side, and a cylindrical hanging cylinder 435 extending toward the front side at the tip (overhanging end) of the bending arm portion 433.

  The slide body 431 is formed slightly thinner than the gap formed by the base member 410 and the cover member 420. Therefore, the hanging member 430 is slidable between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and is prevented from moving in the thickness direction (the fastening direction of the cover member 420 to the base member 410).

  The recessed groove 432 is a groove formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the guide rib portion 413, and the suspension member 430 slides obliquely downward as the recessed groove 432 slides on the guide rib portion 413. Be moved.

  The bent arm portion 433 is extended along the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position, and the base member 410 is arranged in a state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged in the retracted position. In a portion formed below the main body laterally long portion 411, a thickened portion 433a formed by increasing the thickness on the front side is provided. The bending arm 433 on the slide body 431 side of the thickened portion 433a is formed thinner than the slide body 431 and the thickened portion 433a. As a result, the bending arm 433 is formed such that deformation in the thickness direction locally occurs at the bending arm 433 on the slide body 431 side of the thickened portion 433a. Further, the thickness direction of the bent arm portion 433 is formed perpendicular to the direction (sliding direction) in which the rack gear is engraved.

  The swing shaft 434 is a shaft formed by penetrating the communication hole 422 of the cover member 420 and projecting to the front side of the cover member 420, and inserted into the swing hole 452 of the auxiliary member 450.

  The hanging cylinder 435 extends beyond the thickness of the auxiliary member 450. This allows the auxiliary member 450 to be housed between the hanging member 430 and the tilting member 460 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A and FIG. 25A). Become.

  The driving device 440 is a device that is formed in such a manner that each member sandwiches the base member 410 from the front and rear, and that generates a driving force necessary for moving the hanging member 430. The driving device 440 is inserted into the insertion hole 414 of the base member 410 from the back side. A drive motor 441 having a drive shaft penetrating therethrough, a drive gear 442 axially supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 441 and arranged in front of the base member 410, and meshed with the drive gear 442. A pair of transmission gears 443 that are pivotally supported by the pair of rotating shafts 416 are mainly provided.

  One of the pair of transmission gears 443 is meshed with a rack gear engraved on the upper surface of the slide body 431 of the suspension member 430 (see FIG. 25). Therefore, when the drive gear 442 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, the suspension member 430 meshed with the transmission gear 443 is slid.

  The auxiliary member 450 is a member disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, one end of which is pivotally supported by the hanging member 430 and the other end of which is slid into the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. A main body 451 which is operably connected and is formed in the shape of a long plate, a swing hole 452 which is bored at one end, and a slide shaft 453 which is provided at the other end so as to project rearward. Mainly includes a suspension shaft 454 that projects from the intermediate position of the main body portion 451 toward the back side.

  The auxiliary member 450 is axially supported by the hanging member 430, and the other end of the auxiliary member 450 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410 so that the auxiliary member 450 cannot move in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 25). Is formed. Further, the auxiliary member 450 is formed such that the auxiliary member 450 approaches (swings) the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bent arm portion 433 as the hanging member 430 slides to the retracted position. Accordingly, even if the hanging member 430 wobbles in the thickness direction, the wobbling of the hanging member 430 can be suppressed by the hanging member 430 contacting the auxiliary member 450.

  The swing hole 452 is externally fitted and supported by the swing shaft 434 of the hanging member 430. As a result, the auxiliary member 450 is swingably formed around the swing shaft 434. That is, the auxiliary member 450 is swung (tilted) about the swing shaft 434 as the suspension member 430 is slid.

  The slide shaft 453 is slidably connected to the guide hole 415 of the base member 410. As a result, the other end (the end on the lower right side in front view) of the auxiliary member 450 is slid along the extending direction of the guide hole 415. It should be noted that when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the projecting position (see FIG. 26), the slide shaft 453 is disposed at the upper end (upper left end) of the guide hole 415, and the suspension member 430 is at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). The slide shaft 453 is arranged at the lower end (lower right end) of the guide hole 415 when it is arranged.

  The tilting member 460 is a member axially supported by the hanging cylinder 435 of the hanging member 430 and having an independent drive source (driving device 464). The tilting member 460 is axially supported by the hanging member 430 and has a long plate shape. Formed on the base member 461, a first cover member 462 that is fastened to the lower portion of the base member 461 from the front side, and forms a gap between the base member 461, the first cover member 462, and the base member 462. A transmission device 463 arranged in a gap formed between the transmission device 463, a driving device 464 that generates a driving force transmitted to the transmission device 463, and a length of the base member 461 that is connected to the transmission device 463. A movable base member 465 that is slidable in the direction, and a second cover that is disposed on the front side of the movable base member 465 and is fastened and fixed to the movable base member 465. And wood 466, a mainly includes.

  The base member 461 is a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and has a suspension shaft 461 a that is provided in a cylindrical shape on the back side and that is internally supported by the suspension cylinder 435 of the suspension member 430. A connecting shaft 461b juxtaposed with the hanging shaft 461a, a storage part 461c adjacent to the connecting shaft 461b and having a box-like shape with an opening facing the back side, and a front side above the storage part 461c. It mainly includes a pair of rotating shafts 461d protruding toward the side and a plurality of elongated slide holes 461e arranged along the longitudinal direction of the base member 461.

  The storage portion 461c forms a space for storing the drive device 464, and has a hole at the bottom for allowing the drive shaft 464a of the drive device 464 to pass therethrough.

  The transmission device 463 includes a drive gear 463a pivotally supported by a drive shaft 464a, a pair of transmission gears 463b meshed with the drive gear 463a and pivotally supported by a pair of rotation shafts 461d, and a pair of transmission gears thereof. Of the 463b, a crank pin 463c that is provided to project at a position eccentric from the transmission gear 463b that is disposed on the moving base member 465 side is mainly provided.

  The crank pin 463c is rotated about the rotation shaft 461d as the drive gear 463a is rotated and the transmission gear 463b is rotated.

  The movement base member 465 is a member formed in a long plate shape, and a plurality of (three places in this embodiment) projecting from the back side and the posture maintaining pins 465a inserted into the plurality of slide holes 461e. And a pair of slender holes 465b extending in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction and formed in a hole, and a pair of bulkheads 465c protruding from the front side.

  Since the crank pin 463c of the transmission gear 463b is coupled to the slide hole 465b, as the transmission gear 463b is rotated and the position of the crank pin 463c is changed, the movement base member 465 is moved along the extending direction of the slide hole 461e. The slide is moved.

  The second cover member 466 includes a pair of fastening portions 466a that are fastened and fixed to the pair of bulky portions 465c. Therefore, in the state where the second cover member 466 is fastened to the moving base member 465, the second cover member 466 also slides as the moving base member 465 slides.

  The connecting member 470 is a member that connects the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 and is formed of a resin material. The connecting member 470 is provided in the upper end portion and is swingable on the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450. The suspension hole 471 is supported, and a cylindrical portion 472 formed in a lower end portion in a tubular shape and externally pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 460 so as to be swingable.

  Next, the driving mode of the tilting member 460 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position. The state in which the first cover member 466 is slid and slid upward is illustrated by a broken line, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  With respect to the tilting member 460 of the first slide operation unit 400, the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) drives the second cover member 466 to slide, and the outer shape of the tilting member 460 in a front view (see FIG. 24). Can be produced.

  Here, since the tilting member 460 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, vibration or wobbling tends to occur when the outer shape of the tilting member 460 changes. The present embodiment has a plurality of configurations for suppressing the vibration and wobbling, which will be described below.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in the state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 21A) will be described in detail. 25A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 25B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged at the upper end position (retracted position) of the moving path along which the hanging member 430 slides is illustrated, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position, so that the auxiliary member 450 and the tilting member 460 pivotally supported by the suspension member 430 are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. (See 2)).

  At this time, the auxiliary member 450 is stored in a position that is on the front side of the hanging member 430 and on the back side of the tilting member 460. That is, since the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are stacked and arranged in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 25A), the hanging member 430, the auxiliary member 450, and the tilting member 460 are viewed in the thickness direction. It can be arranged compactly as compared with the total area of the individual members in. Therefore, the space on the right outside of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be suppressed, and a large display area P can be secured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, most of the bent arm portion 433 of the suspension member 430 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and a base is provided on the rear surface on the projecting end side (tip side). A vertically elongated main body portion 412 of the member 410 is disposed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress wobbling in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 at the retracted position.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary member 450 is pivotally supported by the swing shaft 434 formed in the vicinity of the hanging arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430, and the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. In this case, the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary member 450 is formed along the extending direction of the bending arm portion 433, and the auxiliary member 450 increases in the bending arm portion 433 as the hanging member 430 slides from the retracted position to the extended position. The thick portion 433a is formed so as to approach (swing) the tip of the thick portion 433a.

  Therefore, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the retracted position as compared with the case where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the protrusion amount (projection length) from the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the thickened portion 433a of the bending arm 433 is increased. Is shortened. As a result, even when the hanging member 430 wobbles by driving the tilting member 460, the length from the contact position between the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450 to the tip of the hanging member 430 is formed to be short. Therefore, the wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the thickness direction at the retracted position (wobble of the tip of the bent arm 433) can be suppressed.

  Here, the sliding movement of the suspension member 430 will be described. Since the hanging member 430 sandwiches the guide rib portion 413 of the base member 410 with the recessed groove 432 (see FIG. 23) formed on the back surface side, the hanging member 430 is slid along the extending direction of the guide rib portion 413. As described above, the guide rib portion 413 extends straight in a diagonally downward direction (from the upper right of FIG. 25 (a) to the lower left of FIG. 25 (a)).

  The sliding movement of the suspension member 430 is generated by transmitting the driving force of the driving device 440. For example, when the suspension member 430 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position, the drive gear 442 is driven by the drive force of the drive motor 441 from the state in which the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25). Is rotated clockwise in a front view, the rotation of the pair of transmission gears 443 causes the rack gear meshed with one of the pair of transmission gears 443 (the left side of FIG. 25A) to move. The hanging member 430 having the rack gear on the upper surface side is slid to the extended position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a configuration of the first slide operation unit 400 in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged in the projecting position (see FIG. 21B) will be described in detail. 26A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 400, and FIG. 26B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 400. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the state in which the hanging member 430 is arranged at the lower end position (extended position) of the movement path along which the hanging member 430 slides is illustrated, and the cover member 420 is partially illustrated. Abbreviated to.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the lower end (lower left end in FIG. 26 (a)) of the slide body 431 in the moving direction is the outer frame of the base member 410 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. It is brought into contact with 411a. Further, as described above, since the suspension member 430 moves downward as it goes to the projecting position, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is released, the position of the suspension member 430 remains unchanged. The bulge position can be reliably maintained.

  For example, when the hanging member 430 slides in the horizontal direction, even if the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position, gravity does not act in the sliding direction. It is necessary to add another force to maintain the position.

  On the other hand, according to the suspension member 430 of the present embodiment, even if the transmission of the driving force of the drive device 440 to the suspension member 430 is cancelled, the component force of gravity acts in the sliding movement direction. The lower member 430 can be maintained in the extended position. Therefore, the power consumption of the driving device 440 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the suspension member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the suspension member 430 is retracted in the portion where the bending arm portion 433 is housed between the base member 410 and the cover member 420. The size becomes smaller than that in the case of being arranged at the position (see FIG. 25B). Therefore, it is difficult to suppress the wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 by the base member 410 and the cover member 420.

  On the other hand, the base side of the bent arm portion 433 is extended in the extending direction of the auxiliary member 450 (lower left direction in FIG. 26B) in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position. Accordingly, when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the overlapping area of the auxiliary member 450 and the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 is formed to be large.

  As described above, the auxiliary member 450 is formed so as to be separated from the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 by the thickness of the cover member 420, and the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430. Is formed so as to be able to abut. Since the thin portion (the portion closer to the slide body 431 side than the thickened portion 433a) of the bent arm portion 433 is formed to protrude from the base member 410 and the cover member 420 in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position. The wobble of the bending arm portion 433 of the hanging member 430 due to the driving of the tilting member 460 can be easily caused in the thickness direction (wobble in the thickness direction is dominant). As a result, wobbling of the hanging member 430 in the sliding direction can be suppressed.

  In addition, a thin portion of the bent arm portion 433 (a portion closer to the slide body 431 side than the thickened portion 433a) is sandwiched between the base member 410 and the cover member 420 and slidably moved in the lateral direction (slide). (Direction perpendicular to the direction). This makes it possible to absorb the wobble caused by the driving of the tilting member 460 by the bending of the bending arm 433, and prevent the slide body 431 from wobbling in the thickness direction (direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 26). it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide main body 431 from being pressed against the base member 410 and the cover member 420, and to suppress abrasion of the slide main body 431 in the thickness direction.

  For example, it is conceivable that an arm portion having the same thickness as the slide body portion 431 is extended toward the lateral direction of the slide body portion 431, and the tip side of the arm portion is formed thin. However, in this case, even if the thin portion absorbs the flexure, the wobbling of the arm portion is transmitted to the slide body portion 431 due to the wobbling of the tip of the arm portion having the same thickness as the slide body portion 431. This may cause the slide body 431 to wobble.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thickness of the bending arm 433 extending from the slide body 431 is reduced from the root, the wobble generated at the tip of the bending arm 433 is used for bending the thin portion, and The effect of preventing the portion 431 from wobbling can be made remarkable.

  FIG. 27 is a sectional view of the first slide operation unit 400 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, since the bending arm portion 433 includes the thickened portion 433a that is thickened toward the auxiliary member 450 side, when the bending arm portion 433 wobbles in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430, its wobbling It is possible to make the bent arm portion 433 easily contact the auxiliary member 450 even when the amplitude of is small.

  It returns to FIG. 26 and demonstrates. Since the auxiliary member 450 is connected to the swing shaft 434 of the hanging member 430 and the guide hole 415 of the base member 410, the movement in the thickness direction is restricted. Therefore, the auxiliary member 450 plays a role of a stopper for stopping the bending arm 433 of the hanging member 430 from moving toward the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress wobbling in the thickness direction of the hanging member 430 when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the hanging member 430 is arranged at the projecting position, the lower end of the tilting member 460 is lower than the lower end of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is located slightly above. Here, when the posture of the tilting member 460 does not change with respect to the hanging member 430 (when it is fixed), the hanging member 430 is slid down and slid toward the projecting position. Therefore, in order to arrange the lower end of the tilting member 460 at the same position as the lower end of the tilting member 460 of the present embodiment in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the hanging member 430 is arranged at the retracted position. In this case, the tilting member 460 needs to be arranged at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the descending tilt.

  Therefore, an extra space on the outer right side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is required, and this may cause a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460.

  However, in the present embodiment, the tilting member 460 is changed in posture such that the hanging member 430 is lifted up by the connecting member 470 connected to the auxiliary member 450 as the hanging member 430 moves toward the extended position, and the lower end of the tilting member 460 is hung down. Lifted relative to member 430. As a result, the lower end position of the tilting member 460 when the suspension member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 25A) and the case where the suspension member 430 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. )), The lower end position of the tilting member 460 is located at substantially the same height (vertical direction in FIGS. 25 and 26).

  Therefore, when the suspending member 430 is disposed at the retracted position, it is not necessary to dispose the tilting member 460 at a position offset upward by the distance L1 corresponding to the descending slope, and the right of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81. The outer space can be effectively used, and the degree of freedom in designing the size of the tilting member 460 can be improved.

  Here, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed on the lower end side where the drive device 464 is disposed. Therefore, the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is moved upward by lifting and tilting the lower end side of the tilting member 460. Therefore, the distance from the upper edge of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which serves as the fulcrum of the wobbling of the hanging member 430, to the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is shortened. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the bent arm portion 433 in the thickness direction of 430.

  Further, since the center of gravity of the tilting member 460 is formed in the vicinity of the driving device 464 (see FIG. 22), the force R in the rotational direction about the hanging cylinder 435 is applied downward by gravity. Due to this force R, the auxiliary member 450 is pulled by the connecting member 470. At that time, the slide shaft 453 of the auxiliary member 450 receives a force in a direction along the width direction of the guide hole 415. Therefore, the frictional force between the slide shaft 453 and the guide hole 415 can be improved and the sliding movement of the auxiliary member 450 can be prevented, so that wobbling of other members connected to the auxiliary member 450 can be suppressed. it can.

  As described above, the lower end side of the tilting member 460 is connected to the connecting member 470 pivotally supported by the auxiliary member 450. As a result, a resistance force to wobble that occurs when the tilting member 460 is driven is generated from the hanging member 430 and the auxiliary member 450, so wobble of the tilting member 460 can be suppressed. That is, when the tilting member 460 is connected only to the hanging member 430, all the vibrations and wobbles generated in the tilting member 460 are transmitted to the hanging member 430. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrations and wobbles of the tilting member 460 are transmitted. The suspension member 430 and the connecting member 470 can be separately transmitted. This eliminates the need to set the rigidity of the hanging member 430 or the connecting member 470 to an excessively high level, and improves the degree of freedom in designing the hanging member 430 or the connecting member 470.

  Next, the reversing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34. FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates a closed state in which the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction. The reversing operation unit 500 is configured to be capable of forming a closed state (see FIG. 28) and an open state (see FIG. 33 (b)) by rotating the reflecting member 520. Next, the overall configuration of the reversing operation unit 500 will be described.

  29 is an exploded front perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the reversing operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the reversing operation unit 500 includes a frame-shaped base member 510 that forms a skeleton, a reflecting member 520 that is axially supported by shaft supporting grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510, and a reflection member thereof. A first lid member 530 provided with a shaft support hole 531 into which the rotary shaft 522 of the member 520 is fitted; and a second lid member 540 attached to the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 on the drive portion side of the reflection member 520. A transmission member 550 in which a first rack gear 553 meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is engraved, a drive device 560 for generating a driving force for moving the transmission member 550, and a transmission of the drive device 560. A cover member 570 arranged on the back side of the gear group 562 and fastened and fixed to the base member 510 is mainly provided.

  The base member 510 has a bottom face portion 511 having a rectangular opening in the center and formed in a planar frame shape, and extends vertically from the right end of the bottom face portion 511 toward the front side and the back side of the bottom face portion 511. Mainly includes a first wall portion 512 and a second wall portion 513 that extends vertically from the left end of the bottom surface portion 511 toward the front side of the bottom surface portion 511. The opening of the bottom surface portion 511 is an opening for disposing a substrate (not shown) having a light source such as an LED, and light is emitted from the light source toward the reflecting member 520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). It

  The bottom surface portion 511 extends vertically in the right side portion of the bottom surface portion 511 in a rear view (see FIG. 30), and includes an elongated slide hole 511 a that guides the transmission member 550.

  The slide holes 511a are formed by arranging a plurality (four in this embodiment) in the vertical direction of the bottom surface portion 511 (vertical direction in FIG. 30) in a manner that the extending directions are aligned with each other, and are formed at the upper and lower ends thereof. The slide hole 511a is a long hole extending from the lower end in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a and has a narrower width than the slide hole 511a and guides the rib portion 555 of the transmission member 550. A rib portion slide hole 511b is formed.

  Further, the bottom surface portion 511 includes a rotary shaft 511c, which is provided in a plurality below the opening toward the rear surface side and on which the transmission gear group 562 of the drive device 560 is pivotally supported.

  The first wall portion 512 is a groove cut in a U shape from the front surface side to the back surface side, and a plurality of shaft support grooves 512a having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft portion of the reflecting member are formed. The shaft support grooves 512a are arranged at equal intervals and are formed at intervals shorter than the width dimension (longitudinal dimension as viewed in the rotation axis direction) of the reflection member 520.

  The second wall portion 513 includes a plurality of shaft support grooves 513a which are arranged to face the shaft support groove 512a and are formed in the same manner as the shaft support groove 512a, and adjacent shaft support grooves 513a among the plurality of shaft support grooves 513a. An extending portion 513b that is formed between the grooves 513a and that extends from the outer wall surface of the second wall portion 513 toward the front side (front side in FIG. 29) is provided.

  The extending portion 513b is formed in a step shape in which the width dimension (vertical dimension in FIG. 29) decreases toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), the positioning protruding portion 543 of the second lid member 540 is formed. Is fitted to.

  The reflecting member 520 is a member that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source, and is a long plate-shaped main body 521 formed of an opaque resin material, and a straight line from the left and right ends of the main body 521. A pair of rotating shafts 522 and a rotating gear 523 that is fastened and fixed by matching the axes of the rotating shafts 522 of the pair of rotating shafts 522 on the side where the transmission member 550 is arranged. Prepare

  The main body portion 521 includes a chamfered portion 521a (see FIG. 34) that is chamfered on the end face in the width direction.

  The rotating shaft 522 is formed at the center position of the main body 521 in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29). In addition, the rotation shaft 522 of the pair of rotation shafts 522, on the side where the transmission member 550 is disposed, extends longer, so that the second wall portion is provided between the rotation gear 523 and the main body portion 521. 513 is formed to be disposable.

  The rotary gear 523 is provided with expansion teeth 523a formed by connecting teeth that are adjacent to each other and having a diameter from the center of rotation longer than other teeth. The expansion teeth 523a can prevent the reflective member 520 from over-rotating.

  The first lid member 530 is a long plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 29), and has a plurality of shafts through which the rotary shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is inserted. The support hole 531 and a portion vertically extending toward the first wall portion 512 along the front surface (the front surface of FIG. 29) of the first lid member 530, which is the front surface side of the plurality of shaft support holes 531. An extended lid portion 532 (see FIG. 31) having an end surface circumscribing the edge of the.

  Here, for example, when fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 from the front side of the first wall portion 512, the first wall portion 512 needs to have a thickness equal to or larger than the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. In this case, when the reversing operation unit 500 is adjacent to the outer edge of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 with the first wall portion 512 interposed therebetween, as in the present embodiment, the first wall The thickness of the portion 512 becomes an obstacle, and it is difficult to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one body.

  On the other hand, since the first lid member 530 is fastened and fixed in the thickness direction of the first wall portion 512 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 29), the thickness of the wall on the right side of the reflection member 520 does not depend on the diameter of the head of the fastening screw. Can be thinned. Therefore, the thickness of the first wall portion 512 does not interfere, and it becomes easy to visually recognize the reversing operation unit 500 and the effect in the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81 as one body, and the effect. The effect can be improved.

  Regarding the method of assembling the base member 510, the reflecting member 520, and the first lid member 530, at least two assembling methods can be performed. For example, firstly, there is a method of fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the base member 510 with the rotary shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 fitted in the shaft support grooves 512a and 513a of the base member 510. With this method, the reflection member 520 can be inserted into the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 at a time.

  Secondly, while the first cover member 530 is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 first, the rotary shaft 522 on the side opposite to the drive unit side of the reflection member 520 is attached to the shaft support hole 531 of the first cover member 530. There is a method of inserting the rotary shaft 522 on the drive unit side into the shaft support groove 513a of the second wall 512 after inserting the drive shaft side 522 in the oblique direction (direction from the front side to the diagonal right rear side).

  With reference to FIG. 31, a fitting relationship between the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512, the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 will be described. 31A is a partial side view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 31B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31A. Note that FIG. 31A illustrates the side surface on the side where the first lid member 530 is fastened.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the depth of the shaft supporting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520. Therefore, for example, even when the shaft support hole 531 is not formed in the first cover member 530, the reflection member 520 has the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended cover portion 532 of the first cover member 530. It is positioned between and and is pivotally supported.

  Further, in this embodiment, the depth of the shaft support groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the diameter of the shaft support hole 531 of the first lid member 530 are formed to be the same. Therefore, the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is axially supported between the shaft supporting groove 512a of the first wall portion 512 and the extended lid portion 532 of the first lid member 530 as described above, and the first lid It is also axially supported by the axial support hole 531 of the member 530 (see FIG. 31B).

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for pivotally supporting the rotating shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520. This is particularly effective in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed by fastening and fixing the first lid member 530 to the first wall portion 512 from the right side.

  That is, since the thickness of the first wall portion 512 is suppressed, it may be difficult to secure a sufficient area of the shaft supporting groove 512a that supports the reflecting member 520 as it is. Therefore, a shaft support hole 531 is formed in the first lid member 530, and the reflection member 520 is also supported by the shaft support hole 531. Accordingly, the space occupied by the first lid member 530 and the first wall portion 512 in the axial direction of the reflecting member 520 can be effectively used, and a sufficient area for axially supporting the reflecting member 520 can be secured.

  It returns to FIG. 30 and demonstrates. The second lid member 540 is a member for pivotally supporting the driving portion side of the reflecting member 520 on the base member 510, and is a long plate-shaped base member 541 arranged on the most front side and the base member 541. From the rear side to the rear side, and the extension shaft support portion 542 extending vertically (FIG. 30 up and down direction) and the extension shaft support portion 542 and the base member 541. Positioning protrusions 543.

  The engagement between the second lid member 540 and the base member 510 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32A is a partial front view of the reversing operation unit 500, and FIG. 32B is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32C is a partial cross-sectional view of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIIc-XXXIIc in FIG. 32B, and FIG. 32D is a part of the reversing operation unit 500 taken along line XXXIId-XXXIId in FIG. 32B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, the plurality of positioning protruding portions 543 of the second lid member 540 are fitted between the adjacent extending portions 513b of the base member 510, respectively. This allows the second lid member 540 to be accurately aligned with the base member 510 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 32B).

  Here, since the second wall portion 513 is formed in the shape of a long plate, the rigidity in the thickness direction tends to be low, and the second wall portion 513 bends in the thickness direction to cause the reflecting member 520 to move in the axial direction. Is applied, and the rotation of the reflecting member 520 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the present embodiment, the extended shaft support portion 542 of the second lid member 540 contacts from the thickness direction of the extended portion 513 b of the base member 510 (left and right direction in FIG. 32 (c)). Contacted. Accordingly, the rigidity of the second wall portion 513 in the thickness direction can be improved.

  The end in the extending direction of the extended shaft supporting portion 542 of the second lid member 540 and the end of the base member 510 where the shaft supporting groove 513a is formed are brought into contact with each other to close the open end of the shaft supporting groove 513a ( FIG. 32 (d)). Accordingly, the rotation shaft 522 of the reflecting member 520 is axially supported by the hole formed by the shaft supporting groove 513a and the extended shaft supporting portion 542 of the second lid member 540 (see FIG. 32B).

  It returns to FIG. 29 and demonstrates. The transmission member 550 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device 560 to the reflection member 520, and is formed in an elongated plate shape and is in contact with the back surface of the bottom surface portion 511 of the base member 510. 551, a long plate-shaped extending wall portion 552 extending from the end surface (left end surface in FIG. 29) of the main body portion 551 to the front side, and the front surface side end surface of the extending wall portion 552 intermittently. A first rack gear 553 that is engraved and meshed with the rotating gear 523 of the reflection member 520, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) are arranged on the front side of the main body 551, and the base member 510 slides. Slide shafts 554 connected to the holes 511a, and rib parts slide holes 511b of the base member 510 that extend downward from the slide shafts 554 at the upper and lower ends of the slide shafts 554 (see FIG. 30). It includes a rib portion 555 which is protruded in a small width dimension slightly larger than the width dimension, a second rack gear 556 which is meshed with the transmission gear group of the driving device 560 while being engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 551, a.

  In the first rack gear 553, a plurality of tooth groups in which four teeth are continuously arranged are arranged with an interval slightly shorter than the interval when one tooth is omitted. This space can prevent over-rotation of the rotating gear 523 of the reflecting member 520, but details will be described later.

  The driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force, and is meshed with a driving gear 561 that is axially supported by a driving shaft, a gear that meshes with the driving gear 561 and the second rack gear 556 of the transmission member 550. And a transmission gear group 562, each of which is in mesh with a plurality of rotation shafts 511c.

  When the drive gear 561 of the drive device 560 is rotated, the transmission gear group 562 is rotated and the drive force of the drive device 560 is transmitted to the transmission member 550 via the second rack gear 556. The transmission member 550 is slid in the extending direction of the slide hole 511a of the base member 510 by the driving force of the driving device 560. The first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is meshed with the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520, so that the transmission member 550 is slid so that the reflection member 520 is rotated about the rotation shaft 522.

  33 (a), 33 (b) and 33 (c) are partial front views of the reversing operation unit 500 in which the rotating operation of the reflecting member 520 is illustrated in time series, and FIGS. (E) and FIG. 33 (f) are partial side views of the reversing operation unit 500 showing the rotational movement of the reflecting member 520 in time series, and FIG. 34 shows the reflecting member 520 in the posture of FIG. 33 (d). 11 is a partial side view of a transmission member 550. FIG.

  Note that the second lid member 540 is not shown in FIG. 33, and the state (closed state) in which the main body portions 521 of the reflection members 520 are in contact with each other is shown in FIGS. 33A and 33D. 33 (b) and 33 (e), a state in which the reflecting member 520 is rotated by a predetermined amount (open state) from the state of FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is shown, and FIG. 33 (f), the surface of the reflecting member 520 opposite to the surface facing the front side in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (d) is directed to the front side and the main body of the reflecting member 520 is shown. A state in which the 521s are in contact with each other (closed state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 33D, in the closed state, the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is meshed with the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 and its rotation is restricted.

  The rotation operation of the reflection member 520 will be described. When the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is slid upward (to the left in FIG. 33 (d)) by the drive device 560 (see FIG. 29) from the state of FIG. 33 (d), the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is moved. The main body portion 521 of the reflection member 520 is rotated in accordance with the rotation of (see FIG. 33E). Further, the first rack gear 553 is slid to the left, whereby the reflecting members 520 are rotated until their mutual thickness-direction surfaces come into contact with each other, and the transmission member 550 is stopped (see FIG. 33 (f)).

  Here, at the end position of the sliding movement of the transmission member 550, the reflection member 520 is brought into contact with the end portion to correct the posture (see FIG. 34). Therefore, even if the rotary gear 523 of the reflection member 520 and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 are not accurately meshed with each other, the posture of the reflection member 520 in the state where the transmission member 550 is arranged at the end position of the sliding movement. Can be stabilized.

  In the closed state of the reflection member 520, the end of the main body 521 is abutted in the thickness direction. At this time, since the area between the first wall portion 512 and the second wall portion 513 of the base member 510 is closed by the reflecting member 520, the light emitted from the above-mentioned light source may be blocked by the reflecting member 520. it can.

  Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, slidingly moving a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire light emitted to the player. However, when the shutter member is slidingly moved from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes long.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflecting member 520 suppresses the leakage of light in the closed state, while allowing the light emitted to the player by rotating the reflecting member 520 from the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members 520 may have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member 520 can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the case where the reflecting member 520 is rotated can shorten the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the reflecting member 520 rotates, the area occupied by the reflecting member 520 in a front view (see FIG. 32A) is reduced, so that the light source formed on the back side of the reflecting member. You can see the light. Therefore, the space for disposing the reflection operation unit 500 can be reduced.

  The chamfered portions 521a of the reflecting member 520 are in contact with each other in the closed state (see FIG. 34). As a result, the distance between the reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction can be shortened, and the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members 520 can be made more flat.

  For example, when a pattern that is integrally recognized by the surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction is formed on the surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members 520 in the thickness direction, the boundaries between the adjacent reflecting members 520 are made inconspicuous and the patterns are made inconspicuous. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the pattern can be recognized more beautifully.

  The distance from the rotation shaft 522 of the reflection member 520 to the outer ends of the expansion teeth 523a is formed longer than the distance from the rotation shaft 522 to the main body 551 of the transmission member 550. Therefore, if the rotating gear 523 is attempted to be rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (d) from the state of FIG. 33 (a), the expansion teeth 523a are stopped by the main body portion 551 and cannot be rotated. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent excessive rotation of the reflection member 520, and it is possible to prevent damage to the reflection member 520 due to excessive pressure on the contact surface of the reflection member 520.

  Further, as described above, the first rack gear 553 is arranged at a slightly shorter interval than the interval when the tooth group in which the four teeth are continuously provided omits one tooth. 33F, when the rotation gear 523 of the reflection member 520 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 33F, the teeth of the rotation gear 523 are formed between the tooth groups of the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550. Get stuck. In this case, the rotary gear 523 cannot be rotated any further. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged at the chamfered portion 521a which is the contact surface due to the excessive rotation of the reflection member 520.

  Next, the second slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 35A shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 35B, the pair of first slide members 720. Also, a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 is arranged at the projecting position (the front side of the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2) is illustrated.

  In the second slide operation unit 700, the pair of first slide members 720 and the pair of second slide members 740 project to the front side of the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the display area. It is formed so that P can be divided into a lattice shape. Next, the overall configuration of the second slide operation unit 700 will be described.

  36 and 37 are exploded front perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are exploded rear perspective views of the second slide operation unit 700. 36 and 38, the base member 710 and a member disposed on the front side of the base member 710 are illustrated in a disassembled state, and in FIGS. 37 and 39, the base member 710 and the back surface of the base member 710 are illustrated. The state where the member arranged on the side is disassembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, the second slide operation unit 700 is a rectangular plate-shaped base member having a rectangular opening in the center which forms the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81. 710, a first slide shaft S1 fixed to the base member 710 at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the base member 710, and having its longitudinal direction coincide with the horizontal direction, and slides along the first slide shaft S1. Mainly, a pair of first slide members 720 to be moved and a front side cover member 730 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the front side of the pair of first slide members 720 and is formed in a pair of upper and lower sides. Prepare

  Also, the second slide operation unit 700 is fixed to the base member 710 with a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base member 710, and has a second slide shaft S2 for aligning the longitudinal direction with the vertical direction and the second slide shaft thereof. A pair of second slide members 740 slidably moved along the rod S2, a transmission device 750 in which a plurality of gears meshed with the second slide members 740 are arranged, and a pair of second slide members 740. And rear side cover members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 from the rear side of the transmission device 750 and are formed on the left and right sides and the upper side, and are disposed on the rear side cover members 760 and the first slide member 720 and The driving device 770 mainly generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 36, since the first slide member 720 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, one side thereof (the left side in FIG. 36) will be described here, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  The first slide member 720 is provided with a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape having an L shape in a front view, a carriage portion 722 that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 721, and extends downward from a lower end of the carriage portion 722. And a decoration portion 723.

  The main body portion 721 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the left-right direction, and has a rack portion 721a having a rack gear engraved on the upper surface, and a rack portion 721a that is continuously provided below the rack portion 721a. And a plate-shaped carriage receiving portion 721b arranged to the left of the front view.

  The dolly portion 722 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the dolly receiving portion 721b with its left end aligned with the left end of the dolly receiving portion 721b. The dolly portion 722 is provided inside the dolly body portion 722a, and a dolly body portion 722a formed in a U-shaped cross section by wall portions projecting from the upper and lower ends of the plate-like bottom surface to the front side. And a rotating body group 722b in which a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies formed having a rotation axis perpendicular to the bottom surface are arranged in a left and right pair.

  In the rotating body group 722b, a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged in parallel to the left and right, and the length of the vertical interval is formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the first slide shaft S1. The rotating body group 722b is arranged so as to slightly project outward from the longitudinal side surfaces (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a.

  The first slide shaft S1 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S1a fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends and is made of a metal material such as stainless steel.

  An arrangement mode of the first slide member 720 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S1 is inserted between the rotating body groups 722a of the first slide member 720, and the fastening plate portion S1a is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 in that state. As a result, the carriage portion 722a is arranged between the base member 710 and the first slide shaft S1. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the first slide shaft S1.

  Next, the carriage receiving portion 721b of the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 are fastened and fixed. As a result, the first slide member 720 is slidably supported by the first slide shaft S1.

  In this state, the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 720 is meshed with the transmission gear meshed with the drive gears 711a and 712a. Therefore, the driving force of the driving device 770 (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the first slide member 720 via the drive gears 711a and 712a and the transmission gear, so that the first slide member 720 is slid to the left and right.

  When the first slide member 720 slides, the rotating body group 722b sandwiches the first slide shaft S1. Therefore, the contact area between the first slide member 720 and the first slide shaft S1 can be reduced and friction can be reduced. In addition, since a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies are arranged on the left and right and are in contact with the first slide shaft S1, it is possible to suppress wobble of the first slide member 720 at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the first slide member 720 with respect to the first slide shaft S1 can be stabilized.

  The front cover member 730 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 after the first slide member 720 is disposed on the base member 710. The lower cover member 730 is disposed on the front side of the lower end of the decorative portion 723. Accordingly, when the first slide member 720 wobbles in the front-rear direction (left front direction in FIG. 36) around the first slide shaft S1 as an axis, wobble of the first slide member 720 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the base member 710 is fastened and fixed to the transmission cylinders 711 and 712, which are arranged so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction and are axially rotatable, and to the rear surface of the base member 710 in the left side in rear view. And a fixed gear portion 713 in which gears are engraved on a wall surface that extends inward (to the right in FIG. 38) and is meshed with the fixed gear portion 713 and the rack gear 754 (see FIG. 39), a rolling gear 714 axially supported by a shaft supporting portion 754a (see FIG. 37), and a guide wall portion 715 protruding from the rear surface of the base member 710 and extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the rear as viewed from the right. And, mainly.

  The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 include drive gears 711a and 712a (see FIG. 36) on the front side of the base member 710, respectively. The transmission cylinders 711 and 712 are members to which the drive shafts of the drive motors 771 and 772 of the drive device 770 are fixed and which transmit the drive force of the drive device 770 to the first slide member 720.

  The guide wall portion 715 includes a receiving gear portion 715a formed on a wall surface facing inward (leftward in FIG. 38).

  As shown in FIG. 37, since the second slide member 740 is composed of a pair of members having substantially the same shape, only one of them (upper part in FIG. 37) will be described here, and the other description will be omitted.

  The second slide member 740 is provided with a main body portion 741 formed in an elongated plate shape, a dolly portion 742 fastened and fixed to the main body portion 741, and a left end of the dolly portion 742 in a front view. And a decorative portion 743.

  The main body 741 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a rack gear is engraved on the right surface.

  The dolly portion 742 is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the main body portion 741 with its upper end aligned with the upper end of the main body portion 741. The dolly portion 742 has a dolly main body portion 742a formed in a U-shaped cross section by the wall portions projecting from the left and right ends of the plate-like bottom surface to the front side, and the dolly main body portion 742a is inwardly perpendicular to the bottom surface. A pair of left and right rotating bodies that are formed with different rotating shafts, and a pair of upper and lower rotating bodies 742b.

  In the rotating body group 742b, a pair of left and right rotating bodies are vertically arranged in parallel, and the length of the left and right spaces is slightly longer than the diameter of the second slide shaft S2.

  The decorative portion 743 includes a pair of upper and lower deflection suppressing gears 743a pivotally supported by a shaft projecting toward the rear surface at the left end in front view.

  The second slide shaft S2 includes a pair of fastening plate portions S2a that are fastened and fixed to the base member 710 at both ends.

  An arrangement mode of the second slide member 740 on the base member 710 will be described. First, the slide shaft S2 is inserted between the rotating body groups 742a of the second slide member 740, and the main body portion 741 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the carriage portion 742. Accordingly, the second slide member 740 is slidably supported by the second slide shaft S2. Further, as a result, the base member 710 is reinforced by the rigidity of the second slide shaft S2.

  Next, the fastening plate portion S2a of the second slide shaft S2 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the base member 710. Thereby, the main body 741 is arranged between the base member 710 and the second slide shaft S2.

  Here, the rack gear engraved from the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 is meshed with the rolling gear 714 of the base member 710. Therefore, when the rolling gear 714 is rotated, the second slide member 740 is slid up and down.

  When the second slide member 740 slides, the rotating body group 742b sandwiches the second slide shaft S2, so that the contact area between the second slide member 740 and the second slide shaft S2 can be reduced and friction can be reduced. Further, since the pair of left and right rotating bodies are arranged in a pair in the upper and lower sides and are brought into contact with the second slide shaft S2, the wobbling of the second slide member 740 can be suppressed at a plurality of points. Therefore, the posture of the second slide member 740 with respect to the second slide shaft S2 can be stabilized.

  Here, the main body portion 741 having a rack gear meshed with the rolling gear 714 (driving portion side) and the carriage portion 742 that sandwiches the second slide shaft S2 are the same in the extending direction of the second slide member 740. Formed at the end. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the bending of the second slide member 740 about the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum affects the meshing state of the rack gear and the rolling gear 714. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the resistance that the second slide member 740 receives due to the shift of the meshing state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the transmission device 750 is a device for transmitting the driving force of the drive device 770 to the second slide member 740, and is provided on the long plate-shaped main body 751 and on the back side of the main body 751. It has a drive gear 752 which is disposed and to which the drive shafts 773a and 774a of the drive device 770 are fixed, a transmission gear 753 which meshes with the drive gear 752, and teeth which mesh with the transmission gear. A rack gear 754 that is a long plate-shaped member that extends in the direction and that slides up and down along the long slide hole 751a of the main body 751 is mainly provided.

  In the description of the configuration of the transmission device 750, only one of the upper and lower parts (see FIG. 39) will be described, and the other description will be omitted.

  The main body portion 751 includes a slide long hole 751a formed in a long hole shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39).

  The rack gear 754 is provided with a columnar shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) which is provided so as to vertically project from the front surface and penetrates the elongated slide hole 751a of the main body portion 751. The shaft support portion 754a is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714.

  Here, the transmission mode of the driving force to the second slide member 740 will be described. First, when the drive shaft 773a of the drive device 773 is rotated, the drive gear 752 fixed to the drive shaft 773a is rotated, and the rack gear 754 is rotated through the rotation of the transmission gear 753 meshed with the drive gear 752. It is slid up and down along the longitudinal direction of the slide long hole 751a.

  The shaft support portion 754a (see FIG. 37) of the rack gear 754 is inserted into the shaft support hole of the rolling gear 714, so that the rack gear 754 is slid up and down, so that the rolling gear 714 is also slid up and down. .

  At this time, the rolling gear 714 meshes with the teeth of the fixed gear portion 713 of the base member 710, and also meshes with the main body portion 741 of the second slide member 740 that is arranged to face the fixed gear portion 713. That is, the fixed gear portion 713, the rolling gear 714, and the main body portion 741 form a double rack and pinion mechanism, and the second slide member 740 is moved at a double speed with respect to the rack gear 754.

  The rear cover member 760 includes a rear drive cover member 761 disposed on the drive side of the second slide member 740, a rear upper cover member 762 disposed on the upper side, a rear drive cover member 761 and left and right sides. And a back-side retaining cover member 763 arranged to face each other in the direction.

  The rear drive unit cover member 761 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the transmission device 750, and drive motors 773 and 774 for driving the second slide member 740 of the drive motors of the drive device 770 are fastened and fixed to the rear face.

  The rear upper cover member 762 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the base member 710, and driving motors 771 and 772 for driving the first slide member 720 of the driving motors of the driving device 770 are fastened and fixed to the rear surface.

  The back surface retaining cover member 763 is formed on the back surface of the decorative portion 743 on the extended end side, and prevents the second slide member 740 from rotating around the second slide shaft S2 as a fulcrum and slipping out.

  The drive device 770 mainly includes drive motors 771 and 772 that drive the first slide member 720 and drive motors 773 and 774 that drive the second slide member 740. The drive motors 771, 772, 773, 774 include drive shafts 771a, 772a, 773a, 774a, respectively.

  An example of the movement mode of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of a change in the arrangement of the first slide member 720 in time series.

  It should be noted that in FIG. 40 (a), the state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged at the retracted position is shown in FIG. 40 (b), and the main body portion 721 and the carriage portion 722 of the pair of first slide members 720 are 40C shows a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other at the projecting position, and a state in which the pair of first slide members 720 are moved from the position in FIG. 40 (a) to 40 (c), the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 of the pair of upper and lower front cover members 730 is omitted.

  Here, the transmission of the driving force to the drive gears 711a and 712a during the sliding movement of the pair of first slide members 720 will be described. When the drive gears 711a and 712a are rotated (the drive gear 711a is clockwise in a front view and the drive gear 712a is counterclockwise in a front view) from the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A, the pair of first slide members 720 is rotated. Are slid toward the projecting position and brought into contact with each other at the projecting position (see FIG. 40 (b)).

  Of the pair of first slide members 720, the drive motor 772 (see FIG. 35) that generates the drive force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the right side in the front view is in the state of FIG. It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before reaching. In the present embodiment, since the contact between the pair of first slide members 720 occurs between the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722, it is not necessary to consider the bending of the decoration portion 723 in the sliding direction. Therefore, the contact position of the pair of first slide members 720 can be accurately calculated.

  Since the pair of first slide members 720 are arranged such that the rotating body group 722b projects slightly outward from the longitudinal side surfaces (left and right side surfaces in FIG. 36) of the carriage main body 722a, the pair of first slide members 720 come into contact with each other. In doing so, the rotating bodies protruding outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b are first brought into contact with each other, and then the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are pressed against each other. Be done. That is, while the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a are in contact with each other, pressure is applied to the rotating bodies that extend outward from the contact surface side of the rotating body group 722b. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotating body group 722b can be braked in the state where the pair of slide members 720 are in contact with each other, and thus the impact when the pair of first slide members 720 is in contact can be mitigated.

  The pair of first slide members 720, after being brought into contact with each other, drive motor 771 that generates a driving force for slidingly moving the first slide member 720 disposed on the left side in the front view of the pair of first slide members 720. A pair of first slides (by pushing the first slide member 720 arranged on the right side in front view is pushed by the first slide member 720 arranged on the left side in front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). The member 720 is slid to the right (see FIG. 40 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of first slide members 720 are in contact with each other, the pair of first slide members 720 can be slid without moving the drive motors 771, 772 in a coordinated manner. Thereby, the power consumption of the entire drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35) can be suppressed.

  In addition, for example, when the pair of first slide members 720 is driven only by the drive motor 771 (see FIG. 35), the motor load is higher than when only one of the first slide members 720 is driven. However, since the first slide member 720 is moved in the horizontal direction, it is not necessary to consider the gravity load as in the case where the first slide member 720 is moved in the vertical direction, and the increase amount of the motor load is the drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35). It occurs evenly in each.

  Therefore, the motor life of the drive motors 771, 772 (see FIG. 35) can be easily adjusted, and the replacement timing of the drive motors 771, 772 can be easily adjusted. As a result, the frequency of maintenance of the drive motors 771, 772 can be reduced.

  An example of the movement mode of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the second slide operation unit 700 showing an example of changes in the arrangement of the second slide member 720 in time series.

  41A, the state where the pair of second slide members 740 are arranged at the retracted position is shown in FIG. 41B, and the main body portions 741 of the pair of second slide members 740 are in the projecting position. 41C, a state in which the pair of second slide members 740 has been moved by a predetermined amount from the position in FIG. 41B to the upper side in the front view is shown in FIG. 41C.

  Here, the transmission of the driving force to the drive gear 752 (see FIG. 39) during the sliding movement of the pair of second slide members 740 will be described. From the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a), the drive gears 752 are rotated by the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35) (the drive motor 773 is clockwise when viewed from the front and the drive motor 774 is counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Then, the pair of second slide members 740 are respectively slid toward the extended position and abutted at the extended position (see FIG. 41 (b)).

  Of the pair of second slide members 740, the drive motor 773 (see FIG. 35) that generates the drive force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 disposed above in the front view reaches the state of FIG. 41 (b). It is controlled to stop the generation of driving force immediately before.

  The pair of second slide members 740, after being brought into contact with each other, drive motor 774 (which generates a driving force for slidingly moving the second slide member 740 of the pair of second slide members 740 disposed below in front view). The pair of second slide members 740 (by pressing the second slide member 740 disposed on the upper side in the front view to the second slide member 740 disposed on the lower side in the front view) by the driving force (see FIG. 35). It is slid upward (see FIG. 41 (c)).

  That is, after the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, the pair of second slide members 740 can be slid without the drive motors 773, 774 (see FIG. 35) operating in a coordinated manner. As a result, the power consumption of the drive motors 773, 774 as a whole can be suppressed.

  Here, when the descending member changes its moving direction upwards, the load on the drive motor increases due to the influence of gravity, which may shorten the motor life. Further, since the deceleration time for changing the direction takes a long time, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in the presentation may be reduced.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the upper member of the pair of second slide members 740 changes its moving direction from the downward movement to the upper direction, the lower member of the pair of second slide members 740 rises. You can use the momentum of movement. As a result, the motor load generated when the second slide member 740 changes direction due to the influence of gravity can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended. In addition, the deceleration time for changing the direction of the second slide member 740 can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in presentation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the second slide member 740 will be described. FIG. 42 is a partial rear view of the second slide operation unit 700. Note that the illustration of the back retaining cover 763 (see FIG. 39) of the back cover member 760 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42, in the second slide member 740, the end opposite to the end supported by the second slide shaft S2 comes into contact with the receiving gear 715a of the base member 710 via the flexure suppressing gear 743a. Contacted.

  Here, at the time of starting the second slide member 740, the meshing relationship between the flexure suppressing gear 743a and the receiving gear portion 715a is optimized and the flexure suppressing gear 743a rotates smoothly. The resistance generated between the portion 715a and the portion 715a is suppressed. Therefore, the driving force required at the time of starting the second slide member 740 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the pair of second slide members 740 are brought into contact with each other by the carriage portions 742, the impact at the time of contact is transmitted to the decorative portion 743, and the deflection suppressing gear 743a of the decorative portion 743 is disposed. Is inclined with respect to the guide wall portion 715. As a result, the load applied to the receiving gear portion 715 from the deflection suppressing gear 743a increases. More specifically, for example, when the decorative portion 743 of the second slide member 740 is tilted downward (downward in FIG. 42) about the carriage portion 742 as a fulcrum, the upper deflection suppressing gear 743a of the pair of deflection suppressing gears 743a is received by the receiving gear. It is pressed against the part 715.

  As a result, a force in a direction to return the inclination of the second slide member 740 is applied to the second slide member 740, so that the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 caused by the contact of the pair of second slide members 740 is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the contact between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 is constituted by the meshing of the gears, the contact surface can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slippage between the second slide member 740 and the guide wall portion 715 when the pair of second slide members 740 are in contact with each other, and thus the inclination of the posture of the decorative portion 743 is suppressed. The effect of doing can be improved.

<Regarding the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
The details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 49, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 65b, and the first variable A base member 65c for fastening the winning device 65 to the game board 13 by screws, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and opening / closing for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening / closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 65e. A switching member 65h that projects into the flow path formed by the cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game sphere, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. Back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and the flow path solenoid 65k covered from the back side by screws on the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a fixing cover body 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 50C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 50B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 50 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 51 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side, and a non-entering state. It is changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the opened state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable award winning device 65 toward the second prize winning opening 640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 while the player is right-hit, and immediately after the jackpot game, the game method is left-handed. The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  50 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 50 (b). As shown in FIG. 50A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 51, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 51A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged obliquely leftward and to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is provided with the special discharge port 65e2 and that is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow-down route of the game balls that have won the first variable winning port 65 during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. You can The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. . The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. In addition, when the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds at the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent an excessive disadvantage from occurring.

  With reference to FIG. 51 (b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described. FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inoperative and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge port 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge port 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the winning ball is won in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is won in the 13th round in a state where the game balls won before the 13th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (for one ball winning in this embodiment). 15 prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the relationship between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning opening 640 will be described. On the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed, and the game ball passing through the opening is provided below the first variable winning device 65. A guide path for guiding to the general winning opening 65b1 is formed. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 65b1, ten game balls are paid out to the player as the prize balls on the upper plate. Here, when the game ball is played by the right hit, which is a game method in which the game ball is shot so as to pass the right side of the liquid crystal display unit 80, it does not roll on the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. In addition, all the game balls rolling on the right side of the first variable winning a prize device 65 are configured to pass through this opening and win the general winning port 65b1. On the upper part of the first variable winning device 65, a plurality of game nails for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are provided.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 110, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the open state, the angle of the game nails K2, K3 is adjusted as a means for adjusting the ratio to the specific winning opening 65a, and the interval is narrowed. It is configured so that it can be widened. Here, the game store tries to increase the profit by increasing the number of game balls to be shot in order to enter 10 balls in one round by reducing the number of game balls winning the specific winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit. It is possible to However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the game nail K2 is tilted to the left and adjusted to make it difficult to win the specific winning opening 65a, the distance between the adjusting nails K1 and K2 becomes wide, and the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. It is easier to enter the ball. Further, if the game nail K1 is narrowed in order to narrow the gap between the game nails K1 and K2, the flow path on the right side of the game nail K1 becomes wider, and the game ball enters from the flow path through the opening on the right side of the opening / closing door 65f1. It becomes easy to play a ball. Therefore, even when the jackpot game is not being played, the percentage of winning in the general winning opening 65b1 becomes high, and the damage to the amusement store side becomes large. Therefore, the percentage of winning in the specific winning opening 65a should be lowered. It is possible to prevent the nails from being adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the taste of the game is significantly lowered by the adjustment at the game shop side.

  Also, by tilting the game nail K1 to the right, the gap between the game nails K2 and K3 is narrowed to adjust the winning rate to the specific winning port 65a to be low, and the game ball is moved to the second winning port 640 side. Become easy to flow down. As a result, the winning rate to the second winning port 640 becomes high, and the ratio of winning to the second winning port 640 during the time saving game or the probability variation gaming state becomes high, and the damage to the amusement store side increases. It is possible to prevent the winning rate of the specific winning port 65a from being set low. In addition, a plurality of game nails are arranged between the first variable winning device 65 and the second winning port 640, and a game ball flowing down to the left on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. All are configured to be able to reach the second winning opening 640. The game nails left between the first variable winning a prize device 65 and the second winning a prize opening 640 are arranged such that all the game balls are guided to the second winning a prize opening 640 even if they are adjusted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. First, the swing motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the transmission device 350 and the drive gear 341 of the drive device 340 are always meshed with each other has been described. However, the swing motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment includes the transmission device 2350 and the drive device 2340. It is possible to form a state in which the drive gear 2341 is in mesh (engagement state) and a state in which the mesh between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (non-engagement state). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  43 and 44 are front views of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 showing the swing motions of the drive gear 2341, the transmission device 2350, and the L-shaped lever 2380 in time series in the second embodiment. It is a figure.

  The main body 321 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 are illustrated in phantom lines. In FIG. 43 (a), the state in which the arm member 320 is in the projecting position is shown in FIG. 43 (b). 43 (c) shows a state in which 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position. The state immediately before the transmission device 2350 is pulled by the L-shaped lever 2380 from the state of c), and the state in which the arm member 320 is extended to the front of the extended position in FIG. In (), a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position by pulling the transmission device 2350 by the L-shaped lever 2380 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 are formed to be meshable with each other.

  The drive gear 2341 includes a main body portion 2341a that is axially viewed by the drive shaft and is formed in a fan shape in a front view, and a push pin 2341b that is provided so as to project to the front side near the peripheral surface of the main body portion 2341a.

  The transmission device 2350 includes a release pin 2352 that is provided at an end portion of the regulation sliding portion 351 on the opposite side to the front side so as to project toward the front side.

  The base member 2310 includes a swing shaft 2318 that is provided so as to project to the front side at the lower right of the shaft support position of the drive gear 2341 in front view.

  The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed in the shape of a long rod, and has one end that is pivotally supported at one end by a swing shaft 2318 of the base member 2310 and one end of the first body 2381. A second main body portion 2382 which is pivotally supported at the other end on the opposite side and is formed in a long rod shape, and a long hole shape is formed along the extending direction of the second main body portion 2382. And a pull slide hole 2383 to which the release pin 2352 is connected. The L-shaped lever 2380 is formed so as to be capable of swinging on the front side of the drive gear 2341 and is capable of contacting the push pin 2341b when the drive gear 2341 rotates.

  A case where the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. The arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position by swinging the transmission device 2350 connected by the release hole 325 to the state of FIG. 43 (c) by the rotation of the drive gear 2341. At this time, the L-shaped lever 2380 is pulled through the pull slide hole 2383 by the release pin 2352 of the transmission device 2350, and is tilted toward the transmission device side.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 43 (c), the meshing of the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 is released (see FIG. 44 (a)). Next, a case where the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  In the state where the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 43 (c)), the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, so that the transmission device 2350 is formed. The arm member 320 is maintained at the retracted position even if the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the drive gear 2341 is released.

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) and the L-shaped lever 2380 is pushed outward (to the right in FIG. 44), the transmission device 2350 is inserted into the pull slide hole 2383 of the L-shaped lever 2380. The release pin 2352 is pulled, and the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  When the transmission device 2350 is slightly rotated, the dead point formed by the restriction sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 is released, and the arm member 320 causes the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20). ) And is swung toward the extended position (see FIG. 44 (b)).

  When the drive gear 2341 is further rotated and the push pin 2341b is arranged on the right side of the rotation shaft, the L-shaped lever 2380 again pulls the release pin of the transmission device 2350. As a result, the regulation sliding portion 351 of the transmission device 2350 and the release hole 325 of the arm member 320 form a dead point, and the arm member 320 can be maintained in the extended position (see FIG. 44 (c)).

  That is, when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, the engagement between the drive gear 2341 and the transmission device 2350 connected to the arm member 320 can be released, and the arm member 320 can be released. It can reduce the resistance applied to. Therefore, by starting the arm member 320 with the urging force of the torsion spring 360 (see FIG. 20), the action of rocking the arm member 320 at high speed from the start can be made remarkable.

  Here, the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 are engaged only when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position. Therefore, the change in resistance generated between the transmission device 2350 and the drive gear 2341 affects the swing of the arm member 320 only when the arm member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position, and the arm member 320. When is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, it does not affect the swing of the arm member 320.

  Therefore, by setting a large elastic force of the torsion spring 360, a large force is required when swinging the arm member 320 from the extended position to the retracted position. It is possible to secure a high speed at the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position.

  45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) and 46 (b) is a second embodiment in which the operation of swinging the arm member 320 from the retracted position to the extended position is illustrated in time series. It is a front view of the swing motion unit 2300 in the form. Note that FIG. 45 (a) illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 45 (b) illustrates a state in which the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position. 46 (a) shows a state where the arm member 320 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 45 (b), and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state where the arm member 320 is arranged at the projecting position. To be done.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the upright member 330 is gently raised is described, but in the swing motion unit 2300 in the second embodiment, the upright member 330 is rapidly raised.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), the standing hole 2316 of the base member 2310 has a posture changing portion 2316 a formed above the bending point and a concentric circle portion 2316 b formed near the lower end.

  The posture changing portion 2316a is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is directed to the tubular portion 322 which is the swing shaft of the arm member 320. When the change sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the posture changing portion 2316a, the degree of posture change of the standing member 330 with respect to the swing angle of the arm member 320 is maximized (FIGS. 45 (b) and 46). (See (a)). This is because the posture changing portion 2316a is in a vertical relationship with the circle formed by the movement locus of the sliding ring portion 323 (see FIG. 17B).

  The concentric circle portion 2316b is a portion in which the extending direction of the elongated hole is oriented in a direction along a circle around the tubular portion 322 of the arm member 320. When the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 slides on the concentric circle portion 2316b, the relative positional relationship between the sliding ring portion 323 of the arm member 320 and the changing sliding portion 333 of the standing member 330 does not change. The posture of the standing member 330 with respect to the arm member 320 is maintained.

  In this embodiment, since the concentric circle portion 2316b is formed at the lower end of the standing hole 2316, the arm member 320 is erected from the retracted position to the position shown in FIG. 45 (b). The relative posture of the member 330 is maintained.

  Since the posture changing portion 2316a is formed above the bending point of the standing hole 2316 (that is, near the upper portion of the concentric circular portion 2316b), the posture changing portion 2316a is illustrated in FIG. 46 (a) from the arrangement shown in FIG. 45 (b). When the arm member 320 is swung to the disposition, the upright member 320 is suddenly upright.

  Thereby, the posture change after the standing member 320 is visually recognized by the player can be made rapid. Therefore, the speed of operation of the swing motion unit 2300 that the player feels can be further improved.

  The first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting member 470 is made of a resin material has been described, but in the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the connecting member 2470 is made of an elastic rubber material. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  47A is a front view of the first slide operation unit 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 47B is a rear view of the first slide operation unit 2400. Note that, in FIG. 47, a state in which the suspension member 430 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated, and the illustration of the cover member 420 is partially omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the second cover member 2466 of the tilting member 2460 includes a mass portion 2466m arranged at the upper end portion.

  The mass portion 2466m is a portion having a mass necessary for the center of gravity of the tilting member 2460 to be formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a in a state where the suspension member 430 is arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the suspension shaft 461a.

  The connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 is connected to the suspension shaft 454 of the auxiliary member 450 by the connecting member 2470.

  The connecting member 2470 is a long member formed of a rubber-like elastic body, and is formed so as to be expandable and contractable by swinging the tilting member 2460.

  Here, since the center of gravity G of the tilting member 2460 is formed vertically above the hanging shaft 461a in a state where the hanging member 430 is arranged in the projecting position, the tilting member 2460 is unstable. Therefore, when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven and the tilting member 2460 performs the expansion / contraction operation in the state where the hanging member 430 is arranged at the extended position, the tilting member 2460 swings around the hanging shaft 461a. Be moved.

  In this case, since the connecting shaft 461b of the tilting member 2460 expands and contracts the connecting member 2470, an elastic force is applied to the tilting member 2460. As a result, a force in the direction opposite to the swinging direction of the tilting member 2460 is applied to the tilting member 2460. In this case, the time required for the tilting member 2460 to swing back is shortened, and the operation of the tilting member 2460 is accelerated. Therefore, the speed of the rocking motion of the tilting member 2460 that occurs when the driving device 464 (see FIG. 23) is driven can be increased, and the effect of rocking (vibrating) the tilting member 2460 is effectively performed. be able to.

  The second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where one of the pair of first slide members 720 is stopped and brought into contact with the other first slide member 720 has been described, but the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment is The position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 are detected, and the one first slide member 2720 is controlled to run in reverse according to the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 48 is a partial front view of the second slide operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment, which illustrates in time series an example of an operation in which the first slide member 2720 is slid from the retracted position to the extended position. Note that in FIG. 48, the illustration of the upper front cover member 730 is omitted, and in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the pair of first slide members 2720 is arranged in the retracted position is illustrated, and FIG. In FIG. 48, the right side first slide member 2720 of the pair of first slide members 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount, and in FIG. 48C, the left side first slide member is moved from the state of FIG. 48B. The state in which the member 2720 is slid by a predetermined amount is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720 is long in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 48) and extends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 48). A hole-shaped detection hole 2721c is provided.

  The base member 2710 is a transmissive optical sensor disposed on the front side, and the detection device is disposed at a position where the transmitted light can penetrate the detection hole 2721c when the first slide member 2720 is slid. 2716. Note that the detection device 2716 is disposed substantially in the center of the base member 2710 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 48A).

  As shown in FIG. 48B, when the first slide member 2720 on the right side is slid from the state of FIG. 48A and the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 reaches the position where it penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right side is moved. The first slide member 2720 is controlled to stop.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the left first slide member 2720 is slid and reaches the position where the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 penetrates the detection hole 2721c, the right slide member 2720 is moved to the left slide member. It is controlled so as to feed backward (slide to the right) at a speed capable of abutting with 2720 at a constant speed.

  That is, while the first slide member 2720 on the left side slides, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is blocked by the rack portion 721a of the first slide member 2720, but the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 passes through the detection hole 2721c. When reaching the penetrating position, the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected, and the position information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device. Further, since the detection hole 2721c is formed in a long hole shape, the speed information of the left first slide member 2720 is output to the main control device by detecting the length at which the transmitted light of the detection device 2716 is detected. It

  Based on the position information and the speed information of the left first slide member 2720, the reverse feed acceleration necessary for the right first slide member 2720 to abut the left first slide member 2720 at a constant speed is obtained. It is calculated and controlled so that the first slide member 2720 on the right side is moved by the acceleration.

  Thereby, the impact at the time of contact between the pair of first slide members 2720 can be softened, and the durability of the first slide members 2720 can be improved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the changing sliding portion 333 of the upright member 330 is slid in the upright holes 316 and 2316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotatable roller may be provided in the changing sliding portion 333, and the roller may roll in the standing holes 316 and 2316. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the resistance generated when the posture of the upright member 330 changes.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is gradually reduced from the lower end of the guide hole 315 to the upper end thereof. Although the case of being formed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the gap formed between the body member 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 may be abruptly changed in a part of the guide hole 315. That is, at least two types of changes in the gap may be formed. In this case, the degree of change in the slide resistance of the arm member 320 can be changed (abruptly or loosely).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member is gradually reduced from the lower end of the guide hole 315 to the upper end thereof. Although the case of being formed has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the gap formed between the base member 310 and the main body portion 331 of the upright member 330 and the base member 310 may be gradually reduced from the lower end of the upright hole 316 toward the upper end thereof. Good. In this case, the resistance applied to the upright member 330 when the arm member 320 is started from the retracted position toward the extended position is suppressed, and the wobbling of the upright member 330 is suppressed when the arm member 320 is arranged at the extended position. can do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the size of the gap formed between the main body 321 of the arm member 320 and the collar member and the base member 310 is changed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 may be reduced from the lower end toward the upper end. In this case, the reduction degree of the diameter orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide hole 315 can be formed so as to be different from the center of the sliding portion 326.

  That is, the right side surface of the guide hole 315 (right side in FIG. 18A) is a portion formed above the sliding portion 326 of the arm member 320, and the arm member 320 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. When the arm member 320 is moved, the arm member 320 is abutted positively when the arm member 320 slightly moves in the surface direction (direction perpendicular to the surface thickness direction) of the base member 310 due to play with the swing shaft. By greatly reducing the reduction degree of the groove width from the stage close to the retracted position, the swinging of the arm member 320 in the projecting direction can be made smooth.

  On the other hand, the left side surface of the guide hole 315 (left side in FIG. 18A) is a portion that is brought into contact when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position and when the arm member 320 tilts forward. Therefore, by reducing the degree of reduction of the groove until it reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 and forming the groove abruptly near the upper end, the resistance received when the arm member 320 is swung toward the retracted position is obtained. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to prevent the sliding portion 326 from contacting the left side surface of the guide hole 315 when the arm member 320 is swung from the extended position to the retracted position, or when the arm member 320 tilts forward. The resistance generated when the member 320 swings from the extended position to the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, the driving force required for the driving device 340 can be reduced and the driving device 340 can be downsized.

  The same effect can be obtained by changing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 to the guide hole 315 depending on the portion of the guide hole 315 without changing the groove width of the guide hole 315. For example, in the vicinity of the lower end of the guide hole 315, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 as compared with the vicinity of the upper end, from the time of starting when the arm member 320 is swung from the retracted position to the extended position, The sliding portion 326 can be easily brought into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. Thereby, the swing of the arm member 320 can be made smooth.

  Further, by increasing the diameter from the swing shaft 312 in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide hole 315 as compared with the vicinity of the lower end, the arm member 320 is positioned at the projecting position, and the arm extends from the upper side surface of the guide hole 315. A downward force acts on the sliding portion 326 of the member 320. As a result, the driving force required at the time of starting the arm member 320 swinging from the extended position to the retracted position can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where all the reflecting members 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 are simultaneously rotated has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation timing may be shifted or the rotation speed may be shifted for each reflecting member 520. Thereby, the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light source and reflected by the reflection member 520 can be set in various ways, and the front side of the reversing operation unit can be rendered brightly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating member 523 of the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 meshes with the first rack gear 553 of the transmitting member 550 to rotate the reflecting member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not. For example, the transmission member 550 may be formed of a rotating belt and the rotating gear 523 may be formed of a roller. In this case, even if the rotating belts further rotate while the reflecting members 520 are in contact with each other, slippage occurs between the rotating belts and the rollers, and further rotation of the reflecting members 520 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflection member 520 from being damaged.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the expansion gear 523 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed with the expansion teeth 523a and the first rack gear 553 of the transmission member 550 is formed with a space is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. is not. For example, the expansion teeth 523a may be formed on the transmission member 550 and the tooth spacing may be formed on the rotary gear 523.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the reflecting member 520 of the reversing operation unit 500 is formed of an opaque resin material has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reflecting member 520 may be made of a transparent resin material. In this case, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light source regardless of whether the reflection member 520 is in the closed state or the open state, so that the player can visually confirm the effect of the light emitted from the light source for a long time. You can

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one slide member 720 of the pair of first slide members 720 of the second slide operation unit 700 is pushed by the other slide member 720 and slides is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, each of the pair of first slide members 720 may be formed to be always driven by an independent drive motor.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the pair of second slide members 740 directly contact the main body portions 741 with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, elastic members such as rubber and coil springs may be provided on the surfaces of the main body 741 that are in contact with each other. In this case, the impact can be softened as compared with the case where the main body portions 741 are directly contacted with each other, so that the durability of the second slide member 740 can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the second slide operation unit 700 is formed so that the shape of the “heart” can be visually recognized in the front view in the state where the slide members 720 and 740 are projected has been described. It is not limited. For example, the visually recognized shape is not limited to the “heart” and may be, for example, a “star”, a “fish”, a “car”, or the like. Further, different shapes may be formed so as to be visible when the slide members 720 and 740 have different degrees of protrusion. In this case, the effect of the second slide operation unit 700 can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one second slide member 740 of the pair of second slide members 740 pushes and moves the other second slide member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, by attaching a magnet to the contact portion of the second slide member 740, it is possible to move the magnet in the pulling direction. In this case, the pair of slide members 740 can be reciprocated by the drive motor 773 that slides the one second slide member 740. Therefore, for example, when one drive motor 773 is newer than the other drive motor 774, it is possible to switch the motor to be driven according to the situation such as driving the second slide member 740 using only the drive motor 773. Therefore, the life of the pair of drive motors 773 and 774 can be adjusted.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on the lower end side of the decorative portion 723, that is, the lower end side opposite to the upper end side to which the driving force is transmitted, of the both ends in the longitudinal direction of the decorative portion 723. . In this case, the impact on the upper end side of the first slide member 720 when the pair of first slide members 720 abut can be softened, so that the load on the drive motors 771, 772 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the carriage receiving portion 721b and the carriage main body portion 722a of the carriage portion 722 are brought into contact with each other when the pair of first slide members 720 are brought into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the pair of first slide members 720 may abut on both the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative portion 723. In this case, since the contact area of the pair of first slide members 720 can be increased, the load applied per unit area when the pair of first slide members 720 contact can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the movement of one of the pair of first slide members 720 is reliably transmitted to the other, when the pair of first slide members 720 are slid and moved, the pair of slide members 720 are The effect of visually recognizing them as one unit can be made remarkable. At this time, if the contact points on both sides are hidden by the front cover member 730, the pair of slide members 720 that are separated from each other are visually recognized in a coordinated manner, so that the effect of the pair of slide members 720 can be improved. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotating body group 722b of the carriage 722 is formed to have the same diameter has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the diameter of the rotating body group 722b may be formed large in the one first slide member 720 and small in the other first slide member 720. In this case, the small diameter rotating body group 722b can be sandwiched between the large diameter rotating body group 722b and the first slide shaft S1. This makes it possible to improve the effect of braking the rotating body group 722b by bringing the rotating body groups 722b into contact with each other.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed at one place in the first slide member 2720 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection holes 2721c are formed at a plurality of locations (for example, one end portion, the central portion, and the other end portion of the main body portion 2721 of the first slide member 2720), so that the first slide member 2720 stops. Multiple positions can be formed. At this time, the positions of the first slide member 2720 can be detected at a plurality of points by the detection period of the detection device 2716 by changing the lengths of the detection holes 2721c in the longitudinal direction.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection hole 2721c is formed in the shape of a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection hole 2721c may be formed in a circular shape. In this case, the processing cost of the detection hole 2721c can be suppressed. Even when the detection hole 2721c is circular, a plurality of detection holes 2721c are continuously formed along the sliding direction of the first slide member 2720, so that the detection device 2716 is moved during the movement of the first slide member 2720. The moving speed of the first slide member 2720 can be determined by the time interval at which the transmitted light is blocked. In addition, by changing the number of circular detection holes 2721c to be formed for each position (for example, both ends and the central portion) in the longitudinal direction of the first slide member 2720, the transmission of the detection device 2716 during the movement of the first slide member 2720 is performed. The position of the first slide member 2720 can be detected by the number of times the light is blocked.

  In the second embodiment, a case where the position and speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected by the positional relationship between the detection device 2716 and the detection hole 2721c after one slide member 2720 is stopped at the extended position is described. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when only the position or speed of the other first slide member 2720 is detected, the relative speed difference between the pair of first slide members 720 is suppressed by running at least one of the first slide members 2720 in the reverse direction. It is possible to suppress the impact at the time of contact.

  In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which one detection device 2716 detects the position and speed of the pair of second slide members 740, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pair of detection devices 2716 may be arranged corresponding to the pair of second slide members 740, respectively. In this case, the position and speed of the other second slide member 740 can be detected regardless of the arrangement of the one second slide member 740.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the detection device 2716 is arranged on the base member 2710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection device 2716 may be provided on at least one of the pair of second slide members 740. In this case, the relative speed of the pair of second slide members 740 can be detected.

<Regarding First Control Processing Example>
Next, a first control processing example in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 96.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), as a trigger, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. The third symbol is commonly displayed as a variable display with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed in preference to the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time. Has been done.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed and displayed at the same time, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. It may be possible. With such a configuration, more lottery games can be executed at the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of the numbers "0" to "9".

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the end. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row having three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

  Further, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol column → the right symbol column → the middle symbol column. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the lower part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, is the reserved ball. One identification symbol (holding symbol) of "black circle" is displayed for one and the player is informed. The player can determine the current number of holding balls by the number of holding symbols.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the reserved symbol, a character symbol, a character, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. To be done. When the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 or the digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

  When the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol displaying device 81 (first symbol displaying device 37), the number of times of winning is respectively. Up to four times are reserved, the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved symbol is also displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 72). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning opening 64, which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, The values of the per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop-type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal starting openings (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is stored. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is When it matches with the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the random number table per 1, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Also, this first random number table is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period that is a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability that the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of a low probability (special symbol) Of high random numbers) and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9". It is determined whether there is any, and if any of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired is "9", and if "9", it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, the first special symbol, at the time of low probability of the second special symbol, there is one random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "9" is as described above. It is stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that are jackpots for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the value "0-9" is the first random number for high probability. It is stored in the table 202a. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of special symbols is "1/30".

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" is "big hit A". When the random number value is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are two types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type that a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol can be more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the game play for a longer time.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 72) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 55 (a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202b, for example, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", and "disconnection super reach" are defined as displacement patterns for disengagement. As the variation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and various types of “super reach” are defined. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table, the variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation is provided corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110. The pattern content is selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 53 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Also, the second per random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability (normal symbol). For a period of time saving state), and the numbers of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  FIG. 53A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c described above. In this second random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened for "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640. Is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first winning port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but the opening time The number of times and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 72).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing (see FIG. 72), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 71). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, It has a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability variation valid flag 203p, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time saving medium counter 203t, and another memory area 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas The values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2, which are acquired based on the winning of the first winning opening 64, are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second winning opening 640 are stored, respectively, and other Since the configuration is the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Normally symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserve sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b, one execution area and four reserve areas (reserve first area to reserve fourth area) ) And have. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either of the left and right normal starting ports 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the prize stored in another reserved area, The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the holding area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 (third) This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of 4. This special symbol 1 hold sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 66). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 64).

  The value of this special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command (S211 of FIG. 64, FIG. 66). (See S405). The special symbol 1 holding sphere number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is changed, by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the fluctuation held by the main control device 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in that it is different in that the number of held spheres held is entered into the second winning opening 640. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is changed, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number command is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 holding sphere numbers (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 68).

  When the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 Value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 69). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the right or left normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c ( 69, S703: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state (probability variation game state). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low-probability gaming state (including a time saving gaming state). In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S1213 of FIG. 75). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power cutoff occurs, the state immediately before the power cutoff is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 51 (a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON (S1213 in FIG. 75). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. The configuration may be configured such that 203h is officially turned on and then returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before power-off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1241 in FIG. 77). In addition, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1271 in FIG. 78). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j indicates the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 (that is, the number of gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65) in one round in the jackpot game. It is a counter for counting. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 49) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (in FIG. 77). S1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are given to the first variable winning device 65. After it is discriminated whether the two match (S1267 in FIG. 78), the initial value "0" is reset. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds in the jackpot A based on the start of 13 rounds, and the passage solenoid 65k is turned on in the jackpot B for 0.5 seconds based on the start of 13 rounds. Is set. In the operation counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 13 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (S1202 in FIG. 74). On the other hand, in the process of S1239 of the winning process (S1112 of FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0 (S1243: Yes in FIG. 77), the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting the notification effect (in the present embodiment, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls winning in the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the processing of S1224 of the notification processing (FIG. 76, S1111) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described process for outputting the voice.

  With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, as will be described in detail later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the third symbol display device 81. The word "attention", which is a notification prompting the player to watch, is displayed. In the 13th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined by the operation period of the passage solenoid 65k. In order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game, a notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 51 (a)) The production is being executed. However, when the twelfth round is finished, the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display. Therefore, during the interval period, the player is informed to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed content, and divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by notifying the third symbol display device 81 to be shown, the switching member 65h is configured to divert the player's attention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and before the 13th round, the first The variable winning a prize device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured so as to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so as to look at it. Further, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during twelve rounds and giving a notification prompting the reader to read the code with a mobile phone. In this embodiment, the distracting effect is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of 13 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1264 in FIG. 78). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls in the first variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game balls winning the first variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the first variable winning device 81 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203o, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match. (S1267 in FIG. 78). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly notify that the game ball is clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 13th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the fraud of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 51A) is based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, and the probability variation switch 65e3. It is less than the time required to pass through. That is, the period during which the probability variation valid flag 203p is on indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation validity flag 203p is set to ON. It is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the player can illegally enter the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, or play the piano wire or the like from below the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing a sphere up and letting it pass, or causing a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by radio waves.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 51A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1271 in FIG. 78).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time shift game state of 100 times is entered.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a long press effect lottery table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. There is.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns not shown. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the hit / miss determination, and the acquired selection counter value. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  In the long press effect lottery table 222b, when the SW variation pattern in which the display mode in which the display mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22 is displayed is selected as one of the variation patterns described later, the frame button 22 is selected. 5 is a selection table for selecting a notification mode for notifying the operation timing of FIG. FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press effect lottery table 222b. In this long-press production lottery table 222b, a notification mode type of an operation method related to a long-press operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a certain period or longer is set as a long-press navigation type. As the long press navigation type, three types of long press navigation A, long press navigation B, and long press navigation C are set.

  Here, each long-press navigation type will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the long press navigation B. FIG. When the SW variation pattern is selected and the long press effect B is selected, the character "Long press to get big hit GET !!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (a), and the player long presses. By executing, a notification mode in which it is expected that a jackpot will be given is notified.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the characters "Let's predict the long press start timing within the period meter!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the color is below it from the left side to the right side with time. An indicator that changes in the direction is displayed. By this notification, the player starts pressing the frame button 22 at an arbitrary timing until the correct long-press start period is predicted and all the colors of the indicators are changed. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is started, as shown in FIG. 61B, the timing of releasing the long press (timing of releasing the pressing of the frame button 22) is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the character “Release at count 0!” Is displayed, and below that, an indicator whose color is sequentially changed from the left side to the right side is displayed. At the upper right corner of the indicator, the characters "3, 2, 1, 0, release !!" are displayed, and the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the color of the indicator changes to just below the character "0". You are navigating to unlock. Note that, here, the countdown may be displayed in characters, and the frame button 22 may be released at the timing when the characters “Release !!” are displayed.

  As described above, in the notification mode of the long-press Navi B, the player can predict the timing of the long-press start and clearly inform the player of the release of the long-press, thereby configuring the navigation with medium difficulty. is doing.

  When the timing of the long press start coincides with the start timing set in advance in the SW variation pattern, the player is informed that the jackpot is the jackpot if the result of the hit determination is a jackpot. This allows the player to know that it is a big hit early.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation A is selected. In the notification mode of the long-press Navi A, the player expects that the third pattern display device 81 displays the character "GET big hit at long-press timing !!" and the big hit is given at the timing of long-press. The notification mode to be displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), an indicator is displayed, and after a long press for an arbitrary period while the color of the indicator changes, a long period preset by the player is set. The characters "apply a long press period !!" are displayed to encourage you to apply a long press period.

  As described above, in the long press navigation A, the notification mode in which the player has to predict both the start timing of the long press and the release timing of the long press is configured in the navigation notification mode of the highest difficulty level. ing.

  FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the long press navigation C is selected. When the long press Navi C is selected, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the characters "GET big hit in the designated long press period !!" are displayed, and the long press is performed at the designated timing and period. A notification prompting the player to execute is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), an indicator is displayed, the characters "start" and "end" are displayed below the indicator, and the color of the indicator is changed to the start by pressing and holding. It is informed that the long press will be released at the timing of “start” and “end”.

  In this way, the long press Navi C is the navigation content with the lowest difficulty level among the long press Navi types, and as will be described later, it is the notification mode that is selected only when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the long press effect lottery table 222b, a value (a range of 0 to 198) of an effect counter 223f, which will be described later, is set for each long press navigation type for each hit determination result. There is. When the hit / no hit determination result is a hit, it is set so that the long-press navigation type having a lower difficulty level can be selected more easily than when it is a miss. This makes it possible to change the sense of expectation for a jackpot depending on the displayed long-press navigation type. Further, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot is awarded or not depending on the operation method of the player, and to provide the player with a fresh game.

  If the long-press operation is not executed even after a predetermined period of time, the long-press effect may be terminated midway and switched to a predetermined main symbol variation effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the game even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a long press flag 223g, a long press counter 223h, a SW effective time storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved balls and the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

  The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), Which is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b holds the holding ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of spheres is subtracted, a reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 25). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c stores the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b based on the holding sphere number command output from the main controller 110. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 82). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1605 in FIG. 81), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1706 in FIG. 82). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although illustration is omitted, it is updated by one each time the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The long press flag 223g is a flag indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 3 seconds or more and has been pressed for a long time. The length of time that the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is counted by a long press counter 223h described later, and if the count value is equal to or greater than the count value indicating 3 seconds, the long press flag 223g is set to ON. .

  The long press counter 223h is a counter for counting the time during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. In the present embodiment, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 3 seconds or more, it is determined to be a long press, and it is determined that an operation different from the normal pressing of the frame button 22 is executed (S1810 in FIG. 83). ) Is configured. It is possible to determine whether or not the long press is being executed by the long press counter 223h.

  The SW effective time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is the above-described SW variation pattern, it is determined that the frame button 22 set in the variation pattern is OFF. The period (time) set to OFF when the button 22 is valid (S1807: No in FIG. 83) is set in the SW valid time storage area 23i as the SW valid time. When the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i, the SW valid time is decremented by 1 and updated based on the elapse of the SW valid time (see S1806 in FIG. 83).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Direction) and notice production are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240, 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 84).

  The power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. It is displayed on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area A power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to display the images alternately on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball into the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time saving period of this ordinary symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so the chances of drawing the ordinary symbol will increase, and the chances of winning the ordinary symbol also increase. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbols to be released as a jackpot for the ordinary symbols, the balls easily enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbols are easily drawn. Therefore, the longer the shortened time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that it will be a big hit for the special symbol, which can be given to the player, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters, so that the electric prize is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls there are. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, or a state in which the number of balls held does not decrease even after playing a game. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  Also, in the ending production, by notifying that any one of the lottery results of the special symbols being held will be a jackpot of the special symbol, the player is a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbols being held. Since it is possible to recognize that the jackpot will be a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot of the special symbol is surely made. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2, ...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 57) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 58). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data is defined (meaning address “0002H” in FIG. 15).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 59) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 58, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 84) executed (see S2005 in FIG. 84). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S2305 in FIG. 86 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 86B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 86B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 86 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 87 to 90) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 94A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 94B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 59) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 86 (b)). In step S2303), the pointer update processing (see step S3005 in FIG. 93) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 59), and at the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to start the transfer is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 59, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 86 (b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 of FIG. 91). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 95). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 86B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 96).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 63 to 78. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When they reach 299, 99 and 239 respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, special symbol variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is accompanied by the passage of the sphere. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) is set to a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it is a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S215 ends, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process However, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set (S217), and then the setting of the start of jackpot A (such as 16 rounds). The jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of this lottery is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , Respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time, the jackpot of the special symbol Whether or not the lottery result is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 53 (b)) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number to be hit are the same. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, a random number value determined to be off in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and a big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big hits.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour / hour counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), so the first obtained in the process of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 53 (b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "9" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol Is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of the big hit showing the big hit A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 55A) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S307).

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display state at the time of detachment corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Then, this process is completed.

  Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the starting winning process is performed. When there is, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, the entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 72) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the reserved sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. With respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, only the difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the prefetching process (S413) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 67, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning combination in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501; No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a probable change (S502), and the gaming state. Is a certain change (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S502, if the game state is not a certain change (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In the process of S505, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processes of S503 and S504 is set (S505), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device, and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning port 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being displayed on the second symbol display device. The middle and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second symbol per random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and a low value. Based on the probability per second random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 53 (a)).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S610 or S611, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible, even in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol, as in the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the second winning opening 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the second winning port 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning port 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 72) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the ordinary symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 68, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is opened and closed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 72) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), and it is determined whether or not the ball normally passes through the symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 69, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball does not pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 72), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 63) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) and the start winning award process (see FIG. 66) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 73) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 72), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the change time elapses from the start of the change, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the stop symbol (first symbol) is the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 68), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. End the display, in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 68), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 70 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 72), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 73, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 64) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (S1105). FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 74, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Then, this process is completed. In the process of S1202, the operation of the passage solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

  In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (S1106). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1106: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1107). After that, the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1108). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1109). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is finished, the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is a ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Then, this process is completed.

  Details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 75, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 75, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1212). The probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1213). Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON. Then, this process is completed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, the probability variation game state is given after the big hit game. Therefore, whether the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65e3 during the big hit game or not. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification processing is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222). The determination of the end timing of the twelfth round is made based on whether it is detected that ten balls have been won in the twelfth round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1222, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the twelfth round (S1222: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in S1223, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the end of 12 rounds, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is given. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, it is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the jackpot game is over, with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1224). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1225: Yes), the notification command is set (S1226). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "Look at the liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 76, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (S1112 of FIG. 77), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1231). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1231: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1231: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1233). Then, the process of S1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1232: No), the process of S1234 is executed.

  In the process of S1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1234: Yes), the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1236). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1237). Then, the process of S1238 is executed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress since the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1234, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1235). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1235: Yes), the process of S1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1235: No), the process of S1238 is executed.

  In the process of S1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1238). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1238: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1240: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i to update (S1241). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1242). Then, the process of S1243 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1240: No), the process of S1243 is executed. In the process of S1243, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1243). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1244). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1245). Then, this process is completed. Here, if the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, even if the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1238: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1246: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1246: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1247). It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1248). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1248: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to OFF (S1249). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1248, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1248: No), the process of S1240 is executed.

  As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability variation game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being improperly passed by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 77, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality process (S1113), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 78, S1113), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). Then, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

  In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1265). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1267).

  If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). Then, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65, and to prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if it is the big hit B.

  In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1271), and then this process is ended.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 79, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1402). As described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 80), the power-off process in S1514 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1514 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1402: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1514 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1516, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 of FIG. 80). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore, the process of S1404 to S1406 is performed and then S1408 is executed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset (started without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1409, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1409 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404 when the processing of S1408 is reached through the processing of S1406 through S1406. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1501 this time has been executed (S1501), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1512 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, the process of determining whether 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1502 to S1510, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1512 and the command determination process of S1511 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring / effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1508), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the command determination processing (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). The command determination process (S1511) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 80) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. . In addition, in this processing, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main controller 110 is read. It is further determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1601). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1602), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1603). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 82) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1607). When the reserved ball number command is received (S1607: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special map 1 reserved ball number command or the special map 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 the variable display is reserved in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1608). In addition, in the processing of S1608, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c which have been updated are respectively set to the display holding sphere command for notifying the display control device 114. After the processing of S1608 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), or the special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is smashed, every time the start winning is detected or every time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1608. The value of the number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of the detection of the starting winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1608 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1607, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1607: No), then it is determined whether the notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1609). When it is determined that the notification command is received (S1609: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this embodiment, "Look at the liquid crystal") is selected, and the display command for notification is set. Yes (S1610).

  Next, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. Then (S1619), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then in the processing of S1603 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 81), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1705). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1705: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1705: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1706), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 81), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1707). The stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. In the process of S1709, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1709). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the long press effect is started (S1801). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has not started (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the long press effect has started (S1801: Yes), the effect counter is acquired (S1802), and long press is performed from the long press effect lottery table 222b (see FIG. 55 (b)). A navigation pattern is selected (S1803). Next, the display command indicating the selected long press pattern is set (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the process of S1805, it is determined whether the SW valid time of the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0 (S1805). When it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1805: No), the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 80). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW valid time is greater than 0 (S1805: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted (S1806) and it is determined whether the frame button is on (S1807). Here, the subtraction of the SW effective time is to subtract the elapsed time (in the present embodiment, the counter value is subtracted by 1).

  When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (the frame button 22 is pressed), 1 is added to the long press counter 223h (S1808), and it is determined whether the long press flag 223g is on (S1808). S1809). When it is determined that the long press flag 223g is ON (S1809: Yes), the frame button input monitoring / effect process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press flag 223g is off (S1809: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810).

  When it is not determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: No), this processing is ended as it is, and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1810: Yes), the long press flag 223g is turned on (S1811), and the display command indicating that the long press is being performed is set (S1812). Return to main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1807 that the frame button 22 is off (the frame button 22 is not pressed) (S1807: No), it is determined whether the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more ( S1813). When it is determined that the value of the long press counter 223h is 3 seconds or more (S1813: Yes), a display command indicating long press off is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1815. On the other hand, if the long press counter 223h is not determined to be 3 seconds or more (S1813: No), the process of S1814 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1815. In the process of S1815, the long press counter 223h is reset (the counter value is set to 0 in this embodiment) (S1815), then the long press flag 223g is set to OFF (S1816), and the process returns to the main process.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in First Control Process Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 96. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 84, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 84). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 84) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 85, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S2102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. It is also possible to execute the processing of S2103 to S2105 after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2102 and S2102.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 84. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 94 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 94A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) that are the power-on images are simply drawn. Command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 86 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 86 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. Since the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issues a variation effect start instruction from the voice lamp control device. If it is through 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. You can Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interruption permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 (b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 59) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not ON, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305). The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, non-out-of-reach reach, complete disconnection, chance The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (eye) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the S2304 step is executed. Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 87, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2504 is used to measure the time of the fluctuating effect specified in the fluctuating display data table, and when the fluctuating effect in the fluctuating display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside, complete disconnection, chance line) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S2601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. However, before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is displayed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2408), If there is an image change command (S2408: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2409) and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the back image change command processing (S2409) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). . Then, among the rear surface image discrimination flags provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A to C), the rear surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is turned on, and other rear surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2702), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2701 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2702. . If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S2702 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two rear image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2410), and there is an error command. If (S2410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the error command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. The error command process is a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2802), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2801, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2802, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S2802 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command indicating long press among unprocessed commands (S2412), and If there is a command indicating pressing (S2412: Yes), long pressing effect processing is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401. Here, the command indicating the long press is the display command indicating the long press navigation pattern set in the process of S1804, the display command indicating the long press in progress set in the process of S1812, and the process of S1814. Corresponds to the display command that indicates that the long press is off.

  Details of the long press effect process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a long press effect process. This long press effect process executes a process corresponding to a command indicating a long press received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the long press effect process (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether or not the command is a long press navigation effect command (see S1804 in FIG. 83) (S2901). In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the effect is the long press navigation effect (S2901: Yes), the display data corresponding to the long press navigation is set (S2902), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  On the other hand, if the long press navigation effect is not determined (S2901: No), it is determined whether the long press command (see S1812 of FIG. 83) is received (S2903). In the process of S2903, if it is determined that the command is a long press command (S2903: Yes), display data indicating the start of the long press is set (S2904), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the long press command is not determined (S2903: No), the display data corresponding to the long press off is set (S2905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. 87. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), And the processes of S2402 to S2413 and S2419 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2413 and S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, The command determination process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 88 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 88 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and other For the command of, the process of discarding is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 88 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3001), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 91. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 91, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalization display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalization display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalization display. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

  In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 86 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting a display data table that defines that (not shown) is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3402 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the resident image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 86 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 86 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 of FIG. 86 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 87 to 89) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 91 to 93) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95) (see S3301: No in FIG. 94 (a)).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer updating process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and then receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3506 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the processing proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3507: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3513: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is that of the back face A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3517, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3518). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image is changed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in step A, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 86B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 103. In the second control example, the contents of the SW variation pattern are changed with respect to the first control example. In the first control example described above, the effect of long-pressing the frame button 22 is described to be executed in the SW variation pattern, but in the second control example, an effect of catching a fish at the timing of pressing the frame button 22. The difference is that is executed. Since other configurations are the same, other configurations are omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
The second control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 97A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, the long-press effect lottery table 222b is deleted and the capture effect lottery table 222c is added to the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The capture effect lottery table 222c is a data table in which the moving directions of the fish and net displayed in the SW variation pattern in the second control example are set. Here, with reference to FIG. 98, an example of a display mode displayed in the SW variation pattern displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW variation pattern in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the fish and the net are displayed, respectively, and further, the characters "Press the button according to the fish !!" are displayed. A display mode is displayed in which the player can obtain the fish by pressing the frame button 22 at the position where the fish enters the net. Further, on the right side of the display area, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed, and the color can be changed at high speed (for example, speed of 1 square per 0.5 s) by one square at a time (for example, from blue to red. Variable) and displayed. There are 6 scales, and the letters "GET" are displayed on the 3rd and 6th scales from the bottom. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state in which the color of the scale is variable, the display timing is such that the fish is just inside the net.

  On the other hand, the fish and the net are controlled so as to move and be displayed in the moving direction set by the SW effect type selected in the capture effect lottery table 222c. The fish and the net move to irregular positions, but the display is controlled so that the fish is located in the net at the timing when the position of the indicator “GET” of the indicator is changed.

  This makes it easier for the player to understand not only the positional relationship between the fish and the net, but also the timing at which the indicator changes, making it easier to understand when to press the frame button 22 and participate in the production of the SW variation pattern. It can be played easily. Therefore, the player can play the game while predicting the timing when the fish is displayed at the position of the net with the indicator. In addition, although the indicator is always displayed in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the indicator may be displayed when the expectation of the jackpot is high and not displayed when it is low. With such a configuration, by displaying the indicator, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased, and further the jackpot effect can be performed while the player can catch the fish.

  FIG. 97C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the capture effect lottery table 222c. In the capture effect lottery table 222c, the value of the effect counter 223f is set by allocating the value to the capture effects A to C when the hit determination result is a hit, and to the capture effects D to F when the result is a win. Has been done. The capture effects A to C are configured so that the frame button 22 can be pressed at the timing when the fish is inside the net, and are set as effects that allow the fish to be captured. On the other hand, the capture effects D to F are shorter than the period (period) when the fish enters the net, which is shorter than the period required to detect that the frame button 22 is pressed by pressing the frame button 22. Since it is set, it is set to be impossible to capture.

  In the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, if the result of the determination is wrong, even if the frame button 22 is accidentally pressed at the timing when the net and the fish match, the display is shifted. That is, the effect that the fish could be caught is not displayed. However, not limited to this, at a timing when the fish and the net match, the frame button 22 is instantaneously excluded (for example, a matching display period of 0.2 s) from the valid period, and the control is performed. It is possible to reduce the load of performing the shift display.

  In the capture effect A and the capture effect D, a display mode is set in which the fish and the net are moved laterally at random positions at high speed and displayed. The capture effect B and the capture effect E are display modes in which the fish and the net are moved and displayed at random positions. The capture effects C and F are display modes in which the fish and the net are diagonally moved to random positions and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the hit determination result is a hit, it is set to be more easily selected than when the capture effect A and the capture effect B are out of alignment. Therefore, the player can predict the hit / miss determination result based on the moving direction of the fish and the net (that is, the type of capture effect). Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the effect of the SW variation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the capture effect is selected by lot based on the selection of the SW variation pattern, but the SW variation pattern to be selected may be set in advance. . Further, in this control example, the moving direction of the fish and the net is configured to be set according to the type of capture effect, but the moving direction is not set in advance, and the display position is updated every time the display position of the fish and the net is updated. May be determined by lottery and updated. In this case, when the display is updated from the display positions of the fish and the net that are currently displayed, the moving direction and the moving distance may be determined by lottery and displayed. With this configuration, the positions of the fish and the net can be made more random, and the player can be provided with a fresh effect.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 97 (b). FIG. 97 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example (see FIG. 54B) in that the long press flag 223g and the long press counter 223h are deleted. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process in Second Control Example>
In the control process in the second control example, the contents of the control process in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are changed from those in the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 99. The second control example is different from the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 83, S1507) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 99, S1520). To do. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1520) in the second control example.

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (FIG. 99, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the capture effect, which is the SW variation pattern, is selected (S1821). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern selected based on the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is the SW variation pattern (variation pattern of capture effect). When it is determined that it is the variation pattern of the capture effect (S1821: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1822). The type of the capture effect is selected based on the effect counter 223f that has acquired the content of the capture effect from the capture effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 97 (c)) and the result of the hit determination corresponding to the selected SW variation pattern ( S1823). A display command indicating the selected capture effect is set (S1824). By outputting this display command to the display control device 113, the display mode corresponding to the selected capture effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The SW valid time set in the SW variation pattern is set in the SW valid time storage area 223i (S1825). Then, the process of S1826 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1821, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the capture effect is not selected (S1821: No), the processing of S1826 is executed. In the process of S1826, it is determined whether the counter value stored in the SW valid time storage area 223i is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (S1826). When it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S1826: Yes), the SW valid time is subtracted (S1827), and it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (pressed) (S1828). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1828: Yes), a display command indicating SW pressing is set (S1829). The SW valid time is reset to 0 which is an initial value. As a result, the SW effective time is reset together with the operation of the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the multiple effects from being changed and the player from being confused. On the other hand, in the process of S1826, when it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (S1826: No) or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is off in the process of S1828 (S1828: No), this process To finish.

  In the control example, the frame button 22 is pressed once in the capture effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be set a plurality of times.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device 114 in Second Control Example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. In the second control example, command determination processing (FIG. 87, S2302) is command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320), and display setting processing (FIG. 91, S2303) is display setting processing in the first control example. 2 (FIG. 102, S2330). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 100, the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 2 (FIG. 100, S2320). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 100, S2320) in the second control example, the processes of S2412 to S2413 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the first control example, and the processes of S2414 to S2415 are deleted. Are different in that each is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2410, when it is determined that the error command is not received (S2410: No), it is determined whether the command indicating that it is related to the SW effect is received (S2414). The command related to the SW effect corresponds to the display command indicating the selected capture effect (see S1824 in FIG. 99), the display command indicating the SW pressing indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like.

  When it is determined in the process of S2414 that the command related to the SW effect has been received (S2414: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (S2415). The SW effect process (S2415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect process (S2415). In the SW effect process, a process of executing setting of corresponding display data or the like is performed based on the command of the SW effect (capture effect) received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the command indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed. .

  In the SW effect processing (FIG. 101, S2415), first, it is determined whether the command is one of the capture effects A to F which is the SW effect (S2911). If it is a command indicating any of capture effects A to F (S2911: Yes), display data corresponding to the capture effect is set in the display data table. Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2911, when it is determined that the command does not indicate any of capture effects A to F (S2911: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913). If it is determined that the command indicates that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2913: Yes), the stop of the displayed content of the capture effect is set (S2914). Then, this process is completed.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, the positions of the net and the fish in the capture effect are fixed at the displayed positions for a certain period of time (in this control example, the initially set SW effective time elapses). It will continue to be displayed until (the same period as the period up to) has elapsed. After that, when the fish can be stopped at a position inside the net, a display mode indicating that the fish has been caught (for example, the character "Get !!") is displayed. On the other hand, when the fish is stopped at a position other than the position inside the net, a display mode indicating that the fish could not be captured (for example, the character “Failure to capture !!”) is displayed.

  Next, the display setting process 2 (S2330) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this display setting process 2 (S2330). In the display setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S2330) in the second control example, the SW effect display setting process (FIG. 103, S3030) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. The difference is that. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the processing of S3005 is executed, the SW effect display setting processing is executed (S3030). The SW effect display setting process (S3030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of this SW effect display setting process (S3030). In the SW effect display setting process (S3030), first, it is determined whether the SW effect (capture effect) is being displayed (S3031). Here, whether the capture effect is being displayed means that the indicator is variably displayed, that is, during the SW valid time, and the indicator before the frame button 22 is pressed is variably displayed at high speed. It indicates whether it is a period.

  If it is determined that the capture effect is not being displayed (S3031: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the capture effect is being displayed (S3031: Yes), it is determined whether the indicator is variably displaying the color of the scale corresponding to “Get” (S3032). When the scale of Get is variably displayed on the indicator (S3032: Yes), the display data in which the display positions of the fish data and the net data are matched is set (S3033). Then, this process is completed. Here, the display coordinates of the net data are set in accordance with the display coordinates of the fish data. With such a configuration, the display positions of the fish and the net can be matched with each other at the timing when the scale of the Get indicator is changed. In the present control example, in the capture effects A to C, the period in which the indicator is displayed in Get is set to be longer than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button is timed. It is set so that a fish can be caught by pressing 22. On the other hand, in the capture effects D to F, the period in which the indicator is displayed on Get is set to be shorter than the period required to press the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 can be pressed at any timing. It is constructed so that it cannot be captured.

  In the present embodiment, the captureable state and the non-captureable state are set by changing the time when the indicator is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the capture effects D to F, the frame button 22 is captured at the capture timing. When is pressed, the positions of the fish and the net may be forcibly shifted and displayed so that the fish cannot be captured.

  Further, in the present control example, the success of the capture is configured to notify the jackpot of the result of the success / failure determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the success of the capture gives the player a point to be used in the game as a game privilege. Alternatively, a URL for downloading a standby image used by a mobile phone, a three-dimensional code may be displayed, or a special background image may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect in which the capture is successful even when the result of the hit determination is out. Therefore, the player can be more entertained with the SW effect.

  In the processing of S3032, when the indicator is variably displayed at a position other than the position corresponding to Get (S3032: No), it is determined whether it is the timing at which the indicator variably displays the next graduation. (S3034). When it is determined that the indicator is the timing at which the next scale is variably displayed (S3034: Yes), the coordinate data for displaying the fish and the coordinate data for displaying the net are selected. The moving direction is set in the moving direction set in the capture effect (S3035). Here, a predetermined counter (not shown) is acquired, and the number of moving coordinates is determined and set by lottery. It is determined whether the updated display coordinates of the fish and the net match each other (S3036). If it is determined that they match (S3036: Yes), the same processing as S3035 is executed again (S3037). Thereby, when the indicator is not on the scale of Get, it is possible to suppress the problem that the display positions of the fish and the net match and the fish is displayed in the net. On the other hand, in the processing of S3034, if the timing of the indicator scale is not variable (S3034: No), or if it is determined that the position data does not match in the processing of S3036 (S3036: No), this processing ends. .

  In this way, although the movement direction set in the capture effect is set, the display positions of the fish and the net are randomly set by lottery, so that the display of the fish and the net can be irregular. . On the other hand, the variable indicator is preset in the display data table corresponding to the SW variation pattern. Therefore, the display of the indicator can be configured to be regularly changed and displayed.

  In this control example, the display positions of the fish and the net are configured to be determined by lottery each time the display positions are updated, but the present invention is not limited to this and is configured to be preset in the display data table like the indicator. You may.

  Further, in the present control example, the moving direction of the fish is defined by the type of the selected capture effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the positions of the fish and the net may be randomly set by lottery. Good.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. In the first control example, regardless of the game state (probability variation game state, time saving game state, etc.), the timing at which the special symbol starts changing when the holding ball is not stored is configured to be constant. However, the second control example is different in that the processing is executed so that the timing of the start of fluctuation varies depending on the game state. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
The electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 113 is changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third control example. In the third control example, a weight counter 203u is added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 53C) in the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The weight counter 203u, when the number of holding balls is 0 when the time is shortening (in the case of the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state), for counting the delay time for delaying the variation start timing of the second special symbol. It is a counter.

  This weight counter 203u, when it is determined that the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 0 when the time is shortening, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314 of FIG. 106). reference). Further, when the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, it is decremented by 1 and updated every time the short-time / medium-time variation process (S231 in FIG. 106) is executed.

  In this way, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 during the time saving, and if the variation of the special symbol is not executed, then the game ball enters the second winning opening 640. Even if it does, the fluctuation start is delayed for 1 second. Here, the second winning hole 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric winning object 640a is in an open state, a game ball can be easily won in the second winning opening 640. In this case, it is easy to win two or more game balls in a single open state. However, even if a plurality of game balls enter at once with the number of holding balls is 0, once the first game ball enters, the variation start of the second special symbol is set immediately. , The number of holding balls of the second special symbol is determined to be 0, and it becomes easy to select a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time. As a result, the efficiency of the game is reduced and the player is made uncomfortable despite the reduced working hours.

  However, in the characteristic configuration of the present control example, the timing of the start of fluctuation is delayed by 1 second by the weight counter 203u, so if the electric accessory 640a is opened during that time, a plurality of game balls are consecutive. Then, when entering the ball, it is possible to suppress the problem that the first special variation is started because the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined to be zero.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the number of the holding balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the state of variably stopping during the time saving, it is configured to set the delay time of 1 second, but is not limited thereto. It may be configured to set a delay time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than 3 seconds which is a variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the start of variation of the second special symbol until the timing when the electric accessory 640a is more opened, and it is possible to delay until the timing at which the game ball wins the second winning opening 640. . In addition, the delay time may be set in accordance with the timing when the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set. In this case, even if the delay time is short, it is possible to effectively discriminate that the number of holding balls is zero and select a relatively long variation pattern. Further, it is not limited to the time slot and the second winning opening 640.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 55A, in the variation pattern selection table 202b, a relatively long variation pattern is set to be easily selected when the number of holding balls is 0 to 2. There is. Therefore, it is preferable to set a delay time for delaying until the number of holding balls becomes three or more.

  Further, in the present control example, in the time-saving game state, the variation start of the second special symbol is configured to be delayed, but the invention is not limited to this, it may be a probability variation game state, and the timing to be delayed is determined by lottery. Alternatively, the number may be delayed when the number of reserved balls is equal to or less than a certain number (for example, one). Further, not limited to the second special symbol, it may be configured to delay with the first special symbol. Further, at the end timing of the jackpot game, by delaying the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol, it is configured to suppress the problem that it is determined that there is no reserve ball number of the second special symbol and fluctuation starts Good.

  In the present control example, it is configured to delay the timing of the fluctuation start, but not limited to this, the fixed time of the special symbol during the fluctuation (the period from when the fluctuation time elapses until the fluctuation is determined, That is, the period from when the symbol is fixedly stopped until it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped in the process of S202 of FIG. 64) is set to be variable, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not stored, The period may be set to be long.

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is made to delay when the time is shortened, but at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the period until setting of fluctuation start every time (holding ball is discriminated to set fluctuation start It may be configured to set a longer period). Further, regardless of the game state, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the timing for setting the variation start of the second special symbol may be delayed.

<Regarding Control Process in Third Control Example>
Next, the control process in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The third control example is different from the first control example in that the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111). The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third control example. In the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 105, S111) in the third control example, the processes of S231 to S233 are added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether the time is shortening (S231). During the time saving, it is determined whether the probability variation game state or the time saving game state. When it is determined that the time is shortening (S231: Yes), the time-shortening fluctuation process is executed (S232).

  Details of the time saving medium variation processing (S232) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving medium fluctuation processing (S232). In the time saving process (FIG. 106, S232), first, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311). If the weight counter 203u is greater than 0, it means that the delay time has already been set for the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the weight counter 203u is greater than 0 (S311: Yes), the value of the weight counter 203u is subtracted by -1 and set (S312). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S311, when it is determined that the weight counter 203u is 0 (S311: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e which is the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 0. It is determined whether or not (S313). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S313: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the weight counter 203u (S314). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S313, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not 0 (S313: No), this processing ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 105, the description is continued. After the processing of the time saving medium fluctuation processing (FIG. 106, S232) is executed, the processing of S233 is executed. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the weight counter 203u is a value larger than 0 (S233). If the counter value is set in the weight counter 203u, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the weight counter 203u is 0 (S233: No), the process of S203 is executed.

  In this way, until the weight counter 203u is executed, the variation start of the special symbol is not set, so that the variation of the second special symbol is suppressed from being suspended from 0 to 2 during the time saving and is suppressed from being executed. it can. In the present control example, the value set in the weight counter 203u is set to 1 second, but not limited to this, it is a time longer than the fluctuation time (3 seconds in the present control example) of the normal symbol during the time saving 5 It may be configured to set the seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably control so that the variation start of the second special symbol is set after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 or more. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game efficiency is deteriorated during the time saving because it is determined that the number of reserved balls is small (0 to 2) and a relatively long variation pattern is selected.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. In the fourth control example, with respect to the first control example, the third symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times during the fluctuation period of one special symbol (stops by oscillating) to change the special symbol a plurality of times. As such, it is different in that a pseudo-effect is set. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the display mode in the pseudo continuous effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth control example will be described. Pseudo-continuous effect is a variation of one special symbol, by temporarily stopping the third symbol one or more times and displaying the variation again, as if the variation of one is multiple variations. It is a production to show to the player.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. When the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect is started, the fluctuation is changed at a low speed (dynamic display) that enables the identification of the symbol from the start of the fluctuation, and then the variation of the type of the symbol is difficult to identify. The speed becomes a high-speed fluctuation (dynamic display), and a temporary stop display is displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (b). FIG. 107 (b) is an example of a display mode in the case where the temporary stop display is performed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the third symbol is slightly shaken up and down and changed, and the character is displayed on the front side thereof. The static symbols are displayed overlapping each third symbol. This static symbol is set smaller than the size of each third symbol, and a part of the third symbol on the back side is visible. In addition, the stationary symbol is displayed at the timing of the variable display immediately before being temporarily stopped from the state in which the third symbol is changing at high speed before being temporarily stopped. Specifically, when being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is displayed semi-transparently, and the background image is transparent and visible. Then, immediately before the temporary stop display, specifically, 0.5 seconds before, the semitransparent display is canceled and the display is made in an opaque state. At that display timing, a still symbol is added and displayed. In addition, this static symbol is not displayed in a swaying manner like the third symbol and is displayed statically, so that the player is not temporarily stopped, but whether the third symbol is definitely stopped or not. You can feel like

  Therefore, the temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect can be made to be felt by the player as if it was a fixed stop, and it can be displayed as if the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

  In this control example, the static symbol is the same symbol for each third symbol, but it may be a different symbol or shape. Further, the brightness of the third symbol displayed on the back surface may be displayed lower than the brightness of the static symbol. By displaying in this way, the still symbol can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be made to feel as if the player has definitely stopped.

  In this control example, the static symbols are only displayed as characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the identification number of the third symbol displayed on the back side (for example, 7 for 7 symbols) is attached. You may comprise so that it may be displayed. With this configuration, the stationary symbol can be made to appear as if it were the third symbol, and the player can be made to appear more like the fixed stop.

<Regarding Control Process in Fourth Control Example>
Next, a control process in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109. In the fourth control example, the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed to the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the first control example. Differences in points. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display setting process 3 (S2340) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth control example. In the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) in the fourth control example, the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040) is added to the display setting process (FIG. 91, S2303) in the first control example. The difference is that. With respect to other configurations, the same processing as that of the first control example is executed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 109, the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040) which is one process in the display setting process 3 (FIG. 108, S2340) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040). In the symbol temporary stop setting process (S3040), a process of temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol is executed when the pseudo continuous effect is set. In the pseudo continuous effect, the timing of temporarily stopping the design is set in advance in a variation pattern, and is automatically set by defining the display data table.

  In the symbol temporary stop setting process (FIG. 109, S3040), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect variation display is being performed. When it is determined that the variation pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (S3041: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the temporary stop of the third symbol (S3042). When it is determined that it is not the temporary stop timing of the third symbol (S3042: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of temporary stop of symbols (S3043: Yes), still image data is set to the symbol position for temporary stop (S3043). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, the still image data is set to overlap the symbol information in the display data table. In this way, by executing the still image data to be displayed in an overlapping manner at the temporary stop display timing of the third symbol, the type of the still image data can be changed by the player's operation of the frame button 22, or other lottery, It can be variably set according to a notice display or the like, and can be a wide variety of still images.

  In this control example, in the pseudo continuous effect, the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number of times set in advance in the variation pattern, and then the third symbol is always in the reach display mode, and the display mode of the super reach is displayed. To be done. In the third symbol that is temporarily stopped, the still symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the player can identify the number of times the temporary stop is performed. At the first time, yellow is displayed, at the third time is set to red, and at the fourth time, gold is set and displayed. In practice, if the still image is displayed without swinging fluctuation, it becomes easier for the player to recognize as the number of times of actual fluctuation display instead of temporary stop. Therefore, the player expects that the variation display of the special symbols will be displayed as a super reach in the variation display of the special symbols when the static symbol indicating the number of consecutive times is displayed in the variation of the plurality of special symbols. You can In this control example, the larger the number of temporary stops, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is (it is easy to select when the result of the hit determination is a jackpot), and the temporary stop is executed four times. It is composed of only the pseudo continuous effect in which the result of winning / judging is a big hit. Therefore, when the red still symbol indicating the third time is displayed, the player can expect that the still image will be displayed even in the next variation, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, the static image is set to non-display at the timing when the third symbol is dynamically displayed again after the temporary stop. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily set the change of the third symbol.

  The still image is not limited to the character of the present control example, and may be a character or may be displayed in a size that hides the fluctuation fluctuation of the back third pattern. Actually, since it is a temporary stop, the still image may be transmitted so that the third symbol on the back side can be visually recognized so that the third symbol on the back side is slightly changed. .

<Fifth control example>
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 151. In each control example described above, it is determined whether or not the probability variation game state is given by the operation of the passage solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k in the first variable winning device 65 in which the game ball can enter during the jackpot game. Was configured to be. On the other hand, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is given by the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k in the V winning device 900 in which the gaming ball can enter during the small hitting game. It is different in that it is configured as follows. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 is provided in the lower central part in place of the second winning port 640, and the V winning device 900 is replaced in the right instead of the first variable winning device 65 in the control examples described above. It is different in that it is provided in the lower part, the second winning port 640 is provided in the upper part of the V winning device 900, and the electric accessory 640a is provided on the right side of the second winning port 640. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the details will be described later, the first variable winning device 65 has the same structure as the second winning port in each control example described above. Further, the V winning device 900 is different in that a retaining member 900n is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-described control examples, and the other structures are the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, differences between the game boards 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged view of the lower right part of the game board 13.

  In the lower right of the game board 13 in this control example, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 enters by natural fall. The second winning opening 640 is provided at a position (lower left position) where it cannot be played. Further, nails are provided from the left portion to the upper right portion of the second winning opening 640, and these nails have a predetermined interval to the above-described normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (an interval at which a game ball cannot pass). It is provided in. Further, the electric accessory 640a is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (or the right side thereof) can be guided to enter the second winning opening 640.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a operates in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by performing a retracting operation (closing operation) backward, the game ball does not be guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

  That is, the second winning opening 640 is configured so that the game ball does not enter unless the electric accessory 640a is opened. Further, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened, if the opening time (opening time) is short, the opening operation ends while the game ball is being guided, so 2 The player will not enter the winning hole 640.

  In the present embodiment, by providing a nail from the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 to the second winning opening 640, the game ball flowing down the left side of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is the second winning opening. Although it is configured not to enter the ball 640, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same configuration may be adopted by covering with a case body. As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as changing the distance between the nails so that the game ball can pass through. Further, the case body, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and the second winning opening 640 may be integrated into a case body, or only a part of them may be integrated into a case body.

  In addition, a shielding member that interlocks with the electric accessory 640a is provided to close the second winning opening 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (retracted state), and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (extended state). The second winning opening may be opened. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 640 even when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state.

  Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is configured to be changed based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a, whether or not to enter the second winning port 640. Not limited to this, a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a game ball that has passed through the passage port, a game ball that has just been shot, etc.) enters the second winning port 640 based on the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It may be configured such that whether or not to enter is changed.

  The V winning device 900 is provided below the second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640a, and the like described above. This V winning device 900 is provided with a V winning opening 900a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 900a, a predetermined game ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out to the player. Be done. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 900a passes a V winning switch 900e3, which will be described later, a jackpot game is awarded.

  At the upper part of the V winning opening 900a, an opening / closing door 900f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side is provided as in the above-described first control example, and the opening / closing door 900f1 should be opened. Then, the game ball can enter the V winning opening 900a, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed, so that the game ball cannot enter the V winning opening 900a. Details of the V winning device 900 will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. The opening / closing door 900f1 is opened / closed by a V inlet solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown.

  The upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 and the game ball rolling surface on the upper portion of the V winning device 900 are provided with a structure for suppressing the momentum of the rolling game balls (not shown). Specifically, use a material with a high coefficient of friction (eg, rubber, uneven material) to reduce the rolling speed, or use a structure in which rolling gaming balls collide to reduce the rolling speed. There is a structure that extends the rolling distance by guiding balls in the depth direction of the board. This is a structure for collecting a large number of game balls into the V winning device when the opening / closing door 900f1 is opened.

  On the left side of the V winning device 900, in the lower center of the game board, a first winning port 64 is provided, and below the first winning port 64, a first variable winning device 65 is provided. The first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in the big hit game (for example, 16 times in the case of a big hit C), and a predetermined amount is obtained by entering a game ball into the first variable winning device 65a. Gaming balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. In this control example, a device having the same structure as the second winning opening 640 described above in the first control example is treated as the first variable winning a prize device 65, and therefore, the same portions have the reference numerals changed from 640 to 65. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 900e in the V winning device 900 are distributed to a normal discharge channel 900e1 and a special discharge channel 900e2 described later. To do. In the V winning device 900 in the present control example, the retention member 900n is provided on the special discharge flow path 65e2 of the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example, and the V switch 900e3 instead of the probability variation switch 65e3. Is provided and is otherwise the same. In the present control example, a device having the same structure as the first variable winning device 65 described above in the first control example is treated as the V winning device 900, and therefore, for the same part, the reference numeral is changed from 65 to 900. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 900e showing a state in which the switching member 900h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  As described above, when the switching member 900h is operated, the game ball that has passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2. In this control example, the retention member 900n is provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2. By this staying member 900n, only one game ball can be retained in the distribution destination area 900h3, which is a destination area where the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 by the switching member 900h. As a result, when one game ball is retained in the distribution destination area 900h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 900e2 and is normally discharged. It will flow down to the flow path 900e1.

  The staying member 900n is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The staying member 900n operates in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a staying solenoid 209a (not shown). This retention member 900n can retain one game ball in the distribution destination area 900h3 by moving forward (closing operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (opening), the game balls staying in the sorting destination area 900h3 flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2.

  Here, in the V winning device 900, the game ball can enter by opening the opening / closing door 900f1 during the small hitting game. Further, the staying member 900n becomes a closing operation during a small hit game (when it is possible to enter the V winning device 900), and after the small hit game is over (no new entering the V winning device 900 is possible). The opening operation is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time (after being enabled) (after 3 seconds in this control example). That is, in this control example, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 even if the switching member 900h is operating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 from becoming excessive.

  The game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 will pass through the V switch 900e3. In the first control example, the probability variation game is configured based on the passage of the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the present control example, the jackpot game is configured to be imparted based on the passage of the V switch 900e3 ( (See S4603 and S4607 in FIG. 138, and S4904 in FIG. 142, which will be described later)).

  In the present control example, the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 are configured to be limited to one ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls can be retained in the sorting destination area 900h3. Alternatively, the staying member may be operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game, so that the number of restricted game balls may be changed as appropriate.

  With reference to FIG. 113 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 900e2 will be described. FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow passage solenoid 900k is inactive and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 900e2.

  In this control example, the retention member 900n provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 is configured to operate even when the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing depending on whether or not the flow path solenoid 900k is operated, so that it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

  When the flow path solenoid 900k is inactive, all the game balls that have passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 900e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, there is no influence of the staying member 900n newly provided in this control example, and the operation is the same as the above-described first control example, so a detailed description will be given. Is omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in terms of electrical configuration is one of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110, and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113. Part and a part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 are changed (added), and a stay solenoid 209a is added as the solenoid 209 connected to the main control device 110. However, the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example.

  The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a stay solenoid 209a is provided as the solenoid 209. As described above, the stay solenoid 209a is used to operate the stay member 900n in the V winning device 900. The solenoid (for example, the flow path solenoid 900k) described in each control example described above is handled as a part of the other solenoid 209z.

  As other changes, ROM 202 and RAM 203 in main controller 110, a part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in audio lamp controller 113, and a part of ROM 234 (effect) in display controller 114 are changed (added). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 115 to 127. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, each counter in this control example will be described in detail. This control example is different in that a small hit type counter C5 is added in addition to the counters in the first control example described above.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this control example), and after reaching the maximum value (99), returns to 0. This small hit type counter C5 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the special winning of the RAM 203 is performed. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Then, the small hit type is selected based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

  The other counters are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 116 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

  The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 116 (a)). This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

  In addition to the RAM 203 in the first control example, the RAM 203 in this control example includes a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit medium flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit medium flag 203w2, a V passing big hit type value 203x1, and a V flag. It has at least 203x2, a normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y. Note that, in this control example, the probability variation flag 203e is not necessary and is therefore omitted.

  The big hit start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a big hit start timing. This big hit start flag 203v1 is set to ON when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129), and is referred to in the big hit control process 2 to determine whether it is the big hit start timing. (See S4701 in FIG. 140), and when it is determined that it is the big hit start timing in the big hit control process 2, it is set to OFF (see S4702 in FIG. 140). As a result, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing. Although not shown in the drawings, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined in each of the control examples described above.

  The big hit medium flag 203v2 is a flag used for determining whether or not a big hit is being made, that is, whether a big hit game is being executed. This big hit medium flag 203v2, like the big hit start flag 203h described above, is set to ON when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol variation process (see S241 in FIG. 129). Then, in the jackpot control process 2, it is referred to for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (see S4704 in FIG. 140), in the jackpot control process 2, when it is determined that it is a jackpot end timing, It is set to OFF (see S4712 in FIG. 140).

  The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, in the small hit control process, it is referred to for determining whether it is the small hit start timing (see S4801 in FIG. 141), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the small hit start timing. Is set to off (see S4802 in FIG. 141).

  The small hitting flag 203w2 is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hitting is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process similarly to the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S4308 in FIG. 133). Then, the small hit control process is referred to for determining whether or not the small hit is in progress (S4807 in FIG. 141), and is turned off when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit. It is set (S4812 in FIG. 141).

  The V passing jackpot type value 203x1 is used to set a jackpot type to be given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. This V-big hit big hit type value 203x1 is set according to the small hit type in the small hit start setting process (S4305 or S4306 in FIG. 133). Then, the set V passing big hit type value 203x1 is acquired in the V passing process (S4601 in FIG. 138), and the V flag 203x2 is set based on the acquired value (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138). This V passing big hit type value 203x1 is cleared in the small hit ending process executed at the end of the small hit game (S4908 in FIG. 142).

  The V flag 203x2 is a flag for storing that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900, and determines the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203x2 at the end of the small hit. is there. This V flag 203x2 is set based on the value of the big hit type value 203x1 at the time of V passing in the V passing process (S4603, S4607 in FIG. 138), and referred to in the small hit ending process (S4902, S4904 in FIG. 142). After being referenced, it is set to off (S4906 in FIG. 142).

  The normal symbol time saving first flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the variation of the normal symbol in the time saving game is the first time. This normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is set to ON when the jackpot type is C at the timing of jackpot end in the jackpot control process 2 (see S4715 in FIG. 140), and is referred to in the regular symbol variation process. (See S642 in FIG. 136). Although the details will be described later, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is turned on with reference to the normal symbol variation process (S641: Yes in FIG. 136), the electric accessory 640a is for a long time (5 seconds). It is set so that a large number of game balls can be inserted into the second winning opening 640 (S642 in FIG. 136), and then turned off (S643 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is off (S641: No in FIG. 136), a little game is played to the second winning opening in which the electric accessory is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). The ball is set so that it can enter the ball (S644 in FIG. 136).

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 117. 117 (a) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 117 (d) are schematic views of the contents of the second random number table 202c. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the first winning random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the first winning opening 64 is a big hit. Special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is for determining whether or not it is a big hit. And a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 ( It is a table in which a judgment value) is set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "0", and if "0", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3," it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 399”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), a random number value (judgment value) that is determined as a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "0", and if "0", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "1 to 398", and if it is "1 to 398", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, if it is determined to be "399", it is determined to be out of position.

  As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, the random number value that is a big hit for the first special symbol is 1, and the total number of random number values is 400. Among them, the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot for the first special symbol is "1/400". Further, since the total number of random numbers for small hits is 3, the probability of small hits for the first special symbol is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, during the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the random number value which is a big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 400, and it is a big hit. Since the total number of random number values is 11, the probability of being a jackpot of the second special symbol is "1/400". Also, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398, the probability of being a small hit for the second special symbol is "398/400".

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 117 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the per-second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 204, the normal symbol hits and It is determined (see S640 in FIG. 136).

  As in the above control examples, if it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 112 and the like, the electric accessory 640a in the present control example operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the other solenoids 209z) not shown. This electric accessory 640a functions to guide the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 by advancing forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by performing a retracting operation (closing operation) backward, the game ball does not be guided to the second winning opening 640 (does not enter).

  As will be described in detail later, the electric accessory 640a in this control example is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds during the time saving, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds during the time saving. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is a win when the time is not shortening, the game ball cannot be won into the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the second winning hole even though he / she is not in the time saving period (the jackpot with the time saving is not displayed).

  Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a game ball drop area a (a in FIG. 112) that receives the game ball that naturally drops on the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation, and a position where the game ball does not naturally drop. And, it has a game ball guiding region b for guiding the game ball rolling from the game ball falling region a to the second winning opening 640.

  In other words, the length of the game ball guiding area b (the distance the game ball rolls) is at least the distance that the game ball rolls during the opening time (0.2 seconds) when the electric accessory 640a is not in the time saving state. By designing to be shorter than the distance that the game ball rolls during the longer and shorter time opening time (0.5 seconds), the game ball that falls on the electric accessory 640a can be reliably placed in the first opening operation during the time saving. It is possible to prevent the game ball dropped on the electric winning combination 640a from winning in the second winning hole in the opening operation when the player is guided to the second winning hole 640 and not in the time saving period.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118. 118A to 118C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first winning type selection table 202b selects a special jackpot jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the first winning opening 64, and a jackpot type of the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), during the big hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit C (16R hour short win big hit) is selected, In the case of "50 to 99", the big hit D (16R hour short no big hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), during the big hit based on the second winning opening 640, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99"), the big hit C (16R hour reduction) Big hit) is selected.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 119. 119 (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hit type selection table 202e is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting the type (see FIG. 119 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 1," the small hit C (V passage possible) is selected, In the case of "2-99", the small hit E (V cannot pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), when the value of the first hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49" at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit C (V pass is possible). In the case of “50 to 99”, the small hit D (V passable) is selected.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the operation of the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with small hits C and D, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is operating, and the game ball can enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. On the other hand, in the small hit game by the small hit E, the flow path solenoid 900k of the V winning device 900 is not operating. The game ball cannot enter the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hits C and D are small hits that are given big hits when the game balls pass through the V winning switch 900e3, and the small hits E are small hits that are not given big hits.

  Further, in the present control example, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, and the jackpot to be given after the small hit C is the large jackpot C (16R hour short-lived big hit). The jackpot to be given after D is a jackpot D (16R hour short no jackpot).

  In addition, in the present control example, the type of the big hit to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit, but as a specification other than that, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the gaming ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 so that the jackpot previously won the jackpot is executed. You may By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass the V prize switch 900e3, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)), At least the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 is defined. In the present control example, the probability variation state is not provided, and thus the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is omitted. Further, the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the time saving variation pattern table 202d4, variation patterns during time saving are defined as shown in FIG. 120 (d). Specifically, during the time saving, if the deviation is a deviation, the fluctuation pattern is a deviation (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and if it is a small hit, it is a long or small hit (10 seconds). In the case of a big hit, it is stipulated to be a big hit (20 seconds). In addition, the variation pattern in the case of the deviation during the shortening of time may be set to the long deviation (10 seconds), and may have the same length as the small hit.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The RAM 223 in this control example has at least a V entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a continuation determination counter 223m in addition to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 124 (b)). . Since the ROM 222 is the same as the ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the detection opening 900a1 of the V winning device 900. The V entrance passage counter 203j is incremented by 1 when the V entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the detection opening 900a1 is received (S5014 in FIG. 144). The V entrance passage counter 203j is referred to when setting the display effect command in the V passing process (S5103 in FIG. 145), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the V passing process. (S5106 in FIG. 145).

  The round number cumulative counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. The round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S5004 in FIG. 144), and the continuation determination counter 223m is set when the jackpot end command is received. If it is 0, it is initialized (S5009 in FIG. 144). In the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 203k (S5005 in FIG. 144), and the effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 203k is the third symbol display. It will be displayed on the device 81.

  The continuation determination counter 223m is a counter used to determine whether or not the big hit or the small hit continues, and is used to determine whether to initialize the above-described round number accumulation counter 223k. The continuation determination counter 223m is set to 2 when a small hit start command of small hit C is received (see S5013 in FIG. 144), and is subtracted by 1 when a small hit start command of small hit D is received. (See S5015 in FIG. 144). The continuation determination counter 223m is referred to when a jackpot end command is received (see S5008 in FIG. 144), and when the continuation determination counter is 0, that is, when the jackpot D is continuous twice, the jackpot and the jackpot are small. It is determined that the winning continuation has ended, and the round number cumulative counter 203k is initialized to 0 (see S5009 in FIG. 144).

  The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 143) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, the flow of the big hit in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In this control example, the game state is divided into a special figure 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 1) game state (left-handed game) and a special figure 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as special 2) game state (right-handed game) To be Special Figure 1 game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is shot aiming at the first winning opening 64. A lottery for the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 64, and if the jackpot type of the result of the lottery is jackpot C, the winning in the second winning opening 640 is achieved after the jackpot ends. An easy time saving game state (described as time saving in FIG. 122) is given. When shifting to the time saving game state, a right hitting game is performed in which a right-handed hit is performed in which a game ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second winning opening 640 arranged on the right side of the game board 13. On the other hand, if the big hit type of the lottery result of the first special symbol is big hit D, the special time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, so that the special figure 1 game state is performed again. In addition, in the present control example, there is also a route in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit type is a small hit C, a big hit (V prize). In this case, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a time saving game state.

  Next, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 640, is set to have a higher jackpot probability that is in a more advantageous state for the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. ing. In this control example, there is a hold storage function for holding and storing the right to receive the lottery based on the second special symbol, while the second special symbol is changing (specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. During the period from the stop display to the confirmation display), if the game ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second special symbol that is currently changing the right to perform the lottery based on the win It can be held until the finalized display (holding upper limit = 1).

  Next, of the special figure 2 game state, the flow of the big hit in the time saving medium game is explained. In this state, the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly performed. As described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 119, the lottery contents of the second special symbol are mostly distributed to the small hits. This is to increase the probability of occurrence of a big hit (V prize) via a small hit in order to increase the big hit probability of the second special symbol. Here, when the small hit type of the lottery result of the second special symbol is the small hit C, the time saving game state is given again after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the small hit type is a small hit D, the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and therefore the game shifts to the non-time saving period in which the time saving game in the special figure 2 game state is not given.

  Next, of the special figure 2 game state, the flow of the big hit in the non-time saving medium game will be described. In this state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol held and stored by the holding storage function of the second special symbol is executed. As a result of the lottery, when the small hit type is small hit C, the time saving game is given after the end of the big hit, and thus the time saving game state is entered. On the other hand, when the small hit type is the small hit D, the time saving game state is not given after the end of the big hit, and there is no pending storage, so that the game state shifts to the special figure 1 game state. It should be noted that since this state is in a non-time saving state, new reserved storage cannot be acquired.

  In the control example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the symbol hit of the jackpot type C of the jackpot C may be selected.

  That is, the lottery based on the second special symbol, which is a lottery advantageous to the player, is designed to be performed at least twice using the holding function described above. Unless the small hit D is selected twice in succession, it is possible to loop the special figure 2 game state.

  FIG. 123 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning in the second winning opening 640 to occurrence of a big hit game in this control example, and (a) shows that the lottery result based on winning in the second winning opening 640 is small. In the case of winning, the jackpot (V prize) by passing through the special discharge route 900e2, (b) is for explaining the case where the lottery result based on the winning of the second winning opening is the jackpot (per symbol). is there. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 640, the main controller 110 performs the variation control of the second special symbol. At that time, in the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing is executed. The time of the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 100 starts the small hit control, the V inlet solenoid, the flow passage solenoid 900k, and the retention solenoid 209a provided in the V winning device 900 are turned on ( 113 (a) state). In this state, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900, so that a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 900, and one of them enters the stay member 900n. It becomes a staying state (900h in FIG. 113), and the other game balls normally flow down the discharge flow path 900e1. The time for the small hit effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later.

  Next, the flow of the small hit control by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the total time for the small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hit control is started, the V inlet solenoid among the plurality of solenoids described above is turned off, and the opening / closing door 900f1 is closed. By closing the opening / closing door 900f1, a new game ball will not be won in the V winning device 900. Then, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the stay solenoid 209a is turned off, the stay member 900n is opened (retracted state), and the game ball stayed by the stay member 900n flows down to the special discharge path 900e2. I will do it. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the gaming balls existing in the V winning device 900 when the set time t1 has passed to flow down the normal discharge flow path 900e1. Only the game balls retained by the retention member 900n in the device 900 flow down the special discharge flow path 900e2. Then, the set time t3 (1 second) elapses, the flow path solenoid 900k is turned off, and the guide piece 900h2 of the switching member 900h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 900e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to allow the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 to flow downstream from the movable range of the guide piece 900h2 when the set time t2 has elapsed.

  In this way, by driving the stay solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 900k with a time difference, even if the game ball is stayed by the stay member 900n within the movable range of the guide piece 900h2, the guide piece 900h2 and the stay member 900n are retained. Since it can be surely caused to flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2 without interfering with the retained game balls, the device can be made compact.

  Finally, based on the game ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 900e2 passing the V winning switch 900e3, the main controller 110 ends the small hit game control, performs the big hit game control, and opens the specific winning opening. To be done.

  Next, the points different from FIG. 123 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). In FIG. 123 (b), the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the winning in the second winning opening 640 is a big hit (per symbol), so that the V winning device 900 is not operated. That is, after the variation control of the first special symbol by the main controller 110 is completed, the jackpot control is started. Meanwhile, in the display control device 114, the second special symbol variation effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing is executed.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (a) and the effect time performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 123 (b) will be described. In FIG. 123 (a), the total of the variation time (10 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit production time (10 seconds) is set to 20 seconds, and in FIG. 123 (b) the variation time of the second special symbol. Is set in 20 seconds. This is the timing when the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V winning or the symbol described above, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a ) Is to match the opening timing, and by configuring in this way, the player is prevented from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the effect performed by the display control device is enjoyed to the end. You can

  Next, the effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 (a) is an effect image at the start of the time saving game in this control example. The variable display area showing the variable display (dynamic display) of the second special symbol is on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery hold number of the second special symbol is on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved display area shown, a comment area for guiding the comment display and the right-handed game on the lower side of the third symbol display device 81, and a production area where the story is developed along with the progress of the game in the central portion. Has been. In FIG. 124 (a), since there is no game ball entering the second winning opening 640, the variable display area shows that the game is not changing, but the hold display area shows that there is no hold. The display is shown, and the current mode name and right-handed notification display are displayed in the comment area.

  FIG. 124 (b) is an effect image in which the second special symbol is changing. The difference from FIG. 124 (b) is that a display indicating that the second special symbol is changing is displayed in the variable display area, and a branch road is displayed in the effect area. During the second special symbol change, the effect area is an effect in which the character goes deep into the cave, and the game ball is won in the second winning opening 640, that is, when the hold area is displayed as reserved. , Take one of the forks. In this way, by allowing the development of the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640, the game ball during the change of the second special symbol. The firing stop is prevented, and the second special symbol can be reliably held. In this control example, the control for selecting and advancing one of the forked roads based on the display of withholding is shown, but the forked car may be advanced each time a game ball is won in the second winning opening, or the player may proceed. May select a path to proceed by operating a predetermined operation means, and control to proceed to the selected path due to the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 640 that occurs after the selection is completed. . Further, the color tone and design of the forked road may be changed based on the lottery result of the changing second special symbol and the held lottery result of the second special symbol. By doing this, the player can participate in the development of the story that progresses in the production area, and since it is possible to taste the production that suggests the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game during the change of the second special symbol. It is possible to further prevent the ball from being stopped.

  Next, FIG. 125 (a) is an effect image after the fluctuation stop when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. A door is displayed in the effect area, a confirmation display indicating a small hit is displayed in the variable display area, a display indicating that there is a hold is displayed in the hold display area, and a right-handed notification display is displayed in the comment area. When the main effect image is displayed, since the V winning device 900 is open at the lower right side of the game board surface, a comment is displayed to hit the V winning device 900 by hitting right, and the V winning device is displayed. Based on the winning of the game ball to the device 900, an effect in which the character destroys the door is executed in the effect area. Further, the color tone and design of the door displayed in the effect area are changed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the held lottery result of the second special symbol.

  In addition, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the same effect image is displayed at the same timing. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 123, since the second special symbol is still changing, the changing display area is displayed as changing. Therefore, by making the display area small, or by providing other than the third symbol display device 81, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit. You can

  Moreover, if the variation pattern when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is out is 10 seconds (0.5 seconds in the present control example), the effect image in which the door does not come out may be displayed at this timing.

  Next, FIG. 125 (b) is an effect image when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 900e4 provided in the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V prize device 900, and in the effect area, FIG. 125 (a). A monster appears from the door displayed in the production area. The types of characters that appear in the door will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. When a monster appears, the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 126 is entered. FIG. 126 (a) is an effect image during a big hit. Since the main attraction of the effect image during the big hit is the battle effect performed in the effect area, the variable display area and the hold display area are moved to an inconspicuous place or an appropriate position outside the third symbol display device 81. Instead, a jackpot round number display and a jackpot display during jackpot (not shown) are displayed. FIG. 126 (b) is an effect image when a monster is defeated in a battle effect during a big hit. When the monster is defeated in the battle production, it is in a state where there is at least one more big hit (a lottery result of the second special symbol being held is a big hit or a state where a time-saving game is given after the big hit). On the other hand, FIG. 126 (c) shows an effect image when a monster is defeated in a battle effect during a big hit. When the monster is defeated in the battle production, it is in a state of shifting to the normal game state (the state in which the second special symbol is not reserved and the time saving game is not given after the jackpot). Note that a so-called revival effect may be provided in which after the effect image to be lost in the battle is displayed, the character is revived to subdue the monster. In addition, if the player does not win V during the small hit, the door will not open (not shown).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a character appearing from the door displayed in FIG. 125A will be described. 127 (a) is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (the first random number counter value C1 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is "0").

  Figure 127 (b) is the lottery result of the second special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol that has been held are both short-lived small hits (the small hit type counter value C5 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202e2 is "0 49 ”) is displayed. In other words, it is a premiere effect in which a jackpot is awarded at least three more times.

  The effect display on the third symbol display device 81 executed by the effect control device 114 has been described above, but any jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 123, starts the jackpot state. The same timing is set, and since the timing of displaying the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81 is also the same timing as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 127, the second special symbol lottery is given to the player. The result can be difficult to grasp.

  Also, by performing the display of FIG. 124 (b) and FIG. 125 (a), it is possible to suppress the stop of the game ball firing by the player, to surely obtain the hold of the second special symbol, and to win the V winning device. Can be reliably performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller in fifth control example>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 152. In the fifth control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the point of performing the V entrance passage process and the V passage process in the timer interrupt process, the special symbol variation process in the timer interrupt process, the start winning process, the normal symbol The difference is that a part of the variable processing is changed and the big hit control processing 2 and the small hit control processing are executed in the main processing. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 128, the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the fifth control example. In this timer interrupt process, in each process of S101 to S103, S107, S108 to S109, each process of S101 to S103, S107, S108 to S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example. Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth control example, the special symbol variation process of S104 executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 129), the start winning process of S105 (see FIG. 134), the ordinary symbol variation process of S106 (see FIG. 136) ), A V-entry passing process of S140 (see FIG. 137) and a V-passing process of S141 (see FIG. 138) described below are performed, which is different from the first control example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 129, differences from the first control example of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128), and the processes of S240 to S244 are different from the first control example. The other processes are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special symbol variation start process 2 of S240 is performed instead of the special symbol variation start process of the first control example (S213, see FIG. 64). Details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132.

  The processing of S241 to S242 is performed instead of the processing of S219 of the first control example. Specifically, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit after the change time has passed (S214: Yes) (S216: Yes), a specific winning opening opening scenario is set based on the big hit type. (S217), the big hit start is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S241), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 0, and this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S241, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON, so in the big hit control processing 2 (FIG. 140) described later, whether it is a big hit start timing, whether it is a big hit game or not. It is possible to determine whether or not.

  Further, by setting the time saving medium counter 203f to 0 in the process of S242, the time saving game is finished when the jackpot game is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S243).

  In the process of S243, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is the small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S244), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the small hit, the processes of S220 to S221 are executed as in the above-described first control example, and the present process is ended.

  In this control example, as described above, since it is configured to be a small hit in the lottery of each special symbol, when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit by the processing of S243 to 244, the small hit game is started. Is configured to. Details of the processing of S244 will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 that is executed in place of the special symbol variation start process of S213 of the first control example. In the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240), first, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (S4001). When the time is not shortening (S4001: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is during the time saving (S4001: Yes), the time saving change start processing (S4003) is executed, and the present processing ends.

  Next, the normal variation start processing (S4002) and the time saving variation start processing (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240) described above will be described.

  First, the normal fluctuation start process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a normal variation start process (S4002) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S240 in FIG. 130).

  In the normal fluctuation start process, first, the data of the execution area in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S4101). Then, based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired type of special symbol, the lottery result is acquired (S4102). Specifically, if it is a lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) is referred to to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit. If the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball into the second winning opening 640, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) is referred to, and the big hit or the small hit is determined. .

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S4103). When the lottery result is a big hit (S4103: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4104). After that, a normal jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter (S4105), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S4103: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S4106). When the lottery result is a small hit (S4106: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S4107). After that, the normal small hitting variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S4108), and this processing is ended.

  When the lottery result is not a small hit (S4106: No), the display mode at the time of the normal deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S4109). After that, the variation pattern at the time of the normal deviation is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S4110), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the time saving variation start processing (S4003) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time saving variation start processing (S4003) executed in the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S240, see FIG. 130). This time saving variation start processing (S4003) is different from the above-described normal variation start processing (S4002) in that the display mode for time saving and the variation pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , Its detailed description is omitted. The time saving variation pattern determined in S4105, S4108, and S4110 is determined based on the time saving variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 120 (d)) as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the small hit start setting process, which is the process added in the fifth control example described above, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a small hitting start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S240).

  In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, a scenario for opening the V inlet solenoid is set (S4301). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C or D (S4302). When it is not the small hit type C or D (S4302: No), the processes of S4303 to S4306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When it is the small hit type C or D (S4302: Yes), the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 900k is set (S4303). Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is C (S4304). When the small hit type is C (S4304: Yes), the big hit type D is set as the big hit type value at the time of V passage, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  On the other hand, when the small hit type is not C (S4304: No), the big hit type D is set to the big hit type value during V passage, and the process proceeds to S4307.

  When the processing of S4302, S4305 or S4306 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S4307). Next, the small hitting start flag 203w1 and the small hitting medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S4308), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth control example.

  In this start winning process (S105), the processes of S401 to 405 are executed similarly to the first control example described above. When the process of S405 is completed, various counter values are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area (S406). In S406, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in this control example is also acquired and stored.

  Next, the processes of S407 to S408 are executed. When the process of S408 is finished, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter is smaller than 1 (S409). In the process of S409, in the present control example, the upper limit of the number of holdings in the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1, and thus the configuration is made as described above.

  In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter is smaller than 1 (S409: Yes), the processing of S410 to S411 is executed as in the first control example. When the processing of S411 ends, various counter values are acquired, and the acquired values are stored in the special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area (S412). In S412, the value of the small hit type counter C5 newly provided in the present control example is also acquired and stored in the same manner as the processing of S406 described above.

  When the processing of S407, S409, or S412 is completed, prefetch processing 2 (S440) is executed, and this processing is completed.

  Next, the prefetching process 2 (S440) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 shows pre-reading processing 2 (S440) executed in the starting winning processing (see FIG. 134) instead of the pre-reading processing in S413 executed in the starting winning processing (see FIG. 66) of the first control example. It is a flowchart shown.

  In the prefetch process 2, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize (S4401). When there is no new winning (S4401: No), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S4401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402).

  In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S4402: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table The lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4403), and the process proceeds to S4405.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4402, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S4402: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table Based on the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S4404), the process proceeds to S4405.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 128). This normal symbol variation process (S106) eliminates the change in the lottery probability in the lottery of the normal symbol in the first control example described above, so that the process of S640 is executed instead of the processes of S608 to S611. The difference is that the processes of S641 to S644 are executed instead of the process of S616, and the change of the fluctuation time depending on whether or not the time is shortening is eliminated (the processes of S619 and S621 are deleted). Since the other points are the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the normal symbol variation process (S106) in this control example, the processes of S601 to S607 are executed as in the first control example. When the process of S607 is finished, the lottery result is acquired based on the second winning random number table (S640). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high-probability state and the low-probability state in the lottery for ordinary symbols, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is always constant.

  When the process of S640 is completed, the processes of S612 to S615 are executed as in the first control example. In the process of S614, it is determined that it is in the time saving (S614: Yes), in the process of S615, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the normal symbol time saving initial flag 203y is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (S641).

  In the process of S641, if it is determined that the normal symbol time-shortening first time flag 203y is on (S641: Yes), in the time-saving game provided, it is the case that the first time normal symbol variation process is executed, In order to win a large number of game balls to the two winning holes 640, the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "5 seconds x 1 time" (S642). As a result, the electric accessory 640 is opened for a long time (5 seconds), and during that time, the game ball passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is guided to the second winning opening 640. Therefore, when the first time normal symbol variation process in the time saving game is executed, many game balls enter the second winning opening 640 and the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (lottery of the second special symbol) is suspended. The number of balls can be stored up to the upper limit (1 in this control example).

  When the process of S642 is finished, the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is set to OFF (S643), and the process proceeds to S620.

  On the other hand, in the process of S641, when it is determined that the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is off (S641: No), it is after the first normal symbol variation process is executed, and based on the second winning opening 640. Since the number of reserved balls in the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is the upper limit (1 in this control example), the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory 640a are “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. Is set (S644), and the process proceeds to S620. As a result, the electric accessory is opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds), and during that time, only some of the game balls that pass through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 have the second winning opening. Will be guided to 640. Therefore, at the time of execution of the normal symbol variation process after the first time in the time saving game, many game balls do not enter the second winning opening 640, but can enter the V winning device 900 arranged below. Therefore, during the time saving game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters only the second winning opening 640 and the game ball does not enter the V winning device 900.

  In addition, the opening time (0.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S644 is that the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 cannot enter the second winning opening 640. Not the time, it is the time when a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 can enter the ball. As a result, during the first execution of the normal symbol variation process, even if the game ball is not shot, during the subsequent execution of the normal symbol variation process, the lottery based on the second winning opening 640 (second special symbol The number of reserved balls of the lottery can be accumulated up to the upper limit (1 in this control example). On the other hand, the opening time (0.2 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S617 is that the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 can enter the second winning opening 640. It's an impossible time. As a result, when the time saving game is not given, it is possible to realize the game property that the game ball is not inserted into the second winning opening 640.

  When the processing of S617, 643 or S644 is finished, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is finished. As a result, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is fixed to 3 seconds regardless of whether or not the time is shortening.

  Incidentally, the variation time of the normal symbol is not limited to this, and a time saving function may be provided in conjunction with the time saving function of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation time may be set to 2 seconds during the time saving. Further, in the present control example, the condition for ending the operation of the electric accessory 640a is only the lapse of time. The operation of 640a may be terminated. By doing so, when the reserved storage reaches the upper limit number, the electric accessory 640a immediately closes, and the first normal symbol time saving operation ends. Then, the second or later normal symbol time saving operation will be started. Therefore, at the start of the small hitting game in which the V winning opening 900a of the V winning device 900 is opened, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 640a from being left in the open state for a long time, and the small hitting game can be smoothly performed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the V entrance passage processing (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage processing (S140) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 128).

  In the V entrance passage processing (S140), it is first determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S4501). In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S4501: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S4502), and this process is ended. If the small hit is not in progress (S4502: No), it is the case where the game ball has entered the V winning device 900 even though it is not the small hit game. Therefore, an error command is set (S4503), and this processing is executed. finish.

  The V-entry passing command set in the process of S4502 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hitting game based on the entry into the V winning device 900 (see FIG. 122).

  Next, the V passage processing (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S141). The V passage process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  In the V passage processing, first, a jackpot type value at the time of V passage is acquired (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the big hit C (S4602). When it corresponds to the big hit C (S4602: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit C is set to ON (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the jackpot C does not apply (S4602: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot D applies (S4606). In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the big hit D is applicable (S4606: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the big hit D is set to ON (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604. When the process of S4603 or S4607 ends, the V passage command is set (S4604), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S4605), and this process ends. In the process of S4605, the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 0, whereby the time saving game ends.

  In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the jackpot D does not apply (S4606: No), an error command is set (S4608), and this process ends. In this control example, the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 is a small hit C or a small hit D, and a big hit C or a big hit D is set in the V passing big hit type value. Only if you are. Therefore, if the V passing jackpot type value is not the jackpot C or jackpot D, if the V passing process (S141) executed based on the gaming ball passing through the V winning switch 900e3 is executed, it is illegal. It is considered that this is the case where the game ball is won in the V winning switch 900e3. In this case, by setting the error command in the process of S4608, the output of the error is executed, and the illegal act can be found.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of main processing in the fifth control example. In this main process, the big hit control process 2 (S1040) is executed instead of the big hit control process (S1004) in the first control example, and the small hit control process (S1041) is executed after the big hit control process 2 (S1040) is executed. It is different in that it is done.

  The other processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 are the same as the processes of S1001 to S1003 and 1005 to S1015 of the main process (see FIG. 72) in the first control example. Detailed description is omitted.

  The jackpot control process 2 (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This jackpot control processing 2 (S1040) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 139), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first variable. It is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S4701). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON by the process of S241 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 129), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4701, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S4701: Yes), the big hit start flag 203v1 is set to OFF (S4702), the opening command is set (S4703), and this process is ended. .

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp is activated. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp controller 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the effect of starting the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S4701: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit is in progress (S4704). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol big hit (including the special symbol big hit game), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 203v2 is on. In the process of S4704, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S4704: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, if the special symbol is a big hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S4705). If it is the start timing of a new round (S4705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S4706), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S4707). . After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S4705: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device 65 is satisfied (S4708). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or when a predetermined number of balls are present in the first variable winning device 65 (for example, the total). When 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S4708, if the condition for closing the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S4708: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the jackpot end (S4710). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of award balls are paid out than in the normal state is finished, it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot.

  In the process of S4710, if it is the timing of ending the big hit (S4710: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S4711), and the big hit medium flag is set to OFF (S4712).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot C (S4713). In the process of S4713, when it is determined that it was a big hit C (16R time shortened big hit) (S4713: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 99 (S4714), and the normal symbol time saving first time flag 203y is set to ON. Then (S4715), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, when it is determined that the big hit D (16R hour short no big hit) (S4713: No), the processes of S4714 and S4715 are skipped, and the present process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a jackpot end command for display corresponding to the selected display mode of jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the jackpot end effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the processing of S4710, if it is not the timing of ending the big hit (S4710: No), this processing is ended.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1041) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1041) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). This small hit control process (S1041) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, the execution of various effects according to the small hit, V This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 900f1 of the winning device 900.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 133), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S4801, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S4802), and the small hit start command is set (S4803).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hitting start command, it sends the display small hitting start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display small hit start command, an effect for starting the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4803 is completed, the V inlet solenoid and the flow path solenoid 900k are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S4804), the operation of the staying member is started (S4805), and the present process is terminated.

  The opening scenario referred to in the process of S4804 is set in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 133) described above, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid is set regardless of the small hit type, and the flow path solenoid is set. The 900k opening scenario is set only when the small hit type is C or D. Therefore, the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is opened in all the small hit games, and it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the V winning device 900. On the other hand, only in the small hit C or D in which the flow path solenoid 900k is turned on, the game ball entering the V winning device 900 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 900e2. That is, the small hit C or D is a small hit type to which the big hit is given, and the small hit type C is a small hit type to which the big hit is not given.

  In addition, the operation of the staying member is started (the staying solenoid 209a is turned on) in the processing of S4805, whereby it becomes possible for one game ball to stay in the sorting destination area 900h3.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, if it is not the timing when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S4801: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S4806). During the small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, while the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit game of the special symbol) is being made, It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the small hitting game of special symbols. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hitting flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S4804, if the small hit of the special symbol is not in progress (S4804: No), this process is finished as it is.

  In the process of S4806, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S4806: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V entrance closing condition is satisfied (S4807). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after opening the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900, or when the V winning device 900 has a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls in total). When the prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the V winning opening 900a.

  In the process of S4807, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is satisfied (S4708: Yes), the V entrance solenoid is set to OFF in order to close the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 ( (S4808), the stay solenoid 209a is set to OFF in order to end the operation of the stay member (S4809), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 900f1 of the V winning device 900 is not satisfied (S4808: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for ending the small hit (S4810). Specifically, after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V entrance closing condition is satisfied, it is determined that it is the timing for ending the small hit. As a result, after the operation of the retention member 900n is completed, the small hit end process (the flow path solenoid is turned off) can be executed, so that the game balls retained in the distribution destination area 900h3 are transferred to the V winning switch 900e3. It is possible to reliably enter the ball.

  In the process of S4810, if it is the timing of the small hit end (S4810: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S4811), the small hit end command is set (S4811), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S4813), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4810, if it is not the timing for ending the small hit (S4810: No), the present process is directly terminated.

  Here, the details of the small hit ending process (S4812) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the small hit ending process (S4812). The small hitting end process (S4812) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing for ending the small hit.

  In the small hit ending process (S4812), first, the flow path solenoid 900k is set to OFF (S4901), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902). In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is ON (S4902: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. Processing for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the winning switch 900e3.

  Specifically, the opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4903), and the jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag (S4904). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit medium flag 203v2 are set to ON (S4905), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4908.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is not turned on (S4902: No), it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 900e3 to the small hitting game ball, so a big hit is awarded. In order to end without performing, the small hit end command is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4909.

  The small hit end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a jackpot end command for display corresponding to the selected display mode of jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the jackpot end effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4906 or S4907 is finished, the value of the V-passing jackpot type value 203x1 is cleared (S4908), and the process is finished.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a process based on the reception of a hit-related command is executed in the command determination process 2 (S1530). The other parts are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 143, the command determination processing 2 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1530). This command determination process (S1511) is a process of performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110, as in the first control example described above.

  In the command determination processing 2 (S1530), the processing of S1601 to S1610 is executed as in the first control example. After that, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1609), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1641), and in S1619. Move to processing. On the other hand, when the winning information command is not received (S1640: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command is received (S1642). When a hit-related command is received (S1643: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1643), and then the process proceeds to S1619. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1642: No), the process of S1643 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1619.

  In the process of S1619, similarly to the first control example, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1619), and then the present process ends.

  Here, the hit related processing (S1643) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S1643). The hit related process (S1643) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 143) that the hit related command is received.

  In the hit-related processing, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S5001: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S5002), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect (for example, FIG. 125 (b), FIG. 127) suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5001: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S5003). In the processing of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S5003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5004). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S5005), and this processing is ended.

  In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S5003: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command is received (S5006). In the process of S5006, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S5006: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S5007), and then it is determined whether the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 or not. (S5008).

  In the processing of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter 223m is 0 (S5008: Yes), it means that the jackpot D is executed twice in succession, which is the timing when the jackpot continuation ends. The round accumulation counter 223k is set to 0 (S5009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5008, when it is determined that the continuation determination counter is not 0 (S5008: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S5006, when it is determined that the big hit ending command has not been received (S5006: No), it is determined whether the small hit starting command has been received (S5010).

  In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S5006: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S5011), and then the small hit to be started. It is determined whether or not the game is a small hit C (S5012). In the processing of S5012, when it is determined that the small hit game to be started is the small hit C (S5012: Yes), the big hit game based on the big hit C is then given, so the number of continuous executions of the big hit D is set. The continuation determination counter 223m for counting is initialized (set to 2) (S5013), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5012, if it is determined that the small hit C is not (S5012: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit D is (S5014). In the process of S5014, if it is determined that the small hit D (S5014: Yes), since the big hit game based on the big hit D is given, a continuation determination counter for counting the number of consecutive executions of the big hit D 223m is decremented by 1 (S5015), and this processing ends. In the process of S5014, when it is determined that the small hit D is not made (S5014: No), this process is finished as it is.

  In the processing of S5010, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S5010: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S5016).

  In the process of S5016, if it is determined that the small hitting end command is received (S5016: Yes), the display small hitting end command is set in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S5017). , This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5016, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S5016: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S5018).

  In the processing of S5018, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S5018: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S5019). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the V passage process described later to determine the number of game balls entered into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game.

  After the processing of S5109 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set in order to execute an effect (for example, refer to FIG. 125 (a)) based on a ball entering the V winning device 900 during a small hit game (S5020). ), And this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5018, when it is determined that the V-entry passing command has not been received (S5018: No), it is determined whether the V-passing command has been received (S5021).

  In the processing of S5021, when it is determined that the V passage command has been received (S5021: Yes), the V passage processing is executed in order to execute the processing based on the ball entering the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900. Then (S5022), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5021, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S5021: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the V passage process (S5022) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S5022). The V pass process (S5022) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related process (see FIG. 144) that the V pass command is received.

  In the V passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game being executed is the small hit C (S5101). In the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit is C (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is a hold (S5102).

  In the processing of S5102, when it is determined that there is no winning (S5102: No), there is no big hit or small hit based on the holding ball, but when the big hit C is given based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3. is there. Here, the big hit C is a big hit with a time saving, and the probability of becoming a small hit C or D in the time saving game (that is, becoming a big hit C or D thereafter) is "397/399". Therefore, in order to execute the 2V effect, which is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is given in succession two times in a row, a display 2V effect command is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display 2V effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 2V command, it displays an effect on the third symbol display device 81, which suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be consecutively awarded.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that there is a win on the hold (S5102: Yes), a jackpot C is awarded based on the passage of the V winning switch 900e3, and a jackpot or a jackpot based on the hold ball is awarded. That is the case. That is, the probability that the big hit game is executed in two consecutive times is high, and the big hit game is executed based on the small hit in the hold, so that the probability that the big hit game is awarded in three consecutive cases is high.

  Here, in the processing of S5102, when it is determined that there is a small hit in the hold (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103).

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: Yes), an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be awarded three times in a row (for example, FIG. 127 (b ) Reference), the display 3V effect command is set (S5104), and the process proceeds to S5106. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the V entrance passage counter 223j is larger than 5 (S5103: No), the game ball is not inserted into the V winning device 900 because the game ball has not been sufficiently shot during the small hit game. This is the case when the sphere is not enough. In this case, in the present control example, in order not to display the effect that suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be awarded three consecutive times, the process of S5105 is executed, and the process proceeds to S5106. As a result, even when there are few prize balls based on the balls entering the V winning apparatus 900, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to enter the game balls into the V winning apparatus 900.

  The display 3V effect command set in the process of S5015 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display 3V command, it displays an effect (for example, see FIG. 127 (b)) on the third symbol display device 81, which suggests that the jackpot game is highly likely to be awarded in a row. To do.

  In the process of S5101, when it is determined that the small hit game that was being executed was not the small hit C (S5101: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hold (S5107). If it is determined in the process of S5107 that there is a winning (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit C (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that there is a small hit C in the hold (S5108: Yes), a big hit game based on V passage is executed, and a small hit C is given based on the hold ball (that is, 2). There is a high possibility that a continuous jackpot game will be given). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute an effect (for example, refer to FIG. 127 (b)) that suggests that the jackpot game is awarded three times in a row, a display 3V effect command is set (S5109), The processing moves to S5106.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5108, when it is determined that the hold is not the small hit C (S5108: No), the big hit game based on the V passage is executed, and the small hit D is given based on the hold ball (ie, 1 jackpot game is given). Therefore, in this case, in order to execute the effect that suggests that the jackpot game is given in succession, the display 2V effect command is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5106.

  In the process of S5107, when it is determined that there is no hit (S5107: No), it is not the case that the jackpot game is continuously executed after the jackpot game based on the V passage, so the jackpot based on the V passage. In order to execute the effect that suggests that the display V effect command is set (S5111), the process proceeds to S5106.

  The display V effect command set in the process of S5111 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the V command for display, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect indicating that the big hit game is given based on the fact that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3 in the small hit game. indicate.

  When the processing of S5104, S5105, S5109, S5110 or S5111 is completed, the V entrance passage counter is set to 0 (S5106), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Display Control Device in Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 152, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the hit related command process is executed when the hit related command is received. Since the other parts are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination processing (S2302) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S2302). The command determination process (S2302) is a process for determining a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and performing a process according to the determined command.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the processes of S2401 to S2413 are executed similarly to the first control example described above. Next, in the processing of S2412, when it is determined that there is no command indicating long press (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command (S2440).

  When it is determined in the process of S2440 that there is a hit related command (S2440: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S2441) and the process returns to S2401. On the other hand, in the processing of S2440, when it is determined that there is no hit related command (S2440: No), other command processing is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the hit related command processing (S2441) will be described with reference to FIG. 147. The hit related command process (S2441) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 146) that there is a hit related command.

  In the hit related command processing (S2441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5201). When it is determined that there is a display hitting start command in the processing of S5201 (S5201: Yes), the jackpot start command processing is executed (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5203.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5202). This jackpot start command process (S5202) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the hit related command process (FIG. 147) that there is a display jackpot start command, and the effect that suggests the start of the jackpot is the third. This is processing for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command process (S5202), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5305), This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5201, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203. When the processing of S5201 or S5202 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5203). In the process of S5203, if it is determined that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

  Here, details of the round number command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (b). FIG. 148 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5204). This round number command processing (S5204) is processing executed when it is determined in the hit related command processing (FIG. 147) that the display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. It is a process for displaying the effect at the time of playing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the round number command processing (S5204), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5203, when it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5203: No), the process proceeds to S5205. When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5205).

  When it is determined in the process of S5205 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5205: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5206), and the process proceeds to S5207.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command process (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (a). FIG. 149 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S5206). This jackpot end command process (S5206) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received in the command determination process (FIG. 147), and the effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game is displayed as the third symbol. This is a process for displaying on the device 81.

  In the jackpot end command process (S5206), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5205, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5207.

  When the processing of S5205 or S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5207). In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S5207: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209.

  Here, the details of the small hit start command process (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 149 (b). FIG. 149 (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit start command processing (S5208). This small hit start command process (S5208) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and an effect that suggests the start of a small hit game is produced. It is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S5208), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). After that, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5603), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5605). , This process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5207, when it is determined that there is no display small hitting start command (S5207: No), the process of S5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5209.

  When the process of S5207 or S5208 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5209). In the process of S5209, when it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S5209: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S5210), and the process proceeds to S5211.

  Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit end command processing (S5210). This small hitting end command processing (S5210) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 147) that a small hitting end command has been received, and an effect that suggests the end of the small hitting game. Is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5209, when it is determined that the display small hitting end command has not been received (S5209: No), the process of S5210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5211.

  When the process of S5209 or S5210 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211). In the processing of S5211, if it is determined that there is a display V entrance passage command (S5211: Yes), the V entrance passage command processing is executed (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 (b) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage command processing (S5212). This V entrance passage command processing (S5212) is processing executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (FIG. 147) that a V entrance passage command has been received, and to the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game. It is a process for displaying the effect based on the entry of the game ball on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S5212), first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5802), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5804), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5805), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5211, when it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5213.

  After finishing the processing of S5211 or S5212, it is determined whether or not there is a display 3V effect command (S5213). In the process of S5213, if it is determined that there is a display 3V effect command (S5213: Yes), the 3V effect command process (S5214) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5215.

  Here, the details of the 3V effect command processing (S5214) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a flowchart showing the 3V effect command processing (S5214). This 3V effect command process (S5214) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 147) that the display 3V effect command is received, and 3V (big hit) at the end of the small hit game. Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that suggests that is 3 times).

  Specifically, as described above, the display 3V effect command is a jackpot when the game ball passes the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game, and the jackpot C is given. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the 3V effect command processing (S5214), first, the 3V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5902), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 3V effect display data table (S5903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5904), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5213, when it is determined that there is no display 3V effect command (S5213: No), the process of S5214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5215.

  When the processing of S5213 or S5214 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a display 2V effect command (S5215). In the process of S5215, if it is determined that there is a display 2V effect command (S5215: Yes), the 2V effect command process is executed (S5216), and the process proceeds to S5217.

  Here, the details of the 2V effect command processing (S5216) will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a flowchart showing the 2V effect command processing (S5216). This 2V effect command processing is processing that is executed when it is determined in the command determination processing (see FIG. 147) that a display 2V effect command has been received. At the end of the small hit game, 2V (big hit twice This is processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect suggesting that it will be continued.

  Specifically, as described above, the 2V display command for display is a big hit and a big hit D as the game ball passes through the V winning switch 900e3 of the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. When the holding ball of the second special symbol is present, it is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the 2V effect command processing (S5216), first, the 2V effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table buffer is cleared (S6002), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the 2V effect display data table (S6003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6005), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 147, the description will be continued. In the process of S5215, when it is determined that there is no display 2V effect command (S5215: No), the process of S5216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5217.

  When S5215 or S5216 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S5217). In the process of S5217, when it is determined that there is the display V effect command (S5217: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S5218), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5217, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S5217: No), there is no command to be executed as a hit related command, and thus the present processing ends.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S5218) will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing (S5218). This V effect command process (S5218) is a process executed when it is determined that the display V effect command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 147), and V prize is won at the end of the small hit game. It is a process for displaying an effect suggesting that (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 900e3) on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S5218), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S6103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6105), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is easy to receive the lottery (time saving game state), Based on the result of the lottery of 2 special symbols, the V winning device 900 is opened, and a jackpot is provided by passing through a specific area (special discharge flow path 900e2) in the V winning device 900 (passing the V winning switch 900e4). Is equipped with.

  The pachinko machine 10 having such playability includes a plurality of technical configurations for preventing the game balls from entering or passing through various devices in an order other than the proper game order.

  First, in the normal game state (game aiming at the left side of the game board 13), the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not provided on the left side of the game board 13 so that the second winning opening 640 does not open, and the game board 13 Provided only on the right side of. Second, based on the fact that the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 in the normal game state, the game ball easily enters the second winning opening (the electric accessory 640a is opened). Also, the time (0.2 seconds) during which the game ball is difficult to enter is set as the time during which the electric accessory 640a in the normal game state is in the open state. Thirdly, the game ball falling area a that receives the game ball that has flowed down (naturally falls) to the electric accessory 640a and the game ball that was rolling from the game ball falling area a are accepted and guided to the second winning opening 640. It is necessary to provide a game ball guiding area b that is possible and does not buffer balls that have fallen naturally from the game board 13, and the game ball rolls in the game ball guiding area b to win the second winning opening 640. The opening time of the electric accessory 640a is made shorter than the time. Fourth, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol by the main control device 110, if the so-called small hit, which is not a big hit but the V winning device 900 opens, a special discharge flow provided with a V winning switch 900e4. In order to prevent the game balls from flowing down to the path 900e2, two switching members 900h and 900n are provided. It is a structure such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it becomes possible to prevent game balls from entering or passing through various devices in a sequence other than the proper game order.

  Also, in the fifth control example, from the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second winning opening 640 (electrical accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65. Although the specific winning opening 65a is arranged, the arrangement of various devices provided on the game board 13 may be appropriately changed. In order to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring due to the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 or the V winning device 900 during the right hitting jackpot game, the normal symbol starting opening (through) It is preferable that the first variable winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the game ball downflow route with respect to all or part of the gate) 67, the second winning opening 640, and the V winning device 900. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the game balls that have been shot enter the first variable winning device 65 on the upstream side of the downflow route of the game balls, so that various devices provided downstream thereof It is possible to prevent the ball from entering, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering or passing through various devices other than in the proper game order. In order to prevent it more surely, the opening / closing plate of the first variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the game ball downflow path is opened, so that the entrance or passage openings of various devices provided on the downstream side are opened. It is good to block it. In the unlikely event that a game ball enters or passes through various devices in a sequence other than the proper game order, it is based on the current game state and detection signals from various switches that detect the game balls provided in the various devices. It is good to give a notification. Regarding the content of the notification at that time, when a game ball is detected in the V winning device 900 directly involved in the jackpot game in the normal game state, an abnormality is notified, and in the normal game state, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is passed. By changing the status notification and the urgency of notification when detected, it becomes possible for the game hall clerk to quickly detect a situation that may be disadvantageous to the game hall. In addition, as the abnormality notification, a notification is made with a sound larger than the game volume and a signal is output to the outside, and as the status notification, a notification for instructing a normal hit on the liquid crystal of the third symbol display device is given. Conceivable.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second winning opening 640 (electrical accessory 640a), the V winning device 900, the first variable winning device 65 (specific Although it is arranged with the winning port 65a), in order to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game, the V winning device 900 is located above the second winning port 640 (electrical accessory 640a). May be provided. With this configuration, even if the electric accessory 640a is variably operated and opened during the small hitting game, it does not affect the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 900. Further, the V winning device may be provided above the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 during the small hitting game, so that the electric accessory 640a is variably operated during the small hitting game. It is possible to suppress that, there is no effect on the game ball into the V winning device 900.

  Further, in the present control example, a structure for delaying the flow of the game balls on the game ball rolling surface on the upper part of the V winning device 900 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 900f1 is used to enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hit game. In addition to the above, for example, a rotating body having 10 pockets for storing one game ball inside the V winning device, one of which is provided on the game board 13. The V pocket provided with an opening that communicates with the special discharge path 900e2, and the game ball entered in the 10th ball at the start of the small hit game is stored in the V pocket, or the game ball is placed in the V winning device. A space for storing may be provided, and the game balls may pass through the V winning switch 900e3 only when a predetermined number (10) of game balls stay in the space. In addition, a control and a configuration may be used in which the game balls rolling on the electric accessory 640a are collectively put into the V winning device 900 by utilizing the forward / backward movement of the electric accessory 640a.

  In addition, you may make it possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the V winning device 900 during the small hitting game by setting a limit on the number of times of saving the normal symbol. Specifically, the regular symbol fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) during a shorter time than the fluctuation time (for example, 22 seconds) of the second special symbol that the lottery result is a small hit, and the electric accessory 640a operating time (for example, 2 seconds) It is sufficient to set the range in which the total time (for example, 5 seconds) is reduced to the number of time reductions (in the case of the above example, the number of time reductions is four). With this configuration, since the time saving game of the normal symbol is completed at the start of the small hit game, it is possible to shorten the time during which the electric accessory 640a is variably operated during the small hit game. In addition, when the small hit game is started, the variation time of the normal symbol is extended, the variable operation of the electric accessory 640a is prohibited, and the control for changing to the short-term opening (0.2 seconds) may be performed. However, when the reserved storage of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit, the variation time of the normal symbol is extended or the variable action of the electric accessory 640a is prohibited, and the control is changed to open for a short period (0.2 seconds). You may go. In addition, the time saving of the normal symbol here means, in addition to the control to end the time saving game internally and return to the normal game, among the time saving game of the normal symbol, the variation time is shortened only for the first predetermined number of times, After the predetermined number of times, the variable time is set to be long, or the variable operation time of the electric accessory 640a is set to be long only at the first predetermined number of times, and the variable operation time is set to be short after the predetermined number of times, that is, up to a predetermined number of times of control. , Is a concept including all the control of a state in which a game ball easily enters the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a holding storage function (special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c) for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol. Since this pending storage is an important configuration for maintaining the game playability of this control example, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a plurality of technical configurations for accumulating the pending storage.

  First, the story displayed in the effect area of the third symbol display device 81 in the time saving game state is developed based on the winning of the second winning opening 640. Secondly, the variation time of the second special symbol 10 seconds (FIG. 120 (d)), in which the lottery result during the time saving game is a small hit, is longer than the variation time 3 seconds (S620) of the normal symbol. It is a structure such as. By using all or part of such a configuration, it becomes possible to store the pending storage. Incidentally, with respect to the above-mentioned second configuration, in the present control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is made constant regardless of whether or not during the time saving game, but the variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving game is other than during the time saving game ( It may be set to be shorter than (during normal game). However, in that case, it is necessary to set the variation time of the second special symbol, which results in a small hit in the lottery result during the time saving game, to be longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. That is, in general, the pachinko machine releases the time saving function during the big hit game, and the normal symbol fluctuates in a variable time based on the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the time-saving game after the jackpot game is over, the electric accessory 640a does not operate unless the variation time of the normal symbol at the maximum during the normal game elapses, and the game ball can be entered into the second winning opening. I can't. In the meantime, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is fixed, and if the big hit occurs via the small hit, the problem that the reserved memory of the second special symbol, which is the feature of this control example, cannot be stored. Will occur. In order to solve such a problem, the variation time of the second special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are set to the above-mentioned time.

  In addition, in the contents described above, the variation time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the variation time of the ordinary symbol, but the variation time of the second special symbol and the small hit game (V The total of the time until the game ball is detected by the winning switch 900e4) may be set longer than the normal symbol variation time during the normal game. This is because during the small hitting game is a time saving game state. However, in this case, it is necessary to continue the small hitting game for a predetermined period by using a configuration such as retaining the balls flowing down to the special discharge route 900e2 in the V winning apparatus as in this control example. By the way, in the unlikely event that the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol becomes 0 during the time saving game, there is a possibility that the fluctuation of the first special symbol may start, so the right on the third symbol display device 81. It is advisable to perform highlighting such that a hit is performed, or to provide voice guidance using the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol includes some big hits and misses, but all of them may be assigned to small hits. By doing so, the reserved memory portion of the special symbol is surely a big hit via the V winning device, so that the speed of the game can be increased and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the first variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) that is opened when playing the jackpot game and the V winning device 900 are provided separately, but both functions are V winning. It may be included in the device 900. In that case, during the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the V winning device 900 is caused to flow down to the normal discharge passage as shown in FIG. 113 (a) using the switching member 900h. By doing so, the number of devices can be reduced, and it is possible to reduce the cost and save the space. Further, the normal discharge flow path 900e1 and the special discharge flow path 900e2 in the V winning device 900 may be used to determine whether or not to save the time saving game after the jackpot game is over. In this case, when the game ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 900e2, the time saving is given. In addition, the switching control of the switching member 900h in this case may be predetermined based on the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, or by regularly moving the switching member 900h at regular intervals, the discharge flow. The route may be switched. Further, it may be configured to combine with the technical configurations of the above-mentioned first to fourth control examples to determine whether or not to give a probability variation.

  Further, the number of discharge passages in the V winning device 900 is not limited to two, and may be three or more according to the number of functions. Furthermore, the switching member that switches each discharge flow path is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and may be any configuration that can switch the flow paths.

  In this control example, the number of rounds provided by the jackpot based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning switch 900e4 is fixed to 16 rounds, but the number of rounds of the jackpot may be changed as appropriate and You may set the big hit with few (for example, two rounds) time saving. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming property (a so-called time saving fall function) in which the time saving is completed without acquiring a large number of balls. Further, in this control example, when the game ball is thrown into the V winning device 900 which is in the open state during the time saving game, it is always a big hit, but it is distributed to the small hit E (see FIG. 119 (C)). May be provided.

  By using each of the above-described configurations, it is possible to add a pattern in which the number of payouts is small and the time saving is completed or a pattern which does not result in a jackpot, to the result of entering the V winning device 900 during the game in a time saving game, and thus a jackpot game is won. The player can be very happy when he or she does.

  In addition, in this control example, it is decided to decide based on the small hit type (the big hit type in the note) about whether or not to give a time saving game after the big hit ends. However, for example, in the case of a big hit during the time saving game, Depending on the current gaming state (whether it is during time saving or not), the time saving is not always awarded after the jackpot, and if the jackpot is awarded during the non-time saving game, the hour saving is always awarded after the jackpot. Alternatively, control may be performed to determine whether or not a time saving is given after the jackpot is over. Even in such control, based on the lottery result (small hit or miss) of the second special symbol, it is set whether or not to save the time saving game after the big hit.

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be stored in the lottery for the second special symbol may be appropriately set, and various games can be performed by changing the number of items stored in the lottery for storing the second special symbol and the small hit lottery probability of the second special symbol. It becomes possible to have sex.

<Modification of Fifth Control Example>
A modified example of the fifth control example will be described below with reference to FIG. 153. In this modification, the number of memorized lottery for the second special symbol is increased (for example, four), and the probability per special 2 based on the lottery for the second special symbol is reduced (for example, 1/6). The pattern C1 corresponding to the small hit determination value of 117 (C) is decreased and the deviance is increased). By doing this, there is no guarantee that special 2 hits will occur twice, but you can get lots of lots of second special symbols with a higher jackpot expectation than the first special symbol, so depending on the lottery result It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring a holiday cottage and improve the interest of the game. In addition, by pre-reading the result of the lottery stored and stored, it is possible to provide a blissful production for the player, such as a four-seater finalized production.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. In the sixth control example, the detour member 660 is arranged on the upper part of the first variable winning a prize device 65, and when the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area (right hitting), the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. In some cases, it is different in that the game ball is configured to roll on the open / close door 65f1 up to about 12 balls. Furthermore, it differs from the first control example in that the internal configuration of the first variable winning device 65 is changed from the first control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 154 is an enlarged perspective view of a part of the game board 13 (a part where the detour member 660 is arranged). The detour member 660 is inserted into an opening formed in the game board 13, and is fixed to the game board 13 by a screw in a state in which a flow path through which a game ball can flow is projected to the front side of the game board 13. . The detour member 660 is composed of flow path wall portions 660a facing each other in the front-rear direction of the game board 13.

  The flow path wall portion 660a includes a front surface side flow path wall portion 660a1 and a rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2, and the front surface side flow path wall portion 660a1 and the rear surface side flow path wall portion 660a2 are bottom surfaces. Partly connected and integrally formed. As shown in FIG. 154, the front side wall portion 660a1 is arranged with three wall portions projecting to the rear side spaced apart by at least two game balls (in this control example, 2.5 game balls). ing. Further, the rear side wall portion 660a2 is formed with three wall portions protruding toward the front surface side, and the intervals between the respective wall portions are the same as those of the front side wall portion.

  The front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 are arranged such that the protruding wall portion of the front side wall portion 660a1 is inserted in the center between the protruding wall portions of the rear side wall portion 660a2, and further, the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2. It is arranged at a position where a game ball can pass through. The detour member 660 has a bottom surface which is slightly inclined downward from the right to the left, and when the opening / closing door 65f1 is in the closed state, the bottom surface is closed and the game ball bypasses the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It rolls while meandering in the front-back direction of the game board 13 by the road member 660. Further, a connecting portion 660k connecting the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 at the bottom side connects each wall portion from the entrance portion of the bypass member 660 and each protruding wall of the front side wall portion 660a1 to the rear side wall portion 660a2. Is formed. The connecting portion 660k slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to form a step even when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, so that the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is reduced.

  The rolling speed of the game ball is reduced by the connecting portion 660k, and the game ball is meanderingly rolled from the front side to the rear side of the game board 13 by the detour member 660, so that the game ball is on the opening / closing door 65f1. The number of rolling can be increased. In the detour member 660 in the present control example, the distance between the front side wall portion 660a1 and the rear side wall portion 660a2 is equal to 2.5 game balls. Here, two game balls enter in the front-rear direction in the first detour flow passage portion 660c2 formed by being surrounded by the wall portion projecting from the front side wall portion 660a1 and the wall portion projecting from the rear surface side wall portion 660a2. It is composed of a flow path. By forming five similar flow paths respectively, a maximum of 12 game balls can be rolled in the detour member 660.

  As a result, when the jackpot game is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the game ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 can be configured to enter the first variable winning device 65, and more You can enter the game ball in a short time. Further, as will be described later, in the first variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example, the special discharge passage 65e2 is rotated by rotating the rotating piece 650a every time the game ball passes through the normal discharge passage 65e1. The closing piece 650i for closing is gradually moved in the direction of opening the special discharge flow path 65e2 (leftward in FIG. 155). Then, when the 9 game balls pass through the normal discharge flow path 65e4, the opening piece 650i is moved to a position at which the game ball can pass to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state in which the game ball is rolling on the detour member 660 by nine balls or more, the game ball can be made to flow down to the special discharge path 65e2. Therefore, it becomes possible to pass the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3, and the probability variation game state can be given to the player. As a result, the player detours a large number of game balls before the jackpot starts so that the detour member 660 has more rolling balls when the jackpot game starts. The game may be played as if it were fired at 660. Therefore, even in a jackpot game in which the opening time of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set to a short time, it is possible to allow the player to play a game by consuming a large amount of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit on the game shop side. Further, even in a short-time jackpot game, the interest can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the first variable winning device 65 will be described. In this control example, a flow path opening device 650 is provided in place of the switching member 65h and the flow path solenoid 65k that moves the switching member 65h with respect to the first variable winning device 65 in the first control example. Is different.

  Here, the details of the flow path opening device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a perspective view showing a schematic view of the flow path opening device 650. The flow path opening member 650 includes an open piece 650i for opening and closing the special discharge flow path 65e2, a spring wire 650h for moving the open piece 650i, a rotary drum 650b for rotating and winding the spring wire 650h, and a rotary drum 650b thereof. And a movable solenoid 650c for moving a regulating piece 650d for regulating the rotation of the rotating drum 650b in the front-back direction.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the open piece 650i has a door shape so as to close the upstream side opening of the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is held by the first variable winning device 65 so as to be slidable left and right. Further, one end of the spring wire 650h is attached to one end of the open piece 650i. The spring wire 650h is made of an ultrafine wire made of stainless steel, and has a coiled spring in the middle portion. The coil spring 650h is attached so that the open piece 650i always urges the special discharge flow path 65e2 in the closing direction. The other end of the coil spring 650h is attached to the wire attachment portion 650f of the rotating drum 650b, and the rotating drum 650b rotates in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up (the right rotation direction in FIG. 156), so that the spring wire 650h is released. The open piece 650i wound around the rotary drum 650b is pulled by the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is moved by a predetermined amount.

  The rotating piece 650a is always arranged so as to project into the normal discharge passage 65e4. The rotating piece 650a is engaged with the shaft portion of the rotating drum 650b and has a one-way clutch structure in which the rotating drum 650b rotates only in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. When the game ball comes into contact with the rotating piece 650a and rotates the rotating piece 650a downward (see FIG. 155), the rotating drum 650h is wound up by a predetermined angle (90 degrees in this control example) by the spring wire 650h. After being rotated in the direction, the urging force applied to the rotating piece 650a is configured to rotate and return to the position (the position shown in FIG. 155) before the contact with the game ball. When the rotating piece 650a is reversed and returned, the rotating drum 650b is not rotated and only the rotating piece 650a is rotated. Here, as shown in FIG. 156, stopper members 650e1 to e4 protruding to the rear side (rear side of the pachinko machine 10) are attached to the rotating drum 650b. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are attached to the outer peripheral side of the rotary drum 650b at 90 ° intervals. The stopper members 650e1 to e4 are configured to come into contact with the restricting piece 650d. When the restricting piece 650d comes into contact with any of the stopper members 65e1 to e4, the rotating drum 650b is in a direction opposite to the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up. It is restricted to rotate to. On the other hand, when the rotary drum 650b rotates in the direction in which the spring wire 650h is wound up, the restricting piece 650d changes in the rotating direction by contacting the stopper members 650e1 to e4, and the stopper members 65e1 to e4 move to the left side of the restricting member 650d. (See FIG. 156), the rotation of the wire in the direction opposite to the winding direction of the wire is restricted with the stopper members e1 to e4 located on the left side.

  As a result, the game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4 rotates the rotating piece 650a, and when the rotating drum 650b is rotated by 90 degrees by the rotating piece 650a, the stopper members 650e1 to e4 are restricted members. The rotary drum 650h is held at the rotated position by being restricted by the rotary position by 650d. The same operation is repeated by the next game ball flowing down the normal discharge flow path 65e4, and the spring wire 650h is further wound up by the rotating drum 650b. In the present control example, the movable solenoid 650c is also excited at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is changed to the closed state, and the restricting member 650d is moved to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction separating from the stopper members 650e1 to e4). Accordingly, the engagement between the stopper members 65e1 to e4 and the restriction member 650d is released, the rotating drum 650d is rotated in the direction opposite to the winding direction by the urging force of the spring wire 650h, and the open piece 650i is set to the closed position. It is slid and movable.

  Therefore, in the first variable winning a prize device 65 in the present control example, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a positive change depending on the number of game balls entered in the first variable award winning device 65. Therefore, even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game with an interest in whether the probability variation game is given. In addition, it is possible to change the probability ratio of the probability variation game depending on the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the turning piece 650a is arranged in the normal discharge flow path 65e4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the turning piece 650a is arranged at the position of the specific winning port 65a1 of the first variable winning a prize device 65 so that the game ball entered is immediately. The open piece 650i may be movable. With such a configuration, at the timing when the 10th game ball enters, the opening piece 650i is in an open state, and it can be configured to easily flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, it is possible to surely give a certain variation by entering 10 more balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the open piece 650i is configured to be in the open state by winning nine prizes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be another number. Further, not limited to the configuration of this control example, the sprocket is rotated by the game ball winning in the first variable winning device 65, and the winning opening provided in the sprocket can be won in the 10th game ball. It may be configured so as to face any position.

<Regarding the seventh control example>
The seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 170. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a continuous chance effect, which will be described later, is executed, which is not included in the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

  First, the continuous chance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, unlike the first control example, the variation order of the special symbols is changed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the reserved balls are stored. Is configured to. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a maximum of eight holding balls including the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and for each of the holding balls, of the variation pattern selected. The type is indicated by a symbol. In the seventh control example, in the pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 166, S450), it is possible to determine even the type of the selected variation pattern (any one of short deviation, long deviation, reach, super reach, and special reach). Has been done.

  In the example in which the holding balls shown in FIG. 157 (a) are stored, six holding balls including the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, and the sixth holding ball is stored. In this case, the continuous chance effect is set by the winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. Although the details will be described later, if the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when a holding ball is generated is a super reach or a special reach, whether or not to execute a continuous chance effect by lottery. Is determined. When it is determined to execute the effect of the continuous chance, the number of times of executing the effect of the continuous chance is determined within the range of the reserved balls already stored. The number of times is determined by the number of times including the reserved ball (in this example, the sixth reserved ball) determined to execute the continuous chance. For example, if there are six reserve balls as shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of reserve balls is determined by lottery up to six times.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to 159 (a), an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance effect will be described. 158 (a), the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command for the sixth hold ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous symbol effect is displayed from the variable display of the special symbol for the first hold ball. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the variable display of the 1st special symbol when execution of is set.

  In the production in which the execution of the continuous Chang production is set, when the special symbol starts changing, the production in which the symbol trembles is executed while the special symbol is still stopped at the previous variable display. After that, as the background image, the characters "continuous chances !!" are displayed at the same time as the change of the special symbol. Here, the symbols ha indicated by five “black circles” displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 indicate the number of holding balls currently stored. Here, the hold symbol ha1 is the hold of the second hold ball shown in FIG. 157 (a), the hold symbol ha2 is the third hold ball, the hold symbol ha3 is the fourth hold ball, and the hold symbol ha4 is hold. The fifth ball, the reserved symbol ha5, corresponds to the sixth reserved ball.

  158 (b), the variation time in the variation of the special symbol shown in FIG. 158 (a) (variation corresponding to the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (a)) elapses, and the special symbol stops. The display mode at the time of displaying is shown. This continuous chance effect is a combination of a specific main symbol called a chance eye in the previous continuous opportunity effect when the continuous chance effect is set for the change to the next reserved ball (in this control example, “341 )) Is displayed. It should be noted that the chance eye is set with a symbol different from the symbol showing the big hit (displayed in a uniform pattern) and notifies that it is out. By displaying the chance opportunity, the player can recognize not only that the lottery result is out of order but also that the continuous chance effect is continuously executed for the next change. Then, the characters "continuous chance production !!" displayed on the background image are continuously displayed even when the change of the special symbol is stopped, and are displayed over the start of the change of the next special symbol.

  159 (a) is an example of the variation display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the retention symbol ha1 (see FIGS. 158 (a) and (b)), which is the variation of the second reservation, shown in FIG. 157 (a). It is the figure shown. In FIG. 159 (a), the reserved symbol ha2 is the reserved ball (the second reserved ball in FIG. 157 (a)) for which the variation pattern of super reach is selected as shown in FIG. 157 (a). A display mode in the case where the reach state is reached after a lapse of a fixed time from the start of fluctuation is shown. Here, since the result of the determination of whether or not this variation is incorrect is out, as in the combination of the special symbols shown in FIG. 159 (b), it is stopped and displayed in an out of combination.

  Here, returning to FIG. 157 (a), the latent production in the continuous chance production will be described. As described above, the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the winning information command corresponding to the sixth reserved ball, and the execution of the continuous chance effect from the first reserved ball is determined. In this case, based on the winning information for the first to fifth reserved balls stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls to be the super reach or the special reach are stored. If the reserved balls that are to reach the super reach or the special reach are stored as in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a) (the second reserved ball is the super reach), the continuous chance production ends once with the reserved balls. One or more continuous holding balls among the holding balls (the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (a)) after performing the setting of the effect as shown in FIG. Is set with respect to the holding ball for which the latent effect is executed.

  Here, the latent effect is, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), when the special symbol starts to change, it is an effect that is displayed so as to quiver with the symbol in the stopped state of the previous special symbol stopped. . Similarly, at the start of the continuous chance production, after the stop symbol is quivered and displayed, a display indicating that it is a continuous chance production is displayed at the same time as the fluctuation, but in this latent production, the stop symbol is displayed quiveringly. Even if the fluctuation is started after that, the background display indicating the continuous chance performance is not displayed. By configuring the latent effect in this manner, the player can expect that the continuous chance effect will be started by the shaking display of the stop symbol. Note that the same production as the latent production is configured so that it may be selected and executed even when the normal special symbol is changed, even if execution of the continuous chance production is not decided. Therefore, even if the latent production is displayed, the player is aware that the continuous chance production is not necessarily executed by the special symbol production corresponding to the subsequent holding, and the continuous production is performed by the latent production. The game can be played in the expectation of execution.

  In FIG. 157 (a), among the third to fifth holding balls, the fifth holding ball is obtained by the process of S1726 of the prize information processing (FIG. 168, S1651) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Execution of the latent effect is determined up to (the 3rd to 5th reserved balls) (it is determined). Thereby, in the variation of the special symbol for the third to the fifth reserved balls, the latent effect shown in FIG. 159 (b) is executed at the start of the variation time. Therefore, the player may have missed the final fluctuation in the continuous chance performance with the second holding ball, but the continuous chance performance may be restarted, or in fact, the continuous chance performance is hidden. You can have the expectation that it will continue just by continuing. Then, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), in the variation of the special symbol of the sixth reserved ball, the continuous chance effect is executed again.

  In this control example, no matter how many times the latent production is continuously executed, there is no guarantee that the continuous chance production will be executed thereafter, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the latent production is repeated three times or more. In this case, the continuous chance presentation may be executed after that. With such a configuration, when the latent production is executed, the player can be interested in the number of consecutive times, and the interest can be further improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 157 (b), the number of holding balls to be established is determined after the holding balls that have triggered the decision to execute the continuous chance effect, and the number of holding balls is set to the maximum. The case of setting the execution of the latent effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), six hold balls are established, and the winning information command output when the sixth hold is established creates a continuous chance from the third hold ball. The case where execution is decided is shown. FIG. 157 (c) shows a case where the holding balls are more digested than the state of FIG. 157 (b) and the third holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (b) is shifted to the first holding ball. This is the state shown. In this state, at the timing at which the first holding ball (the first holding ball shown in FIG. 157 (c)) starts to change, the holding ball determined to execute the continuous chance effect (FIG. 157 (c) In (), the number of executions of the latent production is determined with the maximum number of holding balls established after the fourth holding ball). Here, the latent production is executed for the continuous number of times in which the above-mentioned latent production is determined with respect to the variation of the reserve ball that has changed after the variation of the fourth reserve ball ends.

  As a result, the player performs the latent production even after the final variation (variation of the special symbol for the fourth reserve ball in the control example) in the continuous chance production is completed, and thus the continuous chance production is continued. You can expect that you are doing it. Furthermore, since the latent performance is executed within the range of the reserved balls established at the start of the first consecutive chance production, the super reach or the special reach of a jackpot to the established reserved balls is achieved. It is possible to expect that the continuous chance production or the latent production is being executed since the change is stored.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, a super-reach or a special reach is applied to a holding ball established at the start change of the continuous chance performance (a holding ball stored after the holding ball of the final fluctuation of the continuous chance performance). If there is a change, it is set to execute the latent effect of the pending ball before the fluctuation, and by executing the continuous chance effect again with the fluctuation of the super reach or the special reach, the latent performance can be performed more for the player. It is possible to increase the expectation of continuous chance performance when displayed. Further, in this case, it is of course possible to start the continuous chance effect with the reserved ball stored before the reserved ball which is the special reach or the super reach.

  Regarding the continuous chance effect, in the present control example, the notification mode is displayed in the background. However, the present invention is not limited to this, a specific character may be displayed, and the background color is different from the normal time. The color may be changed to a different color, or the BGM type and a special sound effect may be output. Further, the chance eyes displayed in the continuous chance effect are not limited to the configuration of this control example, other combinations may be used, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, for example, a pattern of "continuation" which is not a normal pattern. It may be configured such that it can be variably displayed on the symbol such as a character and the like, and a mode of special detachment different from the symbol showing the detachment at the normal time (big hit Display) and the like)).

  Next, an electrical configuration in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. Only the differences from the first control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the first control example are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference is that it has been changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Details of the variation pattern selection table 202a in the present control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c), and first with reference to FIG. 160, the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 113 will be described. FIG. 160A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example. The ROM 222 in the seventh control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous chance count table 222d and an incubation count table 222e are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The consecutive chance count table 222d in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 162. This continuous chance count table 222d is out of alignment with the winning continuous chance count table 202d (see FIG. 162 (a)) that is referred to when the winning / decision result indicated by the received prize information command is a win. It is composed of a continuous chance frequency table 222d for deviation (see FIG. 162 (b)) which is referred to in a certain case. The continuous chance number table 222d is a data table for determining whether or not the continuous chance effect is to be executed and, when executing, to determine the number of times.

  FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning success chance number table 222 d. In the winning continuous chance number table 222d, the number of consecutive decision opportunities counters 223n (0 to 198) to be described later is performed for each execution number with the current number of retained balls as the maximum value and the current number of retained balls as the maximum value. ) Are set respectively. When the number of reserved balls is one, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), a value of “0 to 160” is set as the determination value of the determination content that does not execute the continuous chance effect. The determination value of "161 to 198" is set as the determination value for one continuous chance presentation. Here, based on the acquired value of the number-of-times determination counter 223n, the determination value set in the matching determination value is selected by collating with the determination value of the consecutive chance number table 222d. Here, if the non-execution is selected, the continuous chance effect is not executed. In addition, when the number of times of continuous chance performance for one time is determined, the continuous chance performance is set for the execution of the first holding ball. The number of executions set in the consecutive chance number table 222d is the holding ball (in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the sixth holding ball) that triggered the execution of the continuous chance effect. It shows the number of reserved balls that are stored consecutively before that. For example, when the continuous chance effect lottery is performed on the sixth reserved ball shown in FIG. 157 (a) and four execution times are selected by the continuous chance frequency table 222d, three times The continuous chance effect is started from the eye holding ball, and the continuous chance effect is continuously executed up to the sixth holding ball.

  Similarly, the reference value is set from the consecutive chance number table 222d depending on the number of reserved balls when the prize information command is received. In this control example, the larger the number of holding balls when the winning command is received, the easier it is to set the continuous chance effect. Further, as is clear from comparison with the out-of-consecutive chances table 222d shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the hit / miss determination result is a success, continuous chance production is performed for all the reserved balls. Is set to have a high probability of being executed. As a result, the execution of the continuous chance effect is easily set for the winning information command indicating the super reach or the special reach for which the hit / miss determination result is a win. Furthermore, since the continuous chance effect is set to be determined more easily as the number of holding balls is larger, the continuous chance effect is more likely to be executed with respect to a larger number of continuous holding balls, and the player can also cope with deviations from the deviation. Can play games with high expectations for jackpots.

  It should be noted that, as shown in the consecutive chance count table 222d for detachment, even if the number of reserved balls is 6 or more, if the result of the hit / miss determination is out, a maximum of 6 consecutive chance performances are produced. The judgment value is set. As a result, when the sixth consecutive chance presentation is started, the player can early recognize that the winning / disapproval determination result is a big hit by continuing the second consecutive chance presentation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times of continuous chance performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the latency number lottery table 222e in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent count lottery table 222e. When the execution of the continuous chance effect is determined by the continuous chance number table 222d described above, the latent number lottery table 222e is a lottery opportunity for the continuous chance effect of the reserved balls corresponding to the determined number of continuous chance effects. It becomes the super-reach or special reach by judging whether or not the reserved ball which becomes the super-reach or the special reach is stored in the other reserved balls other than the reserved ball which has become (the reserved ball which becomes the super-reach or the special reach). It is a lottery table for deciding the number of times that the latent production is executed with the holding balls up to the holding balls that have become the lottery triggers for the continuous chance effect when the holding balls are stored.

  Explaining with the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), since the sixth hold ball is established, a continuous chance effect of 6 times of execution is determined, and the first to sixth hold balls produce continuous chances. It is determined that the effect will be executed. Therefore, if it is determined whether the first to fifth holding balls have a holding ball that is a super reach or a special reach, in the example of FIG. 157 (a), the second holding ball is a super reach or a special reach. Since it is a holding ball, it is possible to execute the latent production up to three times from the third holding ball to the fifth holding ball. Here, with reference to the incubation number lottery table 222e, the table contents to be selected are set for each of the hit determination results for the sixth holding ball, and the number of incubations described below is set for each maximum incubation number. The determination value corresponding to the decision counter 223o is set. In the example of FIG. 157 (a), if the result of determination of whether or not the sixth reserved ball is a win is a win, the decision value with the maximum number of times of incubation of 3 is referred to in the hit table contents. Here, if the value of the acquired latency determination counter 223o is "0 to 50", the latency is 1 time, if it is "51 to 149", the latency is 2 times, and if it is "150 to 198", the latency is 3 The number of times is set. Here, when the number of times of incubation is determined twice, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), the continuous chance effect of the third and fourth holding balls is non-executed, and the aforementioned latent effect is executed. To be done. The continuous chance production is started again with the fifth holding ball, and is continuously executed up to the sixth holding ball. It should be noted that the number of latent effects after the continuous chance effects shown in FIG. 157 (c) is similarly determined by the latent frequency lottery table 222e. It should be noted that the holding balls (corresponding to the fourth holding ball in the example of FIG. 157 (c)) and the subsequent holding balls (in the example of FIG. 157 (c), five balls that triggered the determination of the continuous chance effect) If there is no reserved ball that corresponds to the super-reach or the special reach in the (from the 7th to 7th reserved balls), the table content corresponding to the deviation of the latent number lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) is referred to.

  Note that, in the latent number lottery table 222e, as shown in FIG. 163, when the hit / miss determination result is out of position, the latent production is limited to a maximum of three times regardless of the number of reserve balls that can be hidden. There is. As a result, when the third latent effect is executed, the player can recognize that when the latent effect is executed with the next reserve ball, a big hit will occur in the subsequent continuous chance effects. Therefore, the player can be interested in the number of times of the latent production, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the seventh control example. The RAM 223 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example in that a number-of-times determination counter 223n, a latency number determination counter 223o, and a continuous chance storage area 223p are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter for determining the number of times of execution, non-execution, and execution of continuous chance effects. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 adds one by one for each predetermined period and updates it. Note that the effect counter 223f and the latency number determination counter 223o, which will be described later, are set so that their update cycles are different from each other, and are configured not to be synchronized. The number-of-times determination counter 223n is programmed to start updating from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The latency number determination counter 223o is a counter for determining the number of times the latency effect is executed in the continuous chance attraction from the latency number lottery table 222e (FIG. 163). The latency number determination counter 223o is a counter that is repeatedly incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and updated, and at a predetermined cycle by the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. One is added and updated. The latent frequency determination counter 223o is programmed so that the update is started from a random initial value when the power is turned on.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is a storage area for storing data indicating the contents of the effect to be executed for each of the holding balls when executing the continuous chance effect. The continuous chance storage area 223p is composed of a storage area corresponding to eight reserved balls and one execution area. When the continuous chance effect is determined, data indicating the determined effect content is stored in the area of the corresponding reserved ball, and the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball as the reserved ball is exhausted. The reserved ball that starts to change is shifted to the execution area. As a result, continuous chance production can be surely executed.

  The continuous chance storage area 223p is configured to be backed up when the power is cut off, and is restored to the power cut state when the power is turned on again. Therefore, even if the power is cut off, the continuous chance effect can be continuously executed.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 161 (a)), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 161 (b)), and a deviation (see At least the (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 161 (c)) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 161 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various normal reach types (30 seconds), super reach types (60 seconds), and special reach types (90 seconds) are set as jackpot variation patterns. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), “51 to 179” is for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds). ), The variation patterns “180 to 198” are set as the determination values of the variation type counter CS1. MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, jackpot the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the use variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table for deviation 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. If the special symbol lottery result is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", disconnection reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  For the out-of-range reach, "0-149" for various out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), "150-197" for various out-of-range reach (60 seconds), and out-of-range special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 161 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase in the period until a big hit occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is delayed during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

  In the present control example, the variation pattern selection table 202d is configured as described above, and is configured to acquire the timing variation type counter CS1 in which the game ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to determine even the variation type selected at the time of winning before the variation starts. Further, not only the configuration of this control example, but also the configuration in which the variation type selected depends on the number of holding balls at the start of variation as shown in the first control example, the variation type assigned to super reach, etc. By allocating the value of the counter CS1 to a fixed value even when the number of reserved balls is variable, the variation type can be determined at the time of winning.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller 110 in Seventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example is that in the first control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) is the special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104). The start winning process (FIG. 66, S105) is different from the starting winning process (FIG. 165, S105). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 164, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 164, S104) in the seventh control example is the same as the special symbol variation process (FIG. 64, S104) in the first control example, and the processes of S203 to S204 and S208 to S209 are S250 to S252. The difference is that the processing has been changed to. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S202: No), the process of S250 is executed. In the process of S250, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the reserved sphere having the reserved order of 1 is stored (S251). Although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, when the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is won, the special symbols are configured to start changing in a winning order in which both are combined. There is. In addition, the maximum number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, which is the same as the first control example. When the reserved ball is generated, it is stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and in that case, information indicating the winning order is stored. As the winning order, the order of adding 1 to the total number of winning numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stored. Then, the winning order is also decremented by 1 and updated based on the fact that one reserved ball is consumed (starts fluctuation).

  In the process of S251, it is determined whether the winning order determined in S250 is the second special symbol (second winning opening 640) (S251). Here, if the winning order stored in the holding area 1 stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is 0, it is determined that the second special symbol is the winning order to be changed next. It When it is determined that the order in which the fluctuation starts next by the process of S251 is the second special symbol (S251: Yes), the process of S205 is executed. Note that the processing of S205 to S207 is the same as that of the first control example, and therefore its description is omitted.

  In the processing of S251, if it is determined that the order of next variation start is not the second special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the order of next variation start is the first special symbol (S252). Next, when it is determined that the winning order in which fluctuation starts is the first special symbol (S252: Yes), the process of S210 is executed. Since the processes of S210 to S212 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the winning order is not the first special symbol, that is, the reserved ball is not stored (S252: No), this process is ended. The other processes are omitted from the first control example.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 165, S105) in the seventh control example is different from the starting winning process (FIG. 66, S105) in the first control example in that the process of S406 is S420 and the process of S412 is S430. The prefetch process (S413) is different from the prefetch process 2 (S450). The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S420 and S430, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is added to the first control example, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the sum of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is added. The difference is that the information is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b as the winning order information. With this configuration, in the present control example, by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 at the time of winning, the variation type (short deviation, long variation) selected by the prefetch processing 2 (FIG. 166, S450) described later. It is configured such that the voice lamp control device 113 can be notified as a winning information command by discriminating whether it is out, normal reach, super reach, or special reach).

  When it is determined No in the process of S407 or after the process of S430 is executed, the prefetch process 2 is executed (S450). After performing the prefetching process 2 (S450), this process ends.

  The prefetch process 2 (S450) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of this prefetching process 2 (S450). The pre-reading process 2 (S450 in FIG. 166) in the seventh control example is different from the pre-reading process (S 413 in FIG. 67) in the first control example in that the process of S510 is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is executed, the processing of S510 is executed. In the process of S510, the variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result (winning / absence determination) based on the winning information (each counter value) obtained in S503 or S504, and the obtained stop type selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1. The variation type to be selected is determined from the selection table 202d (S510). After that, a winning information command indicating the jackpot determination result and the variation type determined in S510 is set.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the selected variation type by using the winning information command. Therefore, in the present control example, it is possible to execute the continuous chance effect, which is a special effect straddling a plurality of fluctuations, when the holding lamp for which a specific fluctuation pattern is executed is stored by the voice lamp control device 113. . It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 preliminarily discriminates and determines the variation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning information command indicating information of each acquired counter value is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 is used. It is possible to set each data that can be discriminated and to discriminate the variation type and the like.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
A control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 170. In the seventh control example, in comparison with the first control example, the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) is the command determination process 3 (FIGS. 167, S1540), and the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S1512) is the variable display. The difference is that the setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) is changed. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 3 (S1540). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 167, S1540) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process (FIG. 81, S1511) in the first control example in that the processes of S1650 to S1651 are added. . The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the notification command is not received (S1609: No), the process of S1650 is executed. In the process of S1650, it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1650). When the prize information command is received (S1650: Yes), prize information processing is executed (S1651). After executing the winning information processing, the processing of S1619 is executed.

  Here, the winning information processing (S1651) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning information processing (S1651). In this winning information processing (FIG. 168, S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the continuous chance effect is being set (S1721). If it is determined that the continuous chance presentation is set (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether the continuous chance presentation is being set or not. , This process ends. As described above, since the new continuous chance effect is not set while the continuous chance effect is set, it is possible to suppress a defect such as the effect being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect. .

  In the processing of S1721, when it is determined that the continuous chance effect is not set (S1721: No), it is determined whether the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722). . When the received prize information command is not the prize information command indicating the super reach or the special reach (S1722: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S1722, when it is determined that the received prize information command is a prize information command indicating super reach or special reach (S1722: Yes), the values of the number-of-times determination counter 223n and the number-of-latents determination counter 223o are set. It is acquired (S1724).

  Based on the acquired number-of-times determination counter 223n, the received winning information command, and the current number of holding balls (the number of holding balls corresponding to the received winning information command), the consecutive chance number table 222d (FIGS. 162 (a) and (b)). The information (the number of executions or non-execution) regarding the execution of the continuous chance effect is acquired (determined) from the reference. It is determined whether the information acquired in S1724 is the number of times the continuous chance effect has been executed, that is, whether the continuous chance effect has been executed (S1725). If execution of the continuous chance effect has not been determined (S1725: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that the execution of the continuous chance effect has been decided (S1725: Yes), the holding ball corresponding to the determined number of times of the continuous chance effect becomes the super reach or the special reach. It is determined from the prize information storage area 223a whether or not the reserve balls (except the reserve balls that have received the prize information command (the reserve balls that are the final fluctuation of the continuous chance effect) are stored) (S1726). Although illustration is omitted, when the prize information command is received, as in the first control example, data corresponding to the information indicated by the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the reserved ball. To be done. In addition, as the reserved balls are exhausted, the data is shifted to the area of the corresponding reserved balls, and when the fluctuation starts, the data of the winning information corresponding to the next reserved ball is overwritten.

  In the processing of S1726, when it is determined that the reserved ball for the super reach or the special reach is not stored, the processing of S1728 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1726, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball that is a super reach or a special reach (S1726: Yes), the winning / judgment determination result indicated by the winning information command received from the latent count lottery table 222e, the processing of S1726. In the process of S1723, the number of possible hiding is the number of holding balls up to the holding ball that is stored immediately before the holding ball corresponding to the winning information command received from the holding ball that is determined to be super reach or special reach. The latent count is determined from the acquired value of the latent count determination counter 223o (S1727). Then, based on the content of the determined continuous chance effect, the effect to be executed for each Ryukyu ball is stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p for each reserved ball. In the continuous chance storage area 223p, a storage area is set corresponding to each of the eight reserved balls, and for each of the reserved balls, the start of the continuous chance effect, the end of the continuous chance effect, the latent effect, and the continuous effect are performed. Data that can identify the re-entry of the chance production is stored (S1728). Each data stored in the continuous chance storage area 223p is shifted to the area corresponding to the corresponding holding ball every time the holding ball is exhausted. When the continuous chance presentation is completed, all the stored data will be cleared. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous chance presentation is set depending on whether or not the data is stored in the continuous opportunity storage area 223p. When the process of S1728 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S1550). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 169, S1550) in the seventh control example, the rear latency setting process (S1750) is added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 82, S151) in the first control example. Differences in points. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the processing of S1709 is executed, the rear latency setting processing is executed (S1750). The post-latent setting process (S1750) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the contents of the subsequent latency setting process (S1750).

  In the post-latent setting process (FIG. 170, S1750), first, it is determined whether or not it is the maximum start variation of the continuous chance effect based on the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p (S1751). Here, it is determined whether or not the data set in the continuous chance storage area 223p corresponding to the fluctuation starting reserved ball is data indicating the start of the continuous chance effect.

  In the processing of S1751, when it is determined that the start variation of the continuous chance effect is not generated (S1751: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start variation of the continuous chance presentation (S1751: Yes), the information of the current reserved ball is acquired from the winning information storage area 223a (S1752). With respect to the acquired information on the reserved balls, it is determined whether or not the reserved balls to be the super reach or the special reach are stored with respect to the reserved balls stored after the final variation of the continuous chance effect (S1753). When it is determined that the reserved ball for the super reach or the special reach is stored (S1753: Yes), the reserved ball stored next to the reserved ball corresponding to the final fluctuation of the continuous chance performance is super-stored. The number of reserves up to the reserve ball, which is stored immediately before the reserve ball that is the reach or the special reach, is determined as the maximum value (possible number of times of incubation) (S1754). The value of the latent count determination counter 223o is acquired, and based on the value, the judgment result of whether or not the holding ball to be the super reach or the special reach is hit, and the possible latent count determined in S1754, the latent count is determined from the latent count lottery table 222e. Is determined (S1755). Based on the number of latencies determined in S1755, continuous chance effects are determined. Here, from the reserved ball stored after the number of times of incubation for the number of times of incubation to the reserved ball which becomes the super reach or the special reach is set as the reserved ball for executing the continuous chance effect. After the processing of S1756, the processing of S1758 is executed.

  In the processing of S1753, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball which becomes the super reach or the special reach (S1753: No), the value of the latency number determination counter 223o is acquired and stored after the final variation of the continuous chance performance. The number of times of incubation is determined from the number of times of incubation lottery table 222e (see FIG. 163) based on the number of possible hiding, which is the number of retained balls (S1757). Then, the process of S1758 is executed. In the process of S1757, the number of latencies is determined based on the data indicating that the hit / miss judgment result is out of order.

  In the process of S1758, the continuous chance storage area 223p is set based on the information of the continuous chance effect and the latent effect determined in the processes of S1755-S1756, S1757 (S1758). Then, this process is completed.

  In this way, even at the start of the continuous chance production, the latent production and the new continuous opportunity production are set for the pending balls that have been established from the time the determination is made until the start. You can entertain the production. Further, the continuous chance effect is an effect that is performed on the variable display of a plurality of continuous reserved balls by pre-reading the determination result of the established reserved balls. As a result, when the continuous chance production is started, the player holds a reserved ball that is a super reach or a special reach among the reserved balls that are established at that time, and the lottery result is unsuccessful. I have an expectation. Here, in the present control example, the continuous chance effect and the latent effect are set for the hold balls that are established at the start timing of the continuous chance effect, so that the player can expect more hold balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to continue to hold expectations for the latent effect for the reserved ball after the completion of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, in the present control example, the latent effect is an effect in which the design is shaken, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to display a sound effect, a character, or the like at the start of fluctuation. Moreover, you may change and display the pattern etc. of a special design to the pattern different from usual.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 177. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is changed according to the jackpot type.

  Specifically, in this control example, the external output terminal plate 261 has a jackpot continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on based on the operation of the jackpot continuous operation device, and one jackpot for indicating the state and type of jackpot. Is provided.

  Then, when the jackpot based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot) is executed, one jackpot of the external output terminal board 261 is off at the time when the jackpot game is started, When the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is controlled to be turned on. On the other hand, when the big hit based on the big hit G (16R probability variation lottery / short time with big hit) is executed, one big hit terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the big hit game is started. Further, when the big hit based on the big hit H (16R probability variation lottery / no time saving big hit) is executed, the big jack 1 terminal is controlled to remain off. Further, regardless of these jackpot types, when the jackpot game is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is controlled to be turned on at the start of each jackpot game (see FIGS. 174 and 175).

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, the jackpot by comparing the signal of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the signal of the jackpot 1 terminal with each other is turned on. The type can be determined. Accordingly, the jackpot type can be discriminated in the hall computer 262 without providing the terminals of the external output terminal board 261 for each jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H), and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. You can

  Although this control example has a configuration in which the above-described configuration is added to the first control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. In the following description, the points different from the first control example will be described. The same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the eighth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 171, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that it is clearly shown that the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 is provided with the external output terminal board 261. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In this control example, an external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external output terminal plate 261 is provided with at least a accessory continuous operation terminal, a jackpot 1 terminal, and a jackpot 2 terminal.

  The accessory continuous operation terminal is a terminal that indicates whether or not the continuous accessory operation device is operated and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, that is, whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. When the accessory continuous operation terminal is on, it indicates a period during which the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, that is, a period when the jackpot game is executed, and when it is off, the period other than that (the jackpot game). Is not executed). This accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot game has started in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see S7002 in FIG. 177), and in the process. When it is determined that the jackpot game is finished, it is set to off (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 1 terminal is a terminal that indicates whether or not a jackpot game is in progress. When it is on, it shows that it is a jackpot game, and when it is off, it shows that it is not a jackpot game. However, unlike the accessory continuous operation terminal described above, the jackpot 1 terminal is not set to ON at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / shorter time jackpot), and the gaming ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. Is set to on when passing.

  Specifically, the jackpot 1 terminal is determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 of FIG. 177), and in the process, it is a jackpot game. If it is determined (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is a jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), it is further determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON. In the case (S7005 of FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7004 of FIG. 177). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S7001: No in FIG. 177), it is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177).

  The jackpot 2 terminal is a terminal that indicates whether the state of the gaming machine is advantageous for the player, that is, the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, or the time saving gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminal is on. If there is, it indicates that it is in the advantageous state for the player, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not. However, as with the jackpot 1 terminal described above, it is not set at the start of the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot), but is set to on when the gaming ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3. It is what is done.

  Specifically, the jackpot 2 terminals are determined to be in the jackpot game in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), and the jackpot related to the jackpot game. When it is determined that the type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 177: Yes), the jackpot 2 terminals are set to ON (S7004 of FIG. 177). Further, in the process, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177) and the jackpot type related to the jackpot game is jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177), further, When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005 of FIG. 177: Yes), it is set to on (see S7004 of FIG. 177). When it is determined that the probability variation state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, has ended (S7008: No in FIG. 177), it is set to OFF (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  The external output terminal board 261 is provided with other terminals (for example, a prize ball terminal, etc.), and outputs signals output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 or the input / output port 215 of the payout controller 111. Ready to receive. The other terminals are configured so that the received signal can be detected by the hall computer 262 and are already known, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a first hit type selection table 202f for selecting a big hit type for the above-described first control example. Is different in that it is newly provided. Since other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In the present control example, different from the above-described first control example, a big hit F, a big hit G, and a big hit H are provided as types of big hits. For these jackpot types, a first hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 172 (b)) set so that a big hit F and a big hit G big hit H can be selected, respectively, and a first hit type counter value C2. Selected based on and.

  The details of the first hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the first hit type selection table 202f and the first hit type counter value C2. In the first hit type selection table 202f, the value “0 to 33” of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the judgment value of the big hit F, “34 to 66” is set as the judgment value of the big hit G, and the judgment value of the big hit H is set. "67 to 99" is set. In the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery result is acquired (see S303 in FIG. 65), and the first hit type selection table 202f is also used. The jackpot type is selected based on the first hit type counter value C2. The jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot type selected here.

  In the jackpot game based on the jackpot F (16R probability variation lottery / time saving jackpot), the passage solenoid 65k operates in the jackpot game, and the gaming ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a can be passed to the probability variation switch 65e3. ing. Based on the fact that the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game is given after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot G (16R probability variation lottery / short time with jackpot), the flow path solenoid 65k does not operate in the jackpot game, and the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a enters the probability change switch 65e3. It's a big hit with no chance. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot G, the time saving game will be awarded. Further, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H (16R probability variation lottery no time saving, no jackpot), like the jackpot G described above, the gaming ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a does not enter the probability variation switch 65e3. Is. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, the time saving game is not given, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

  Further, the jackpot type selected here is referred to when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot when the fluctuation is stopped in the special symbol variation process of the main control device 110 (S216: Yes in FIG. 176), and the jackpot type. A scenario for opening the specific winning opening 65a is set (see S217 in FIG. 176) or stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260 in FIG. 176) and referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. It will be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example described above in that a jackpot type storage area 203α is provided. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  The jackpot type storage area 203α is for determining the jackpot type relating to the jackpot game being executed, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot F, G, H) is stored. This jackpot type storage area 203α is set when the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 176) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 ( See S260 in FIG. 176).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot F and the jackpot is not the jackpot G, which is referred to in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (S7003: No in FIG. 177), the probability variation setting flag 203h. Is on (S7005: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the V winning terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to be on (see S7004 in FIG. 176). On the other hand, in the process, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot G (S7003 of FIG. 176: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal is set to ON as it is (FIG. 177). See S7004). Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot H, it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot G, as in the case where the jackpot type is the jackpot F (S7003: No in FIG. 177). However, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot H, since the gaming ball does not pass the probability variation winning switch 65e3 and the probability variation setting flag 203h is never turned on (S7005: No in FIG. 177), one jackpot and one jackpot The two terminals are never set to ON.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot game by comparing the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal. Become. Specifically, if both the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that it is a jackpot G, while the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is jackpot F or jackpot H, and jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on V winning (passing of game ball to probability variation switch 65e3) during jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a big hit F, while on the other hand, if there is no V prize (passing of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3) during the big hit game and the big hit 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a big hit H. it can. In addition, you may comprise so that a jackpot type of a jackpot game may be determined by comparing the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a timing chart showing a gaming state of the gaming machine, a gaming ball passing state of the probability variation switch 65e3, and a signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal board 261, the passing state of the probability variation switch 65e3 when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. 6 is a timing chart showing outputs of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal board 261.

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are in the off state. Then, when the big hit game based on the big hit G gaming state of the gaming machine is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the big jack 1 terminal and the big jack 2 terminal are set to ON in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later. . After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to a time saving state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF in an external output process described later. (See S7007 in FIG. 177). Then, when the time saving game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, referring to FIG. 174 (b), when the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, and the probability variation switch 65e3. It is the timing chart which showed the passing state of the game ball, and the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the external output terminal board 261. When the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, the output of one jackpot and two jackpots is turned on at the time when the jackpot game is started, as compared with the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed. The difference is that the signals of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to ON when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (when the V is won).

  Specifically, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are in the off state. Then, when the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot F, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON in the external output process described later (see S7002 in FIG. 177). Then, during the jackpot game, the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are set to ON based on the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, as in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G described above is executed, the jackpot game is ended and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), and the probability change is given after the jackpot game is finished. When the game ends, the gaming state of the gaming machine shifts to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot 2 terminals are set to OFF (see S7010 in FIG. 177).

  In addition, when the big hit game based on the big hit H is executed, when the state of the game machine becomes the big hit game state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, while the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the outputs of one jackpot and two jackpots remain off. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175, a case where the jackpot game is continuously executed will be described. FIG. 175 is a gaming state of the gaming machine, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal of the external output terminal plate 261, the passing state of the gaming ball of the probability variation switch 65e3, and the external output when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed. It is a timing chart showing the output of one jackpot and two jackpots of the terminal plate 261.

  175 (a) is a timing chart in the case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed, and FIG. 175 (b) is a jackpot based on each jackpot type in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, and jackpot F. It is a timing chart when a game is continuously executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175 (a), a case where the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is continuously executed will be described. In the normal gaming state, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminals, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal of the external output terminal board 261 are all set to off. After that, the lottery result is a jackpot of the jackpot G, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the outputs of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to ON (FIG. 177). See S7002 and S7004). After that, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, the time saving game is given, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot game is finished. Later, a time saving game is given and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes a time saving game state, so the jackpot 2 terminals are not set to OFF, and a signal of ON is continuously output.

  And, during the execution of the time saving game, the jackpot of the jackpot G is again made, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal are set to ON, and the jackpot 2 terminals are also continued. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). After that, when the jackpot game to be executed again ends, a time saving game is given, and the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177), while the jackpot 2 terminal is It is not set to OFF, and the ON signal is output continuously. Then, when the time saving game is not a big hit during the execution of the time saving game, when the time saving game is finished, the output of the big hit 2 terminals is set to OFF while shifting to the normal game state (see S7009 in FIG. 177).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 175 (b), a case where the jackpot game based on each jackpot type is successively executed in the order of jackpot H, jackpot G, jackpot F will be described. In the normal gaming state, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal are all set to off. After that, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot of the jackpot H, and the jackpot game based on the jackpot H is executed (S7001: Yes in FIG. 177), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, the outputs of the one jackpot and two jackpots are not set to ON but remain OFF (S7005: No in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off (see S7007 in FIG. 177). In the jackpot H, since the probability variation game or the time saving game is not given after the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are set to be off (see FIG. 175 (b)).

  After that, the lottery result becomes a jackpot G, and when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed (S7001: Yes, S7003: Yes in FIG. 177), the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal, the jackpot 1 terminal, and the jackpot 2 terminal is output. It is set to ON (see S7002 and S7004 in FIG. 177). Then, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is finished, a time saving game is given, and outputs to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are set to OFF (see S7007 in FIG. 177). On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine is a time saving gaming state, the output to the jackpot 2 terminals is not set to OFF, but the output remains ON. After that, during the time saving game, when the big hit F becomes a big hit and the big hit game based on the big hit F is executed, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S7002 in FIG. 177), and the big hit 2 terminals continue. Will be turned on.

  Then, when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is set to ON (see S7004 in FIG. 177), and the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot game is over, the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal is set to OFF (S7007 in FIG. 177), while the probability variation game is given after the jackpot game is over, so the jackpot 2 terminals are set. The output of is not turned off but remains on. After that, when the probability variation game ends, the game shifts to the normal game and the output to the jackpot 2 terminals is set to off.

  As described above, in this control example, the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 and the jackpot 1 terminal are configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. This makes it possible to determine the type of jackpot game by comparing the output timings of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal. Specifically, if both the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are turned on at the start of the jackpot game, it can be determined that it is a jackpot G, while the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot. If the jackpot 1 terminal is off, it can be determined that it is jackpot F or jackpot H, and jackpot 1 terminal is turned on based on V winning (passing of game ball to probability variation switch 65e3) during jackpot game. If it is, it can be determined that it is a big hit F, while on the other hand, if there is no V prize (passing of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3) during the big hit game and the big hit 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that it is a big hit H. it can.

  Moreover, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot, by the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, with the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the jackpot occurrence ends, so the jackpot occurrence can be detected, but it is determined whether the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to the jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game.

  If the jackpot 2 terminals in the present control example become a jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the period when the output is on continues). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpots generated when the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is on (the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) are a series of continuous jackpots.

<Regarding the control processing of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, the control processing of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described. The eighth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that a part of the special symbol variation process and the external output process is changed, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 176, details of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). In the eighth control example, compared to the first control example described above, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit when the variation time has passed (S216: Yes), the big hit type related to the lottery result is a big hit type storage area 203α. However, since the other parts are the same, detailed description of those parts will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process, first, similarly to the first control example, the processes of S201 to S216 are executed. Next, when it is determined that the present lottery result is a big hit (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the big hit type (S217), and a big hit start is set (S218). . Then, the value based on the jackpot type of the lottery result is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203α (S260). The value of the jackpot type storage area 203α stored here is referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 177) described later, and the timing of the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is controlled based on the jackpot type. Become.

  When the process of S260 ends, this process ends. In addition, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processes of S220 and S221 are executed similarly to the first control example, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the details of the external output processing (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the external output processing (S1001). This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and the commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 are executed. This is processing for transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is jackpot (S7001). In the processing of S7001, when it is determined that the gaming state of the gaming machine is a big hit (S7001: Yes), the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (S7002). , S7003. The hall computer 262 detects the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002. Thereby, the hall computer 262 can detect that the gaming machine has shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003). In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is a value indicating the jackpot G (S7003: Yes), the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and the output to the jackpot 2 terminal are turned on ( The processing moves to S7004) and S7010. By the processing of S7004, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is started, the output to the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal is turned on, and the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal are detected by the hall computer 262. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects that the accessory continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7002 and the jackpot 1 terminal whose output is turned on in the processing of S7004 are turned on at the same timing. Then (see FIG. 174 (a)), it is possible to determine that the big hit game by the big hit G has been executed, and perform the processing according to it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big hit type storage area 203α is the value indicating the big hit F or the big hit H and not the big hit G (S7003: No), the process proceeds to S7005. In the process of S7005, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on. If it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S7005: Yes), it means that a game ball has entered the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is determined that the probability variation game is given after the end of the jackpot game. . In this case, the process shifts to S7004, the outputs to the one jackpot and the two jackpots are turned on (S7004), and the process shifts to S7010.

  Here, since the big hit F is a big hit with probability variation lottery, the passage solenoid 65k operates during the execution of the big hit game, and the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, since the jackpot H is a jackpot without probability variation lottery, the passage solenoid 65k does not operate during the jackpot game, and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, the hall computer 262, when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed after the character continuous operation terminal whose output is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, the jackpot based on the jackpot F. It can be determined that the game has been executed, and processing can be performed accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and if the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, the jackpot game based on the jackpot H in which the gaming ball does not pass to the probability variation switch 65e3 is executed. It can be determined that it has been.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7005, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S7005: No), the process proceeds to S7010.

  In the process of S7001, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S7001: No), the value of the jackpot type storage area 203α is cleared (S7006), and the output to the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal are performed. The output is turned off (S7007), and the process proceeds to S7008.

  After the processing of S7007 is finished, it is then determined whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008). Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the probability variation game state is in effect, and when the time saving medium counter is greater than 0, it is determined that it is in the time saving game state. In the processing of S7008, when it is determined that the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (S7008: Yes), the process shifts to S7010 without turning off the output to the jackpot 2 terminals. On the other hand, in the process of S7008, when it is determined that the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is not (S7008: No), the output to the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off (S7009), and the process proceeds to S7010.

  By the processing of S7007, the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal can be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. Then, if the probability variation game or the time saving game is given at the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the probability variation game state or the time saving game state (S7008: Yes), the output of the jackpot 2 terminal is not turned off, The jackpot 2 terminal output is turned on continuously. On the other hand, if the probability variation game or the time saving game is not given at the end of the jackpot game and the gaming state of the gaming machine becomes the normal gaming state (S7008: No), the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is turned off.

  In the processing of S7010, other external output processing is executed (S7010), and this processing ends. In the process of S7010, for example, a process of transmitting various commands such as the reserved ball number command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. . As a result, the information from the main controller 110 can be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 and the payout controller 111.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, according to the jackpot type of the lottery result, in the jackpot game based on the jackpot type, if the timing of the signal transmitted to the terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261 is different. It is configured to let. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot F, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on. Also, in the case of the big hit G, when the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and the big hit 1 terminal is turned on. Further, in the case of the jackpot H, when the jackpot game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned on, and thereafter, the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on until the accessory continuous operation terminal is turned off.

  Thereby, the hall computer 262 detecting the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is provided in three types by detecting the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal of the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine which jackpot game is being executed based on which jackpot type among the jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to determine the jackpot type without providing terminals corresponding to each jackpot type (three types).

  Moreover, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the generated jackpot is a continuous jackpot, by the jackpot 1 terminal and jackpot 2 terminal provided on the external output plate 261. Specifically, with the jackpot 1 terminal, the output is turned off each time the jackpot game based on the jackpot occurrence ends, so the jackpot occurrence can be detected, but it is determined whether the jackpot is a continuous jackpot. Can not. Here, the continuous jackpot refers to the jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game.

  If the jackpot 2 terminals in the present control example become a jackpot during the probability variation game or the time saving game, the output is not turned off and the output is continuously turned on (the period when the output is on continues). Therefore, it is possible to determine that the jackpots generated when the output of the jackpot 2 terminals is on (the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on) are a series of continuous jackpots.

  In the present control example, the jackpot type is determined by the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 1 terminal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type can be determined by the accessory continuous operation terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal. Good. Further, either one of the jackpot or two jackpots may not be provided, or a terminal for performing an output related to the jackpot may be separately provided on the external output terminal plate 261.

  Further, the present control example is not limited to the above-described one, and other terminals of the external output terminal board 261 for outputting information related to the big hit game may be provided. For example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms) based on passage of the probability variation switch 65e3 may be provided on the external output terminal board 261. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act such as passing a game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3 even while the jackpot game of the jackpot H without the probability variation lottery is being executed. Specifically, the output of the V winning terminal is turned on based on the passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the case of the jackpot type H, even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the jackpot 1 The terminal output does not turn on. Therefore, the hall computer 262 detects that the output of the V winning terminal is turned on, but when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on, it is determined that a gaming ball has been entered into the probability change switch 65e3 due to an act of fraud. Can be notified.

  In addition, in the above-described eighth control example, the accessory continuous operation terminal indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, the jack is not provided, and one jack jack is turned on. The hall computer 262 may be configured to be able to determine the jackpot type depending on the difference in time.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game of jackpot G is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on at the start of the jackpot game, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is the jackpot game time (for example, 120 seconds). In addition, when the big hit F big hit game is executed, the big hit 1 terminal output is not turned on at the start of the big hit game, but the big hit 1 terminal output is turned on when the game ball passes to the probability variation switch 65e3, and the big hit game is played. At the end, turns off the output of the jackpot 1 terminal. In this case, the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on is shorter than the time of the jackpot game, and is the time from the period when the passage solenoid 65k is operating to the end of the jackpot game (for example, 50 seconds to 30 seconds). . Further, when the jackpot game of jackpot H is executed, the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is not turned on at the start of the jackpot game, but is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the time when the output of one jack is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  With such a configuration, the hall computer 262 can determine that the jackpot game by the jackpot G is being executed when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 120 seconds. it can. If the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is between 50 seconds and 30 seconds, it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot F is being executed. Further, when it is determined that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is 1 second, it can be determined that the jackpot game with the jackpot H is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine the jackpot type related to the jackpot game executed in the hall computer 262 without providing the accessory continuous operation terminal, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. It is to be noted that the time when the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is on is determined for each jackpot type, and the output of the jackpot 1 terminal is turned on for the on-time defined by a predetermined trigger (for example, when the jackpot is started). Good.

  Further, in the eighth control example, a terminal (winning terminal) of the external output terminal 261 whose output is set to ON based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a may be provided. Thereby, the jackpot game based on the jackpot F is executed, but if the gaming ball is not launched into the specific winning opening 65a due to the gaming ball not being launched, etc., the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Since the outputs of the jackpot 1 terminal and the jackpot 2 terminal are not turned on, the jackpot F cannot be detected. Therefore, by detecting the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the probability variation switch 65e3 is detected despite the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has not passed (in the case of a big hit H).

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. In contrast to the above-mentioned eighth control example, the ninth control example is provided with an external output terminal board 261 that outputs a signal in response to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a, and continuous winning of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. It is different in that it is configured so that it can be detected.

  Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. To be done. The continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output is kept on when there is a winning during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning occurs and the continuous winning is performed.

  Therefore, in the hall computer 262 detecting the signal of the external output terminal board 261, whether or not the generated winning is continuously won by acquiring the signals of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal. Can be determined. Further, the hall computer 262 does not need to calculate the result of the signal from the winning terminal to determine whether or not the continuous winning has occurred, and the processing that needs to be executed when the continuous winning has occurred. Is executed based on the acquisition result of the signal of the continuous winning terminal, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

  It should be noted that although this control example has a configuration in which the above-described configuration is added to the eighth control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be added to each control example described above. For example, the outputs of the winning terminals and the continuous winning terminals may be controlled according to the ball entering the V winning device in the fifth control example. In the following description, the points different from the eighth control example will be described. The same parts as those of the eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the gaming machine in the ninth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of RAM 203 of main controller 110. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the present control example is different from the RAM 203 in the eighth control example described above in that a winning period counter 203β and a continuous winning period counter 203γ are provided. Since the other points are the same, detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

  The winning period counter 203β is a counter for counting a period (a winning output period) in which a signal is output to a winning terminal. The winning period counter 203β is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 when it is determined that a game ball has entered the specific winning port 65a (prize) (S8001 in FIG. 180). : Yes), 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and when the winning period counter 203β is 1 or more every time the external output process is executed (see FIG. 180, S8008: Yes), one is subtracted (see S8009 in FIG. 180). When the winning period counter 203β becomes 0 (S8004 in FIG. 180: Yes), the output to the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 180).

  Thereby, based on the winning of the specific winning opening 65a, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 can be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds).

  The continuous winning period counter 203γ is a counter for counting the period during which a signal is output to the continuous winning terminal. This continuous winning period counter 203γ is, when it is determined in the external output process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 that a game ball has entered the specific winning port 65a (prize) (FIG. 180). S8001: Yes) and 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) are set (see S8003 in FIG. 180). Here, the external output process is a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110, and when the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 1 or more every time the external output process is executed. (S8010 of FIG. 180: Yes), one is subtracted (see S8011 of FIG. 180). Then, when the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF. If the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a before the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0, the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set again to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 18).

  Thereby, during the period until the continuous winning period counter 203γ becomes 0 (two seconds in this control example), the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 while the game ball is in the special winning device 65a. The output to can be kept on. If the game ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a until the continuous winning period counter 203γ has passed, the output to the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off (see S8007 in FIG. 180).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the relationship between the gaming state of the gaming machine and the signal of each terminal of the external output terminal board 261 in this control example will be described. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing a gaming state of the gaming machine and a signal output from the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261, when the jackpot game is executed. .

  With reference to FIG. 179 (a), a case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 179 (a) is a gaming state of the gaming machine and a gaming object continuous operation terminal, a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game. 6 is a timing chart showing signals output from the device.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, the accessory continuous operation terminal is off, and the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since there is no ball, both the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal are off.

  Next, the lottery result based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 becomes a big hit, the big hit game is started, and when the accessory continuous operation device operates, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (S8012 in FIG. 180). reference). When the accessory continuous operation device operates, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the detection switch 65c1 detects that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the output from the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is output for a predetermined time (in this control example). It is controlled to be turned on for 100 milliseconds and 2 seconds (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180).

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed (see S8005 in FIG. 180). On the other hand, the output of the continuous winning device is controlled to remain on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed, and is turned off after the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed (S8007 in FIG. 180). After that, when the jackpot game ends, the character continuous operation device is stopped, the output of the character continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or the probability variation game or the time saving game) is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case will be described in which a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game, and there is a new ball in the continuous winning output period based on the game. FIG. 179 (b) shows the gaming state of the gaming machine in the case where a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and there is a new ball in the continuous winning output period based on the ball, and the external state. It is the timing chart which showed the signal output from the accessory continuous operation terminal of the output terminal board 261, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal.

  First, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is the normal gaming state, as described above, the accessory continuous operation terminal, the winning terminal, and the continuous winning terminal are all off. Next, the lottery result based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 is a big hit, and when the big hit game is started, the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to ON (see S8012 in FIG. 180).

  When the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the detection switch 65c1 detects the game ball entering, and the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal is a predetermined time (100 milliseconds and 2 seconds in this control example). ) It is controlled to be turned on (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). After that, the output of the winning terminal is turned off after the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has passed (see S8005 in FIG. 180), and the output of the continuous winning device remains on until the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) has passed. (S8006 of FIG. 180: Yes).

  When the detection switch 65c1 detects that a game ball has newly entered the specific winning opening 65a during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal is turned on for the winning output period (100 milliseconds). Are set (see S8002 and S8003 in FIG. 180). Further, the output of the winning continuation terminal is reset (updated) so as to be turned on for the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) (see S8003 in FIG. 180), and the output is continuously turned on.

  Then, the output of the winning terminal is set to OFF after the lapse of the winning output period based on the new winning to the specific winning opening 65a (see S8005 of FIG. 180), and then after the renewed continuous winning period, the operation continues. The output of the winning terminal is set to OFF (S8007 in FIG. 180). In addition, in the updated (reset) continuous winning period, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a, the continuous winning period is updated (reset) again, and the continuous winning terminal continues to play. The output will be set to turn on.

  When the jackpot game is over, the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, and the output of the accessory continuous operation terminal is set to OFF, and the normal game (or the probability variation game or the time saving game) is performed.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is possible to determine that the game ball is continuously entering (winning) the specific winning opening 65a by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261. . Thereby, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the prize has been continuously won. Therefore, the hall computer 262 does not calculate based on the previous winning information in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, but only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, the processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of main controller in ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a control process of the main controller in the present control example will be described. The ninth control example is different from the above-described eighth control example in that a part of the external output process is changed. Since other parts are the same, detailed description of the same parts is omitted.

  The details of the external output processing (S1001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the external output process (S1001) in this control example. This external output process (S1001) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and the commands set in other processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 are executed. This is processing for transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, processing for outputting a signal to an external output terminal according to the value of each area of the RAM 203, and the like.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001). Specifically, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a will pass through the detection switch 65c1, depending on whether or not the switch of the detection switch 65c1 has been turned on in the switch reading process of the main controller 110. Determine.

  In the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: Yes), the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to ON (S8002), The winning period counter 203β is set to 25 (corresponding to 100 milliseconds), the continuous winning period counter 203γ is set to 500 (corresponding to 2 seconds) (S8003), and the process proceeds to S8008.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8001, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the winning period counter is 0 (S8004). In the process of S8004, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8004: No), if the winning output period (100 milliseconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a Therefore, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S8008.

  In the processing of S8004, when it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is not 0 (S8004: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006). In the processing of S8006, if it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8006: Yes), the continuous winning period (2 seconds) has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific winning opening 65a, Since the game ball has not newly entered the specific winning opening 65a in the continuous winning period (2 seconds), the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is set to OFF (S8007), and S8008 is set. Move to processing.

  In the process of S8006, when it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is not 0 (S8006: No), the process directly proceeds to S8008.

  Here, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is a state other than the jackpot gaming state, even if the specific winning opening 65a has not been entered and the winning period counter 203β is already 0, the process of S8005 Is executed. In this case, since the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 has already been turned off, the output of the winning terminal is set to be continuously turned off. Since the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a only during the big hit game, the processes of S8001 to S8007 may be executed only during the big hit game.

  This eliminates the need to execute the processing of S8001 to S8007 in the gaming state other than during the big hit game, and the processing load can be reduced. Also, when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in a state other than during the jackpot game, it is possible that a misconduct or anomaly occurs, so a separate error terminal is provided on the external output terminal 261 and the error terminal is used. The output of the terminal may be turned on to detect fraudulent activity or abnormal occurrence. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the error terminal for detecting fraudulent activity or abnormal occurrence, and a notification sound for notifying the error is output, or a display indicating the occurrence of the error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

  When the processing of S8003, S8005, S8006 or S8007 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning period counter 203β is greater than 0 (S8008). When it is determined in the process of S8008 that the winning period counter 203β is larger than 0 (S8008: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a, and the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the winning output period (100 milliseconds), the winning period counter 203β for measuring the winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8009), and the process proceeds to S8010.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8008, if it is determined that the winning period counter 203β is 0 (S8010: Yes), it is not necessary to measure the winning output period, not the winning output period, so the process of S8009 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8010. In the process of S8010, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning period counter 203γ is greater than 0 (S8010). When it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is larger than 0 in the process of S8010 (S8010: Yes), the game ball enters the special winning opening 65a and the output of the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on. Since it is the continuous winning output period (2 seconds), the continuous winning period counter 203γ for measuring the continuous winning output period is decremented by 1 (S8011), and the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the process of S8010, if it is determined that the continuous winning period counter 203γ is 0 (S8010: No), it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, and it is not necessary to measure the continuous winning output period, so the process of S8011 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S8012.

  In the processing of S8012, other external output processing is executed (S8012). Other external output processing, for example, similar to the external output processing in the above-described eighth control example, an external output terminal indicating a period during which the accessory continuous operating device operates, that is, a period during which the jackpot game is executed. A process of turning on the accessory continuous operation terminal of the plate 261 at a predetermined timing is executed. When the process of S8012 is finished, this process is finished and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the ninth control example, it is determined by the continuous winning terminal provided on the external terminal output plate 261 that the game ball continuously enters (wins) the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible. Specifically, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with a winning terminal and a continuous winning terminal, and the winning terminal is controlled to be turned on for a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) when there is a winning in the gaming machine. To be done. On the other hand, the continuous winning terminal is controlled so that the output is kept on when there is a winning during the continuous winning output period (2 seconds) after the winning and the continuous winning is performed.

  Thereby, in the hall computer 262 which detects the signal of the external output terminal board 261, it is detected that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (winning) by the winning terminal provided on the external output terminal board 261. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning is a continuous winning, based on the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, the hall computer 262 does not calculate based on the previous winning information in order to determine whether or not the winning detected from the winning terminal is a continuous winning, but only by referring to the output of the continuous winning terminal. Therefore, the processing load on the hall computer 262 can be reduced.

  The control example is not limited to the one described above, and the continuous winning terminal output may be continued only when the specific jackpot type is selected. As a result, a device that detects the output of the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 such as the hall computer 262 detects and compares the output of the winning terminal and the continuous winning terminal to determine the type of jackpot that has been a jackpot. You can enable it.

  In addition, the period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on (the winning output period) may be different for each jackpot type, based on the entry of the game ball into the specific winning port 65a. For example, when the jackpot type is jackpot F, the winning output period is 50 milliseconds, when the jackpot is G, the winning output period is 100 milliseconds, and when the jackpot is H, the winning output period is 150 milliseconds. Thereby, the hall computer 262 detects the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 and measures the period during which the output of the winning terminal is on (the winning output period), thereby the jackpot of the jackpot game being executed. The type can be determined. Therefore, for the purpose of determining the jackpot type, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of determining the jackpot type without separately providing a terminal on the external output terminal board 261, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

  Further, in the present ninth control example, during the winning output period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on based on the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the gaming ball is entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to set it shorter than the interval of entering the ball. When a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is continuously turned on, and the hall computer 262 cannot accurately detect the winning number. Is. Further, when the winning output period is shortened, it is necessary to shorten the detection interval of the winning terminals by the hall computer 262 correspondingly. This is because if the output of the winning terminal is not detected within the winning output period, the output of the winning terminal is turned off and the number of winnings cannot be accurately detected.

  Therefore, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a at a very short interval (10 milliseconds, etc.), the hall computer 262 needs to detect the prize terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at the very short interval. However, there is a problem that the processing load of the hall computer 262 becomes high.

  Therefore, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a during the winning output period, a period in which the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned off after the winning output period ends (the winning output stop period ) Is provided, and after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is turned on based on the game ball newly entering the specific winning opening 65a. You may

  As a result, even if the winning output period in which the winning terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is longer than the interval at which the game balls enter (for example, 100 milliseconds), the winning output period is newly entered. Since the output based on the game ball played can be executed after the winning output stop period (for example, 50 milliseconds), the hall computer 262 can accurately detect the winning (not to miss). Further, in the hall computer 262, it is not necessary to detect the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 at intervals shorter than the intervals at which the game balls enter (for example, 5 milliseconds), and the processing load of the hall computer 262 is reduced. Can be reduced.

  Here, the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is turned on when the game ball enters the specific winning port 65a in the jackpot game. The big hit game is configured so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened and a state (round) in which a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). There is. This round ends when a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the specific winning opening 65a, and then an interval between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, The next round is about to begin. Therefore, even if the winning output period is set to be longer than the interval at which the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, the external output terminal is based on all the winning balls (for example, 10 balls) in the interval between rounds. The winning terminal of the plate 261 can be output.

  Specifically, when 10 game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a at very short intervals (for example, 10 milliseconds), the game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a (10 balls). It is necessary to set the winning terminals of the external output terminal board 261 to ON for a total of 10 times and the winning output period (100 milliseconds) based on the number of minutes. Here, when a game ball newly enters the specific winning opening 65a in the winning output period, after the winning output period ends and the output of the winning terminal is turned off, after the winning output stop period (50 milliseconds), It is configured to start the next winning output period. In this case, the time required to output the signals based on all the winning balls to the winning terminals of the external output terminal board 261 is the number of times the winning terminal output is turned on (10 times) and the winning output period (100 milliseconds). ) And a product of the number of winning output periods (9 times) required after the output of the winning terminal and the winning output period (50 milliseconds) are added, 1450 milliseconds. Since this time is shorter than the inter-round interval (2 seconds), the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is completed based on all the winning balls (for example, 10 balls) during the inter-round interval period. Is possible.

  Therefore, even if the prize output period in which the prize terminal of the external output terminal 261 is set to ON is longer than the interval at which the game balls enter (for example, 100 milliseconds), a new ball is won in the prize output period. Since all the output based on the played game balls can be executed during the subsequent inter-round interval, the hall computer 262 can detect the winning (not to miss). In the interval between rounds, even if you cannot execute all the outputs based on the game balls newly entered during the winning output period, the specific winning will be performed after the jackpot game is executed until the next jackpot game is executed. Since there is a period in which the game ball does not enter the mouth 65a (interval of the big hit game), the game ball may be configured to be executed in the interval of the big hit game. The specific example described above is merely an example, and the winning output period, the winning output suspension period, the interval between rounds, and the like may be appropriately changed.

  Further, in the ninth control example, for example, a V winning terminal that outputs an ON signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) is provided on the external output terminal board 261 based on passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3. You may do it. As a result, by comparing the output timings of the winning terminal whose output is turned on based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a and the V winning terminal, an illegal V winning (the game ball entering the probability variation switch 65e3 is won). It is possible for the hall computer 262 to determine whether or not a ball has been hit.

  Specifically, even if the output of the winning terminal is not turned on, that is, the game ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, the passage of the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3 is detected, and V is detected. When the output of the winning terminal is turned on, there is a high possibility that a V prize has been illegally entered (the game ball has entered the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, when the output of the winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off but the V winning terminal is on, it can be detected as illegal or abnormal.

  Furthermore, a certain passing time (for example, 1 second) is required for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a and for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, by setting the period (continuous winning output period) during which the continuous winning terminal is on to be the time (1 second) required for passing, the V winning terminal during the period when the continuous winning terminal is off (other than the continuous winning output period). When it is turned on, the hall computer 262 can detect an illegal V winning.

  Specifically, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is sorted to either the normal discharge passage 65e1 or the special discharge passage 65e2 after the passage of a predetermined passage time (1 second), It does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage of a predetermined passage time (1 second). Therefore, when the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is turned on and then the continuous winning terminal which is turned off after the passage of a predetermined time (1 second) is turned off, the probability change switch The game ball does not pass through 65e3. Therefore, if the V winning terminal is turned on while the continuous winning terminal of the external output terminal board 261 is off (other than the continuous winning output period), it can be determined that the V winning is illegal.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 196. In the tenth control example, the player operates the frame button 22 to cause a first slide member (hereinafter, referred to as accessory A) 720, a second slide member (hereinafter, referred to as accessory B) 740, The difference is that a tilt member (hereinafter, referred to as a character C) 460 drives a character operation effect.

  This accessory operation effect is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and by the player operating (pressing) the frame button 22, a plurality of the above-described accessory objects (accessories A720 to C460). ) Is the driving effect.

  In this way, in the effect of driving the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the accessory can be driven based on the operation of the player, so that the player is motivated. It was possible to play games.

  In addition, during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), a player operates the frame button 22 by executing a character product operation effect in which the character can be driven multiple times based on the operation of the frame button 22. Since the accessory operation effect is executed a plurality of times based on the number of times the operation is performed, the player can be more enthusiastic to play the game.

  However, there is a problem that during the character product operation effect, the character object cannot be driven even when the frame button 22 is operated, and the effect effect of the character object operation effect is deteriorated. It was Here, in the case where the driving period of the accessory executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 is shortened in advance, the period during which the accessory is driven can be shortened. Although it is possible to easily drive the accessory based on this, there is a problem that the range in which the accessory is driven is reduced based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the effect of the performance is reduced.

  The accessory operation effect executed in the tenth control example solves the above-described problem. Specifically, if a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while driving a character) is satisfied while the character operation effect is being executed, the character drive pattern to be executed next time. As the drive period, a drive period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the normal drive period (for example, 1 second) is set.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, if a predetermined condition (for example, operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while driving a character) is satisfied during character operation, the character operation to be driven next time. Since a short operation period is set as, for example, when the player continuously operates (presses) the frame button 22, a short drive period is set as the drive period of the accessory, and the player sets the frame button 22 to 1 When operated (pressed) only once, a long drive period can be set as the drive period of the accessory. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times that the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory operation effect that is executed for a predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect effect of one accessory operation. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 181-183, the drive content of the accessory in this control example will be described. The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 181, an outline of the operation of each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) used for the accessory drive effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory A 720 used for the accessory drive effect in this control example. As illustrated in FIG. 181 (a), in the accessory driving effect of this control example, the accessory motor A720 is moved in the left-right direction by driving the operation motors (hereinafter, referred to as accessory motor A) 771 and 772. It is driven (see FIG. 40). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in Fig. 40 (a) to the extended position shown in Fig. 40 (b) (operation period 0.5 seconds), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position ( The operation having a total operation period of 1 second is executed.

  FIG. 181 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory B 740 used for the accessory drive effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the accessory drive effect of this control example, the accessory B is moved in the vertical direction by driving the operation motors (hereinafter, referred to as accessory B motors) 773, 774. It is driven (see FIG. 41). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 41 (b) (operation period of 1 second), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position (operation period). (1 second) and the total operation period is 2 seconds.

  FIG. 181 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an operation outline of the accessory C460 used for the accessory drive effect in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 181 (c), in the accessory driving effect of this control example, the accessory B 740 is rotationally driven by driving the operation motor (hereinafter referred to as accessory C motor) 441 ( 25 and 26). Specifically, it moves from the retracted position shown in FIG. 25 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 26 (a) (operation period of 1.5 seconds), and then moves from the extended position to the retracted position ( The operation having a total operation period of 3 seconds is performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 182, the accessory driving effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 182 (a) is a schematic diagram showing that each character (characters A720 to C460) is located at the retracted position (standby position), and FIG. 182 (b) shows each character ( It is a schematic diagram which shows that the accessory A720-the accessory C460 are located in the projecting position (operating position).

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the accessory drive effect in this control example is to operate each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) provided around the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22. It is an effect that is driven based on. Specifically, the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once to drive all the winning objects located at the retracted position (standby position) (in the case of FIG. 182 (a), the winning combination). All of the objects A720 to C460 are driven). In this way, since a plurality of winning effects can be driven based on one operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to enhance the effect effect of the winning effect driving effect based on the operation of the player.

  In this accessory driving effect, the operating time of each accessory (an accessory A720 to an accessory C460) is set to be different as described above. The accessory A720 has an operation period of 1 second, and the accessory B740 has an operation period. The operation period of the accessory C460 is set to 2 seconds, and the operation period of the accessory C460 is set to 3 seconds. In this way, by changing the operation period of each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460), all the accessory (feature A720 to role C460) are all located at the retracted position (standby position). When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state (the state where the accessory drive effect is started), all of the accessories (accessories A720 to C460) start driving. Then, after one second, the accessory A720 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (operation is completed), and one second later, the accessory B740 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (operation is completed), and finally The object C460 returns to the retracted position (standby position) (operation is completed).

  Therefore, it is possible to change the timing at which the accessory is located at the retracted position (standby position) during the accessory driving effect, and the winning combination is driven by the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effect. It is possible to make the objects different and enhance the effect of the accessory driving effect.

  In addition, although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 187, in the present control example, the period during which the frame button 22 can be operated in the accessory drive effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined) is 10 seconds. The object drive effect (long continuous hit effect) and the accessory driving effect for 5 seconds (short continuous hit effect) can be set. Thereby, the player can motivate the frame button 22 to drive the accessory multiple times within a limited period.

  Then, the respective role objects (feature objects A720 to C460) driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 are driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 182 (b). To do. In this way, by driving the accessory so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device, the player can be surely ascertained that the accessory is driving.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the operation of the accessory A 720 in the accessory drive effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the accessory A 720 driven in the accessory drive effect in this control example, and FIG. 183 (b) is a normal drive pattern in the accessory drive effect in this control example. FIG. 183 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the drive range of the accessory A720 to be driven, and FIG. 183 (c) schematically shows the drive range of the accessory A720 driven in the shortened drive pattern in the accessory drive effect in this control example. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the accessory A 720 is a pair of slide members 720 provided on the left and right of the second slide operation unit 700, respectively. The display area P of the third symbol display device 81 is located between the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the pair of slide members 720 (see FIG. 2).

  The slide member 720 is configured to be driven based on the operation of the frame button 22, and when the drive is started, the pair of slide members 720 (the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720) are respectively moved. It moves in the central direction of the second slide operation unit 700 (direction covering the display area P of the third symbol display device 81).

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are in the vicinity of the center of the second slide operation unit 700 (the display area of the third symbol display device 81). It is driven to a position where it approaches (contacts) in the vicinity of the center of P). In this normal drive pattern, the movement period from the standby position (position in FIG. 183 (a)) to the maximum drive position (position in FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.5 seconds, and the drive of the normal drive pattern is performed. The period is set to 1 second (1 second for reciprocating the moving period of 0.5 seconds).

  In this way, since the accessory A720 driven in the normal drive pattern is driven so as to cover the display area P of the third symbol display device 81 which the player is gazing at, the player drives the accessory A720. It is easy to notice and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, while the accessory drive effect is being executed, various images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (images of effect display executed in each of the control examples described above) indicate that the accessory A A720 is being driven. It is displayed in the position to avoid. Thereby, it becomes possible to simultaneously execute the effect of driving the accessory and the effect of displaying on the third symbol display device 81, and further improve the effect of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (c), when the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern, the pair of slide members 720 are driven in a half range of the drive range of the normal drive pattern. In this shortening drive pattern, the moving time from the standby position (position in FIG. 183 (a)) to the shortening drive position (position in FIG. 183 (b)) is set to 0.25 seconds, and the driving of the normal drive pattern is performed. The period is set to 0.5 seconds (0.5 seconds for reciprocating the moving period of 0.25 seconds).

  In this way, the driving period of the accessory A720 when the shortened drive pattern is set is about half the driving period of the accessory A720 when the normal drive pattern is set. Therefore, the drive period executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be shortened, and the frame button multiple times is operated during the accessory driving effect executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds or 10 seconds). In this case, it is possible to easily drive the accessory A720 based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  More specifically, when the accessory A 720 is executed in the normal drive pattern, next, the accessory A 720 becomes drivable based on the operation of the frame button 22 when the drive in the normal drive pattern ends. While the timing (that is, one second later) comes, when the accessory A720 is executed in the shortened drive pattern, the accessory A720 can be driven next based on the operation of the frame button 22. Is the timing at which the driving by the shortened driving pattern ends (that is, after 0.5 seconds).

  That is, when the accessory A720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as invalid for the accessory A720 for one second after the driving is started, and the accessory A720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern. In this case, the operation of the frame button 22 is invalidated for the accessory A 720 for 0.5 seconds after the driving is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184, description will be made regarding the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each accessory (effect product A720 to accessory product C460) in the “button repeated hit effect” that is the accessory drive effect in this control example. do. FIG. 184 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. As shown in FIG. 184, when the “button hitting effect” is started, the “effective period” during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effective is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, by the player operating the frame button 22 (“button pressing” ON) during the “valid period”, each accessory (feature A720-role) in a stopped state (a state in which the player is positioned at the standby position). The operation of the object C460) is started (point a in FIG. 184).

  In the present control example, the drive period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the drive period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the drive period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds, and the drive is performed in each predetermined period. . Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again (“button pressed” is ON) at the timing when the accessory A 720 is being driven, an invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during the invalid period (see FIG. 186). Is set to ON (point b in FIG. 184).

  After that, when the driving period (1 second) of the accessory A 720 elapses and the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the accessory A 720 is in the stopped state (position at the standby position), the accessory A 720 is driven. The shortening drive pattern is executed as the pattern, and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (point c in FIG. 184). At this point c, since the accessory B 740 is in the stopped state and the accessory C 460 is in the operating state, the accessory A 720 is driven in the shortened drive pattern based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the point c, and the accessory B 740 is activated. Are driven in a predetermined drive pattern.

  In the present control example, as described above, by operating the frame button 22 while the accessory A 720 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the accessory A 720 is set in the state in which the invalid flag 223af is set to ON. Is newly driven, the shortening drive pattern is set. Accordingly, a driving mode of the accessory that is different from the normal one can be provided to the player who has enthusiastically operated the frame button 22 while the accessory A 720 is driving, and thus the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this control example, when the accessory A 720 is newly driven in a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the shortening drive pattern is set, so that the accessory drive effect is produced. When the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times in a short period of time during a certain “button hitting effect”, it is possible to increase the number of times of driving the accessory A 720.

  Next, returning to FIG. 184, the flow when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times within a short period of time will be described. At the timing shown in the point d in FIG. 184, each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) is in the operating state based on the operation of the frame button 22 similarly to the point a. Then, the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 at a timing (that is, within 1 second from the point d) when the accessory A 720 that has started driving at the point d is operating (FIG. 184). Point e). After that, the accessory A 720 that has started driving at the point d is in a stopped state, and the timing at which the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are operating (that is, the period from 1 second after the point d until 2 seconds elapses). ), When the frame button 22 is operated, the accessory A 720 starts operating in the shortening drive pattern (0.5 seconds) (point f in FIG. 184).

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated again within 0.5 seconds after the operation of the accessory A 720 that started driving at the point f ends, the accessory A 720 starts operating in the normal drive pattern (1 second). (Point g in FIG. 184).

  This point g is a timing at which the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460, which have started driving at the point d, have not finished their operations and one second has not elapsed from the point f. In the case of the configuration in which the shortened drive pattern (0.5 seconds) is not set as the drive pattern of A720, all the accessory (accessories A720 to C460) are in the operating state at the point g, and the frame button 22 is operated. It is not possible to drive an accessory based on.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, it is possible to drive the accessory A720 at the point f in a shortened variation pattern (0.5 seconds), so that the accessory A720 can be stopped at the point g. As described above, in the present control example, the shortened driving pattern can be set as the driving pattern of the accessory, and therefore, the shortened driving pattern can be set a plurality of times (for example, point d to point g in FIG. 184). When the frame button operation is performed (four times), it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Regarding electrical configuration in 10th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an electrical configuration in the tenth control example will be described. The tenth control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of signal output control to each drive motor (771, 772, 773, 774, 441) is different. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 185, an input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A drive motor group is connected to the input / output port 225. The drive motor group includes a motor for accessory A (motor for first slide member) 771, 772, a motor for accessory B (motor for second slide member) 773, 774, and a motor for accessory C (tilt member). Motor 441) and other motors.

  Each of the above-mentioned motors is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step for setting operation contents for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number and the command that can specify the motion (rotation) direction are output. The motor operation command output from the voice lamp control device 113 is set with reference to the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 to 188, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The ROM 222 in the tenth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous hit effect selection table 222aa and an operation scenario table 222ab are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (a). FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the repeated hit effect selection table 222aa. The continuous hit effect selection table 222aa is a table for determining the execution / non-execution of the continuous hit effect and selecting the type of the continuous hit effect, and the variation pattern output from the main control device 110 is the normal reach. The above is referred to (that is, the variation time is 30 seconds or more).

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa is a table for selecting the type of continuous hit effect on the basis of the hit / miss determination result of the special figure change this time and the value of the effect counter 223f, and the continuous hit effect start time is set. In 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds), the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab that sets the period during which the frame button 22 is valid is set to 10000 milliseconds, and the continuous hitting effect start time is 10000 milliseconds (10 seconds). In), either "short continuous stroke effect" in which the continuous stroke effective timer 223ab that sets the period during which the frame button 22 is effective is set to 5000 milliseconds or "-" in which the continuous stroke effect is not executed is selected.

  The continuous hit effect selection table 222aa is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 of FIG. 190) described later (S1762). Specifically, when the hit determination result of this time is "win" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 9," "long hit effect" is selected as the hit effect type and the effect counter 223f indicates. When the value is "10 to 19", "short continuous stroke effect" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type. .

  On the other hand, when the hit determination result this time is “out” and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is “0 to 4”, “long hit effect” is selected as the hit effect type and the value of the effect counter 223f is “ In the case of "5 to 19", "short continuous stroke effect" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is "20 to 198", "-" is selected as the continuous stroke effect type.

  As described above, in the consecutive hit effect selection table 222aa in the present control example, the proportion (about 10%) of the consecutive hit effects is the same when the hit determination result is “win” and “out”. However, in the case of the hit determination result of "hit", the proportion of selecting "long hit effect" as the hit effect type is set higher than when the hit determination result is "out". (“Win” = 50%, “off” = 25%). As a result, when the "long continuous stroke effect" is executed as the continuous stroke effect, it is possible to increase the expectation of winning of the player.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the time when the continuous hit effect is executed (the continuous hit effect start time). Since the "long continuous hit effect" and the "short continuous hit effect" are the same (10000 milliseconds), whether the continuous hit effect executed this time is "long continuous hit effect" or "short continuous hit effect" depending on the timing when the continuous hit effect is started. It suppresses the player's grasping that. As a result, when the continuous hit effect is started, the player can be expected to continue the effect for a long time, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 187 (b). FIG. 187 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222ab. The action scenario table 222ab is a table in which the action scenarios of the respective winning effects in the continuous hit effect are stored, and the accessory action timers 223ac set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect. The operation command corresponding to the values of ˜223ae is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (b), in the operation scenario table 222ab, the accessory A720 scenario table 222ab1 in which the operation scenario of the accessory A720 is set, the accessory B scenario table 222ab2, and the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. Are defined, and when driving each character (character A720 to character C460), the corresponding scenario table is referred to.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c), the contents of each scenario table corresponding to the accessory A720 to the accessory C460 defined in the operation scenario table 222ab will be described.

  First, the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (a). FIG. 188 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory A 720 that is executed during continuous hitting performance is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. And an operation scenario (shortened operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “shortened”.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the accessory A scenario table 222 ab 1, the accessory button indicating the elapsed time after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect and it is determined that the accessory A 720 can be driven. Corresponding to the value of the A operation timer 223ac, the set value (operation speed) set for the accessory A motor (driver A motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario. (Pps), the number of operation steps, and the operation direction).

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In this operation pointer "01H", "100 pps" is specified as the operation speed, "50" as the number of steps, and "forward direction" as the operation direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "50" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory A operation of which the operation type is “normal” is executed, the accessory A motors 771 and 772 are in the “forward direction” for 0.5 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a). The right slide member 720b is driven in a direction in which the right slide member 720b and the right slide member 720b are close to each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and then for 0.5 second in the "negative direction" (returning direction of reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member The operation (that is, the accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 1 second) is performed in such a direction as to move away from 720b (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  When the action type is “shortening”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set in correspondence with the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In this operation pointer "01H", "100 pps" is specified as the operation speed, "25" is specified as the number of steps, and "forward direction" is specified as the operation direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “250” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "25" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory A operation of which the operation type is “shortening” is executed, the accessory A motors 771, 772 are “forward” for 0.25 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the left slide member 720a). The right slide member 720b is driven in a direction in which they are close to each other (see FIG. 183 (b)), and then “negative direction” (returning direction of reciprocating motion, that is, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member) for 0.25 seconds. The operation (that is, the accessory operation in which the entire operation period is 0.5 seconds) is performed in a direction in which the 720b and the 720b are separated from each other (see FIG. 183 (b)).

  As described above, the operation content of the accessory A720 during the continuous striking effect is the operation scenario with a long operation period (1 second) (normal drive pattern) and the operation scenario with a short operation period (0.5 second) (shortened drive pattern). ) Are defined, and one of the drive patterns is selected and executed according to the situation (the setting situation of the shortening flag 223ag) when the drive of the accessory A 720 is started.

  Although the details will be described later, the shortening flag 223ag is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the accessory A 720 is operating. The operation of the accessory A 720 is started with the shortened flag 223ag turned on (the operation of the accessory A when the shortened flag 223ag is set to be ended, and the operation of the next accessory A 720 is started. In this case, the operation type “shortening” is set. Therefore, when the player positively operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, a shortened drive pattern with a short operation period is set, and therefore, the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect. The number of times the A720 is operated can be increased.

  Further, since the normal drive pattern is set for the player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the continuous hit effect, it is possible to enhance the effect effect in one accessory action. In this way, by changing the operation pattern (operation period) of the character object based on the operation (pressing) state of the frame button 22 during the continuous striking effect, depending on the operation (pressing) state of the player with respect to the frame button 22. It is possible to execute the accessory driving effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Next, the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2. The accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory B 740 that is executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is “normal”. Only set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2, like the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 described above, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) during the continuous hit effect, and the accessory B 740 can be driven. In accordance with the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad indicating the elapsed time from the determination, the accessory B motor (for accessory B motor) is set for each value of the operation pointer indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. The setting values (operating speed (pps), the number of operating steps, and the operating direction) to be set for the driver are defined.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “2000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "forward direction" as the motion direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “1000” of the accessory B action timer 223ad. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory B operation of which the operation type is “normal” is executed, the accessory B motors 773 and 774 are “forward” for one second (the forward and backward movement directions, that is, the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740a). The member 740b is driven in a direction in which they are close to each other, and then is driven in the “negative direction” for one second (reverse direction of reciprocating motion, that is, the direction in which the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b are separated from each other (ie , The entire operation period is 2 seconds).

  Next, the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (c). FIG. 188 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. The accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is a table in which an operation scenario for the accessory C460 to be executed during the continuous hit effect is set, and is an operation scenario (normal operation scenario) executed when the operation type is "normal". Only set.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (c), in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the continuous hit effect, like the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 and the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 described above. For the character C, for each value of the motion pointer indicating the progress of setting based on the motion scenario, corresponding to the value of the character C operation timer 223ae indicating the elapsed time after it is determined that the character C460 can be driven. The setting values (operating speed (pps), the number of operating steps, and the operating direction) set for the motor (driver for the accessory C motor) are specified.

  Specifically, when the action type is “normal”, the value “01H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “3000” of the accessory C action timer 223ae. The motion pointer "01H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "150" as the number of steps, and "forward direction" as the motion direction. After that, the value “02H” of the motion pointer is set corresponding to the value “1500” of the accessory C motion timer 223ae. The motion pointer "02H" defines "100 pps" as the motion speed, "150" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value “03H” of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value “0” of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, when the accessory C operation of which the operation type is “normal” is executed, the accessory C motor 441 is in the “forward direction” for 1.5 seconds (the forward direction of the reciprocating operation, that is, the tilting member 460 is tilted). Drive for 1.5 seconds in the "negative direction" (reverse direction of reciprocating motion, that is, drive in a direction in which the tilt of the tilting member 460 is restored (i.e., a motion of an accessory for which the entire operation period is 3 seconds). Is executed.

  As described above, in this control example, the action type “shortening” is set only in the accessory A scenario table 223ab1. This is to shorten the operation of the accessory (character A720) having the shortest operation period among the plurality of characters (character A720 to character C460) that are driven during the continuous striking effect, and thus the normal character. This is because the number of operations of the accessory is increased during the continuous hit production while suppressing a reduction in the effect of the production motion.

  It should be noted that the action type “shortening” is not set in each scenario table (role B scenario table 222ab2, role C scenario table 222ab3) corresponding to the aforementioned accessory B 740 and accessory C 460, but the action type “shortening”. May be set.

  Returning to FIG. 186, the description will be continued. FIG. 186 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. The RAM 223 in the tenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that the consecutive hit effect type storage area 223aa, the consecutive hit effective timer 223ab, the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the accessory B operation timer 223ad, and the operator The difference is that an object C operation timer 223ae, an overcoming flag 223af, and a shortening flag 223ag are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa is an area for storing the type of continuous hit effect selected by referring to the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa. In the continuous stroke effect type storage area 223aa, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 190), when it is determined that the normal reach or more (variation time is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761: Yes), continuous strokes are performed. The continuous hit effect type (S1762 in FIG. 190) selected by referring to the effect selection table 222aa is set (S1763 in FIG. 190). Then, when the special figure change ends (the continuous hit effect ends), the set information (the continuous hit effect type) is cleared.

  The continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is a timer for measuring a period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is effectively determined in the continuous hitting effect. This interlocking valid timer 223ab is determined when the continuous stroke effect start time is determined in the continuous stroke button processing (S1857 in FIG. 192) executed in the frame button input monitoring / setting processing 3 (see FIG. 191), that is, When it is determined that the continuous stroke effect start time (10000 milliseconds has elapsed from the start of variation) set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the continuous stroke effect being executed this time is reached (s1902: yes in FIG. 192), The value of the continuous hit valid timer 23ab set in the operation scenario table 223ab corresponding to the consecutive hit effect being executed this time is set (S1903 in FIG. 192). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether it is the period during which the continuous hit button effect can be executed (S1906 in FIG. 192), and every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) is executed (every 1 ms). , Until the value becomes 0 (S2211 in FIG. 193), 1 is subtracted (S2212 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory A operation timer 223ac is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory A 720 in the continuous striking effect, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 corresponding to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Based on this, the operation of the accessory A 720 is controlled.

  This accessory A operation timer 223ac is cleared to 0 (S1904 of FIG. 192: Yes) when the continuous hit effect start time is reached in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192), and the continuous hit is effective. When the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory A action setting process (FIG. 194). ), A value corresponding to the state is set (S3704, S3705 in FIG. 194).

  Specifically, when the accessory A 720 is driven in the normal drive pattern, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3704 in FIG. 194), and when it is driven in the shortened drive pattern, The value of the object A operation timer 223ac is set to "500" (S3705 of FIG. 194).

  The value set in the accessory A operation timer 223ac is calculated every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), The value is decremented by 1 until the value becomes “0” (S2213: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2214 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory B operation timer 223ad is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory B 740 in the continuous stroke effect, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 corresponding to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad. Based on this, the operation of the accessory B 740 is controlled.

  This accessory B operation timer 223ad is cleared to 0 (S1904 in FIG. 192) when the continuous hit production start time is reached in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) (S1904 in FIG. 192), and the continuous hit is effective. The value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory B action setting process (FIG. 195). In (a), "2000" is set to the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad (S3802 in FIG. 195 (a)).

  The value set in the accessory B operation timer 223ad is executed every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ), The value is decremented by 1 until the value becomes “0” (S2215: Yes in FIG. 193) (S2216 in FIG. 193).

  The accessory C operation timer 223ae is a timer that counts the operation scenario of the accessory C 460 in the continuous striking effect, and corresponds to the operation scenario defined in the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 corresponding to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae. Based on this, the operation of the accessory C460 is controlled.

  The accessory C operation timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904 of FIG. 192: Yes) when the continuous hit effect start time is reached in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192), and the continuous hit is effective. If the value of the timer 223ab is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192), the accessory C action setting process (FIG. 195). In (b)), "3000" is set to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae (S3902 in FIG. 195 (b)).

  The value set in the accessory C operation timer 223ae is executed every time the button timer subtraction process (S1907 in FIG. 193) executed in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) is executed (that is, every 1 millisecond). ) Until the value becomes “0” (S2217: Yes in FIG. 193), 1 is subtracted (S2218 in FIG. 193).

  In this way, since each of the accessory (actuator A720 to accessory C460) driven based on the operation on the frame button 22 during the continuous stroke effect is provided with an operation scenario and an operation timer, each accessory Can be driven independently. Further, in the present control example, since the values of the operation timers set for the respective role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are made different, the operation of driving each role object (roles A 720 to role product C 460). The period is different. As a result, it is possible to drive only the accessory that is not driven when the frame button 22 is operated (the accessory whose operation timer value is “0”). Therefore, the movement of the entire character product when the frame button 22 is operated can be varied according to the operation status of each character product (character product A720 to character product C460), and the staging effect can be enhanced. it can.

  In addition, for each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460), for an accessory A720 having a shorter operation period than the other accessory (features B740 and C460), an operation scenario (having a shorter operation period). Since the shortening drive pattern can be set, all the role objects (features A720 to C460) are driven at the same time during the continuous hit effect (of all the role matters (features A720 to C460). It is possible to shorten the period in which the value of the operation timer is not “0”, and it is possible to easily execute the driving effect of the accessory based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  The invalid flag 223af is a flag for determining that the frame button 22 has been operated while the accessory A 720 is operating (the value of the accessory A operation timer is not “0”). Is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation. In a state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, when the driving of the accessory A 720 is started, an operation scenario (shortening drive pattern) having an operation period shorter than usual is set.

  This invalid flag 223af is set to OFF (S1905 of FIG. 192) when the continuous stroke effect start time has been reached (S1902 of FIG. 192: Yes) in the continuous stroke button process (see FIG. 192), and the continuous stroke effective timer 223ab is set. In the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) executed when the value is larger than 0 (S1906: Yes in FIG. 192) and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (S1908: Yes in FIG. 192). If the accessory A operation timer 223ac value is not "0" (S3701: No in FIG. 194), it is set to ON (S3702 in FIG. 194).

  In the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194), when the accessory A operation timer 223ac value is “0” (S3701: Yes in FIG. 194) and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (FIG. 194). S3703: Yes), the operation scenario, which is the shortened drive pattern, is set (S3705 in FIG. 194) and then set to OFF (S3706 in FIG. 194).

  In the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is in operation, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and the timing at which the next repeated hit effect is started or the next effect A 720 is displayed. Although the configuration is such that it is not set to OFF until the operation is executed, a condition for setting the invalid flag 223af to OFF may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. Good.

  As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times executes the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an accessory effect according to the operation status of the frame button 22. In this case, the period in which the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF may be set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory (the accessory C460) that has the longest operation period among the accessories that can be driven in the continuous striking effect. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are not driven in the continuous stroke effect, only the role action A 720 has the shortening drive pattern. It can be prevented from being set.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated once while the accessory A 720 is operating, the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, but another condition is set as the invalid flag 223af to be ON. A condition may be set, for example, a condition may be set to turn on when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while the accessory A 720 is operating, or a continuous striking effect period. When the remaining period (remaining period of the continuous hit valid timer) becomes a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds), the condition may be set to ON.

  In addition, in the present control example, the invalidation flag 223af is set to OFF when the operation scenario that is the shortening drive pattern is set, but a configuration other than that may be used, for example, once the invalidation flag 223af is turned ON. If set, the invalid flag 223af may not be set to off until the continuous hit effect is completed.

  The shortening flag 223ag is a flag for determining the action type of the accessory A 720, and is set to ON when the action type “shortening” is selected. This shortening flag 223ag is set when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON in the accessory A action setting process (see FIG. 194) executed in the repeated hit button process (see FIG. 192) (FIG. 194). S3703: Yes) is set to ON (S3703 in FIG. 194).

  Then, in the character action processing (FIG. 196), the character is referred to when selecting the motion type of the character A scenario table (S2512 in FIG. 196), and when the motion type is selected and the motion scenario is set (S2514), It is set to OFF (S2515 in FIG. 196).

<Regarding Control Process in 10th Control Example>
Next, the control processing in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 196. In the control processing in the tenth control example, the contents of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first control example. Other processes are the same as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the tenth control example, the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) is changed to the variable display setting process 3 (S1512 of FIG. 190) in contrast to the main process of the first control example (see FIG. 80). Point, the point that the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191), and the accessory operation process (S1561 in FIG. 196). It is different from the newly added point.

  First, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the content of the main process in the tenth control example. When the main process is executed, the processes of S1501 to S1506 are executed similarly to the main process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 80), and when the process of S1506 is finished, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) is executed instead of S1507 of 83. A detailed description of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560 in FIG. 191) will be given later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1560 ends, the processes of S1508 to S1510 are executed similarly to the main process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 80), and after the process of S1510 ends, the accessory action process (S1512). To execute. The detailed description of the accessory motion processing (S1561) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the processing of S1561 is finished, the command determination processing (S1511) is then executed in the same manner as the main processing of the first control example (see FIG. 80) described above, and then the variable display setting processing (S1512) is replaced. The variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed. A detailed description of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the processes of S1513 to S1517 are executed similarly to the main process of the first control example (see FIG. 80) described above, and the present process is terminated.

  Next, the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S1512). This variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is different from the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) in the above-described first control example in that a process for performing continuous hit effect is added. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the variable display setting process 3 (S1512) is executed, the processes of S1701 to S1703 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process (S1512 of FIG. 82) of the first control example described above. Then, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1703 is equal to or more than the normal reach (whether the fluctuation time of the extracted fluctuation pattern is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) or more) (S1761).

  In the processing of S1761, when it is determined that the normal reach or more is reached, then, the continuous hit effect type is selected based on the value of the continuous hit effect selection table 222aa and the effect counter 223f (S1762), and the selected continuous hit effect is selected. The type is set in the continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa (S1763).

  When the process of S1763 is completed, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703 and the continuous shot effect type set in the continuous shot effect type storage area 223aa in S1763 (S1704). On the other hand, in the processing of S1761, if it is determined that the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S1703 is not equal to or more than the normal reach (S1761: No), the processing of S1762 and S1763 is skipped and based on the variation pattern extracted in S1703. The display variation pattern command is set (S1704).

  When the process of S1704 ends, the processes of S1706 to S1709 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process of the first control example (S1512 of FIG. 82), and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) in this control example will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1560) is different from the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1507 in FIG. 83) in that the continuous hit button process (S1857) is added.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1560) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1816 are executed in the same manner as the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1507 of FIG. 83) of the first control example described above. The continuous hit button processing is executed (S1851). Then, when the processing of S1851 is finished, this processing is finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the continuous hit button processing (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing (S1851). In the continuous hit button processing (S1851), in order to determine the operation content of each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) executed based on the operation (press) on the frame button 22 performed during the continuous effect. The process of is executed.

  When the continuous hit button process (S1851) is executed, first, it is determined whether the continuous hit effect type storage area 223aa has a continuous hit effect type (“long continuous hit effect” or “short continuous hit effect”) set therein (S1901). In the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the continuous hit effect type is not set, that is, when the continuous hit button effect is not executed in this change (S1901: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous hit effect type is set (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the continuous hit effect start time (S1902). In the process of S1902, it is determined whether 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) have elapsed since the continuous hit effect was started (see FIG. 187 (a)).

  In the process of S1902, when it is determined that the continuous hit production start time is reached (S1902: Yes), a value corresponding to the current continuous hit effect type is set to the continuous hit effect timer 223ab as an initial process when starting the continuous hit effect (“ "10000" in the case of "long hit production" and "5000" in the case of "short hit production" are set (S1903), and each accessory action timer (effect A action timer 223ac, role B action timer 223ad, The accessory C operation timer 223ae is cleared to 0 (S1904), and the invalidation flag 223af is set to off (S1905). Then, it transfers to S1906.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1902, when it is determined that it is not the continuous striking effect start time (S1902: No), the initial processes S1903 to S1905 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is larger than "0" (S1906). Here, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective timer 223ab is not larger than “0” (“0”), that is, in the variation in which the continuous hitting effect is executed, the continuous hitting effect is not started. If there is (S1906: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1906, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is larger than “0” (S1906: Yes), the button timer subtraction process is then executed (S1907). Here, the button timer subtraction process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button timer subtraction process (S1907). This button timer subtraction processing (S1907) is for subtracting various timers (duration effective timer 223ab, character A operation timer 223ac, character B operation timer 223ad, character C operation timer 223ae) set during the continuous stroke effect. Processing.

  When the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is larger than "0" (S2211), and when it is determined that it is larger than "0" (S2211: Yes). , The value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is decremented by 1 (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (it is “0”), the process of S2212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2213.

  Next, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "0" (S2213), and when it is determined that the value is larger than "0" (S2213: Yes), the accessory A operation is performed. The value of the timer 223ac is decremented by 1 (S2214), and the process proceeds to S2215. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2213: No), the process of S2214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2215.

  In the process of S2215, it is determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "0" (S2215), and when it is determined that the value is larger than "0" (S2215: Yes), the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined. The value is decremented by 1 (S2216), and the process proceeds to S2217. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2215: No), the process of S2216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2217.

  In the process of S2217, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than "0" (S2217), and when it is determined that the value is larger than "0" (S2217: Yes), the accessory C operation timer 223ae is detected. The value is decremented by 1 (S2218), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2217: No), the process of S2218 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 192, the description will be continued. After the button timer subtraction process (S1907) is finished, it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) (S1908), and when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1908: Yes), each character object As the processing for driving, the accessory A operation setting processing (S1909), the accessory B operation setting processing (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting processing (S1911) are executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1908, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1908: No), the present process is terminated.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process (S1909). In this accessory A action setting process (S1909), a process for starting the action of the accessory A720 during the continuous hit effect and a process for setting the action type ("normal" or "shortened") of the accessory A720 are performed. To be executed.

  When the accessory A operation setting process (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3701). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3701: Yes), the invalid flag 223af is set next. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (S3703), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3703: No), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000. Is set, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating. (S3701: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3702), and this processing ends.

  In addition, in the processing of S3703, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3703: Yes), next, "500" is set to the value of the accessory action A timer 223af (S3705). The invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3706), the shortening flag 223ag is set to on (S3707), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process (S1910). In the accessory B action setting process (S1910), a process for starting the action of the accessory B740 during the continuous striking effect is executed.

  When the accessory B operation setting process (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3801). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3801: Yes), the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set. The value is set to "2000", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3801, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3801: No), the process ends as it is.

  FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process (S1911). In the accessory C action setting process (S1911), a process for starting the action of the accessory C460 during the continuous striking effect is executed.

  When the accessory C operation setting process (S1911) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3901). When it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is not operating (S3901: Yes), the accessory C operation timer 223ae is set. The value is set to "3000", and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3901, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C460 is operating. (S3901: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the accessory operation process (S1561) executed in the main process (see FIG. 189) of the present control example will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory action processing (S1561). In this accessory action process (S1561), the accessory A action setting process (S1909), the accessory B action setting process (S1910), and the accessory C action setting executed in the above-described continuous hit button process (S1851 of FIG. 192). Based on the various timers and flags set in the process (S1911), a process for setting an operation command for each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is executed. The operation command set in this processing is output to a drive motor (motor driver) for driving each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460).

  When the accessory operation process (S1561) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "0" (S2511). The value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not larger than "0" (when it is determined to be "0" (S2511: No), the processing (S2512 to S2514) related to the accessory A720 is skipped and shortened. The flag 223ag is set to off (S2515), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  In the processing of S2511, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (S2511: Yes), then it is determined whether the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512). If it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is set to ON (S2512: Yes), the action content corresponding to the action type “shortening” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is read (S2513), The process moves to S2516.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the shortening flag 223ag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2512: No), it corresponds to the operation type “normal” defined in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. The content of the operation to be performed is read (S2514), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  In the process of S2516, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "0" (S2516). The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not larger than “0” (when it is determined that the value is “0” (S2516: No), S2517 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2518. When it is determined that the value of the item B operation timer 223ad is larger than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read (S2517), and the process proceeds to S2518.

  In the process of S2518, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than "0" (S2518). The value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not larger than "0" (when it is determined that the value is "0" (S2518: No), S2519 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2520. When it is determined that the value of the item C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0” (S2518: Yes), the operation content of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3 is read (S2519), and the process proceeds to S2520.

  Then, an operation command is set based on each operation content read in the above-described processing of S2513, S2514, S2547, and S2519 (S2520), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, all of the drivable characters (characters A720 to C460) are driven based on one operation (press) on the frame button 22. Is configured to. Therefore, it is possible to drive a plurality of winning effects by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 once, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect of the winning effect driving effect executed based on the operation of the player.

  In addition, since the operation period is made different for each accessory (feature A720 to role C460), each accessory in a drivable state (feature A720 to role is depending on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. Object C460) can be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the drive mode of the accessory when the frame button 22 is operated, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect of the accessory drive effect executed based on the operation of the player.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory (feature A720) is in operation, when the accessory is driven next time, the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period of the accessory is short is set, so that the frame is For the player who is willing to operate the button 22 a plurality of times, the number of times of driving the accessory based on the operation on the frame button 22 can be increased. Further, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times, the accessory does not drive in the shortened drive pattern, and the accessory drives in a long operation period. Can be increased.

  That is, in the accessory drive production in this control example, the player's frame button operation is performed by changing the accessory drive pattern in accordance with the situation in which the player operates the frame button 22 (one-time operation, continuous hit operation). There is an effect that it is possible to execute the accessory driving effect according to.

  In the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A 720, the invalid flag 223af which is a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern is set to be turned on. However, another condition may be set as a condition for setting the invalidation flag 223af on (that is, a condition for executing the shortened drive pattern as a drive pattern different from the normal drive pattern). For example, the accessory A720 The condition may be satisfied when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times (for example, three times) while is being operated, or the remaining period of the continuous striking effect period (remaining period of the continuous striking effective timer) is The condition may be satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds or less) is reached, or the condition may be satisfied based on a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid.

  Furthermore, it is not a cumulative value of the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one character action, but a plurality of character actions (for example, it is operated during a period in which one character drive effect is executed. The number of times the frame button 22 is operated may be configured to be accumulated over the character action).

  In addition, in the tenth control example described above, the invalid flag 223af, which is a condition for executing the shortening drive pattern when the frame button 22 is operated during the operation of the accessory A 720, starts the next continuous hit effect. Although it is configured not to be turned off until the timing of turning on or the next action of the accessory A 720 is executed, a condition for setting the invalidation flag 223af to off may be further provided. For example, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, the invalid flag 223af may be set to OFF. Good.

  As a result, only the player who continuously operates the frame button 22 a plurality of times executes the shortened drive pattern in which the operation period is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an accessory effect according to the operation status of the frame button 22. In this case, the period in which the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF may be set to the operation period (3 seconds) of the accessory (the accessory C460) that has the longest operation period among the accessories that can be driven in the continuous striking effect. With such a configuration, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which all the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are not driven in the continuous stroke effect, only the role action A 720 has the shortening drive pattern. It can be prevented from being set.

  In addition, in the present control example, the shortening drive pattern can be set only for the accessory A 720, but the shortening drive pattern is set for the other accessories (the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460). You may enable it.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to change the operation pattern (driving pattern) of the accessory in a series of accessory driving effects (to change from the normal driving pattern to the shortening driving pattern), the frame during the effects driving effect is changed. Although the variable condition is satisfied based on the operation of the button 22 (the invalid flag 223af is set to ON), other than that, for example, a period before a series of accessory driving effects are executed. A configuration may be used in which the action pattern of the accessory is changed in advance based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.).

  With this configuration, it is possible to set a shortened drive pattern in the first accessory motion in the series of accessory drive effects, and to correspond to the operation on the frame button 22 in the series of accessory effect effects. It is possible to easily increase the number of times the accessory action is executed.

  In the present control example described above, a single shortening operation pattern (shortening drive pattern) having a shorter operation period is used for the normal operation pattern, but a plurality of shortening operation patterns having different operation periods are provided. , One of the plurality of shortening operation patterns is set based on the operation status of the frame button 22 (number of operations, operation interval, etc.), the remaining period of the effect, and the gaming state (result of judgment of the special symbol) You may comprise.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 205. The eleventh control example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that control for changing the driving timing of the accessory in the accessory drive effect is added.

  Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect, each accessory (accessories A 720 to 720) located at the retracted position (standby position). Although the object C460) is configured to be driven simultaneously, in the eleventh control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the timing at which the character B740 is driven with respect to the accessory A720 is set. It is set to be delayed by 0.1 second, and the timing at which the accessory C 460 is driven with respect to the accessory A 720 is delayed by 0.2 seconds (0.1 second for the accessory B 740).

  In this way, by changing the timing of driving each character (character A720 to character C460) with respect to the operation of the frame button 22, all the character (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously operated. It becomes possible to shorten the period of driving, and it is possible to easily drive any of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the role effect drive effect. , It is possible to enhance the effect effect during the accessory driving effect.

  If the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delayed state is released. The driving of the target accessory (feature C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective role objects (the role objects A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect during the role product drive effect.

  As described above, when the control for varying the drive timing of the accessory in the accessory drive effect is used, the process of delaying the drive timing for the accessory having a long operation period set among the plurality of accessories (Delay processing) should be executed. With such a configuration, since the driving of the accessory having a short operation period is executed during the delay period, it is possible to efficiently reduce the period in which the respective accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) are simultaneously driven. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the delay operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which each character (characters A720 to B740) driven in the character driving effect in this control example is located at the retracted position (standby position). 197 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect and the accessory A 720 starts driving, and FIG. ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state in which the accessory B 740 for which the delay process has been executed in the accessory drive effect has started operation.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 located at the retracted position (standby position) are arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as in the above-described tenth control example. To be done. Note that, for convenience of description, the accessory C460 is not shown in FIG. 197, but in reality, the accessory C460 is provided at the same location as the above-described tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)).

  In this control example, when the accessory drive effect is started and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the accessory A 720 first starts operating as shown in FIG. 197 (b). Specifically, the operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 1 second) (see FIG. 188 (a)) is executed. Then, 0.1 second later, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), the accessory B 740 starts operating. Specifically, the operation of the operation type “normal” (operation period of 2 seconds) (see FIG. 188 (b)) is executed.

  As described above, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) in a state in which the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are drivable (a state in which the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in the retracted position (standby position)) (see FIG. 197 (a)). When the accessory A 720 starts to operate (see FIG. 197 (b)), the accessory B 740 starts the operation with a delay (FIG. 197 (c)), so that the frame button 22 is operated once. It is possible to drive a plurality of accessories at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that the accessory can be driven at various timings with respect to the operation of the frame button 22 and the effect effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the period from the state shown in FIG. 197 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 197 (c), that is, the period from the action of the accessory A 720 to the action of the accessory B 740 (delay period). If the frame button 22 is operated during), the accessory B 740 starts operating without waiting for the delay period. As a result, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and to enhance the effect effect during the role effect drive effect. it can.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period as described above, the accessory B 740 starts the operation without waiting for the delay period. Even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the action of the accessory B 740 may not be started until the delay period elapses. In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, but since the accessory B740 starts driving after the delay period elapses, the player is delayed. It can be assumed that driving of the accessory B 740 has been executed (started) based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a flow of operation of the frame button 22 and operation of each accessory (effect A 720 to accessory C 460) in the “button repeated hit effect” that is an effect drive effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example. In this control example, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) while the specific accessory (the accessory B740 or the accessory C460) is operating, and then the specific accessory (the accessory B740). Alternatively, when the accessory C460) is driven, the operation start timing is delayed.

  Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while either the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is in operation, an invalid flag 223 af described later is set to ON. When the operation of the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is started with the invalid flag 223af set to ON, a delay process of delaying the operation start timing is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 198, the player operates the frame button 22 (“button pressed” ON) during the effective period of the “button repeated production”, and thereby the player is in the stopped state (state in which the player is in the standby position). The action of each character (character A720 to character C460) is started (point a in FIG. 198).

  In this control example, as in the tenth control example described above, the driving period of the accessory A 720 is set to 1 second, the driving period of the accessory B 740 is set to 2 seconds, and the driving period of the accessory C 460 is set to 3 seconds. It is driven for a fixed period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (“button pressed” is ON) at the timing when the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 is operated during the invalid period is turned on. (Point b in FIG. 198).

  After that, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at a timing when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in a stopped state (a state where the accessory A 720 is located at the standby position), the accessory A 720 performs a normal operation, and the accessory A 720 is executed. In B740, delay processing (delay period 0.1 seconds) is executed (point c in FIG. 198). At this point c, since the accessory C460 is being driven, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  More specifically, in this control process, after the operation setting process for the accessory B 740 (effect B operation setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)) is completed, the operation setting process for the accessory C 460 (effect C operation setting process). (S1911 of FIG. 204) is executed, the invalid flag 223af is once set to OFF in the accessory B operation setting process when the frame button 22 is operated at the point c in FIG. 198. After that, since the invalid flag 223af is set to ON again in the accessory C operation setting process, the invalid flag 223af is continuously set to ON.

  Then, after the lapse of the delay period (0.1 seconds), the operation of the accessory B 740 (operation period of 2 seconds) is executed (point d in FIG. 198). After that, when the frame button 22 is operated (point e in FIG. 198) while the operation of the accessory C460 is completed, the accessory A720 performs the normal operation, and the accessory C460 performs the delay process (delay period 0). .2 seconds) is executed (point e in FIG. 198). Note that at this point e, since the delay process is executed for the accessory C460, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF. Then, after the lapse of the delay period (after 0.2 seconds), the operation of the accessory C460 (operation period of 3 seconds) is executed (point f in FIG. 198).

  Then, at the timing of point g in FIG. 198, that is, in the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF, and when the accessory A 720 and the accessory B 740 are in a stopped state (a state in which they are located at the standby position), the combination When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the object C460 is in the operating state (in operation), the operations of the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 are executed, and the invalid flag 223af is set to ON.

  Then, at the timing of the point h in FIG. 198, that is, in the state where the invalid flag 223af is set to ON, and all of the accessory A 720, the accessory B 740, and the accessory C 460 are in the stopped state (positioned at the standby position. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of (state of being), the operations of the accessory A 720 and the accessory C 460 are executed, and the delay process is executed for the accessory B 740.

  As described above, this is because in the present control example, after the operation setting process for the accessory B 740 (effect B operation setting process (S1910 in FIG. 203)) is completed, the operation setting process for the accessory C 460 (effect C operation). Since the setting process (S1911 in FIG. 204) is configured to be executed, when the frame button 22 is operated at the point h in FIG. 198, the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF in the accessory B operation setting process. This is because the operation content of the accessory C 460 is set in the accessory C operation setting process after the operation.

  In this way, the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON and the invalidation flag 223af is set to ON by operating the frame button 22 while any one of the plurality of character products (the character products B740 and character product C460) is operating. When any one of the plurality of character products (character B740 and character C460) performs the operation in the state in which the delay flag is set and the invalid flag 223af is set to OFF, the character B740, character By executing in the order of C460, when the operations of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are executed with the invalid flag 223af set to ON, only the accessory B 740 is subjected to the delay process. Become.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the delay processing from being simultaneously performed on a plurality of character objects (character objects B740 and character objects C460).

  Next, a flow of operation of each winning combination when the frame button 22 is operated during the delay process will be described with reference to points h and i in FIG. If the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process (0.1 seconds) is being executed for the accessory B 740 (0.08 seconds after the delay process is executed) at the point h in FIG. 198 ( At point i) in FIG. 198, the delaying process being executed is terminated, and the accessory B 740 executes an operation based on the frame button operation at point i in FIG. 198.

  In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed, the delay process is stopped and the character product is driven, so that the character product based on the frame button operation in the “button repeated production” is performed. The number of operations can be increased.

  In this control example, the invalidation flag 223af is set to the initial state (set to OFF) at the timing when the “button repeated effect” is started, but other configurations may be used, for example, , May be set to OFF at the timing when the “effective period” of the “button repeated production” ends, or may be set to OFF at the timing when the “button continuous production” ends.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. The RAM 222 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 222 in the tenth control example in that a character product B delay timer 222ba and a character product C delay timer 222bb are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory B delay timer 223ba is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay process is executed on the accessory B 740, and the value (for example, "100") set in this timer is 1 It is subtracted every millisecond and the delay process ends when the value of the timer becomes "0". This character B delay timer 223ba is set to 0 in the character B motion timer 223ad in character B operation setting processing 2 (refer to FIG. 203) executed in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (refer to FIG. 200). (S3811 of FIG. 203: Yes), when the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813: Yes of FIG. 203), the value of “100” is set, and the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (see FIG. 200) is performed. Every time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2352 in FIG. 201).

  Then, in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 203), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not "0", the timer value becomes "0". Is set.

  The accessory C delay timer 223bb is a timer for counting the delay period when the delay process is executed on the accessory C460, and the value (for example, "200") set to this timer is 1 It is subtracted every millisecond and the delay process ends when the value of the timer becomes "0". It This character C delay timer 223bb is a character C operation timer 223ae whose value is "0" in the character C operation setting processing 2 (refer to FIG. 204) executed in the continuous hit button effect processing 2 (refer to FIG. 200). (S3911: Yes in FIG. 203), if the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes in FIG. 203), a value of "200" is set, and the continuous hit button effect process 2 (see FIG. 200) is performed. Each time the executed delay timer subtraction process (see FIG. 201) is executed, 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S2354 in FIG. 201).

  Then, in the character C action setting process 2 (see FIG. 204), when the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the value of the character C delay timer 223bb is not "0", the value of the timer becomes "0". Is set.

  As described above, the accessory B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb described above are the delay periods set when the delay process is executed (0.1 seconds for the accessory B740, C460 is a timer for counting 0.2 seconds).

  Further, in each of the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460, when the frame button 22 is operated while the delay process is being executed (while the delay period is being counted), each delay timer (character The B delay timer 223ba and the accessory C delay timer 223bb) are set to "0". Accordingly, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the delay period, the accessory can be driven based on the operation on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to easily drive the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460 based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory drive effect (during continuous hit effect), and it is possible to enhance the effect effect during the accessory drive effect. .

<Regarding Control Process in 11th Control Example>
Next, the control processing in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205. In the control processing in the eleventh control example, the content of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the eleventh control example, the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button process 2 (see FIG. 200), and the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) is an accessory. The difference is that the operation process 2 (see FIG. 205) is changed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 200, the continuous hit button processing 2 (S1851) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1560) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous hit button processing 2 (S1851). In the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851), the operation of each accessory (effect A720 to effect C460) executed based on the operation (press) on the frame button 22 in the continuous effect (“button repeated effect”). A process for determining the content is executed.

  The respective processes of the continuous stroke button process 2 (S1851) in the eleventh control example are different from each other in that a delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is added to the continuous stroke button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example. To do.

  When the continuous hit button process 2 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process of the first control example (see FIG. 192), and then the delay timer subtraction process is executed. (S1921), then the processes of S1908 to S1911 are performed, and this process ends.

  Next, the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the contents of the delay timer subtraction process (S1921). When the delay timer subtraction process (S1921) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than "0" (S2351). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2351: Yes), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S2352), The processing moves to S2353.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2353.

  In the process of S2353, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is larger than "0" (S2353). When it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2353: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is subtracted by 1 (S2354), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223ca is “0” (S2353: No), the process of S2354 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909). The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory A operation setting process (see FIG. 194) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory A operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 202).

  When the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3711). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3711: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3712), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3711, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3711: Yes), the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to “1000” (S3713). ), And this processing ends.

  That is, in the accessory A operation setting process 2 (S1909) described above, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is referred to, it is determined whether or not the current operation state of the accessory A 720 is in operation, and the operation is in progress. In this case, the invalid flag 223af indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated during operation is set to ON, and if not in operation (in the stopped state (standby state)), the operation of the accessory A 720 is executed. Therefore, a process of setting the value “1000” (corresponding to 1 second) to the accessory A operation timer 223ac is executed.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory B action setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory B action setting process 2 (see FIG. 203).

  In the accessory B operation setting process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3811). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0” (is equal to or larger than “1”) (S3811: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3812), and this processing ends. To do.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3813). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3813: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0”. (S3814). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is not “0” (is equal to or larger than “1”) (S3814: No), the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is set to “0” ( S3815) and S3816 is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S3814, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is “0” (S3814: Yes), the process of S3815 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3816.

  In the process of S3816, the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3816), and the present process is terminated.

  In addition, in the processing of S3813, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (is ON) (S3813: Yes), “100” is set to the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba ( (S3817), the invalid flag 223af is set to off (S3818), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1910 in FIG. 203), the accessory B 740 can be operated or delayed based on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and the delay When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing of the processing (the value of the character B delay timer 223ba is “1” or more), the delay processing is ended and the processing of operating the character B 740 is executed.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 2 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 2 (S1911).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory C operation setting process 2 (see FIG. 204).

  In the accessory C operation setting process 2 (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3911). When it is determined that the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not "0" ("1" or more) (S3911: No), the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3912), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the invalid flag 223af is on (S3913). When it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3913: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “0” (S3914). ).

  In the processing of S3914, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is not “0” (“1” or more) (S3914: No), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to “0”. The setting is made (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3916. On the other hand, in the process of S3914, when the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is "0" (S3914: Yes), the process of S3915 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3916.

  In the process of S3916, "3000" is set to the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae (S3916), and the present process is terminated.

  In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the invalid flag 223af is set to ON (S3913: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is set to "200" (S3917), and the invalid flag 223af is set. Is set to off (S3918), and this processing ends.

  Next, the accessory motion processing 2 (S1561) will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory action processing 2 (S1561).

  The eleventh control example is different in that the accessory action process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example is changed to the accessory action process 2 (see FIG. 205).

  In this accessory operation process 2 (S1561), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S2531). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2531: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type “normal” in the accessory A scenario table 222ab1 is set. Read-out (S2532) and the process proceeds to S2533. On the other hand, in the process of S2531, when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is determined to be “0” (S2531: NO), the process of S2532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2533.

  In the process of S2533, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than “0” (S2533). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S2533: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than "0". It is determined (S2534). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2534: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type of the accessory B scenario table 222ab2 is read ( S2535) and S2536.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is determined to be "0" in the processing of S2533 (S2533: No), or the value of the accessory B delay timer 223ba is determined to be "0" in the processing of S2534. If it is (S2534: No), the process of S2535 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2536.

  In the process of S2536, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0”. In the process of S2536, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2536: Yes), the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is “next”. It is determined whether it is larger than "0" (S2537).

  In the processing of S2537, when it is determined that the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S2537: Yes), the operation corresponding to the operation type of the accessory C scenario table 222ab3. The content is read (S2538), and the process proceeds to S2539.

  On the other hand, when the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is determined to be "0" in the process of S2536 (S2536: No), or the value of the accessory C delay timer 223bb is determined to be "0" in the process of S2537. In the case of (S2537: No), the process of S2538 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2539.

  In the processing of S2539, an operation command is set based on the read operation content (S2539), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, since the timings at which the respective roles (features A 720 to C 460) are driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 are made different, all the roles (features) It becomes possible to shorten the period in which the A720 to the accessory C460) are being driven at the same time, and any of the accessory (the accessory A720 to the accessory C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory drive effect. Can be easily driven, and the effect effect during the character object drive effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the driving timing of the accessory is delayed (for example, the driving timing of the accessory C460 is delayed by 0.2 seconds), the delay is performed. The state is canceled, and the driving of the target accessory (accessory C460) is started based on the operation of the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to easily drive any of the respective role objects (the role objects A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect during the role product drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the delay processing is executed for the accessory B 740 (operating period 2 seconds) and the accessory C 460 (operating period 3 seconds) having a longer operating period than the accessory A 720 (operating period 1 second). Is configured as follows. In other words, when a plurality of accessories are driven at the same time, the delay processing is executed for the accessories having a long operation period. As a result, the operation of the accessory having a short operation period is executed while the delay process is being executed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to further shorten the period in which a plurality of the accessory operates at the same time. .

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory that is being delayed is started without waiting for the delay period. However, even if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the delay period, the operation of the accessory B may not be started until the delay period elapses.

  In this case, the accessory cannot be driven based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the delay period, but since the accessory starts to operate after the delay period elapses, the delay period is notified to the player. It can be assumed that the action of the accessory is executed (started) based on the operation (pressing) of the inner frame button 22.

  Further, in the present control example, while delay processing can be executed for a plurality of character objects (characteristics B740 and character object C460), the delay processing can be performed simultaneously for a plurality of character objects by one frame button operation. Since it is configured not to be executed, it is possible to suppress the delay processing from being simultaneously executed on a plurality of character objects (character object B740 and character object C460). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the delay process is simultaneously executed for a plurality of accessory products and the period in which the plurality of accessory products operate simultaneously is not shortened.

  Further, in the present control example, since the delay period set in the delay process is different for each accessory, it is possible to further prevent the situation in which the period in which a plurality of accessory operates simultaneously is not shortened. it can.

  In this control example, the period delayed in the delay process is a short period (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds), but the length of the delay period is not limited to this. A delay period that is longer than the operation period in which the accessory operates may be set. By doing so, it is possible to further suppress simultaneous movement of a plurality of accessories.

  Further, in the present control example, only one type of delay period is defined for each character in the delay process, but a plurality of types of delay periods may be set for each character. In this case, it is advisable to discriminate the accessory to be simultaneously executed and select the delay period based on the discrimination result. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to further shorten the period in which a plurality of accessory works simultaneously.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to execute the delay process in the series of accessory driving effects, the delay condition is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the accessory driving effects (invalid flag 223af is set to ON). However, other than that, for example, based on the operation status (the number of operations, the operation interval, etc.) of the frame button 22 in a period before the series of accessory drive effects are executed, You may use the structure which delays a physical movement beforehand.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set a delay pattern in the first accessory motion in a series of character drive effects, and in a series of character drive effects, a role corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22. It is possible to easily increase the number of times a physical action is executed.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210. The twelfth control example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that a control for changing an operation command to an active accessory in the accessory drive effect is added.

  Specifically, in the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect, a predetermined drive pattern (normal drive pattern or shortened drive pattern) is set and set. The configuration is such that each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) is operated based on the driven pattern.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operating status of each active accessory (accessories A720 to C460) is determined, and the active role is determined. When the object (the accessory A 720 or the accessory B 740) satisfies the predetermined condition (when it is determined that the character is driving in the forward direction), the accessory is moved from the current position to the standby position ( It is configured to set an operation command (hereinafter, referred to as repetitive operation) to be operated (toward the negative direction).

  In this way, by changing the operation command on the way to the active character (character A720 or character B740) and executing the repetitive motion, the operation period of one character motion is shortened. It is possible to make it easier to operate any one of the role objects (features A720 to C460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the effect-driven effect, and the effect during the effect-driven effect. The effect can be enhanced.

  Also, since it is configured to execute the repetitive motion only when it is determined that the motion state is driving in the forward direction, it is possible to reliably shorten the motion period of the accessory that has changed the motion command midway. You can

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, a repetitive operation in the accessory driving effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 206 (a) schematically shows the operation (drive) range (maximum drive range) and the possible range of repetitive motion (repeatable range) of the accessory A720 that is operated in the accessory drive effect in this control example. FIG. 206 (b) is a schematic diagram, and schematically shows a state in which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the accessory drive effect, and the accessory A 720 is moving in the forward direction (forward operation). FIG. 206C is a schematic diagram, and in FIG. 206C, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) while the accessory A 720 is operating in the positive direction, and the accessory A 720 operates in the negative direction (returning operation). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the accessory A720 by which.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the accessory A720 located at the retracted position (standby position) is arranged around the display area P of the third symbol display device 81, as in the tenth control example described above. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the accessory B 740 and the accessory C 460 are not shown in FIG. 206 (a), but actually, the accessory B 740 and the accessory B 740 are located at the same locations as in the tenth control example (see FIG. 182 (a)) described above. Object C460 is provided.

  The accessory A720 of this control example is set to be driven by the same operation command as the operation command defined in the operation type "normal" of the above-described tenth control example (the operation period is 1 second (forward operation 0. 5 seconds, a backward movement of 0.5 seconds)), and as shown in FIG. 206 (a), the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A 720 are up to approximately the center of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to overhang (maximum drive range).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the accessory slide A 720 located at the retracted position (standby position) has the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b of the accessory A 720 driven by the accessory A motors 771, 772, respectively. The movement is started toward the substantially central direction of the third symbol display device 81 (driving in the forward direction). FIG. 206B shows a state in which the accessory A 720 has started driving in the positive direction and 0.25 seconds have elapsed. In the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), when it is executed based on a normal operation command, the remaining forward operation is executed for 0.25 seconds, and then the backward operation is executed for 0.5 seconds.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated (forward operation is 0.25 At the timing of second execution), the returning operation (operation period 0.25 seconds) will be executed (repetitive operation will be executed).

  As a result, the operation of the accessory A720, which normally has an operation period of 1 second (forward operation 0.5 seconds, returning operation 0.5 seconds), is performed for 0.5 seconds (forward operation 0.25 seconds). , Return movement 0.25 seconds) (repetition movement) can be varied, and any one of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the role effect drive effect. Can be easily operated, and the effect effect during the accessory effect effect can be enhanced.

  Note that FIG. 206 shows an example of repetitive operation when the forward operation is executed and the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) after 0.25 seconds have passed, but in this control example, the accessory is the forward operation. When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the (forward movement) period, the repetitive movement is executed. Therefore, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the timing when the forward movement is executed for 0.1 seconds, the returning movement is executed for 0.1 seconds, and the operation period of the accessory A720 is set to 0. It can be changed to 2 seconds.

  In addition, although the repetitive operation of the present control example is described using the accessory A 720 in FIG. 206, the repetitive operation of the accessory B 740 is also configured to be executable, and the operation period of the accessory B 740 (2 seconds If the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the forward movement (1 second) is executed (for example, the timing at which the forward movement is executed for 0.5 seconds), the backward movement of 0.5 seconds is performed thereafter. Is executed. As a result, normally, the accessory motion during the operation period (2 seconds) can be changed to the operation period (1 second).

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, by operating the frame button 22 during the operation of the character object that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the character object in operation (Operation period) can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory works based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is being driven, so that the operating period of the accessory being driven is shortened. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be located at the retracted position (standby position), and thus the number of times the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retracted position to the extended position), and it is determined that the accessory is in the forward direction. In this case, since the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position), the operation period of the accessory can be reliably shortened.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is operating, the operation (repetitive operation) for shortening the operation period is executed. The configuration may be used. For example, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) to temporarily stop the movement of the accessory being operated (stop the count of each accessory operation timer), and then the frame button 22. It may be configured to restart the operation of the accessory (restart counting of the accessory operation timer) when is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation mode of the accessory that is operating based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to increase the number of times of the accessory operation based on the operation of the frame button 22. Instead of temporarily stopping the movement of the accessory during operation, an operation of returning a predetermined amount (for example, 10 ms) in the return direction (negative direction) may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, a flow of operation of the frame button 22 and operation of each accessory (effect character A720 to character effect C460) in the “button repeated hit effect” which is the character effect drive effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 207 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory drive effect in this control example. The detailed description of the same contents as those in FIG. 185 of the tenth control example described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) in the "button repeated effect", each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) starts operating as in the tenth control example described above. (See point a and point b in FIG. 207). Next, the flow of the repetitive operation in this control example will be described with reference to points c to g in FIG. 207.

  When the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the point c in FIG. 207, the action of the accessory B 740 located in the stopped state (standby state) is executed (the operation period is 2 seconds). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.8 seconds after the point c, the action of the accessory A 720 is started (point d in FIG. 207). This point d is 0.8 seconds after the accessory B 740 starts moving, and is a period in which the accessory B 740 is moving in the positive direction. Therefore, the repetitive operation is executed and 0 in the negative direction. A motion command that moves for 8 seconds is set.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.25 seconds after the point d, a repetitive operation is executed for the accessory A 720, and an operation command for moving in the negative direction for 0.25 seconds is set. Note that at point d, the accessory B 740 is operating in the negative direction, so the operation content does not change based on the operation (operation) of the frame button 22.

  Then, the accessory A 720 on which the repetitive motion is executed 0.25 seconds after the point e completes the operation (point f in FIG. 207), and the accessory B 740 on which the repetitive motion is executed 0.8 seconds after the point d. Completes the operation (point g in FIG. 207).

  Furthermore, after the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at a timing (point h in FIG. 207) at which both the character A720 and the character B740 can execute an operation, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 0.6 seconds later. ), The character product A 720 is in a state (moving in the negative direction) after half the operation period (1 second), and thus the repetitive motion is not executed, and the character product B 740 is in the operation period. Since half of (2 seconds) has not elapsed (moving in the positive direction), repetitive operation (repetitive operation with total operation period of 1.2 seconds) is executed (point i). ). Then, the repeating operation of the accessory B 740 is completed 0.6 seconds after the point i.

<Regarding control processing in twelfth control example>
Next, the control processing in the 12th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. The control process in the twelfth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the continuous hit button process 3 (see FIG. 208) is executed instead of the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192). Is the same as the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 208, the continuous hit button processing 3 (S1851) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the contents of the repeated hit button processing 3 (S1851). When the continuous hit button process 3 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192), and then the accessory A action setting process 3 is executed. Execute (see S1909 in FIG. 209), execute the accessory B operation setting process 3 (see S1910 in FIG. 210), execute accessory C operation setting process 3 (see S1911 in FIG. 211), and end this process. To do.

  Next, the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909) will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909). When the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S3721). When it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3721: Yes), Next, "1000" is set to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac (S3723), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3721, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0” (greater than “1”), that is, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating. If it is (pressed) (S3721: No), it is determined whether the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "500" (S3724), and the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "500" or less. If it is determined (S3724: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than “500” (S3724: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the accessory A operation timer 223ac from “1000” is set to the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. The value is set (S3726), and this processing ends.

  That is, according to the accessory A operation setting process 3 (S1909), when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac has not reached half (“500”) of the set value (“1000”), that is, the accessory A When it is determined that A is operating in the normal direction (the direction away from the standby position), the current value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is changed from the set value (“1000”) of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. By setting the subtracted value (that is, the value that performs the operation in the negative direction corresponding to the operation amount that has already been moved in the positive direction) in the accessory A operation timer 223ac, the iterative operation using the accessory A scenario table 222ab1. Can be executed.

  In addition, as in the present control example, when performing the control for changing the operation period by changing the value of the timer (counter) for advancing the operation scenario table without changing the operation scenario table for operating the accessory May be provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the actual operating position of the accessory.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210A is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 3 (S1910). When the character B operation setting process 3 (S1910) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the character B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3821). When it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3821: Yes), The value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3823), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3821, when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating. (S3821: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than "1000" (S3824), and when it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is less than "1000" ( S3824: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is larger than “1000” (S3824: Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the accessory B operation timer 223ad from “2000” is set by the accessory B operation timer 223ad. The value is set (S3826), and this processing ends.

  Next, the accessory C operation setting process 3 (S1911) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process 3 (S1911). In the twelfth control example, the character C action setting process (see FIG. 195) of the tenth control example is changed to the character C action setting process 3 (see FIG. 210), and the value of the character C action timer 223ae. Is set to "500" (S3922), and other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the twelfth control example, by operating the frame button 22 during the operation of the character object that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22, the operation content of the character object in operation (Operation period) can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times the accessory works based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the present control example, the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory that operates based on the operation on the frame button 22 is being driven, so that the operating period of the accessory being driven is shortened. ing. This makes it easier for the accessory to be located at the retracted position (standby position), and thus the number of times the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 can be increased.

  Further, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the accessory is moving in the forward direction (from the retracted position to the extended position), and it is determined that the accessory is in the forward direction. In this case, since the operation content of the accessory is changed so that the accessory moves in the negative direction (toward the retracted position), the operation period of the accessory can be reliably shortened.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory is operating, the operation (repetitive operation) for shortening the operation period is executed. The configuration may be used. For example, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) to temporarily stop the movement of the accessory being operated (stop the count of each accessory operation timer), and then the frame button 22. It may be configured to restart the operation of the accessory (restart counting of the accessory operation timer) when is operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation mode of the accessory that is operating based on the operation of the frame button 22, and it is possible to increase the number of times of the accessory operation based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Example 13 of control>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 216. In the thirteenth control example, with respect to the above-described tenth control example, all the role objects (features A720 to C460) that operate based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the role effect drive effect are all specified at a specific timing. The difference is that a control for positioning at the retracted position (standby position) is added.

  In the configuration of the tenth control example described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the character product drive effect, the frame button is controlled to operate the operable character object (the character object located at the retracted position (standby position)). The operation of 22 is executed during a period (effective period) for effectively determining the operation. Here, for example, in a case where an attempt is made to set an effect for simultaneously operating each of the character objects (characteristics A720 to character object C460) as a character object effect for notifying the expectation degree of the jackpot at the end of the character object driving effect described above. Is a period until the operation of each character (character A720 to character C460) operated at different timings and different operation periods is surely ended (in the case of the tenth control example, operation of character C460). It was necessary to set the period of 3 seconds) as a period (invalid period) during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not effectively determined.

  In this way, if the same invalid period is set for each character (character A720 to character C460), there is a risk that the player may mistakenly recognize that the character drive effect has ended. However, there is a problem that the effect effect of the entire accessory driving effect is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, it is possible to set an invalid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be invalid for each character (character A720 to character C460) having different operation periods. The invalid period to be set is configured to correspond to the operation period of each character (character A720 to character C460).

  In this way, by setting the invalid period corresponding to the operation period for each of the accessory (features A 720 to C 460), that is, each driven based on one operation of the frame button 22. By setting different invalid periods for the role objects (feature A720 to role item C460), the invalid period set during the feature drive drive effect (the invalid period set for all the role products) is shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect effect of the entire accessory driving effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, an operation mode of each character (character A720 to character C460) in the character drive effect of this control example will be described. FIG. 211 (a) is a period in which each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 set at the beginning of the effect drive effect (hereinafter referred to as a free movement period). It is a schematic diagram which shows the point c of FIG. 212 mentioned later as an example of operation | movement of each character (character A720-character C460) in FIG. 211, and FIG. Schematic diagram schematically showing a collective operation in which each character (characteristics A720 to C460) operates at the same time with the characteristic objects A720 to C460 intentionally positioned at the retracted position (standby position). Is.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), during the free movement period, each character (character A 720 to character C 460) is operated at different timings, so at a point c in FIG. The slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are moving in the negative direction (a state in which about 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of operation), and the accessory B 740 (the upper slide member 740a and the lower slide member 740b) is in the negative direction. It is in a state where the accessory C460 has not started to move (the state in which approximately 1.1 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation).

  In this way, during the free movement period, each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460) starts operating at a different timing depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22, and further each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460). Since C460) performs the operation in different operation periods, it is rare that each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) ends the operation at the same timing.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute various accessory action motions corresponding to the frame button operation of the player during the free motion period, and prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. ing.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows a simultaneous operation set at the end of the accessory drive effect. In this simultaneous operation, all the accessories execute the operations at the same timing, and by simultaneously operating a plurality of accessories (role A720 to role C460) provided on the pachinko machine 10, It is a production that gives an impact.

  In the accessory driving effect having such a free operation period and a period in which the simultaneous operation is executed, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, a display effect that suggests whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is won. During the period that is being executed, the third symbol is in a reach state (for example, among the three third symbols, two third symbols are stopped at the same symbol, and the remaining one third symbol is changing. (State), a free movement period is set as a character driving effect, and in the third symbol display device 81, simultaneous movement is performed near the timing at which one third symbol that is changing in the reach state stops. It may be configured to be set.

  As a result, it is possible to execute various accessory motions during the free motion period as a fuel for the reach state, and to perform simultaneous motions at the timing indicating the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is reached, thus improving the enjoyment of the game. The effect is that you can.

  As described above, according to the present control example, the free movement period is executed in the early stage of the character product drive production, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the last stage of the character product drive production. Further, when the free movement period shifts to the simultaneous movement period, since the invalid period of the period corresponding to the movement period of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set, operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Based on the above, it is possible to shorten the period in which all of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) cannot operate.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation period of each accessory (feature A720 to role product C460) is constant, but control for shortening the operation period of the accessory is also used as in the tenth control example described above. Alternatively, the control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory as in the eleventh control example described above may be used, or the control for varying the operation content of the operating accessory as in the twelfth control example may be used. You may use. Further, the controls used in the above-described control examples may be combined. As a result, it is possible to diversify the free drive operation executed in the early stage of the accessory drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the simultaneous operation executed in the final part of the accessory drive effect production is configured to be executed based on the frame button operation of the player. The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period of 1 second has elapsed.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation timings of the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) are the same as a simultaneous operation, but, for example, the operation range of each role matter (features A720 to C460) is the maximum. It may be set so that the timings (timing at which the accessory is most distant from the standby position) are the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the flow of operations of the frame buttons 22 and the operations of each accessory (effects A720 to C460) in the “button repeated hit effect” which is the effects drive effect in this control example will be described. do. FIG. 212 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory drive effect in this control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those in the timing chart of the tenth control example (see FIG. 185) described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the “button repeated hit effect” in this control example is a free operation period in which each accessory (effects A720 to C460) is driven based on the operation of the frame button 22 at the beginning of the effective period. It is set, and a collective operation period in which all the accessory (accompaniment A 720 to accessory C 460) are operated at the end of the effective period is set.

  Then, at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) at which the free movement period ends, each accessory to move the freely operated accessory (feature A720 to role C460) to the retracted position (stop state). An invalid time is set for each of (character A720 to character C460). Specifically, for the accessory C460 having an operation period of 3 seconds, the same invalid period of 3 seconds as the operation period is set (the period from point d to point h in FIG. 212), and the operation period is 2 seconds. For the accessory B 740 of No. 2, the invalid period of 2 seconds which is the same as the operation period is set (the period from the point f to the point h of FIG. 212), and for the accessory A 720 having the operation period of 1 second, the operation is performed. An invalid period of 1 second, which is the same as the period, is set.

  In this way, at the point h, different invalid periods are set for each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460) in order to position each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460) at the retracted position (standby position). By setting, the length of the ineffective period in which all of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) are not driven in response to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the operation period of the longest role character C 460 (3 seconds. ), The action period (1 second) of the accessory A 720 having the shortest action period can be set.

  Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated at the timing (point e in FIG. 212) when the invalid period is set for the accessory C460, the accessory A720 and the accessory B740 can be driven, and the “button It is possible to enhance the directing effect of "continuous hitting effect".

  Then, by operating the frame button 22 during the simultaneous operation period (point h to point j in FIG. 212) in which each of the accessory (accessories A720 to C460) is located at the retracted position (standby position), Characters (character A 720 to character C 460) can be operated simultaneously (point j in FIG. 212).

  In addition, in this control example, only the control of positioning each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) to the retracted position (standby position) at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period starts. However, for example, each character (character A720 to character C460) is driven so that the end timing of each character (character A720 to character C460) driven at the end of the free movement period is close (becomes the same). May be configured to control the operation period and the operation start timing of the frame button 22, and the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period or the period until the invalid time is set. It is also possible to make a determination and, based on the result of the determination, determine the operation content of each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460).

  For example, the collective stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing (the point in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period is started, and the frame button is set. 22 is compared with the driving period of the accessory driving executed when 22 is operated, and the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period is started or the invalid period is set, and the normal operation contents ( When the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a position apart from the above-mentioned collective stop timing, the drive start time of the accessory is shifted or the drive content of the accessory is changed (extended or shortened). As a result, it is possible to select the operation content of each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) in the direction that coincides with the collective stop timing.

<Regarding the control process in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the control processing in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. In the control processing in the thirteenth control example, the contents of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The thirteenth control example is different in that the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  First, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button processing 4 (S1851) in the thirteenth control example. The same parts as those in the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) in the tenth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the continuous hit button process 4 (S1851 of FIG. 213) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1908 are executed similarly to the continuous hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192) described above, and in the process of S1908, the frame button is pressed. When it is determined that 22 is ON (S1908: Yes), character product A operation setting process 4 (S1909), character product B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and character product C operation setting process 4 (S1911) are executed. Then, this process ends. Note that FIGS. 214 to 216 are respectively referred to for detailed description of the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909), the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910), and the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911). See below.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909). When the accessory A operation setting process 4 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). Yes (S3731). When it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is not equal to or smaller than “1000” (greater than “1000”), that is, when it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3731: No), then the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is set. It is determined whether or not the value of is less than or equal to "2000", that is, during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3732). If the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer is equal to or smaller than “2000” (S3732: Yes), this processing is terminated and the processing is returned to the continuous-stroke button processing 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3732, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not “2000” or less (S3732: No), the process proceeds to S3733. Also, in the process of S3731, even when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3731: Yes), the process proceeds to S3733.

  In the process of S3733, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3733). If the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is operating (S3733: No), this processing is ended as it is. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory A 720 is not operating (S3733: Yes), the accessory A The value of the operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3734), and thereafter, this processing is terminated and returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  Next, the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910) in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910). The same parts as those in the accessory B operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (a)) in the tenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the accessory B operation setting process 4 (S1910) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000”, that is, whether or not it is the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212). Yes (S3831). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "1000", that is, if it is determined that it is not the simultaneous operation period (S3831: No), then the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than "3000". It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3832). If the value of the continuous hitting effective timer is equal to or less than "3000" (S3832: Yes), this process is ended as it is and the process returns to the continuous hitting button process 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3832, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “3000” (S3832: No), the process proceeds to S3833. Also, in the processing of S3831, even when it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less (S3831: Yes), the processing proceeds to S3833.

  In the process of S3833, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is "0" (S3833). When the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is not “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is operating (S3833: No), this process is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the accessory B operation timer 223ad is “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory B 740 is not operating (S3833: Yes), the accessory B is The value of the operation timer 223ad is set to "2000" (S3834), and then this processing is ended and the operation returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  Next, referring to FIG. 216, the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) in the present control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911). The same parts as those in the accessory C operation setting process (see FIG. 195 (b)) in the tenth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the accessory C operation setting process 4 (S1911) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is “1000” or less, that is, whether or not the simultaneous operation period (see FIG. 212) is reached. Yes (S3931). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than "1000", that is, if it is determined that the simultaneous operation period is not set (S3931: No), then the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than "4000". It is determined whether or not, that is, during the invalid time (see FIG. 212) (S3932). If the value of the continuous hitting effective timer is equal to or less than "4000" (S3932: Yes), this processing is ended as it is, and returns to the continuous hitting button processing 4 (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3932, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit valid timer 223ab is not equal to or less than “4000” (S3932: No), the process proceeds to S3933. In addition, in the processing of S3931, even when it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke valid timer 223ab is equal to or less than “1000” (S3931: Yes), the process proceeds to S3933.

  In the process of S3933, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is "0" (S3933). If the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is not “0”, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is operating (S3933: No), this process is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, when the value of the accessory C operation timer 223ae is “0”, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the accessory C 460 is not operating (S3933: Yes), the accessory C The value of the operation timer 223ae is set to "3000" (S3934), and thereafter, this processing is terminated and returns to the continuous hit button processing 4.

  As described above, according to the thirteenth control example, the invalid period corresponding to the operation period is set for each accessory (feature A720 to accessory C460), that is, once. By setting different invalid periods for the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) that are operated based on the operation of the frame button 22, the invalid period (all roles It is possible to shorten the invalid period set for an object and to enhance the effect effect of the entire accessory driving effect.

  Further, according to this control example, the free movement period is executed in the early stage of the character product drive production, and the simultaneous operation can be executed in the last stage of the character product drive production. Further, when the free movement period shifts to the simultaneous movement period, since the invalid period of the period corresponding to the movement period of each character (character A720 to character C460) is set, operation of the frame button 22 is performed. Based on the above, it is possible to shorten the period in which all of the role objects (features A 720 to C 460) cannot be driven.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation period of each accessory (feature A720 to role product C460) is constant, but control for shortening the operation period of the accessory is also used as in the tenth control example described above. Alternatively, the control for delaying the operation timing of the accessory as in the eleventh control example described above may be used, or the control for varying the operation content of the operating accessory as in the twelfth control example may be used. You may use. Further, the controls used in the above-described control examples may be combined. As a result, it is possible to diversify the free drive operation executed in the early stage of the accessory drive effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the simultaneous operation executed in the final part of the accessory drive effect production is configured to be executed based on the frame button operation of the player. The simultaneous operation may be automatically executed when the remaining period of 1 second has elapsed.

  In addition, in this control example, the operation timings of the respective role objects (features A720 to C460) are the same as a simultaneous operation, but, for example, the operation range of each role matter (features A720 to C460) is the maximum. It may be set so that the timings (timing at which the accessory is most distant from the standby position) are the same.

  In addition, in this control example, only the control of positioning each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) to the retracted position (standby position) at the timing (point h in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period starts. However, for example, each character (character A720 to character C460) is driven so that the end timing of each character (character A720 to character C460) driven at the end of the free movement period is close (becomes the same). It may be configured to control the operation period and the operation start timing of, and determines the period from the timing when the frame button 22 is operated to the start of the simultaneous operation period and the period until the invalid time is set. However, based on the determination result, the operation content of each accessory (feature A 720 to accessory C 460) may be determined.

  For example, the collective stop timing is set as a predetermined timing (for example, the timing between the point d and the point h in FIG. 212) before the timing (the point in FIG. 212) when the simultaneous operation period is started, and the frame button is set. 22 is compared with the driving period of the accessory driving executed when 22 is operated, and the remaining period until the simultaneous operation period is started or the invalid period is set, and the normal operation contents ( When the operation period) is stopped and displayed at a position apart from the above-mentioned collective stop timing, the drive start time of the accessory is shifted or the drive content of the accessory is changed (extended or shortened). As a result, it is possible to select the operation content of each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) in the direction that coincides with the collective stop timing.

<Fourteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 225. In the fourteenth control example, in contrast to the tenth control example described above, the motor driver MD1 (see FIG. 219) forming the accessory A motors 771, 772 outputs to the stepping motor M1 (see FIG. 219). The difference is that a plurality of output signals are provided, and that control for changing the operation content of the accessory A 720 is added based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 in the accessory drive effect.

  In the tenth control example described above, an operation command for each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the effect drive effect, and the effect corresponding to the operation command is set. By performing the operation, the effect effect of the accessory driving effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is enhanced.

  However, since the rotation speed of the stepping motor (for example, M1) that is driven based on the set operation command is always constant (see, for example, FIG. 188), the operation speed of the accessory becomes constant, so that further effects are produced. The improvement of the effect was demanded.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth control example, the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1 is a strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps) and the stepping motor M1 is high speed (200 pps). A weak output signal that rotates at a lower speed (100 pps) can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when the accessory A720 is operated. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the movement amount in the same period can be doubled as compared with the case of a weak output signal. In other words, the period required to move the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect form of the accessory in the accessory drive effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). There is. Specifically, if the frame button operation (press) interval is within a predetermined period (3 seconds or less), a weak output signal is output and the frame button operation (press) interval is within the predetermined period. When it is longer than 3 seconds (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times at short intervals (intervals of 3 seconds or less), the character effect based on the weak output signal is executed multiple times and long intervals ( When the operation is performed at intervals longer than 3 seconds), the character effect based on the strong output signal is executed. Therefore, the character effect based on the operation content (operation interval) to the frame button 22 executed by the player. Can be changed, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  Further, in this control example, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1. In this way, by varying the type of output signal that drives the accessory without changing the period during which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the accessory operation performed during the fixed period. In the case of within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), in the case of the accessory action based on the weak output signal, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is longer than the predetermined period (longer than 3 seconds), Since the character action based on the strong output signal is configured to be executed, for example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during the character drive effect, the character action having a large motion range. And the player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times during the accessory drive effect, the accessory operation with a small operation range is executed multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the accessory operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player, and the player can eagerly participate in the game.

  In this control example, the configuration of setting the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, accessory driving. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the performance. In this case, for example, the strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory drive effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory motion can be increased (the operation speed can be increased and the operation range can be increased), so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. be able to.

  Further, in the present control example, the types of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak), but more types may be output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the accessory A operation in the accessory drive effect of this control example will be described. 217 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the drive range of the accessory A720 when a weak output signal is output from the motor driver MD1, and FIG. 217 (b) is a strong output from the motor driver MD1. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the drive range of the accessory A720 when a signal is output.

  When the weak output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (a), the operating range of the accessory A720 (the operating range in the operating period of 1 second) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (see FIG. 183 (b)). The operating range of the accessory A720 when the strong output signal is output as shown in FIG. 217 (b) (the operating range in the operating period of 1 second) is the maximum operating range of the accessory A720 (see FIG. 183). (See (b)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the flow of the operation of the frame button 22 and the operation of each character (character A 720 to character C 460) in the “button repeated striking” which is the character driving drive effect in the fourteenth control example. Will be explained. FIG. 218 is a timing chart showing the flow of the accessory driving effect in this control example.

  As shown in FIG. 218, when the "button repeated effect" is started, the "effective period" during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effective is set (for example, 10 seconds). Then, by the player operating the frame button 22 (“button pressing” ON) during the “valid period”, in the stopped state (the state of being located at the standby position) as in the tenth control example described above. The operation is started with respect to each certain accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) (point a in FIG. 218). In addition, during the period from the start of the “button repeated effect” until the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the value of the timer (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 is “0”. ”, A strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point a in FIG. 218).

  Next, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) (point b in FIG. 218), the interval with the timing (point a in FIG. 218) when the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time is determined (T1 = (3.6 seconds), the determination result exceeds the predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), so a strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (point b in FIG. 218).

  Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the "effective period" of the "button repeated effect" (point c in FIG. 218), the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time (point b in FIG. 218). ) Is determined (T2 = 2.2 seconds), and since the determination result does not exceed the predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example), a weak output signal is output to the accessory A 720 (FIG. 218 point c).

  Hereinafter, when the frame button 22 is similarly operated (pressed) and the accessory A 720 is operated, it is output to the accessory A 720 based on the interval with the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated (pressed) last time. The type of output signal is determined.

  Next, with reference to points d to f in FIG. 218, the flow of control when the frame button 22 is operated while the accessory A 720 is operating will be described. First, when the frame button 22 is operated at the point d in FIG. 218, the interval (T4 = 3.2 seconds) from the previous frame button operation timing exceeds the predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). Therefore, a strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720.

  Then, when a new frame button operation is executed while the accessory A 720 is operating based on the frame button operation (depression) at the point d (point e in FIG. 218), it is based on the frame button operation. The operation of the accessory A 720 is not executed, and further, the value of the timer (the accessory A interval timer 223ca) for measuring the operation interval of the frame button 22 is continuously measured without being reset.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the operation of the accessory A720 based on the frame button operation (pressed) at the point d in FIG. 218 is completed (point f in FIG. 218), the point in FIG. A strong output signal is output to the accessory A 720 based on the interval (T5 = 4.8 seconds) from d. That is, in the present control example, the type of the output signal output to the accessory A 720 (strong output signal or weak output signal) is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but the operation of the frame button 22 The interval is configured not to include the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 during operation of the accessory A).

  With this configuration, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the frame button operation interval corresponding to the interval at which the accessory A 720 actually operates. can do. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

  In this control example, the operation interval of the frame button 22 is determined without including the operation of the frame button 22 that does not operate the accessory A 720 (that is, the operation of the frame button 22 while the accessory A is operating). Although other configurations may be used, for example, the operation intervals of the frame buttons 22 may be determined for the operations on all the frame buttons 22.

  Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 (strong output signal or weak output signal) is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22, but under other conditions. The type of output signal may be set. For example, the interval at which the accessory A actually operates (the interval at which the operation command is output to the accessory A 720) may be determined, and the type of the output signal may be set based on the determination result. Even with this configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the present control example.

  Furthermore, the type (strong output signal or weak output signal) of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 is set based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the “effective period” of the “button repeated production”. Alternatively, the type of the output signal to be output to the accessory A 720 (strong output signal or weak output signal) may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the type of output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) to be output to the accessory A 720 may be set based on the operation interval with another accessory (the accessory B 740 or the accessory C 460).

<Regarding electrical configuration in 14th control example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 221. The fourteenth control example is different from the tenth control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed and that the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 225. The difference is that the contents of the drive motor group have been described in detail. Other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the drive motor group connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drive motor group. Note that, in FIG. 219, some of the components of the voice lamp control device 113 that are the same as those in the above-described tenth control example are omitted.

  The accessory A motors 771 and 772 provided in the drive motor group in this control example include a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1. Specifically, the accessory A motor 771 includes a motor driver MD1 and a stepping motor M1, and the accessory A motor 772 includes a motor driver MD2 (not shown) and a stepping motor M2 (not shown). It consists of and.

  In this control example, the accessory A motor 771 and the accessory A motor 772 are different only in the rotation directions of the motors, and are configured to be driven in response to the same operation command. Only the description of 771 will be given, and the detailed description of the accessory A motor 772 will be omitted. The configurations of the accessory B motors 773 and 774, the accessory C motor 441, and other motors are also the same as those of the accessory A motor 771 described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the motor driver MD1 provided in the accessory A motor 771 will be described. The motor driver MD1 controls at least the rotation direction (normal rotation / reverse rotation), rotation speed (acceleration / deceleration), and rotation amount (number of steps) of the stepping motor M1 based on the operation command output from the voice lamp control device 113. When the operation command corresponding to the contents of the operation scenario table 222ab defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the stepping motor M1 drives the operation scenario. Electric power is output to the stepping motor M1 so as to be executed.

  In this control example, one motor driver MD1 is provided for a single stepping motor M1, but the operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors (stepping motors) with a single motor driver. May be adopted. In this case, the operation command such as the number of rotation steps may be output by including the information for specifying the type of the drive motor (stepping motor).

  The stepping motor M1 is a known stepping motor and its detailed description is omitted. However, the rotation control (rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation amount) of the motor is controlled by the number of pulses at a certain angle (basic step angle) and its frequency. It is a motor to be controlled, and is configured such that the rotational speed of the motor increases as the frequency of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 increases. The accessory A720 is operated based on the driving mode of the stepping motor M1.

  As described above, in the present control example, the accessory driver operation for operating the accessory A720 at high speed (high speed accessory operation) and the accessory operation for operating the accessory A720 at low speed (low speed accessory operation) are performed by the motor driver. Since it is configured to be controllable according to the type of output signal output from MD1, for example, compared to a configuration in which the operating speed of the accessory is changed by switching between a high-speed rotation drive motor and a low-speed rotation drive motor. It is possible to reduce the number of components used for the accessory operation, and to save space in the device. In addition, it is possible to simplify the operation control content related to the accessory operation.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG. 220 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The ROM 222 in the 14th control example is different from the ROM 222 in the 10th control example described above in that a second operation scenario table 222ab is provided instead of the operation scenario table 222ab. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the second operation scenario table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second operation scenario table 222ab. The second operation scenario table 222ab is provided with a character A second scenario table 222ab4 in place of the character A scenario table 222ab1 with respect to the above-described operation scenario table 222ab of the tenth control example (see FIG. 187 (b)). The other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 will be described with reference to FIG. 221 (b). FIG. 221 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. This accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 is a table in which an operation scenario for accessory A 720 that is executed during the "button repeated effect" in this control example is set, and the operation speed of accessory A 720 is slow (100 pps. ) An operation scenario and an operation scenario in which the operation speed of the accessory A 720 is fast (200 pps) are set.

  Specifically, the action scenario (weak action scenario) executed when the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is "1" (the operation type is "weak") and the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is " 2 ”(the operation type is“ strong ”), the operation scenario (weak operation scenario) is set.

  Here, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 operated during the "button repeated hit effect", and the operation interval of the frame button 22 is equal to or more than a predetermined period (3 "2" is set as the selection value in the case of (seconds or more), and "1" is set as the selection value in the case of less than the predetermined period (less than 3 seconds). The detailed value of the accessory A selection value 223cb will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 (b).

  The contents defined in the action type “weak” in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 are the contents defined in the action type “normal” in the accessory A operation scenario table 222ab1 of the tenth control example described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the content defined in the operation type “strong” defines information that makes the operation speed (rotation speed) of the stepping motor M1 faster than the content defined in the operation type “weak”.

  Specifically, the value "01H" of the action pointer is set in correspondence with the value "1000" of the accessory A action timer 223ac. In this operation pointer "01H", "200 pps" is specified as the operation speed, "100" is specified as the number of steps, and "forward direction" is specified as the operation direction. After that, the value “02H” of the action pointer is set corresponding to the value “500” of the accessory A action timer 223ac. The motion pointer "02H" defines "200 pps" as the motion speed, "100" as the number of steps, and "negative direction" as the motion direction.

  Then, the value "03H" of the operation pointer is set in correspondence with the value "0" of the accessory A operation timer 223ac. Information of “END” indicating the end of the operation scenario is defined in the operation pointer “03H”.

  That is, in the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4, an operation scenario in which the accessory A 720 is operated for one second is defined regardless of the operation type (“weak” or “strong”), and the operation type is “weak”. The information is defined so that the action range of the action A of the feature A 720 whose action type is “strong” is doubled (the number of steps is twice).

  Returning to FIG. 220, the description will be continued. FIG. 220B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example. The RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example is different from the RAM 223 in the tenth control example in that an accessory A interval timer 223ca and an accessory A selection value 223cb are added. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The accessory A interval timer 223ca is such that the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated in the accessory drive effect (“button repeated effect”) (the interval at which the accessory A 720 operates) is within a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example). It is a timer that is referred to when determining whether there is a timer, and is a timer that is decremented every 1 millisecond after a value indicating a predetermined value (3 seconds in this control example) is set. This accessory A interval timer 223ca has a predetermined value ("3000") after the value of the accessory A operation timer is set to "1000" in the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) (S3745). Is set (S3746), and is subtracted until the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca becomes “0” in the interval timer subtraction process (S1931 of FIG. 223) of the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 of FIG. 222) (FIG. 223). (S2362), referred to when selecting a character A selection value 223cb described later in character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 of FIG. 224).

  The accessory A selection value 223cb is referred to when selecting one operation scenario from the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4 of the second operation scenario table 222ab. The character A selection value 223cb is set to "2" when the character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) determines that the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is "0". When it is determined that the value of the object A interval timer 223ca is not "0" ("1" or more), "1" is set. Then, in the accessory operation process 3 (S1561 in FIG. 225), the information set when the operation of the accessory A720 ends is referred to when the operation scenario of the accessory A720 is read (S2551 in FIG. 225). It is cleared (S2554 in FIG. 225).

  As described above, in this control example, the value of the accessory A selection value 223cb is set based on the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the role is determined based on the value of the set accessory A selection value. A strong motion scenario or a weak motion scenario is set as the motion scenario of the object A720. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the operation content of the accessory A720 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 (the operation interval of the accessory A720).

<Regarding Control Process in 14th Control Example>
Next, the control processing in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. In the control processing in the fourteenth control example, the content of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that in the tenth control example. Other processes are the same as in the tenth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fourteenth control example, the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example is changed to the continuous hit button process 5 (see FIG. 222), and the accessory operation process (see FIG. 196) is the accessory character. The difference is that the operation process 2 (see FIG. 225) is changed.

  First, the continuous hit button processing 5 (S1851) will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous hit button processing 5 (S1851). When the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851) is executed, the processes of S1901 to S1907 are executed in the same manner as the continuous hit button process of the tenth control example (see FIG. 192), and when the process of S1907 ends, next, Interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is executed. This interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is a process of subtracting the value set in the accessory A interval timer 223ca described above, and a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 223.

  When the process of S1931 is finished, then, the processes of S1908 to S1911 are executed similarly to the continuous hit button process (see FIG. 192) of the tenth control example described above, and the present process is finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 223, the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) executed in the continuous hit button process 5 (S1851 of FIG. 222) will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the contents of the interval timer subtraction process (S1931). This interval timer subtraction processing (S1931) is provided in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113, and the processing interval is set to 1 millisecond. That is, every time this process is executed, a process of subtracting “1” corresponding to 1 millisecond from the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is executed.

  When the interval timer subtraction process (S1931) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S2361). In the processing of S2361, when it is determined that the value is larger than “0” (more than “1”) (S2361: Yes), the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is decremented by 1 (S2362), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S2361: No), the process of S2362 is skipped and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909 in FIG. 224) executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909). In this accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909), when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), the operation content of the accessory A 720 is set and the operation (press) interval of the frame button 22 (feature A720) is set. The process of setting a predetermined value (“3000”) in the accessory A interval timer 223ca, which is referred to when determining whether the operation interval of is within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), is executed.

  When the accessory A operation setting process 5 (S1909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0", and it is determined that it is not "0" ("1" or more). If so (S3741: No), the accessory A720 is in motion, and this process is terminated without performing new motion setting.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is “0” (S3741: Yes), the accessory A 720 has finished its operation and is in the retracted position (operation Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is "0" (S3742). In the process of S3742, when it is determined that the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is “0” (S3742: Yes), the predetermined period (3 seconds) has passed since the previous frame button operation (character A operation). Since it has passed, the accessory A selection value 223cb is set to "2" (S3744), and the process proceeds to S3745.

  In the process of S3742, if it is determined that the value of the character A interval timer 223ca is not “0” (is “1” or more) (S3742: No), the previous frame button operation (character A operation) Since the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed since (since the interval is short), the accessory A selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S3743), and the process proceeds to S3745.

  Then, in the process of S3745, the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is set to "1000" (S3745), and then the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca is set to "3000" (S3746). The process ends.

  In the accessory character A operation setting process 5 (S1909 of FIG. 224), when setting the operation content of the accessory object A720, is the interval between the previous frame button operation (character object A operation) within a predetermined value? It is determined whether or not to refer to the value of the accessory A interval timer 223ca, and the operation content (strong operation, weak operation) of the accessory A 720 this time is set based on the determination result. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an accessory (an accessory A720) operation corresponding to the frame button operation of the player, and it is possible to provide the player with a variety of accessory operations.

  Next, the accessory motion processing 3 (S1561 of FIG. 225) will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory action processing 3 (S1561). When the accessory operation process 3 (S1561) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is larger than "0" ("1" or more) (S2511), and from "0". If it is determined that it is also large (“1” or more) (S2511: Yes), then it is determined whether the accessory selection value 223cb is set to “1” (S2551).

  In the processing of S2551, when it is determined that the accessory selection value 223cb is set to "1" (S2551: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the operation type "weak" of the accessory A second scenario table 222ab4. Is read (S2552), and the process proceeds to S2516.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2551, if it is determined that the turf selection value 223cb is not set to “1” (set to “2”) (S2551: No), the accessory A second scenario table The operation content corresponding to the operation type “strong” of 222ab4 is read (S2553), and the process proceeds to S2516. Further, in the processing of S2511, if it is determined that the value of the accessory A operation timer 223ac is "0" (S2511: No), then the accessory selection value 223cb is cleared (reset) (S2554). , S2516 is entered.

  When the process proceeds to S2516, the processes from S2516 to S2520 are executed similarly to the accessory operation process (see FIG. 196) of the tenth control example described above, and the present process ends.

  As described above, according to the fourteenth control example, as the output signals output from the motor driver MD1 to the stepping motor M1, the strong output signal for rotating the stepping motor M1 at high speed (200 pps) and the stepping motor M1 are output. A weak output signal that rotates at a low speed (100 pps) rather than a high speed (200 pps) can be output.

  Thereby, the operating speed of the accessory A720 can be varied by the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 when the accessory A720 is operated. That is, when the signal output from the motor driver MD1 is a strong output signal, the movement amount in the same period can be doubled as compared with the case of a weak output signal. In other words, the period required to move the same distance can be halved.

  Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the effect form of the accessory in the accessory drive effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in this control example, the type of the output signal (strong output signal or weak output signal) output by the motor driver MD1 is set based on the interval at which the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). There is. Specifically, if the frame button operation (press) interval is within a predetermined period (3 seconds or less), a weak output signal is output and the frame button operation (press) interval is within the predetermined period. When it is longer than 3 seconds (longer than 3 seconds), a strong output signal is output.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times at short intervals (intervals of 3 seconds or less), the character effect based on the weak output signal is executed multiple times and long intervals ( When the operation is performed at intervals longer than 3 seconds), the character effect based on the strong output signal is executed. Therefore, the character effect based on the operation content (operation interval) to the frame button 22 executed by the player. Can be changed, and the player can be actively involved in the game.

  Further, in this control example, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second) regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1. In this way, by varying the type of output signal that drives the accessory without changing the period during which the accessory operates, it is possible to execute various accessory operations while reducing the control load of the accessory operation. it can.

  Further, the period during which the accessory operates based on the operation of the frame button 22 is set to a fixed period (1 second), and the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is set as the accessory operation performed during the fixed period. In the case of within a predetermined period (within 3 seconds), in the case of the accessory action based on the weak output signal, when the interval at which the frame button is operated (pressed) is longer than the predetermined period (longer than 3 seconds), Since the character action based on the strong output signal is configured to be executed, for example, for a player who operates the frame button 22 only once during the character drive effect, the character action having a large motion range. And the player who has operated the frame button 22 multiple times during the accessory drive effect, the accessory operation with a small operation range is executed multiple times. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the accessory operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player, and the player can eagerly participate in the game.

  In this control example, the configuration of setting the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 based on the operation interval of the frame button 22 is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, accessory driving. The type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 may be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the performance. In this case, for example, the strong output signal may be set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or more during the accessory drive effect.

  As a result, as the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 increases, the accessory motion can be increased (the operation speed can be increased and the operation range can be increased), so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. be able to.

  Further, in the present control example, the types of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1 are two types (strong and weak), but more types may be output.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to simplify the operation control of the accessory, a configuration in which a constant accessory operation period is always set regardless of the type of the output signal output from the motor driver MD1 is used. It may be configured such that the role product operation period is changed according to the type of the output signal output by the driver MD1, and for example, when a strong output signal (200 pps) is output, the role product operation period is set to 0. If the weak output signal (100 pps) is output for 5 seconds, the accessory operation period may be set for 1 second. Thereby, regardless of the type of the output signal output by the motor driver MD1, the operating range of the character is made constant, and the operating period of the character is variable (the character operating period of the strong output signal is the character operating period of the weak output signal). It can be shortened to half) and the effect can be enhanced.

  When the configuration described above is used in this control example, the motor driver MD1 outputs a strong output signal when the operation interval of the frame button 22 is short, and the motor driver MD1 outputs a weak output signal when the operation interval is long. It is better to configure it.

  In the above, in the tenth to fourteenth control examples, various control processes for the accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) operated based on the player operating the frame button 22 have been described. The configuration of each control example may be partially or wholly combined. For example, in a configuration capable of executing the shortened operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay process of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed variable process of the thirteenth control example, the frame Contents to be executed based on the operation contents of the player on the button 22 (operation timing, number of operations, operation interval, etc.) and game state (whether the judgment result of the special symbol or the normal symbol is correct or not, the probability change state, the time saving state, etc.) It is good to make it different. As a result, more diverse effects can be executed.

  Further, the shortening operation pattern of the tenth control example, the delay processing of the eleventh control example, the repetitive operation of the twelfth control example, and the operation speed varying process of the thirteenth control example are executed in a configuration that can be executed. The player may be allowed to select the content to be displayed.

  Further, in each of the control examples described above, a configuration is used in which the player operates each accessory (accommodation A720 to C460) provided on the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22. It suffices that the effect mode is variable based on the operation of the player, and for example, the sound mode output from the audio output device 226 by the player operating a predetermined operation means (frame button 22 or the like). May be used, a light emission effect that changes the light emission mode of the lamp display device 227, or a display effect that changes the display mode displayed on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 may be used. You may make it the structure which combined each aspect.

  Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the configuration of the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, when the player contacts or approaches. It may be a sensor device that detects and reacts, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, or a lever device that can be operated by the player in the front, rear, left, and right directions. Further, the number of means for the player to operate is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided. In this case, the player can enthusiastically participate in the effect by changing the effect mode when a plurality of operating means are operated.

  In addition, as a configuration having the same effects as those of the above-described tenth to fourteenth control examples, the operation status (whether or not in operation, remaining operation period) of each accessory (accessory A720 to accessory C460) is determined. Providing a possible accessory action status determination means and a storage means for storing the determination result, the operation of a predetermined accessory (any of the accessories (features A720 to C460)) is executed. In doing so, a configuration may be used in which the operation pattern of the accessory is set based on the driving status of the other accessory.

  This control will be described by taking as an example the control for each of the role objects (features A720 to C460) used in the tenth control example described above, and in the case of operating the role matter A720, other role matters (features B740 and It is preferable to determine whether or not the accessory C460) is in motion, and to set the operation of the accessory A720 to the shortened operation pattern when determining that the other accessory is in motion. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which each of the accessory products (the accessory products A720 to C460) is operating.

  In addition, when the other accessory is operating, the remaining operating period of the operating accessory is determined, and the operating character of the accessory is shorter than the operating period of the shortened operation pattern of the accessory that is executed this time. The shortened operation pattern may be set only when the remaining operation period is long.

  Further, it is preferable to set priorities for a plurality of roles and to determine a role that can change the operation pattern based on the priority when the plurality of roles can be driven simultaneously. In this case, for example, the priority order may be set for a plurality of character objects in association with the effect pattern executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display effect and the accessory operation executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, as a method for setting the priority order for a plurality of character objects, another method may be used, for example, the priority order may be set depending on the length of the operating period of the character object, or a plurality of character objects may be set. The priority order may be set based on the arrangement of objects (front and rear positions), or the priority order may be set based on the driving speeds set for a plurality of character objects.

  Furthermore, when the control for each character (character A720 to character C460) used in the eleventh control example is described as an example, at least two or more character (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously operated. In addition, it is preferable to set to delay the operation of the accessory (the accessory C460 if the accessory A720 and the accessory C460 are simultaneously operated) having a long operation period. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which a plurality of simultaneously operated accessories are operating together. In addition, the same control as the content described as an example of the control for each accessory (effect A720 to accessory C460) in the above-described tenth control example may be executed, or the respective controls may be combined.

  Further, when the control for each character (character A720 to character C460) used in the twelfth control example is described as an example, at least two or more character (character A720 to character C460) are simultaneously operated. In addition, when the repetitive motion is executed, it may be set so that the repetitive motion is executed only for the accessory having a short operation period until returning to the standby position. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary repetitive operations from being executed. Moreover, you may perform the same control as the content which demonstrated the control with respect to each role thing (feature thing A720-role matter C460) of the 10th control example and the 11th control example which were mentioned above, and each control may be performed. You may combine.

  In addition, in the tenth control example to the fourteenth control example described above, a configuration is used in which a plurality of character objects operate simultaneously based on the operation of the frame button 22, but each character object (character object A720 to character object C460) is used. The operating conditions may be set differently. For example, the accessory A 720 may be operated each time the frame button 22 is operated (the operating condition is one button operation), and the accessory B 740 may be the frame. The button 22 may be set to be operated when it is operated twice (the operation condition is two button operations), and the accessory C460 may be set to be operated when the frame button 22 is operated five times. By setting in this way, various accessory motions can be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22.

  Furthermore, the following configuration may be used as a configuration that achieves the same effects as those of the 10th to 14th control examples described above.

<Modified example that determines the priority order of the characters that are shortened / delayed according to the type of repeated hit production>
The main movable accessory may be determined according to the type of continuous hit effect, and the operation of the main movable accessory may be configured not to be shortened or delayed. That is, the operation other than the main movable accessory may be shortened or delayed. As a result, the action of the main character of the effect is not shortened / delayed in the repeated hit effect being executed (or executed), so that the action of the character is shortened without impairing the effect of the effect. Can be delayed.

  Specifically, as the types of continuous hit effects, "continuous hit effect A" in which the accessory A is defined as the main movable accessory, "continuous hit effect B" in which the accessory B is specified as the main movable accessory, and accessory C Is provided as a main movable accessory. Then, when the hit / no hit determination result is a big hit, the continuous hit effect A is configured to be easily selected, and when the hit / no hit determination result is missed, the continuous hit effect C is easily selected. As a result, the continuous movable effect in which the main movable accessory is the accessory A is displayed, so that it can be suggested that the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In each continuous hit effect, the accessory items A to C are moved in a predetermined order every time the frame button 22 is pressed five times during the button press effective period. For example, in the continuous hit effect A, when the frame button 22 is pressed five times, first, the movable of the accessory A, which is the main movable accessory, is started. Then, when the frame button 22 is further pressed five times, the accessory B is started to move. After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed 5 times more, the accessory C is started to move. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is pressed 15 times in a short period, all of the accessory items A to C are in a movable state.

  As described above, in each consecutive hit production in the present modification, the consecutive hit operation needs to be executed in the consecutive hit production in order to determine which one of the accessories A to C is the main movable accessory, so the consecutive hit operation is performed. Can be motivated to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<Fifteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 236. In the fifteenth control example, in comparison with the above-described first control example, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, and a solenoid 209 controlled by the main control device 110 (a general-purpose solenoid 209d, a release solenoid 65f2, a flow solenoid). The difference is that the control content of the path solenoid 65k) is changed and the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation control of the solenoid that drives the various electric accessory, the solenoid is moved and held based on a constant output. In such solenoid operation control, the state of the solenoid is maintained by using the electric power required to activate (suck) the solenoid, and thus the electric power is used more than necessary, resulting in a large power consumption. However, there is a possibility that excessive heat may be generated.

  On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, it is possible to supply the electric power corresponding to the state (suction state, holding state) to the solenoid for driving the various electric auditors' products. This makes it possible to suppress the electric power used when holding the solenoid. Further, by suppressing the electric power used excessively, it is possible to suppress the solenoid from excessively generating heat.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The same components as those of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 226, in this control example, a first winning hole 64 is provided in the lower area of the game board 13 (below the third symbol display device 81), and a second winning hole 640 and a second winning hole are provided on the lower right side thereof. An electric accessory 640a associated with the mouth 640 is provided. The electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined pattern when the result of the winning lottery (general drawing lottery) of the second symbol executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is a hit. The electric accessory 640a is driven by a general-purpose solenoid 209d.

  Further, in the same place as in the above-described first embodiment, that is, in the game balls shot to the game board 13, on the downstream side of the region (so-called, right-handed region) where the game balls passing over the center frame 86 pass, A variable winning device 65 is provided. The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 49 to FIG. 51) of the first embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is omitted. Is driven by the open solenoid 65f2, and the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is driven by the flow path solenoid 65k.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is provided with the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the open solenoid 65f2, and the flow path solenoid 65k as solenoids for the main controller 110 to perform drive control. A control signal corresponding to the game state is output to the solenoid.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 231. The fifteenth control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the input / output port 205 and the solenoid 209 of the main control device 110 are connected to the solenoid drive circuit. They are different in that they are connected via 1200. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 227, in this control example, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110.

  The solenoid drive circuit 1200 uses various solenoids 209 (general-purpose solenoids) based on the types of output signals for solenoid control output from the main controller 110 (output signals for strongly operating and weakly operating each solenoid). 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) is a circuit for performing an operation. A detailed description of this solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be given later with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 228 and 229, for turning on / off various solenoids 209 (general-use solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow passage solenoid 65k) based on an instruction from MPU 201 of main controller 110. The electrical configuration will be described.

  FIG. 228 shows an input / output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204, a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the input / output port 205, and a solenoid drive circuit 1200 connected to the solenoid drive circuit 1200. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various solenoids 209 (general-use solenoid 209d, opening solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k).

  As shown in FIG. 228, various solenoids 209 (general-purpose solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 via the solenoid drive circuit 1200. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 227), and by switching the output signal of the MPU 201, the solenoid drive circuit 1200 can be driven and the various solenoids 209 can be switched on and off.

  Specifically, the input / output port 205 is connected to a solenoid driving IC 1201 provided in the solenoid driving circuit 1200. Here, the solenoid driving IC 1201 is an IC capable of outputting the signal input to the input port from the output port at the rising edge of the clock and then holding the output of the output port until the clear signal is input. is there.

  The solenoid driving IC 1201 has input terminals (ports) D1 to D6, output terminals (ports) Q1 to Q6, a clock input terminal CK, a clear signal input terminal CLR, a power supply input terminal Vcc, and a ground terminal GND.

  By applying a voltage of 2 to 6 V between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND, the solenoid driving IC 1201 becomes operable. In the present control example, the power source 5V is connected to the power source input terminal Vcc, and the ground terminal GND is connected (grounded) to apply a voltage of 5V between the power source input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. Is configured. A capacitor C1 having a capacitance of 10 μF is provided on the circuit between the power input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. The capacitor C1 can remove noise from the external power source for the solenoid driving IC 1201 and suppress (prevent) the destruction and malfunction of the solenoid driving IC 1201. Of course, the capacitance of the capacitor C1 may be appropriately changed.

  Inputting to the input ports D1 to D6 by controlling the input signals to the clock input terminal CK and the clear signal input terminal CLR while 5V is applied between the power supply input terminal Vcc and the ground terminal GND. Signals can be output from the output ports Q1 to Q6. Specifically, a rectangular wave (clock signal) having a frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, and an ON signal (5V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR. In this case, at the rising edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are output to the output ports Q1 to Q6. Since the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, the input signals to the input ports D1 to D6 are referred to once every 0.1 ms, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated. Will be done. In this control example, the frequency of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK is set to 10 kHz, but the frequency is not limited to this and may be 5 kHz or 20 kHz. Further, instead of inputting the periodic clock to the clock input terminal CK, the signal may be input to the clock input terminal CK only at the timing of updating the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6.

  On the other hand, even if the clock signal having the frequency of 10 kHz is input to the clock input terminal CK, if the OFF signal (0 V) is input to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the signal input to the input ports D1 to D6 Regardless of, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are OFF (0V). Therefore, by inputting the OFF signal (0 V) to the clear signal input terminal CLR, the solenoid driving IC 1201 can be brought into a non-operating state and the operation of the various solenoids 209 can be stopped.

  The positive terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected in the middle of the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and the negative terminal of the capacitor C2 is connected to GND (grounded). The capacitor C2 can reduce noise mixed in the signal line connecting the input / output port 205 and the clear signal input terminal CLR, and can suppress (prevent) the solenoid driving IC 1201 from operating erroneously.

  The input ports D1 to D6 are ports to which signals are input from the input / output port 205, and either an OFF signal (0V) or an ON signal (5V) is input. The signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 are transmitted from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 as serial data to the input / output port 225 via the bus line 224, and serial / parallel conversion is performed at the input / output port 225 for transmission. A signal is input to each of the input ports D1 to D6 based on the serial data.

  As described above, when the solenoid driving IC 1201 is in the operating state, the output port Q1 is output based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 at the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK. The output signals of Q6 are updated.

  The input port D1 corresponds to the output port Q1, the input port D2 corresponds to the output port Q2, the input port D3 corresponds to the output port Q3, the input port D4 corresponds to the output port Q4, and the input port D5 corresponds to the output port. Q5 corresponds, and the input port D6 corresponds to the output port Q6. If the signal input to the input port is the OFF signal (0V), the signal output from the corresponding output port is the OFF signal (0V), and the signal input to the input port is the ON signal (5V). If so, the signal output from the corresponding output port is an ON signal (5V).

  As described above, the output of the output ports Q1 to Q6 is changed based on the input signal input to the input ports D1 to D6. At the rising timing of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal CK, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are updated based on the signals input to the input ports D1 to D6 and input to the clock input terminal CK. The updated output signal is held at the falling timing of the clock signal. That is, the output signals of the output ports Q1 to Q6 are held until the rising timing of the clock signal input to the next clock input terminal CK.

  Here, the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202 connected to the output ports Q1 and Q2 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d driven by the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202 will be described.

  The output ports Q1 and Q2 are respectively connected to the gate terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2 of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202. Here, the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2 are configured by n-channel FETs (Field Effect Transistors), and by applying a predetermined voltage (5 V) to the gate terminal, the drain terminal is changed to the source terminal. The current flows into the state (conduction state). On the other hand, when no voltage is applied to the gate terminal, no current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal (non-conducting state).

  One terminal of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is connected to the drain terminals of the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2, and a 5V power source is connected to the other terminal of the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Further, GND is connected (grounded) to the source terminals of FET1-1 and FET1-2. Therefore, when the FET 1-1 or the FET 1-2 becomes conductive, a current flows from the 5V power source connected via the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the GND, and a current flows through the general-purpose solenoid 209d. It will be. As a result, the ordinary electric solenoid 209d is changed to the ON state, and the ordinary electric accessory 640a is moved.

  The FET 1-1 becomes conductive because the ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the output of the output port Q1 is output at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when it is turned on. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D1 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, it is possible to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the ON state by using the FET 1-1.

  Further, the FET 1-2 becomes conductive because the ON signal is input from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the output port Q2 is turned on at the rising timing of the signal input to the clock input terminal CK. This is the case when the output is turned on. That is, by inputting an ON signal from the input / output port 205 to the input port D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be driven to the ON state using the FET 1-2.

  Here, the drain terminal of the FET1-1 is directly connected to the general-purpose solenoid 209d, whereas the drain terminal of the FET1-2 is connected to the general-purpose solenoid 209d via the resistor R1. That is, the resistor R1 is connected in series between the drain terminal of the FET 1-2 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d. The resistance value of the resistor R1 is 10 ohms, which is the same as the resistance value of the general-purpose solenoid. Therefore, when a current flows through the general-purpose solenoid 209d due to the FET 1-1 being changed to the conductive state, a voltage of 5 V is applied to the general-purpose solenoid 209d. On the other hand, when the electric current flows through the general-purpose solenoid 209d because the FET 1-2 is changed to the conductive state, the same voltage (2.5V) is applied to the resistor R1 and the general-purpose solenoid 209d. become.

  This makes it possible to provide a difference in driving force between when the FET 1-1 is used to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d and when the FET 1-2 is used to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 229, in the present control example, the case in which the normal electric accessory 640a that needs to increase the driving force of the normal power solenoid 209d is changed to the open state and the normal power accessory 640a is changed to the normal power accessory 640a. It is configured to change the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d depending on whether the variable ordinary electric accessory 640a is held in the open state without causing a problem even when the driving solenoid 209d has a weak driving force. As a result, the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, so that the electric power required to drive the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  A freewheeling diode D1 is provided in parallel with the general-purpose solenoid 209d. The cathode terminal of the free wheeling diode D1 is connected to the terminal side connected to the power source side of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, and the anode terminal is connected to the ground side of the general-purpose solenoid 209d (either FET1-1 or FET1-2 is connected). Connected side). Therefore, current does not flow from the power supply side of the general-purpose solenoid 209d to the ground side, but current flows from the ground side to the power supply side. As a result, the current generated by the counter electromotive force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d when the FET1-1 or FET1-2 is turned off is consumed by the general-purpose solenoid 209d through the return diode D1. It is possible to suppress (prevent) the destruction of the FET 1-1 and the FET 1-2 by the back electromotive force of 209d.

  It should be noted that a switching element such as a FET may be adopted instead of the free wheeling diode D1, and the switching element may be turned on when a counter electromotive force is generated in the general-purpose solenoid 209d. Further, the counter electromotive force of the solenoid 209d may be stored in a capacitor or the like. Power consumption can be reduced by using the stored energy of the capacitor for the next operation of the solenoid 209d or for driving other solenoids or motors. If a capacitor having a low voltage with respect to the counter electromotive force of the solenoid 209d is used, the energy of the solenoid 209d is immediately stored in the solenoid 209d, so that the energy of the solenoid 209d can be immediately reduced and the response performance of the solenoid 209d ( The operation speed of the off operation) can be increased.

  Thus, the input signal is input from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the input ports D1 and D2 of the solenoid driving IC 1201, and the general electric solenoid drive circuit 1202 is driven, so that the general electric solenoid 209d is input port. It is driven by two kinds of driving force according to. As a result, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a that needs to increase the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is changed to the open state, and when the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d is weaker than that, there is no problem. When the normal electric accessory 640a is held in the open state, the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be changed, and the driving force of the general-purpose solenoid 209d can be suppressed to the necessary minimum. Electric power required to drive the solenoid 209d can be suppressed.

  The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 is a circuit driven by output ports Q3 and Q4 that are updated based on signals input to the input ports D3 and D4 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. By driving the open solenoid drive circuit 1203, the open solenoid 65f2 is driven. The open solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the open solenoid 65f2 with two types of drive forces. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1204 is a circuit driven by output ports Q5 and Q6 that are updated based on signals input to the input ports D5 and D6 of the solenoid drive IC 1201. By driving the flow path solenoid drive circuit 1204, the flow path solenoid 65k is driven. The flow path solenoid drive circuit 1203 has the same configuration as the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, and can drive the flow path solenoid 65k with two types of driving force. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the general-purpose solenoid drive circuit 1202, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 229, the relationship between input / output signals in the solenoid driving IC 1201 and the operation of the universal solenoid 209d with respect to the output signal of the solenoid driving IC will be described.

  In the present control example, when the universal solenoid 209d is varied, a normal period is set by a suction period during which the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state and a holding period during which the electric accessory 640a is held in the open state. A difference is provided in the driving force for driving the solenoid 209d. Specifically, less energy is required when the electric accessory 640a is kept open than when the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, by driving the electric accessory 640a with a large driving force (strong operation) during the suction period and driving the electric auditors object 640a with a small driving force (weak operation) during the subsequent holding period, power consumption is reduced. It is decreasing.

  First, immediately after the power is turned on, if the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201 is OFF (0V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK, the input port D1, The output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are not updated based on the input signal to D2, and the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are both OFF (0V). Thus, by setting the input signal to the clear signal input terminal CLR to OFF (0V), even if the ON signal is input to the clock input terminal CK due to the influence of noise or the like, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are output. Is not turned on (5V), it is possible to prevent (suppress) malfunction of the general-purpose solenoid 209d.

  After that, by turning ON (5V) the input signal of the clear signal input terminal CLR of the solenoid driving IC 1201, the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals of the input ports D1 and D2. Becomes

  In this case, when the signal of the clock input terminal CK rises from OFF (0V) to ON (5V), the output signals of the output ports Q1 and Q2 are updated based on the input signals of the input ports D1 and D2. When driving the universal solenoid 209d, that is, when opening the electric accessory 640a, first, the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5V). When the input signal of the input port D1 is turned ON (5V), the output signal of the output port Q1 is updated to ON (5V) at the rising timing of the clock signal to the clock input terminal CK.

  When the output signal of the output port Q1 is turned on (5V), the FET 1-1 (see FIG. 228) is driven, and the normal electric solenoid 209d is driven by strong operation (2.5W) by applying 5V. . Since the input signal of the input port D1 is kept ON (5V) for 80 ms, the universal solenoid 209d is driven by strong operation (2.5 W) for 80 ms. This 80 ms period is called a suction period, and the electric accessory 640a is changed from the closed state to the open state during this suction period.

  During the suction period, the input signal to the input port D2 remains OFF (0V), so the output signal of the output port Q2 also remains OFF (0V), and the FET 1-2 (see FIG. 228) is not driven.

  When the suction period of 80 ms is completed, the normal solenoid 209d shifts to a holding period of holding 320 ms in the open state. When shifting to the holding period, first, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off (0V). Then, after the predetermined period (after 2 ms in this control example), the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on (5 V). When the input signal of the input port D2 is turned ON (5V), the FET 1-2 is driven and the universal solenoid 209d is driven. As described above with reference to FIG. 228, when driving the universal solenoid 209d using the FET 1-2, the voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d is low because the resistor R1 is provided on the circuit. (2.5V), the current flowing through the universal solenoid 209d decreases (0.25A). Therefore, the driving force of the general electric solenoid 209d decreases (0.625 W), and the electric power consumed by the general electric solenoid 209d decreases. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced by minimizing the driving force of the universal solenoid 209d during the holding period.

  In the predetermined period (2 ms) from when the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off to when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on, since the period is sufficiently short, the normal power solenoid 209d changes from the open state. It cannot be changed to the closed state. Further, the frequency of the input signal input to the clock input terminal CK is 10 kHz, and the input signal to the input port can be referenced at 0.1 ms intervals and reflected in the output of the output port. The output of the output port Q2 can be turned on after a predetermined period (2 ms) has elapsed after the input signal to the D1 was turned off (that is, after the output of the output port Q1 was turned off).

  In this control example, the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off and then the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the input signal to the input port D1 may be turned off and the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on at the same time, or the input signal to the input port D2 may be turned on and then to the input port D1. The input signal may be turned off. When the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on and then the input signal to the input port D1 is turned off, when the input signal to the input port D2 is turned on, the FET1-1 and the FET1-2 are simultaneously turned on. It will be driven. In this case, the voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d is lower than the voltage (5V) when only FET1-1 is driving, and the voltage (2.5V) when only FET1-2 is driving. Will be higher than. Therefore, when the FET 1-1 is driven and a high voltage is applied to the universal solenoid 209d and the FET 1-2 is driven and a low voltage is applied to the universal solenoid 209d, the FET1 is The voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d can be smoothly reduced by allowing both -1 and the FET 1-2 to be simultaneously driven. As a method of varying the voltage applied to the universal solenoid 209d, a method of causing the FET to perform a switching operation and varying the applied voltage by varying the period of the switching operation, so-called PWM control is also adopted. Naturally good.

  Further, in this control example, a configuration is such that a periodic clock signal is input to the clock input terminal CK and the output signal of the output port is updated at the rising period of the clock signal, but the present invention is not limited to this. . The output signal of the output port may be updated by inputting a pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK when the input signal to the input port is changed. In this case, change the input signal to the input port and then monitor the input signal to the input port to check if it is the specified input signal and then input the pulse signal to the clock input terminal CK. By doing so, the output signal of the output port becomes unintended, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) various solenoids from malfunctioning.

  When 320 ms of the holding period has passed, the input signal to the input port D2 is changed to OFF (0V), and the driving of the FET 1-2 is stopped, so that the universal solenoid 209d is changed from the open state to the closed state. , The opening operation of the electric accessory for a total of 0.4 seconds is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the flow of operation of the universal electric vehicle (electric accessory) in this control example will be described. FIG. 230 is a timing chart showing the operation flow of the gaming state (time saving state and normal state) and the normal electric power (electric accessory) 640a.

  In the present control example, as the opening operation of the Hoden (electric accessory) 640a, a short opening for opening the Hoden (electric accessory) 640a for 0.08 seconds and a long opening for opening for 0.4 seconds in one operation. And are provided, and the long open is set when the game state is a time saving state, and the short open is set when the game state is a normal state.

  Then, in the long opening during the time saving, the signal output to the universal electric solenoid 209d is set based on the operation interval of the universal electric (electric accessory) 640a. If the operation interval of the object 640a is a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) or more, a strong output signal for strongly operating the universal electric solenoid 209d is output during the open period (400 milliseconds) (point a in FIG. 230). If the operation interval of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 300 milliseconds) (refer to the point a and the point b in FIG. 230), the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is used. During the period (80 msec) during which the power is released (suction period), a strong output signal is output (see point c and point d in FIG. 230), and then a weak output signal is output to open the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Hold state It is output during the lifting period (320 ms) (see point d and the point e of FIG. 230).

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the electric power that holds the open state when the ordinary electric power (electric accessory) 640a frequently operates. In this control example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (the gaming state in which the long opening is executed, that is, whether or not the time is shortened) and the operation interval are set as the opened state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Is set and the type of the signal output to the normal power solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result, but other configurations may be used, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal. When it is determined that the game state in which the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed is determined, the type of the signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a per unit time. The type of the output signal may be switched based on the open period.

  Further, a thermistor capable of detecting the temperature of the general electric solenoid 209d may be provided, and when the temperature of the general electric solenoid 209d exceeds a predetermined temperature (for example, 60 degrees), the type of the output signal may be switched.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example. The RAM 203 in the fifteenth control example includes a weak output standby timer 203da, a standby completion flag 203db, a weak output timer 203dc, a strong output timer 203dd, and a normal power interval timer 203de, as compared with the RAM 203 in the first control example. The difference is that they are added. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The weak output standby timer 203da is a timer for counting a period until a weak output signal is output to the universal electric solenoid 209d when the universal electric (electric accessory) 640a performs an opening operation. The value set in the timer (for example, “40”) is subtracted every 2 milliseconds, and when the timer value becomes “0”, a weak output signal is output to the universal solenoid 209d. Has been done. This weak output standby timer 203da is determined to be in the time saving period in the normal power operation setting process (see S654 of FIG. 235) (S711: Yes), and then the value of the normal power interval timer 203de is not "0". If it is determined (S712: No), the value of “40” is set, and every time the normal electric timer subtraction process (see S264 of FIG. 237) is executed, the value of the timer becomes “0”. 1 is subtracted (S852 in FIG. 237).

  Then, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” in the normal electric power timer subtraction processing (S264 of FIG. 237) (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON. .

  The standby completion flag 203db indicates a state in which a weak output signal is output to the general electric solenoid 209d when the general electric (electric accessory) 640a performs an opening operation, and the value of the weak output standby timer 203da. Is set to "0" when it becomes "0". The standby completion flag 203db is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is “0” in the normal electric power timer subtraction process (S264 in FIG. 237) (S853: Yes) ( S854), which is referred to when determining whether to output a weak output signal in the normal electrical switching process (S263 in FIG. 236) (S813), and the value of the weak output timer 203dc is determined to be "0". In this case (S816: Yes), it is set to OFF (S820).

  The weak output timer 203dc is a timer that counts the period during which the weak output signal is output to the universal solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, "160") is set for the timing at which the weak output signal is output, and a predetermined interval ( 1 is subtracted every 2 milliseconds. The weak output signal is output until the value of the weak output timer 203dc becomes “0”.

  The weak output timer 203dc is set to a value of "160" when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON in the normal power switching process (S263 of FIG. 236) (S813: Yes). (S814), every time the normal electric power timer subtraction process (see S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S856 in FIG. 237).

  The strong output timer 203dd is a timer that counts a period during which a strong output signal is output to the universal solenoid 209d, and a predetermined value (for example, "40") is set at a timing at which the strong output signal is output and a predetermined interval ( 1 is subtracted every 2 milliseconds. The strong output signal is output until the value of the strong output timer 203dd becomes "0".

  The strong output timer 203dd is set to a value of "200" when the value of the universal power interval timer 203de is determined to be "0" in the universal power operation setting process (S654 of FIG. 235) (S712: Yes). If it is determined that the value of the universal communication interval timer 203de is not "0" (is "1" or more) (S712: No), the value of "40" is set (S714). .

  Then, every time the normal electric power timer subtraction processing (S264 of FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S858 of FIG. 237), and the normal electric power switching processing is performed. In (S263 of FIG. 236), when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is "0" (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812). ).

  The ordinary electricity interval timer 203de is a timer for counting the interval at which the opening operation of the ordinary electricity (electrical accessory) 640a is executed, and the ordinary electricity solenoid for the opening operation of the ordinary electricity (electrical accessory) 640a. It is referred to when setting the type of the output signal to 209d (strong output signal or weak output signal) and the output period.

  The ordinary electricity interval timer 203de is set to a value of "200" (S819) after the ordinary symbol is set in the standby state (S818) in the ordinary electricity opening / closing processing (S263 of FIG. 236), and the ordinary electricity timer subtraction processing is performed. Every time (S264 in FIG. 237) is executed (every 2 milliseconds), 1 is subtracted until the timer value becomes “0” (S860 in FIG. 237).

  Then, in the normal power operation setting process (S654 in FIG. 235), it is referred to when determining the type and output period of the output signal to be output to the normal power solenoid 209d (S712).

<Regarding control processing in fifteenth control example>
Next, the control process in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236. In the control processing in the fifteenth control example, the contents of the main control device are changed from those in the first control example. Other processes are the same as in the first control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fifteenth control example is different from the first control example in that in the timer interrupt process, a normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 63) is replaced with a normal symbol control process (see S155 in FIG. 232). To do. Since the other points are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the timer interrupt process executed by the main controller 110MPU201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process in the fifteenth control example. The same parts as those in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  When the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 232) is executed, the processes of S101 to S105 are executed similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the first control example described above, and then the normal symbol control process ( S155) is executed. This normal symbol control process (S155) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 233.

  Then, when the normal symbol control process (S155) ends, the processes of S107 to S109 are executed similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63) of the above-described first control example, and this process ends.

  Next, the normal symbol control process (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol control process (S155). In this normal symbol control process (S155), the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) to execute the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is opened when the result is a hit. The electric power open / close process (S263) for opening / closing the electric accessory (Uden) 640a, and various timers (weak output standby timer 203da, weak output timer 203dc, strong output) set when executing the electric power open / close process. The normal electric timer subtraction process (S264) of subtracting the timer 203dd) is executed.

  When the normal symbol control process (S155) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the normal symbol is currently hit (S261). When it is determined in the process of S261 that it is not in the middle of a hit (during fluctuation or standby) (S261: No), next, normal symbol fluctuation process 2 (S262) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S261 that the hit is successful (S261: Yes), then the normal power switching process (S263) is executed, then the normal power timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, and The process ends.

  Here, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262) will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S262), compared to the normal symbol variation process of the first control example (see S106 in FIG. 68), the point that the variation time of the normal symbol is changed, and the electric accessory (general electric power). ) A difference is that a normal power operation setting process (S625) for setting the operation content of 640a is provided. In addition, about the same part as the normal symbol variation process (refer to S106 of FIG. 68) of the above-mentioned first control example, the same reference numeral is given and its description is omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  When the normal symbol variation process 2 (S262 of FIG. 234) is executed, the processes of S602 to S611 are executed similarly to the normal symbol variation process of the first control example (see S106 of FIG. 68). In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is shortening (S608: Yes), after performing the process of S610, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 seconds (S652), and the process of S612 is performed. The process shifts, the processes of S612, S613, and S618 are executed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 of FIG. 68) of the above-described first control example, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S608, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S608: No), after performing the processing of S611, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds (S653), and S612. Move to processing.

  Further, in the process of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S602: Yes), S622 to S624 as in the normal symbol changing process (see S106 of FIG. 68) of the first control example described above. Processing is executed, and then the normal power operation setting processing (S654) is executed, and then this processing ends.

  Next, the normal power operation setting process (S654) will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal power operation setting process (S654). In the normal power operation setting process (S654), a process of setting an output solenoid signal to be output to the normal power solenoid 209d is executed based on the game state (whether or not to save time) and the normal power operation interval.

  When the normal power operation setting process (S654) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current time is in a short time (S711). If it is determined that the current time is in a short time (S711: Yes), then It is determined whether the value of the electrical interval timer 203de is "0" (S712), and when it is determined that the value of the universal electrical interval timer 203de is not "0" (greater than or equal to "1") (S712: No), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is set to "40" (S713), and the process proceeds to S714. On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the time is not shortening (S711: No), the process directly proceeds to S714.

  In the processing of S714, the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to "40" (S714), and then the strong output solenoid signal is output (set to ON) (S715), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is determined that the value of the universal communication interval timer 203de is "0" (S712: Yes), the value of the strong output timer 203dd is set to "200" (S716), and S715. Process shifts to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the universal switching operation (S263) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal power switching process (S263). When the power switch operation (S263) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is "0" (S811), and it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is "0". If so (S811: Yes), the output of the strong output solenoid signal is stopped (set to OFF) (S812), and the process proceeds to S813. On the other hand, in the process of S811, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not “0” (“1” or more) (S811: No), the process of S812 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S813. .

  In the process of S813, it is determined whether or not the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S813: No), it is left as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S813, when it is determined that the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S813: Yes), the value of the weak output timer 203dc is set to "160" (S814), The weak output solenoid is output (set to ON) (S815).

  After the processing of S815 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0" (S816), and when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is "0" (S816). : Yes), then stop the output of the weak output solenoid signal (set it to OFF) (S817), set the normal symbol to the standby state (S818), and set the value of the ordinary electricity interval timer 203de to "200". This is set (S819), the standby completion flag 203db is set to OFF (S820), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S816, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not "0" (S816: No), the processes of S814 to S816 are skipped and this process is ended.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary electric power timer subtraction process (S264) executed in the normal symbol control process (S155 of FIG. 233). In this normal electric timer subtraction process (S264), the subtraction process of various timers set when the normal symbol control process is executed is executed.

  When the normal electric power timer subtraction process (S264) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than "0" (S851). In the processing of S851, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is larger than “0” (more than “1”) (S851: Yes), the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is subtracted by 1 (S852). ) Next, it is determined whether the value of the subtracted weak output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853). In the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is "0" (S853: Yes), the standby completion flag 203db is set to ON (S854), and the process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not “0” (“1” or more) (S853: No), the process of S854 is skipped and the process of S855 is performed. Transition. Further, in the processing of S851, even when it is determined that the value of the weak output standby timer 203da is not larger than “0” (“0”), the processing directly proceeds to S855.

  In the process of S855, it is determined whether the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than "0" (S855). In the process of S855, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S855: Yes), the value of the weak output timer 203dc is decremented by 1 ( The process proceeds to S856) and S857. On the other hand, in the process of S855, when it is determined that the value of the weak output timer 203dc is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process of S857 is performed. Move to.

  In the process of S857, it is determined whether the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than "0" (S857). In the process of S857, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is larger than “0” (more than “1”) (S857: Yes), the value of the strong output timer 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S858). ), And proceeds to the processing of S859. On the other hand, in the process of S857, when it is determined that the value of the strong output timer 203dd is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S857: No), the process of S858 is skipped and the process of S859 is performed. Move to processing.

  In the process of S859, it is determined whether the value of the universal telephone interval timer 203de is larger than "0" (S859). In the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the universal call interval timer 203de is larger than “0” (“1” or more) (S859: Yes), the value of the universal call interval timer 203de is decremented by 1. (S860), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S859, when it is determined that the value of the universal telephone interval timer 203de is not larger than “0” (“0”) (S859: No), the process of S860 is skipped and The process ends.

  As described above, according to the fifteenth control example, the electric power according to the state (suction state, holding state) can be supplied to the solenoid for driving the various electric auditors' products. This makes it possible to suppress the electric power used when holding the solenoid. Further, by suppressing the electric power used excessively, it is possible to suppress the solenoid from excessively generating heat.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured to output a control signal corresponding to the game state to each solenoid, for example, the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is frequently opened. The type of output signal to the solenoid can be changed between a gaming state (for example, a time saving state) and a gaming state (normal state) in which the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is not frequently opened.

  In the present control example, when the electric power (electric accessory) 640a frequently operates, the electric power for holding the open state can be suppressed. In this control example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (the gaming state in which the long opening is executed, that is, whether or not the time is shortened) and the operation interval are set as the opened state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a. Is set and the type of the signal output to the normal power solenoid 209d is switched based on the determination result, but other configurations may be used, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal. When it is determined that the game state in which the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a is frequently opened and closed is determined, the type of the signal to be output may be switched, or the total of the electric power (electrical accessory) 640a per unit time. The type of the output signal may be switched based on the open period.

  With this configuration, when various solenoids (universal solenoid 209d, open solenoid 65f2, flow path solenoid 65k) may generate excessive heat, output is performed in advance before excessive heat is generated. The type of signal can be switched.

  In this control example, a push type solenoid is used in which the movable iron core protrudes when power is supplied and an exciting current flows, but other configurations are also possible, for example, power is supplied and an exciting current flows. Therefore, a pull-type solenoid in which the movable iron core is buried may be used.

  In the fifteenth control example described above, a circuit capable of outputting a strong output signal for strongly operating the solenoid and a weak output signal for weakly operating the solenoid is used as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 (see FIG. 228), but other than that. The configuration may be used, and for example, the configuration shown in FIG. 238 (a) may be used.

  Next, another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second solenoid drive circuit which is another example of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 of the fifteenth control example described above. The description of the same elements as those of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (a), in the second solenoid drive circuit, in order to vary the electric power of the general-purpose solenoid 209d, the supply voltage when energized is made different, and the switch (SW) 1 and When the switch (SW) 2 is on (closed), the general-purpose solenoid 209d operates (strongly operates) at a voltage of 30 V, the switch (SW) 1 turns on (closed), and the switch (SW) 2 Is off (open), the general-purpose solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 1) at a voltage of 20 V, the switch (SW) 1 is off (open), and the switch (SW) 2 is on (closed). 2), the general-purpose solenoid 209d operates (weak operation 2) at a voltage of 10V.

  The switches (SW1, SW2) provided in the second solenoid drive circuit described above are configured to be switched on and off based on a signal output from the main control device 110, and the contents thereof will be described above. Since it is the same as the solenoid drive circuit 1200 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238 (b), an operation mode of the universal solenoid 209d when the above-described second solenoid drive circuit is used will be described. FIG. 238 (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the second solenoid drive circuit and the universal solenoid 209d.

  As shown in FIG. 238 (b), when the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both on, the universal solenoid 209d performs a strong operation, and the switch (SW) 1 is on and the switch (SW) is on. When 2 is off, the universal solenoid 209d executes weak operation 1 (L1), and when the switch (SW) 1 is off and the switch (SW) 2 is on, the universal solenoid 209d is weak operation 2 (L2). When the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are both off, the universal solenoid 209d does not operate.

  By configuring the solenoid drive circuit as in this modification, for example, when opening the electric power (electric accessory) 640a, both the switch (SW) 1 and the switch (SW) 2 are turned on, and the electric power solenoid is opened. It is possible to selectively use the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2 when executing the 209d in the strong motion and maintaining the open state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a.

  As a method of selectively using the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2, in a state where the ball easily enters the second winning port 640 (for example, in a time saving state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning port 640 causes a normal charge. Since a force against the holding force of the solenoid 209d may be generated, the weak motion 1 is set, while the weak motion is performed when the ball is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640 (for example, the non-time saving state). It may be configured to set 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress power consumption and also to suppress generation of excessive heat in the universal solenoid 209d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the operation of the universal solenoid 209d using the second solenoid drive circuit which is a modification of the solenoid drive circuit 1200 will be described. FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing a flow of operation of the universal solenoid 209d when the second solenoid drive circuit is used. The detailed description of the same components as those in the flow of the operation of the universal solenoid 209d in the fifteenth control example (see FIG. 230) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in the opening operation (long opening) of the ordinary electric solenoid 209d during the game state in which the game state is short-time (time-shortening operation), in order to open the ordinary electric (electric accessory) 640a, a strong output signal (switch ( SW) 1) and weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) are both turned on (80 ms) (see points c and d in FIG. 239) and the open state of the electric power (electric accessory) 640a is maintained. A case where only the strong output signal (switch (SW) 1) is turned on and a case where only the weak output signal (switch (SW) 2) is turned on (see point d and point e in FIG. 239). Are configured to be executed alternately. As a result, it is possible to prevent bias in the circuit that conducts to operate the universal solenoid 209d.

  As a method of selectively using the weak motion 1 and the weak motion 2, in a state where the ball easily enters the second winning port 640 (for example, in a time saving state), the impact of the ball entering the second winning port 640 Since there is a possibility that a force against the holding force of the universal solenoid 209d may be generated, weak motion 1 is set, while on the other hand, in a state where it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning port 640 (for example, a non-time saving state), It may be configured to set the weak motion 2. As a result, it is possible to suppress power consumption and also to suppress generation of excessive heat in the universal solenoid 209d.

  As described above, in this control example, the same standard is used for the plurality of solenoids, but the specifications of the solenoids may be appropriately determined according to the operating environment of each solenoid.

  Further, in this control example, the configuration is described using the solenoid drive circuit of the universal solenoid 209d, but the drive circuits of the other solenoids (open solenoid 65f2, flow passage solenoid 65k) also have the same configuration. Is.

<Regarding a modified example of a character-driven production>
Each of the character objects (character object A720 to character object C460) used for the character object drive effect executed in the above-described tenth to fourteenth control examples, is operated by the operating means (frame button 22 or the like). Based on the above, the driving means (solenoid or the like) is driven to execute the accessory operation. On the other hand, the present modified example is different in that the driven auctions 725 and 726 that are movable in accordance with the operations of the above-described acupunctures (acupuncture products A720 to C460) are provided. Other configurations are the same as the configurations used for the accessory driving effect executed in the tenth to fourteenth control examples described above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As in this modification, by providing the driven accessories 725 and 726, the movement of each accessory (accessories A720 to C460) executed by the driving means (motor or the like) is followed. Since it becomes possible to move the accessory (following accessory 725, 726), it is possible to execute an accessory operation with a high effect of effect, and each accessory (effect A 720 to accessory C 460) Since it becomes possible to operate the accessory (following accessory 725, 726) at a timing different from the operation timing, it is possible to operate the operating means (frame button 22) a plurality of times with respect to the player. Based on the operation of the (frame button 22), it can be assumed that the accessory (driven accessory 725, 726) has operated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, a configuration and a flow of operations of the driven accessories 725 and 726 used in this modification will be described. FIG. 240 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the driven accessory 725, 726, and FIGS. 240 (b) and 240 (c) show the movement of the driven accessory 725, 726 following the motion of the accessory A 720. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), the driven accessory 725, 726 is provided with the driven accessory 725 of the left slide member 720a of the accessory A 720 and the driven slide 725b of the right slide member 720b. . Here, the configuration of the driven accessory 725 will be described.

  The driven accessory 725 is axially fixed to the left slide member 720a by a shaft support 725a provided at the upper end of the driven accessory 725, and when the left slide member 720a stops operating (see FIG. 240 (b)), It is configured to be rotatable about a shaft support portion 725a by a force.

  Further, when the driven accessory 725 provided on the left slide member 720a and the driven accessory 726 provided on the right slide member 720b both rotate, the leading end portion 725b of each driven accessory contacts. In addition, a magnet is provided at the tip portion 725b of the driven member 725 as a holding means for holding the state in which the driven members (driven member 725, driven member 726) are in contact with each other. There is. It should be noted that the holding means is not limited to a magnet as long as it can hold the state in which each driven accessory (driven accessory 725, driven accessory 726) is in contact. For example, the tip portion 725b may be made of an adhesive material or a material having a high friction coefficient.

  Further, the left slide member 720a is provided with a restriction member 725c for restricting the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725. This restricting member 725c is variable between a projecting position that restricts the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725 and a buried position (allowable position) that allows the rotational movement of the driven accessory 725 by a driving unit (a solenoid or the like) not shown. It is composed of a possible pin, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a special symbol is won as a big hit), the driven accessory 725 is configured to be variably moved to an allowable position where it can be rotated. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) and 240 (c), a flow of operation of the driven accessory 725, 726 will be described. As shown in FIG. 240 (b), when the operation of the accessory A is stopped (or suddenly decelerated), the driven accessories 725 and 726 rotate about the shaft support portions 725a and 726a by the inertial force. Then, the respective tip portions 725b and 726b are brought into contact with each other, thereby forming a substantially V-shaped shape (characteristics composite form) at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is covered. It should be noted that the combination form of the accessory is held by the holding means (magnet or the like) provided at each of the tip portions 725b and 726b. Further, although the regulating member 725c is configured to be moved to the allowable position when the action of the accessory A is executed, the action of the accessory A is performed while the accessory A is performing the forward movement. The turning operation is restricted by the propulsive force generated by the driving force, and the accessory A is rotated when it stops (or suddenly decelerates).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (c), by performing the operation in the direction in which the accessory A is separated (by executing the returning operation), the respective tip portions 725b, 726b of the driven accessories 725, 726 are separated. The driven accessories 725 and 726 return to the standby position (the position shown in FIG. 240 (a)) by their own weight. In addition, since the restricting member 725c is configured to be variable to the restricting position at the timing when the driven assisting objects 725 and 726 return to the standby position, due to the reaction of the operation of returning the driven assisting objects 725 and 726 to the standby position, Again, jumping out of the accessory A 720 is suppressed.

  The configuration of the present modified example described above may be combined with the configuration of each of the control examples described above. For example, in combination with the repetitive operation in the twelfth control example described above, the player may operate the operation means (frame button 22). The restricting members 725c and 726c may be moved to the allowable position when the accessory A 720 starts the repetitive operation. Thereby, the driven accessory does not rotate in the normal accessory operation, and the driven accessory can be rotated only when the repetitive operation is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a new accessory motion based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player, and the player willingly operate the operation means (frame button 22). There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, in combination with the configuration of the 14th control example described above, the driven accessory 725, 726 is operated only when the accessory operation (strong operation) in which the operation speed of the driving means (motor or the like) is increased is stopped (or sudden deceleration). You may comprise so that it may rotate.

  Further, in the present modification, the rotation of the driven members 725 and 726 is restricted by changing the restricting member 725b, but as another configuration, for example, the driven members 725 and 726 are located at the standby position. As a member for holding the work, a holding member (magnet) or the like may be provided on each of the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b. In this case, holding means (such as a magnet) provided at each of the distal end portions 725b and 726b of the driven accessories 725 and 726 can hold the driven accessories 725 and 726 at the standby position. Therefore, the holding means provided at the tip of the driven accessory 725, 726 can be used both for holding the standby position and for holding the completed accessory form, thereby reducing the number of parts. Is possible.

  Further, it is preferable to provide the driven accessories 725 and 726 on the back side of the accessory A 720 (a portion where the player cannot easily see the characters). As a result, the driven accessory 725, 726 at the standby position can be covered with the accessory A 720, so that even if the driven accessory 725, 726 swings near the standby position, it is suppressed from being noticed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. It is sufficient to provide a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the driven accessory objects 725 and 726 located at the standby position, and a configuration other than the accessory object A720 may be used.

  Further, when the configuration in which the regulating member is variably controlled is used as in the present control example, both the driven actors 725 and 726 can be made rotatable, or either one can be made rotatable. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced. For example, when the special symbol is a big hit, both of the driven components 725 and 726 can be rotated (both the regulating members 725c and 726c are changed to the permissible position), and the completed component form is formed. When the special symbol is not won for the jackpot (when the fact that the winning is won is not notified), only one of the followers can be rotated and the player is encouraged to perform the effect. You can

  As described above, in the present modified example described above, the driven actors 725 and 726 are provided, but the other auditors (actor B740, actor C460) may be driven actors. Further, in this control example, the left slide member 720a and the right slide member 720b are operated at the same timing, but they may be operated at different timings. In this way, by making the operation of the accessory that is driven by the driving means (motor or the like) complicated, the operation of the driven accessory can be made more complicated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this modification, a configuration using inertial force and gravity is described as a driven accessory that performs an operation that does not use drive means, but other configurations may be used, for example, restoration of an elastic member. The force may be used to construct a driven accessory.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and the stop is displayed. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific ".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Example of technical idea of moving member that moves only by biasing force>
A biasing device that generates an elastic biasing force in one direction, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device from a retracted position located outside the display region of the liquid crystal display device by the biasing force generated by the biasing device. A movable member formed to be movable to a predetermined position located on the front side of the vehicle, a position regulating device formed to regulate the movement of the movable member at the retracted position, and a release for releasing the regulation by the position regulating device. A gaming machine A1 comprising: a device.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed to be movable between a first position and a second position, and a drive motor that generates a driving force for moving the moving member. There is a game machine provided (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when moving the moving member by driving the motor, it is easy to gradually accelerate the moving member to increase the speed, but it is not possible to move the moving member at high speed from the start. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the movement member formed to be movable from the retracted position to the predetermined position by the urging force in one direction is restricted in movement (stopped) by the position restricting device in the retracted position. ). Then, when the restriction by the position restricting device is released by the releasing device, the moving member is moved to the retracted position and starts to move due to the accumulated biasing force.

  Therefore, the force applied to the moving member can be formed to a target value from the time of starting the movement of the moving member from the retracted position, and the moving member can be started at high speed.

  Examples of the urging device include a device that uses the repulsive force of a magnet, a device that uses spring elasticity, and the like, and a release device that provides a driving force that mechanically moves the position restricting device. An example is a device that releases electromagnetic attraction of the position control device.

  In the gaming machine A1, at least a driving device having a function of generating a driving force for moving the moving member from the predetermined position to the retracted position is provided, and the releasing device is configured by the driving device. A gaming machine A2.

  Here, when the moving member is moved by the urging force in one direction, a device for generating a driving force for returning the moving member against the urging force is necessary in order to repeatedly perform the effect. Therefore, a space for arranging a device that generates a driving force is required. However, since the space for arranging the moving member and the driving device is limited inside the gaming machine, there is a possibility that the installation space for the moving member cannot be sufficiently secured by adding the driving device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the releasing device is constituted by the driving device, so that the driving device releases the regulation of the moving member and the retracted position from the predetermined position of the moving member. Can also be used to return to. Therefore, as compared with the case where a separate drive device is prepared, the installation space for the release device and the drive device can be suppressed.

  Further, after the moving member moves from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position by the driving force of the driving device, so that the effect by the moving member can be repeated.

  A motor, an air cylinder, etc. are illustrated as a drive device.

  In the gaming machine A2, the moving member is rotatably supported on the base end side, and the position restricting device is protruded from the first rotating body which is rotated about the first axis and the first rotating body. And a pin member eccentrically positioned on the first shaft, the pin member being connected to the moving member at the proximal end side of the moving member, and the moving member being disposed at the retracted position. In this case, the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member is orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, when the pin member of the position regulating device is connected to the moving member and the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the first shaft and the pin member are tied together. The direction is formed so as to be orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotation shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member and the pin member.

  Therefore, when the moving member is moved to the retracted position, the pin member can be automatically positioned at the dead point in the relationship between the first rotating body and the moving member, and the moving member is mechanically held at the retracted position. it can. Thereby, for example, the structure of detecting that the moving member is arranged at the retracted position and operating the position regulating device to regulate the moving member becomes unnecessary.

  In addition, since the moving member is mechanically held by the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotary shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member, the moving member can be moved to the retracted position without a driving force such as a drive motor. A large amount of regulation power can be secured. Therefore, a large urging force accumulated in the urging device can be secured, and the effect of starting the moving member at high speed can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the moving member includes a guide portion that guides the pin member, and a straight line that connects the pin member and the first shaft of the position regulating device at at least one of the retracted position and the predetermined position. And a direction in which the guide portion extends are aligned with each other, and the position regulating device is engaged with the drive device and the drive force generated by the drive device is transmitted. A gaming machine A4, wherein the pin member is formed so as to be movable along the guide portion by being rotated.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when the moving member starts rotating from the state where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position or the predetermined position, the moving direction of the pin member and the extension of the guide portion are provided. Since the directions coincide with each other, the resistance that the pin member receives from the guide portion when the rotation of the first rotating body starts can be suppressed.

  Therefore, in order to release the restriction of the position restricting device with respect to the moving member, it is necessary to shift the positional relationship between the first shaft, the rotation shaft on the proximal end side of the moving member, and the pin member (to rotate the position restricting device). The driving force of the driving device can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, an engaged state in which the position regulation device and the drive device engage with each other and a non-engaged state in which the position regulation device and the drive device are disengaged from each other are formed. The gaming machine A5 is capable of being disengaged and is formed at least when the moving member is started from the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, when the moving member is started from the retracted position, the position regulating device and the drive device form a disengaged state, so that the resistance exerted on the position regulating device is increased. Can be suppressed, and as a result, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be reduced. In this case, the resistance applied to the position regulating device by forming the engagement state between the drive device and the position regulating device does not occur when the moving member starts from the retracted position. Therefore, even if a large drive device is selected to counteract the urging force of the urging device, the moving member can be started at a high speed and the urging device can be designed more freely. That is, it is possible to select a biasing device having a larger biasing force.

  As a mode in which the position regulating device and the drive device form the disengaged state, for example, a gear is engraved on the side surface of the first rotating body of the position regulating device, and a gear meshed with the gear is partially formed. The second rotating body formed on the drive device is arranged in the drive device, and the driving force of the drive device is transmitted by the meshing of the gears of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and A second rotating body, in which a magnetic body is formed on a side surface of the one rotating body and a magnetic body attracted to the magnetic body is partially formed, is arranged in the drive device, and the first rotating body and the second rotating body are provided. An example is a case where the drive device is transmitted by adsorption with the.

  More specifically, when the first rotation state and the second rotation body transmit the driving force by the meshing of the gears, at least one gear of the first rotation body and the second rotation body is partially formed. As a result, the position regulation device and the drive device form an engaged state in the region where the gear meshes, and the position regulation device and the drive device drive in the region where the gear meshing is released (region where the gear is not formed). The device forms a disengaged condition.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, an effect member that is pivotally supported by the moving member and that is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at least at a predetermined position is provided. The member is formed so as to extend from the base end side to the swing end side that is an end portion on the side opposite to the base end side, and the extending direction is the longitudinal direction, and the base end side is the liquid crystal. The effect member is pivotably supported outside the display area of the display device, and the effect member has a length in a first direction longer than a length in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction. In the retracted position, the posture is such that the first direction is along the longitudinal direction of the moving member, and at the predetermined position, the first direction is in the tangential direction of the rotation locus of the moving member. And one of the first direction Gaming machine A6 but characterized by taking the posture that projects on the opposite side of the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the effect member is arranged in the retracted position, the effect member moves its first direction to the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It is supposed to be in line. Therefore, in the retracted position, even when it is difficult to sufficiently form a space outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member, the effect member is arranged outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It can be easy to set up.

  Further, when the effect member is arranged at the predetermined position, the posture is changed so that the first direction is directed to the tangential direction of the rotation direction of the moving member, and one end of the effect member in the first direction becomes the effect end. Since it is sandwiched and juts out to the side opposite to the retracted position, it is possible to effectively use the display area of the liquid crystal display device to produce an effect.

  In addition, as a case where it is difficult to sufficiently form a space in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the moving member on the outside of the liquid crystal display device, for example, a case where the retracted position is arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device is illustrated. To be done.

  The gaming machine A6 includes a first guide portion formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing shaft formed on the base end side of the moving member, and the effect member is guided by the first guide portion. A gaming machine A7 comprising a first projecting portion, wherein the change in the posture of the effect member is caused by the first projecting portion being guided by the first guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the change in the attitude of the effect member is caused by the projecting portion of the effect member being guided by the first guide portion. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  That is, for example, in the case where the change in the posture of the effect member is a change in which the effect member is tilted as the moving member is moved upward, whether the effect member is gradually tilted in the process of moving the moving member upward. Whether the effect member is suddenly tilted when the moving member is arranged at the ascending movement end can be arbitrarily selected depending on the design of the first guide portion.

  Examples of the first guide portion include an elongated hole that is formed so as to penetrate therethrough and that has a longitudinal direction, a groove that is formed as a recess having a longitudinal direction, and the like. As a mode, there are a mode in which the first protruding part slides on the first guide part, a mode in which the rotating body is arranged in the first protruding part, and the rotating body rolls in the first guide part. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circle portion extending along the circle, the concentric circle portion being formed on the predetermined position side and the posture changing portion being formed on the retracted position side. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period during which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member do not change their attitude with respect to the moving member. The period of being moved as a unit can be extended.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is largely changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along the circle around the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided through the concentric circle portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member and the effect The effect member is moved in a state in which the relative positional relationship between the member and the moving member and the pivotal support position is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the concentric circle portion is formed on the predetermined position side, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect member and the moving member as one body for a long period of time during the rotational movement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first guide portion is centered on a posture changing portion formed along a straight line extending radially from the swing shaft of the moving member and the swing shaft of the moving member. And a concentric circle portion extending along the circle, wherein the posture changing portion is formed on the predetermined position side.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, by shortening the period in which the effect member changes its attitude with respect to the moving member, the moving member and the effect member do not change in attitude with respect to the moving member. The period of being moved as a unit can be extended.

  That is, since the posture changing portion is formed along a straight line extending radially from the rotation axis of the moving member, when the end portion of the effect member is guided through the posture changing portion, the end portion of the effect member and the effect end are formed. The distance from the circle formed by the movement locus of the shaft portion is largely changed, and the posture change of the effect member can be increased with respect to the rotation angle of the moving member.

  On the other hand, since the concentric circle portion extends along the circle around the rotation axis of the moving member, when the first projecting portion of the effect member is guided by the first guide portion, the first projecting portion of the effect member is The effect member is moved in a state in which the relative positional relationship between the effect member and the movable member and the axially supported positions is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the posture change of the effect member with respect to the moving member.

  In this case, since the posture changing portion is formed on the side of the predetermined position, the posture of the effect member can be quickly changed while the effect member is visually recognized by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the moving member is provided with a second guide portion which is formed on a plane perpendicular to the swing axis of the moving member and extends along a rotation locus of the moving member, The member includes at least one second protruding portion guided by the second guide portion, the second protruding portion is formed integrally with the moving member, and the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. In the case of the above, the second protrusion is brought into contact with one end of the second guide, and the gaming machine A10.

  Since the moving member is moved by the urging force of the urging device, it is not possible to stop the motor to reduce the momentum of the moving member as in the case of driving the motor, and the stopper is used to reduce the momentum of the moving member. Mechanisms need to be formed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the second protruding portion contacts the end portion of the second guide portion. By being in contact, the movement of the moving member can be reliably stopped at a predetermined position.

  Further, since the second projecting portion is guided by the second guide portion that extends along the rotation trajectory of the moving member, the second guiding portion and the second projecting portion optimize the rotation of the moving member, and at the same time, It is possible to suppress wobbling of the moving member in the swing axis direction.

  Here, the first projecting portion and the first guide portion of the effect member can be brought into contact with each other so as to serve as a stopper, but since the effect member is rotatably supported by the moving member, the shaft support portion is provided. There is a problem in terms of strength. On the other hand, since the second projecting portion is integrally provided so as to project from the moving member, the problem of strength is small and the reliability as a stopper can be improved.

  By forming a plurality of sets of the second protrusion and the second guide, it is possible to disperse the force required when the moving member reaches the predetermined position. This can improve the durability of the second protrusion. Examples of the second guide portion include an elongated hole formed in a penetrating manner and having a lengthwise direction, a groove formed as a recess having a lengthwise direction, and the like. As a mode, there are a mode in which the second protruding part is slid on the second guide part, a mode in which a rotating body is arranged on the second protruding part, and the rotating body is rolled by the second guide part. It is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion has a groove in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the one end portion rather than the other end portion which is an end portion on the opposite side of the one end portion. A gaming machine A11, characterized in that the width is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, the second guide portion is formed in such a manner that one end has a groove width smaller than that of the other end. That is, since a large gap is formed between the second protruding portion and the second guide portion when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the resistance at the time of starting the moving member can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to reduce the gap formed between the second protrusion and the second guide when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, and it is possible to suppress wobbling of the second protrusion.

  Here, as a mode in which the groove width of the second guide portion is reduced, the groove width is gradually reduced from one end portion of the second guide portion to the other end portion, or the second guide portion is reduced. An example is a case where the groove width is sharply reduced in a part of (the degree of reduction of the groove width is at least two types).

  In addition, when the second guide portion is formed by a through hole and the second protruding portion is inserted into the second guide portion and the retaining member is fastened and fixed to the tip of the second protruding portion, the second guide portion is not drilled. Even if the thickness in the installation direction is formed so that one end is smaller than the other end, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, further, when the moving member is arranged at the projecting position, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling particularly in the direction in which the second guide portion is bored.

  In the gaming machine A11, the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by ascending movement, and the second guide portion has a small diameter side surface from the one end portion to the other end portion. The gap with the second projecting portion is reduced to the vicinity of the portion, and the gap with the second projecting portion is increased at the other end portion as compared with the gap, and the side surface on the large diameter side is , A gap between the one end portion and the second projecting portion is reduced, and the gap between the one end portion and the second projecting portion extends from near the one end portion to near the other end portion as compared with the gap. Gaming machine A12 characterized by having a large gap.

  According to the gaming machine A12, since the swing of the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position is formed by the upward movement, when the movable member is swung from the retracted position to the predetermined position, the movable member swings. When slightly moving in the direction perpendicular to the axis due to play with the axis, the second protruding portion is likely to come into contact with the smaller diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, the small-diameter side of the second guide portion has a small gap with the second projecting portion in the initial stage of the process in which the moving member swings from the retracted position to the predetermined position. This makes it possible to smoothly swing the moving member from the retracted position to the predetermined position.

  Further, when swinging from the predetermined position to the retracted position, the second protruding portion is likely to come into contact with the large diameter side of the second guide portion. Here, on the large-diameter side of the second guide portion, the gap with the second projecting portion is reduced only when the moving member is swung to a predetermined position. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance received from the second guide portion when the moving member swings from the predetermined position to the retracted position. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A6 to A12, the moving member has a main body portion extending from the base end side to the swing end side and a main body portion with a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the effect member. At least one of the one end in the first direction or the other end opposite to the one end in the first direction is provided with the main body part and the decoration part. A gaming machine A13, which is stored between the decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A6 to A12, when the effect member changes its posture, at least one of both ends of the effect member in the first direction has a main body portion and a decorative portion. It is stored with a slight gap between and. Therefore, when the effect member changes its posture, and for some reason, the effect member can move largely in the swing axis direction with respect to the main body, the main body and the decorative portion serve as guides that prevent the movement. The large movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be restricted.

  According to this, when the effect member and the other accessory are arranged in a stacked relationship, it is possible to prevent the effect member from interfering with the other accessory.

  In the gaming machine A13, a movement locus of any part of the effect member and a movement locus of any part of the decorative member are inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and the movement of the effect member is the same. A gaming machine A14, which is characterized by overlapping in the direction of the moving axis.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A13, the effect member can be reliably housed between the main body portion and the decoration portion inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, as compared with the case where the effect member is housed between the main body portion and the decorative portion for the first time outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device, as in the case of preventing the front-back shift with the fixing plate, A guide function for restricting the movement of the effect member in the swing axis direction can be exerted from an earlier stage.

  Accordingly, when a plurality of moving units are stacked and arranged, not only interference between moving members of the moving unit outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device but also movement of the moving unit inside the display area of the liquid crystal display device may occur. It is possible to prevent interference between the moving members.

<Example of technical idea for suppressing wobbling of moving member>
A moving member that is slidably movable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, a first drive device that generates a driving force that drives the moving member, an effect member disposed on the moving member, and an effect member thereof. A second drive device for generating a driving force for driving the game machine, and the retreat position is a position separated from the predetermined position in the lateral direction of the game machine by a predetermined distance and from the predetermined position. It is a position separated by a predetermined distance to the upper side in the vertical direction of the game machine, at least the predetermined position is the movement end of the moving member, and at least the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effect member is A gaming machine B1 which is driven.

  Here, a moving member that is formed so as to be slidable and a performance member that is arranged on the moving member and that is driven independently of the moving member are provided, and the moving member is slid in the horizontal direction. There is a game machine (for example, see JP 2012-085811 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the moving member receives the force due to the reaction of the driving of the effect member, and the moving member is moved in the sliding direction. Therefore, in order to keep the moving member at the predetermined position, the effect member There is a problem in that it is necessary to continue to apply to the moving member a force that resists the force due to the reaction of the driving of the.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the predetermined position, which is the movement end of the moving member, is formed diagonally downward of the retracted position. Therefore, even if the effect member is driven by the driving force of the second drive device at the predetermined position and the moving member receives the force due to the reaction, the force due to the weight of the moving member acts toward the predetermined position, and the moving member is moved to the predetermined position. Therefore, the moving member can be maintained at the predetermined position even if the driving force applied from the first driving device to the moving member is unnecessary.

  Note that the vertical direction of the gaming machine means a direction along the vertical direction when the gaming machine is installed in the hall, and the lateral direction of the gaming machine means a direction intersecting with the vertical direction of the gaming machine substantially vertically. To do.

  As a method of transmitting the driving force of the first driving device to the moving member, a rack gear is formed on the base end side of the moving member, and a pinion gear meshing with the rack gear is rotated by the driving force of the first driving device. Examples thereof include a method and a method of attaching a belt to the base end side of the moving member and winding the belt.

  The gaming machine B1 is provided with an auxiliary member that is arranged at a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, and the moving member is at least in the predetermined position. A direction perpendicular to a plane on which the moving member slides when the moving member is arranged at least at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B2, which is brought into contact with the auxiliary member when the gaming machine B2 swings.

  Here, since the projecting portion of the moving member is formed to project inward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position, it prevents interference with other accessory. Therefore, it is required to suppress shaking in the direction perpendicular to the sliding plane.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the auxiliary member is arranged at a predetermined distance in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides, and the moving member is at the predetermined position. In the arranged state, when the overhanging portion swings in a direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides, the auxiliary member and the overhanging portion of the moving member come into contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the overhanging portion and prevent collision of the other accessory with the overhanging portion.

  In the gaming machine B2, the overhanging portion is weaker in rigidity on the root side than on the tip side, and the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the rigidity on the base side is weakened as compared with the tip side of the overhanging portion, so that wobble generated at the tip of the overhanging portion The degree of transmission to the root side can be weakened.

  Here, examples of the method of weakening the rigidity include a case where the overhanging portion is made of a resin material having partially different rigidity by two-color molding, and a case where the thickness of the overhanging portion is partially changed. .

  When the overhanging portion is formed thin in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding plane of the moving member, it is possible to prevent the moving member from wobbling in the sliding movement direction due to the bending deformation of the overhanging portion.

  Further, when the base side of the overhanging portion is formed thinner than the tip end side, the wobbling on the tip end side of the overhanging portion is converted into a flexural deformation with the root side of the overhanging portion as a fulcrum. As a result, it is possible to suppress horizontal movement of the moving member in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the moving member slides on the base side of the overhang portion.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end, is the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A game machine B4, wherein the auxiliary member is axially supported outside and the auxiliary member is arranged outside a display area of the liquid crystal display device when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, one end of the auxiliary member is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of the auxiliary member is outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. When the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, the auxiliary member is disposed outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the auxiliary member can be retracted from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device.

  Thereby, another moving member is arranged on the same layer as the layer on which the moving member is arranged, and when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the other moving member overhangs inward of the liquid crystal display device. It becomes possible to perform a variety of productions in a limited space.

  As a mode in which the auxiliary member is axially supported by the base member, a mode in which the auxiliary member is axially supported by the rotating shaft or a mode in which the projecting portion is provided through the slot and the projecting portion is guided through the slot Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion extends along the direction from the shaft supporting portion of the one end of the auxiliary member to the other end of the auxiliary member in a state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position. A gaming machine B5, which is provided with an extended contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the overhanging portion of the moving member includes an abutting portion, and the abutting portion serves as an auxiliary member when the moving member is arranged at a predetermined position. It extends along the direction from the shaft support portion of one end portion to the other end portion. Therefore, in the state where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the contact portion can secure the area where the moving member and the auxiliary member come into contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine B5, the projecting portion has a hand portion that is bent and extended from the extended tip of the contact portion, and the effect member is disposed at the tip portion of the hand portion, and the moving member is moved. A gaming machine B6, wherein the overlapping position of the projecting portion and the auxiliary member moves toward the tip end side of the hand portion as the member slides to the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the effect member is arranged at the tip of the projecting portion, and the projecting portion and the auxiliary member are formed as the moving member slides to the retracted position. The overlapping position is moved to the tip side of the hand. Therefore, as the moving member is slid to the retracted position, the protrusion amount (extension distance) of the overhang portion extending to the effect member with the auxiliary member as a reference can be shortened. Thus, even if the tip end side of the overhanging portion wobbles due to the driving of the effect member, the overhanging portion can be brought into contact with the auxiliary member from a stage where the wobbling is small. Accordingly, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the effect of suppressing the wobbling in the direction perpendicular to the plane in which the moving member slides can be remarkable.

  In the gaming machines B4 to B6, the effect member is disposed below the moving member, one end of which is pivotally supported by the moving member, and the other end of which is opposite to that of the moving member. A case where the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retreat position and is formed with a direction connecting the other end which is the end of the moving member as a longitudinal direction. However, the gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the longitudinal direction of the effect member is tilted in the horizontal direction.

  Since the moving member is moved diagonally downward toward the predetermined position, even when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, in order to form the effect member on the front side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, the moving member is In the case of being arranged in the retracted position, it is necessary to dispose the lower end of the effect member at a position that is elevated from the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device by the distance that the moving member is moved downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position. It was Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the space below the effect member is dead space and wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, compared to the case where the effect member is arranged below the moving member and the moving member is arranged in the retracted position. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction and the horizontal direction of the effect member is formed to be smaller. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, the effect member is Take a horizontal position.

  Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position, the moving member moves downward from the retracted position toward the predetermined position even if the effect member is arranged at the lower end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. The distance thus set can be absorbed by the change in the posture of the effect member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the effect member from being wasted as a dead space when the moving member is disposed at the retracted position, and the effect member can be formed as a large member that is longer in the longitudinal direction.

  In the gaming machine B7, a connecting member that connects the other end of the effect member and the auxiliary member is provided, and the auxiliary member moves as compared with the case where the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that when the member is arranged at the predetermined position, the member takes a posture tilted in the horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the auxiliary member is more horizontal when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position than when the moving member is arranged at the retracted position. Since the other end of the effect member is connected to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, the effect member is horizontally tilted as the auxiliary member is horizontally tilted. Can be made.

  Further, since the effect member is connected not only to the moving member but also to the connecting member via the auxiliary member axially supported by the moving member, the effect member is supported by a plurality of members, so that the force generated by driving the effect member can be reduced. The effect of suppressing the wobbling of the effect member and the moving member can be remarkably dispersed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the other end side of the effect member, so that the weight of the effect member effectively acts on the connecting member. Can be made. Therefore, when the moving member is arranged at the predetermined position, a force in the direction of further tilting the auxiliary member is effectively applied to the auxiliary member, and thus wobbling of the auxiliary member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the moving member and the effect member that are connected to the auxiliary member.

  In the gaming machine B8, the position of the center of gravity of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the longitudinal direction of the game machine of the position at which the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, the center of gravity position of the effect member is formed on the upper side in the longitudinal direction of the game machine at the position where the effect member is pivotally supported by the moving member. The height can be evenly distributed in the horizontal direction with the axis support positions of the moving member and the effect member as boundaries.

  Therefore, the wobbling of the effect member when the effect member is driven by the second drive device can be easily transmitted to the auxiliary member through the connecting member, and as a result, the moving member and the effect member connected to the auxiliary member Wobble can be generated. As a result, by driving the effect member, it is possible to perform an effect of wobbling the moving member and the effect member.

<Example of technical idea to suppress assembly man-hours>
A base member having a pair of wall portions formed so as to project in the same direction, a lid member that abuts the protruding end of at least one of the pair of wall portions, and both ends of the pair of wall portions. At least one of the pair of wall portions, the plurality of reflecting members rotatably supported, and a light source for irradiating light toward at least one reflecting member of the plurality of reflecting members. A plurality of shaft supporting grooves are formed on the end face of the projecting end, and the reflecting member is supported by the main body and by protruding from the main body and being fitted into the shaft supporting groove. And at least one rotating shaft part that is fitted into the shaft supporting groove, the rotating shaft part is fitted from the open ends of the plurality of shaft supporting grooves, and the open end of the shaft supporting groove is attached to the lid member. A gaming machine C1 which is pivotally supported by being blocked.

  Here, there is a gaming machine having a movable body whose both ends are pivotally supported and whose posture can be changed in order to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED light source (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-272332). reference). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of LED light sources are arranged, a plurality of movable bodies are also required, and the work of inserting the movable body into the hole to pivotally support the movable body, and thereafter Therefore, it is necessary to perform the work of attaching the parts for fixing the movable body so as not to be pulled out from the hole, by the number of the movable bodies, which causes a problem that the number of assembling steps is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a plurality of shaft supporting grooves are formed in the wall portion of the base member, the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member is fitted into the shaft supporting groove, and the open end of the shaft supporting groove is the lid member. The plurality of reflecting members can be rotatably supported by being blocked by the. By rotating these reflecting members, the direction of the light emitted from the light source toward the reflecting member can be changed.

  Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the work of inserting the reflection member into the hole for axial support and the work of subsequently attaching parts (screws, stoppers, etc.) for fixing the reflection member so that it cannot be pulled out from the hole. It is possible to prevent the number of assembling steps from being increased in proportion to the number.

  In the case where the shaft support groove is formed only in one of the pair of wall portions, for example, a hole is bored in the other side opposite to the one side, and the shaft portion of the reflecting member is obliquely inserted into the hole. After that, when the reflecting member is tilted, the shaft portion formed on the other side of the one side is fitted into the shaft support groove, or the shaft pin is projected on the other side of the one side, and An example is a case in which the shaft is formed on the other side of the one side of the pin after the reflection member is fitted onto the pin and then the reflection member is tilted.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2, wherein the lid member is fastened to a side surface of the wall portion.

  Here, when it is desired that the wall portion of the base member is formed thin, for example, when the lid member is fastened and fixed to the overhanging end face of the wall portion, the diameter of the head portion of the fastening screw is smaller than that of the wall portion. It becomes the lower limit, and the degree of freedom in design decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the lid member is fastened to the side surface of the wall portion, and therefore the diameter of the head of the fastening screw is not limited, and the wall portion is formed thinly. can do.

  In this case, for example, when the wall portion and the display area of the liquid crystal display device are adjacent to each other, the presence of the wall portion can be made inconspicuous, and when the display area of the liquid crystal display device and the reflection member are combined and rendered. The effect of can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, the lid member includes a plurality of shaft support holes that pivotally support the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, since the rotary shaft portion of the reflecting member is inserted into the shaft supporting hole formed in the lid member, the area supporting the rotary shaft portion can be reduced to the wall portion. Can be sufficiently ensured by the area corresponding to the thickness that axially supports the rotating shaft portion and the area corresponding to the formation length of the shaft supporting hole.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, at least one wall portion of the pair of wall portions includes an extension portion extended from between adjacent shaft support grooves, and the lid member is the extension member. A fitting portion that is fitted to the installation portion, and in a state in which the lid member is attached to the base member, the fitting portion is at least adjacent to the axial support groove in the extending portion, A gaming machine C4, which is abutted from the axial direction of the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the fitting portion of the lid member and the extended portion of the wall portion are brought into contact with each other in the direction in which the shaft support groove is adjacent. It is possible to easily align the wall portion with the lid member in the direction in which the shaft support groove is adjacent.

  Further, since the fitting portion of the lid member and the extending portion of the wall portion are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, the wall portion and the lid member are aligned with each other in the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion, and the wall The rigidity of the portion can be reinforced by the lid member.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a closed state in which a region formed by the shaft center of each of the pair of wall portions and the pair of adjacent reflecting members is closed by the main body portion of the pair of reflecting members. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the closed state, the pair of reflecting members are in contact with each other in the rotational direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a region formed by the pair of wall portions and the respective axial centers of the pair of adjacent reflecting members is a pair of reflecting members. Since it can be closed by the main body part, the light emitted from the light source can be blocked by the plurality of reflecting members.

  Further, in the closed state, the surfaces of the pair of reflecting members in the rotation direction are brought into contact with each other, so that the gap formed between the main bodies of the adjacent reflecting members can be closed, and the gap between the reflecting members can be reduced. It is possible to suppress light leakage.

  Here, the suppression of light leakage can also be achieved by, for example, slidingly moving a plate-shaped shutter member and disposing the shutter member between the light emitted to the player and the player. In this case, if the shutter member is fully opened, the player can visually recognize the entire emitted light. However, when the shutter member is slidingly moved from the state where the shutter member is arranged between the light emitted to the player and the player, the light overlapping the shutter member cannot be visually recognized. That is, the period until the player visually recognizes the entire light becomes long.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member allows the light emitted to the player to pass through by rotating the reflecting member from the closed state while suppressing the leakage of light in the closed state. Here, the plurality of reflecting members can have the same role as the single shutter member described above as an example. That is, each reflecting member can be formed smaller than the shutter member. Therefore, as compared with the case where the shutter member is slid, the case where the reflecting member is rotated can shorten the time until the player visually recognizes the entire light.

  Further, since the end portions of the reflecting surface portions of the adjacent reflecting members are formed so as to be able to come into contact with each other, the posture deviation of the reflecting member can be corrected by another reflecting member. Therefore, even if there is a reflecting member having a poor rotation angle accuracy among the plurality of reflecting members, the posture of the rotating reflecting member is corrected by being brought into contact with another reflecting member. Therefore, the quality of the performance of the reflecting member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine C5, the reflecting member has chamfered abutting portions of the surfaces facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the abutting portions of the surfaces of the reflecting member that face each other are chamfered, so that the reflecting member can be tilted further toward the adjacent reflecting member. Therefore, the surface formed by the plurality of reflecting members in the closed state can be made more flat. In this case, for example, when a pattern is formed by combining the side surfaces of the plurality of reflecting members in the rotation direction, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the pattern at the boundary of the reflecting members.

  Examples of the chamfering method include a method of cutting on a curved surface (with R) and a method of cutting on a flat surface.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a driving device that generates a driving force that rotationally operates the plurality of reflecting members, and a transmission member that is slid by the driving device, the transmission member is the rotation. The plurality of reflecting members are formed so as to be slidable in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft portion, and the plurality of reflecting members respectively include a transmitted portion abutted on the transmitting member on at least one of the pair of rotating shaft portions. A gaming machine C7, characterized in that the transmitted member and the reflecting member are rotatably formed by slidingly moving the transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the transmission member moved by the drive device is formed to be slid in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the rotary shaft portion. The transmitted parts formed on the rotary shafts of the plurality of reflecting members are brought into contact with the transmitting member. Here, by slidingly moving the transmitting member, the transmitted portion is rotated and the reflecting member is rotated in conjunction therewith, so that a plurality of reflecting members can be rotated by sliding movement of one transmitting member. .

  The transmission member may be a belt or a rack gear. When the transmission member is a belt, a cylindrical portion is illustrated as the transmitted portion, and when the transmission member is a rack gear, a rotary gear-shaped portion is illustrated as the transmitted portion.

  In the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes a rack gear portion in which teeth are engraved on a side surface facing the transmitted portion, and the transmitted portion has teeth that can be meshed with the rack gear portion. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, the transmission member includes the rack gear portion, and the tooth formed to be meshable with the rack gear portion of the transmission member is formed in the transmitted portion. As a result, when the transmission member is slid, the transmitted parts of the plurality of reflecting members that are meshed with the rack gear portion are rotated, and therefore slippage between the transmitting member and the reflecting member is prevented. You can Therefore, the plurality of reflecting members can be rotated synchronously.

  In the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is formed with a width larger than the interval between adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. A gaming machine C9, characterized in that expansion teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, at least one of the teeth formed on the rack gear portion or the transmitted portion of the transmission member is more than the distance between the adjacent teeth of the transmitted portion or the rack gear portion facing each other. Since the expansion teeth having a large width are formed, the transmission resistance of the driving force from the rack gear portion to the transmitted portion can be temporarily increased when the expansion teeth are meshed with each other.

  Thereby, the sliding movement of the transmission member can be mechanically stopped. Therefore, even when the sensor at the moving end of the transmission member has an abnormality, it is possible to prevent over-rotation of the reflection member rotated by the transmission member.

<An example of a technical idea of moving a counterpart member by its own driving device>
An inner side surface that is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, is configured to be capable of reciprocating sliding movement between the outside and the inside of the display region of the liquid crystal display device, and is formed in the moving direction inside the display region. A pair of moving members formed in a positional relationship capable of abutting each other, and a drive device for driving the pair of moving members, and a movable range of one moving member of the pair of moving members. Is interfering with the movable range of the other moving member, which is the moving member on the opposite side of the one moving member, and is brought into contact with the other moving member by moving the one moving member, and further A gaming machine D1 characterized in that by moving one moving member in the same direction, the other moving member is pushed forward to be movable.

  Here, a game machine that makes the liquid crystal display device invisible by moving a pair of accessories from the outside of the display region of the liquid crystal display device toward the inside of the display region of the liquid crystal display device and contacting each other. Is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2005-040413). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the operation of the pair of winning objects is monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, one moving member comes into contact with the other moving member, and the other moving member is formed by moving the other moving member. It is possible to form an unexpected movement that is difficult to form with only the drive device that drives the moving member.

  For example, if the moving member is driven by a single driving device, a delay due to deceleration time occurs when reversing the driving direction, which causes monotonousness of the moving member. Therefore, when the driving direction of the driving device of one moving member is changed, the other moving member is brought into contact with one moving member, and the other moving member is further moved in the same direction. Accordingly, the driving force of the other moving member can be used as an auxiliary force for moving the one moving member, and the period required for changing the direction of the one moving member can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to form an unexpected movement, which is difficult to form only by the driving device that drives the other moving member.

  Further, since the pair of moving members can be moved without synchronizing the driving device that drives the pair of moving members, the power consumption of the driving device can be suppressed and the control load of the driving device can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially vertical direction, the gaming machine D2.

  Here, when one moving member moves downward from the retracted position, the one moving member receives a downward force due to the action of gravity. Therefore, the driving force required when one of the moving members changes direction is increased by the amount of gravity, and it is difficult to shorten the deceleration time of the moving member when changing the direction of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the moving member is formed so as to be slidable in the substantially vertical direction, so that one movement that abuts in the process of moving downward from the retracted position. When changing the direction of one member, the other moving member that moves upward from the retracted position is brought into contact with the one moving member, and the other moving member is moved in the same direction, so that the direction of one moving member is changed. The period required for can be shortened. Note that the substantially vertical direction is not limited to the vertical direction and means a direction that allows some horizontal component.

  In the gaming machine D1, a moving direction of the pair of moving members is a substantially horizontal direction, the gaming machine D3.

  When one moving member is brought into contact with the other moving member in the process of moving and the other moving member is moved by further moving one moving member in the same direction, the drive device of one moving member is Since the moving member is moved together, the load on the drive device increases.

  Here, when the pair of moving members are arranged vertically, the load on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged below is less than the load on the driving device that drives the moving member arranged above. It becomes large in comparison and causes a difference in the life of the driving device. Therefore, the replacement cycle of one drive device becomes shorter than that of the other drive device, and it becomes more difficult to schedule maintenance as compared with the case where a pair of drive devices are replaced at the same time.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the pair of moving members are formed so as to be slidable in the substantially horizontal direction. be able to.

  That is, when the moving member is formed to be movable in a substantially horizontal direction, the moving member does not receive a force due to gravity in the moving direction, and therefore the load on the drive device does not depend on the moving direction. Therefore, the replacement time can be adjusted for each drive device.

  The sliding direction of the moving member does not have to coincide with the horizontal direction, and a tilt from the horizontal direction that allows the moving member to be stationary due to the frictional force with the driving device is allowed.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D3 is provided with a base member on which the moving member is arranged, and a shaft rod for slidably guiding the moving member is fixed to the base member. Gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the rigidity of the base member can be improved by the shaft rod fixed to the base member. Further, the shaft rod has a role of guiding the moving member so as to be slidable.

  Thus, the shaft rod can be used both as a member for guiding the moving member so as to be slidable and as a member for improving the rigidity of the base member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the bogie portion is arranged in such a manner as to sandwich the shaft rod and has a pair of wheel portions formed at least at both ends thereof so as to be rollable with respect to the shaft rod. A gaming machine D5, which is fixed to at least one end of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the carriage portion is fixed to at least one end of the moving member, and the carriage portion has the wheel portion that can roll on the shaft rod, so that the frictional resistance generated when the moving member slides is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the pair of wheel portions are arranged so as to sandwich the shaft rod and they are arranged at least at both ends of the truck portion, the postures of the shaft rod and the truck portion can be kept constant.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively arranged in the pair of moving members come into contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, the wheel portions respectively arranged on the pair of moving members come into contact with each other. With this, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be increased when the pair of moving members come into contact with each other, so that the impact when the pair of moving members comes into contact can be mitigated.

  The pair of abutting wheel portions may have different diameters. In this case, by sandwiching the small-diameter wheel portion between the large-diameter wheel portion and the shaft rod, the resistance applied to the wheel portion can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine D6, the moving member includes a transmitting portion to which the driving force of the driving device is transmitted and is formed to be long in a direction perpendicular to the axial center direction of the shaft rod. A game machine D7, characterized in that the transmission part and the dolly part are provided at the end of the.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, a transmission portion to which the driving force of the drive device is transmitted is formed at one end of the carriage portion. Since the trolley portion is guided by the shaft rod and slidably moved, the engagement relationship between the transmission portion and the drive device can be optimized.

  That is, since the moving member is formed in a long length, it is likely to be bent, and the bending occurs with one end portion, on which the carriage portion guided by the shaft rod is provided, as a fulcrum. When the transmission part is formed at the other end which is the opposite end of the one end where the trolley part is provided, the position of the transmission part tends to change due to the bending of the moving member, and it also moves. The engagement between the transmission portion of the member and the drive device is likely to shift. If the engagement relationship between the transmission part of the moving member and the drive device is deviated, the resistance generated between the transmission part and the drive device when the moving member slides becomes large, which is a problem.

  On the other hand, if the transmission portion is formed at one end portion where the carriage portion is provided, the transmission position of the driving force and the support position of the moving member are both formed at the one end portion, and the moving member is Even if it bends, it does not change the position of the transmitting portion of the moving member. Therefore, the engagement relationship between the transmission unit of the moving member and the drive device can be maintained, and the resistance generated between the transmission unit and the drive device when the moving member slides can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form of the transmission part, for example, a rack gear part formed at one end when the rotary gear is formed from the drive device side is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutting of the pair of moving members occurs on the transmission unit side, the gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, it is not necessary to consider the deviation due to the bending of the moving member in the calculation of the abutting position of the pair of moving members. It can be calculated accurately.

  In the gaming machine D7, the abutment of the pair of moving members occurs at an end portion on the opposite side to the transmitting portion side, the gaming machine D9.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the contact of the pair of moving members occurs at the end portion on the opposite side to the transmitting portion, so that the transmitting portion when the pair of moving members contact each other. The impact on the side can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive device caused by the pair of moving members contacting each other.

  In the gaming machines D7 to D9, the moving member is extended parallel to the sliding direction, and the shaft bar is provided at the other end of the moving member opposite to the one end. A guide wall portion that is in contact with the guide wall portion in a direction perpendicular to the axial center direction, and the moving member is rotatably supported by the other end portion and is in contact with the guide wall portion. A gaming machine D10 comprising a rotating body, wherein the pair of rotating bodies are juxtaposed in the sliding direction of the moving member and are rotated as the moving member is slid.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D7 to D9, the guide wall portion is extended in parallel with the sliding direction of the moving member and is pivotally supported by the other end portion of the moving member. The pair of rotating bodies are brought into contact with the guide wall portion.

  Here, when the moving member suddenly stops, for example, when the moving member largely bends and vibrates with one end as a fulcrum, among the pair of rotating bodies pivotally supported by the other end of the moving member, the moving member The rotating body on the side opposite to the bending direction of is pressed against the guide wall portion. Therefore, since resistance is applied in the direction opposite to the direction of flexural vibration of the moving member, it is possible to easily suppress the flexural vibration of the moving member as compared with the case where the other end of the moving member is formed as a free end. .

  Further, since the rotating body and the guide wall portion are brought into smooth contact with each other at the time of starting the moving member, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance generated between the guide wall portion and the moving member at the time of starting the moving member.

  As an example of the contact between the guide wall portion and the rotating body, a rack gear is formed on the guide wall portion and a gear meshed with the rack gear of the guide wall portion is engraved on the side surface of the rotating body. To be done.

  In the gaming machine D10, the rotating body includes gear-shaped tooth portions engraved on a side surface thereof, and the guide wall portion includes a rack gear portion meshed with the tooth portions. .

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D10, a tooth portion is formed on the side surface of the rotating body, and a rack gear portion meshing with the tooth portion is formed on the guide wall portion. Therefore, the contact area between the guide wall portion and the rotating body can be increased, and bending vibration of the moving member can be further suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11 is provided with a detection device capable of detecting the position and speed of the pair of moving members, and the moving speed of the pair of moving members is determined by the detection result of the detection device. D12.

  Here, for example, when the moving member is moved by the electric motor, the speed of the moving member may become unstable due to the instability of the voltage of the electric motor. This may cause the pair of moving members to collide at an unexpected speed.

  On the other hand, according to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D11, a detection device that can detect the position and speed of the pair of moving members is provided, and the detection result of the detection device is used. Since the moving speeds of the pair of moving members are determined, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members from colliding with each other at an unexpected relative speed and being damaged.

  For example, the speed of the other moving member is adjusted according to the detection result of the detection device capable of detecting the position and the speed of the one moving member while the pair of moving members are close to each other, and the pair of moving members are almost A constant speed state can be formed. As a result, the impact at the time of a collision between the pair of moving members can be softened.

<Characteristic E group> (Distracts attention from V-accuracy attacker during V-accuracy operation)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery means for performing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means has a predetermined lottery result In the gaming machine having a variable winning means capable of changing from a closed state where it is difficult to enter a game ball to an open state where the game ball is easy to enter, the variable winning means is a predetermined condition. Based on the establishment of, the opening and closing means for opening and closing a specific area in which the game ball entered the variable winning means can enter, and a ball detection means for detecting that the game ball enters the specific area, And a predetermined state when at least the opening / closing means and the privilege state giving means for giving a bonus state that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means are operated. Directing to produce Gaming machine E1, characterized in that those having a means.

  The gaming machine E1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. On the basis of the display of the identification information indicating the predetermined lottery result on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from the closed state in which it is difficult to enter to the open state in which it is easy to enter. In the variable winning means, the opening / closing means opens and closes a specific area in which the game ball entered in the variable winning means can enter, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area is detected by the ball detecting unit, the privilege state giving unit gives a privilege state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when at least the opening / closing means is operated, the effect execution means performs a predetermined effect. Thereby, the operation of the opening / closing means can be made inconspicuous by a predetermined effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the effect performing means causes the display means to display a specific display mode, and the gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, a specific display mode is displayed on the display means by the effect executing means, so that there is an effect that the player can be distracted from the opening / closing means.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the effect execution means notifies a notification mode indicating that a hand is held over the front side of the variable winning means as the effect, the gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the effect mode is informed by the effect executing means that an effect indicating that the hand is placed on the front side of the variable winning means is effected. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to distinguish the motion.

  The gaming machine E4 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, wherein the effect execution means is at least executed over a period from a predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated to an operating period.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, at least the performance executing means is executed over the period from the predetermined period before the opening / closing means is operated, so This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the operation of the opening / closing means.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable winning means enters an opening into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which the opening is in the closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter and the open state. The opening and closing means has a restricting member that is changed to a possible state, and the opening and closing means has a short opening time shorter than a time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, and the opening to the opening. A gaming machine E5, which executes one of a long open time longer than a time required for a game ball to flow down to a specific area based on a predetermined condition.

  The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the variable winning means is provided with an opening through which the game ball can enter and a restricting member that changes the opening between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an open state in which the game ball can enter. And either a short open time shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area, or a long open time longer than the time required for the game ball to flow down from the opening to the specific area. The opening / closing means is executed based on one of the predetermined conditions. This makes it possible to control with a simple configuration whether or not to enter the game ball into the opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the game can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine E5, special game executing means for executing a special game for changing the variable winning means to the open state, based on being selected by the lottery means as the specific lottery result, and the lottery means. When the lottery is determined to be a specific lottery result, the game has a type determining means for determining the type of the special game, and the opening / closing means is based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that one of the short opening time and the long opening time is determined.

  The gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5. That is, when the special game execution means executes the special game of changing the variable winning means to the open state based on the lottery means that the result is a specific lottery, the type determination means determines the special game The type is determined. Then, in the opening / closing means, either one of the short open time and the long open time is determined based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means. Thereby, the privilege to be given to the player can be easily changed depending on the type of privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Feature F group> (V attack route is formed by one attacker)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery means for performing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information indicating that the display means is a specific lottery result When is displayed, the variable winning means that can change the game ball from the closed state where it is difficult to enter to the open state where it is easy to enter, and the probability that the lottery means will draw the predetermined lottery result In a gaming machine having a probability setting means for setting either one of the normal probability and a special probability which is higher than the normal probability, the variable winning means is a game ball that enters when the game ball is in the open state. A possible opening, a first specific area through which a game ball entering the opening can pass and a second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area and the second specific Either in the area or above Distribution means for distributing the game balls entering the mouth, and the probability setting means sets the special probability on the condition that the game balls have passed the first specific area. A gaming machine F1 characterized by.

  The gaming machine F1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. When the identification information indicating that the result is a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the variable winning means changes the game ball from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter to an open state in which it is easy to enter. Then, the probability setting means sets either one of the normal probability at the normal time and the special probability, which is a higher probability than the normal probability, as the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery result by the lottery means. In the variable winning means, the game balls are distributed by the allocating means to one of the first specific area through which the game balls that enter the opening and enter the opening can pass, and the second specific area different from the first specific area. Are distributed. The probability setting means sets the special probability on condition that the game ball has passed through the first specific area. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a special probability is set by the variable winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  On the gaming machine F1, a special game for facilitating the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result. A special game executing means for executing, and a type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means when the specific lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, and Based on the type of the special game determined by the type determining means, one of a first state where it is easy to distribute the game balls to the first specific area and a second state where it is easy to distribute the game balls to the second specific area. A gaming machine F2, comprising: a distribution setting means set within the period of the one special game.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result, the special game execution means executes the special game for facilitating the variable winning means to be changed to the open state until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It When the lottery means draws a specific lottery result, the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means is determined by the type determining means. In addition, one of a first state where it is easy to distribute the game balls to the first specific area and a second state where it is easy to allocate the game balls to the second specific area are based on the type of special game determined by the type determining means. It is set by the distribution setting means within the period of one special game. Thus, the distribution means can be controlled according to the type of special game determined by the type determination means, so that the control can be easily configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be controlled more simply.

  In the gaming machine F1, the distribution setting means sets a first time shorter than a time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening as the second state from the open state, A game machine F3, characterized in that a second time, which is a time required for a game ball to reach from the opening to the first specific area, is set from the open state as the first state.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, in the distribution setting means, the first time shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to reach the first specific region from the opening is in the second state. Is set from the open state as, and the second time, which is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the first specific area from the opening, is set from the open state as the first state. This makes it possible to easily control whether or not the special probability is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the game can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the variable winning means is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, and the sorting means is The gaming machine F4, which is operated for a certain period of time to a state in which the game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among the plurality of open states.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the variable winning means, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed, it is changed to the open state a plurality of times. Then, the distribution means is operated for a certain period of time in a state in which the game balls are distributed to the second specific area in a predetermined open state among a plurality of open states. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to allocate the game balls to the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the fact that the game balls pass through the first specific region or the second specific region. A gaming machine F5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a predetermined number of gaming balls are given to the player based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through the first specific area or the second specific area. Since it is paid out by the payout means, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the game.

<Feature G group> (long press effect)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, a performance executing means for performing an effect based on a lottery result by the lottery means, an operating means operable by a player, and an operation thereof. Based on the operation of the means, a signal output means for outputting an operation signal, a determination means for determining whether the operation signal output by the signal output means is received, and the operation signal by the determination means. Based on the release timing when it is determined that the operation signal is not received after it is determined to have been received, there is a production effect varying means for varying the production performed by the production performing means. Gaming machine G1.

  The gaming machine G1 has the following effects. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the effect is executed by the effect executing means based on the lottery result of the executed lottery means. Further, based on the operation of the player by the operation means, the operation signal output by the signal output means is determined to have received the operation signal by the determination means, and then determined not to have received the operation signal. The effect executed by the effect executing means is changed by the effect changing means based on the release timing. Thereby, the effect can be variously changed by the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the effect varying means determines whether the release timing is within a predetermined allowable period, and when it is within the allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. A gaming machine G2, which is capable of changing to an effect that is advantageous to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, when the effect changing means determines that the release timing is within the predetermined allowable period, it is more than when it is outside the allowable period. Since the effect can be changed to be advantageous to the player, there is an effect that the player can be interested by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 has a notifying means for notifying the timing of the allowable period when it is determined by the determining means that the operation signal is received. .

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the timing of the allowable period is notified by the notification means when the determination means determines that the operation signal is received. There is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  In the gaming machine G3, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the notification means notifies in a special notification mode that the allowable period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Characteristic gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, in the notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the permissible period is easier to identify than other lottery results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the lottery result in the notification mode and play the game.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect varying unit receives the operation signal after it is determined that the operation signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determining unit receives the operation signal. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the effect is changed when the game is lost.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, in the effect varying means, the operation signal is continuously received for a predetermined period or more after the determining means receives the operation signal. When it is determined that the operation signal is not received after that, the effect is changed, so that the operation of the operation means can be more enjoyed.

<Characteristic H group> (SW production)
Based on the display means for displaying the effect of the game, the operating means operable by the player, the operation determining means for determining that the operating means has been operated, and the determination result by the operation determining means, the effect Advantageous to the player based on the effect changing means for changing the effect, the effect setting means for setting the effect contents changed by the effect changing means at the timing of operating the operation means, and the operation of the operation means. Period setting means for setting at least a first period in which the effect contents are set and a second period in which the effect contents that are more disadvantageous to the player than the first period are set, the first period and the first period. At least the first notification mode for discriminating two periods and the second notification mode for discriminating the first period and the second period are different from the first notification mode. Term Gaming machine H1, characterized in that the informing means for informing, and has a.

  The gaming machine H1 has the following effects. That is, the effect of the game displayed by the display means is changed by the effect varying means based on the result of the operation of the player determined by the operation determining means. Next, the effect setting means sets the effect contents that are changed by the effect changing means, based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means. Then, based on the operation of the operating means, the first period in which the effect contents that are advantageous to the player are set, and the second period in which the effect contents that are more disadvantageous to the player than the first period are set. And are set by at least the period setting means. A first notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner, and a second notification mode in which the first period and the second period are notified in a distinguishable manner in a notification mode different from the first notification mode. And are notified by the notification means at least during the same period. As a result, the player can easily play the game by the notification of the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of the first periods within a valid period in which the operation of the operating means is valid, and the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the period setting means sets a plurality of first periods within the valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, so that the operation is performed in the first period. The effect is that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first notification mode displays the variable period of the period according to a predetermined rule by changing the symbol, and notifies the set current period. H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2, in the first notification mode, the transition of the period is variably displayed according to a predetermined rule, and the set current period is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily play the game.

  The gaming machine H4 according to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, characterized in that the second notification mode is to notify by changing a symbol about a transition of a period based on a randomly set rule.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, in the second notification mode, the pattern of the transition of the period is notified based on the randomly set rule, so that the game is notified. There is an effect that a wide variety of performances can be provided to the person.

<Feature group I> (Overflow control)
Based on the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entrance into which the game ball can enter and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means A lottery means for performing a lottery upon establishment of a lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to, a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquiring means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the entrance. The first easy to enter the game ball State and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state, and the ball changing means is set in the first state so as to be more easily changed than in the normal state at the normal time. In a gaming machine having a state setting means for setting a special state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the dynamic display mode determination means is based on the number of the information stored in the storage means. The dynamic display mode is determined so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed, and when the special state is set, at least the information stored in the storage unit is equal to or less than a predetermined number. In the case, the game machine I1 has a delay means for delaying the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period.

  The gaming machine I1 has the following effects. That is, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance. Based on the information, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed when the lottery condition is satisfied. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. The privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means is executed by the privilege game executing means. Next, until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage unit stores a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition unit. Further, the first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state are changed by the ball changing means. Then, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the special state that is more easily changed to the first state than the normal state in the normal state is set by the state setting means. Further, in the dynamic display mode determining means, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means so that the dynamic display period of the identification information is easily changed, and the special state is changed. When set, if at least the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the delay means delays the establishment of the lottery condition for a predetermined period. As a result, the delay is delayed by the delay unit, so that the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where much information is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, there is an effect that a stable game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines a dynamic display mode having a long dynamic display period from the set number when the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that it is easier to determine than when a large amount is stored.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, in the dynamic display mode determination means, when the number of information stored in the storage means is less than or equal to the set number, more than the set number is stored. Since it is easier to determine a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display period than in the case of the above, there is an effect that the period during which dynamic display is not performed can be set shorter.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than a period in which the ball entering variable means is varied from the second state to the first state. .

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the delay means delays a period longer than the period in which the ball entrance varying means is changed from the second state to the first state. There is an effect that the dynamic display period can be determined in a state where much information is stored.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, when the entry variable means is varied to the first state, a period during which a predetermined number or less of game balls in which the information is stored in the storage means can enter A gaming machine I4 characterized in that it is maintained in the first state below.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the entry variable means allows the player to store information in the storage means at a predetermined number or less when the information is stored in the storage means. Since the ball is maintained in the first state within a period in which the ball can enter, there is an effect that a game can be played more efficiently.

<Feature J group> (Hidden fluctuation fluctuation)
A lottery means for executing a lottery, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display means for the display means. A dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode to be dynamically displayed, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means In the gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for performing, the identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols, and is dynamically determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The display mode includes, as a dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. In when said identification symbols is temporarily stopped, the gaming machine is characterized in that with a stationary symbol display means for displaying overlapping the stationary pattern to the front side of the identification symbols J1.

  The gaming machine J1 has the following effects. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. The dynamically displayed dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Then, when the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The identification information indicates a lottery result by the lottery means by a combination of a plurality of identification symbols. Further, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, as a dynamic display of the lottery result of 1, there is a pseudo continuous dynamic display mode in which the identification symbol is temporarily stopped and then dynamically displayed again. It is included, and when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous dynamic display mode, the static symbol is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the identification symbol by the static symbol display means. As a result, the temporarily stopped identification symbol can be made to appear as if it has been fixedly stopped by the stationary symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine J1, a game machine J2 characterized in that, when temporarily stopped, the identification pattern is dynamically displayed by slightly changing the display position.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the display position is slightly changed periodically and dynamically displayed, so that it is temporarily stopped. Has the effect that it can be easily informed.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the stationary symbol is displayed based on the identification symbol being temporarily stopped, and is hidden before the dynamic identification of the identification symbol is started again. A gaming machine J3 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the static symbol is displayed based on the temporary stop of the identification symbol, and is hidden before the dynamic display of the identification symbol is started. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the identification pattern.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the identification symbols are displayed in a stopped order in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, since the identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the player can provide an easy-to-understand game.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determination means determines one of the dynamic display modes based on a lottery result by the lottery means, and the pseudo continuous display mode is A gaming machine J5, wherein the lottery result is set to be easily determined when the result of the lottery is the specific lottery result.

  The gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In the pseudo continuous display mode, the lottery result is set to be easily determined when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, so that the pseudo continuous display mode allows the player to expect a specific lottery result. effective.

<Characteristics K group> (If the attack rate is the same for the Poden chucker and attacker and the attackers are narrowed down, the Poden prize will be higher)
A ball entrance through which a game can enter, and a ball entrance changing means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the game ball into the entrance, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a lottery means therefor. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination that the result is a specific lottery result, an opening through which the game ball can enter And an opening changing means for changing the opening thereof into an open state in which a game ball can enter and a difficult closed state, and the privilege game executing means sets the changing means to the open state. The period is variable, and the opening and the entrance are When the opening is in the closed state and the ball entrance is in the first state, the game balls entering the opening are arranged at positions where it easily enters the ball entrance. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery means performs the lottery based on the information of the obtaining means obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance. Based on the fact that the lottery means determines that the result is a specific lottery result, the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The first state in which the game ball easily enters the ball entrance and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state are changed by the ball changing means. The opening is changed by the opening changing means for changing the open state in which the game ball can enter and the difficult closed state. In the privilege game executing means, the changing means is changed to the open state for a predetermined period. Furthermore, the opening and the ball entrance, when the opening is in the closed state and the ball entrance is in the first state, the game ball entering the opening becomes easy to enter the ball entrance. It is arranged in each position. Thereby, the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the opening varying means is composed of a wall member capable of opening and closing the opening, and in the closed state, the game ball is received on the upper surface of the wall member and is played toward the ball entrance side. A gaming machine K2, which is configured to guide a sphere.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the opening varying means is composed of a wall member that can open and close the opening, and in the closed state, receives the game ball on the upper surface of the wall member and enters the ball. Since the game ball is guided to the mouth side, it is possible to configure the game ball so that the game ball can easily enter, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K2, a guiding means for guiding the gaming ball from the wall member to the ball entrance is provided.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K2, there is an effect that the gaming ball can be more efficiently entered into the entrance.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a launching means for launching the game ball into a game area,
And a launching force adjusting unit capable of adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching unit based on the operation of the player, and the game ball launched from the launching unit in the game area. At least a first area capable of flowing down and a second area different from the first area are formed, and the opening is a position where a game ball flowing down from the second area can enter. The game ball, which has flown down any one of the first region and the second region, is arranged at a position in which the game ball can enter in common. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K1 to K3, the state of entering the ball can be changed by the firing force adjusting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K4, a special entrance for allowing a game ball that has flowed down the second area to enter, and a special benefit that gives the player an advantage when the game ball enters the special entrance A first setting state in which the means and the game ball flowing down through the second area are easily guided to the opening and difficult to be guided to the special entrance, and the game ball is difficult to be guided to the opening to the special entrance. A gaming machine K5, comprising: a setting means capable of being set to either the second setting state which is easily guided.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K4, there is an effect that the state of the game can be changed and a fresh game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine K5, the setting means can be set from outside the gaming machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, the setting can be changed by the setting means, and the taste of the game can be adjusted.

  In any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the game ball flowing down the second area is easily guided to the opening, and is difficult to be guided to the entrance side, and the game ball is difficult to be guided to the opening. , A gaming machine K7 having an adjusting means capable of being adjusted to a second adjustment state in which the ball is easily guided to the entrance side. According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K4 to K5, the gambling property of the game can be adjusted by adjusting the adjusting means.

<Feature L group> (V attacker loops twice)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means capable of changing from a first state where the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state where it is easy to enter, and the first ball entering Based on the first determination means for making a determination based on the entry of the game ball into the means, and the determination result of the first determination means being the first determination result, the second entry means is the second The special state setting means for setting a special state that can be easily changed to the state, the second determination means for making a determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result of the second determining means are In the case of the second determination result, the third ball entering means that allows the ball to enter, the specific area through which the game ball that entered the third ball entering means can pass, and the game ball passes through the specific area. Based on what has been done, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and the special state setting means Whether or not the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the right storage means capable of storing at least two rights for which the second determination means makes a determination and the determination result of the second determination means. A gaming machine L1 having a determining means for determining whether or not.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 grid are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player.

  Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, some games are given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880), and the interest of the game is improved.

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine is only novel in that it hits twice once if it suddenly changes, and the other gaming features are the same as those of conventional gaming machines, and further interest in gaming is required. It was

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the predetermined first judgment result is selected by the first judgment means, thereby providing a special state in which the judgment by the second judgment means is easy, and the second judgment means is further provided. After the predetermined second judgment result is selected by the player, the judgment is performed by the second judgment means while having an interesting game property that the big hit is given only when the game ball is passed through the specific area. By storing the right to perform, even if the special state is once changed to the normal state, the stored second determination unit can execute the determination. Therefore, when the gaming state is far from the jackpot (shifted from the special state to the normal state), at least another chance of jackpot is given, so that the player can enjoy expecting the jackpot until the end, This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second ball entering means is arranged on the upstream side of the third ball entering means, and at least part of a period during which the game ball can enter the third ball entering means. The gaming machine L2, which is variable to the first state.

  In the gaming machine L1 described above, in the special state, in order to surely make the determination by the second determining means, the second ball entering means is controlled to the second state where it is easy to enter the ball. The problem that the second ball entering means in the state obstructs the ball entering the third ball entering means has emerged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the second ball entering means is brought into the closed state (retracted state) during the period in which the third ball entering means can enter the ball. Thus, there is an effect that the ball can be smoothly entered without obstructing the entrance into the third ball entering means.

  In the gaming machine L2, a display capable of dynamically displaying third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entering means to the second state, and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means. Means and a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is set to the special state. Based on this, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than usual is set so as to be easily determined until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine L2 described above can smoothly enter the game balls into the third ball entering means, but in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, in addition to that, the second special during the special state. At the same time, it was necessary to achieve a structure for securing a reserved memory of symbols.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine L3 has a control for setting the dynamic display period for changing the second ball entering means to the second state in the special state shorter than the normal state.

  By this control, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, a predetermined condition (for example, opening of the third ball entering means, elapse of a predetermined time, entering a predetermined number of balls into the second ball entering means, reaching the upper limit of reserved memory, etc.) It is possible to prioritize the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means until the above is established, and to give priority to the entry of the game ball into the third ball entering means after the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played smoothly.

  In the gaming machine L2, a display capable of dynamically displaying third determination means for determining whether or not to change the second ball entering means to the second state, and identification information indicating the determination result of the third determination means. Means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means has elapsed, and Variable control means for changing the second ball entering means to the second state when the identification information indicating the determination result of changing to the second state is displayed. A gaming machine L4, which is configured to change the second ball entering means to the second state for a longer period than usual until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the setting of the special state.

  In addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine L4 has a control for changing the second ball entering means to the second state for a long period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The same effect as the machine L3 can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the third ball entering means can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3 or L4, it becomes possible to surely satisfy the predetermined condition before the third ball entering means can enter the ball. It is possible to smoothly enter the means.

  In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means for displaying the second identification information. Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed, wherein the second dynamic display period determining means is at least a first time after the special state is set. Regarding the dynamic display of, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that a period longer than the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is set.

  With the gaming machine L5 described above, a smooth game can be performed with respect to the ball entering the third ball entering means. However, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, it is possible to store at least two rights for executing the determination by the second determining means in the game in the special state, but the determination of each determining means in the special state is possible. Depending on the timing, there arises a new problem that it is not possible to store at least two rights for executing the determination by the second determining means. That is, if the jackpot based on the determination result of the second determining means is provided before the second entering means is brought into the second state as the determination result of the third determining means in the special state, the special game is There is a problem that the 2 ball entering means ends before the second state and the right to newly perform the determination by the second determining means cannot be stored.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, at least the first dynamic display (first time) after the special game (time saving game) is started. Because the period of 2 special symbols variable display) is set to be longer than the dynamic display (normal symbol variable display) time, the dynamic display ends by the end of the first second dynamic display, The 2 ball entering means can be changed to the second state. Therefore, it is possible to solve the new problems described above and secure the characteristic game playability of the gaming machine of the present technical idea.

  The gaming machine L7 in the gaming machines L1 to L6, wherein the third ball entering means allows the game ball to pass through the specific area when a predetermined number or more of game balls enter.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is awakened by the third ball entering means ending immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7, the third ball entering means allows the game ball to pass through the specific area when the predetermined number or more of the game balls have entered in the state where the ball can be entered. A gaming machine L8 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 to the gaming machine L6, the player can play a game aiming at the third ball entering means until a predetermined number or more of game balls are entered. That is, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is awakened by the third ball entering means ending immediately and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L7 or L8, the third ball entering means restricts the restricting means by restricting the passing of the game ball into the specific area and the predetermined number of game balls entering. A gaming machine L9, comprising: a varying unit that varies the game ball to a released state in which the gaming ball can pass to a specific area.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L7 or L8, the gaming ball that has entered the third ball entering means does not pass through the specific area until the number of the game balls reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to prevent the situation where the game is over and the player is awakened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, a variable member that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the specific area, Based on the variable control means for varying the variable member and the determination result of the first determination means being the specific determination result, it becomes possible to enter the third ball entering means, and the first determining means allows When it is determined to be the specific determination result, the variable control means controls the variable member to change to the restricted state for a period in which the variable member can enter the third ball entering means, When the second determination means determines the second determination result, the variable control means changes the variable member to the open state for a period in which the game ball can enter a specific area. Is Gaming machine L10 characterized and.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, it is possible to enter the third ball entering means even when the specific determination result is obtained by the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the player enters the third ball entering means with any of the judgment results of the first judging means and the second judging means, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, the determining means determines whether or not the special state is set by the special state setting means based on the second determination result. Characteristic gaming machine L11.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L10, when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, it is determined whether or not to set the special state. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation for the previous game by knowing that there is a possibility of being in a special state because the third ball entering means can enter the ball. The interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the second determination means determines either the second determination result or the determination result in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means for all the determinations. A gaming machine L12 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine L12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L11, the state itself in which the determination by the second determining means is performed is advantageous to the player, and thus is entertaining. A game machine can be provided.

  The gaming machine L13 according to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, wherein the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine L13, in addition to the effect exhibited by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L12, the privilege game is executed even with the first determination result, so that a gaming machine rich in interest can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the privilege game executing means allows the game ball to enter the fourth ball entering means different from the third ball entering means as the privilege game. Characteristic gaming machine L14.

  According to the gaming machine L14, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L13, the game is directed toward the four ball entrance means. Since a game of shooting a ball is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a lot of interest.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L14, the second ball entry means has a ball entry portion into which the game ball can enter, and a guide position that can guide the game ball into the ball entry portion. A game machine L15, comprising: a guide member that can be changed to a non-guide position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering portion.

  In order to make the best use of the playability of the gaming machine according to the present technical concept, there is a problem in that the second ball entry means must be configured to be difficult to enter in the first state and easy to enter in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine L15, in addition to the effect exhibited by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L14, a guide member is provided in the second ball entering means, and the guide member can be changed between a guide position and a non-guide position. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to enter the ball in the first state and easy to enter the ball in the second state, and there is an effect that it is possible to make good use of the playability of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine L15, the guiding member has a first area capable of receiving a falling game ball and a second area capable of rolling a game ball rolling from the first area to the ball-in portion. A gaming machine L16 having, and a gaming ball that is rolled into the second area is configured to be able to enter the entering portion.

  According to the gaming machine L16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L15, the guiding member is configured by the first region and the second region, and the guiding member can enter from the second region to the ball entering portion. Even if the game ball falling from the game board in the non-guided position is provided with a ball entrance portion at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, the guide member is not allowed to enter the ball entry part in the guide position. There is an effect that it can be facilitated and the playability of the gaming machine can be utilized.

  In the gaming machine L16, in the special state, the guide member is in the second state for a period longer than the rolling period required for the game ball received in the first region to enter the ball entering portion. And the special state is not set, the gaming machine L17 is changed to the second state in a period shorter than the rolling period.

  According to the gaming machine L17, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L16, the period during which the guide member is changed from the non-guide position to the guide position is set by the game ball on the guide member when the special state is set. Since it is possible to set the period during which it is easy to enter the ball and the period during which the game ball on the guide member is difficult to enter the ball in the special member if it is not set, There is an effect that it is possible to utilize the game play.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L17, second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means, and the second identification by the second dynamic display means. Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which information is dynamically displayed, and a privilege from when the determination result of the second determining means becomes the second determination result until the privilege game is executed A privilege pre-game execution means for executing a pre-game, and the second dynamic display period determination means determines the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. And the length of the pre-privilege game period are determined to be equal to the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the second determination result. To do. A gaming machine L18 characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, when the determination result of the second determining means is the second determination result, the jackpot game is not provided immediately, but thereafter the jackpot game is provided only after passing through the specific area. . In such a gaming machine, when dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determining means, there is a problem that the player wants to expect as much as possible before the jackpot game is provided. Surfaced. That is, if all the determination results of the second determination means are displayed at the same timing, the determination result of the second determination means will be displayed before the bonus pre-game based on the second determination result is executed. There is a problem that the player recognizes it and the interest in the game play during the execution of the pre-privilege game becomes poor.

  According to the gaming machine L18, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L17, the length of the dynamic display period when the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result, and the privilege before The total length of the game period, that is, the period from the start of the dynamic display based on the second determination result until the jackpot game is provided, and the determination result of the second determination means is the second determination result. The length of the dynamic display period when the predetermined determination result is other than, that is, the period from the start to the end of the dynamic display based on the determination result of the second determination means (other than the second determination result). By making them equal, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the determination result of the second determination means until the timing when the pre-privilege game ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The predetermined determination result includes the second privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game advantageous to the player on the basis that the determination result of the first determination means is the first determination result. A gaming machine L19, wherein the determination result of the second determining means is a determination result of executing the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine L19, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L18, the jackpot display based on the determination made by the second determining means can be performed at the same timing, and the player can enjoy the dynamic display to the end. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  It is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the game by making the jackpot based on the second determination result and the jackpot based on the predetermined determination result different from each other.

  In the gaming machine L19, an effect display means for executing an effect display corresponding to the dynamic display of the second dynamic display means, and a display body for displaying an effect executed by the effect execution means, The effect execution means displays a second judgment result effect corresponding to the second judgment result and a pre-privilege game effect corresponding to the privilege pre-game on the display body, and the second privilege game is executed. The game machine L20, wherein at least a part of the second determination result effect is used when the effect corresponding to the determined result is displayed on the display body.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, a display display (for example, a liquid crystal device) is used to perform an effect display based on identification information indicating the results of various determinations so that the player can grasp. Then, the player is delighted while grasping the contents of the effect display displayed on the display body. Even in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, there is a demand for effect display suitable for playability.

  According to the gaming machine L20, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L19, part of the effect display based on the determination result that the privilege game is executed is based on the determination result that the second privilege game is executed. By using the effect display, the player cannot grasp which privilege game will be executed by only a part of the effect content displayed on the display body, and the effect content displayed to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make all of the players interested and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L20, the second determination result effect is fixedly displayed with the corresponding second determination result dynamic display effect while the second identification information is dynamically displayed. When the effect corresponding to the determination result of the second privilege game is executed by the effect executing means, a part of the second judgment result dynamic display confirmation effect is included. At least the above-mentioned second determination result dynamic display effect is used, and the gaming machine L21.

  According to the gaming machine L21, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L20, when the effect corresponding to the determination result of the second privilege game is executed, the second determination result dynamic display effect is partially provided. By using it, a common effect is performed for a while after the effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is started, and the player can use only the start portion of the effect content displayed on the display body. It is not possible to grasp whether or not the bonus game will be executed, and it is possible to make the player interested in all of the effect contents displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. is there. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

  In the gaming machine L20, the pre-privilege game effect is a pre-special privilege game effect corresponding while the pre-special game is being performed, and a special prize game finalizing effect corresponding to a game ball passing through the specific area. When performing the effect corresponding to the determination result that the second privilege game is executed by the effect execution means, at least the privilege pre-play game effect is used as a part of the effect. Gaming machine L22.

  According to the gaming machine L22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L21, when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result of the second bonus game, the pre-special bonus game effect is used as a part of the effect. As a result, a common effect is performed in the final stage immediately before the determination result of the second determination means is displayed, and the player can obtain which privilege game only in the final stage portion of the effect content displayed on the display body. There is an effect that it is not possible to grasp whether or not it will be executed, it is possible to make the player interested in all of the effect contents displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using a common effect.

  In the gaming machines L20 to L22, the effect execution means notifies the first notification effect that the determination result by the second determination means is the second determination result, and the determination result by the second determination means is the above-mentioned. A second notification effect for notifying that the determination result of the second privilege game is to be executed is executed, and the first notification effect or the second notification effect is performed after the effect execution means executes the effect. A gaming machine L23, characterized in that the timings of executing and are the same.

  According to the gaming machine L23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L20 to L22, the timings at which the effects for notifying the determination result of the second determination means are displayed are the same, so the player grasps the determination result at different timings. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent it from happening and to improve the interest of the game.

  By providing two or all of the configurations from the gaming machines L21 to L23, more effective effects can be achieved.

<Characteristics M group> (exercises latent performance during Let's Mambo)
Based on the satisfaction of the first condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information, an information storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination is performed based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. And a pre-judgment means for judging the information stored in the information storage means before the second condition is satisfied, Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, a specific effect determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect in the dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means, and Special With respect to the information that is determined by the effect determining means to execute the specific effect, a determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and information that is determined by the determination unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied With respect to the information stored later and stored before the information that has triggered the execution of the specific effect, a specific effect control unit that restricts the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine M1 characterized by being present.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 grid are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, some games are given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880), and the interest of the game is improved. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only causes the player to be interested in the big hit, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is deteriorated with respect to the variable display which is out of the way. There was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment of the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, the specific effect determination means determines whether or not to execute a specific effect by dynamic display for the information already stored in the information storage means. The determining unit determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied for the information determined by the specific effect determining unit to execute the specific effect. The information stored after the information determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied and stored before the information that triggers the execution of the specific effect is specified. Execution of production is regulated by the specific production regulation means.

  As a result, among the information for which the specific effect is determined, the execution of the specific effect is restricted for the information stored after the information for which the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the specific effect continues. It is possible to re-execute a specific effect after making it seem that the effect to be executed has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Means for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the information is the information for which a specific dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Characteristic gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. When the dynamic display mode determining means determines that the information determines a specific dynamic display mode, the determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, by displaying the specific dynamic display mode, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that the specific effect has ended.

  In the gaming machine M2, the specific effect determination unit determines execution of the specific effect based on the determination by the pre-determination unit that the information determines the specific dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M2, the execution of the specific rendering is determined to be the specific rendering based on the fact that it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the specific dynamic display mode is determined. Since it is decided by the deciding means, the player is made to recognize early that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by any one of the continuous suspension changes when the specific effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved. The effect is that you can do it.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, when the specific effect determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect is started for the information already stored. A gaming machine M4 having a start information determining means for determining information by a predetermined lottery.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, in the case where it is determined by the specific effect determination means that a specific effect is to be executed, the information already stored Since the information for starting the execution of the specific effect is determined by the start information determining means by a predetermined lottery, the number of times the specific effect is continuously executed can be randomized to provide the player with various effects. There is an effect.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulation unit is stored after the information determined by the determining unit that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and execution of the specific effect is determined. Of the information stored before the information that triggered the trigger, the information stored consecutively a predetermined number of times from the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. On the other hand, the gaming machine M5, which regulates the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the specific effect regulating means is stored after the information determined by the determining means to satisfy the predetermined condition. , Among the information stored prior to the information that triggered the execution of a specific effect, the information stored next to the information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition continues for a predetermined number of times. Since the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means with respect to the information stored as a result, the specific effect is restricted the number of times consecutively, and the player can be expected to execute the specific effect again. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine M5, the specific effect restricting means determines the predetermined number of times by lottery, the gaming machine M6.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M5, the predetermined number of times is determined by the specific restriction means by lottery, so that the number of times the specific performance is restricted can be made random, and the interest of the player is improved. The effect is that you can do it.

  Any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6 is characterized by having suggestive effect executing means for executing a predetermined suggestive effect with respect to the dynamic display of the information for which the specific effect is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Gaming machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, a predetermined suggestive suggestion suggests a dynamic indication for the information for which a particular production is restricted by the specific effect restricting means. Since it is executed by the execution means, there is an effect that the player can have an expectation that the specific effect is continuing due to the suggestive effect.

<Characteristic N group> (The number of latencies after the Let's Mambo is determined by the number of holdings at the start of the Let's Mombo)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, an acquisition unit that acquires information, an information storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination is performed based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means based on the establishment of the second condition, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means. A privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when is displayed,
Before the second condition is satisfied, the information is stored in the information storage unit based on the preliminary determination unit that determines the information stored in the information storage unit and the determination result determined by the preliminary determination unit. When the dynamic display of the identification information is performed with respect to the information that is being performed, an effect determining unit that determines execution of a continuous effect that executes a specific effect, and the effect determining unit executes the continuous effect Suggestion to the dynamic display of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information at a predetermined trigger until the end of the dynamic display of the determined information A gaming machine N1 having: a suggested effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. A total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the × 3 grid are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In this case, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player. Many such gaming machines have a probability variation function (probability change) that increases the probability that a predetermined game value such as a jackpot will be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, some games are given a predetermined game value such as a jackpot at least twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-140880), and the interest of the game is improved. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine only causes the player to be interested in the big hit, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is deteriorated with respect to the variable display which is out of the way. There was a demand for further improvement in the entertainment of the game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the information storage means. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The privilege granting unit grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the display unit displays the identification information indicating the specific determination result. Before the second condition is satisfied, the information stored in the information storage means is determined by the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, for the information already stored in the information storage means, execution of a continuous performance for executing a specific performance each time the dynamic display of the identification information is executed Is determined by the effect determination means. The movement of the information stored in the information storage means stored after the determined information is triggered at a predetermined timing until the end of the dynamic display of the information determined to be performed by the effect determining means. The suggestive effect determination means determines whether or not to perform the suggestive effect on the dynamic display. As a result, since the suggestive effect is executed even after the continuous effect is completed, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous effect is continuing. Therefore, the continuous production can be made to appear as if the number of continuous productions is larger than the actual number of continuous productions, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, as a dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined based on the information stored in the information storage means. The production determination means, the production determination means, the pre-determination means, when the specific dynamic display mode is determined to be the information determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the continuous A gaming machine N2, characterized in that it is decided to execute an effect.

  The gaming machine N2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1. That is, as the dynamic display mode dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the information stored in the information storage means. If the pre-determination means determines that the specific dynamic display mode is the information determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the continuous production is executed by the production determination means. Since the dynamic display mode is performed, it is possible to quickly recognize that the specific dynamic display mode is executed by the start of the continuous effect.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestive effect is an effect that is executed even during a predetermined period before the effect starts in the continuous effect.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the suggestive effect is executed during a predetermined period before the effect of the continuous effect is started. Therefore, the suggestive effect is executed to start the continuous effect. There is an effect that the player can expect.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestive effect is determined to be executed when the suggestive effect is executed, the game machine is provided with a number-of-times determining unit that determines a continuous number by lottery. N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, when the suggestive effect determining means determines that the suggestive effect is executed, the number of consecutive times is determined by the number of times determining means by lottery. Therefore, the number of times the suggestive effect is performed can be randomized, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic P group> (a single production mode is started by a button operation, and the production mode is changed by an invalid operation)
Production means capable of executing the production, production execution means capable of causing the production means to execute a specific production in a predetermined first production pattern, operation means operable by a player, A signal output unit that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation unit, a signal determination unit that determines the signal output by the signal output unit, and the predetermined signal that is determined by the signal determination unit And a possible state determining means for determining whether or not it is possible for the effect producing means to start execution of the specific effect by the effect performing means. Based on the fact that it is determined that, the effect control means for starting the execution of the specific effect by the effect execution means, and in the possible state by the possible state determination means. The first effect of the specific effect based on the specific condition determining unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on the information based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, and that the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the specific condition determining unit. A gaming machine P1 characterized by having a production varying means for varying a pattern to a different second production pattern.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like), the accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the character effect drive effect), a new accessory effect effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect effect of the accessory driving effect that is not executed and is executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced. Further, there is a problem that the operation of the ornamental body (for example, operation time) cannot be adjusted to the preference of the player, and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the effect production means can execute the specific effect in the predetermined first effect pattern on the effect means capable of executing the effect, and can be operated by the player. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means, and the signal output by the predetermined signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal has been discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the variable state determining means determines whether or not it is in a state in which it is possible for the effecting means to start the execution of the specific effect. Based on the fact that the variable state determining means determines that the variable state is possible, the effect control means starts the execution of the specific effect by the effect executing means. On the other hand, based on the fact that the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the information based on the determination that the possible state determining means is not the possible state, the effect varying means determines the first effect pattern of the specific effect. It is changed to a different second effect pattern.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the effect pattern of the specific effect from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern based on the determination that the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means cannot be executed. Therefore, since the effect pattern of the specific effect to be executed next can be changed based on the operation of the operation means that was not able to execute the specific effect, the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be changed. There is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine P1, the second effect pattern is set in an effect period shorter than the first effect pattern, the gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second effect pattern is set in an effect period shorter than that of the first effect pattern, the effect period of the specific effect can be shortened by executing the second effect pattern. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in a single period, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. is there. Further, even when the operating means is continuously operated for a short period of time, the chances of starting execution of the specific effect increase, and the player can operate the operating means to start the specific effect. It is possible to give more, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect pattern includes at least two or more effect parts of the effect parts. A gaming machine P3 characterized by causing a performance to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect pattern causes at least two or more effect parts of the effect parts to effect effects, Various effects can be executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect production means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means applies the effect to any effect part of the effect parts. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being capable of executing a specific effect.

  The gaming machine P4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, the production means has a plurality of production parts capable of executing the production, and the production execution means executes the specific production on any production part among the plurality of production parts.

  As a result, various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P4, the possible state determination means determines the possible state when there is at least one of the effect parts capable of starting the effect with the effect pattern by the effect execution means. A gaming machine P5 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when there is at least one effect part capable of starting the effect with the effect pattern by the effect execution means, the possible state determination means determines that the possible state.

  Thereby, when at least one of the effect units is in the enabled state, the specific effect can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means in a single period, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the specific condition is that the number of times that the possible state determination means determines that the state is not the available state is set to at least one of the established conditions. Gaming machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times that the possible state determination means determines that the specific state is not established is set as at least one of the established conditions.

  With this, the specific condition is satisfied based on the number of times that the possible state is determined by the possible state determining unit, that is, the number of times that the specific effect is not executed by the effect executing unit despite operating the operation unit. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means, and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P6, the specific condition is set to at least one of the satisfaction conditions by the number of times that the possible state determining means determines that the state is not the possible state within a predetermined period. A gaming machine P7 characterized by being a thing.

  The gaming machine P7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P6. That is, the number of times that the possible state determining means determines that the possible state is not the possible state within the predetermined period is set as at least one of the satisfying conditions for the specific condition.

  As a result, the specific performance is executed by the performance executing means despite the operation means is operated within the predetermined number of times determined by the possible state determining means as not being in the possible state, that is, within the predetermined period. It is possible to satisfy the specific condition based on the number of times that it was not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operation means, and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, an effect pattern selection for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of different second effect patterns based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means. A gaming machine P8 having means.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effect is achieved. That is, one effect pattern is selected from the plurality of different second effect patterns by the effect pattern selecting means based on the specific condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, when the effect pattern of the specific effect is variable, a plurality of effect patterns can be executed, and thus various effects can be executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P8, the effect pattern selection means is for selecting a second effect pattern corresponding to information based on the determination that the state is not the possible state.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P8, the second effect pattern corresponding to the information based on the determination that the game machine P8 is not in the enabled state is selected. There is an effect that it can be executed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, and that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P8 or P9, the plurality of different second effect patterns are set so that at least the effect periods are set differently.

  According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P8 or P9, a plurality of different second effect patterns are set with at least different effect periods, so that a specific effect is executed depending on the effect pattern to be executed. You can have different durations. This makes it possible to change the number of times the specific effect can be executed in a single period, and thus the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P10, the rendering means has at least a movable member that is movable, and the rendering execution means assigns the movable member to each of the first rendering pattern and the second rendering pattern. A gaming machine P11, which is movable in a corresponding movable pattern.

  The gaming machine P11 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P10. That is, the production means has at least a movable movable member, and the production execution means moves the movable member in a movable pattern corresponding to each of the first production pattern and the second production pattern.

  Accordingly, the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern can be executed on the movable member that is movable based on the operation on the operation means, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the effect means has a plurality of effect parts capable of executing effects, and the effect execution means applies the specific effect to each of the effect parts. A gaming machine P12, which is capable of being executed, and in which the plurality of effect sections are set with different effect periods as the specific effect.

  The gaming machine P12 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2. That is, the production means has a plurality of production parts capable of executing the production, and the production execution means executes the specific production for each of the plurality of production parts. Then, different effect periods are set for the plurality of effect parts, respectively.

  As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect for a plurality of effect parts having different effect periods based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine P12, the gaming machine P12 has elapsed period determination means for determining the elapsed operation period set for each of the plurality of effect parts, and the possible state determination means determines the elapsed time period of the plurality of effect parts. A gaming machine P13, characterized in that the means for determining that the effect section after the operation period has passed is the enabled state.

  According to the gaming machine P13, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P12. That is, the elapsed period determination means determines whether or not the effect period set in each of the plurality of effect parts has elapsed, and the effect part determined to have passed the operation period is determined to be in the enabled state by the enable state determination means. With this, among the plurality of effect units in which different effect periods are set, the operation of the effect unit whose operation period has elapsed can be started at the timing when the operation unit is operated, and even if the operation unit is operated, the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which the effect is not executed on the machine side.

<Characteristic Q group> (Variable execution timing by invalid button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, at least one of the plural producing means capable of executing the effect, in the predetermined first producing pattern. And a performance executing means capable of causing the two or more performance means to perform a specific performance, the performance executing means preliminarily performing the specific performance by the two or more performance means. During a predetermined waiting period, at least one of the two rendering means is put on standby for execution of the rendering, and during the waiting period, the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. Gaming machine Q1, characterized in that on the basis of the reception of the signals is intended to initiate the execution of the effect for at least 1 of the presentation unit in standby.

  In a game machine such as a game machine or a pachinko machine, a player operates a plurality of decorative bodies from a standby position to a predetermined operation position by operating an operation unit (production button or the like), thereby executing an accessory driving effect. There are some (for example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the character effect drive effect), a new accessory effect effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect effect of the accessory driving effect that is not executed and is executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced. Further, it is conceivable that, when one of the plurality of ornaments is operated while the operation unit is operated, the other ornament is operated. Even in this case, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) when all the decorations are operated because the operation of the operation means is performed plural times in a short period of time, etc. There is a problem in that a new accessory driving effect cannot be executed and the interest of the player cannot be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, a predetermined signal is output from the signal output means on the basis of the operation means operable by the player being operated. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the specific effect is given to at least two or more of the plural effect means capable of executing the effect in the predetermined first effect pattern. It is executed by the performance executing means.

  When the specific effect is executed by two or more effect means, the execution of the effect is waited for at least one effect means of the two or more effect means in a predetermined waiting period. Based on the reception of the predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means during the waiting period, execution of the effect is started by the effect executing means for at least one effect means on standby.

  Thereby, even when the execution of the specific effect is started for a plurality of effect means by the operation of the operation means, at least one effect means waits for the execution of the specific effect, and the operation means operates during the standby period. Since the standby is ended and the specific effect is executed by the operation, even if the player operates the operation means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid period in which the execution of the specific effect is not started, and the operation is performed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the standby period is longer than the shortest period in which the signal output unit can output the predetermined signal for each operation when the operation unit is operated continuously. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being set in.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, during the waiting period, when the operating means is operated continuously, the signal output means can output a predetermined signal for each operation. Since the period is set to be longer than the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the invalid period from occurring even when the operating means is continuously operated.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an interval determination means for determining an interval at which the signal determination means determines the predetermined signal, a storage means capable of storing the information determined by the interval determination means, and a storage means for storing the information. A gaming machine Q3, comprising: period setting means for variably setting the waiting period based on the obtained information.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the interval for determining the predetermined signal by the signal determining means is determined by the interval determining means. The information determined by the interval determining means is stored in the storage means. The standby period is variably set by the period setting unit based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  As a result, the interval at which the player operates the operating means varies depending on the player, but the operated interval is determined by the interval determining means and the information is stored, so that the player's habit of operating the operating means is , Frequency, etc. can be stored. Furthermore, since the standby period is variably set by the setting unit based on the information stored in the storage unit, the standby period can be varied according to the situation in which the player operates the operating unit to suit the player. It can be in the state of a gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved. Incidentally. Even if the information is not stored in the storage means, the setting means variably sets the standby period directly on the basis of the information determined by the interval determination means so that the standby period suitable for each operation is set. Even if it is configured, there is an effect that it can be set so as to perform more optimal performance.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the valid period setting means for setting the valid period for making the discrimination valid and the valid period setting means for validating the valid period. A gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the predetermined signal has an invalidity judging means for judging the information judged by the signal judging means before the period is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the valid period for which the discrimination is valid is set by the valid period setting means. Before the valid period is set by the valid period setting means, the information determined by the signal determining means for the predetermined signal is determined by the invalidity determining means.

  As a result, when the operating means is operated, the invalidity determining means makes the determination even when the operating means is operated before the validity period for determining that the operation is valid is set. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to determine that there is a habit of starting the operation of the operation means from the front.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the gaming machine Q5 has a regulating means for regulating the standby by the effect executing means based on the information determined by the invalidation determining means being specific information.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q4, the waiting by the effect executing means is regulated by the regulating means based on the information determined by the invalidation determining means being specific information. If the information determined by the means is specific information (for example, the invalidity is not determined in a period before a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the start of the effective period), the regulation unit regulates the standby, so that the operation is performed. It decides in advance that there is a high possibility that the player will not operate the means continuously, and the specific effect is started by operating the operation means at the same timing without setting the effect means that waits for the specific effect. Thus, there is an effect that a more united effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the effect means has at least a plurality of movable members that can move within a predetermined range, and the effect execution means has at least two or more movable members of the plurality of movable members. A gaming machine Q6, which can be moved based on the first effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of movable members capable of moving at least within a predetermined range are provided as effecting means. At least two or more movable members of the plurality of movable members are moved by the effect executing means based on the first effect pattern.

  Thereby, it is possible to move a plurality of movable members by one operation, and there is an effect that a powerful effect can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic R group> (rewind control of a series of presentation modes by button operation)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means And a production means capable of executing the production, and based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means, causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined first production pattern. In a gaming machine having a possible effect executing means, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the first signal is determined based on the predetermined signal being determined by the signal determining means. A gaming machine R1 characterized in that it has an effect changing means for causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect in a second effect pattern different from the first effect pattern.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operating means (effect button or the like), an accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the character effect drive effect), a new accessory effect effect is produced. There is a problem that the effect effect of the accessory driving effect that is not executed and is executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. On the basis of the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the effect executing means executes the specific effect by the effecting means capable of executing the effect in the predetermined first effect pattern.

  Then, when the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means, at least the first effect pattern is reversed in the opposite direction from the predetermined effect position of the first effect pattern based on the fact that the signal determining means determines the predetermined signal. It is changed by the effect changing unit so that the specific effect is executed by the effect executing unit in the second effect pattern that partially executes.

  As a result, when the specific effect is executed by the operation of the operation means in the first effect pattern, the specific effect is changed to the second effect pattern and is executed even if the operation means is further operated. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an invalid state in which there is no reaction to the operation of, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the second effect pattern is configured with an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1, the second effect pattern is constituted by an effect pattern that executes at least a part of the first effect pattern in the opposite direction, so the effect of the first effect pattern It can be executed by setting the data in the opposite direction, and there is an effect that different effects can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect varying means changes the first effect pattern in the opposite direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern that is being executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determining means. A gaming machine R3, at least a part of which is executed as the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, in the opposite direction from the effect position of the first effect pattern which is executed at the timing when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means by the effect varying means. Since at least a part of the first effect pattern is executed as the second effect pattern, it is possible to smoothly connect to the second effect pattern at the timing when the operation means is operated, and to suppress a feeling of strangeness given to the player. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect varying unit, when the specific signal is determined by the signal determining unit when the specific effect is being executed in the second effect pattern, A gaming machine R4, characterized in that the specific effect is executed in the first effect pattern from an effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to an effect position executed in the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the effect varying means, when the predetermined effect is determined by the signal determining means when the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern. Is to execute the specific effect with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position executed with the second effect pattern, so that the first effect is performed according to the operation of the player. The second effect pattern corresponding to the rewinding of the effect pattern ends, and the first effect pattern in the forward direction is completed, and the execution direction of the first effect pattern can be switched by the operation of the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved. There is an effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the second effect pattern is set in a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in a reverse direction in an effect period of a predetermined specific period, and the effect variable The means specifies the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position where the second effect pattern ends, based on that the second effect pattern is executed for the specific period. A gaming machine R5, which is for performing an effect.

  The gaming machine R5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4. That is, the second effect pattern is set as a pattern in which the first effect pattern is executed in the opposite direction in the effect period of the predetermined specific period, and the effect varying means sets the second effect pattern to the specific period. Since the specific effect is executed with the first effect pattern from the effect position of the first effect pattern corresponding to the effect position at which the second effect pattern is finished based on the execution, the first effect pattern is more effective. There is an effect that it is possible to smoothly switch to the second effect pattern and provide an effect in which a feeling of strangeness is suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the effect execution means has an execution period determination means for determining an elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed, and the effect varying means is a determination result of the execution period determination means. A gaming machine R6, characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the second effect pattern.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the elapsed period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means is determined by the execution period determining means. Since the effect varying means executes the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determining means, it is possible to automatically switch from the first effect pattern to the second effect pattern. There is an effect that a player can be provided with a fresh production.

  In the gaming machine R6, the effect means is a movable means capable of moving in a predetermined range, and the effect execution means, as the specific effect, a predetermined first effect position and a second effect position different from the first effect position. The movable means is caused to execute a reciprocating effect with respect to the effect position, and the effect varying means causes the specific effect to be directed from the first effect position to the second effect position by the execution period determining means. The gaming machine R7, which is configured to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern when it is determined that the effect is being executed.

  The gaming machine R7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R6. That is, the effect executing means causes the movable means to execute the effect of reciprocating between the predetermined first effect position and the second effect position different from the first effect position as the specific effect. The effect varying unit determines that the specific effect is the second effect pattern when the execution period determining unit determines that the specific effect is a period in which the effect is being performed from the first effect position to the second effect position. Since it is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determination means determines that the elapsed period in which the specific effect is being executed has not passed a predetermined period, a variable regulation for restricting the execution of the effect varying means. A gaming machine R8 having means.

  According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine R6 or R7, when the execution period determination means determines that the elapsed period during which the specific effect is executed does not exceed the predetermined period, the effect is changed. Since the execution of the means is restricted by the variable restricting means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the effect pattern is frequently switched and the interest of the effect is impaired.

  In any one of the gaming machines R5 to R8, the effect execution means executes the specific effect for a plurality of effect means, and the effect varying means determines the execution period of the effect means. A gaming machine R9, characterized in that at least one of the effect means is caused to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on a determination result by the means.

  The gaming machine R9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines R5 to R8. That is, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means with respect to the plurality of effecting means. The effect varying means causes at least one effect means to execute the specific effect in the second effect pattern based on the determination result by the execution period determining means of the plurality of effect means.

  Thereby, a plurality of effect means can be changed to the second effect pattern based on the determination result of the execution period determination means and can be executed, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R9, the effect executing means executes the specific effect to a plurality of the effecting means, and the effect changing means includes the second effect out of the plurality of effecting means. A gaming machine R10, characterized in that the specific effect is executed by the second effect pattern for the effect means having a short effect period executed as a pattern.

  The gaming machine R10 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines R1 to R9. That is, the effect executing means executes the specific effect to the plurality of effecting means, and the effect changing means to the effecting means having a short effect period executed as the second effect pattern among the plurality of effecting means. Since the specific effect is executed in the second effect pattern, there is an effect that an invalid state when the operation means is operated can be suppressed.

<Characteristic S group> (Match a plurality of movable positions with movable non-execution timing according to the effect)
The production means capable of executing the production, the specific production execution means for causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined period, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means operated. A signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the above, a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, a plurality of movable members movable in a predetermined movable range, Movable means for moving at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means when the specific effect is being executed; The movable mode of the movable member that is moved when the effect elapsed period of the specific effect that is being executed when the predetermined signal is determined by the determination unit is within the specific elapsed period is variable. And a prohibition unit for prohibiting the movable unit from moving based on the signal determination unit discriminating the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded. A gaming machine S1 characterized by.

  In a gaming machine such as a gaming machine or a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operating means (effect button or the like), an accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, if the decorative body is operated based on the operation of the operation means regardless of the elapsed production period, there is a problem in that the game becomes unclear and the player's interest cannot be improved. In addition, if all the plurality of ornaments are in the operating state, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button, etc.), the operation of the new ornament cannot be executed. There is a problem that the effect of the effect of operating the decorative body executed based on the operation of the means (effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in a predetermined period in the effect means capable of executing the effect. A predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means.

  When the specific effect is being executed, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit. When the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the movable mode changing means changes the movable mode of the movable member which is moved when the effect elapsed period of the specific effect executed is within the specific elapsed time. On the other hand, the prohibition means prohibits the movement of the movable means based on the fact that the signal determination means determines the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded.

  As a result, when the production elapsed period of the specific effect is within the specific elapsed period, the movable mode of the movable member is changed based on the operation of the operating device, while when the specific elapsed period is exceeded, the operation of the operating device is performed. Since the movable member is prohibited from moving, it is possible to effectively perform the effect of moving the movable member only within a specific elapsed period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sharp effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine S1, the movable mode changing means sets the plurality of movable members to respective predetermined positions when the predetermined signal is judged by the signal judging means within the specific elapsed period. A gaming machine S2, which is movable by a movable means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1, the movable mode varying means predetermines a plurality of movable members when a predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means within a specific elapsed period. Since it is to be moved to the respective predetermined positions by the movable means, it is possible to cause the movable member to perform a certain operation by operating the operation means within the specific performance period within the specific performance period. This has the effect of giving a novel impression to the player.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means has at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminating means even after a predetermined period of time within the specific elapsed period. A game machine S3, characterized in that the game machine S3 is movable to a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the movable means is based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminating means even after a predetermined period of time within the specific elapsed period. Since at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position, even a player with a low frequency of operating the operating means can effectively enjoy the specific effect. The effect is that you can do it.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, a determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result determined by the determination means. A gaming machine S4, comprising: a privilege granting means for granting, and the specific effect is a notification effect based on a determination result by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effect is produced. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the determination result determined by the determination unit being a specific determination result, a privilege advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting unit. The notification effect based on the determination result by the determination means is executed in the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to be interested in the notification effect executed in the specific effect and to increase the player's interest in the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine S4, the specific effect is that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine S4, the notification effect is executed because the notification effect is executed within the predetermined period after the specified elapsed period has elapsed. There is an effect that it is possible to notify the player of the approaching execution of the notification effect by executing the effect by the movable member at the timing.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the movable means that has been moved is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means based on the prohibition being executed by the prohibiting means. A gaming machine S6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine S6, the movable means is moved to the initial position before the movement by the movable means based on the prohibition means performing the prohibition in addition to the effect of the gaming machines S1 to S6. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be informed easily that the effect using the movable member is completed.

<Characteristic T group> (Strokes can be changed by changing the output for driving by repeatedly hitting the button to high or low)
Operation means that can be operated by the player, signal output means that outputs a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, and signal determination means that determines the signal output by the signal output means And a movable member that is movable in a predetermined movable range, and a movable unit that moves the movable member based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating unit. In the above, based on the movable signal output means for outputting a movable signal for varying the movable amount for moving the movable member in a unit period by the movable means, and the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means, A gaming machine T1 comprising: a selection means for selecting the type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like), the accessory driving effect for operating the ornament from the standby position to the predetermined operation position is executed. (For example, JP-A-2015-97827).

  In such a conventional game machine, since the operation mode of the ornament is monotonous, there is a problem that the effect effect by the accessory driving effect is deteriorated. Further, even if the player operates the operation means (effect button or the like) while the ornament is operating (that is, during the accessory driving effect), a new accessory driving effect is not executed. However, there is a problem in that the effect effect of the accessory drive effect executed based on the operation on the operation means (effect button or the like) is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, a predetermined signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The signal output by the signal output means is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Based on the fact that the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the movable member is movable by the movable means, the movable member being movable in a predetermined movable range.

  The movable signal output means outputs a movable signal for varying the amount of movement of the movable means for moving the movable member in a unit period. The type of the movable signal output by the movable signal output unit is selected by the selection unit based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination unit.

  With this, the type of the movable signal is selected and the movable amount of the movable member is changed based on the operation of the operation unit, so that the movable mode of the movable member can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine T1 has an interval determination means for determining an interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means, and the selection means has a predetermined interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination means. A gaming machine T2, characterized in that when the distance is equal to or smaller than the interval, a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than when the distance is equal to or larger than a predetermined interval is selected.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the interval at which the predetermined signal is judged by the signal judging means is judged by the interval judging means. When the interval at which the predetermined signal is determined by the interval determination means is less than or equal to the predetermined interval, the selection means selects a movable signal having a smaller movable amount than when the interval is greater than or equal to the predetermined interval.

  Thus, when the frequency of operation of the operating means is high, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the movable member is damaged by reducing the movable amount of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the selection means, even if the interval determined by the predetermined signal by the interval determination means is a predetermined interval or less, the movable signal having a large movable amount. A gaming machine T3 characterized in that it is for selecting.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the movable amount is large even if the interval determined by the interval determination means is a predetermined signal or less. Since a large movable signal is selected by the selection means, even if the operation frequency is high, a movable signal having a larger movable amount is selected when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the movable member becomes monotonous. Has the effect of suppressing

  In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. .

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the movable means is composed of at least a stepping motor, and the movable signal is composed of a signal composed of a predetermined frequency. There is an effect that the movement control of can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine T4, the movable signal is such that the movable amount is increased by a signal having a high frequency, and the movable amount is reduced by a signal having a low frequency.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T4, the moving amount increases due to the high frequency signal, and the moving amount decreases due to the low frequency signal, so that the moving amount can be easily controlled. .

  Any one of the gaming machines T3 to T4 has a plurality of the movable members, the movable means capable of moving each of the plurality of movable members, and the movable signal output means, the signal determination means. When the predetermined signal is determined by, the gaming machine T6, which determines the movable member to be moved based on a preset movable condition and outputs the movable signal.

  According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3 or T4, each of the plurality of movable members is moved by the movable means, and when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, it is set in advance. Since the movable signal is output by the movable signal output means by determining the movable member to be moved based on the determined movable condition, there is an effect that the movable member can be easily controlled.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is composed of at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal composed of a predetermined electric power value.

  According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T1 or T2, the movable means is constituted by at least a solenoid, and the movable signal is a signal constituted by a predetermined electric power value, so that the movable member can be controlled. The effect is that it can be easily executed.

  In the gaming machine T7, the selection means has a first power value and a first power value as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means. A second power value lower than a value is selected, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal determination means, the first power value and the second power value are A gaming machine T8 characterized by being selected alternately.

  According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine T7, the selecting means has the first power as the power value of the movable signal output to the movable means when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means. Value and a second power value lower than the first power value are selected, and the first power value and the second power value are satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined signal is received by the signal determining means. Since and are selected alternately, the movable amount of the movable member can be varied even when the operating means is operated continuously, and the movable member can be moved in various ways.

<Characteristic U group> (The solenoid drive power is changed at the start of drive and after drive to prevent heat generation)
At least a driving member that is drivable to a first position and a second position that is different from the first position, and at least the second position from the first position by supplying power to the driving member that is equal to or higher than a first power value. Driving means for driving to the position and driving the supplied power value from the second position to the first position when the supplied power value becomes equal to or lower than the second power value; and power supply for supplying power to the driving means. Means for driving the drive member from the first position to the second position, the power value supplied to the drive means by the power supply means is set to drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value. In a state in which the drive member is controlled between the first position and the second position, the electric power value supplied by the electric power supply means is less than or equal to the second electric power value and less than the drive start electric power. Supply power to control power value Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, by driving a solenoid, a movable body (an accessory or the like) is operated from a standby position to a predetermined operation position and held at the predetermined operation position (for example, , JP-A-2008-301906).

  In such a conventional game machine, the solenoid is driven with the same electric power when the movable body is operated from the standby position to the predetermined operation position and when it is held at the predetermined operation position. In this case, although the energy (electric power) required to hold the movable body at the predetermined operation position is smaller than that required to move the movable body from the standby position to the predetermined operation position, the movable body is operated from the standby position to the predetermined operation position. The movable body is held with the same energy (electric power) as when it is moved to the position. As a result, when the holding time of the movable body becomes long, energy (electric power) is unnecessarily supplied to the solenoid, which causes problems such as an increase in power consumption and heat generation / damage of the solenoid.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the driving member is driven from the first position to the second position by supplying the driving device with the power of the first power value or more, and the power supplied to the driving device. The drive member is driven from the second position to the first position when the value is less than or equal to the second power value. When the driving of the driving member is started from the first position to the second position by the power supply control means, the power value supplied from the power supply means to the driving means is controlled to the driving start power equal to or higher than the first power value. In the state where the drive member is driven between the first position and the second position, the power value supplied from the power supply means is controlled to a power value that is equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the drive start power.

  As a result, when the drive member is started to be driven from the first position to the second position, the drive start power equal to or higher than the first power value at which the drive member is driven from the first position to the second position is used. Is supplied to. On the other hand, in the state where the drive member is driven between the first position and the second position, a power value that is not less than the second power value and is less than the drive start power at which the drive member is not driven to the first position is transmitted to the drive means. Supplied. Therefore, the driving member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the driving member can be held at the second position with less electric power than the electric power required for driving the driving member, thereby reducing power consumption. effective.

  The gaming machine U1 is provided with a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and an adding means that can give a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. By driving the drive member to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and by driving the drive member to the second position, The game machine U2 is characterized in that it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than when the drive member is driven to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined game value is given by the giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. The ball entering means makes it difficult to enter the ball by driving the driving member to the first position, and facilitates entering the ball by driving the driving member to the second position. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether the drive member is driven to the first position or the second position, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the power supply means has first power supply means for supplying the drive start power to the drive means, and less than the drive start power of the second power value or more to the drive means. A second power supply means for supplying a power value, wherein the power supply control means supplies the first power supply when starting driving the driving member from the first position to the second position. Means to supply electric power to the driving means, and when the driving member is driven between the first position and the second position, the second electric power supplying means supplies electric power to the driving means. A gaming machine U3 characterized by being controlled so as to supply.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the following effects are produced. That is, the power supply means includes a first power supply means for supplying drive start power to the drive means and a second power supply for supplying the drive means with a power value equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the drive start power. And means. When starting driving the drive member from the first position to the second position, power is supplied from the first power supply unit to the drive unit by the supply power control unit, and the drive member is provided between the first position and the second position. Is driven, the power supply control means supplies power from the second power supply means to the drive means. Accordingly, the power supply control means may control the power supply to the drive means so as to select the power supply from either the first power supply means or the second power supply means depending on the case. The effect is that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3, the supply power control means supplies power from the first power supply means to the drive means when the holding period for holding the drive member at the second position is shorter than a predetermined period. After that, the power supplied to the drive means is controlled to a power value equal to or lower than the second power value without controlling the second power supply means to supply power to the drive means. A gaming machine U4 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U3, when the holding period for holding the driving member at the second position is shorter than the predetermined period, the supply power control means causes the driving means to drive the first power supply means. After the electric power is supplied to the driving means, the electric power supplied to the driving means becomes the electric power value equal to or lower than the second electric power value without being supplied from the second electric power supplying means to the driving means. With this, the control of supplying the electric power from the second electric power supply unit to the drive unit can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the supply power control means controls the first power supply means to supply power to the drive means, and then supplies power from the second power supply means to the drive means. In this case, before the second power supply means supplies power to the drive means, the first power supply means does not supply power to the drive power means. Characteristic game machine U5.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3 or U4, after the power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means by the supply power control means, the first power supply means to the drive power means. After the electric power is no longer supplied, the electric power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the simultaneous supply of power to the driving means from the first power supply means and the second power supply means, and to prevent (suppress) the drive means from being destroyed. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the supply power control means outputs a command signal for supplying power from the first power supply means to the drive means, and the first instruction means. A first supply control means for controlling the supply of electric power from the first electric power supply means to the drive means, and a second electric power supply means for supplying electric power to the drive means. Second instruction control means for outputting an instruction signal; second supply control means for controlling the supply of electric power from the second power supply means to the driving means based on the instruction signal from the second instruction means; A game characterized by comprising timing instruction means for instructing control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means based on instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means. U6.

  According to the game machine U6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U3 to U5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the supply power control means controls the supply of electric power from the first power supply means to the drive means based on the instruction signal from the first instruction means, and the instruction from the second instruction means. Second supply control means for controlling the supply of electric power from the second power supply means to the drive means based on the signal, and the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means is timing. Instructed by the instruction means. Thus, even if the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are not synchronized (shifted), the first supply control means and the second supply control means are instructed by the timing instruction means. The control timing can be synchronized, and the electric power can be supplied to the drive means at an appropriate timing.

  In the gaming machine U6, the timing instructing means is for instructing a control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means at every predetermined cycle.

  According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U6, the timing instruction means instructs the control timing of the first supply control means and the second supply control means every predetermined period. Thus, the control timing can be instructed to the first supply control means and the second supply control means at every predetermined cycle, so that the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be executed without delaying more than the predetermined cycle. The effect is that you can do it.

  In the gaming machine U6 or U7, a clear signal output means for outputting a clear signal for instructing to forcibly turn off the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means, and the clear signal output means A gaming machine U8, comprising: a clearing means for forcibly turning off the instruction signals of the first instructing means and the second instructing means based on receiving the clear signal.

  According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the playing of the gaming machine U6 or U7, the following effects are played. That is, the clear signal is outputted from the clear signal output means, and the clear signal is received by the clear means, whereby the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means are forcibly turned off. Thereby, the instruction signals of the first instruction means and the second instruction means can be turned off collectively, and the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be stopped together. is there.

  The gaming machine U9 is provided with a noise removing means capable of removing noise of a signal output from the clear signal means to the clearing means.

  According to the gaming machine U9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine U8, the noise of the signal output from the clear signal means to the clearing means can be removed by the noise removing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the clearing means from malfunctioning due to noise and thereby erroneously stopping the control of the first supply control means and the second supply control means.

  In any of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the first supply control means transfers the first power supply means to the drive means when the voltage of the instruction signal from the first instruction means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage. When the voltage of the instruction signal from the second instructing means is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage, the second supply control means is in a conductive state in which the second electric power is supplied from the second power supplying means. A game machine U10, which is in a conductive state in which electric power is supplied to the drive means.

  According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines U6 to U9, the following effect is produced. That is, when the first supply control means receives the first instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the first supply control means is rendered conductive, and the power is supplied from the first power supply means to the drive means. To be done. Further, when the second supply control means receives the second instruction signal having a voltage equal to or higher than the predetermined voltage, the second supply control means is rendered conductive, and the power is supplied from the second power supply means to the drive means. To be done. With this, the first supply control means and the second supply control means can be controlled by the voltage, so that there is an effect that the electric power required for the control for supplying the electric power to the driving means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U10, the supply power control means operates by being supplied with power in a predetermined range, and control power supply means for supplying power to the supply power control means and its supply. A noise removal means capable of removing noise of power supplied from the means to the supply power control means, and a gaming machine U11.

  According to the game machine U11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U10, the following effect is achieved. That is, noise of the power supplied from the control power supply means is removed by the noise removal means with respect to the supply power control means that operates by being supplied with power in a predetermined range. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the destruction of the power supply control means by supplying the power supply control means with power in a predetermined range or more. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the supply power control unit from malfunctioning due to the supply of power in the predetermined range to the supply power control unit due to noise.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U11, the drive means generates a magnetic force when power is supplied, and a coil capable of driving the drive member, and one end of the coil to the power supply means. And a degauss line connected in parallel to the coil to the power line, the degauss line extending from the other end side of the coil to the one end side. A gaming machine U12, characterized by comprising rectifying means for rectifying an electric current in a heading direction.

  According to the gaming machine U12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the games U1 to U11, the following effect is produced. By supplying electric power to the coil of the driving means, a magnetic force is generated and the driving member is driven. As a power supply line for the driving means, one end of the coil is connected to the power supply means and the other end is grounded, and a degaussing line is connected to the power supply line in parallel with the coil. The current flowing through the degaussing line is rectified by the rectifying means in the direction from the other end side to the one end side of the coil. As a result, when power is supplied from the power supply means, power is supplied to the coil without current flowing through the degaussing line, and magnetic force is generated in the coil. On the other hand, when the power supply to the coil is cut off, the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil can be consumed as electric power through the degaussing line, and the supplied power control means is damaged by the energy of the magnetic force generated in the coil. The effect is that it can be prevented (suppressed).

  In any of the gaming machines U1 to U12, the power supply means includes a second power supply means for supplying a power value equal to or higher than the second power value and lower than the drive start power, and the second power supply means. Third power supply means for supplying a power value that becomes the drive start power in total with the supplied power value, wherein the power supply control means moves the drive member from the first position to the first position. When starting driving to the second position, control is performed so that electric power is supplied to the driving unit from both the second power supply unit and the third supply unit, and the first position and the second position are controlled. A gaming machine U13, characterized in that, while the drive member is being driven, the second power supply means is controlled to supply power to the drive means.

  According to the game machine U13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U12, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second power supply means of the power supply means supplies a power value that is equal to or higher than the second power value and is lower than the drive start power to the drive means, and the third power supply means and the second power supply means of the power supply means are connected. A power value that is the drive start power in total is supplied to the drive means. When the driving of the drive member from the first position to the second position is started by the supply power control means, power is supplied to the drive means from both the second power supply means and the third power supply means, and the first position The electric power is supplied from the second electric power supplying means to the driving means in a state where the driving member is driven between the second position and the second position. Thereby, the drive member can be driven from the first position to the second position, and the drive member can be held at the second position with less electric power than the electric power required for the driving, and the power consumption can be reduced. There is an effect.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the embodiments or the control examples described above, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the above-described embodiments or control examples, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of the embodiments or the control examples described above, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a player operates an operation unit (effect button or the like) to move an ornament from a standby position to a predetermined operation position ( For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-097827).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is operated by a player, a production means capable of executing a production, a specific production execution means for causing the production means to execute a specific production in a predetermined period. An operating means capable of operating, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operating means, a signal determining means for determining a signal output by the signal outputting means, and a predetermined A plurality of movable members that are movable in a movable range, and based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means when the specific effect is being executed, A movable means for moving at least one of the movable members, and an effect production period of the specific effect executed when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means within a specific passage period. Movable mode changing means for moving the movable mode of the movable member when the movable member moves, and the movable means for moving the movable member based on the signal determination means determining the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded. And a prohibition means for prohibiting.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the movable mode changing means, when the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means within the specific elapsed period, The plurality of movable members are moved by movable means to respective predetermined positions.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, in which the movable means does not discriminate a predetermined signal by the signal discriminating means even after a lapse of a predetermined period within a specific elapsed period. Based on this, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in which a determination means for performing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a specific determination result by the determination means are provided. Based on the determination, it has a privilege giving means for giving a beneficial benefit to the player, and the specific effect is a notification effect based on the judgment result by the judging means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, wherein the specific effect is that the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed time period has elapsed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the production means capable of executing the production, the specific production execution means for causing the production means to execute the specific production in a predetermined period, and the player can operate the production means. Movable operation means, a signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means, a signal determination means for determining a signal output by the signal output means, and a movable range within a predetermined movable range. At least one of the plurality of movable members that can be used, and at least one of the plurality of movable members based on the determination of the predetermined signal by the signal determination means when the specific effect is being executed. Movable means for moving the movable member, and movable when the performance elapsed period of the specific performance executed when the predetermined signal is determined by the signal determination means is within a specific elapsed period. Movable mode changing means for changing the movable mode of the movable member, and prohibition for prohibiting the movable means based on the signal determining means determining the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded. And means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable mode changing means outputs the predetermined signal to the signal determining means within the specific elapsed period. When determined, the plurality of movable members are moved by the movable means to the respective predetermined positions. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the movable means is predetermined by the signal determination means even if a predetermined period within a specific elapsed period elapses. Based on the fact that the signal is not discriminated, at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members is moved to a predetermined position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the benefit granting means that grants the advantageous benefit to the player based on the determination result determined by the determination means. The specific effect is that the notification effect is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the specific effect is executed by the notification effect within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed. It is what is done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
22 Frame buttons (operation means)
113 voice lamp control device (production execution means)

Claims (5)

Production means that can execute production,
A specific effect execution means for causing the effect means to execute a specific effect in a predetermined period,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal based on the operation of the operation means,
Signal discriminating means for discriminating the signal output by the signal output means,
A plurality of movable members capable of moving in a predetermined movable range,
Movable means for moving at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members based on the predetermined signal being discriminated by the signal discriminating means when the specific effect is being executed;
When the predetermined signal is discriminated by the signal discriminating means, the movable mode is changed so that the movable mode of the movable member that is moved when the effect elapsed period of the specific effect is within the specific elapsed period. Means and
A gaming machine comprising: a prohibiting means for prohibiting the movement by the movable means based on the signal discriminating means discriminating the predetermined signal when the specific elapsed time is exceeded.   The movable mode changing means moves the plurality of movable members to respective predetermined positions by the movable means when the predetermined signal is judged by the signal judging means within the specific lapse period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.   The movable means is configured such that at least one movable member of the plurality of movable members has a predetermined position based on the fact that the predetermined signal is not discriminated by the signal discriminating means even after a predetermined period of time within the specific elapsed period. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, which is movable. Determination means for performing determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition,
Based on the determination result is determined to be a specific determination result, a privilege granting unit for granting an advantageous privilege to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific effect is a notification effect that is executed based on a determination result by the determination means.   The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the specific effect is one in which the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period after the specific elapsed period has elapsed.

Images